2011 Warner Full-line Catalog
specialized tools for
Electrophysiology
& Cell Biology
Research
Planar Lipid Bilayer
Perfusion/Microfluidics
Oocyte Clamps
Patch Clamps
Microinjectors
Microincubators
Micromanipulators
Ussing/Diffusion Systems
Live Cell Imaging Chambers
Temperature Control Systems
Electroporation/Transfection
Electrophysiology
&
Cell Biology
Research
Call to receive other catalogs of interest
Animal,
Organ & Cell
Physiology
Behavioral
Research
Harvard
Apparatus
Pumps
Electroporation
&
Electrofusion
Molecular
Sample
Preparation
Welcome to the
NEW Electrophysiology &
Dear Researcher:
Warner Instruments is proud to introduce our new Electrophysiology & Cell Biology Catalog.
This catalog contains many new products for cell imaging, biosensing, microinjection, and
electrophysiology.
NEW Products Featured Include:
• PLI-100A Picoliter Microinjector - With three positive and two negative pressure capabilities,
the versatile PLI-100A is capable of large injections into capillaries or small injections into
mammalian nuclei.
• BioStat Multi-channel Potentiostat - The BioStat is a software-driven, multi-mode
potentiostat that can be used for measurement of pH, reactive oxygen species,
and nitric oxide.
• Compact Motorized Micromanipulator - Linear amplifiers, used to drive the stepper motors,
eliminate stray electromagnetic radiation; reducing noise and resulting in improved patch clamp
and electrophysiology performance.
• PFC-1 Proflow Chamber - Computer designed gaskets optimized for well-defined,
well-controlled shear-flow.
• RC-49FS Perfusion Chamber with Field Stimulation - Uses popular 18 mm round coverslip.
The low profile design allows for low entry angle patch electrodes.
• CL-200 Dual Channel Bipolar Temperature Controller - Single control temperature
adjustment, built-in protection for Peltier devices, open thermistor fault protection.
• New Zoom Stereo Microscopes - Versatile, high performance, ergonomically designed
microscopes, with multiple stand options.
• ProgRes® Microscope Cameras - These CMOS and CCD cameras are suitable for all contrast
methods in light microscopy, C-Mount and USB2.0/FireWire interfaces. All ProgRes® cameras
include CapturePro® image capture software.
Sincerely,
Ralph Abate
Business Manager, Warner Instruments
Cell Biology Research Catalog
NEW CL-200 Dual Channel Bipolar
Temperature Controller, p. 111
NEW RC-49FS Perfusion
Chamber with Field
Stimulation, p. 54
NEW PFC-1 Proflow
Chamber, p. 57
NEW BioStat
Multi-channel
Potentiostat, p. 372
NEW Compact Motorized
Micromanipulator, p. 297
NEW ProgRes®
Microscope
Cameras, p. 344
NEW PLI-100A Picoliter Microinjector, p. 278
See more NEW products on our website:
NEW New Zoom Stereo
Microscopes, p. 338
www.warneronline.com
warner instruments
Table of Contents
Chamber Section
5
Overview of Imaging Systems ..........................................................................6 - 7
Chamber Cross Reference Chart ......................................................................8 - 9
Warner Heating Overview ............................................................................10 - 11
Oocyte Chambers ............................................................................................12 - 13
RC Series Chambers - Legacy Design ........................................................14 - 15
Series 20 Chambers ........................................................................................16 - 40
Series 30 Chambers ........................................................................................41 - 44
CV-30 CytoViva™ Environmental Chamber ..........................................................45
Culture Dish Inserts ........................................................................................46 - 49
Series 40 Chambers
Quick Change Coverslip Bottom Imaging Chambers ....................................................50
Low Profile Chambers ....................................................................................................51
High Profile and Closed Bath Chambers ......................................................................52
Slotted Bath Low Profile Chambers ..............................................................................53
Perfusion Chamber with Field Stimulation ....................................................................54
Series 50 Chambers for Transepithelial Studies ......................................55 - 56
PFC-1 ProFlow Shear Flow Chamber ..................................................................57
YC-1 Flow Chamber for Yeast Cells ....................................................................58
Culture Dish Platforms
Classic Series 20 Platforms............................................................................................59
PM Series Heated Platforms with Magnetic Clamps ............................................60 - 61
Platform Accessories, Interface Cables, Thermistors....................................................62
Magnetic Clamp Kit for Series 20 Chambers, MCK-1 ..................................................63
Series 20 & 30 Stage Adapters ............................................................................69
Chamber Accessories
Coverslips ......................................................................................................................70
Slice Anchors for Series 20 and 40 Chambers ..............................................................71
Slice anchors ..................................................................................................................72
Slice Support with Nylon Grid ......................................................................................72
Nylon Mesh Kit ..............................................................................................................72
Replacement Suction and Perfusion Tubes ..................................................................73
Agar Bridge Reference Electrode Kit ............................................................................74
Mini Magnetic Clamps ..................................................................................................74
PE (Polyethylene) Tubing ................................................................................................75
Silicone Grease Kit ........................................................................................................75
Suction Tube Upgrade Kit for Series 20 ........................................................................75
Model MDA-1 Petri Dish Adapter with Clamp..............................................................76
Model MSC-1 Magnet Spring Clamp Set......................................................................76
Perfusion/Microfluidics Section
77
Syringe Pumps
Pump 11 Elite ..........................................................................................................78 - 79
PHD ULTRA™ Advanced Syringe Pump....................................................................80 - 83
PHYSIO 22 - Low EF Syringe Pump for Physiolgical Experiments ................................84
Peristaltic Pumps ............................................................................................85 - 87
Valve Control Systems
Pressurized Perfusion Kits VPP6 and VPP8 ....................................................................88
VC-8M, VC-8MLT, VC-8 & VC-8T Valve Control Systems ..............................................89
VC-6 & VC-6M Valve Control Systems ..................................................................90 - 91
VT-8 Valve Timer ............................................................................................................92
Valve Control Systems Parts and Accessories ..............................................................93
Fast-Step Systems ..........................................................................................94 - 96
Accessories
Syringe Holders, MSH & SH ..........................................................................................97
Constant Flow Syringes DN Series................................................................................98
Gas Bubble Manifold, GBM10 & GBM60 ......................................................................99
Tubing, connector Kits, Syringe Needles ....................................................................100
Manifolds and Control Hardware ML, MM, MP & MPP Series..................................101
Electrode/Manifold Holders MHH-25 & MHH-38 ......................................................102
Vacuum/Solution Flow Valves FR-50 & FR-55S ..........................................................102
Gas Controllers ............................................................................................103 - 104
Spill Sensor Systems..................................................................................105 - 106
Temperature Control Section
107
Controllers
Chamber System Temperature Controllers - TC-324B & TC-344B ....................108 - 109
Bipolar Temperature Controller, CL-100 ......................................................................110
Bipolar Temperature Controller CL-200........................................................................111
Model LCS-1 Liquid Cooling Systems..........................................................................112
Bipolar Temperature Controller, TC-202A ....................................................................113
Temperature Controller, TC-124A ................................................................................114
Dual Temperature Controller, TC-144 ..........................................................................115
Warmed Platforms, WP-10 & WP-16 ..........................................................................116
In-Line Solution Heaters ............................................................................117 - 120
Other Cooler/Warmers................................................................................121 - 122
Syringe Warmers ........................................................................................123 - 126
Accessories for Temperature Control Products ....................................127 - 129
Micro-Incubation Section
131
Okolab Microscope Incubators
2
Okolab Microscope Incubators ..........................................................................132 - 141
Cryo-Water-Jacketed CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator....................................142 - 147
CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator ........................................................................148 - 158
Okolab Gas Mixers
Two Gas Mixer 2GF_Mixer ..........................................................................................159
Digital Gas Mixer DGTCO2BX ............................................................................160 - 161
Microincubators
Culture Dish Heater, DH-35..........................................................................................162
Microincubator System for 35mm Cell Culture Dishes, DH-35i..................................163
Microincubator System, DH-40i ..................................................................................164
Model TB-3 CCD Thermal Insert for Prior Nano Z Stage ............................................165
Open Perfusion Microincubator, PDMI-2 ....................................................................166
Patch Slice Microincubator, PSMI................................................................................167
Model TB-3 CS Thermal Insert for Prior Nano Z Stage ..............................................168
Heated Platform for Chambered Slides, CSH-1 ..........................................................169
Microscope Stage Incubator, CSMI ............................................................................170
Accessories for PDMI-2, PSMI, CSMI & Leiden Chambers ........................................171
Culture Dish Platforms ..............................................................................172 - 174
Accessories for Warner Micro-Incubation Chambers ..................................175
Superfusion- Brain/Tissue Slice Chamber System ....................................176 - 178
Electrophysiology Equipment Section
179
Patch Clamp Equipment ............................................................................180 - 183
Bilayer Workstation
Complete Bilayer Workstation ....................................................................................184
Bilayer Workstation Component List ..........................................................................185
Bilayer Clamp Amplifier, BC-535 ........................................................................186 - 187
Faraday Cages, FC Series ............................................................................................188
Bilayer Chambers and Cuvettes, BCH-M13 & BCH-M22 ............................................189
Perfusion Model BCH-P Bilayer Chambers ..................................................................190
BPS-2 & LPF-8 Perfusion System for Bilayer ..............................................................191
LPF-8 Bessel Filter ........................................................................................................191
SUNStir-3 (SUNStir controller, SUN-1 lamp and and SPIN-2 stirplate) ............192 - 193
RAC-14 Instrument Rack ..............................................................................................194
BLM Starter Kit ............................................................................................................194
HST-1 MBB Head Stage Holder ..................................................................................194
BLM-TC Bilayer Thermocyler........................................................................................195
On Site Setup and Training ..........................................................................................195
Variable Channel, Model CM-3 ..................................................................................196
Fixed Channel, Model CM-3 ......................................................................................196
Stereo Zoom Microscope ............................................................................................197
Power Line Conditioner ................................................................................................197
Aquisition Hardware and Software ............................................................................198
Oocyte Clamps Amplifiers ........................................................................199 - 204
Amplifiers
Intracellular Electrometer ..................................................................................205 - 207
Differential Amplifiers ........................................................................................208 - 210
Low Pass Filters ..........................................................................................211 - 212
Ussing/Diffusion
Ussing Systems Introduction ..............................................................................213 - 215
U9500 & U2520 Ussing Chambers ....................................................................216 - 218
Self-Contained Ussing Chambers, U9926 & U2500 ..........................................219 - 220
Navicyte Diffusion and Ussing Systems ............................................................221 - 227
EasyMount Vertical Diffusion/Ussing Chamber Systems ..................................228 - 229
Epithelial Voltage Clamps, EC-800, EC-800LV & EC825A ..................................230 - 231
Multi-Channel Epithelial Voltage Clamps, VCC-MC ..........................................232 - 233
Single Channel Epithelial Voltage Clamp, VCC-600 ....................................................234
Input Manifolds and Dummy Membranes, DM MC6, EP MC6, DM660 & DM ..........235
Computer Controlled Multi-Clamp w/Software ..........................................................236
Data Acquisition & Analysis System ..........................................................................237
HAI-118 Data Acquisition & Analysis System ..................................................238 - 240
Vibration Isolation
BenchMate Series Vibration-Free Platforms ..............................................................241
Vibralite Breadboards ..................................................................................................242
Series Labmate Tables........................................................................................243 - 244
High Performance Lab Tables ............................................................................245 - 246
Stimulators....................................................................................................247 - 250
Neurolog™ System ......................................................................................251 - 272
Cell Biology Section
273
Microinjection
Introduction to Microinjection......................................................................................274
PLI-10 ............................................................................................................................275
PLI-100 ................................................................................................................276 - 277
PLI-100A ..............................................................................................................278 - 279
PLI-90 ............................................................................................................................280
PLI Injector Accessories ..............................................................................................281
PLS-1 Pico Injection/ Micromanipulation System ......................................................282
Air-1 Ultra Low Noise Air Compressor ........................................................................283
BH-2 Neurophore ..............................................................................................284 - 288
Nanoject II/Auto Nanoliter Injector ............................................................................289
Screw-Actuated Air Syringes ......................................................................................290
Screw-Actuated Micrometer Driven Hamilton Syringe ..............................................290
PM-8 & PM-4Multi-Port Pneumatic Injection System 4/8-Channel ..................291 - 292
Micropositioning
Micromanipulator Selection Guide ....................................................................293 - 294
Standard Manual Control Manipulators ......................................................................295
Dovetail Micromanipulators ........................................................................................296
SM-3 New High Resolutin Motorized Micromanipulator ..........................................297
Stardard Motorized Control Manipulators ..................................................................298
Control Units for Motorized Manipulators ..................................................................299
warner instruments
Model Z850 Stereo Zoom Microscope Series....................................................338 - 341
3025 Series Compound Microscope ............................................................................342
3032PH Inverted Phase Contrast Microscope ............................................................343
Cameras ......................................................................................................................
ProgRes Digital Microscope Cameras ..............................................................344 - 348
XYClone ..............................................................................................................349 - 352
Illuminators
Intralux 5100 Fiber optic Cold Halogen Light Sources ................................................353
V-Lux 1000 Fiber Optic Cold Light Source....................................................................354
NCL 150 Fiber optic Cold Light Source ........................................................................354
IntraLED 2020 Fiber optic Cold Light Source ..............................................................355
Light Source Filters ......................................................................................................355
Spare Lamps and Power Cords ....................................................................................356
Ring Light & Adapters ........................................................................................356 - 360
Gooseneck Lightguides and Filters ....................................................................361 - 362
Articulating Arm with Heavy Steel Base ....................................................................363
Modular Accessory System..........................................................................................363
Glass Light Fiber Backlights ........................................................................................364
Brightfield/Darkfield Base............................................................................................364
Micro-Incubation
Heated Culture Dish Platforms for 35 and 50 mm
Dishes, Heated Platform for Chambered Slides, CO2
Microscope Cage and Stage Incubators, Glass Bottom
Cell Culture Dishes, Brain Slice Chamber System
Electrophysiology Equipment
Patch Clamp Equipment, Bilayer Workstation,
Oocyte Clamps, Amplifiers, Low Pass Filters,
Neurolog™ System, Ussing/Diffusion, Stimulators
Coverglass ..............................................................................................................365
Cell Biology Tools
Biosensing Section
Microinjection, Micropositioning, Tissue Sampling,
Microelectrode Holders, Capillary Glass, Pipette Pullers
367
Nitric Oxide ..................................................................................................368 - 372
Dissolved Oxgyen Meter and Electrodes ..............................................373 - 374
Respirometry Systems ................................................................................375 - 383
Electrodes ....................................................................................................384 - 395
Electroporation Section
399
Decision Guide ......................................................................................................398
Cross Over Guide ..................................................................................................399
Optimization Guide......................................................................................400 - 401
Generators
ECM® 399 & PEP ..........................................................................................................402
ECM® 630 ....................................................................................................................403
ECM® 830 ....................................................................................................................404
ECM® 2001 ..................................................................................................................405
ECM® 830 High Throughput System ............................................................................406
ECM® 630 High Throughput System ............................................................................407
Generator Specifications ....................................................................................408 - 409
Enhancer 3000 ..............................................................................................................410
Cuvettes & Safety Stand..............................................................................................411
BTXpress™ High Performance Electroporation Solutions ..................................412 - 413
Specialty Electrodes
Genetrodes™ ..................................................................................................................414
Genepaddles™ ..............................................................................................................415
Tweezertrodes™ ............................................................................................................415
2 Needles Array™ ..........................................................................................................416
Caliper Electrodes ........................................................................................................416
Flatpack Chambers ......................................................................................................417
Flat Electrode................................................................................................................417
Petri Pulser™ ..................................................................................................................418
Petri Dish Electrode......................................................................................................418
Microslides ..................................................................................................................419
Meander Fusion Chamber ............................................................................................419
Platinum Needle L-Shaped Electrode ..........................................................................420
Petri Dish Platinum Electrode for Tissues....................................................................421
Petri Dish Platinum Electrode for Tissue Slices ..........................................................422
Warner Model Index
423 - 429
Order Number Index
430 - 438
Product Index
439 - 448
Microscopy
Stereo Zoom Microscopes, Microscope Cameras,
Cold Light Sources, LED and Halogen, Fiber Optic Ring
Lights and Light Guides, Laser Systems, Coverslips
Biosensing
Nitric Oxide Systems, Dissolved O2, Respirometry,
Electrodes
Electroporation
BTX Electroporation, Electrofusion, Transfection,
Transformation Solutions, Pulse Generators for In Vivo
Electroporation Systems, High Throughput Electroporation,
Monitoring Systems and Specialty Electrodes
Indexes
Warner Model Number Index
Ordering Number Index
Product Index
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Temperature
Control
Microscopes ................................................................................................................
MicroIncubation
Low Noise Temperature Controllers, In-Line Solution
Heaters and Coolers, Objective and Syringe Warmers,
Thermistors, Cables, and Accessories
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
339
Temperature Control
Cell Biology
Microscopy Section
Syringe & Peristaltic Pumps, Valve Control Systems,
Pressurized Perfusion, Fast-Step Perfusion Systems,
Gas Controllers, Spill Detection Systems & Accessories
Microscopy
Capillary Glass ............................................................................................324 - 330
Pipette Pullers..............................................................................................331 - 333
MF-5 & MG-5 Microforge-Grinding Center......................................................334
EMS Automatic Oscillating Tissue Slicer (OTS 5000)..........................335 - 336
Perfusion/Microfluidics
Biosensing
E Series Electrode Holders ................................................................................305 - 310
Q Series Electrode Holders ................................................................................311 - 315
ME Series Electrode Holders..............................................................................316 - 137
PE Series Electrode Holders ........................................................................................318
PE30W series holders 15 new models for patch perfusion ........................................319
MP Series Electrode Holders ......................................................................................320
MHH-25 & MHH-38 Holders ........................................................................................321
Theta Glass Electrode Holders ....................................................................................321
THP Pressurized Holder for Theta Glass ......................................................................322
Electrode Holders Replacement Parts..........................................................................323
Chambers for live cell microscopy, Series 20, 30, 40,
and 50. Culture Dish Inserts, Heated Platforms,
Stage Adapters and Chamber Accessories
Electroporation
Microelectrode Holders
Imaging and Recording Chambers
Indexes
Joystick Manipulator....................................................................................................300
Ultraprecise Micromanipulators ..................................................................................301
Microdrive Controller Type 864....................................................................................302
DC Microdrive Controller Type 864/1 ..........................................................................303
DC Microdrive Controller Type 864/2 ..........................................................................303
Magnetic Bases............................................................................................................304
Chambers
Table of Contents
3
customer information
Technical Support, Ordering, Payment,
Delivery, Terms and Conditions
Technical Support & Domestic Orders*
Warner Instruments
1125 Dixwell Avenue
Hamden, CT 06514 USA
phone
800.599.4203 (toll-free)
203.776.0664
fax
203.776.1278
e-mail
[email protected]
website
www.warneronline.com
Domestic Orders*
Harvard Apparatus
84 October Hill Road
Holliston, MA 01746-1388 USA
phone
800.272.2775 (toll-free)
508.893.8999
fax
508.429.5732
e-mail
[email protected]
website
www.harvardapparatus.com
* See inside back cover for distributors outside of the United States.
Payment Options
Purchase Order
Terms are net 30 for customers with
pre-approved credit.
Credit Card
Visa, MasterCard, American Express and Discover
are accepted.
Prepayment
To prepay, send check or money order with your purchase
order. Call Harvard Apparatus customer service in advance for
exact shipping charges or include your UPS or FedEx account
number. All checks should be made payable to Harvard
Apparatus, in U.S. Dollars and drawn on a U.S. bank.
Delivery Options
Shipping
Shipping charges are added to your invoice. Orders
ship UPS Ground service unless otherwise requested.
FOB Hamden, CT 06514
Terms and Conditions
Return Policy
If unsatisfied with a product purchased from Harvard
Apparatus you may return the item for credit or
replacement. You must contact us within thirty days of
receipt of your shipment to obtain a Return Authorization Number and
instructions to facilitate the return process. All returned products are
subject to inspection and approval by Harvard Apparatus prior to issuing
credit or replacement. Products must be in original manufacturer’s
packaging and include all instructions, manuals, and inserts. Products
returned in new condition will be charged a 15% restocking fee or a
minimum of $30.00. Products not in saleable condition will be returned
to the customer or assessed a refurbishment fee.
Harvard Apparatus will provide full credit for the following:
1. Items not supplied in accordance with your order.
2. Items that are defective at the time of receipt.
Returns not acceptable for credit include:
1. Items that have been customized
2. Items that are outdated, shelf-worn, damaged, or
used and therefore unsuitable for return to stock
for resale
3. Chemicals or sterile items that have been opened
4. Product(s) that have been exposed to harmful,
toxic or hazardous substances
Repairs
If your product is out of warranty but requires repair, you
must contact Harvard Apparatus and obtain a Return
Authorization Number and instructions to facilitate the
return process. All repairs are subject to the following:
1. Repair orders charged on a time and materials
basis
2. $150 per hour for labor with a $150 minimum
labor charge
3. All repairs are performed on a first in/first out
basis, only after receipt of a valid purchase order
4. Estimates available upon request
5. Some older products may not be repairable due
to component obsolescence
Minimum Orders
We appreciate all orders and therefore have no minimum order
requirement, however, a small handling fee of $10 will be added to
orders below $75.
© Copyright Harvard Apparatus. No part of this catalog may be reproduced in any form, by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying
or otherwise) without prior written permission of Harvard Apparatus. Harvard Apparatus reserves the right to discontinue any product in this
catalog at any time without prior notice. Not responsible for typographical errors relative to sizes, descriptions and/or pricing.
Note: Products in this catalog are for Research Use Only. Not for use on humans unless proper investigational device regulations have
been followed.
4
All Prices subject to change without notice. Prices are quoted in US dollars only, and are for shipment and use within the US only. Prices
listed do not include shipping charges. Shipping charges are prepaid and added to invoice at time of shipment.
Section
Page No.
Overview of Imaging Systems
6-7
Chamber Cross Reference Chart
8-9
Warner Heating Overview
10 - 11
Oocyte Chambers
12 - 13
RC Series Chambers - Legacy Design
14 - 15
Series 20 Chambers
16 - 40
Series 30 Chambers
Confocal Imaging Chambers, RC-30,
RC-30HV & RC-30WA
41 - 43
Low Profile, Parallel Plate Flow Chamber, RC-31
44
™
CV-30 CytoViva Environmental Chamber
45
Culture Dish Inserts
46 - 49
Series 40 Chambers
Quick Change Coverslip Bottom Imaging Chambers 50
Low Profile Chambers, RC-10, RC-11,
RC-13 & RC1-16
51
High Profile and Closed Bath Chambers,
RC-40-HP & RC-43C
52
Slotted Bath Low Profile Chambers, RC-46SLP,
RC-46SNLP & RC-47FSLP
53
Perfusion Chamber with Field Stimulation, RC-49FS 54
Series 50 Chambers for Transepithelial Studies
55 - 56
ProFlow Shear Flow Chamber, PFC-1
57
Flow Chamber for Yeast Cells, YC-1
58
Culture Dish Platforms
Classic Series 20 Platforms
59
PM Series Heated Platforms
with Magnetic Clamps
60 - 61
Platform Accessories, Interface Cables,
Thermistors
62
Magnetic Clamp Kit for Series 20 Chambers, MCK-1 63
Series 20 & 30 Stage Adapters
64 - 69
Chamber Accessories
Coverslips
70
Slice Anchors for Series 20 and 40 Chambers
71
Slice anchors
72
Slice Support with Nylon Grid
72
Nylon Mesh Kit
72
Replacement Suction and Perfusion Tubes
73
Agar Bridge Reference Electrode Kit
74
Mini Magnetic Clamps
74
PE (Polyethylene) Tubing
75
Silicone Grease Kit
75
Suction Tube Upgrade Kit for Series 20
75
Petri Dish Adapter with Clamp, MDA-1
76
Magnet Spring Clamp Set, MSC-1
76
Chambers
chambers
Oocyte Recording Chambers,
see page 12
Series 20 Chambers,
see page 16
JG-23 Ultra-quiet
Imaging Chamber,
see page 18
Series 30 Chambers,
see page 41
Series 40 Chambers,
see page 50
Series 50 Chambers,
see page 55
Series 20 & Series 30
Stage Adapters,
see page 64
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
5
an integrated
Chambers, Perfusion and Temperature Control
for Live Cell Imaging
Series 40 imaging
and recording
chambers
page 50
Chambers
Imaging and
Recording
Chambers
an integrated systems approach
2
1
Inline solution
heater and
coolers
page 117
Stage
Adapters
page 64
3
4
Temperature
Controller Cables
page 62
Typical, complete package
for use with 35 mm culture dishes and Warner
quick change chambers includes chamber,
temperature control, Inline solution
heater and stage adapter
5
Model
Temperature
Controllers
page 108
6
6
Product
1 RC-40LP
Quick Change Chamber 25 mm Low Profile
2 QE-1
Quick Exchange Heated Base
3 SA-NIK
Stage Adapter for 108 mm stage insert
4 SH-27B
Solution Heater
5 CC-28
6 TC-344B
Cable Assembly for Heater Platforms
7 VC-8
OW Series
8
TC-124
9 Spill Sensor
Dual Channel Heater Controller
Eight Channel Perfusion Valve Controller
Objective Warmer
Temperature Controller
Solution Leak Detector
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
an integrated systems approach
Perfusion
Systems,
page 89
Chambers
systems approach
7
Objective
Warmers,
page 122
8
Spill Sensors,
page 105
9
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
7
RC-20
RC-20H
RC-21B
RC-21BR
RC-21BRFS
RC-21BDW
RC-21BRW
RC-22
RC-22C
RC-24
RC-24E
RC-24N
RC-25
RC-25F
RC-26
RC-26G
RC-26GLP
RC-26GS
RC-26Z
RC-27
RC-27L
RC-27N
RC-27NE
RC-28
RC-29
RC-30
RC-30HV
RC-30WA
RC-31A
PFC-1
RC-50
RC-50-R3
RC-50-R15
JG-23N/HP
JG-23W/HP
JG-23W/LP
RC-27D
RC-27LD
YC-1
Series 20
Chambers
Series 30
Chambers
Series 50
Chambers
Ultra Quiet
Imaging
Chambers
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
basal
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
small
volume
(< 100 µl)
closed
bath
•
•
•
apical
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
medium
volume
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
large
volume
(> 300 µl)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
patch
studies
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
tissue
or slice
studies
•
oocyte
studies
•
•
•
•
epithelial
or ussing
studies
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
special
design
•
microincubation
chamber
system
35 mm
culture
dish
50 mm
culture
dish
•
•
field
stimulation
cross reference chart
open
bath
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
upright
microscopy
Chambers
8
P-1, PM-1
P-1, PM-1
P-1, PM-1
PM-7
PM-7D
P-5, PM-5
P-5, PM-5
P-2, PM-2
P-2, PM-2
P-2, PM-2
P-2, PM-2
P-2, PM-2
P-1, PM-1
P-1, PM-1
P-1, PM-1
P-1, PM-1
P-1, PM-1
P-3, PM-3
P-4, PM-4
P-1, PM-1
P-1, PM-1
P-1, PM-1
PM-8
P-1, PM-1
P-6, PM-6
P-6D, PM-6D
P-6, PM-6
P-6, PM-6
P-6, PM-6
P-6D, PM-6D
platforms
RC-1Z
RC-3Z
RC-10
RC-16
RC-40LP
RC-40HP
RC-41LP
RC-42LP
RC-43C
RC-46SLP
RC-46SNLP
RC-47FSLP
RC-48LP
RC-33DM
RC-33DL
RC-33SN
RC-33SL
RC-37W
RC-37WC
RC-37WS
RC-37F
RC-37FC
RC-37FS
RC-61T-01
RC-61T-02
RC-61T-03
RC-61T-04
RC-61T-05
RC-61T-06
QE-1
QE-2
DH-35
DH-35iL
DH-40iL
DH-50
Oocyte
Chambers
RC Series
Chambers
Quick
Coverslip
Exchange
Chambers
Culture Dish
Inserts
35 mm dishes
Culture Dish
Inserts
50 mm dishes
Culture Dish
Platforms
Micro-
incubation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
closed
bath
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
small
volume
(< 100 µl)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
medium
volume
•
•
•
•
•
large
volume
(> 300 µl)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
patch
studies
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
tissue
or slice
studies
•
•
•
•
•
•
oocyte
studies
epithelial
or ussing
studies
special
design
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
35 mm
culture
dish
•
•
50 mm
culture
dish
cross reference chart
microincubation
chamber
system
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
upright
microscopy
Chambers
field
stimulation
platforms
QE-1
QE-1
QE-1
QE-1
QE-1
QE-1
QE-1
QE-1
QE-1
Subhead
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
open
bath
Product name
9
chamber heating
Heating of Warner Imaging and Recording Chambers
Application Fundamentals
Chambers
Why Heat?
chamber heating
Researchers have long understood the importance of temperature regulation in the study of cellular function.
For example, a recent PubMed search using the keywords “temperature” and “cell” produced over 29,000
references since 1995, most addressing the effect of temperature on the biophysical and metabolic function of
cells. In addition, the performance of imaging system optics is exquisitely sensitive to variations in
temperature as revealed by a shifting focal plane as the temperature of the objective changes. Therefore, for
the scientist studying cellular function in an imaging and recording environment, the importance of tight
thermal control cannot be overstated.
A number of issues confront the researcher attempting to control cellular temperature. These include
maintaining a constant and uniform bath temperature under various flow rates and controlling for changes in
the ambient temperature of the environment. In addition, effects resulting from the introduction of cold drugs
or solution to the perfusion path, and heat sinks due to microscope optics and stage adapters must be
addressed.
General Issues
Sources of Heat Flux
Heat flux pathways can be generally characterized as either conductive,
convective, or radiative. Traditionally, the greatest effort is directed
towards controlling conductive pathways, followed by convective
pathways. We define a conduction heat pathway as one wherein heat
energy is transmitted through a continuous intervening material. These
include the microscope stage or objective, the perfusion solution, the
chamber platform and other physical elements of the working
environment. Heat flux through convective pathways are generally less
significant but include evaporation or condensation and heat transfer due
to the movement of air across the imaging chamber. Radiative pathways
are, in general, easily controlled and will only be briefly considered here.
Space and Time Considerations in
Uneven Heat Conduction
We first consider sources of uneven heat distribution in the spatial
regime. These include poor heat conduction across the chamber bath or
from the platform to the chamber. Poor heat conduction across the bath is
manifest as a temperature gradient within the bathing solution. A
gradient of this type is often induced by an immersion objective placed in
direct apposition (either above or below) to the sample. Heat flux through
this pathway can be significant, resulting in as much as a 10˚C
temperature change within 3-5 mm. Another, less dramatic, temperature
gradient can be generated in the bath by restricting the application of
heat to just the chamber platform. Since the platform applies heat only
along the edge of a chamber, a temperature gradient will be established
due to the heat capacity of water coupled with flow of relatively cold
solution into the chamber.
Uneven heating in the temporal regime can be generated by varying the
rate at which cool perfusion solution is introduced into a heated platform,
or by introducing drugs or solution (into the perfusion path) at a
temperature different than that currently being perfused. These
considerations will be addressed in greater detail below.
Outgassing
Another significant issue related to the application of heat to perfusion
solutions is termed outgassing. Under standard conditions, atmospheric
gas in contact with a liquid solubilizes into solution and tends towards an
10
equilibrium determined in part by the gasses partial pressure and the
temperature of the liquid. Generally speaking, cold liquids are capable of
solubilizing a greater volume of gas than a warm liquid. Therefore, as the
temperature of a liquid increases, dissolved gasses come out of solution
resulting in the appearance of bubbles.
Heating Methods
A number of approaches are used by investigators to regulate the
temperature of a sample under study. These include warming the
chamber platform and/or microscope objective using resistive, Peltier, or
liquid based application devices, channeling warm air across the imaging
chamber and/or optical components, and regulating the temperature of
the perfusing solution. Techniques for regulating the temperature of
perfusates include preheating the solution reservoir and/or using an inline
solution heater in the perfusion pathway. Each strategy has its strengths
and weaknesses and are discussed below.
How Temperature is Sensed
In general, temperature is measured using a thermistor or similar device
and fed back into a temperature controller which adjusts power to the
heating element. When regulating temperature it is important to account
for the response time of the feedback loop since this can cause the
system to oscillate.
Control and Regulation
Warner Instruments temperature controllers utilizes two thermistors per
channel to provide monitoring and feedback information to the controller.
One thermistor is placed within the heated element (e.g., chamber
platform, in-line heater, etc.) to measure the temperature of the heater
block. Information from this thermistor is fed back to the control
mechanism which applies sufficient power to the heater to maintain the
controller set point.
The second thermistor is usually placed in the solution path close to the
sample and measures the temperature at the sample. Information from
this thermistor is used by the researcher to adjust the set point of the
controller and to monitor the performance of the system.
This approach is very effective in providing tight thermal control (± 0.1 C)
of the heating element, and consequently the perfusion solution, as long
as the feedback loop is sufficiently optimized. Warner Instrument
temperature controllers are provided with user selectable feedback
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
chamber heating
Heating of Warner Imaging and Recording Chambers
Methodology
In-line Solution Heating
The simplest and most direct approach for the application of heat to a
sample is to preheat the solution immediately prior to its delivery to the
chamber. The warmed perfusate washes over the sample and maintains a
uniform temperature at the sample, even with variable flow rates. This
method works well as long as solution continues to flow through the
heater into the chamber.
A number of considerations are important when using this approach. First,
it is important to minimize the distance between the heater and chamber.
If too much heat is lost en route, the user can attempt to raise the heater
controller set point above the boiling point of the solution. In addition,
variations in the flow rate can change the quantity of heat lost as the
solution moves from heater to chamber.
Chamber Platform Heating
Another strategy is to heat the chamber platform. This is usually achieved
by using a resistive element and this approach is provided for in Warner
chambers. A slightly more sophisticated tactic would be to supply heat to
the platform using either a Peltier or liquid based heating element.
Regardless of the method employed, this strategy is best suited for
conditions where the solution flow rate is extremely slow or nonexistent.
A number of considerations are important when using this approach. First,
the perfusing solution receives heat energy only after entering the
chamber, possibly generating a temperature gradient within the bath.
Second, since the platform applies heat only to the edges of the chamber,
the rate of transfer to the solution is slow. However, this approach excels
for conditions where solution flow is nonexistent, such as maintaining a
constant temperature while loading cells with indicator dyes.
In all cases, it is recommended that the chamber platform be thermally
isolated from the microscope stage as this can be a significant heat sink,
second only to the microscope objective. This is most readily achieved by
the use of a plastic stage adapter. While the primary purpose of a stage
adapter is to mate a platform to the specific microscope stage, the plastic
material used can also provide the desired thermal isolation.
Solution Reservoir Heating
Heating the solution reservoir is not generally considered a successful
strategy for maintaining temperature in the bath since most, if not all, of
the heat energy is lost en route to the chamber. However, this technique
is important if outgassing of solutions is a problem. Since the gas load of
a solution is dependent on partial pressure and temperature, preheating
the solution at atmospheric pressure before delivery to the final heater
will minimize the occurrence of bubbles in the bath, even if the solution
cools en route. Therefore, solution reservoir heating is best used in
combination with other heating techniques as described below.
Microscope Objective Heating
While necessary, the use of immersion objectives in imaging presents a
difficult problem for the researcher attempting to maintain temperature at
the sample. Since the objective is in direct contact with the solution or
the chamber, and is placed immediately above or below the sample, it
presents a significant conduction pathway within the system.
Heated objective collars are commercially available and are designed to
minimize heat flux through the optics. However, many researchers
indicate that small variations in temperature, as the collar cycles off and
on, induces an oscillating shift in the focus plane. Warner Instruments
has an objective warmer which specifically addresses this issue. The
heated collar does not come into direct contact with the objective but
instead relies on a slower radiative heat transfer between the heater and
the objective. The capacitive thermal properties of the intervening air,
coupled with tight heating control by the temperature controller, removes
any abrupt changes in the temperature of the objective and stabilizes the
system against shifts in the focal plane.
As a final note, many researchers have expressed concerns about deep
thermal cycling an objective between uses. Some investigators have
addressed this issue by maintaining the objective warmer, and hence the
objective, at a constant temperature, even when not in use.
chamber heating
response time constants allowing the instrument to accommodate
different operating conditions
Chambers
Application Fundamentals (continued)
Heated Enclosures
Another strategy currently in use is to encase the imaging chamber and
microscope optics within a heated enclosure. The main advantage of this
approach is that both the chamber and objective are maintained at a
stable and uniform temperature. Heat is usually applied to the
environment by the introduction of warmed air to the enclosure. Some
disadvantages are slow responses to changes in the thermal set point,
possible introduction of airborne contaminates from the blower system,
and the requirement for bulky equipment on or about the imaging system.
Discussion
Each heating strategy discussed above has strengths and weaknesses
making it an incomplete solution for issues encountered with heating.
However, most experimental difficulties can be solved by using these
strategies in combination.
For example, platform heating alone is not sufficient to stably heat a
perfusing solution, but is necessary if solution flow is to be interrupted
for any reason. In addition, the most effective method of heating a
perfusion solution is via an in-line heater. Therefore, an optimal
combination for experiments where tight thermal control is desired under
variable, very slow, or interrupted flow conditions would be a
combination of in-line and platform heating.
If solutions are stored cold and used before reaching operating
temperature, or if the temperature is changed during an experiment, then
outgassing at the sample can be a problem. This is addressed by
including reservoir preheating in the experimental setup. However,
reservoir heating is unable to supply heated solutions to the chamber and
is best used in combination with an in-line solution heater.
Finally, recall that an objective warmer reduces the thermal gradient
between the microscope and sample. This, in turn, increases the
efficiency of any heating method employed. Of course, all described
approaches can be used in combination to provide efficient thermal
regulation under virtually any condition.
Warner Instruments provides high quality single and dual channel
temperature controllers, solution reservoir heaters, chamber platform
heaters, in-line solution heaters, stage adapters, and the aforementioned
objective warmer. We invite you to call our technical support staff and
we will be glad to aid you in determining the best application of these
heating strategies to your experimental setup.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
11
RC-1Z
oocyte chambers
Oocyte Recording Chamber
Chambers
A simple, low cost oocyte perfusion chamber
RC-1Z
Top View
RC-1Z
oocyte chambers
Agar Bridge
Well
Suction
Tube
Perfusion
Inlet
Suction
Reservoir
Oocyte Wells
• Specially designed for oocyte studies
• Unique slotted bath
• Dimpled bottom aids oocyte impalement
The RC-1Z chamber features a unique slot-shaped bath for applications
requiring rapid perfusion.
Bath
Specifications
Material
Polycarbonate
Footprint (L x W)
7.7 x 5.1 cm
Bath Dimensions
(L x W x H)
25 x 3.5 x 2.5 mm
Volume, by Depth
85 µl/mm
Chamber Floor Insert
25 x 75 x 3 mm, polycarbonate
The chamber is constructed using a two-piece design. The top piece
forms the chamber body and contains a solution aspiration reservoir. An
agar bridge well with connecting channel to the input side of the bath is
also provided. An isolated well is provided on the downstream side of the
bath, however, most users place the sense electrode directly into the
suction well.
Input Tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Aspirator Coupling
1.67 mm OD
The bottom piece forms the floor of the chamber and houses the oocyte
work area. To aid in securing the oocyte into position during impalement,
the chamber bottom has three dimples with dimple diameters: 0.8, 1.0,
and 1.2 mm. Three grooves milled into the chamber bottom (parallel to
the direction of solution flow) aid in bathing the bottom side of the oocyte
during perfusion.
Optional Accessories
Solutions are removed from the suction well via an adjustable suction
tube and bath solution height is adjusted by raising or lowering the
suction tube. The perfusion input accepts standard 1/16" OD (PE-160)
polyethylene tubing.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0318
RC-1Z
Oocyte Chamber
W4 64-1586
BPM-1
Base Plate Magnetic Steel
W4 64-0206
MP-2
Perfusion Manifold, 2 Inputs
W4 64-0207
MP-3
Perfusion Manifold, 3 Inputs
W4 64-0208
MP-4
Perfusion Manifold, 4 Inputs
W4 64-0209
MP-5
Perfusion Manifold, 5 Inputs
W4 64-0210
MP-6
Perfusion Manifold, 6 Inputs
W4 64-0211
MP-8
Perfusion Manifold, 8 Inputs
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
Each chamber includes 10 feet of polyethylene (PE-160) tubing.
12
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC-3Z
oocyte chambers
Oocyte Recording Chamber
RC-3Z
Top View
Perfusion
Inlets
Agar Bridge Wells
Screw Holes
to Attach
Headstage
Wide
Bath
oocyte chambers
RC-3Z Chamber
shown with the
Warner 7251 I
Bath Clamp
Headstage
RC-3Z
Chambers
A simple, low-cost chamber for studies of oocytes and other large cell structures
Narrow
Bath
Suction Reservoir
Suction Tube
• Specially designed for oocyte studies
• Features two slot-shaped bath wells
• Allows fast solution exchange and easy cell
access
• Adjustable solution height
The RC-3Z features two slotted bath wells; a narrow bath for applications
requiring rapid solution exchange, and a wider bath allowing good
electrode access. The chamber is constructed using a two-piece design.
The top piece forms the chamber body and contains a solution aspiration
reservoir. The bottom piece forms the floor of the chamber and houses the
oocyte work area. An agar bridge well with connecting channel to the
input side of the bath is also provided. An isolated well is provided on the
downstream side of the bath, however, most users place the sense
electrode directly into the suction well.
The perfusion inputs accept standard polyethylene tubing (PE-160).
Solutions are removed from the suction well via an adjustable suction
tube and solution height is set by raising or lowering this suction tube.
The suction tube out-port connects to 1.67 mm ID tubing. Threaded holes
are incorporated in the chamber body for mounting of the OC-725C
bath headstage.
Each chamber includes 10 feet of polyethylene (PE-160) tubing.
Specifications
BPM-1
Steel Base Plate
BPM-1 shown with components
of our TEV-700 Oocyte voltage
clamp workstation
This solid steel plate provides
a stable platform for mounting
micromanipulators mounted on
magnetic bases. A highly
durable powder coating applied
to the surface makes it impervious to most common spills in the lab.
Specifications
Dimensions
30.5 x 61.0 x 0.95 cm (12 x 24 x 3/8 inch)
Weight:
14.06 kg (31 lb)
Order #
Model
W4 64-0319 RC-3Z
Product
Oocyte Chamber
Optional Accessories
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-1586 BPM-1
Base Plate Magnetic Steel
Chamber material
Polycarbonate
W4 64-0206 MP-2
Perfusion Manifold, 2 Inputs
Footprint (L x W)
13 x 7.7 cm (5.1 x 3 in)
W4 64-0207 MP-3
Perfusion Manifold, 3 Inputs
Chamber floor insert (L x W x H)
75 x 25 x 1 mm, polycarbonate
W4 64-0208 MP-4
Perfusion Manifold, 4 Inputs
Narrow bath dimension (L x W x H)
27 x 3.2 x 3.2 mm
W4 64-0209 MP-5
Perfusion Manifold, 5 Inputs
Narrow bath volume, by depth
85 µl/mm
W4 64-0210 MP-6
Perfusion Manifold, 6 Inputs
Wide bath dimension (L x W x H)
27 x 6.3 x 3.2 mm
W4 64-0211 MP-8
Perfusion Manifold, 8 Inputs
Wide bath volume, by depth
170 µl/mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
13
RC series-legacy design
RC-10, RC-11, RC-13 and RC-16
RC Series Recording Chambers
Chambers
Legacy, large bath chambers suitable for oocyte studies
RC-10
RC-11
RC-13
RC-16
RC-10
Top View
RC series chambers- legacy design
These chambers are open bath chambers suitable for physiological
experiments performed with inverted or dissecting microscopes, including
patch and oocyte recording, isolated perfused tubule, and cell impalement
studies. RC chambers have also been used with fluorescence microscopy.
Side View
RC Series chambers are made from polycarbonate. A #2 thickness
coverslip (24 x 60 mm, user attached) becomes the floor of the bath. The
coverslip can be attached with vacuum grease or more permanently with
Sylgard or RTV cement. Models vary in bath diameter.
Solution can be introduced via gravity-feed and removed via suction, or
alternatively, input and output can be pump-controlled. Flow rates can
exceed 10 ml/min with gravity feed. The perfusion input accepts standard
1.57 mm OD polyethylene tubing (PE-160). Solutions are removed from a
separate suction reservoir to minimize noise in the recording chamber.
The suction tube height is adjustable to control the bath solution level.
RC-11
RC-13
RC-16
Top View
Multiple perfusion lines can be connected using an MP series manifold,
see page 101, in place of the single-line connector supplied with the
chamber. An isolated reservoir is provided for an agar bridge in the
recording ground circuit.
RC-10
This small chamber with 10 mm diameter bath is recommended where
small volumes and fast solution exchange is important. Bath volume is
160 µl at 2 mm solution height. A single agar bridge well is supplied.
RC-11: A=11 mm, Vol.= 190 µl
RC-13: A=13 mm, Vol.= 260 µl
RC-16: A=16 mm, Vol.= 400 µl
Side View
RC-11, RC-13 and RC-16
These larger bath chambers are used for studies of slices, oocytes, or
other large preparations. Models RC-13 and RC-16 may also be used
in patch clamp experiments where cultured coverslips are placed in the
chamber.* The RC-13 accepts 12 mm diameter coverslips and the RC-16
accepts 15 mm diameter coverslips. A groove is milled in the chamber
underside to hold the coverslip in place.
* Note: The double thickness of glass (bottom + sample coverslips) may
not be compatible with some short working distance microscope
objectives.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0306
RC-10
Open Bath Chamber/10 mm Bath
W4 64-0307
RC-11
Open Bath Chamber/11 mm Bath
W4 64-0308
RC-13
Open Bath Chamber/13 mm Bath
W4 64-0309
RC-16
Open Bath Chamber/16 mm Bath
Mounting the Chamber
RC Series chambers are mounted onto a microscope using one of the
stage adapters on the following page. Each chamber is supplied with one
single input perfusion connector, one suction tube and one package of
#2 coverslips (24 x 60 mm). See page 70 for additional coverslips.
14
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC series-legacy design
RC Series Stage Adapters
CB-10
CB-20
Chambers
Top View
7.8 cm
8.9 cm
3.2 mm
RC series chambers- legacy design
RC-13 with CB-2N Stage Adapter
Chamber Cut-Out
for RC-11/13/16
16.5 cm
Side View
RC Series stage adapter bases are made for a variety of microscopes.
Standard models fit the most commonly used stage on the microscope
model cited. However, microscopes are often fitted with optional or
special purpose stages. Refer to the outline drawings to determine the
correct adapter for your microscope. Modified or special size adapters
can be ordered, call our technical support department for details.
Material is polycarbonate.
Order #
Model
CB-2LZ
Top View
Chamber Cut-Out
for RC-11/13/16
Product
10 cm
RC-10 Adapters
W4 64-0311
CB-1N
Nikon for Diaphot/TE200/TE300
W4 64-0312
CB-10
Olympus for IMT
W4 64-0313
CB-10/2
Olympus for IMT-2/IX-50/IX-70
16.5 cm
RC-11/13/16 Adapters
Side View
W4 64-0314
CB-2N
Nikon for Diaphot/TE200/TE300
W4 64-0315
CB-20
Olympus for IMT
W4 64-0316
CB-20/2
Olympus for IMT-2/IX-50/IX-70
W4 64-0317
CB-2LZ
Zeiss for Axiovert
3.2 mm
6.4 mm
CB-1N
CB-2N
CB-10/2
CB-20/2
Top View
Chamber Cut-Out
for RC-10
“A” Dimension
CB-1N: 10.8 cm
CB-2N: 10.8 cm
CB-10/2: 11.0 cm
CB-20/2: 11.0 cm
“A”
3.2 mm
Side View
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
15
series 20 chambers
Series 20 Perfusion Chambers for Imaging and Recording
General Information
Chambers
Series 20 Chamber,
Platform and
Stage Adapter
Assembly of Chamber
series 20 chambers
The chamber is prepared by applying a thin layer of vacuum grease to the
chamber bottom. The sample coverslip (sample side up) is then attached
to the chamber. This assembly is then placed in the platform and clamped
to provide a seal between coverslip and chamber. Mounting on the
microscope is done with the appropriate stage adapter. The installation is
completed by connecting the perfusion lines and any heater cabling
required. Assembly of the closed type chambers includes installation of
the top coverslip which precedes the steps outlined above.
Modular Design
Series 20 chambers are a family of models designed to fill a large number
of imaging and recording needs. The modular design of Series 20
chambers consists of two parts; a polycarbonate chamber (insert) and an
aluminum platform (holder). The platform clamps onto the chamber
providing a seal between the chamber and coverslip. Platforms come in
both heater and non-heater styles and heater platforms are used where
chamber warming is required. The platform design allows quick removal
of the chamber for exchange of the coverslip. A variety of bath sizes and
shapes are offered to provide a ready solution to many research
requirements. Most models are stocked in depth for fast delivery.
Single Coverslip Design
A common feature of Series 20 chambers is the use of a disposable
coverslip as the bottom or floor of the chamber. In many cases, this same
coverslip will contain the cells to be studied. Thus, when used with an
inverted microscope, the image is viewed through a single coverslip
(#1 thickness, nominally 0.15 mm).
Laminar Flow-Fast Exchange
A diamond-shape bath is incorporated into many Series 20 chambers
(models thru RC-26) to provide linear solution flow. Studies performed at
both Yale and Stanford Universities have shown that this shape produces
a laminar flow across the bath. The general shape is shown on p. x and
specific dimensions are provided in each chamber specification. In
general, the lower the ratio of bath width (W) to bath length (L), the
better the flow characteristics. Models with small bath volumes can have
exchange times measured in seconds even with flow rates less than 1
ml/min. Larger models, starting with the RC-27, use a slotted bath shape.
These chambers are designed for slice studies and other applications
requiring a larger volume bath.
Chamber Materials
In addition to the traditional polycarbonate construction of Series 20
chambers, Warner now provides select chambers fabricated in
polysulfone and silicone. This polysulfone has the same high-quality
machining characteristics as polycarbonate but is more resistant to
solvents, and more importantly, is autoclavable.
16
Perfusing the Chambers
Perfusion can be via a pump-driven or gravity-fed system. Flow
rates of 10 ml/min or greater are possible but flows of 0.5 to 5
ml/min are the norm. Standard polyethylene tubing (PE-160 or
equivalent) inserts directly into the input port. Solutions are
removed by suction using either a vacuum source or pump. Open
bath chambers are equipped with an adjustable stainless steel
suction tube for solution height control. Multiple perfusion lines can
be connected to these chambers using an MP or MPP Series
manifold, see page 101.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 20 chambers
Series 20 Perfusion Chambers for Imaging and Recording
RC-21B with
P-2 Platform
RC-24E with
P-1 Platform
RC-21BRFS with
P-2 Platform
RC-22C with
P-1 Platform
RC-27L with
PH-6D Platform
RC-26 w/Slice Anchor
with P-1 Platform
RC-25F with
P-3 Platform
Closed Bath Design
Open Bath Design
Series 20 Closed Bath Chambers use coverslips at both the top and
bottom to enclose the bath area. The closed bath promotes a uniform
solution exchange and eliminates changes in focus due to alterations in
bath height. In addition, studies involving physiological bicarbonate
buffers can be performed with no gas loss at the chamber interface.
Closed chambers have been used in fluorescent, calcium and time-lapse
imaging studies.
Open bath models are designed for electrophysiological recording and/or
optical imaging, and are used in applications including patch clamp,
oocyte clamp, and physiological measurements on cell cultures and tissue
preparations. The low profile design permits good electrode access to the
bath. Agar bridge wells for reference electrodes are provided.
series 20 chambers
RC-20 with
P-5 Platform
Chambers
General Information (continued)
Laminar Flow Geometry
aspiration
tube clamp
L
W
Perfusion Flow
All Series 20 chambers equipped with a stainless steel suction tube now
include a suction tube clamp. This insures the adjustable tube will not move
once the solution height is set.
polysulfone material
autoclaveable
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
17
JG-23
series 20 chambers
Ultra-quiet Imaging Chamber for Biological Specimens
Chambers
Sloped inflow allows for a smooth delivery of solution to the chamber
JG-23
Perfusion Inlet
Suction Outlet
series 20 chambers
• Eliminates vibration associated with solution
exchange
• Incorporates Warner’s diamond fluidics
• Multiplexes solution delivery without switching
artifacts
The JG-23 has been designed especially for researchers planning multiple
solution changes while attempting to maintain a tight optical focus on the
specimen during an experiment. The design of this chamber eliminates
vibrations associated with solution delivery that could cause specimens or
optical fields to fluctuate during recordings.
The JG-23 Series chambers incorporate the same advanced design as the
Series 20 diamond shaped chambers. A large imaging field allows for
maximal observation of biological specimens with the addition of a
sloped input. The advantage of this system over other chambers is the
addition of a sloped inflow which allows for a smooth and “ultra-quiet”
delivery of solution to the chamber.
The sloped input allows I-V type infusion lines to be used that can deliver
fixed drops per sec to the chamber without the introduction of noise to
the specimen field. In addition, multiplexed solution delivery is possible
without solution switching artifacts.
Using the JG-23 chamber this image
of an isolated colonic crypt was
acquired on a Zeiss spinning disk
confocal. The crypt was loaded with
BCECF to measure intracellular pH.
Image courtesy of John Geibel.
JG-23N/HP
Volume:
128 µl*
6.3 mm
21 mm
4 mm
Bath Dimensions
JG-23W/HP
Volume:
238 µl*
15.2 mm
24 mm
4 mm
Each chamber includes two magnetic plates, a magnetic perfusion tube
holder, one pack of #1 thickness coverslips (CS-22/50, 22x50 mm,
85/pkg), and 10 ft of polyethylene (PE-160) tubing.
*Volumes are for 1 mm solution height
All chambers use a 22 x 50 mm coverslip
Slice anchors are available for both the JG-23W/HP and JG-23W/LP.
See page 71 for details.
Order #
Model
Product
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1486 JG-23N/HP
Ultra-quiet Chamber
High Profile, Narrow Bath
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0277 P-1
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-1487 JG-23W/HP
Ultra-quiet Chamber
High Profile, Wide Bath
W4 64-0284 PH-1
Platform, heated
W4 64-1488 JG-23W/LP
Ultra-quiet Chamber
Low Profile, Wide Bath
W4 64-1526 PM-1
Platform, heated magnetic
W4 64-0253 SHD-26GH/10 Slice Anchor for RC-26G (1.0 mm)
W4 64-0254 SHD-26GH/15 Slice Anchor for RC-26G (1.5 mm)
W4 64-0255 SHD-26GH/20 Slice Anchor for RC-26G (2 mm)
18
W4 64-0708 CS-22/50
Coverslips, 22 x 50 mm
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 20 chambers
RC-20 and RC-20H
RC-20
RC-20H
RC-20
RC-20H
Top View
CR-15
Side View
• Closed bath design
• Our smallest volume, closed bath chambers
• Ideal for fluorescent, calcium, and time-lapse
imaging studies
The RC-20 and RC-20H are very small volume imaging chambers featuring
fast perfusion exchange and short working distance. The smaller and
narrower RC-20 insures linear solution flow and fast exchange while the
RC-20H features a larger viewing area. An access port (Hamilton syringe
compatible)* at the bath input may be used to inject substances into the
solution flow or to remove gas bubbles.
Bath Dimensions
Order #
Model
Product
Two 15 mm round coverslips enclose the bath. The distance between the
top and bottom coverslips is 1 mm. The top coverslip is secured into place
with a retainer ring.
W4 64-0222 RC-20
Small Volume Imaging Chamber
W4 64-0223 RC-20H
Small Volume Imaging Chamber
W4 64-0281 P-5
Platform, non-heated
Studies involving physiological bicarbonate buffers can be performed with
these chambers with no gas loss at the chamber interface. In addition,
the closed design allows the use of permeable supports. With laminar
flow, minimal distortion of the sample will occur during perfusion.
W4 64-0288 PH-5
Platform, heated
W4 64-1564 PM-5
Platform, heated magnetic
RC-20 and RC-20H chambers require a platform (P-5, PH-5, or PM-5) and
stage adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-15R, 15 mm diameter, 100/pkg), 10 feet of PE-160 tubing, and a
CR-15 top coverslip retaining ring.
* 25 gauge (0.45 mm OD) needle
Specifications
RC-20
RC-20H
Material
Polycarbonate
Polycarbonate
Bath dimensions (L x W)
11.5 x 6.3 mm
12.5 x 10 mm
48 µl
90 µl
Top coverglass
15 mm round
15 mm round
Bottom coverglass
15 mm round
15 mm round
Injection port (ID x OD)
0.56 x 0.91 mm,
stainless steel
0.56 x 0.91 mm,
stainless steel
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
Output tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
Volume, by depth
series 20 chambers
Polycarbonate chambers featuring fast solution exchange and linear solution flow
Chambers
Small Volume Closed Bath Imaging Chambers
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0703 CS-15R
Coverslips, 15 mm
W4 64-0276 CR-15
Replacement Coverslip Retainer
W4 64-0274 RH-2
Heater Elements (2) for
PH (Heater) Platforms with
Mounting Pads and Screws
W4 64-0273 SS-3
Slice Support for
RC-27L and RC-29
W4 64-0271 TS-30G
Glass Thermistor
(Alternate to TS-70B)
W4 64-0269 TS-60P
Probe Thermistor for CC-28 Cable
W4 64-0270 TS-70B
Bead Thermistor for CC-28 Cable
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
19
series 20 chambers
RC-21B and RC-21BR
Large Closed Diamond Bath
Chambers
Large viewing area and good access for microscope objectives
RC-21B
RC-21BR
RC-21B
RC-21BR
Top View
series 20 chambers
Side View
• Closed bath design
• Diamond fluidics
• Ideal for fluorescent, calcium, and time-lapse
imaging studies
• Uses 22 mm square or 25 mm round coverslips
• Large optical imaging area
• Good access for upright or inverted microscopes
The RC-21B and RC-21BR chambers feature a closed bath, short working
distance, and linear solution flow. Separation between the top and
bottom coverslip is 2.5 mm and total bath volume is 358 µl. At the bath
output, a length of tubing is used as a back pressure control to insure
smooth flow. An additional stainless steel port at the bath input fits a
standard Hamilton microliter syringe.* This port is useful for injecting
substances or for removing air bubbles from the sealed chamber.
Studies involving physiological bicarbonate buffers can be performed with
these chambers with no gas loss at the chamber interface. With laminar
flow, minimal distortion of the sample occurs during perfusion.
RC-21B and RC-21BR chambers require a platform (P-2, PH-2, or PM-2)
and stage adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a
microscope.
Bath Dimensions
Specifications
RC-21B
RC-21BR
Material
Polycarbonate
or polysulfone*
Polycarbonate
or polysulfone*
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
17 x 13 x 2.5 mm
17 x 13 x 2.5 mm
358 µl
358 µl
22 mm square
25 mm round
Volume
Top coverglass
Bottom coverglass
22 mm square
25 mm round
Injection port (ID x OD)
0.56 x 0.91 mm,
stainless steel
0.56 x 0.91 mm,
stainless steel
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
Output tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-22S and CS-25R, respectively, 100/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160
polyethylene tubing.
* Please call for price and availability of polysulfone chambers.
* 25 gauge (0.45 mm OD) needle
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0224
RC-21B
Large Bath Imaging Chamber
W4 64-0225
RC-21BR
Large Bath Imaging Chamber
W4 64-0278
P-2
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0285
PH-2
Platform, heated
W4 64-1561
PM-2
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
20
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0704
CS-22S
Coverslips, 22 mm, square
W4 64-0705
CS-25R
Coverslips, 25 mm, round
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 20 chambers
RC-21BRFS
Chamber with Slotted Bath for Field Stimulation
RC-21BRFS
Top View
28.5 mm
series 20 chambers
RC-21BRFS
Chambers
Imaging chamber designed for field stimulation studies
47.5 mm
Side View
• Designed for field stimulation studies involving
cardiac myocytes
• Closed bath design
• Small volume with slotted bath
• Ideal for fluorescent, calcium, and time-lapse
imaging studies
The RC-21BRFS is a small volume, closed bath imaging chamber designed
for field stimulation studies. It uses a pair of 25 mm round coverslips to
form the top and bottom of the chamber, and the total bath volume is 263
µl. Separation between top and bottom coverslips is 2.3 mm. Two
platinum wire electrodes are attached to the parallel sides of the ovalshaped bath. The connecting wires are 15 cm long and are terminated in
1 mm pins.
An additional stainless steel port at the bath input fits a standard
Hamilton microliter syringe.* This port may be used to inject substances
into the flow path or to remove air bubbles from the sealed chamber.
At the bath output, a length of tubing is used as a back pressure control
to insure smooth flow.
The RC-21BRFS chamber requires a platform (P-2, PH-2, or PM-2) and
stage adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
Each RC-21BRFS chamber is supplied with a package of CS-25R glass
coverslips (#1 thickness, 25 mm diameter, 100/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160
polyethylene tubing.
* 25 gauge (0.45 mm OD) needle
The SIU-102 is a bipolar stimulator designed for use with field
stimulation chambers. This instrument features constant
current and constant voltage modes, as well as bipolar, pulse,
and DC modes. Optical coupling is used to electronically
isolate the stimulator from the pulse source. Currents up to 100
mA and voltages up to 100 V are also supported. See page 247
for details.
Bath Dimensions
Specifications
Material
Polycarbonate or polysulfone
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
18.0 x 6.3 x 2.3 mm
Volume
263 µl
Electrodes
Platinum wire,
15 cm leads with 1 mm pins
Top coverglass
25 mm round
Bottom coverglass
25 mm round
Injection port (ID x OD)
0.56 x 0.91 mm, stainless steel
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Output tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Order #
Model
W4 64-0226 RC-21BRFS
Product
Imaging Chamber
with Field Stimulation
W4 64-0278 P-2
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0285 PH-2
Platform, heated
W4 64-1561 PM-2
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0705 CS-25R
Coverslips, 25 mm round
#1 thick, Box of 100
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
21
series 20 chambers
RC-21BDW
Open Diamond Bath
Chambers
Open, diamond shaped bath with wicked solution removal
RC-21BDW
series 20 chambers
RC-21BDW shown in a P-2 platform
• Designed for physiological measurements
on cell cultured coverslips
• Identical to the RC-21BRW except for
a diamond shaped bath
• Uses a 25 mm round coverslip as the
chamber floor
• Diamond shaped bath provides laminar
solution flow
• Quiet operation
• Wicked solution removal from bath
• Can be used with upright or inverted
microscopes
RC-21BDW
Bath
Suction
Tube
Top View
Perfusion
Inlet Port
Side View
2.5 mm
Wick Slot
17.0 mm
The low profile design of the RC-21BDW permits good electrode access
to the chamber bath. Constant solution level and quiet operation are
assured with the use of a wick between the chamber bath and suction
well. With laminar flow, the sample is minimally distorted during
perfusion. Bath volume is 143 µl for each mm of solution height.
The RC-21BDW chamber requires a platform (P-2, PH-2, or PM-2) and
stage adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
Each RC-21BDW chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness
glass coverslips (CS-25R, 25 mm diameter, pkg. of 100) and 10 feet of
PE-160 polyethylene tubing.
22
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0362 RC-21BDW
Open Chamber for 25 mm
Round Coverslips
W4 64-0278 P-2
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0285 PH-2
Platform, heated
W4 64-1561 PM-2
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Specifications
Material
13 mm
Polycarbonate
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
17 x 13 x 2.5 mm
Volume, by depth
143 µl/mm
Bottom coverglass
25 mm round
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Output tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0705 CS-25R
Coverslips, 25 mm round,
#1 thick, Box of 100
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC-21BRW
series 20 chambers
Open Round Bath
Chambers
Large round, open bath for maximum imaging area
series 20 chambers
RC-21BRW
RC-21BRW shown in a PM-2 platform
• Designed for physiological measurements
on cell cultured coverslips
• Uses a 25 mm round coverslip as the
chamber floor
• Quiet operation
• Broad imaging area
• Wicked solution removal from bath
• Can be used with upright or inverted
microscopes
RC-21BRW
Dimensions of the RC-21BRW are the same as the RC-21BDW
(see facing page) except bath is 17.4 mm round.
Specifications
Material
Polycarbonate
Bath dimension (D x H)
17.4 x 2.5 mm
Volume, by depth
240 µl/mm
The RC-21BRW is an open bath recording chamber using a 25 mm round
coverslip as the chamber bottom. The wide, round aperture of the
RC-21BRW maximizes the viewing area on the coverslip and enables
excellent access for electrodes. Constant solution level and quiet
operation are assured with the use of a wick between the chamber bath
and suction well. Bath volume is 240 µl for 1 mm solution height.
Bottom coverglass
25 mm round
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Output tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Order #
Product
The low profile design of the RC-21BRW and its platform are useful for
use with large objectives and will accommodate either upright or inverted
microscopes. The large imaging area (17 mm diameter) increases the
likelihood of viewing cell features located along the periphery of the
chamber.
W4 64-0227 RC-21BRW
Open Chamber for 25 mm
Round Coverslip
W4 64-0278 P-2
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0285 PH-2
Platform, heated
W4 64-1561 PM-2
Platform, heated magnetic
The RC-21BRW chamber requires a platform (P-2, PH-2 or PM-2) and
stage adapter to complete the assembly for mounting on a microscope.
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
Each chamber includes a pack of #1 thickness glass coverslips (CS-25R,
25 mm diameter, 100/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160 tubing.
W4 64-0705 CS-25R
Coverslips, 25 mm round,
#1 thick, Box of 100
Model
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
23
series 20 chambers
RC-22 and RC-22C
Open Diamond Bath for Tissue Slice Studies
Chambers
Small volume, open bath recording chambers designed for tissue and brain slice studies
RC-22
RC-22C
series 20 chambers
RC-22 shown in a PM-1 heated platform
• Designed for tissue slice or cultured cell studies
• Applications include patch clamp, intracellular/
extracellular recordings, and imaging
• Diamond shaped bath provides laminar solution
flow
• Small bath volume facilitates rapid solution
exchange
• Slice anchor included
RC-22
RC-22C
The RC-22 and RC-22C are small volume, open bath recording chambers
designed for tissue and brain slice studies. The diamond shaped chamber
bath facilitates laminar solution flow.
Side View
Slices are secured via a supplied stainless steel anchor (or harp). The
RC-22 comes with an SHD-22L/15 anchor, and the RC-22C comes with an
SHD-22CL/15 anchor harp. Threads are made of Lycra and have a spacing
of 1.5 mm. While anchor mass (typically 300 milligrams) is sufficient to
secure a slice into place, Warner anchors rely on a close fit between the
anchor body and the chamber sidewall. This feature can reduce stress
on the anchored slice.
Solution aspiration is via a stainless steel suction tube which is secured
by a clamp insuring the adjustable-height suction tube will not move once
set by the user. Each chamber has an agar bridge well for reference
electrodes and the working volume of the RC-22 and RC-22C is 115 µl and
138 µl, respectively. Chamber sidewalls have a height of 1.2 mm to assist
with electrode access and placement.
The RC-22 and RC-22C chambers require a platform (P-1, PH-1, or PM-1)
and stage adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a
microscope. The bottom-forming coverslip is 22 x 40 mm.
Each chamber is supplied with a slice anchor, a swatch of nylon mesh,
a pack of #1 thickness glass coverslips (CS-22/40, 22 x 40 mm, 50/pkg)
and 10 feet of PE-160 tubing.
Top View
Bath Dimensions
Specifications
RC-22
RC-22C
Material
Polycarbonate
or polysulfone*
Polycarbonate
or polysulfone*
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
22 x 8 x 3.8 mm
23 x 10 x 3.8 mm
Volume, by depth
115 µl/mm
138 µl/mm
Bottom coverglass
22 x 40 mm
22 x 40 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
1.67 mm (OD)
* Please call for price and availability of polysulfone chambers.
24
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 20 chambers
RC-22 and RC-22C
series 20 chambers
Chambers
Open Diamond Bath for Tissue Slice Studies (continued)
Shown above is a typical complete system, which includes an RC-22
chamber, heated platform, dual channel temperature controller, in-line
solution heater, connecting cable and a stage adapter.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0228 RC-22
Recording Chamber for Tissue
Slice with SHD-22L/15 Anchor
W4 64-0229 RC-22C
Recording Chamber for Tissue
Slice with SHD-22CL/15 Anchor
W4 64-0277 P-1
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0284 PH-1
Platform, heated
W4 64-1526 PM-1
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
RC-22 chamber with slice anchor and patch electrode
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0707 CS-22/40
Coverslips, 22 x 40 mm #1, 50/box
W4 64-0246 SHD-22L/15
Slice Anchor, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0247 SHD-22CL/15
Slice Anchor, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0198
Nylon mesh, 12 pieces, 7 x 7 cm
Slice Anchor Kits
W4 64-0263 SHD-22Kit
Slice Anchor Kit
W4 64-0264 SHD-22CKit
Slice Anchor Kit
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
25
series 20 chambers
RC-24 and RC-24E
Fast Exchange Open Diamond Bath Chambers
Chambers
Our smallest, open bath chambers for very fast solution times
RC-24
RC-24E
RC-24
RC-24E
Top View
series 20 chambers
Side View
• Designed for physiological measurements of
cell cultured coverslips
• Applications include patch clamp, imaging
and intracellular/extracellular recordings
• Diamond shaped bath provides laminar
solution flow
• Both perfusion and aspiration ports on same
side of chamber
• Very small bath volume facilitates very fast
solution exchange
The bath volume in these models is among the smallest of the open
style chambers. This enables very fast solution exchange for a variety
of applications, including patch clamp and electrophysiology studies.
The small bath volumes are especially useful when using drugs in
small quantities.
26
RC-24
Bath Dimensions
RC-24E
Specifications
RC-24
RC-24E
Material
Polycarbonate
Polycarbonate
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
15 x 5 x 3.8 mm
15 x 6 x 3.8 mm
40 µl/mm
50 µl/mm
Volume, by depth
The RC-24 and RC-24E have a an unusual characteristic in that both the
perfusion inlet and aspiration outlet is on the same side of the chamber.
This allows the associated perfusion lines to be conveniently placed on
only one side and facilitates electrode placement.
22 x 40 mm
22 x 40 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
Bottom coverglass
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
1.67 mm (OD)
An agar bridge well for reference electrodes is provided, as is an
aspiration well. The aspiration well is equipped with a stainless steel
aspiration tube (1.67 mm OD) together with a tube clamp. The clamp
insures that the adjustable suction tube will not move once the height
is set by the user.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0230
RC-24
Fast Exchange Recording Chamber
W4 64-0231
RC-24E
Fast Exchange Recording Chamber
The floor of each chamber can be formed from either a 22 mm square
coverslip or from a 22 x 40 mm rectangular coverslip. Each chamber
requires a platform (P-1, PH-1, or PM-1) and a stage adapter to complete
the assembly for mounting on a microscope.
W4 64-0277
P-1
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0284
PH-1
Platform, heated
W4 64-1526
PM-1
Platform, heated magnetic
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-22/40, 22 x 40 mm, 50/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160 tubing.
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0707
CS-22/40
Coverslips, 22 x 40 mm #1, Box of 50
W4 64-0704
CS-22S
Coverslips, 22 x 22 mm
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC-24N
series 20 chambers
Open Diamond Bath for Fast Fluid Exchange
Chambers
A small, open bath chamber with diamond shaped fluidics
series 20 chambers
RC-24N
RC-24N shown in a PH-1 heated platform
• Designed for physiological measurements of
cell cultured coverslips
• Applications include patch clamp, intracellular/
extracellular recordings, and imaging
• Diamond shaped bath provides laminar
solution flow
• Very small bath volume facilitates very fast
solution exchange
RC-24N
Top View
Suction Tube Slot
Bath
Perfusion Inlet Port
Suction Reservoir
The RC-24N chamber design is taken from the RC-24 and improves the
flow characteristics by providing a linear path. The bath volume in this
model is among the smallest of the open style chambers. This enables
very fast solution exchange for a variety of applications, including patch
clamp and electrophysiology studies. The small bath volume is especially
useful when using drugs in small quantities.
An agar bridge well for reference electrodes is provided, as is an
aspiration well. The aspiration well is equipped with a stainless steel
aspiration tube (1.67 mm OD) together with a tube clamp. The clamp
insures that the adjustable suction tube will not move once the height
is set by the user. The chamber floor is formed from a 22 x 40 mm
rectangular coverslip.
The RC-24N requires a platform (P-1, PH-1, or PM-1) and stage adapter
to complete the assembly for mounting on a microscope.
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-22/40, 22 x 40 mm, 50/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160 tubing.
Agar Bridge Well
Side View
3.8 mm
15.0 mm
6 mm
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0381
W4 64-0277
W4 64-0284
W4 64-1526
RC-24N
Fast Exchange Recording Chamber
P-1
Platform, non-heated
PH-1
Platform, heated
PM-1
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Specifications
Material
Polycarbonate
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
15 x 6 x 3.8 mm
Volume, by depth
54 µl/mm
Bottom coverglass
22 x 40 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
W4 64-0755
W4 64-0707
PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
CS-22/40
Coverslips, 22 x 40 mm #1, Box of 50
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
27
series 20 chambers
RC-25 and RC-25F
Round Coverslip Chambers
Chambers
Open diamond bath polycarbonate recording chambers designed for round coverslips
RC-25
RC-25F
RC-25
RC-25F
Top View
series 20 chambers
Side View
• Designed for physiological measurements of
cell cultured coverslips
• Applications include patch clamp, intracellular/
extracellular recordings and imaging
• Uses 12 or 15 mm round coverslips as the
chamber floor
• Diamond shaped bath provides laminar
solution flow
• Small bath volume facilitates fast solution
exchange
The design of the RC-25 and RC-25F chambers incorporates a diamondshaped bath which has been shown to produce a laminar flow. Since
the bath volumes of these chambers is small (90 µl/mm and 133 µl/mm
for the RC-25 and RC-25F, respectively), fluid exchange times are
measured in seconds even when flow rates are less than 1 ml/min.
Bath Dimensions
Specifications
RC-25
RC-25F
Material
Polycarbonate
or polysulfone*
Polycarbonate
or polysulfone*
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
25 x 12 x 4.1 mm
24 x 13 x 4.1 mm
90 µl/mm
133 µl/mm
Volume, by depth
12 or 13 mm round
15 mm round
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
The RC-25 works equally well with either 12 or 13 mm diameter
coverslips while the RC-25F uses 15 mm coverslips. In general, these
coverslips are used to form the bottom of the chamber bath.
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
1.67 mm (OD)
NOTE: These chambers are not designed for insertion of coverslips
from the top.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0232
RC-25
Round Coverslip Recording Chamber
W4 64-0233
RC-25F
Round Coverslip Recording Chamber
W4 64-0279
P-3
Platform, non-heated, for RC-25
W4 64-0286
PH-3
Platform, heated, for RC-25
W4 64-1562
PM-3
Platform, heated magnetic, for RC-25
W4 64-0280
P-4
Platform, non-heated, for RC-25F
W4 64-0287
PH-4
Platform, heated, for RC-25F
W4 64-1563
PM-4
Platform, heated magnetic,
for RC-25F
The RC-25 requires a platform (P-3, PH-3, or PM-3) and the RC-25F
requires a platform (P-4, PH-4, or PM-4). Both chambers require a stage
adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-12R; 12 mm round for the RC-25, CS-15R; 15 mm round for the
RC-25F; 100/pkg) and 10 feet of polyethylene (PE-160) tubing.
Bottom coverglass
* Please call for price and availability of polysulfone chambers.
Accessories and Replacement Parts
28
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10 Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0702
CS-12R
Coverslips, 12 mm
W4 64-0703
CS-15R
Coverslips, 15 mm
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC-26GLP
series 20 chambers
Open Diamond Bath with Low Profile
Chambers
Designed for studies of cell cultured coverslips on upright microscopes
series 20 chambers
RC-26GLP
• Applications include patch clamp, intracellular/
extracellular recordings and imaging
• Extra-low profile facilitates electrode access
• Diamond shaped bath provides laminar
solution flow
• Broad optical imaging area
• Can be used with either upright or inverted
microscopes
Thermograph demonstrating bath temperature of RC-26GLP
with in-line heater. Platform heaters turned off, and the flow
rate set to 2 ml/min.
RC-26GLP
Top View
Side View
The RC-26GLP is a low profile version of the RC-26G recording chamber.
The sides of this chamber have been milled to a height of only 2 mm
and the lower profile provides extra clearance for upright microscopes,
water immersion objectives and permits good electrode access to the
chamber bath.
The chamber floor is comprised of a 22 x 40 mm coverslip. The working
volume is 234 µl per 1.0 mm of solution height. The chamber is equipped
with a stainless steel suction tube together with clamp. The clamp insures
that the adjustable aspirator tube will not move once the height is set by
the user.
The RC-26GLP chamber requires a platform (P-1, PH-1 or PM-1) and stage
adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
Bath Dimensions
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0236 RC-26GLP
Low Profile Large Bath
Recording Chamber
Each RC-26GLP chamber is supplied with a package of CS-22/40 glass
coverslips (#1 thickness, 22 x 40 mm, 100/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160
tubing.
W4 64-0277 P-1
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0284 PH-1
Platform, heated
W4 64-1526 PM-1
Platform, heated magnetic
Specifications
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Material
Polycarbonate or polysulfone*
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
24 x 15 x 2 mm
W4 64-0707 CS-22/40
Coverslips, 22 x 40 mm
Volume, by depth
234 µl/mm
Optional Slice Anchors
Bottom coverglass
22 x 40 mm
W4 64-0253 SHD-26H/10
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
W4 64-0254 SHD-26H/15
Slice anchor for RC-26G (1.5 mm)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
W4 64-0255 SHD-26GH2
Slice anchor for RC-26G and
RC-26GLP (2 mm)
* Please call for price and availability of polysulfone chambers.
Slice anchor for RC-26G (1.0 mm)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
29
series 20 chambers
RC-26 and RC-26G
Chambers with Coverslip Insertion Option
Chambers
Supports greater bath depth than the RC-26GLP
RC-26
RC-26G
series 20 chambers
RC-26 shown in a PH-1 heated platform
• Designed for patch clamp studies
• Can be used with tissue slice samples or cell
cultured coverslips
• Tissue slice anchors available
• Applications include patch clamp, intracellular/
extracellular recordings and imaging
• Diamond shaped bath provides laminar
solution flow
• Large imaging area
• Can be used with upright or inverted
microscopes
RC-26
RC-26G
Side View
The RC-26 and RC-26G chambers are designed to be used with cells
cultured onto glass coverslips or with tissue and brain slice samples.
The broad imaging area of these chambers (12 x 25 mm and 15 x 24 mm
for the RC-26 and RC-26G, respectively) provides excellent access for
both electrodes and water-immersion objectives. The diamond shaped
geometry facilitates laminar solution flow throughout the bath area.
The large bath of these chambers allows coverslips to be inserted into
the top opening and removed at the end of the experiment. The RC-26
and RC-26G chambers can accept a 12 or 15 mm diameter coverslip,
respectively. The working volumes, for 1 mm solution height, of the
RC-26 and RC-26G model chambers are 170 and 234 µl, respectively.
Top View
Bath Dimensions
Specifications
RC-26
RC-26G
Material
Polycarbonate
or polysulfone*
Polycarbonate
or polysulfone*
Both chambers require a platform (P-1, PH-1, or PM-1) and stage adapter
to complete the assembly for mounting on a microscope. The chamber
floor consists of a 22 x 40 mm coverslip.
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-22/40, 22 x 40 mm, 50/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160 tubing.
Large tissue samples can also be placed directly into the chamber.
Slice anchor hold downs are available for tissue slice studies. Anchors
are available with Lycra thread spacing at 1.0, 1.5, and 2.0 mm.
25 x 12 x 4 mm
24 x 15 x 4 mm
Volume, by depth
170 µl/mm
234 µl/mm
Bottom coverglass
22 x 40 mm
22 x 40 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
1.14 x 1.57 mm
(PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
1.67 mm (OD)
* Please call for price and availability of polysulfone chambers.
30
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 20 chambers
RC-26 and RC-26G
series 20 chambers
Chambers
Chambers with Coverslip Insertion Option (continued)
Model RC-26G chamber shown in a PH-1 heated platform on a stage adapter
for a Nikon inverted microscope.
Model RC-26G chamber shown in a PH-1 heated platform with optional
magnetic platform clamps on a stage adapter for a Zeiss inverted
microscope.
Modular Design
The modular design of all Warner Series 20 chambers permit them to be
mounted on just about any microscope stage, including those with a
weight restriction.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0234 RC-26
Large Bath Recording Chamber
W4 64-0235 RC-26G
Large Bath Recording Chamber
W4 64-0277 P-1
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0284 PH-1
Platform, heated
W4 64-1526 PM-1
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Model RC-26G chamber on a microscope stage with in-line heater and CC-28
cable with thermistor feedback, (a typical set-up).
W4 64-0250 SHD-26H/10
Slice Anchor for RC-26 (1.0 mm)
W4 64-0251 SHD-26H/15
Slice Anchor for RC-26 (1.5 mm)
W4 64-0252 SHD-26H/20
Slice Anchor for RC-26 (2.0 mm)
W4 64-0253 SHD-26GH/10 Slice Anchor for RC-26G (1.0 mm)
W4 64-0254 SHD-26GH/15 Slice Anchor for RC-26G (1.5 mm)
W4 64-0255 SHD-26GH/20 Slice Anchor for RC-26G (2.0 mm)
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0707 CS-22/40
Coverslips, 22 x 40 mm
New PM-1 Heated platform with magnetic clamps, no screws needed to
secure chamber to platform.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
31
RC-26GS
series 20 chambers
Silicone Imaging Chamber
Chambers
The classic RC-26G chamber offered in a disposable silicone format
RC-26GS
Agar Bridge Well
series 20 chambers
Perfusion Inlet
Suction Well
Magnetic suction tube holder and micro-slit suction tube
RC-26GS shown in a PM-8 platform
• Eliminates the need for a grease seal
• Incorporates Warner's diamond fluidics
• Low cost for disposable applications
The RC-26G chamber has been one of Warner Instruments most popular
recording and imaging chambers. We now offer this classic chamber
in a disposable silicone-based format. While disposable, the RC-26GS can be
cleaned and reused until it becomes contaminated or the material fails. This
feature minimizes the cost-per-use of this chamber. The format of this new
chamber carries with it all of the features of the classic RC-26G design,
including the use of a 22 x 40 mm coverslip for the chamber floor.
A special PM-8 magnetic platform is required to secure the RC-26GS
silicone chamber and coverslip together. The new platform also features
several new innovations. See pages 59 and 60 for details.
RC-26GS
Perfusion
Inlet Port
Suction
Well
Side View
4 mm
The RC-26GS silicone chamber enables excellent access for both waterimmersion objectives and for electrodes when used with an upright
microscope. The bath volume of the RC-26GS is 234 ul/mm. The large
diamond-shaped bath area (15 x 24 mm) allows for the insertion and
removal 15 mm round coverslips. Large samples can also be directly
placed into this chamber.
24 mm
15 mm
Bath Dimensions
The RC-26GS silicone chamber and platform requires a stage adapter to
complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
Chambers are packaged in lots of two and are supplied with an ST-3
suction tube, a MAG-2 magnetic clamp (for suction tubes), a pack of #1
thickness glass coverslips (CS-22/40, 22x40 mm, 50/pkg.), and 10 feet of
PE-160 tubing.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1534 RC-26GS
Chamber Large Bath
Silicone pack of 2
W4 64-1531 PM-8
Chamber Platform Magnetic
Specifications
32
Agar Bridge
Well
Top View
Material
Medical grade silicone
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
24 x 15 x 4 mm
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Volume, by depth
234 µl/mm
W4 64-0359 MAG-2
Magnetic Clamp for suction tubes
Bottom coverglass
22 x 40 mm
W4 64-1406 ST-3
Suction Tube micro slit design
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
W4 64-0707 CS-22/40
Coverslips #1 thickness 22 x 40 mm
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC-26Z
series 20 chambers
Open Diamond Bath for Oocyte Studies
Chambers
The RC-26 with the addition of two agar bridge wells for oocyte work
series 20 chambers
RC-26Z
RC-26Z shown in a P-1 platform
• Designed for TEV oocyte recording
• Diamond shaped bath provides laminar
solution flow
• Large optical imaging area
• Can be used with either upright or inverted
microscopes
• Tissue slice anchors available
RC-26Z
Top View
The RC-26Z is a polycarbonate chamber, similar in design to the RC-26,
having two additional features specific for two-electrode oocyte
recording: Namely, the dam height in the suction well is increased to 2.5
mm to provide an adequate solution level in the bath, and a second agar
bridge well has been added to accommodate bath clamp electrodes.
Side View
The RC-26Z can also accommodate larger tissue slices and preparations,
and permits excellent access for electrodes. The working volume is
170 µl/mm. The chamber floor consists of a 22 x 50 mm coverslip.
Bath Dimensions
The chamber is equipped with a stainless steel suction tube (1.67 mm OD)
together with a suction tube clamp. This insures the adjustable height
suction tube will not move once the height is set by the user.
The RC-26Z chamber requires a platform (P-1, PH-1, or PM-1) and stage
adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
Each RC-26Z is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-22/50, 22 x 50 mm, 50/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160 tubing.
Order #
Model
W4 64-0237 RC-26Z
Specifications
Product
Large Bath Oocyte
Recording Chamber
Polycarbonate
W4 64-0277 P-1
Platform, non-heated
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
25 x 12 x 4 mm
W4 64-0284 PH-1
Platform, heated
Volume, by depth
170 µl/mm
W4 64-1526 PM-1
Platform, heated magnetic
Bottom coverglass
22 x 50 mm
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
W4 64-0708 CS-22/50
Coverslips, 22 x 50 mm
Material
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
33
RC-27
series 20 chambers
Large Rectangular Open Bath Chamber
Chambers
A large bath chamber with a large viewing area designed for tissue sections
RC-27
series 20 chambers
RC-27 shown in a PH-6 platform
• Designed for large tissue sections or brain
slice studies
• Large rectangular bath area accommodates
insertion of coverslips up to 12 x 24 mm
• Large optical imaging area
• Can be used with either upright or inverted
microscopes
• Slice anchors available
RC-27
Top View
Side View
The RC-27 is a large bath chamber ideal for large tissue or brain slice
studies. The large imaging area increases the likelihood of viewing
desired features and the angled sides of the chamber facilitate electrode
placement.
Bath Dimensions
The chamber floor consists of a 24 x 50 mm rectangular coverslip and the
bath area is 12 x 24 mm. These dimensions are useful for organotypic
slice culture studies. An adjustable spreader plate at the bath input
facilitates uniform solution flow. The working volume of the RC-27 is 413
µl per mm of solution height. The chamber is equipped with a stainless
steel aspiration tube together with a clamp.
Designed for brain or tissue slice studies, several optional slice anchors
are offered with Lycra thread spacing of 1.0, 1.5, and 2.0 mm. An anchor
kit is also available containing slice anchors (1 each) in each available
thread spacing.
Model
W4 64-0238 RC-27
Product
Very Large Bath
Recording Chamber
W4 64-0282 P-6
Platform, non-heated
The RC-27 requires a platform (P-6, PH-6, or PM-6) and stage adapter to
complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
W4 64-0289 PH-6
Platform, heated
W4 64-1527 PM-6
Platform, heated magnetic
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-24/50, 24 x 50 mm, 50/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160 tubing. Slice
anchors sold separately, see page 71.
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Specifications
Material
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
34
Order #
Polycarbonate
38 x 12.5 x 4 mm
Volume, by depth
413 µl/mm
Bottom coverglass
24 x 50 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0709 CS-24/50
Coverslips, 24 x 50 mm
W4 64-0267 SHD-27KIT
Slice Anchor Kit
W4 64-0194 SHD-27H/10
Slice Anchor, 1.0 mm
W4 64-0193 SHD-27H/15
Slice Anchor, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0192 SHD-27H/20
Slice Anchor, 2.0 mm
W4 64-1451 CPS-27
Perfusion Spreader Plate
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 20 chambers
RC-27D and RC-27LD
The RC-27L with a special input for applications requiring ultra quiet solution delivery
RC-27LD
series 20 chambers
Suction
Outlet
Chambers
Ultra-quiet Imaging Chamber for Slice Studies
Perfusion
Inlet
RC-27LD shown in a PM-7D heated platform
• Designed for tissue slice studies
• RC-27LD includes slice support
• Eliminates vibration associated with solution
exchange
• Allows multiplexed solution delivery without
solution switching artifacts
RC-27D
RC-27LD
BATH
DIMENSIONS
Bath Dimensions
25.4 mm
The RC-27D and RC-27LD chambers are designed with tissue slice studies
in mind. A large imaging field allows for maximal observation of
biological specimens. Advantages of this system over other chambers
includes the presence of a sloped inflow channel which allows for smooth
and "ultra-quiet” solution delivery.
59.9 mm
4.2 mm
The sloped input of these chamber allows I-V type infusion lines to deliver
drops at a fixed rate without the transfer of noise to the specimen field.
In addition, multiplexed solution delivery is now possible without the
potential for solution switching artifacts. This new technology provides
the capability of ultra-quiet solution exchange without transferring noise
to either the system or to the image.
Measurement from tissue slices is provided for by the inclusion of slice
support in the RC-27LD chamber. Slices are supported 0.5 mm above the
chamber floor. Support threads are made of Lycra and thread spacing is
0.5 mm.
The RC-27D requires a PM-7 platform and the RC27-LD requires a
PM-7D platform. Both chambers also require a stage adapter to
complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope
Each chamber is supplied with a MAG-2 magnetic clamp for suction
tubes, a magnetic perfusion tube holder, a package of #2 thickness glass
coverslips (CS-24/60), 40/pkg), and 10 feet of PE-160 polyethylene tubing.
The RC-27LD also includes a slice support. Slice anchors are sold
separately, see page 71.
38 mm
18 mm
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1548 RC-27D
Slice Chamber, Ultra-quiet
W4 64-1532 RC-27LD
Slice Chamber, Ultra-quiet
with tissue slice support
W4 64-1529 PM-7
Chamber Platform for RC-27D
W4 64-1530 PM-7D
Chamber Platform for RC-27LD
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-1550 SS-4-500V
Slice Support 500 Micron
W4 64-1551 SS-4-500H
Slice Support 500 Micron
W4 64-0256 SHD-27LH/10
Metal Slice Hold Down, 1 mm
W4 64-0257 SHD-27LH/15
Metal Slice Hold Down, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0258 SHD-27LH/20
Metal Slice Hold Down, 2 mm
W4 64-0259 SHD-27LP/10
Plastic Slice Hold Down, 1 mm
W4 64-0260 SHD-27LP/15
Plastic Slice Hold Down, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0261 SHD-27LP/20
Plastic Slice Hold Down, 2 mm
W4 64-0710 CS-24/60
Coverslips, 24 x 60 mm
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
35
RC-27L
series 20 chambers
Large Bath Chamber with Slice Supports
Chambers
A large bath chamber specifically designed for tissue slice studies
RC-27L
RC-27L
Top View
series 20 chambers
Side View
• Designed for tissue slice studies
• Permits solution flow both above and below a
tissue slice
• Provides good access for immersion optics and
electrodes
• Can be used with either upright or inverted
microscopes
• Slice anchors available
The RC-27L is designed with tissue slice studies in mind. The slice rests
on a plastic support and is held in place by an anchor (also known as
a harp). The slice support rests 0.5 mm above the coverslip floor. This
design allows the tissue slice to be perfused from both above and below,
which can increase the sample’s viability. Slice supports are included and
anchors are sold separately.
The slice support is fabricated in polycarbonate. Slice anchors are
available in polycarbonate or stainless steel. Both slice supports and slice
anchors use fine Lycra threads to secure the slice in place, allowing
maximum access to the preparation. Thread spacing on the slice support
is 1 mm and available thread spacing on slice anchors are 1.0, 1.5, and
2.0 mm. Polycarbonate or stainless steel anchor kits containing slice
anchors (1 each) in each available thread spacing are also available.
While the weight of the metal harp is sufficient to hold a slice in place,
the plastic harp relies on a close apposition between itself and the
chamber side walls to secure it into position. This approach can reduce
pressure on the slice from the supports.
The RC-27L requires a platform (P-6D, PH-6D, PM-6D)*; Also fits P-6
platform without slice support) and stage adapter to complete the
assembly for mounting onto a microscope.
Each chamber is supplied with an SS-3 slice support, 10 feet of PE-160
polyethylene tubing, and a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-24/50, 24 x 50 mm, pkg. of 50).
* Slice anchors sold separately, see page 71.
* Also fits P-6 Platform without slice support.
36
Specifications
Material
Polycarbonate or polysulfone*
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
38 x 18 x 3 mm
Volume, by depth
560 µl/mm
Bottom coverglass
24 x 50 mm
Slice support
24 x 50 x 0.5 mm thick,
polycarbonate, Lycra threads at 1 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
* Please call for price and availability of polysulfone chambers.
Order #
Model
W4 64-0241 RC-27L
Product
Large Bath Chamber
W4 64-0283 P-6D
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0290 PH-6D
Platform, heated
W4 64-1528 PM-6D
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0709 CS-24/50
Coverslips, 24 x 50 mm
W4 64-0273 SS-3
Slice Support
W4 64-1533 SS-3G
Grid
W4 64-0190 SHD-27LPKIT
Plastic Slice Anchor Kit
W4 64-0259 SHD-27LP/10
Plastic Slice Hold-Down, 1.0 mm
W4 64-0260 SHD-27LP/15
Plastic Slice Hold-Down, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0261 SHD-27LP/20
Plastic Slice Hold-Down, 2.0 mm
W4 64-0268 SHD-27LKIT
Stainless Steel Slice Anchor Kit
W4 64-0256 SHD-27LH/10
Stainless Steel Slice Hold-Down,
1 mm
W4 64-0257 SHD-27LH/15
Stainless Steel Slice Hold-Down,
1.5 mm
W4 64-0258 SHD-27LH/20
Stainless Steel Slice Hold-Down,
2 mm
W4 64-1450 CPS-27L
Perfusion Spreader Plate
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC-27N
series 20 chambers
Narrow Rectangular Bath Chamber
Chambers
The RC-27 design in a narrow bath configuration
series 20 chambers
RC-27N
RC-27N shown in a PM-6 platform
•
•
•
•
Rectangular, open bath chamber
Narrow bath
Accommodates tissue or brain slice specimens
Applications include patch clamp, and
measurements on cultured cells and tissue
preparations
• Slice anchors available
RC-27N
RC-27NE
Top View
TOP VIEW
Perfusion
Inlet Port
The RC-27N recording chamber is a modified version of the RC-27 with a
narrower bath and smaller volume. The narrow bath can stabilize solution
flow at high flow rates and the smaller volume improves exchange times.
Suction Well
Side
SIDEView
VIEW
8 mm
4 mm
The RC-27N chamber requires a platform (P-6, PH-6, or PM-6) and stage
adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope. The
chamber body is manufactured from polycarbonate and the chamber floor
is formed from a 24 x 50 mm coverslip.
Specifications
Perfusion Spreader
Surface Inclined to
Bath Both Sides
The specimen area is 28 x 8 mm. The height of the bath area side walls
is 2 mm, and the sides of the chamber slope away from the bath at an
angle of 15° from the horizontal. The low profile design and inclined
surfaces permit good electrode access to the specimen area.
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-24/50, 24 x 50 mm, pkg. of 50) and 10 feet of PE-160 polyethylene
tubing.
25 mm
Bath Area
50 mm
Order #
Model
W4 64-0239 RC-27N
Product
Narrow Bath Recording Chamber
W4 64-0282 P-6
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0289 PH-6
Platform, heated
W4 64-1527 PM-6
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Material
Polycarbonate
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
37 x 8 x 2 mm
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Volume, by depth
305 µl/mm
W4 64-0709 CS-24/50
Coverslips, 24 x 50 mm
Bottom coverglass
24 x 50 mm
W4 64-0191 SHD-27NKIT
Slice Anchor Kit
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
W4 64-0197 SHD-27N/10
Metal Slice Anchor, 1.0 mm
1.67 mm (OD)
W4 64-0196 SHD-27N/15
Metal Slice Anchor, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0195 SHD-27N/20
Metal Slice Anchor, 2.0 mm
W4 64-1452 CPS-27N
Perfusion Spreader Plate
Aspirator coupling
Polyethylene Tubing
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
37
RC-27NE
series 20 chambers
Narrow Bath Chamber with Field Stimulation
Chambers
A narrow-bath RC-27 with platinum field stimulation electrodes
RC-27NE
series 20 chambers
RC-27NE shown in a PM-6 heated platform
•
•
•
•
•
Designed for field stimulation studies
Rectangular open-bath chamber
Narrow bath
Accommodates tissue or brain slice specimens
Applications include patch clamp and
physiological measurements on cultured cells
and tissue preparations
The RC-27NE recording chamber is a modified version of the RC-27 with a
narrower bath and smaller volume designed for applications requiring
electric field stimulation. Laminar solution flow is more stable in this
chamber than in the wider RC-27 chamber.
The working specimen area is 28 x 8 mm and there are inclined surfaces
on both sides (from 2.0 mm to 3.1 mm height). The low profile design and
inclined surfaces permits good electrode access to the specimen area.
The chamber is supplied with a pair of platinum wire electrodes installed
along the long parallel sides of the bath. Electrode leads are
approximately 16 cm long and terminate with 1 mm diameter pins.
The RC-27N chamber requires a platform (P-6, PH-6, or PM-6) and stage
adapter to complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope. The
chamber body is manufactured from polycarbonate and the chamber floor
is formed from a 24 x 50 mm coverslip.
Specifications
Material
Polycarbonate
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
37 x 8 x 2 mm
Volume, by depth
305 µl/mm
Electrodes
Platinum wire,
15 cm cables with 1 mm pins
Bottom coverglass
24 x 50 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0240 RC-27NE
Narrow Bath Recording Chamber
with Field Stimulation
W4 64-0282 P-6
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0289 PH-6
Platform, heated
W4 64-1527 PM-6
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0709 CS-24/50
Coverslips, 24 x 50 mm
Each chamber is supplied with a package of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-24/50, 24 x 50 mm, pkg. of 50) and 10 feet of PE-160 polyethylene
tubing.
The SIU-102 is a bipolar stimulator designed for use with field
stimulation chambers. This instrument features constant current and
constant voltage modes, as well as bipolar, pulse, and DC modes.
Optical coupling is used to electronically isolate the stimulator from
the pulse source. Currents up to 100 mA and voltages up to 100 V
are also supported. See page 247 for details.
38
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC-28
series 20 chambers
Excised Patch Chamber with Two Slotted Open Baths
RC-28
Chambers
Permits solution exchange arround a membrane patch without contaminating the associated cell population
RC-28
Top View
series 20 chambers
End View
•
•
•
•
Side View
Designed for excised patch studies
Open chamber design
Dual slotted baths in two sizes
Baths separated by a controllable dam
The RC-28 is a special chamber containing two bath compartments
separated by an adjustable dam. The dam functions both as a gate and
barrier between the two main baths. The composition and flow rate of
each bath can be independently controlled, and each bath has a separate
stainless steel suction tube for perfusion.
The dual slotted, open bath design allows for the exchange of solution
surrounding an isolated membrane patch without contaminating or
modifying the rest of the cell population. Raising the solution level in the
dam area joins the two baths, while lowering the solution level isolates
the two baths. After patching onto a cell in the large bath compartment,
the dam is flooded, enabling secure transfer of the electrode attached cell
to the smaller compartment. The dam is then drained, isolating the
relocated cell.
For the larger chamber, the bath area is 21 x 9.5 mm and the working
volume is 243 µl per mm of solution height. For the smaller chamber,
the area is 28 x 3.8 mm and the volume is 111 µl.
A platform (P-6, PH-6, or PM-6) and stage adapter are required to
complete the assembly for mounting onto a microscope. The chamber
bottom is formed by a 24 x 50 mm coverslip.
The RC-28 is supplied with a pack of #1 thickness glass coverslips
(CS-24/50, 24 x 50 mm, 50/pkg) and 10 feet of PE-160 polyethylene
tubing.
Specifications
Material
Polycarbonate
Small Bath Dimensions (L x W x H)
28.0 x 3.8 x 4.5mm
Large Bath Dimensions (L x W x H)
28.0 x 9.5 x 4.5 mm
Small Bath Volume, by depth
111 µl
Large Bath Volume, by depth
243 µl
Small Bath Specimen Area (L x W)
28 x 3.8 mm
Large Bath Specimen Area (L x W)
21 x 9.5 mm
Bottom coverglass
24 x 50 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0243
RC-28
Excised Patch Recording Chamber
W4 64-0282
P-6
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0289
PH-6
Platform, heated
W4 64-1527
PM-6
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0709
CS-24/50
Coverslips, 24 x 50 mm
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
39
RC-29
series 20 chambers
Very Large Rectangular Open Bath Chamber for Slice Studies with Atmospherics
Chambers
Designed for slice studies requiring controlled atmospheric conditions
RC-29
RC-29
End View
Top View
series 20 chambers
• Designed for tissue slice studies
• Gas perfusion ports allow for controlled
atmospheric conditions
• Provides for perfusate flow both above and
below a tissue slice
• Provides good access for immersion optics
and electrodes
• Used with either upright or inverted microscopes
• Large imaging area
• Slice anchors available
The RC-29 chamber is modeled after the RC-27L (in that it enables
solution flow both above and below the tissue slice) with the added
feature of atmospheric control.
Similar to the RC-27L, the tissue slice rests on a plastic slice support
0.5 mm above the coverslip floor and is held in place by an optional slice
anchor. Slice supports and slice anchors use fine Lycra threads to secure
the slice into place allowing maximum access to the preparation. Thread
spacing is 1 mm on the slice support and are 1.0, 1.5, and 2.0 mm for the
slice anchors. Anchors are purchased separately and are available in
polycarbonate and stainless steel. Warner also offers anchor kits
containing slice anchors (1 each) in each available thread spacing.
The RC-29 has tall sides with sloping surfaces to allow for an
atmospheric space. Gas input ports are constructed into the chamber
walls and a chamber top (with access port) is also provided. Continuous
gas flow into the chamber establishes positive pressure within the
chamber maintaining the atmospheric environment.
This chamber requires a platform (P-6D, PH-6D, or PM-6D) and stage
adapter to complete the assembly for mounting on a microscope. The
chamber bottom is formed by a 24 x 50 mm coverslip.
Specifications
Material
Polycarbonate
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
38 x 18 x 6 mm
Volume, by depth
629 µl/mm
Bottom coverglass
24 x 50 mm
Slice support
24 x 50 mm, polycarbonate,
Lycra threads at 1 mm
Input tubing (ID x OD)
1.14 x 1.57 mm (PE-160)
Aspirator coupling
1.67 mm (OD)
Gas perfusion ports
Stainless steel, 1.67 mm (OD)
Order #
Model
W4 64-0244 RC-29
Product
Chamber with Slice Support
W4 64-0283 P-6D
Platform, non-heated
W4 64-0290 PH-6D
Platform, heated
W4 64-1528 PM-6D
Platform, heated magnetic
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene tubing
W4 64-0709 CS-24/50
Coverslips, 24 x 50 mm
W4 64-0273 SS-3
Slice Support
W4 64-0256 SHD-27LH/10
Metal Slice Hold Down, 1.0 mm
W4 64-0257 SHD-27LH/15
Metal Slice Hold Down, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0258 SHD-27LH/20
Metal Slice Hold Down, 2.0 mm
W4 64-0259 SHD-27LP/10
Plastic Slice Hold Down, 1.0 mm
W4 64-0260 SHD-27LP/15
Plastic Slice Hold Down, 1.5 mm
W4 64-0261 SHD-27LP/20
Plastic Slice Hold Down, 2.0 mm
The chamber is supplied with a plastic SS-3 slice support, 10 feet of
PE-160 polyethylene tubing, a chamber cover, and one pack of #1
thickness coverslips (CS-24/50, 24 x 50 mm, pkg. of 50).
40
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 30 chambers
RC-30, RC-30HV and RC-30WA
RC-30
RC-30HV
RC-30WA
series 30 chambers
Low profile, closed bath chambers designed for confocal imaging on upright and inverted microscopes
Chambers
Confocal Imaging Chambers
• Option of confocal imaging with continuous
perfusion
• Accommodates both upright and inverted
microscopes
• 17.7 mm diameter viewing aperture (RC-30,
RC-30HV)
• 25.0 mm diameter viewing aperture (RC-30WA)
• User-defined cross-sectional viewing area
• User-defined bath volume with fast
fluid exchange
• Three available gasket thicknesses
• Resistive heating option on chamber base
The RC-30 and RC-30HV are closed bath, low profile chambers
incorporating special features for confocal imaging. These features
include user defined bath geometry and total volume, and a large viewing
area. A 22 x 30 mm (#1 thickness) glass coverslip forms the top of the
chamber, while a 22 x 40 mm coverslip (also #1 thickness) forms the
chamber bottom, creating a closed bath. This design enables the chamber
to be inverted in the mounting platform allowing it to be used with both
inverted or upright microscopes. The final viewing aperture is 17.7 mm.
The RC-30WA is a wide aperture version of the RC-30HV. It uses a 40 mm
diameter coverslip for its bottom surface and a 30 mm diameter coverslip
for its top. The final viewing aperture is 25 mm. The chamber bottom is
beveled to permit maximum access to the bottom coverslip.
Variable Bath Volume/Fast Perfusate Exchange
The side walls of the bath are formed by silicone gaskets sandwiched
between the top and bottom coverslips. Wall height (i.e., spacing
between the two coverslips) can range from 150-1000 µm and is defined
by the total thickness of the gaskets used. Blank gaskets are supplied
with the chamber allowing the development of the customized bath
geometry required for unique applications.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
41
series 30 chambers
RC-30, RC-30HV and RC-30WA
Confocal Imaging Chambers (continued)
RC-30WA
Chambers
RC-30WA in SA-30UU adapter
series 30 chambers
Pre-cut gaskets are supplied with the chamber; one cut wide to allow full
use of the aperture window and a narrow, slotted version for fast solution
exchange. The bath volumes for these two pre-cut, 250 µm thick gaskets
are 26 µl for the slotted style and 133 µl for the wide style.
Heater Version
The RC-30HV and RC-30WA include a pair of resistive heater elements
mounted onto the chamber base. These resistors are compatible with
Warner TC-324B and TC-344B Temperature Controllers which can be
ordered separately along with a CC-28 cable.
All versions of the confocal imaging chambers require special microscope
stage adapters which must be ordered separately.
Confocal imaging chambers are supplied with six pre-cut 250 µm thick
gaskets: two large area bath gaskets (GS-30L/10, 133 µl volume), two
slotted bath gaskets (GS-30S/10, 25.6 µl volume), and two blank gaskets
(GS-30B/10) for user customized chamber areas. Also included is a
special tool used for mounting the top plate, polyethylene tubing
(PE-90/10, 10 feet.), and 22 x 30 mm and 22 x 40 mm #1 glass coverslips
(CS-22/30 and CS-22/40, pkg. of 50). The RC-30WA includes one box each
of 30 mm round coverslips (CS-30R) and 40 mm round coverslips (CS-40R).
Warner Instruments offers 150, 250, 375 µm thick gaskets which are
listed on the facing page.
42
RC-30HV and RC-30WA
Specifications
Physical Dimensions (H x D)
9.5 x 82 mm
Weight
< 90 g, assembled with optional heaters
Base and Pressure Plate
Aluminum, black anodized
Top Coverslip Plate
Polycarbonate
Gaskets
Silicone rubber
Viewing Aperture
Top
Bottom
Input/Output Tubing
PE-90
RC-30/30 HV
25.4 mm
17.8 mm
Coverslips for RC-30, RC-30HV
Top: 22 x 30 mm; Bottom: 22 x 40 mm
RC-30 WA
34.5 mm
25.4 mm
Coverslips for RC-30WA
Top: 30 mm round; Bottom: 40 mm round
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 30 chambers
RC-30, RC-30HV and RC-30WA
Confocal Imaging Chambers (continued)
Order #
Model
W4 64-0320
RC-30
W4 64-0321
RC-30HV
W4 64-0321WA RC-30WA
Product
Confocal Imaging Chamber
Confocal Imaging Chamber
Confocal Imaging Chamber
Chambers
RH-3
W4 64-0322
W4 64-0324
W4 64-0325
W4 64-0326
Replacement Heating Elements
W4 64-0327
W4 64-0328
W4 64-0329
W4 64-0377
W4 64-0379
W4 64-0380
W4 64-1456
SA-30NIK
Nikon Diaphot/TE200/TE300/
TE2000
SA-30TMS/9 Nikon TMS with 9 x 13 cm
Cut-Out
SA-30/OLY2
Olympus IMT-2/IX-50/IX-70/
BX-50WI
SA-30LZ
Zeiss Axiovert 211 x 230
Specimen Stage
SA-30KZ
Zeiss Axiovert 85 x 130
Mechanical (K) Stage
SA-30L3P
Leica Dmirb/E with 3-Plate
Mechanical Stage
SA-30PLI
Prior & Ludl Motorized Stage
SA-30GALVOZ Leica Galvo Z Upright Stage
SA-30UUZ
Zeiss LSM510
SA-30UU
Nikon E400/E600/E800
SA-30GALVZi Leica Galvo Z Inverted Stage
series 30 chambers
Series 30 Stage Adapters
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0330
GS-30L/10
W4 64-0331
GS-30L/15
W4 64-0332
GS-30S/10
W4 64-0333
GS-30S/15
W4 64-0334
GS-30B/10
W4 64-0335
GS-30B/15
W4 64-0341
GS-30B/4
W4 64-0342
GS-30L/4
W4 64-0343
GS-30S/4
W4 64-1464
RC30TCP
W4 64-1464WA RC30TCPWA
W4 64-0706
W4 64-0707
W4 64-1499
W4 64-1500
W4 64-1559
CS-22/30
CS-22/40
CS-30R
CS-40R
RH-3
Replacement Gaskets,
Large Bath, 250 µm thickness,
pkg. of 10
Replacement Gaskets,
Large Bath, 375 µm thickness,
pkg. of 10
Replacement Gaskets,
Slotted Bath, 250 µm thickness,
pkg. of 10
Replacement Gaskets,
Slotted Bath, 375 µm thickness,
pkg. of 10
Replacement Gaskets, Blank,
250 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
Replacement Gaskets, Blank,
375 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
Replacement Gaskets, Blank,
150 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
Replacement Gaskets,
Large Bath, 150 µm thickness,
pkg. of 10
Replacement Gaskets,
Slotted Bath, 150 µm thickness,
pkg. of 10
Replacement Top
Coverslip Plate
Replacement Top Coverslip
Plate for RC-30 WA
Coverslips #1 Thickness (50)
Coverslips #1 Thickness (50)
Coverslips #1.5 Thickness (90)
Coverslips #1 Thickness (60)
Replacement Heating
Elements, 2/pkg.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
43
series 30 chambers
NEW Model RC-31
A Low Profile, Parallel Plate Flow Chamber
Chambers
Gaskets
22.5 mm viewing aperture
series 30 chambers
Stainless steel
pressure plate
Heating elements
Perfusion Ports
Chamber forming gasket
Anodized aluminum base
Pre-cut gaskets are supplied with the chamber; one cut wide to allow full
use of the aperture window (17.7 mm diameter) and a narrow, slotted
version (4 x 37 mm) for fast solution exchange and blank gaskets for
customized bath shapes.
The bath volumes for these pre-cut, 250 µm thick gaskets are 26 µl for the
slotted cut and 133 µl for the wide cut.
• Adjustable distance between upper and lower
coverslips, 50 µm to 350 µm
• Optimal control of culture conditions and
cellular environment
• Compatible with both upright and inverted
microscopes
• Amenable for long term studies using live cells
Order #
Model
W4 64-1685
RC-31
Confocal Imaging Chamber
W4 64-0330
GS-30L/10
Replacement Gaskets, Large Bath,
250 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
W4 64-0331
GS-30L/15
Replacement Gaskets, Large Bath,
375 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
W4 64-0332
GS-30S/10
Replacement Gaskets, Slotted Bath,
250 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
W4 64-0333
GS-30S/15
Replacement Gaskets, Slotted Bath,
375 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
W4 64-0334
GS-30B/10
Replacement Gaskets, Blank,
250 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
W4 64-0335
GS-30B/15
Replacement Gaskets,Blank,
375 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
W4 64-0341
GS-30B/4
Replacement Gaskets,Blank,
125 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
Variable Bath Volume/Fast Perfusate Exchange:
W4 64-0342
GS-30L/4
Replacement Gaskets, Large Bath,
125 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
The side walls of the RC-31 bath is formed by a silicone gasket
sandwiched between the top and bottom coverslips. Wall height
(i.e. spacing between the two coverslips) can range from 50-350
µm and is defined by the thickness and number of gaskets used.
Blank gaskets are supplied with the chamber permitting the
development of the customized bath geometry required for
individual applications.
W4 64-0343
GS-30S/4
Replacement Gaskets, Slotted Bath,
125 µm thickness, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1499
CS-30R
Coverslips #1.5 Thickness (90)
W4 64-1500
CS-40R
Coverslips #1 Thickness (60)
The RC-31 is closed bath low profile chamber incorporating
special features for microscopic confocal imaging.
These features include user defined bath geometry and a large
viewing area. A 30 mm, #1.5 glass coverslip forms the top of the
chamber, while a 40 mm, #1 coverslip forms the bottom,
respectively, creating a closed bath. The closed design allows the
chamber to be inverted in the mounting platform enabling its use
with both inverted or upright microscopes. The final viewing
aperture is 25 mm diameter.
44
Product
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 30 chambers
CV-30 CytoViva™ Environment Chamber
CV-30 Specifications
Physical Dimensions (H x W x D)
9.4 x 85.6 x 128 mm
Weight
240 g
Base and Pressure Plate
Aluminum, black anodized
Top Coverslip Plate
Polycarbonate
Gaskets
Silicone rubber
Input/Output Tubing
PE-90 (0.86 x 1.27 mm)
Coverslips
Top 30 mm dia. x #1.5
Bottom 40 mm dia. x 1.1 mm
Order #
Model
W4 64-1637 CV-30
series 30 chambers
The RC-30 specifically adapted for the CytoViva Imaging System
Chambers
Confocal Imaging Chambers
Product
Imaging Chamber for CytoViva™
Accessories/Replacement Parts
• Designed for the CytoViva high resolution
imaging system
• Allows long-term studies of live cells
• Supports oil immersion contact with the CytoViva
high resolution illumination system
• Simultaneous observation of fluorescent and
non-fluorescent samples
™
W4 64-1499
Coverslips 30 mm Dia. #1.5 90/ pk
W4 64-1638
Coverslips 40 mm Dia. x 1.1 mm 10/ pk
W4 64-0330
Large bath gasket, 250µm thick
W4 64-0331
Large bath gasket, 375µm thick
W4 64-0332
Slotted bath gasket, 250µm thick
W4 64-0333
Slotted bath gasket, 375µm thick
W4 64-0334
Blank bath gasket, 250µm thick
W4 64-0335
Blank bath gasket, 375µm thick
The CV-30 chamber is compatible with Warner TC-324B and TC-344B
Temperature Controllers which can be ordered separately along with a
CC-28 cable.
The CV-30 Live Cell Imaging Chamber is a low profile chamber designed
specifically for the CytoViva™ Imaging System. This closed-bath chamber
incorporates special features for imaging and is compatible with any
microscope stage capable of accepting a multi-well plate. The CV-30 also
can attach to microscope stages having a standard microscope slide adapter.
The CV-30 Live Cell Imaging Chamber features a user defined bath
geometry, volume, and large viewing area. A #1.5 thickness glass
coverslip, (0.17 mm) forms the top of the chamber while a 1 mm thick
round coverslip forms the bottom. This allows the CV-30 to be used with
CytoViva™’s high resolution adapter.
The side wall of the bath is formed by use of silicone gaskets sandwiched
between the upper and lower coverslips. Wall height (or spacing between
the coverslips) can range from 250 to 1000 µm and is defined by the
thickness and number of gaskets used.
Blank gaskets are supplied permitting the development of customized bath
geometries as required by your application. Pre-cut gaskets are also supplied
with the chamber; one cut wide to allow full use of the large diameter aperture
window and a narrow, slotted version targeted towards fast solution exchange.
Included components
The CV-30 comes complete with the following components: CV-30
chamber with universal slide holder connecter, a pressure plate wrench, a
lift-out tool, one package of #1.5 thickness, 30 mm round coverslips, one
package of 1 mm thick, 40 mm round coverslips, one 10 pack, each, of
blank, narrow slotted, and wide slotted gaskets in both 250 and 375 µm
thicknesses, and 10 feet of PE-90 tubing.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
45
culture dish inserts
RC-33DL, RC-33DM, RC-33SM, RC-33SN, RC-33/KIT
Disposable Perfusion Inserts for 35 mm Dishes
Chambers
Chamber inserts for 35 mm culture dishes
BATH DIMENSIONS
33.5 mm
culture dish inserts
RC-33DM
Volume:
152 µl*
9.5 mm
24.5 mm
2.4 mm
RC-33DL
15.2 mm
Volume:
241 µl*
24.5 mm
• Low cost disposable chamber inserts for
35 mm dishes
• Slot-shaped bath for applications requiring
rapid perfusion
• Warner’s diamond-shaped bath in the large
bath versions
• Both temperature and perfusion control are
possible when used with QE-1 Quick Exchange
Platform
24.5 mm
The RC-33DL, RC-33DM, RC-33SM, and RC-33SN chambers are designed
to drop into a 35 mm dish to create a low cost perfusion chamber. A thin
coating of silicone grease forms a seal between the insert and dish.
Volume:
118 µl*
24.5 mm
The diamond shaped baths of the RC-33DL and RC-33DM provide a larger
working area while maintaining good flow characteristics. A suction well
is incorporated into all inserts to insure quiet operation.
*All volumes are for 1 mm solution height
Order #
Model
Chamber Insert Diamond
Large Bath, 6 Pack
W4 64-1481 RC-33DM
Chamber Insert Diamond
Medium Bath, 6 Pack
W4 64-1484 RC-33SM
Chamber Insert Slotted Large
Bath, 6 Pack
W4 64-1483 RC-33SN
Chamber Insert Slotted Narrow
Bath, 6 Pack
W4 64-1485 RC-33Kit
Chamber Inserts Assortment
12 Pack, 3 of each type
Disposable Perfusion Insert Fit:
Corning
MatTek (Corning glass bottom)
46
Product
W4 64-1482 RC-33DL
NOTE: Verify the inner diameter of your culture dish before ordering.
Nunc
Volume:
77 µl*
RC-33SM
6 mm
The low volume of the RC-33SM and RC-33SN slotted bath chambers and
the natural laminar flow allows rapid exchange of solution, facilitating
drug application studies.
Chambers are sold six to a package. A twelve pack is also available
containing three of each chamber type.
RC-33SN
3.2 mm
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
culture dish inserts
RC-37F and RC-37W
Cell Culture Dish Perfusion Chamber Insert
Chambers
Chamber inserts with perfusion for 35 mm culture dishes
Aspirator
culture dish inserts
Agar Bridge Well
Perfusion
Inlet Port
RC-37F
RC-37W
• Designed for glass bottom 35 mm culture dishes
• Permits imaging, recording, and perfusion in the
culture dish
• Open and closed bath designs
• Incorporates Warner’s diamond fluidics
• Ideal for rapid screening assays
Top View
RC-37W
9.4 mm
15.2 mm
27 mm
34.5 mm
Volume: 110 µl
Volume: 220 µl
The introduction of thin glass bottom culture dishes has expanded the
use of these popular tools dramatically. Applications such as live cell
imaging, confocal microscopy and time-lapsed photography are now
possible. The ability to exchange the extracellular environment by
perfusion 35 mm dishes has been difficult at best, until now.
The RC-37 Perfusion Chamber Inserts for cell culture dishes makes
perfusion within these dishes a simple matter. Fluid is delivered to a
perfusion inlet port and removed from the chamber by means of a height
adjustable aspirator. A thin coating of silicone grease forms a seal
between the insert and dish.
Inserts are available to fit the Willco Wells, Corning, MatTek, Nunc and
Falcon 35 mm dishes. The chamber is compatible with the DH-35i and
DH40i Culture Dish Incubators and the QE-1 Quick Exchange Platform.
Each chamber is supplied with 1 foot of C-Flex tubing and 10 feet of
PE-160 tubing.
RC-37F
Volumes are for 1 mm solution height
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0348 RC-37F
Chamber Insert
for Corning, MatTek, Nunc,
and Falcon 35 mm Dishes
W4 64-0347 RC-37W
Chamber Insert
for Willco 35 mm Dishes
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
47
culture dish inserts
RC-37FC and RC-37WC
Closed Bath Chambers
Chambers
Closed bath chamber inserts with perfusion for 35 mm culture dishes
Top Coverslip
Retainer
Perfusion
Outlet Port
culture dish inserts
RC-37WC
RC-37FC
9.4 mm
15.2 mm
27.4 mm
34.0 mm
Volume: 113 µl
Volume: 185 µl
Perfusion
Inlet Port
RC-37WC
RC-37FC
• Designed for glass bottom 35 mm dishes
• Permits imaging and perfusion in the cell
culture dish
• Incorporates Warner’s diamond fluidics
• Ideal for rapid screening assays
The RC-37 family of perfusion chamber inserts makes perfusion of cell
culture dishes a simple matter. The closed bath promotes an even
solution exchange and eliminates changes in focus due to alterations in
bath height. In addition, studies involving physiological bicarbonate
buffers can be performed with no gas loss at the chamber interface.
Fluid is delivered to a 18 gauge perfusion inlet port and removed from
the chamber by means of an outlet port of the same gauge. The top
coverslip is held in place with a retainer and the dish becomes the
chamber bottom. A thin coating of silicone grease forms the seal between
chamber and dish. The distance between top and bottom coverslips is 1
mm. The RC-37WC uses 15 mm top coverslips and the RC-37FC works
with 18 mm coverslips.
The RC-37WC fits in the Willco Wells dishes while the RC-37FC fits Nunc,
Falcon, MatTek or Corning 35 mm dishes. Warner’s DH-35 Culture Dish
Heater may be used to heat the Corning, MatTek and Willco Wells
35 mm culture dishes. Warner’s DH-35i and DH-40i Culture Dish
Incubators and the QE-1 Quick Change Heated Base are compatible with
all 35 mm culture dishes.
The RC-37WC is supplied with one box of #1 thickness coverslips
(CS15R, 15 mm round, 100/pkg) and the RC-37FC is supplied with one box
of #1 thickness coverslips (CS18R, 18 mm round, 100/pkg). Both
chambers are supplied with 10 feet of PE-160 polyethylene tubing and
tools to remove the top coverslip retainer.
48
Top View
Volumes are for 1 mm solution height
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0364
RC-37FC
Chamber Insert Closed for
Corning, MatTek, Nunc or Falcon
35 mm Dishes
W4 64-0363
RC-37WC
Chamber Insert Closed for
Willco 35 mm Dishes
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0703
CS-15R
Coverslips 15 mm diameter
#1 Thickness – Box of 100
W4 64-0384
CS-18R
Coverslips 18 mm diameter
#1 Thickness – Box of 100
W4 64-0758
D3522P
Glass Bottom Cell Culture
Dishes – 20/Pouch
W4 64-0762
D3522B
Glass Bottom Cell Culture
Dishes – Pkg of 120
W4 64-0378
111-KIT
Silicone Grease Kit with
Brushes and Pallets
W4 64-0110
DH-35
35 mm Culture Dish Heater
W4 64-0349
DH-35i
Culture Dish Incubation System
W4 64-0388
DH-40i
Culture Dish Incubation System
W4 64-0375
QE-1
Quick Exchange Heated Base
w/Perfusion and Adapter Ring Kit
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
culture dish inserts
RC-37FS and RC-37WS
Perfusion Chamber Inserts with Field Stimulation
Top View
RC-37WS
Perfusion
Outlet
Port
24.0 mm
Agar
Bridge
Well
Platinum
Wires
RC-37FS
18.0 mm
Perfusion
Inlet Port
6.0 mm
6.0 mm
RC-37WS
culture dish inserts
Chambers
Chamber inserts with perfusion for 35 mm culture dishes allowing field stimulation
RC-37FS
27.4 mm
• Designed for glass bottom 35 mm dishes
• Permits imaging and perfusion in the cell
culture dish
• Platinum field stimulation electrodes
• Ideal for rapid screening assays
34.0 mm
Volume: 105 µl
Volume: 144 µl
Volumes are for 1 mm solution height
The latest member of the RC-37 family of perfusion chamber inserts is
designed for applications requiring field stimulation and includes a pair
of platinum electrodes. Both versions feature a slotted bath to promote
a laminar solution flow and to ensure an even electrical field.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0366
RC-37FS
Chamber Insert Closed for
Corning, MatTek, Nunc or Falcon
35 mm Dishes
These models include a perfusion inlet port and a 16 gauge, height
adjustable aspirator. An agar bridge well has been added to
accommodate a bath ground electrode. A thin coating of silicone
grease forms the seal between dish and chamber.
W4 64-0365
RC-37WS Chamber Insert Closed for
Willco 35 mm Dishes
The RC-37WS fits in the Willco Wells dishes; the RC-37FS fits the Nunc,
Corning, MatTek and Falcon 35 mm dishes. Warner’s DH-35 Culture Dish
Heater may be used to heat the Corning, MatTek and Willco Wells 35 mm
culture dishes. All 35 mm dishes, including Falcon 35 mm dishes, are
compatible with Warner’s DH-35i and DH-40i Culture Dish Incubators and
the QE-1 Quick Change Heated Base.
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0758
D3522P
Willco Wells Glass Bottom
Cell Culture Dishes – 20/Pouch
W4 64-0762
D3522B
Willco Wells Glass Bottom
Cell Culture Dishes – Pkg of 120
W4 64-0378
111-KIT
Silicone Grease Kit with
Brushes and Pallets
W4 64-1424
SIU-102
Stimulus Isolation Unit
W4 64-1425
CC-102
Cable, Male Banana to 1 mm
jacks (for use with Warner Field
Stimulation Chambers)
W4 64-0110
DH-35
35 mm Culture Dish Heater
W4 64-0349
DH-35i
Culture Dish Incubation System
W4 64-0388
DH-40i
Culture Dish Incubation System
W4 64-0375
QE-1
Quick Exchange Heated Base
w/Perfusion and Adapter Ring Kit
Chambers are supplied with 10 feet of PE-160 polyethylene tubing.
The SIU-102 is a bipolar stimulator designed for use with field
stimulation chambers. This instrument features constant current and
constant voltage modes, as well as bipolar, pulse, and DC modes.
Optical coupling is used to electronically isolate the stimulator from
the pulse source. Currents up to 100 mA and voltages up to 100 V
are also supported. See page 247 for details.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
49
series 40 chambers
RC-40 Series Chambers
Quick Change Coverslip Bottom Imaging Chambers
Chambers
Imaging chambers designed to fit the QE-1 and DH Series heated platforms
series 40 chambers
Narrow Bath
Field
Stimulation
Closed Bath
Mount coverslips in seconds
Low Profile
• O-ring seals permit quick exchange of coverslips
• Anodized aluminum base ensures good
heat transfer
• Open and closed bath designs
• Use standard #1 or #1.5 thickness coverslips
• Ideal for rapid screening assays
Warner Instruments recognized the need for chambers designed for rapid
screening of cells grown on coverslips. The innovative design of RC-40
chambers uses O-rings to seal the coverslip to the polycarbonate
chamber. Therefore little or no silicone grease is needed and mechanical
fasteners are not required for coverslip mounting.
Chambers are available for use with 12, 15, 18, and 25 mm round
coverslips. Round, low profile chambers maximize the viewing area and
provide optimal access for electrodes. Slotted bath chambers allow rapid
solution exchange. A version which includes platinum wires may be used
to study cardiac myocytes and other applications requiring field
stimulation. The RC-40HP High Profile Chamber allows for a deep bath.
QE-1
Quick Exchange
Platform
The Warner QE-1 Quick Exchange
Platform is a versatile base for
the RC-40 Series chambers, as
well as many popular 35 mm
glass bottom dishes. Removable perfusion and suction tubes allow
solution exchange in any of the RC-40 Series open bath chambers or
35 mm dishes. The platform may be heated using any of the Warner
temperature controllers. The QE-1 can be mounted on most
microscopes by using the Warner Series 20 stage adapters.
See page 172 for more information on the QE-1.
The Series 40 chambers are designed to be compatible with the Warner
QE-1 Quick Exchange Platform and the DH-35i and DH-40i Culture Dish
Incubators.
50
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 40 chambers
RC-40LP, RC-41LP, RC-42LP, RC-48LP
Bath Dimensions
40 mm
RC-42LP
RC-48LP
Volumes are for
1 mm solution height
RC-40LP
25 mm coverslip
Volume:
308 µl
19.7 mm
RC-40LP
RC-41LP
18 mm coverslip
Volume:
139 µl
RC-41LP
13.3 mm
• Low profile design permits low entry angle
of electrodes
• Excellent optical and mechanical access to cells
and tissue
• When used with QE-1 Quick Exchange Platform,
both temperature and perfusion control are
possible
RC-42LP
15 mm coverslip
Volume:
87 µl
10.5 mm
RC-48LP
12 mm coverslip
Volume:
64 µl
9.0 mm
The Series 40 family of chambers was designed for research requiring
fast exchange of coverslips. The chamber design consists of two parts:
a polycarbonate chamber and a 40 mm diameter aluminum base. O-rings
are used to seal the coverslip to the polycarbonate chamber and to hold
the chamber securely in the aluminum base.
Open bath models are designed for electrophysiological recording and/or
optical imaging, and are used in applications including patch clamp,
oocyte clamp, and physiological measurements on cell cultures and tissue
preparations. The low profile design permits good electrode access to
the bath.
The RC-40LP, 41LP, 42LP and 48LP chambers use 25, 18, 15 and 12 mm
round coverslips, respectively, in a round bath design to provide maximum
viewing area. These chambers work equally well with both water and oil
immersion objectives.
The RC-40LP, 41LP, 42LP and 48LP Chambers are supplied with one
package of #1.5 coverslips each (25, 18, 15 and 12 mm round,
respectively) and spare O-rings. Slice anchors available for RC-40, RC-41
and RC-42, see page 71.
series 40 chambers
Open bath chambers for round coverslips
Chambers
Low Profile Chambers for 12, 15, 18 and 25 mm Coverslips
4.9 mm
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0367
RC-40LP
Quick Change Chamber
25 mm Low Profile
W4 64-0368
RC-41LP
Quick Change Chamber
18 mm Low Profile
W4 64-0369
RC-42LP
Quick Change Chamber
15 mm Low Profile
W4 64-0387
RC-48LP
Quick Change Chamber
12 mm Low Profile
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0375
QE-1
Quick Exchange Heated Base
for RC-40 Series
W4 64-0702
CS-12R
Coverslips 12 mm dia. #1, Box /100
W4 64-0703
CS-15R
Coverslips 15 mm dia. #1, Box /100
W4 64-0384
CS-18R
Coverslips 18 mm dia. #1, Box /100
W4 64-0705
CS-25R
Coverslips 25 mm dia. #1, Box /100
W4 64-0712
CS-12R15
Coverslips 12 mm dia. #1.5, Box /100
W4 64-0713
CS-15R15
Coverslips 15 mm dia. #1.5, Box /100
W4 64-0714
CS-18R15
Coverslips 18 mm dia. #1.5, Box /100
W4 64-0715
CS-25R15
Coverslips 25 mm dia. #1.5, Box /100
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
51
series 40 chambers
RC-40HP and RC-43C
High Profile and Closed Bath Chambers
Chambers
Closed bath chamber for round coverslips
Bath Dimensions
series 40 chambers
25 mm coverslip
RC-43C
RC-40HP
Volume:
308 µl
RC-40HP
19.7 mm
• O-ring seals permit quick exchange of coverslips
• Anodized aluminum base ensures good
heat transfer
• Open and closed bath designs
• Use standard #1 or #1.5 thickness coverslips
• Ideal for rapid screening assays
6.5 mm
18 mm top coverslip
RC-43C
The RC-40HP uses a 25 mm coverslip to form the chamber bottom. The
6.5 mm tapered interior sides provide clearance for pipettes, injectors,
etc. and allow for a greater bath depth than the 40LP Series.
Volume:
213 µl
The RC-40HP Chamber is supplied with one package of 25 mm diameter
#1.5 coverslips.
The RC-43C is the closed bath member of the Series 40 family. The closed
bath design promotes an even solution exchange and eliminates changes
in focus due to alterations in bath height. Studies involving physiological
bicarbonate buffers can be performed with no gas loss at the chamber
interface.
Fluid is delivered to a 20 gauge stainless steel perfusion inlet port and
removed from the chamber by means of a similar outlet port. The top
coverslip is held in place with a retainer. A thin coating of silicone grease
forms the seal between chamber and coverglass. The distance between
top and bottom coverslips is 1 mm.
The RC-43C Chamber is supplied with one package each of #1.5
coverslips (25 and 18 mm round, respectively) and spare O-rings.
Additionally, the RC-43C is supplied with 10 feet of PE-160 and PE-90
polyethylene tubing. Slice anchors available for RC-40, see page 71.
25 mm bottom
coverslip
15.8 mm
6.3 mm
Input/Output Tubing PE-90
Volumes are for 1 mm solution height
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0370 RC-40HP
Quick Change Chamber, High Profile
W4 64-0371 RC-43C
Quick Change Chamber, Closed Bath
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0375 QE-1
Quick Exchange Heated Base
W4 64-0384 CS-18R
Coverslips 18 mm Dia. #1, Box /100
W4 64-0705 CS-25R
Coverslips 25 mm Dia. #1, Box /100
W4 64-0714 CS-18R15
Coverslips 18 mm Dia. #1.5, Box /100
W4 64-0715 CS-25R15
Coverslips 25 mm Dia. #1.5, Box /100
W4 64-0754 PE-90/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10 Polyethylene Tubing
52
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
series 40 chambers
RC-46SLP, RC-46SNLP and RC-47FSLP
Slotted Bath Low Profile Chambers
Bath Dimensions
40 mm
All chambers
use 25 mm
coverslips
RC-46SNLP
4 mm
Volume:
75 µl
RC-46SNLP
18.9 mm
RC-47FSLP
RC-46SLP
RC-46SLP
6.5 mm
• Low profile design permits low entry angle
for electrodes
• Slotted bath for applications requiring rapid
perfusion
• Platinum electrodes for applications requiring
field stimulation
• When used with QE-1 Quick Exchange Platform,
both temperature control and perfusion are
possible
Volume:
118 µl
18.9 mm
4.9 mm
RC-47FSLP
6.5 mm
Volume:
118 µl
Agar Bridge Well
18.5 mm
The RC-46SLP, RC-46SNLP, and RC-47FSLP chambers use a 25 mm
round coverslip in a slotted bath design to provide rapid solution
exchange. O-rings seal the coverslip to the polycarbonate chamber
and hold the chamber securely in the aluminum base.
11.5 mm
The low volume of these slotted bath chambers and the natural laminar
flow allows rapid exchange of solution, facilitating drug application
studies.
The RC-47FSLP includes a pair of platinum wires placed onto the parallel
sides of the oval shaped bath. The 15 cm long connecting wires are
terminated in 1 mm pins. This model includes a perfusion inlet port and
a 16 gauge adjustable suction tube. An agar bridge well has been added
to accommodate a bath ground electrode.
All chambers mount into the QE-1 Quick Exchange and DH Series
Platforms and feature a 19.7 mm diameter aperture in the aluminum base.
Chambers are supplied with one box of #1.5 thickness, 25 mm coverslips
and spare O-rings. Additionally, RC-47FSLP is supplied with 10 feet of
PE-160 polyethylene tubing.
The SIU-102 is a bipolar stimulator designed for use with field
stimulation chambers. This instrument features constant current and
constant voltage modes, as well as bipolar, pulse, and DC modes.
Optical coupling is used to electronically isolate the stimulator from
the pulse source. Currents up to 100 mA and voltages up to 100 V are
also supported. See page 247 for details.
series 40 chambers
Chambers
Slotted bath with and without field stimulation
4.9 mm
Volumes are for 1 mm solution height
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0372
RC-46SLP
Quick Change Chamber
Slotted Bath
W4 64-0373
RC-46SNLP
Quick Change Chamber
Narrow Slotted Bath
W4 64-0374
RC-47FSLP
Quick Change Chamber
w/ Field Stimulation
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0375
QE-1
Quick Exchange Heated Base
W4 64-0705
CS-25R
Coverslips 25 mm Dia. #1 Box/100
W4 64-0715
CS-25R15
Coverslips 25 mm Dia. #1.5 Box/100
W4 64-1424
SIU-102
Stimulus Isolation Unit
W4 64-1425
CC-102
Cable, male banana to 1 mm
jacks (for use with Warner field
stimulation chambers)
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
53
series 40 chambers
NEW RC-49FS
Perfusion Chamber with Field Stimulation for 18mm Coverslips
Chambers
80 mm
13.4 mm
series 40 chambers
10 mm
Agar Bridge Well
Bath volume: 108 µl/mm solution height
• O-Ring seal permits quick exchange of coverslips
• Low profile design allows low entry angle
electrodes
• Platinum field stimulation electrodes
• Uses popular 18 mm round coverslips
The latest member of our family of field stimulation chambers is designed
to maximize electrode access. The RC-49FS features a diamond shaped
bath to promote laminar solution flow and a pair of easy to remove
platinum field stimulation electrodes.
The low volume and natural laminar flow allows rapid exchange of
solution, facilitating drug application studies. O-rings on the chamber
base form a quick seal on a standard 18 mm, #1.5 thickness coverslip.
A replaceable pair of platinum wires are terminated in 1 mm gold pins on
both ends for easy connection to a field stimulator. The RC-49FS uses
Warner’s Series 20 Stage Adapters for mounting onto a microscope.
The RC-49FS includes suction and perfusion tubes, a package of #1.5
thickness coverslips (CS-18R15), 10 feet of PE-160 polyethylene tubing,
and spare o-rings.
RC-49FS Shown in a Leica Galvo stage adapter
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1709 RC-49FS
Imaging / recording chamber with
removable electrodes
W4 64-1710 SE-49
Replacement stimulation electrodes
W4 64-0714 CS-18R15 Coverslips, 18 mm dia. #1.5, Box/100
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10 Polyethylene Tubing
54
W4 64-1424 SIU-102
Stimulus Isolation Unit
W4 64-1425 CC-102
Cable, male banana to 1 mm jacks
(for use with Warner field stimulation
chambers)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
RC-50
series 50 chambers
Imaging Chambers for Transepithelial Studies
RC-50
Chambers
A low profile, horizontally mounted Ussing chamber for imaging
RC-50
series 50 chambers
Pressure
Plate Wrench
Pressure
Plate
Top
Coverslip
Retaining
Ring
• Custom round or slotted apertures to
accommodate a variety of tissues sizes
• Excellent optical access
• Accommodates both upright and inverted
microscopes
The RC-50 is a low profile, horizontally mounted Ussing chamber
incorporating special features for confocal imaging. In particular, the
chamber can be configured to use either gravity or pump driven perfusion.
In addition, the apical (upper) chamber can be assembled in either an
open or closed configuration. The basolateral chamber has been designed
to facilitate placement and stretching of hard to handle tissue such as
trachea. Suture pins are provided to act as anchor points for suture lines.
A #1 glass coverslip forms both the top and bottom of the chamber,
allowing it to be used with both inverted and upright microscopes. While
the chamber bottom is beveled to permit maximum access to the bottom
coverslip, the chamber body can also be inverted to allow access to the
other side. The viewing aperture in the chamber basolateral section is
17.7 mm in diameter and the viewing aperture in the chamber apical
section is 22.8 mm.
The RC-50 includes a pair of resistive heater elements mounted to the
chamber base. Heater elements are compatible with Warner TC-324B
and TC-344B Heater Controllers.
The RC-50 requires the use of a Series 30 Stage Adapter for mounting
onto a microscope, see next page.
The RC-50 is supplied with a package of #1 thickness bottom coverslips
(CS-22/40, 22 x 40 mm, 100/pkg), a package of #1 thickness top
coverslips (CS-25R, 25 mm round, 100/pkg), a suction tube with magnetic
clamp, and 10 feet each of PE-90 and PE-160 polyethylene tubing.
Top Coverslip
25 mm
Apical
Chamber
Open Bath Cover
Perfusion
Port
Basolateral
Perfusion
Port
Suture
Pins
Bottom
Coverslip
22 x 40 mm
Basolateral
Chamber
Platform
Specifications
Physical Dimensions
12.4 mm H x 82 mm D
Weight
<110 g, assembled with heaters
Platform and Pressure Plate
Aluminum, black anodized
Coverslip Plates
Polycarbonate
Input/Output Tubing
PE-90
Coverslips (#1) Top: 25 mm; Bottom: 22 x 40 mm
Aperture (basolateral)
17.7 mm
Aperture (apical)
22.8 mm
Working Distance (basolateral)
0.375 mm
Working Distance (apical)
includes coverslip
1.15 mm
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
55
RC-50
series 50 chambers
Imaging Chambers for Transepithelial Studies (continued)
Chambers
series 50 chambers
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0605
RC-50
Imaging Chamber for Transepithelial Studies, custom aperture
W4 64-0606
RC-50-R3
Imaging Chamber for Transepithelial Studies, 3 mm round
W4 64-0607
RC-50-R15
Imaging Chamber for Transepithelial Studies, 15 mm round
W4 64-0608
RC-50-S3X7
Imaging Chamber for Transepithelial Studies, 3 x 7 mm slot
W4 64-0609
RC-50-S2.5X10
Imaging Chamber for Transepithelial Studies, 2.5 x 10 mm slot
W4 64-0610
RC-50-D15X10
Imaging Chamber for Transepithelial Studies, 15 x 10 mm diamond
Replacement Imaging Chamber Inserts
W4 64-0611
BA-R3
RC-50 Imaging Chamber Round Insert, 3 mm diameter
W4 64-0612
BA-R15
RC-50 Imaging Chamber Round Insert, 15 mm diameter
W4 64-0613
BA-S3X7
RC-50 Imaging Chamber Slotted Insert, 3 x 7 mm slot
W4 64-0614
BA-S2.5X10
RC-50 Imaging Chamber Slotted Insert, 2.5 x 10 mm slot
W4 64-0615
BA-D15X10
RC-50 Imaging Chamber Diamond Insert, 15 x 10 mm diamond
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0754
PE-90/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0707
CS-22/40
Coverslips, 22 x 40 mm #1, 50/box
W4 64-0705
CS-25R
Coverslips, 25 mm, round
Series 30 Stage Adapters
56
W4 64-0322
SA-30NIK
Stage Adapter for Nikon Diaphot / TE200 / TE300
W4 64-0324
SA-30TMS9
Stage Adapter for Nikon TMS with 9 x 13 cm cutout
W4 64-0325
SA-30/OLY2
Stage Adapter for Olympus IMT-2 / IX-50 / IX-70 / BX-50WI
W4 64-0326
SA-30LZ
Stage Adapter for use with Zeiss Axiovert 211 x 230 Specimen Stage
W4 64-0327
SA-30KZ
Stage Adapter for Zeiss Axiovert 85 x 130 Mechanical (K) Stage
W4 64-0328
SA-30L3P
Stage Adapter for Leica Dmirbe/E with 3-Plate Mechanical Stage
W4 64-0329
SA-30PLI
Stage Adapter for Prior & Ludl Motorized Stage
W4 64-0377
SA-30GALVO Z
Stage Adapter for Leica Galvo Z Stage
W4 64-0379
SA-30UUZ
Stage Adapter for Zeiss LSM510
W4 64-0380
SA-30UU
Stage Adapter for use with Nikon E400/E600/E800
W4 64-1456
SA-30GALZi
Stage Adapter for Leica Galvo Z Inverted Stage
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
shear flow chamber
The system consists of a top plate and two bottom plates. One bottom
plate allows the formation of a single-sided flow chamber for use with
cultured cells, and the other bottom plate allows the formation of a
double-sided flow chamber for use with isolated sections or for
conditions where controlled flow is desired on both sides of a structure.
Chambers
NEW PFC-1 Proflow Shear Flow Chamber
The PFC-1 comes complete with chamber top, two chamber bases, precut
gaskets (10 pk), 15 mm round coverslips (# 1.5 thickness, 100 pk,
CS-15R15), 25 mm round coverslips (#2 thickness, 50 pk, CS-25R20)
and PE-90 tubing (10 ft).
Order #
Model Product
W4 64-1860
PFC-1
ProFlow Chamber,
fit Series 30 stage adapters
W4 64-1861
-
ProFlow Gaskets,
0.250 mm thick, 10 pk
W4 64-0713
CS-15R15
15 mm round coverslip, glass,
#1.5 thickness
W4 64-0722
CS-25R20
25 mm round coverslip, glass,
#2 thickness
W4 64-0754
PE-90/10
PE-90 tubing, 10 ft
shear flow chamber
The PFC-1 is designed to fit into our Series 30 stage adapters.
• Computer designed gaskets optimized for
well-defined, well-controlled shear-flow
• Based on technology developed at Case Western
Reserve University
• Single- and dual-flow capable chamber
• Made from polycarbonate for easy cleanup
Warner’s new PFC-1 ProFlow chamber is based on the designs of Dr.
Melissa Knothe Tate, currently of the Case Western Reserve University.
The chamber uses silicone gaskets, similar in approach to our popular
RC-30 chamber, to form a closed-bath area sandwiched between two
opposing glass coverslips. However, the ProFlow chamber uses specially
designed gaskets that optimize the shear-flow dynamics within the bath.
This optimized design results in a nearly uniform shear flow across the
entire width of the bath. This allows the shear force to be more easily
calculated when these gaskets are used.
Precut gaskets are manufactured from medical-grade silicone, are 0.250
mm thick, and can be stacked to achieve bath heights in multiples of a
single gasket. Gaskets are supplied in packs of 10 and can be purchased
separately.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
57
YC-1
yeast cell chamber
Flow Chamber for Yeast Cells
Chambers
yeast cell chamber
• Monitor yeast cell growth using time-lapse
microscopy, while changing media
• Cells grow two dimensionally over multiple
cell cycles
• Change media in seconds without washing
cells out
• Resistive heating or Peltier temperature
control options
Specifications
Material
PDMS Flow cell
(dimensions 50 L x 23 W x 4.5 H mm)
Platform aluminum black anodized,
polycarbonate cover
Bath dimensions (L x W x H)
40 x 0.6 x 0.1 mm
Bath volume
2.4 µl
Coverslips
24 x 50 mm #1 thickness with 40 µm
PDMS coating
Cellulose membranes
24 x 50 mm x 30 µm thick
Research in cell biology often requires scientists to microscopically study
individual live cells under various conditions, such as at different
temperatures or in the presents of different growth media.
Perfusion ports
0.63 mm OD
Order #
Model Product
One particular interest is to monitor individual cell growth using timelapse microscopy while seamlessly and rapidly changing the liquid
environment. The YC-1 flow chamber has been developed to allow
observation of yeast cells proliferating in a bi-dimensional manner over
multiple cell cycles.
W4 64-1678
YC-1
Flow Chamber for Yeast Cells,
Resistive Heaters
W4 64-1679
YC-2
Flow Chamber for Yeast Cells,
Peltier Version
W4 64-1680
PH-10
Heated Platform (Resistive)
W4 64-1682
SIC-4
PDMS Chambers (4)
W4 64-1683
SCS-50
PDMS Coated Coverslips (50)
W4 64-1684
CME-50
Cellulose Membranes (50)
The YC-1 overcomes a common problem encountered in standard timelapse technology: Regular time lapse setups (using agar gel pads) do
not allow media to be changed during the experiment. Standard flow
chambers do not allow for monitoring multiple cell cycles assay since
the progeny is eventually washed out by the flow.
The principle components of the YC-1 microfluidic system include:
1. PDMS flow chamber
2. PDMS coated coverslips
3. Cellulose membranes
4. Temperature controlled platform
Additional components required to complete the system are a
temperature controller, fluid delivery system, and a series 20 microscope
stage adapter.
The YC-1 is designed for use on an inverted microscope.
The YC-1 is supplied with four PDMS microfluidic chambers, fifty PDMS
coated coverslips, fifty cellulose membranes, one chamber platform with
resistive heaters, ten feet of PE-50 tubing, and two 23 gauge blunt end
syringe needles.
58
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
culture dish platforms
Series 20
Classic Series 20 Platforms
P-2
P-3
P-4
P-5
P-6
culture dish platforms
PH-1
Chambers
Anodized aluminum platforms provide clamping between Series 20 chambers and the coverslips
The Warner Series 20 platforms function as a base for Series 20
chambers and provide clamping to make a seal between the chamber and
coverslip. Platforms are machined from aluminum and finished with a
black anodize. This provides excellent heat conductivity and minimizes
stray light reflectance. Platform designs are optimized to provide
maximum heat transfer to the coverslip and still afford excellent access
for objectives.
Platforms can be ordered plain or with resistive heaters. Control of
platform heating is provided by our TC-324B/TC-344B temperature
controllers and a CC-28 cable interface. Heating of perfusate is achieved
using our SH-27B or SF-28 In-line Solution Heaters.
Stage adapters are available for all major microscopes; see pages 64 to
65. Custom or modified stage adapters are also available. Call our
Technical Support Department for details.
Sliding clamps used on most models permit removal of the chamber to
change its coverslip. The P-2 Platform uses a one piece clamp secured
with 4 screws, while all other models use two clamps each with 2 screws
each (i.e. 4 total).
Chamber Model
Aperture
Order #
Plain Platform
Order #
Heater
RC-22/22C/24/24E/24N/
RC-26/26G/26GLP/26Z
JG-23N/HP,WHP,WLP
17.8 mm
W4 64-0277
P-1
W4 64-0284
PH-1
RC-21B/21BR/21BDW/21BRFS
17.5 mm
W4 64-0278
P-2
W4 64-0285
PH-2
RC-25
9.5 mm
W4 64-0279
P-3
W4 64-0286
PH-3
RC-25F
13.0 mm
W4 64-0280
P-4
W4 64-0287
PH-4
RC-20/20H
12.0 mm
W4 64-0281
P-5
W4 64-0288
PH-5
RC-27/27N/27NE/RC-28
19 x 35.6 mm
W4 64-0282
P-6
W4 64-0289
PH-6
RC-27L/RC-29
19 x 35.6 mm
W4 64-0283
P-6D
W4 64-0290
PH-6D
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
59
culture dish platforms
PM Series
Heated Platforms with Magnetic Clamps
Chambers
Heated platforms provide a base for Series 20 chambers and allow easy clamping of coverslip and chamber
PM-1
PM-2
culture dish platforms
PM-3
• Permits the small entry angles ideal for patch
recording
• No screws needed to secure chamber to platform
• Available for all Series 20 chambers
• Magnetic stainless steel allows use of
magnetic holders
• Compatible with all Series 20 stage adapters
PM-4
The Warner PM Series magnetic platforms function as bases for Series
20 chambers and provide clamping to make a seal between chamber and
coverslip. Platforms are machined from aluminum and finished with a
black anodize. This provides excellent heat conductivity and minimizes
stray light reflectance. Platform designs are optimized to provide
maximum heat transfer to the coverslip and still afford excellent access
for objectives.
Four nickel-plated magnets on each side of the platform are used to
secure the clamps. Magnets are sealed in a corrosion resistant coating.
Clamps consist of ferromagnetic stainless steel plates that allow the use
of magnetic devices. No screws are needed for assembly, permitting rapid
replacement of the chamber even in a darkened room.
PM-5
Resistive heating of the platforms is provided by our TC-324B/TC-344B
temperature controllers and a CC-28 cable interface. Heating of perfusate
is achieved using our SH-27B or SF-28 In-line Solution Heaters. All
models include resistive heating elements.
Stage adapters are available for all major microscopes, see pages 64 to
65. Custom or modified stage adapters are also available. Call our
Technical Support Department for details.
79.4 mm
PM-6
4.85 mm
Model PM-1 Side View
60
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
culture dish platforms
PM Series
Heated Platforms with Magnetic Clamps (continued)
PM-1
Eight powerful magnets in each platform provide
plenty of clamping pressure, ensuring a good seal
between chamber and coverslip.
PM-7
culture dish platforms
Chambers
PM-6D
PM-7D
PM-1 w/ RC-22, Nikon stage adapter and CC-28
interface cable
PM-8
Order #
Model
Aperture Size
For Chamber Model
W4 64-1526
PM-1
17.8 mm
RC-22/22C/24/24E/24N/
RC-26/26G/26GLP/26Z,
JG-23N/HP,W/HP,W/LP
W4 64-1561
PM-2
17.5 mm
RC-21B/BR/BDW/BRW/BRFS
W4 64-1562
PM-3
9.5 mm
RC-25
W4 64-1563
PM-4
13.0 mm
RC-25F
W4 64-1564
PM-5
12.0 mm
RC-20/20H
W4 64-1527
PM-6
19.0 x 35.6 mm
RC-27/27N/27NE/28
W4 64-1528
PM-6D
19.0 x 35.6 mm
RC-27L/29
W4 64-1529
PM-7
19.0 x 35.6 mm
RC-27D
W4 64-1530
PM-7D
19.0 x 35.6 mm
RC-27LD
W4 64-1531
PM-8
17.8 mm
RC-26GS
Extra clamps with small footprint.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
61
culture dish platforms
Accessories
Chambers
Heated platforms provide a base for Series 20 chambers and allow easy clamping of coverslip and chamber
Series 20 Interface Cables and Thermistors
CC-28
CC-35
TA-29
TA-30
TS-60P
TS-70B
RH-2
culture dish platforms
CC-15
1.95 mm x 9 mm
Order #
Model Product
W4 64-0303
CC-15
Order #
Model
Product
Interface Cable with connector
with tinned leads
W4 64-0108
TA-30
Cable with Glass Bead Thermistor
W4 64-0269
TS-60P
Replacement Probe Thermistor
for CC-28 and CC-15 Cables
W4 64-0106
CC-28
Interface Cable with connector
for TC-324B/344B
W4 64-0270
TS-70B
W4 64-0109
CC-35
Cable with with 8 pin DIN connector
for TC-324B/344B
Replacement Bead Thermistor
for CC-28 and TA-29 Cables
W4 64-0274
RH-2
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Cable with Bead Thermistor
Replacement Heater Elements
for PH and PM Platforms
Platform and Chamber Parts
Order #
62
0.85 mm x 3.6 mm
STU-1
RPC-1 Clamps & Screws
RPC-2
CR-15
Model Product
W4 64-1429 STU-1
Suction Tube Upgrade Kit with Mag-7
W4 64-1506 RPC-1
Replacement Platform Clamps
W4 64-1507 RPC-2
Replacement Clamps for DH35i,
DH-40i and QE-1
W4 64-0276 CR-15
Coverslip Retainer for RC-20 and
RC-20H
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
culture dish platforms
Accessories (continued)
MCK-1 Magnetic Clamp Kit for Series 20 Chambers
culture dish platforms
Chambers
MCK-1 Magnetic Clamp Kit
Made from magnetic stainless steel and delrin this kit is easily
added to your set-up
• Useful for simple positioning needs
• Complete kits available for all Series 20
platforms
• Includes a variety of holding tools
The MCK-1 Magnetic Clamp Kit provides our classic Series 20 chamber
users with a convenient method of mounting or clamping accessories to
the perfusion chamber. Typical items that may be attached are additional
suction or perfusion tubes, ground electrodes, hold down needles,
thermistor probes or gas jets.
Each kit comes with 4 sets of magnetic stainless steel mounting plates
that fit on all P and PH platforms and 6 magnetic supports. A clamp for
mounting 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) diameter devices has a rotating joint with
locking knob. This clamp is useful for turning a standard electrode holder
into an agar bridge for solution bath grounding. Two included low profile
twin magnets with silicone rubber pads can be used for mounting needle
holddowns. The kit also includes a mechanical clamp with two slits that
can clamp onto small diameter tubing such as a suction tube. The
remaining two clamps are designed for securing ground wires or
thermistors.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0357 MCK-1
Magnetic Clamp Kit
W4 64-0358 MAG-1
Magnetic Clamp for
1/4 inch (6.3 mm) devices
W4 64-0359 MAG-2
Magnetic Clamp 16 g for suction tubes
W4 64-0360 MAG-3
Magnetic Clamp for wires
W4 64-0361 MAG-4
Magnetic Clamp with twin magnetics
Each kit comes with four complete base plate designs,
offering considerable versatility.
MAG-4
MAG-1
MAG-2
MAG-3
Magnets with just the right amount of force are used in the clamp kit
Suction tube holder
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
63
stage adapters
Series 20 & Series 30
Chambers
Black Delrin® stage adapters connect Series 20/Series 30 platforms and components with all major brand microscope stages.
stage adapters
Series 20 and Series 30 Stage Adapters each perform exactly the same
role with the difference between the two being the size of the internal
cutout. Specifically, the Series 30 stage adapter has a larger ID to
accommodate the larger diameter Series 30 components. The OD of
similarly named stage adapters remains the same.
Design of Stage Adapters
Stage Adapters are designed to allow the mounting of Warner imaging
and recording products onto a microscope. We have a wide variety of
stage adapters to fit most commonly used microscope stages including
stock stages from Nikon, Olympus, Zeiss, and Leica. We also have stage
adapters compatible with 3rd party stages from Burleigh, Prior & Ludl,
and Marzhauser to name a few. Adapters are machined from high quality
Delrin which provides good thermal isolation from the microscope stage.
All platforms (e.g., Series 20, Series 30), the QE-1 and the DH-35, DH-35i,
and DH-40i microincubators rest upon a 38 mm lip which surrounds the
central aperture. Platforms and bases are secured using two plastic
button clamps.
Note to Zeiss Axiovert users: Series 20 Platforms fit directly into the
Zeiss slide frame (Zeiss p/n 471719) which mounts on the Zeiss 211 x
230 Specimen Stage. However, if a heater platform is used, the metal
slide frame is not recommended since it will act as a thermal heat sink.
Use stage adapter SA-20LZ for this heating application.
Selecting a Stage Adapter
Consult the table below to identify stage adapters compatible with your
microscope stage. Generally speaking, the table lists dimensions that
should match the cutout in your microscope stage. Illustrations for the
most common stage adapters, along with their dimensions, are also
presented below and also in the Product Specs window above.
If your stage is not listed, or if you have questions on adapter
compatibility, please contact our technical staff. Custom or modified
versions are available.
Stage Adapter Lookup Table
The table (on facing page) lists stage adapter known to be compatible
with most common microscope stages. However, since each microscope
can support many stages, you should compare the adapter dimensions to
the stage cutout before ordering.
64
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
stage adapters
10.8 cm Diameter
SA-NIK
W4 64-0291
–
Series 30 Stage
Order Number
Adapters
SA-30NIK
W4 64-0322
SA-30TMS/9
W4 64-0324
8 cm x 12 cm
–
9 cm x 13 cm
SA-TMS/9
W4 64-0293
–
–
12.7 cm x 11 cm
SA-TS100
W4 64-0340
–
–
23.75 cm x 15.65 cm
SA-20UU
W4 64-0298
SA-30UU
W4 64-0380
23.75 cm x 15. 65 cm
SA-20Ti
W4 64-1744
SA-30Ti
W4 64-1747
10.3 cm x 8.89 cm
SA-OLY
W4 64-0294
–
–
12.7 cm x 11 cm
SA-20UU
W4 64-0298
–
–
11 cm diameter
SA-OLY/2
W4 64-0295
SA-30/OLY2
W4 64-0325
16.5 cm x 10 cm
SA-20LZ
W4 64-0296
SA-30GALVZi
W4 64-1456
14.99 cm x 14.99 cm
SA-20L3P
W4 64-0301
SA-30L3P
W4 64-0328
9.66 cm diameter
SA-20GALVO Z
W4 64-0376
SA-30GALVOZ
W4 64-0377
10.97 cm x 15.98 cm
SA-20KZ
W4 64-0297
SA-30KZ
W4 64-0327
16.5 cm x 10 cm
SA-20LZ
W4 64-0296
SA-30LZ
W4 64-0326
12.7 cm x 13 cm
SA-20UUZ
W4 64-0336
SA-30UUZ
W4 64-0379
14.99 cm x 14.99 cm
SA-20L3P
W4 64-0301
–
–
16 cm x 11 cm
SA-20PL
W4 64-0299
–
–
16 cm x 11 cm
SA-20PLI
W4 64-0300
SA-30PLI
W4 64-0329
17.78 cm x 11.76 cm
SA-20PP
W4 64-1746
SA-30PP
W4 64-1745
11 cm diameter
SA-OLY/2
W4 64-0295
–
–
10.96 cm diameter
SA-OLY/3
W4 64-0386
–
–
Marzhauser
10.97 cm x 15.98 cm
SA-20KZ
W4 64-0297
–
–
Universal
12.8 cm x 8.6 cm
SA-20MW
W4 64-1645
–
–
Nikon
Olympus
Leica
stage adapters
Stage
Series 20 Stage
Adapter Dimensions
Order Number
Manufacturer
Adapters
Chambers
Series 20 & Series 30 (continued)
Zeiss
Prior & Ludi
Burleigh
Gibraltar
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
65
stage adapters
Series 20 & Series 30 (continued)
SA-20GALVO Z
Chambers
96.6 mm
stage adapters
3 mm
80 mm
W4 64-0376
SA-20KZ
11
W4 64-0297
SA-20L3P
W4 64-0301
SA-20L3P2
14.99 cm
12.7 cm
14.99 cm
3.72 mm
W4 64-0389
66
6.12 mm
12.7 cm
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
stage adapters
TOP VIEW
16.5 cm
10 cm
Platform
Clamp
(2)
62 mm
SIDE VIEW
3.2 mm
6.4 mm
stage adapters
SA-20LZ
Chambers
Series 20 & Series 30 (continued)
W4 64-0296
SA-20PL
W4 64-0299
SA-20PLI
W4 64-0300
SA-20 TS100
W4 64-0340
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
67
stage adapters
Series 20 & Series 30 (continued)
SA-20UU
Chambers
5
cm
stage adapters
13
cm
W4 64-0298
SA-20UUZ
5
cm
13
cm
W4 64-0336
SA-NIK
W4 64-0291
SA-OLY
103 mm
82.17 mm
88.9 mm
3.17 mm
79.0 mm
W4 64-0294
68
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
stage adapters
Series 20 & Series 30 (continued)
Chambers
SAOLY/2 = 4.325 in
W4 64-0295 109.8 mm
SAOLY/2 = 4.315 in
W4 64-0386 109.6 mm
SAOLY/3 = 10.96 cm
stage adapters
SA-OLY/2
W4 64-0295
SA-20Ti
237.5 mm
156.5 mm
3.0 mm
8.5 mm
213.9 mm
W4 64-1744
SA-20MW
128 mm
86 mm
3.1 mm
W4 64-1645
177.8mm
SA-20PP
177.8 mm
33.9mm
33.9 mm
32.3mm
32.3 mm
117.6mm
117.6
mm
80mm
80
mm
W4 64-1746
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
69
chamber accessories
Coverslips
Chambers
Large selection of high quality coverslips stocked for immediate delivery
Now Available in #1.5 Thickness!
chamber accessories
High quality Coverslips are essential for microscopy imaging. At high
resolutions (40X, 60X or 100X), choosing the correct coverslip is critical
for good performance. Warner has recently expanded its line of coverslips
to include German borosilicate glass at #1.5 thickness. Except CS-40R,
CS-30R and CS-24/60.
Stocked in depth in the sizes used with RC Series, Series 20 and the new
Series 40 chambers. Consult the chart to select the correct cover glass for
your chamber.
Order #
Model
Quantity
Dimension
Chamber Used With
Coverslip Thickness #1: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
W4 64-0720
CS-3R
100
3 mm D
W4 64-0700
CS-5R
100
5 mm D
Fits inside 96-well culture plate
W4 64-0701
CS-8R
100
8 mm D
Fits inside 24-well culture plate
W4 64-0702
CS-12R
100
12 mm D
RC-25, RC-48LP
W4 64-0703
CS-15R
100
15 mm D
RC-20, RC-20H, RC-25F, RC-37WC, RC-37FC
W4 64-0384
CS-18R
100
18 mm D
RC-37WC, RC-41LP, RC-43C
W4 64-0704
CS-22S
100
22 x 22 mm
RC-21B
W4 64-0705
CS-25R
100
25 mm D
RC-21BR, RC-21BRFS, RC-21BRW, RC-21BDW, RC-40LP, RC-40HP,
RC-43C, RC-46SNLP, RC-46SLP, RC-47FSLP, RC-50
W4 64-1500
CS-40R
60
40 mm D
RC-30WA
W4 64-0706
CS-22/30
50
22 x 30 mm
RC-30, RC-30HV
W4 64-0707
CS-22/40
50
22 x 40 mm
RC-22, RC-22C, RC-24, RC-24E, RC-24N, RC-26, RC-26G,
RC-26GLP, RC-26GS, RC-30, RC-50
W4 64-0708
CS-22/50
50
22 x 50 mm
RC-26Z, JG-23N/HP, JG-23W/HP, JG-23W/LP
W4 64-0709
CS-24/50
50
24 x 50 mm
RC-27, RC-27L, RC-27N, RC-27NE, RC-28, RC-29
Coverslip Thickness #1.5: 0.17 mm (0.0067 in.)
W4 64-0718
CS-10R15
100
10 mm D
W4 64-0712
CS-12R15
100
12 mm D
RC-25, RC-48LP
W4 64-0713
CS-15R15
100
15 mm D
RC-20, RC-20H, RC-25F, RC-42LP, RC-37WC
W4 64-0714
CS-18R15
100
18 mm D
RC-37FC, RC-41LP, RC-43C
W4 64-0719
CS-22R
100
22 mm D (Round)
W4 64-0721
CS-22S15
100
22 mm D (Square)
W4 64-0715
CS-25R15
100
25 mm D
RC-21BR, RC-21BRFS, RC-21BRW, RC-21BDW, RC-40LP, RC-40HP,
RC-43C, RC-46SNLP, RC-46SLP, RC-47FSLP, RC-50
W4 64-1499
CS-30R
90
30 mm D
RC-30WA
W4 64-0716
CS-22/3015
50
22 x 30 mm
W4 64-0717
CS-22/4015
50
22 x 40 mm
RC-22, RC-22C, RC-24, RC-24E, RC-24N, RC-26, RC-26G, RC-26GLP
24 x 60 mm
RC-10, RC-11, RC-13, RC-16, RC-27D, RC-27LD
Coverslip Thickness #2: 0.22 mm (0.0086 in.)
W4 64-0710
70
CS-24/60
40
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
chamber accessories
18.2 x 20 mm
18 x 28 mm
SHD-27LP/2
W4 64-0261
SHD-27LP/15
W4 64-0260
SHD-27LP/10
W4 64-0259
SHD-27LH/15
W4 64-0257
SHD-27LH/2
W4 64-0258
SHD-27LH/10
W4 64-0256
8.5 x 24 mm
13 x 23 mm
SHD-27H/2
W4 64-0192
SHD-27H/15
W4 64-0193
SHD-27H/10
W4 64-0194
SHD-27N/15
W4 64-0196
SHD-27N/20
W4 64-0195
SHD-27N/10
W4 64-0197
15 x 19 mm
chamber accessories
Provides ability to use tissue sections in most RC Series chambers
Chambers
Slice Anchors for Series 20 and 40 Chambers
12 x 17 mm
SHD-26GH/2
W4 64-0255
SHD-26GH/15
W4 64-0254
SHD-26GH/10
W4 64-0253
SHD-26H/2
W4 64-0252
SHD-26H/10
W4 64-0250
SHD-26H/15
W4 64-0251
10 x 18 mm
8 x 18 mm
SHD-22CL/15
W4 64-0247
19.7 mm
SHD-22CL/10
W4 64-0249
SHD-40/2
W4 64-1415
SHD-22CF/15
W4 64-1413
SHD-40/15
W4 64-1416
SHD-22CF/10
W4 64-1414
SHD-40/10
W4 64-1417
SHD-22L/15
W4 64-0246
SHD-22L/10
W4 64-0248
SHD-41/15
W4 64-1418
SHD-22F/15
W4 64-1411
SHD-41/10
W4 64-1419
SHD-22F/10
W4 64-1412
SHD-42/15
W4 64-1420
SHD-42/10
W4 64-1421
10.5 mm
13.3 mm
Slice anchors are available for most open bath chambers in the 20 and 40 Series family except for field stimulation chambers. Anchors are constructed
for an easy push-in fit into the chamber’s bath area. This allows the user to control the anchor pressure applied to slice. Most anchors are made from
type 316 stainless steel and Lycra® and finished with a plastic coating. Plastic anchors are available for the RC-27L Chamber.
Order #
Model
Product
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0246
W4 64-0247
W4 64-0248
W4 64-0249
W4 64-0250
W4 64-0251
W4 64-0252
W4 64-0253
W4 64-0254
W4 64-0255
W4 64-0256
W4 64-0257
W4 64-0258
W4 64-0194
W4 64-0193
W4 64-0192
W4 64-0197
SHD-22L/15
SHD-22CL/15
SHD-22L/10
SHD-22CL/10
SHD-26H/10
SHD-26H/15
SHD-26H/2
SHD-26GH/10
SHD-26GH/15
SHD-26GH/2
SHD-27LH/10
SHD-27LH/15
SHD-27LH/2
SHD-27H/10
SHD-27H/15
SHD-27H/2
SHD-27N/10
For RC-22 Chamber, 1.5 mm
For RC-22C Chamber, 1.5 mm
For RC-22 Chamber, 1.0 mm
For RC-22C Chamber, 1.0 mm
For RC-26 Chamber, 1.0 mm
For RC-26 Chamber, 1.5 mm
For RC-26 Chamber, 2.0 mm
For RC-26G Chamber, 1.0 mm
For RC-26G Chamber, 1.5 mm
For RC-26G Chamber, 2.0 mm
For RC-27L & RC-29, 1.0 mm
For RC-27L & RC-29, 1.5 mm
For RC-27L & RC-29, 2.0 mm
For RC-27 Chamber, 1.0 mm
For RC-27 Chamber, 1.5 mm
For RC-27 Chamber, 2.0 mm
For RC-27N Chamber, 1.0 mm
W4 64-0196
W4 64-0195
W4 64-1411
W4 64-1412
W4 64-1413
W4 64-1414
W4 64-1415
W4 64-1416
W4 64-1417
W4 64-1418
W4 64-1419
W4 64-1420
W4 64-1421
W4 64-0259
SHD-27N/15
SHD-27N/20
3SHD-22F/15
SHD-22F/10
SHD-22CF/15
SHD-22CF/10
SHD-40/2
SHD-40/15
SHD-40/10
SHD-41/15
SHD-41/10
SHD-42/15
SHD-42/10
SHD-27LP/10
For RC-27N Chamber, 1.5 mm
For RC-27N Chamber, 2.0 mm
Flat for RC-22 Chamber, 1.5 mm
Flat for RC-22 Chamber, 1.0 mm
Flat for RC-22C Chamber, 1.5 mm
Flat for RC-22C Chamber, 1.0 mm
Flat for RC-40 Chamber, 2.0 mm
Flat for RC-40 Chamber, 1.5 mm
Flat for RC-40 Chamber, 1.0 mm
Flat for RC-41 Chamber, 1.5 mm
Flat for RC-41 Chamber, 1.0 mm
Flat for RC-42 Chamber, 1.5 mm
Flat for RC-42 Chamber, 1.0 mm
Plastic for RC-27L, RC-27LD
& RC-29, 1.0 mm
Plastic for RC-27L, RC-27LD
& RC-29, 1.5 mm
Plastic for RC-27L, RC-27LD
& RC-29, 2.0 mm
W4 64-0260 SHD-27LP/15
W4 64-0261 SHD-27LP/2
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
71
chamber accessories
Slice Anchor Kits and Supports
for Series 20 Chambers
Chambers
Provides ability to use tissue sections in most RC Series chambers
Slice Anchor Kits
chamber accessories
Slice Anchor Kits are available for all Series 20 tissue slice recording
chambers. Kits for RC-26, RC-26G, RC-27, and RC-27L, (large bath
chambers) contain three anchors with 0.1 mm thick Lycra® threads at
1.0, 1.5, and 2.0 mm spacing. Kits are available with plastic anchors or
stainless steel.
Kits for the RC-22 and RC-22C (smaller slice chambers) contain two
stainless steel anchors with Lycra® threads at 1.0 mm and 1.5 mm
spacing. The stainless steel material allows the anchors to be adjusted
for a closer or looser fit in chamber.
All kits come with nylon mesh in two sizes (112 micron and 160 micron)
that may be cut and used in conjunction with the slice anchor.
Slice Support with Nylon Grid
Slice
Anchor
Kits
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0263 SHD-22KIT
Slice Anchor Kit for RC-22
W4 64-0264 SHD-22CKIT
Slice Anchor Kit for RC-22C
W4 64-0265 SHD-26KIT
Slice Anchor Kit for RC-26
W4 64-0266 SHD-26GKIT
Slice Anchor Kit for RC-26G
W4 64-0267 SHD-27KIT
Slice Anchor Kit for RC-27
W4 64-0268 SHD-27LKIT
Slice Anchor Kit for RC-27L
and RC-29
W4 64-0190 SHD-27LPKIT
Plastic Slice Anchor Kit for
RC-27L and RC-29 Chambers
W4 64-0191 SHD-27NKIT
Slice Anchor Kit for RC-27N
SS-3G Slice Support
The SS-3G is a version of our standard SS-3 providing additional support by
replacing the Lycra strands with a nylon mesh. The support is machined
from 0.5 mm polycarbonate and the mesh is 112 micron x 0.1 micron thick.
The SS-4, SS-4-500V and SS-4-500H with Lycra thread provide additional
slice support by using strands on a narrower 500 micron spacing. The
support is machined from 0.5 mm polycarbonate and the Lycra strands are
available in either horizontal or vertical configurations.
SS-4-500H
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1533 SS-3G
Slice Support for RC-27L
Chamber with grid
W4 64-1550 SS-4-500V
Vertical Slice Support for
RC-27D and RC-27LD Drip Chambers
W4 64-1551 SS-4-500H
Horizontal Slice Support for
RC-27D and RC-27LD Drip Chambers
SS-4-500V
Nylon Mesh Kit
Ideal for supporting and holding slices in recording and imaging
chambers, this nylon mesh can be used in conjunction with Warner slice
anchors or other holders. Each kit comes with nylon mesh in two sizes 0.3
mm and 1.13 mm mesh opening and are 0.2 and 0.12 mm thick
respectively. Five 7 x 7 cm squares of each size are supplied.
Order #
Model
W4 64-0198 NYL/MESH
72
Product
Nylon Mesh Kit – 10 pieces
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
chamber accessories
Replacement Suction and Perfusion Tubes
Chambers
Replacement parts and accessories for Series 20 chambers
ST-1L
W4 64-1401
ST-1R
W4 64-1400
ST-1Z
W4 64-1402
ST-3R
W4 64-1407
ST-3
W4 64-1406
ST-3L
W4 64-1408
ST-5
W4 64-1410
ST-QE1
W4 64-1403
ST-4
W4 64-1409
Typical flow pattern for single entry slit
vs triple entry slit tubes
PT-QE1
W4 64-1404
Single slit entry tube
chamber accessories
ST-1S
W4 64-1431
ST-37
W4 64-1405
Triple slit entry tube
Micro Slit Design
Warner Instruments produces suction tubes designed to make it easier to set and maintain the bath solution height. The innovative tube design has
three equally spaced micro-slits at the front entry face and one micro-slit on the rear side of the sipper for air entry. This design helps eliminate tidal
action in the bath and works equally well in all chambers, but excels in the larger bath chambers. All suction tubes are manufactured with 16 gauge type
316 stainless steel (1.65 mm OD x 1.19 mm ID). The PT-QE1 perfusion tube is 18 gauge type 316 stainless steel (1.27 mm OD x 0.83 mm ID).
Order #
Model
Product
For Chamber Model
W4 64-1431
ST-1S
Suction Tube, Series 20 Classic Design, Straight
RC-24, RC-24E, RC-28
W4 64-1400
ST-1R
Suction Tube, Series 20 Classic Design, Right Hand
RC-22/22C, RC-25/25F, RC-26/26G/26GLP/26Z
W4 64-1401
ST-1L
Suction Tube, Series 20 Classic Design, Left Hand
RC-27, RC-27L, RC-27N, RC-27NE
W4 64-1402
ST-1Z
Suction Tube, Classic Design, Straight
RC-1Z Chamber
W4 64-1403
ST-QE1
Suction Tube, Micro Slit Design
QE-1, DH-40i
W4 64-1404
PT-QE1
Perfusion Tube
QE-1, DH-40i
W4 64-1405
ST-37
Suction Tube, Micro Slit Design
RC-37W/37F, RC-37WS/37FS, RC-47FS
W4 64-1406
ST-3
Suction Tube, Micro Slit Design, Straight Front & Back Slits RC-10, RC-24/24E, RC-28, RC-29
W4 64-1407
ST-3R
Suction Tube, Micro Slit Design, Right Hand Side Slits
RC-22/22C, RC-25/25F, RC-26/26G/26GLP/26Z*
W4 64-1408
ST-3L
Suction Tube, Micro Slit Design, Left Hand Side Slits
RC-27, RC-27L, RC-27N, RC-27NE*
W4 64-1409
ST-4
Suction Tube, Micro Slit Design, Front & Back Slits
RC-1Z, RC-11, RC-13, RC-16
W4 64-1410
ST-5
Suction Tube, Micro Slit Design, Side Slits
RC-3Z Chamber
* For upgrade of existing Series 20 chambers to micro slit design, see page 75.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
73
chamber accessories
Electrode Kits and Magnetic Clamps
Chambers
Replacement parts and accessories for Series 20 chambers
Agar Bridge Reference Electrode Kit
chamber accessories
Developed for use in low volume recording chambers. The ABR-1 Agar
Bridge Reference Electrode Kit consists of a 1 mm diameter silver wire
electrode mounted in a modified pipette tip that can be filled with a 3 M
KCl agar mixture. An included magnetic clamp with flexible holder for the
pipette tip is perfect for positioning the electrode at any angle in the
chamber. In addition, the pipette tips can be cut to length or shaped using
a heat gun. The silver wire electrode comes with 1 meter of flexible wire
terminated in a 2 mm pin. Includes a 2 mm to 1 mm pin adapter for use
with 1 mm jacks.
MAG-3
Magnetic
Clamp (W4 64-0360)
Silver Wire
Pipette Tips
ABR-1 Kit Components
Order #
Model
ABR-1 Shown mounted
to a QE-1 Heated Base
Product
W4 64-1426 ABR-1
Agar Bridge Reference Electrode Kit
W4 64-1428 LPE-10
Replacement Pipette Tips, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1323 PJ2-5
2 mm jack (5 pack)
W4 64-0360 MAG-3
Magnetic Clamp
Mini Magnetic Clamps
16 gauge
These miniature magnetic clamps offer a quick and easy method of
positioning perfusion and suction tubes in chambers equipped with a
magnetic platform. Sized to fit 20,18, and 16 gauge tubes, they can
also be used to hold PE tubing for applications requiring metal free
solution delivery. Height: 16.6 mm, ø: 6.4 mm.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1552
MAG-5
Mini Mag for 20 gauge tubing
W4 64-1553
MAG-6
Mini Mag for 18 gauge tubing
W4 64-1554
MAG-7
Mini Mag for 16 gauge tubing
18 gauge
20 gauge
MAG-7
MAG-6
MAG-5
MAG-7 is for Suction, MAG-6 is for Perfusion,
MAG-5 is for Skinny Suction Tubes
Suction/Perfusion Tubes
A
B
74
A
B
ST-3
28.5 mm
6.5 mm
ST-3R
28.5 mm
6.5 mm
ST-QE1
40.0 mm ±
13.0 mm ±
PT-QE1
39.5 mm ±
12.7 mm ±
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
chamber accessories
Tubing, Silicone Grease Kit and Suction
Tube Upgrade Kit
Chambers
Replacement parts and accessories for Series 20 chambers
PE (Polyethylene) Tubing
chamber accessories
PE tubing is the most commonly used tubing in perfusion systems.
We stock the sizes compatible with our chambers and other perfusion
devices. Consult the chart below to select the proper size tubing for your
perfusion device.
Order #
Model
Product
length (m) O.D. (mm) I.D. (mm)
Where Used (examples)
W4 64-0750 PE-10/10
Polyethylene Tubing
3
0.61
0.28
MM Series Manifolds
W4 64-0751 PE-10/100
Polyethylene Tubing
30
0.61
0.28
MM Series Manifolds
W4 64-0752 PE-50/10
Polyethylene Tubing
3
0.97
0.58
MM & ML Series Manifolds
W4 64-0753 PE-50/100
Polyethylene Tubing
30
0.97
0.58
MM & ML Series Manifolds
W4 64-0754 PE-90/10
Polyethylene Tubing
3
1.27
0.86
RC-30, 30HV, 30WA, RC50
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
3
1.57
1.14
Series 20 Chambers
W4 64-0756 PE-160/100
Polyethylene Tubing
30
1.57
1.14
MP & MPP Manifolds, Most
Solution Heaters, FR-50, FR-55S
Silicone Grease Kit
We have determined that an effective tool for applying silicone lubricant
(used to form a seal between the coverslip and chamber) is an artist’s
acrylic brush. With that in mind, we have put together a convenient
package that includes #2 and #4 brushes, several pallets to aid in
applying the grease, and a tube of Dow Corning® 111 Valve Lubricant &
Sealant.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0378
111-Kit
Silicone Grease Kit
with Brushes and Pallets
W4 64-0275
111
Replacement Grease
Recommended for all Warner Chambers
Suction Tube Upgrade Kit for Series 20
1/4 inch
4-40 screws
An economical version of our popular MCK-1 Magnetic Clamp Kit, the
STU-1 upgrade kit includes a MAG-7 Magnetic Clamp for suction tubes
and two magnetic strips that fit perfectly on top of Series 20 Platform
Clamps. This kit makes upgrading to the new micro-slit suction tubes
possible. Kit works with all models of Series 20 Platforms except P-2
and PH-2.
Order #
Model
W4 64-1429 STU-1
Product
Suction Tube Upgrade Kit
for Series 20 Platforms
STU-1 Kit Components
Kit mounted to P-1 Platform
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
75
chamber accessories
Petri Dish Adapter with Clamps
& Spring Clamp Set
Chambers
Replacement parts and accessories for Series 20 chambers
chamber accessories
Model MSC-1 Magnet Spring Clamp Set
The MSC-1 presents a selection of clamp pairs, each pair has a different
bend angle. Magnetic stainless steel plates supplied with the clamp set
can be fastened to a chamber or to a stage using double sided tape. This
allows the use of light duty clamps for perfusion tubes or ground wires in
addition to clamping cell culture plastic ware.
Shown with a 35 mm Petri dish in Nikon stage adapter
Model MDA-1 Petri Dish Adapter
with Clamps
This Petri dish adapter is ideal for holding 35 mm dishes, as well as
Warner’s series 40 chambers, on your microscope stage. Designed for non
heated imaging applications. Supplied with 2 sets of adjustable clamps
for mounting dishes or chambers. A magnetic stainless steel perimeter
allows use of magnetic holders. The addition of a Series 20 stage adapter
allows mounting on any microscope stage.
MDA-1 (D x L)
79.4 x 3.2 mm
Aperture Size (D)
30 mm
Maximum Dish
Diameter
40 mm
W4 64-1675 MDA-1
76
Physical Dimensions (Distance from magnet to bottom edge):
Red
2.5 mm
Green
5.0 mm
Yellow
7.8 mm
Blue
9.0 mm
Magnetic Stainless 16 x 40 mm
Model
W4 64-1653 MSC-1
Physical Dimensions:
Model
Specifications
Order #
Specifications
Order #
You’ll find dozens of uses in your lab for these light and easy-to-use
clamps.
Product
Magnetic spring clamp set
Product
Miniture dish adapter with clamps
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
perfusion/microfluidics
Section
Page No.
Syringe Pumps
78 - 79
PHD ULTRA Advanced Syringe Pump
80 - 82
™
PHD ULTRA™ Nanomite
83
PHYSIO 22 - Low EF Syringe Pump for
Physiolgical Experiments
84
PHD ULTRA™ Nanomite,
see page 83
Peristaltic Pumps
Peristaltic Pump 66 and 77
85
MPII Mini-Peristaltic Pump
86
Compact Peristaltic Pump Model 720
87
Mini-Peristaltic Pump,
see page 86
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Pump 11 Elite
Valve Control Systems
Pressurized Perfusion Kits, VPP6 and VPP8
88
VC-8M, VC-8MLT, VC-8 & VC-8T
Valve Control Systems
89
VC-6 & VC-6M Valve Control Systems
Pressurized Perfusion Kits,
see page 88
90 - 91
VT-8 Valve Timer
92
Valve Control Systems Parts and Accessories
93
Valve Control Systems,
see page 89
Fast-Step Systems
Perfusion Fast-Step Systems,
SF-77B, SF-77BLT & SF-77BST
Perfusion Fast-Step Systems,
VC-77SP and VC-77SP8
94 - 95
96
Perfusion Fast-Step System,
see page 94
Accessories
Syringe Holders MSH & SH
97
Constant Flow Syringes DN Series
98
Gas Bubble Manifold GBM10 & GBM60
99
Tubing, connector Kits, Syringe Needles
100
Manifolds and Control Hardware
ML, MM, MP & MPP Series
101
Electrode/Manifold Holders MHH-25 & MHH-38
102
Vacuum/Solution Flow Valves FR-50 & FR-55S
102
Gas/pH Controller,
see page 103
Gas Controllers
Harvard CO2 Gas/pH Controller
103
Oxystreamer Dual Stream
O2 and CO2 Controller
104
®
Tubing and Connector Kit,
see page 105
Spill Sensor Systems
Overflow Sensor System, OS-250
105
Battery Powered Spill Sensor System
106
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
77
Pump 11 Elite
syringe pumps
Advanced Syringe Pumps
Pump 11 Elite
Infusion Only
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
syringe pumps
Pump 11 Elite
Infusion/Withdrawl
Programmable
Applications
• Controlled Flow
• Cellular Injections
• Oocyte Applications
• Microfluidics
• Drug/Nutritional Delivery
• Microdialysis
• Emulsification
Features
• Small Footprint
• Easy to use touch screen and icon interface
• Outstanding flow performance
• Easily run simple to complex methods
without a PC
• Alphanumeric keypad for easy Method
naming and recall
• Adjustable linear force up to 35 lbs
• Upgrade new versions of software remotely
• Legendary reliability – 2 year warranty
The Pump 11 Elite Series of syringe pumps expands its capabilities to
satisfy your experimental requirements. These compact syringe pumps
carry on the tradition as the premier workhorse infusion pump, offering
unparalleled ease of use with a high resolution color touch screen with
intuitive icon interface. The Pump 11 Elite Series allows you to create,
save and run simple to complex methods without a PC.
Superior Performance
These syringe pumps have a new mechanism that includes a tight
gripping, more secure syringe clamp for syringes ranging from 0.5ul to
60ml (single syringe) and 0.5µl to 10 ml (dual syringe). The Pump 11 Elite
Series offers enhanced flow performance with high accuracy and smooth
flow from 1.28 pl/min to 88.28 ml/min (25.99 ml/min for dual syringe rack).
78
The Pump 11 Elite Series is available in Infusion Only or Infusion/
Withdrawal Programmable Models with single or dual syringe racks. All
Pump 11 Elite syringe pumps have a footswitch input and USB serial port
for computer control. The Infusion/Withdrawal Programmable models also
have RS-485 (or optional RJ-11) ports for daisy chaining pumps and
Digital I/O for external control via an independent computer or device
(see facing page for more information on connectivity).
Since 1901 Harvard Apparatus has been supporting bioresearch fluidics
requirements with a key milestone being the introduction of the first
commercial syringe pump for bioresearch in 1956. Since 1956, over
70,000 satisfied syringe pump users around the world have made
Harvard Apparatus syringe pumps the worlds #1 choice.
The Pump 11 Elite Series is a family of accurate, low flow syringe pumps
designed for use in applications including: controlled flow, cellular
injections, oocyte applications and more.
Program Description
To operate the Pump 11 Elite, the user defines all the required parameters
for infusing or withdrawing liquids through a Method.
This may be a Quick Start Method, Pre-Programmed or User-Defined
Method. The basic operation is a simple 3-step procedure:
1. Select a method
2. Enter operating parameters
3. Preview or Run your method
Quick Start Methods are simple infusions, withdrawals or a combination
(depending upon the model). Custom user-defined Methods can be
created when more advanced programming is required. The setup for a
custom Method is easy using the standard profiles found on all Infusion/
Withdrawal Programmable Elite Models. The list of available profiles is:
Constant Rate
Gradient (binary)
Ramp
Autofill
By programming custom (user-defined) Methods into the pump,
multi-user errors are reduced. Easily transfer Methods to other pumps
and/or download Methods from a PC. Forget having to duplicate Methoddevelopment efforts for each new pump added to your system.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
syringe pumps
Pump 11 Elite
Advanced Syringe Pumps (continued)
Advanced Connectivity
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
The infusion only Pump 11 Elite Syringe Pumps come standard with a
Footswitch input and USB connector. The infusion/withdrawal
programmable Pump 11 Elite Syringe Pumps include a Footswitch input,
USB, RS-485 and I/O connectors. There is also an option for RJ-11
connectors on the programmable pumps. This option has to be ordered at
the time the pump is ordered.
syringe pumps
OPTIONAL
RJ-11
CONNECTORS
(for pump-to-pump
communication)
FOOTSWITCH
INPUT
USER I/O
CONNECTOR
USB SERIAL
INPUT
RS-485
CONNECTORS
(for communication
from PC)
(for pump-to-pump
communication)
Pump 11 Elite Specifications
Type
Microprocessor single or dual syringe, infusion
only or infusion/withdrawal programmable
Accuracy
±0.5%
Reproducibility
±0.05%
Type
Plastic or glass
Size (single syringe)
0.5 µl to 50/60 ml
Size (dual syringe)
0.5 µl to 10 ml
Flow Rate:
Single Syringe
1.28 pl/min to 88.28 ml/min
Dual Syringe
1.28 pl/min to 25.99 ml/min
Display
FOOTSWITCH INPUT
Start and stop a pump
USB SERIAL INPUT
Control your pump with a computer
RS-485 CONNECTORS
Connect multiple pumps together
(daisy chain up to 99 pumps)
Connect satellite pumps to the Master pump for
binary gradient system (% composition)
RJ-11 CONNECTORS
(OPTION)
Syringe:
UNIVERSAL
POWER INPUT
Connect multiple pumps together (daisy chain)
USER I/O CONNECTOR
Direction
Control Input
Set pump to infuse or withdraw
Trigger Input
Connect an external device to start and stop
a pump or Method
Trigger 1 Ouput
Signal another device to start and stop a pump or Method
Run indicator
Connect an external LED or monitoring device to a pump
4.3" WQVGA TFT color display with touch screen
Connectors:
RS-485
IEEE-1394, 6 position
USB
Type B
I/O & TTL
15 pin D-Sub connector
Footswitch
mini phono jack
Average linear force
16 kg (35 lbs) @ 100% Force Selection
Step Resolution
0.069 µm/µstep
Input Power
12-30 VDC
Input Power Connection
2.5 mm ID x 5.5 mm OD male plug
Power Supply
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 8 Watts Universal Power
Supply, Use Only a Harvard Apparatus Approved
Power Supply and Line Cord
Dimensions, H x W x D
22.6 x 17.78 x 15 cm (9 x 7 x 6 in)
Weight
2.1 kg (4.6 lbs)
Regulatory Certifications
CE, ETL (UL, CSA), WEEE, EU RoHS & CB Scheme
Order #
Product
W4 70-4500 Pump 11 Elite Infusion Only Single Syringe
W4 70-4501 Pump 11 Elite Infusion Only Dual Syringe
W4 70-4504 Pump 11 Elite Infusion/Withdrawal
Programmable Single Syringe
W4 70-4505 Pump 11 Elite Infusion/Withdrawal
Programmable Dual Syringe
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
79
PHD ULTRA™
syringe pumps
Advanced Syringe Pumps
PHD ULTRA™
Infusion/Withdrawl
Programmable
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
syringe pumps
PHD ULTRA™
Push/Pull
Infusion/Withdrawl
Applications
• Shear Stress Studies
• Long-term time lapse
• Continuous Flow
• Oocyte Applications
• Patch Clamping
• Microfluidics
• Feeding Cells
• Flow Programming
Features
• New patent pending drive mechanism for
unmatched smooth flow, accuracy and precision
• For operation at pl/min to ml/min flow rates
• Easily program simple to complex methods
without a PC
• Alphanumeric keypad for easy Method naming
and recall
• Real and relative time clocks
• Intuitive touch screen and icon interface
• Vertical or horizontal orientation
• Adjustable linear force up to 75 lbs
• Multi-syringe racks for multi-channel operation or
large capacity reservoir
• Legendary reliability– 2 year warranty
PHD ULTRA™
The PHD ULTRA™ syringe pump family has a new patent pending fluidics
drive mechanism which assures ease of use and high performance, for
the smoothest, most accurate flow rates of any syringe pump. Flow rates
of 1.56 pl/min to 215.8 ml/min are accurate within 0.25% and
reproducible within 0.05%. A microprocessor-controlled, small step angle
stepper motor drives a lead screw and pusher block. Advanced microstepping techniques are employed to further reduce the step angle to
eliminate flow pulsation.
80
The PHD ULTRA™ is the solution for your most demanding fluidics
applications. This pump represents the latest technology in syringe pumps
and was developed utilizing the feedback of the world’s largest
population of syringe pump users.
The PHD ULTRA™ will change the way you think about syringe pumps.
There are three major reasons the PHD ULTRA™ is the new standard for
syringe pumps:
1.
NEW Patent pending mechanical drive
mechanism
and syringe holding mechanics to achieve the
highest performance of any syringe pump.
2.
NEW EZ PRO Software and user interface allow
easy programming of Methods from simple to
complex, all without the use of a PC.
– Preprogrammed Methods for simple to complex
operations that allow you to be up and running with the
touch of a button.
– LCD, high resolution color touch screen for powerful
functionality, yet very easy to use.
3.
NEW Levels of Versatility
a. Configurations: Standard, push-pull, remote, high
pressure, multi-racks.
b. Connectivity: For USB or RS-232 computer control;
RS-485 or optional RJ-11 for daisy chain (control
multiple pumps).
c. Orientation: Horizontal or vertical orientation to optimize
bench space or to minimize tubing.
Since 1901 Harvard Apparatus has been supporting bioresearch fluidics
requirements beginning with the introduction of the first commercial
syringe pump for bioresearch in 1956. Since 1956, over 70,000 satisfied
syringe pump users around the world have made Harvard Apparatus
syringe pumps the world’s #1 choice.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
syringe pumps
PHD ULTRA™
Advanced Syringe Pumps (continued)
FOOTSWITCH INPUT
Start and stop a pump
USB AND RS-232
SERIAL INPUTS
Control your pump with a computer
RS-485 CONNECTORS
Connect multiple pumps together (up to 99)
RJ-11 CONNECTORS
(OPTION)
Connect multiple pumps together (daisy chain)
USER I/O CONNECTOR
Direction
Control input
Set pump to infuse or withdraw
Trigger Input
Connect and external device to start or stop a
pump or Method
Footswitch Input
Start and stop a pump
Trigger 1 Ouput
Signal another device to start and stop a pump or Method
Trigger 2 Output
Signal another device to start and stop a pump or Method
Sync Output
Synchronize other devices
Valve Output
External valve control
Run Indicator
Connect an external LED or monitoring device to a pump
Program Description
To operate the PHD ULTRA™, the user defines all the required parameters
for infusing and/or withdrawing liquids through a Method. This may be a
Quick Start, Pre-Programmed or User-Defined Method. The basic
operation is a simple 3-step procedure:
1. Select a Method
2. Enter operating parameters
3. Preview or Run your Method
Quick Start Methods are for simple infusions, withdrawals or a
combination (depending on the pump model). Custom user-defined
Methods can be created when a more advanced Method is required. The
setup for a custom Method is easy using the standard profiles found on
all Infusion/Withdrawal and Infusion/Withdrawal Programmable PHD
ULTRA’s. The list of available profiles are:
Constant Rate
Bolus
Pulse
Ramp
Concentration
Autofill
Stepped
Gradient
ANALOG CONTROL
(OPTIONAL)
syringe pumps
Connect satellite pumps to the Master pump for binary
or ternary gradient system (% composition)
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Connect remote mechanism
Analog control of the motor speed (0 to 10 v). This option
must be ordered at the same time the pump is ordered.
By programming and saving custom Methods in the pump, multi-user
errors are reduced. Easily transfer complex methods to other pumps
and/or download methods from a PC. Forget having to duplicate methoddevelopment efforts for each new pump added to your system.
USER
I/O CONNECTOR
In addition to the advanced pumping profiles listed above, the
PHD ULTRA™ contains a variety of advanced options allowing the user
to repeat steps, link methods, control valves, external triggers etc.
ANALOG
CONTROL CONNECTOR
(optional)
Advanced Programming Features
Flow Programming: Change the flow with time, volume or a triggered
event as many times as you like.
Bolus: Inject a large volume of drug (or drugs) at once.
The bolus injection can be made in time or volume.
Concentration Delivery: Calibrate flow in concentration units of mg/kg
easily so flow is calibrated to concentration of drug and animal weight.
Gradients: EZ PRO software allows you to easily program gradients,
continuous or stepped.
% Ratio: Up to three solvents.
I/O: Dedicated and user defined I/O.
Pulsed Flow: So you can program the pulse easily.
Advanced Connectivity
All PHD ULTRA™ Syringe Pumps come standard with a footswitch, USB,
RS-232, RS-485 and I/O connectors. There is also an option for RJ-11
connectors and analog control. These options have to be ordered at the
time the pump is ordered.
RS-485
CONNECTORS
(for pump-to-pump
communication)
RS-232 SERIAL
CONNECTOR
(for communication
from PC)
USB
SERIAL INPUT
(for communication
from PC)
FOOTSWITCH
INPUT
(switch sold separately)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
81
syringe pumps
PHD ULTRA™
Advanced Syringe Pumps (continued)
PHD ULTRA™ Specifications
Order #
Type
PHD ULTRA Options
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
syringe pumps
Accuracy
Reproducibility
Syringes:
Type
Size Minimum
Size Maximum
Flow Rate:
Minimum
Maximum
Display
Connectors:
RS-232
RS-485
USB
I/O & TTL
Footswitch
Linear Force
Step Resolution
Voltage Range
Dimensions, H x W x D
Weight
Regulatory Certifications
Product
PHD ULTRA™
Standard
Microprocessor multiple syringe, infusion only,
infusion/withdrawal or infusion/withdrawal
programmable
±0.25%
±0.05%
PHD ULTRA™
4400 Pump I/W
Programmable
PHD ULTRA™
Hpsi Remote Pump
I/W Programmable
PHD ULTRA™
Hpsi Remote Pump
I/W Programmable
with 10 x 140 Rack
W4 70-3033 Analog Control Input Option (0-10V)3
W4 70-3031 Internal Pinch Valve Option2
W4 70-3034 Internal Fan Option4
PHD ULTRA™ Upgrades
W4 70-3020 6/10 Multi-Syringe Rack for PHD ULTRA™
1.56 pl/min
215.8 ml/min
4.3" WQVGA TFT color display with touchscreen
W4 70-3021 4 x 140 Multi-Syringe Rack for PHD ULTRA™
W4 70-3022 Microliter Rack, for PHD ULTRA™ holds 4 syringes
W4 70-3023 Anti-Siphon Kit for PHD ULTRA™
9 pin D-Sub Connector
6-position IEEE-1394
Type B
15 pin D-Sub connector
Phono jack
34 kg (75 lbs) @ 100% force selection
0.082 µm/step
Universal input 100/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
10.16 x 30.48 x 21.59 cm (4 x 12 x 8.5 in)
4.5 kg (10 lbs)
CE, ETL (UL, CSA), WEEE, EU RoHS & CB Scheme
Order #
Order #
Order #
Stand Alone Remote
Order #
Satellite*
Syringe
Pump Module
Stand Alone Remote
Satellite*
Syringe
Pump Module
PHD ULTRA™
W4 70-3008 W4 70-3308 W4 70-3408 W4 70-3508
Push/Pull
Infusion/Withdrawl
PHD ULTRA™
W4 70-3009 W4 70-3309 W4 70-3410
–
Push/Pull
Infusion/Withdrawl
Programmable
–
PHD ULTRA™
High Pressure
W4 70-3030 RS-232 RJ-11 Connectors Option (daisy chain)
W4 70-3032 Internal 3-Way Isolation Valve Option2
Plastic, glass or stainless steel
0.5 µl
140 ml
PHD ULTRA™
W4 70-3005 W4 70-3305
–
–
Infusion Only
PHD ULTRA™
W4 70-3006 W4 70-3306 W4 70-3406 W4 70-3506
Infusion/Withdrawal
PHD ULTRA™
W4 70-3007 W4 70-3307
–
–
Infusion/Withdrawal
Programmable
PHD ULTRA™
Push/Pull
Product
™
Stand Alone Remote
Satellite*
Syringe
Pump Module
W4 70-4010 Upgrade Infusion Only to I/W1
W4 70-4011 Upgrade Infusion Only to Programmable1
W4 70-4012 Upgrade I/W to Programmable1
1 Note: Requires Return to Factory
2 Note: Only for available for Infusion/Withdrawal or Programmable Models
3 Note: Only for Programmable Models. Not available on Satellite Boxes.
4 Note: Fan option is required if external operating ambient is expected to be >35˚C
Accessories
W4 70-4000 RS-485 Cable for Pump-to-Pump Communication,
0.5 m (1.6 ft)
W4 70-4001 RS-485 Cable for Pump-to-Pump Communication,
2 m (6.6 ft)
W4 70-4020 RS-485 Extension Cable, 9.1 m (30 ft)
W4 70-4002 USB Cable for PC-to-Pump Communication,
2 m (6.6 ft)
W4 70-4003 USB Cable for PC-to-Pump Communication,
5 m (16.4 ft)
W4 70-4004 RS-232 Cable for PC-to-Pump Communication,
9 pin D-sub, 2 m (6.6 ft)
W4 70-4005 Adapter, PHD Digital I/O
W4 70-4006 Adapter, D-sub 15 to Term. Blk
W4 72-8340 Adapter, USB to Serial
W4 70-2215 Footswitch (with Phono Plug)
W4 55-7002 Auto Fill Valve Box, Normal Pressure, 30 psi
W4 55-7004 Auto Fill Valve Box, High Pressure, 200 psi
W4 55-7760 Cable Assy, Daisy-chain, Legacy RS-232 RJ-11,
0.6 m (2 ft)
W4 72-2478 Cable Assy, Daisy-chain, Legacy RS-232 RJ-11,
2.1 m (7 ft)
W4 55-8000 Adapter for 25 ml, 50 ml, 100 ml Hamilton
GasTight™ Syringes
W4 70-3010 W4 70-3110 W4 70-3410 W4 70-3510
–
W4 70-3111
–
–
–
W4 70-3112
–
–
*Note: Gradient Systems are available. Contact technical support for more details.
82
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
syringe pumps
syringe pumps
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
PHD ULTRA™ Nanomite
Applications
• Cellular Injections
• Drug Delivery
• Microinjections
• Hand-Held Automated Delivery
• Chamber Dosing
• Regenerative Medicine
Features
• Light weight makes it ideal for hand-held or
stereotaxic injection
• Easy-to-use LCD color touch screen with GUI
interface
• Create and store >50 programs for
• High performance in a small package
• 1000 times better than manual syringes
The PHD ULTRA™ Nanomite is a single syringe infusion/withdrawal
programmable syringe pump. This pump allows you to create, save and
run simple to complex Methods without a PC. The flow rate range is 3.66
pl/min to 3.818 ml/min with 11 lbs of adjustable force across the entire
flow rate range.
The PHD ULTRA™ Nanomite has a footswitch input, RS-232 and USB serial
ports for computer control, RS-485 ports for daisy chaining pumps and
Digital I/O for external control via an independent computer or device.
There is also an option for daisy chaining pumps through the RS-232
(RJ-11) ports. This option must be ordered at the time the pump is
ordered. See page 81 for more information on connectivity.
This pump consists of a control unit, an injection unit, a 6 foot cable to
connect the two units and a footswitch.
For more information on the PHD ULTRA™ Nanomite including features and
programming see the PHD ULTRA™ on page 80.
PHD ULTRA™ Nanomite Specifications
Type
Microprocessor single syringe
Infusion/Withdrawal Programmable
Accuracy
±0.5%
Reproducibility
±0.05%
Syringes:
Type
Glass or plastic
Size Minimum
0.5 µl
Size Maximum
1 ml
Flow Rate:
Minimum
3.66 pl/min
Maximum
3.818 ml/min
Display
4.3" WQVGA TFT color display with touchscreen
Connectors:
RS-232
9 pin D-Sub connector
RS-485
IEEE-1394, 6 position
USB
Type B
I/O & TTL
15 pin D-Sub connector
Footswitch
Mini phono jack
Average Linear Force
5 kg (11 lbs) @ 100% force selection
Step Resolution
0.198 µm/µstep
Voltage Range
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 75 W, 0.5 A fuse
Dimensions H x W x D:
Control Box
30.5 x 21. 6 x 11.1 cm (12.0 x 8.5 x 4.38 in)
Injector Unit
6.35 x 5.08 x 19.05 cm (2.5 x 2.0 x 7.5 in)
Weight:
Control Box
2.06 kg (4.55 lbs)
Injector Unit
0.458 kg (1.01 lbs)
Regulatory Certifications CE, EU RoHS
Order #
Product
W4 70-3601 PHD ULTRA™ Nanomite Infusion/Withdrawal
Programmable Single Syringe
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
83
Physio 22
syringe pumps
Low RFI Syringe Pump for Physiological Experiments
Large volume, low noise pump for sensitive applications
Physio 22
These types of applications are particularly sensitive to electrical noise
and therefore would benefit tremendously by using our new PHYSIO 22
Syringe Pump.
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
This pump is currently available as infusion only with standard 2-syringe
rack or infusion only with 6/10 syringe rack. An infuse/withdraw model is
available by special order. Please call for details.
syringe pumps
A spurious electromagnetic signal was recently found within the design
of the PHYSIO 22 which allowed the introduction of a small 50/60 Hz
signal into a shielded environment. In particular, a small transformer
within the PHYSIO 22 generated an electromagnetic field which was
sensed by an adjacent perfusion line. The problem was corrected by
replacing the offending transformer with one incorporating toroidal
architecture. This change in design successfully contains the stray
electromagnetic field and renders the device electrically silent.
Specifications
Applications
• Patch Clamping
• Oocyte Applications
• Cellular Injections
Features
• Low electrical noise
• Pulse less flow
• High accuracy
The PHYSIO 22 Pump delivers high accuracy, pulseless flow with no
electrical noise to interfere with the sensor signal while performing
physiological analyses. This specialty pump is based on our legendary
Syringe Pump 22, but with a special toroidal transformer designed for
minimum RFI (Radio Frequency Interference). This new transformer cuts
electrical noise so that it is almost non existent.
The electrical noise difference between our standard PUMP 22 and this new
model is quite dramatic. Standard pumps generate a Magnetic field which
will induce a current into the conductive media coming out of the syringe.
This will create noise in the biological reading/recordings. With the new
PHYSIO 22, even the most sensitive sensors will not show a noise spike.
With the new toroidal transformer the noise disappears completely.
This pump features an LED display and numerical keypad for easy entry of
syringe diameter data and flow rates. Flow rate units can be set in µl/hr,
µl/min, ml/hr and ml/min. An optical encoder monitors leadscrew rotation to
accurately maintain any flow rate. The run LED flashes when syringe plunger
movement stops unexpectedly. A complete line of accessories for the
PHYSIO 22 are available including a footswitch, audible alarm, reversing
switch and serial cables, visit our website at www.harvardapparatus.com.
The PHYSIO 22 can be controlled using RS-232 (serial) commands.
Multiple syringe pumps can be interconnected by daisy chaining pumps.
Up to 100 pumps can be addressed independently using internal reference
addresses from 0 to 99. A set of sample programs, using the Basic
programming language, is included with each pump.
84
Type
Microprocessor multiple syringe, infusion only
Accuracy
±0.35%
Reproducibility
±0.05%
Syringe:
Type
Plastic, glass or stainless steel
Size Minimum
0.5 µl
Size Maximum
140 ml
Flow Rate:
Minimum
0.002 µl/hr
Maximum
55.1 ml/min
Non Volatile Memory
Storage of all settings
RS-232
25-pin connector
TTL
Shared port with RS-232
Average Linear Force
47 lbs
Drive Motor
0.9° step angle motor
Motor Drive Control
1/4 microstepping
Motor Step per One
Rev. of Leadscrew
3,200 steps
Step Resolution
0.33 µm/step
Step Rate:
Minimum
6.8 sec/step
Maximum
416.7 µsec/step
Pusher Travel Rate:
Minimum
2.9068 µm/min
Maximum
47.6 mm/min
Power
30 W, 0.5 A fuse
Voltage Range
95 to 130 VAC, 60 Hz; 220 to 260 VAC, 50 Hz, selectable
Dimensions, H x W x D
28 x 22.2 x 14 cm (11 x 8.75 x 5.5 in)
Weight
4.5 kg (10 lb)
Order #
Product
W4 70-2222 PHYSIO 22 Syringe Pump with Standard
2-Syringe Holder
W4 70-2223 PHYSIO 22 Syringe Pump
with 6/10 Multi-Syringe Rack
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
peristaltic pumps
Peristaltic Pump 66 and 77
Two Sizes Available
Calibration by Volume or Weight
For precise volumetric calibration, measure the actual volume pumped
compared to what the pump thinks it has delivered. Enter the exact
amount actually delivered into the pump and the pump will automatically
recalibrate itself in microliters per pump head revolution. For precise
gravimetric calibration, connect the pump to a Mettler, Ohaus or Sartorius
scale with a feedback connector. The pump now operates by weight and
will recalibrate itself in grams per pump head revolution.
RS-232C Interface and TTL Input/Output
Features
• Highly accurate peristaltic pumps ±1%
• Unique ramped deceleration and ‘slurp back’
• Continuous volume or batch mode operation
• Easy to use
This pump can be controlled remotely by any personal computer via an
RS-232C interface. Up to 99 pumps can be daisy-chained using the
daisy-chain connector and cables offered as accessories. A connector
for TTL input/output permits remote control of all functions.
Peristaltic Pump 66 and 77 Specifications
Type
3 roller rotary peristaltic, single channel
Accuracy
±1%
Harvard Apparatus’ 66 and 77 Peristaltic Pumps provide highly accurate
and repeatable flow rates and are extremely easy to use.
Reproducibility
±1%
RS-232C Interface
Chained dual bi-directional ports
High Accuracy
TTL Connector
9-pin connector
These pumps have the same high quality micro-stepping motor that
creates the legendary accuracy of Harvard Apparatus’ Syringe Pumps.
Other peristaltic pumps have less accurate DC motors. No other peristaltic
pump offers this quality of basic motor control. Additional accuracy
features include ramped deceleration as the end-point is approached and
a ‘slurping’ feature to prevent end of dispense dripping. As the end-point
approaches, the pump slows to drop-by-drop delivery. As the last drop
required is delivered, the pump immediately reverses one step and slurps
back preventing unintended fluid delivery. Only these Harvard Apparatus
innovations enable accuracy approaching that of a syringe pump from a
peristaltic pump.
Display
5 digits and 10 LED indicators
Selectable Baud Rates
300, 600, 1200, 2400
Step Rate:
Minimum
27.3 sec/step
Maximum
416.7 µsec/step
Back Pressure
30 p.s.i. maximum
Power
115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Voltage Range
95/130 VAC; 220/260 VAC
Pump:
Small 66 Pump Large 77 Pump
Tubing ID*
1.6 and 3.2 mm
3.2 and 6.4 mm
(0.0625 and 0.125 in) (0.125 and 0.25 in)
Fast and Easy
Flow Rates
0.01 to 210 ml/min
Routine work is made fast, easy and convenient with the 66 and 77
peristaltic pumps. Just enter the calibration factor of the tubing and the
flow rate desired. The pump takes care of the rest. All settings are stored
in non-volatile memory.
Dimensions,
HxWxD
22.9 x 20.6 x 8.9 cm 24.1 x 20.6 x 12.7 cm
(9 x 8.125 x 3.5 in) (9.5 x 8.125 x 5 in)
Weight
3.53 kg (7.85 lb)
Flexibility
The 66 and 77 peristaltic pumps offer three pumping protocols for
outstanding flexibility:
• Continuous Flow – set the flow rate desired and the pump will run
continuously until you stop it.
• Volume Mode – enter the volume to be delivered and the pump will run
until that volume is delivered.
• Batch Mode – simply enter the time interval between dispenses and
the number of dispenses you want and the pump will take it from there. It
couldn’t be more simple.
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Harvard Apparatus’ peristaltic pump is offered in two sizes. The only
difference between the two pumps is the flow rates provided. The 66
accepts smaller diameter tubing and provides flow rates from 0.01 to 210
ml/minute. The larger size 77 pump accepts larger diameter tubing to
provide flow rates from 0.01 to 750 ml/minute.
peristaltic pumps
Peristaltic Pumps
66 and 77
Order #
0.01 to 750 ml/min
5.1 kg (11.25 lb)
Product
W4 55-7766 Peristaltic Pump 66
W4 55-7777 Peristaltic Pump 77
W4 70-2022 RS-232 Connection Cable; Computer to Pump
W4 72-2478 Daisy Chain Cable; Pump to Pump, 1.8 m (7 ft)
W4 55-7760 Daisy Chain Cable; Pump to Pump, 0.6 m (2 ft)
W4 55-7757 Feedback Loop Connector for Mettler Scale
W4 55-7758 Feedback Loop Connector for Ohaus Scale
W4 55-7759 Feedback Loop Connector for Sartorius Scale
*Note: Tygon R-1000 or comparable tubing recommended, see page 87.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
85
Harvard MPII
peristaltic pumps
Mini-Peristaltic Pump
Small, low cost 2-channel peristaltic pump for basic applications
W4 70-2027 Harvard MPII
Mini-Peristaltic Pump
MPII Flow Rates in ml/min
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Switch
Setting
With One Tube
Min.
Max.
With Two Tubes
Min.
Max.
x1
0.8 ml/min
7.00 ml/min
1.6 ml/min
14.00 ml/min
x2
1.5 ml/min
12.25 ml/min
3.0 ml/min
24.50 ml/min
Specifications
peristaltic pumps
Output Pressure
In excess of 20 p.s.i.
Power
12 VDC 800 mA, 2.5 mm Connector, 115/230 VAC,
50/60 Hz, Universal power supply, 10 W
Dimensions, H x W x D
189 x 114 x 105 cm (3.5 x 4.5 x 4 in)
Weight
0.96 kg (2.1 lb)
Tubing ID
1/16 in
Order #
Product
W4 70-2027 MPII, 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz*
W4 55-4148 Pump Head Tubing Pieces. These Silicone Pump
Head Tubing Pieces Have Connectors on Each
End for 1/16 in ID Tubing 2.5 in, pkg. of 10
• Continuous low flow rates ideal for:
– Slow perfusion studies
– Controlled animal feeding
• Pump can take one or two tubes simultaneously,
1/16 in. ID
• Control knob for pumping speed
• Toggle switches for direction and x1 or x2 speed
range selection
• Low electrical and mechanical noise
• Small size
* Pump Head Tubing Pieces are necessary in order to use the Pump. They are not included, so
they must be ordered separately.
The Harvard MPII Mini-Peristaltic Pump takes only one size of tubing,
1.6 mm ID x 3.2 mm OD (1/16 x 1/8 in). It can be used with either a single
tube or two tubes simultaneously. Two of the W4 55-4148 Pump Head
Tubing Pieces are included with the pump. Additional Pump Head Tubing
Pieces (W4 55-4148) may be purchased separately.
Two front panel controls provide flow rates from approximately 0.8 to
24.5 ml/min. The control knob provides variable adjustment from 0 to
100% of the selected flow rate range. The second control is a two
position toggle switch marked x1, x2 which selects low or high flow rates,
see table to right.
The easy-loading four-roller pump head is on top of the stout metal box.
The back of the pump head effortlessly rotates into an ‘open’ position and
either one or two tubes can be dropped into slots. The loaded section
simply rotates back against spring loaded jaws and locks into place. The
tubing is automatically in proper wiping contact with the pump head
rollers. Each Pump is provided with a 12.5 mm (0.5 in) rod clamp on the
back so that multiple pumps can be mounted vertically on a lattice rod.
86
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Model 720
peristaltic pumps
Compact Peristaltic Pump
Tube sets must be purchased separately. Frequently ordered tube sets are
listed below. Other tube sets are available, please see our website or
contact technical support. For use with saline and most drugs, use silicone
tubing. For use with solutions containing fats, such as IV diets, use CFLEX® tubing. For use with petroleum-based fluids, use VITON® tubing.
•
•
•
•
•
Continuous infusion
Battery back-up (30 hrs)
Compact pump
Minimal electromagnetic radiation
Choose from low mid, or high flow
The Model 720 Compact Peristaltic pump is a stand-alone pump series with
flow rates of 0.02 to 12 ml/hr (Low Flow), 0.2 to 145 ml/hr (Mid-Flow) and 2
to 1100 ml/hr (High Flow). It is an ideal pump for applications which require
limited size or weight, low EMI interference, the versatility of single and
dual tubes sets (see table below) and/or external analog control.
An internal 9V lithium battery (supplied with W4 61-0098 and
W4 72-0002) will run the pump for up to 30 hours, protecting your
experiments in the event of a power failure. Due to its power
requirements, the high flow version is not available with battery backup.
Universal power supply is included with each pump. Tube sets are not
supplied and must be ordered separately. See below.
Specifications
Repeatability
±3%
Flow Control Range
20:1
Power Source
Wall-mounted 9 VDC adapter
Dimensions, H x W x D
6.4 x 5.7 x 10.2 cm (2.5 x 2.3 x 4 in)
Weight
375 g (1 lb)
Voltage Range
Universal input 100/240 VAC; 50/60 Hz
Flow Rate:
High
Mid
Min. (0.015 in. tube)
2 ml/hr
0.2 ml/hr
0.02 ml/hr
Max. (0.093 in. tube)
1100 ml/hr
145 ml/hr
12 ml/hr
W4 72-0001
W4 61-0098
W4 72-0002
peristaltic pumps
The pump is typically powered by a 1.25 V internal reference voltage. An
external reference voltage can be used to regulate flow rate and direction
(pump direction can only be reversed by analog control). Under external
control the speed dials serve as voltage attenuators to limit the external
voltage to ±1.25 volts.
Model 720 Compact
Peristaltic Pump
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Small, low cost 1-channel peristaltic pump for basic applications
Low
Tube sets typically last about one month under continuous operation. Dual
channel tube sets place more stress on the pump than do single channel
tube sets, which may shorten the life of your pump’s motor.
Order #
Product
Silicone Tubing Set, pkg. of 5
W4 61-0241 Silicone Tubing Set, 1-Ch, Female Luer to 22 ga,
pkg. of 5
W4 61-0242 Silicone Tubing Set, 1-Ch, Female Luer to 20 ga,
pkg. of 5
W4 61-0243 Silicone Tubing Set, 1-Ch, 0.062" ID Barbs,
0.8ml/hr, pkg. of 5
Tube Sets
A wide variety of tube sizes, tube materials and connector types allows
you to tailor your peristaltic pump to your particular application.
W4 61-0244 Silicone Tubing Set, 1-Ch, 0.062" ID Barbs,
5ml/hr, pkg. of 5
W4 61-0245 Silicone Tubing Set, 2-Ch, 0.062" ID Barbs,
3ml/hr, pkg. of 5
Frequently Ordered Tube Sets
Order #
Flow Rates with
W4 72-0002*
Flow Rates with
W4 61-0098*
Flow Rates with
W4 72-0001*
Typical Application
W4 61-0241
0.02 to 0.45 ml/hr
0.2 to 5 ml/hr
2 to 43 ml/hr
IV infusion with 22 ga swivels (lab animals only)
W4 61-0242
0.04 to 0.95 ml/hr
0.3 to 11 ml/hr
4 to 90 ml/hr
IV infusion with 20 ga swivels (lab animals only)
W4 61-0243
0.08 to 1.8 ml/hr
0.8 to 21 ml/hr
9 to 170 ml/hr
General laboratory applications
W4 61-0244
0.9 to 12 ml/hr
7 to 145 ml/hr
90 to 1100 ml/hr
General laboratory applications
W4 61-0245
0.3 to 6.3 ml/hr
3 to 75 ml/hr
33 to 550 ml/hr
Dual channel laboratory applications
*Tube sets are no longer supplied with the pump. They must be purchased separately.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
87
valve control systems
NEW Pressurized Perfusion Kits
Six and Eight Channel
VPP-1 Universal Reservoir Plug
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
valve control systems
SH-6/60 Syringe Holder
Shown with optional syringe holder and stand.
• Upgrades any gravity-feed perfusion system to a
pressurized system
• Universal reservoir plug fits
5, 10, and 20 ml syringes
• Dual regulators insure uniform fluid delivery
SH-8/60 Syringe Holder
The latest accessory for Warner perfusion valve control systems is a
simple, yet effective pressurization kit. The clever design of the universal
reservoir plug allows for easy insertion into 5, 10, or 20 ml BD syringes.
Precise and accurate flow, even at low flow rates, is insured using dual
regulator controls. House air or nitrogen is kept at constant 20 PSI using
the first regulator and the second regulator is used to set the flow
pressure at 0.1 PSI accuracy. Regulators include 5 µm filters and a large,
easy to read pressure gauge on the output side. Universal reservoir plugs
are designed to fit directly into a 60 cc syringe holder (SH6/60 or SH8/60).
The perfusion pressure kit for 8 channel valve controllers includes; 8universal reservoir plugs pre-connected with tubing harness, dual
pressure regulator/filter/gauges with rod mounting clamp, eight 10 ml BD
syringes, eight stopcocks, and 25 feet of polyurethane tubing 4 mm I.D. x
6 mm O.D.
The kit for 6 channel valves includes everything listed above less two of
the universal reservoir plugs, two 10 ml syringes, and two stopcocks.
88
Order #
Model Product
W4 64-1711
VPP-6
Perfusion Pressure Kit Six Channel
W4 64-1712
VPP-8
Perfusion Pressure Kit Eight Channel
W4 64-1713
VPP-1
Universal Reservoir Plug
W4 64-1714
PPT-25
Tubing Polyurethane 4 mm
I.D. x 6 mm O.D.
W4 64-0163
SH-6/60
Syringe Holder, 6 x 60 cc syringes
W4 64-0385
SH-8/60
Syringe Holder, 8 x 60 cc syringes
W4 64-1720
VPP-6-6 Perfusion Pressure Kit,
6 x 60 cc syringes
W4 64-1721
VPP-8-6 Prefusion Pressure Kit,
8 x 60 cc syringes
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
valve control systems
VC-8M, VC-8MLT, VC-8P, VC-8T
Valve Control Systems
An 8-channel multi-valve perfusion system for diverse applications
•
•
•
•
Integrated spill sensor
Choice of 3 valve types
8 channel system
Manual and computer controllable
The VC-8 Valve Control System lies at the heart of a multi-valve perfusion
system designed to automate and control the delivery of solutions to
imaging and recording chambers. The flexible design of this system
allows it to be used in diverse applications.
An exciting feature of the VC-8 system is the Spill Sensor Probe. This
probe is used to detect the presence of an overflow condition on the
microscope and, when activated, will automatically shut off all valves –
protecting your valuable equipment.
The controller can independently
large tube
regulate the function of up to eight
mini valves
valves. Individual valves are
manipulated via a manual switch, an
external analog signal or an external
digital (TTL) signal. An event marker
pulse, generated each time a valve
is switched on, is provided at the
rear of the instrument for recording
into your acquisition system. Valve
transitions (opened or closed) occur at full power to insure rapid response
times and are then held in place at less than half power to prevent heat
transfer to solutions.
While pinch valves are standard equipment, additional valve options
include Teflon and Lee miniature types. The VC-8M is designed for slow
flow perfusion systems where smaller diameter tubing is used. The
VC-8MLT uses larger ports on a mini-valve platform to accommodate the
PE-160 tubing used on most Warner chambers, this version will permit
flow rates of up to 10 ml/min.
Pinch Valve System
Mini-Valve System
Specifications
VC-8 Standard
12 V, 3-way pinch valves
VC-8 Teflon®
12 V, 2-way Teflon®
VC-8M Mini
12 V, 3-way solenoid valves
VC-8MLT Mini
12 V, 3-way solenoid valves
valve control systems
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Model VC-8 Controller
Typical Max. Flow Rates (with 60 cm head):
VC-8P, VC-8T Systems 10 ml/min
VC-8M Systems
1 ml/min
VC-8MLT Systems
10 ml/min
VC-8 Valve Controller:
Switching
Manual, TTL logic or Analog Signal
Event Marker
Logic level pulse
Spill Sensor
BNC Input for detecting an overflow
Power
100-130 or 200-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 50 VA
Size
8.9 x 20 x 25.4 cm (H x W x D)
Warranty
All systems carry 2-year warranty
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0186 VC-8M
Valve Control System
8 mini valves
W4 64-0186LT VC-8MLT
Valve Control System
8 mini valves
Large tubes for higher flow
W4 64-0185 VC-8P
VC-8P Valve Control System
8 pinch valves
W4 64-0187 VC-8T
Valve Control System
8 Teflon valves
W4 64-1523 MAT-2
Overflow Sensor Mats
and Cable (4 Mats)
A complete VC-8 system includes a powered valve controller, a valve
bracket with valves, connecting cable, C-Flex™ tubing, an MP Series
manifold, support stand, eight 60 cc syringes, 25 feet of Tygon tubing
and an assortment of tubing connectors.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
89
valve control systems
VC-6 and VC-6M
Valve Control Systems
4- or 6-channel multi-valve perfusion systems for diverse applications
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
valve control systems
Valve Controller
•
•
•
•
Manual and computer control
Basic or Complete systems
Pinch valves, standard
Teflon valves, optional
Perfusion Valve Control
Warner perfusion valve control systems are uncomplicated and easy to
operate. The VC-6 Valve Controller is configured to control up to 6 valves.
Each valve is individually manipulated by a manual switch or an external
digital (TTL) signal. An event marker pulse, generated each time a valve
is switched on, is provided for tape or chart recordings.
VC-6 Standard Pinch Valve Systems
Standard systems are supplied with tube pinch valves. They are the
simplest to maintain as the solution never comes in contact with the
valve and tubings are easily replaced. Valves are dual acting (3-way) with
both normally open and closed sides. A “Y” connector at the valve input
permits solution flow-to-waste with the valve off.
The Basic System includes the VC-6 Controller, valves, valve bracket with
8 ft cable and MP Series Manifold. Systems employing standard pinch
valves are also supplied with C-Flex™ valve tubing.
The Complete VC-6 Systems includes all of the components in the Basic
Systems plus six 60 cc reservoirs, reservoir holder, support stand,
stopcocks and tubing connectors. In addition, the systems employing
standard pinch valves are supplied with Tygon™ tubing. Systems
employing Teflon® valves include Teflon® tubing.
The VC-6M Mini-Valve Perfusion Control System is also available in two
configurations. The Basic System includes the VC-6 controller, valves,
valve manifold, 8 ft cable and ML Series manifold. The Complete System
includes all of the components in the Basic Systems plus eight 10 cc
reservoirs, reservoir holder, support stand, stopcocks, tubing connectors
and two packages of PE-50 tubing (10 ft long).
VC-6 Teflon® Valve Systems
Teflon® valves are also available and are for applications where resistance
to chemicals is needed. The valves are 2-way (either on or off).
VC-6M Mini-Valve Systems
The VC-6M is designed for slow flow perfusion systems using smaller
diameter tubing. Up to six valves mount directly to a compact Teflon®
manifold. The 3-way valves allow for solution flow to waste if desired.
The VC-6M system is ideally suited for use with the SF-77B perfusion
stepper systems.
System Choices: Basic or Complete
The VC-6 Valve Perfusion Control System is available in two configurations
with a choice of either a standard pinch valve or Teflon® valve.
90
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
valve control systems
VC-6 and VC-6M
Mini valves
with syringe
holder and
manifold
Teflon® valves
with syringe
holder and
manifold
valve control systems
Pinch valves
with syringe
holder and
manifold
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Valve Control Systems (continued)
Comp - 6 channel system with
larger tubes for higher flow
Specifications
Order #
Valves:
Basic Perfusion Systems
VC-6 Standard
12 V, 3-way pinch valves
VC-6 Teflon®
12 V, 2-way Teflon®
VC-6M Mini
12 V, 3-way solenoid valves
Model
W4 64-0171
VC-66MBB
Mini-Valve Controller
System, 6 Valves
W4 64-0129
VC-66BB
Pinch Valve Controller System,
6 Valves
W4 64-0132
VC-66BBT
Teflon® Valve Controller System,
6 Valves
Typical Max. Flow Rates (with 60 cm head):
VC-6 Systems
10 ml/min
VC-6M Systems
1 ml/min
Product
Complete Perfusion Systems
VC-6 Valve Controller:
Switching
Manual or TTL logic
Event Marker
Logic level pulse
Power
110-130 or 200-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 50 VA
Size
8.9 x 20 x 25 cm (H x W x D)
Warranty
Two year
W4 64-0174
VC-66MCS
Mini-Valve Controller System,
6 Valves
W4 64-0134
VC-64CS
Pinch Valve Controller System,
4 Valves
W4 64-0135
VC-66CS
Pinch Valve Controller System,
6 Valves
W4 64-0138
VC-66CST
Teflon® Valve Controller System,
6 Valves
W4 64-0174LT VC-66MLTCS Mini-Valve Controller System,
6 Valves for Large Tubes
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
91
perfusion control
Model VT-8 Valve Timer
Specifications
Digital Data Output
+5V TTL output, 20mA source, 20mA sink,
100Ω impedance.
Digital Data Input
+5V TTL input, 47KΩ impedance.
Analog Data Output
+10V buffered output.
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Communication
USB 1.1, USB 2.0, 12Mbps
Firmware Update
Via supplied software
Data Generation
Via 54008 dedicated communication
software included
Power Requirement
+5V, 300mA, supplied from USB bus
Operating Temperature
10° to 40° C
perfusion control
Physical Dimensions:
Case Size
• Add computer control to any Warner Instruments
valve controller
• Low cost
• Easy to use
• Eight channel computer-controlled timer
• Plug and play connectivity via USB 2.0
• Two external trigger inputs
• Eight digital outputs
• Two analog outputs
6.0 x 10.0 x 13.5 cm (H x W x D)
Shipping Weight
1 kg
Warranty
One year, parts & labor
Order #
Model Product
W4 64-1660
VT-8
Valve Timer
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-1661
VT-ST
Set of 8 BNC Cables, (2 ft)
W4 64-0186
VC-8M
Valve Control System
8 Mini Valves
W4 64-0185
VC-8P
Valve Control System
8 Pinch Valves
The VT-8 Valve Timer is a microcontroller unit that communicates with
Windows-based computers via the high speed USB 2.0 port. Designed
with Warner’s perfusion valve controllers in mind, the instrument also
makes an excellent general purpose lab timer.
The VT-8 front panel has eight digital TTL outputs, two analog outputs,
and two digital inputs. The two digital inputs can be used to trigger the
VT-8. The VT-8 can drive TTL standard loads with 250ms time resolution,
and can accept two TTL external trigger signals.
A user friendly, software-driven computer interface makes it easy to
generate an automated protocol for valve opening and closing during
any experiment.
The timer continuously communicates with the computer which facilitates
instantaneous response to user-directed commands of the output TTL.
Programming is straightforward and is accomplished using a graphical
interface and keyboard. A ‘syringe configuration’ feature ensures there is
adequate solution volume to complete the experiment. An emergency
cut-off feature is included and can be used to automatically close all
valves simultaneously.
The VT-8 includes the control unit, USB cable (2 m), and software.
92
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
valve control systems
Parts and Accessories
TV-2 replacement Teflon valve
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0139
PV-1
Pinch Valve
W4 64-0140
TV-2
Teflon® Valve
W4 64-0175
SV-1
Mini Solenoid Valve
Accessories for VC-6 Systems
SV-1 replacement
mini solenoid valve
DC-6 Drip Chambers
LPE Replacement Pipette Tips
SH6/60 Syringe Holder
W4 64-1428
LPE-10
Replacement Pipette Tips, pkg. of 10
W4 64-0162
RS-1
Support Stand
W4 64-0163
SH-6/60
Syringe Holder, six 60 cc syringes
W4 64-0144
SH-6/140
Syringe Holder, six 140 cc syringes
W4 64-0143
SH-8/10
Syringe Holder, eight 10 cc syringes
W4 64-0385
SH-8/60
Syringe Holder, eight 60 cc syringes
W4 64-0164
TC-3
Tubing Connectors (1/16 in ID), pkg. of
12 straight, 6 Y and 6 Luer Connectors
W4 64-0165
SL-6
Stopcock with Luer Connector, pkg. of 6
W4 64-1489
SN-18
Blunt End Needles 18 AWG, pkg. of 12
W4 64-1490
SN-23
Blunt End Needles 23 AWG, pkg. of 12
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Replacement Valves for VC-6 Systems
value control system
PV-1 replacement pinch
solenoid valve
Tubing for VC-6 Systems
W4 64-0166
CFL-6
C-Flex (1/32 in x 6 ft, ID x L)
W4 64-0168
TT-25
Teflon® (1/16 in x 25 ft, ID x L)
W4 64-0167
TY-50
Tygon (1/16 in x 50 ft, IDx L)
Tubing for VC-6M Mini Systems
SH6/140 Syringe Holder
SH8/10 Syringe Holder
W4 64-0752
PE-50/10
PE-50 Polyethylene Tubing, 10 ft
W4 64-0753
PE-50/100
PE-50 Polyethylene Tubing, 100 ft
Additional PE Tubing
SH8/60 Syringe Holder
TC-3 Tubing Connector Kit for 1/16
in ID tubing
SL-6 Stopcocks
PE and C-Flex Tubing
W4 64-0754
PE-90/10
PE-90 Polyethylene Tubing, 10 ft
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
PE-160 Polyethylene Tubing, 10 ft
W4 64-0756
PE-160/100 PE-160 Polyethylene Tubing, 100 ft
W4 64-0142
DC-6
Drip chamber, 6 pack
TY-50 Tygon Tubing
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
93
fast-step systems
SF-77B, SF-77BLT and SF-77BST
Perfusion Fast-Step
A fast stepper combined with a mini-valve perfusion system
Square Glass Ports
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
The square glass tubes used for solution delivery significantly reduces mixing
turbulence, allowing the SF-77B to be used for studies with both membrane
patches and whole cells, even when the cells are not fixed to a substrate.
System Versatility
The design of the SF-77B permits the use of various size glass tubing for
perfusion delivery.
fast-step systems
SF-77B: Standard System (0.7 mm ID tubes)
The standard system is shipped with 3SG700-5 single-walled 3-barrel
glass tubing which eliminates the need to glue individual barrels together.
Spacing between barrels is 0.7 mm and step speed between adjacent
barrels is typically 20 msec. Single barrel SG800-5 tubes (up to 5) can be
used with the same holder.
• Solution delivery for patch clamp and other
electrophysiology studies
• Solution changes in milliseconds
• Minimal flow turbulence
• No switching through intervening solutions
• Manual or automatic step control
(digital or analog)
• Modest cost and easy maintenance
The SF-77B is a fast solution delivery device for use in patch clamp and
electrophysiology studies. Control and test solutions flow continuously
through adjacent delivery tubes and a stepper mechanism selects which
tube is directed at the preparation. The rapid response and nominal
hysteresis of the stepper allows for very short switching times. Complete
solution changes are typically achieved within 20 msec for a large, 700
µm step and times are significantly shortened as the step size is
decreased.
Multiple Solution Studies
In the standard configuration, up to six different solutions are connected
to a single input manifold, which in turn is connected to one of three
square glass stimulus tubes. The three tube design is superior to a twotube design in that complex solution exchange protocols can be brought
to bear on the sample under study. Since the complete system is designed
to accommodate three manifolds (one for each tube), and since each
manifold can accommodate up to 6 feed lines, it is possible to
immediately select between 18 different input solutions.
Manual or External Control
The stepper mechanism can be manually controlled via the front panel
or externally directed from your data acquisition program. Manually, the
system can be stepped to 8 positions in 7 equally spaced steps. These
same 8 positions can also be directly selected by applying an analog
signal to the external analog input BNC or by passing a 3 byte word to
the TTL input on the instrument rear panel.
94
SF-77BLT: Large Tube System (1.0 mm ID tubes)
Larger ports are required when using the SF-77B with larger cell
structures such as the Xenopus oocyte. Solutions are delivered through
1.0 mm ID square tubes (SG1000-5) with barrel-to-barrel spacing of 1.4 mm.
SF-77B/5M: Standard System with Five Manifolds
The SF-77B/5M is the same system as the SF-77B except that it is
provided with five perfusion manifolds.
SF-77BST: Fast Stepping with Theta Tubing
Very fast perfusion stepping is possible using 2-barrel Theta tubing.
The technique requires close attention to detail with careful placing of
the pipes and the excised patch. The tubing is pulled on a standard puller
for a tip diameter of approximately 300 µm and a barrel spacing of
approximately 100 µm. When using 100 µm steps, it is important to
minimize any vibration produced by the stepper motor. This is accomplished
by reducing the motor voltage via the control located on the instrument
rear panel. The voltage is lowered until the vibration artifact is minimized.
Any residual artifact may be removed by subtracting averaged null traces.*
Easy Set-Up
The stepper mechanism is compact, lightweight, and free of either
mechanical or electrical noise. The mechanism connects to the control
box with a 2 meter shielded cable and is provided with a mounting rod for
attachment to a manipulator. Manifolds can support 2, 4 or 6 inputs
depending on the experiment. Solutions flow from reservoirs to the
manifold through PE-50 tubing and PE-10 tubing is used to connect the
manifold outputs to the glass tubes.
• Solution changes between tubes occur within milliseconds.
• Changes between solutions connected to individual ports occur
within 5 seconds.
• Entirely new solutions can be added into any port with a waiting
time of no more than 30 seconds.
• The cell is never required to pass through an intervening solution
to get from control to test solution.
* Reference: Jie Zheng and Fred Sigworth, Selecting Changes during Activation of Mutant Shaker
Potassium Channels, J. General Physiology, vol. 10 August 1997, 101-117, Rockefeller Univ. Press
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
fast-step systems
SF-77B, SF-77BLT and SF-77BST
Perfusion Fast-Step (continued)
Product
Standard System with
MM Series Manifolds, 1 pkg.
3SG700-5 Glass, GH-1 Glass Holder, and 1
pkg. each PE-10 and PE-50 Tubing, 115 VAC
W4 64-1515 SF-77B
Standard System with
MM Series Manifolds, 1 pkg. 3SG700-5
Glass, GH-1 Glass Holder, and 1 pkg. each
PE-10 and PE-50 Tubing, 220/240 VAC
W4 64-0117 SF-77B/5M Perfusion System with
5 manifolds, 115 VAC
W4 64-1518 SF-77B/5M Perfusion System with
5 manifolds, 220/240 VAC
W4 64-0116 SF-77BLT
Large Tube System with
ML Series Manifolds, 1 pkg.
SG1000-5 Glass, GH-10 Glass Holder,
and 2 pkg. of PE-50 Tubing, 115 VAC
W4 64-1517 SF-77BLT
Large Tube System with
ML Series Manifolds, 1 pkg.
SG1000-5 Glass, GH-10 Glass Holder,
and 2 pkg. of PE-50 Tubing, 220/240 VAC
W4 64-0115 SF-77BST
Theta Glass System with
MM Series Manifolds, 1 pkg. TGC-200-10
Glass, GH-2T Glass Holder, and 1 pkg.
each PE-10 and PE-50 Tubing, 115 VAC
W4 64-1516 SF-77BST
Theta Glass System with
MM Series Manifolds, 1 pkg.
TGC-200-10 Glass, GH-2T Glass Holder,
and 1 pkg. each PE-10 and PE-50
Tubing, 220/240 VAC
Specifications
Number of Steps
1 to 7 selectable
Step Size
Adjustable from 100 µm to 1.5 mm steps
in 100 µm increments
Step Speed
Typically 20 msec for 700 µm step
Step Control:
Manual
8 positions with POSITION selector
Analog Signal
8 positions with voltage levels 0-7 V, 1V/step
Accessories and replacement parts
Digital Signal
8 positions with 3 byte TTL signal
W4 64-0119 3SG700-5
3-Barrel Square Glass Tubes,
0.6 mm x 5 cm (ID x L), pkg. of 10
W4 64-0120 3SG700-10
3-Barrel Square Glass Tubes,
0.6 mm x 10 cm (ID x L), pkg. of 10
W4 64-0121 SG-800-5
Single Barrel Square Glass Tubes,
0.6 mm x 5 cm (ID x L), pkg. of 25
W4 64-0122 SG-1000-5
Single Barrel Square Glass Tubes,
1 mm x 5 cm (ID x L), pkg. of 25
W4 64-0124 GH-1
Glass Holder for 3SG700-5,
3SG700-10 and SG800-5 Glass
Rates measured with solution reservoir
height of approx. 60 cm (24 in)
W4 64-0125 GH-2T
Glass Holder for Theta Glass
W4 64-0126 GH-10
Glass Holder for SG1000-5 Glass
With MM Series
100 µl/min
W4 64-0750 PE-10/10
Polyethylene Tubing 10 ft.
With ML Series
1 ml/min
Max. Stepper Range
12.0 mm
Mounting Handle
6.3 mm X 10 cm (D x L)
Stepper Weight
110.5 g (including handle)
Solution Manifolds:
Three manifolds supplied with each system;
MM series for SF-77B and SF-77BST and
ML series with SF-77 BLT
MM Series
Manifolds use PE-50 tubing at input and
PE-10 tubing at output
ML Series
Manifolds use PE-50 tubing at both input and output
Solution Flow Rates:
Control Box:
Size (H x W x D)
6.3 x 14 x 23 cm
Power Requirements
100 – 130 or 220 – 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
System Shipping Wt.
2.7 kg
Warranty
Two years, parts and labor
W4 64-0752 PE-50/10
Polyethylene Tubing 10 ft.
W4 64-0811 TG200-4
Theta Glass Tubes, 2.0 mm x 10 cm
(OD x L), pkg. of 100
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Model
W4 64-0114 SF-77B
fast-step systems
Order #
95
fast-step systems
VC-77SP and VC-77SP8
Perfusion Fast-Step
A fast stepper combined with a mini-valve perfusion system
VC-77SP
VC-6M System with
SF-77B Stepper System
VC-77SP8
VC-8M System with
SF-77B Stepper System
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
fast-step systems
• Allows computer control of multiple
perfusion lines
• Six and eight channel systems available
• Solution changes in milliseconds
The VC-77SP perfusion system combines the VC-6M Perfusion Valve
Control System and the SF-77B Fast Step Perfusion System into a single
package. It allows computer control of multiple perfusion setups, saving
time and effort.
The VC-77SP system includes:
W4 64-0174 VC-66MCS Complete Mini-Valve System, 6-Channels
W4 64-0114 SF-77B
Perfusion Fast-Step System
W4 64-0056 MM-33R
Micromanipulator, Right Handed
W4 69-0225 MB-B
Magnetic Base
The VC-77SP8 perfusion system combines the VC-8M Perfusion Valve
Control Systems and the SF-77B Fast Step Perfusion System.
The VC-77SP8 system includes:
W4 64-0186 VC-8M
Complete Mini-Valve System, 8-Channels
W4 64-0114 SF-77B
Perfusion Fast-Step System
W4 64-0056 MM-33R
Micromanipulator, Right Handed
W4 69-0225 MB-B
Magnetic Base
For complete details of the VC-6 and VC-8 Complete Mini-Valve Perfusion
Systems, see pages 90 to 91. For complete details on other Perfusion
Fast-Step System, see pages 94 and 95.
96
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0177
VC-77SP
Complete VC-6 Fast-Step
Perfusion System with right-handed
micromanipulator, 115 VAC
W4 64-1519
VC-77SP
Complete VC-6 Fast-Step
Perfusion System with
right-handed micromanipulator,
220/240 VAC
W4 64-0177L
VC-77SPL
Complete VC-6 Fast-Step
Perfusion System with left-handed
micromanipulator, 115 VAC
W4 64-0177LE
VC-77SPLE
Complete VC-6 Fast-Step
Perfusion System with left-handed
micromanipulator, 220 VAC
W4 64-1590
VC-77SP8
Complete VC-8 Fast-Step
Perfusion System with right-handed
micromanipulation, 115 VAC
W4 64-1590E
VC-77SP8E
Complete VC-8 Fast-Step
Perfusion System with right-handed
micromanipulation, 220 VAC
W4 64-1590L
VC-77SP8L
Complete VC-8 Fast Step
Perfusion System with left-handed
micromanipulator, 115 VAC
W4 64-1590EL VC-77SP8EL Complete VC-8 Fast Step
Perfusion System with left-handed
micromanipulator, 220/240 VAC
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
accessories
MSH and SH Series
Modular and Fixed Syringe Holders Series
SH6/60 Fixed Syringe Holder
SH6/140 Fixed Syringe Holder
SH8/10 Fixed Syringe Holder
SH8/60 Fixed Syringe Holder
accessories
Fully Assembled Modular
Syringe Holder
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
A modular system designed to accept 5, 10, 20 , 30 , 60 , and 1400 cc syringes
Exploded view of Base Mount
with several Add-on sizes
Syringe Holder Size Chart
Syringe Holder
Maximum O.D. of syringe accepted
Inches
mm
0.57
14.4
0.655
16.6
0.85
21.5
0.95
24.1
1.117
29.7
1.63
41.4
5 cc
10 cc
20 cc
30 cc
60 cc
140 cc
Order #
Model
Product
Base Mounts
MSH Series Holder System
The Modular Syringe Holder System offers users the ability to assemble
a family of differently sized syringes into a single apparatus. Warner
Instruments offers a full range of add-on holders to fit every application.
Made from high quality Delrin and 316 stainless steel, this system
assures excellent protection from most harmful chemicals.
The modular syringe holder system consists of a single syringe base mount
that is coupled with add-on syringe holders. The base mount has a
primary hole that holds the first syringe. A secondary hole permits the
unit to mount onto an upright rod or support stand ranging in size from
3/8 to 5/8 inch. Both holes have thumbscrews that tighten so that the
rod or syringe is securely held.
Additional add-on syringe holders can then mount on either side of the
base mount by simply snapping the add-on onto the side of the base mount.
Multiple add-on holders can used and sizes may be intermixed.
60 cc
Base Mount
Syringe
Mounting
Hole
Upright
Mounting
Hole
W4 64-0145 MSH/5M
Syringe Base Mount, 5 cc
W4 64-0146 MSH/10M
Syringe Base Mount, 10 cc
W4 64-0147 MSH/20M
Syringe Base Mount, 20 cc
W4 64-0148 MSH/30M
Syringe Base Mount, 30 cc
W4 64-0149 MSH/60M
Syringe Base Mount, 60 cc
W4 64-0150 MSH/140M
Syringe Base Mount, 140 cc
Add-on Units
W4 64-0151 MSH/5
Syringe Add-On, 5 cc
W4 64-0152 MSH/10
Syringe Add-On, 10 cc
W4 64-0153 MSH/20
Syringe Add-On, 20 cc
W4 64-0154 MSH/30
Syringe Add-On, 30 cc
W4 64-0155 MSH/60
Syringe Add-On, 60 cc
W4 64-0156 MSH/140
Syringe Add-On, 140 cc
Fixed Syringe Holders
W4 64-0143 SH-8/10
Syringe Holder, 8 x 10 cc Syringes
W4 64-0163 SH-6/60
Syringe Holder, 6 x 60 cc Syringes
W4 64-0385 SH-8/60
Syringe Holder, 8 x 60 cc Syringes
W4 64-0144 SH-6/140
Syringe Holder, 6 x 140 cc Syringes
Accessories and Replacement Parts
16.1 to 17.5 mm
W4 64-0165 SL-6
Stopcock with Luer Connector,
pkg. of 6
W4 64-0162 RS-1
Support Stand
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
97
accessories
DN Series
Constant Flow Syringes
Eliminates changes in flow rate as the reservoir empties
DN Series
Constant
Flow Syringes
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
DN Series
Constant Flow Syringes
shown with Modular Syringe Holder,
FR-50 Flow Valve,
Chamber, MP-5 Manifold
and RS-1 Support Stand
accessories
When using a gravity-feed perfusion system, a common difficulty facing
researchers is maintaining a constant flow as the reservoir empties. In
general, since head pressure is a linear function of column height, the
change in height of a 60 cc syringe as the solution reservoir drains can
result in as much as a 20% decrease in flow rate.
Warner Instruments provides a simple and unique solution to this
common problem. The DN Series Constant Flow Syringes eliminates
changes in flow rate, normally to less than 1%. These reservoirs are
designed to maintain a constant pressure on the syringe contents without
resorting to complex or bulky apparatus (such as a pressure system or
regulator).
When used in conjunction with Warner Instruments’ FR-55S Solution Flow
Valve, precise, sub-maximal flow control is easily achieved. Syringe
reservoirs may be refilled without interrupting solution flow. They are
available in 5 to 60 cc volumes and can be used with Warner’s MSH
Series Modular Syringe Holder System, see page 97.
If you want to use the DN Series Constant Flow Syringe with the MSH
Modular Syringe Holder Series, you must order the next size up in the
series. See the reference chart below for proper ordering information.
DN Series Constant Flow Syringes
syringe size mount/holder size
5 cc
10 cc
10 cc
20 cc
20 cc
60 cc
30 cc
60 cc
60 cc
140 cc
98
base mount
W4 64-0146
W4 64-0147
W4 64-0149
W4 64-0149
W4 64-0150
add-on holder
W4 64-0152
W4 64-0153
W4 64-0155
W4 64-0155
W4 64-0156
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0157
DN/5
Constant Flow Syringe, 5 cc, pkg. of 6
W4 64-0158
DN/10
Constant Flow Syringe, 10 cc, pkg. of 6
W4 64-0159
DN/20M
Constant Flow Syringe, 20 cc, pkg. of 6
W4 64-0160
DN/30M
Constant Flow Syringe, 30 cc, pkg. of 6
W4 64-0161
DN/60M
Constant Flow Syringe, 60 cc, pkg. of 6
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0220
FR-50
Flow Valve
W4 64-0221
FR-55S
Flow Valve with On-Off Switch
W4 64-0165
SL-6
Stopcock w/Luer Connector, pkg. of 6
W4 64-0162
RS-1
Support Stand
W4 64-0209
MP-5
5 to 1 Perfusion Manifold
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
PE-160 Polyethylene Tubing, 10 ft
W4 64-0756
PE-160/100 PE-160 Polyethylene Tubing, 100 ft
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
GBM10 and GBM60
accessories
Gas Bubbler Manifold
Maintain gas tension in solution
GBM60 shown with
SH8/60 Syringe Holder
accessories
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
GBM10 shown with
SH8/10 Syringe Holder
These gas bubbler manifolds for 10 and 60 cc syringes are useful for
delivering water soluble gases to syringe reservoirs mounted in Warner
syringe holders. Luer fittings on all the inlet and outlet ports make these
manifolds very easy to assemble. Constructed from clear polycarbonate
for durability and easy cleaning.
Supplied with support stand clamp, Tygon tubing (1/16 x 1/8", ID x OD,
50 ft), PE-50 tubing (10 ft), 1 stopcock on the gas inlet port, and 9 luer
plugs to block off any unused outlet ports.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1587 GBM10
Gas Bubbler Manifold for
10 cc syringes
W4 64-1588 GBM60
Gas Bubbler Manifold for
60 cc syringes
W4 64-0752 PE-50/10
PE-50 Polyethylene Tubing, 10 ft
W4 64-0753 PE-50/100
PE-50 Polyethylene Tubing, 100 ft
Specifications
Physical Dimensions
Body
(10 cc) 13 mm diameter x 267 mm long
Port Spacing
(10 cc) 33 mm center to center
Body
(60 cc) 13 mm diameter x 419 mm long
Port Spacing
(60 cc) 54 mm center to center
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
99
accessories
Tubing and Connector Kit, Syringe Needles
Parts and accessories
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Warner Instruments offers a complete tubing and connector kit. This kit is
ideal for use with Warner’s Imaging and Recording Chambers. The kit is
comprised of barbed and Luer fittings, blunt end needles, and an
assortment of PE and C-Flex tubing. All barbed and Luer fittings are
made from polypropylene and include tube to tube, reducing, Y-, T-,
Luer-to-Luer, and Luer-to-barb adapters.
Comes in a convenient plastic storage box.
Order #
accessories
Components listed at right are included in the tubing and connector kit.
Components also sold separately.
W4 64-1567
W4 64-1566
W4 64-1568
W4 64-1570
W4 64-1569
W4 64-1574 W4 64-1573 W4 64-1582
W4 64-1576
W4 64-1575 W4 64-1581
Blunt End Needles
W4 64-1489
W4 64-1490
W4 64-1583
W4 64-0141
100
Model
W4 64-1565 KIT-1
W4 64-1578
W4 64-1580
PE and C-Flex Tubing
W4 64-1572
W4 64-1571
W4 64-1579
W4 64-1577
Product
Fitting and Tubing Kit
Order #
Product
W4 64-1566
Tube Fitting Barb 1⁄8" to 1⁄16", pkg. of 10
W4 64-1567
Tube Fitting Barb 1⁄16" to 1⁄16", pkg. of 10
W4 64-1568
Tube Fitting Barb 1⁄8" to 1⁄8" in, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1569
Tube Fitting Tee Barb 1⁄16", pkg. of 10
W4 64-1570
Tube Fitting Tee Barb 1⁄8", pkg. of 10
W4 64-1571
Tube Fitting Y Barb 1⁄16", pkg. of 10
W4 64-1572
Tube Fitting Y Barb 1⁄8", pkg. of 10
W4 64-1573
Tube Fitting Barb 1⁄16" to Luer Male, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1574
Tube Fitting Barb 1⁄8" to Luer Male, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1575
Tube Fitting Barb 1⁄16" to Luer Female, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1576
Tube Fitting Barb 1⁄8" to Luer Female, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1577
Tube Fitting Luer Male to Luer Female, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1578
Tube Fitting Luer Tee Female, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1579
Tube Fitting Luer Male to Luer Male, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1580
Tube Fitting Luer Female to Luer Female, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1581
Tube Fitting Luer Female Plug, pkg. of 10
W4 64-1582
Tube Fitting Luer Male Plug, pkg. of 10
W4 64-0141
LPE-50, Luer to PE-50 tubing adapter, pkg. of 8
W4 64-0166
CFL-6, C-Flex tubing (1⁄32" ID x 6 ft) 3⁄32 OD mm, 6 ft
Blunt Needle Plastic Hub
W4 64-1489
SN-18, 18G, 0.5", pkg. of 12
W4 64-1490
SN-23, 23G, 0.5", pkg. of 12
W4 64-1583
SN-30, 30G, 0.5", pkg. of 12
Polyethylene Tubing
W4 64-0750
PE-10/10, 0.28 ID x 0.61 OD mm, 10 ft
W4 64-0752
PE-50/10, 0.58 ID x 0.97 OD mm, 10 ft
W4 64-0754
PE-90/10, 0.86 ID x 1.27 OD mm, 10 ft
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10, 1.14 ID x 1.57 OD mm, 10 ft
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
accessories
ML, MM, MP and MPP Series
Manifolds and Flow Control Hardware
ML and MM Series
Designed to be part of the SF-77 Perfusion Fast-Step systems, these
miniature manifolds are useful for applications involving small volumes or
slow flow rates. Small diameter tubing is used with these models; PE-50
tubing for the input ports, and PE-10 or PE-50 tubing for the MM or ML
series output ports, respectively.
MM Series
accessories
Warner perfusion manifolds can be used in any application where from 2
to 8 perfusion lines are required to be connected to a chamber or other
device. Manifold inputs converge to the common output with minimum
dead space. Designed for use with polyethylene (PE) tubing, manifolds
can be used with any other tubing of similar dimensions. When connected
to a chamber via a short length of tubing, very rapid solution changes
are possible.
ML Series
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Multi-in or multi-out manifolds for fluid management
MP Series
MP series manifolds are recommended for gravity fed perfusion systems.
Input and output tubing are inserted with a friction fit. Manifolds should
be ordered with inputs to match the number of solutions to be connected.
Pin plugs to block unused inputs are also supplied. MP series manifolds
are used with PE-160 tubing.
MP Series
MPP Series
These manifolds are suitable for systems in which solutions are pumped
or at pressures greater than those generated in gravity fed systems. Input
and output ports are 18 gauge stainless steel hypodermic tubing. PE-160
tubing slides over these ports to make a snug fit.
MPP Series
MPP-24
Output
Inputs
Material
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0200
ML-2
Miniature Manifold, 2 ports
W4 64-0201
ML-4
Miniature Manifold, 4 ports
W4 64-0202
ML-6
Miniature Manifold, 6 ports
W4 64-0199
ML-8
Miniature Manifold, 8 ports
W4 64-0203
MM-2
Miniature Manifold, 2 ports
W4 64-0204
MM-4
Miniature Manifold, 4 ports
W4 64-0205
MM-6
Miniature Manifold, 6 ports
W4 64-0206
MP-2
MP Manifold, 2 ports
W4 64-0207
MP-3
MP Manifold, 3 ports
W4 64-0208
MP-4
MP Manifold, 4 ports
W4 64-0209
MP-5
MP Manifold, 5 ports
W4 64-0210
MP-6
MP Manifold, 6 ports
W4 64-0211
MP-8
MP Manifold, 8 ports
W4 64-0212
MPP-2
MPP Manifold, 2 ports
W4 64-0213
MPP-3
MPP Manifold, 3 ports
MPP-4
MPP Manifold, 4 ports
ML Series
MM Series
MP Series
MPP Series
W4 64-0214
Delrin
Delrin
Teflon
Delrin
W4 64-0215
MPP-5
MPP Manifold, 5 ports
MPP-6
MPP Manifold, 6 ports
™
™
®
™
Large Diameter
8.0 mm
8.0 mm
9.4 mm
9.4 mm
W4 64-0216
Small Diameter
4.7 mm
4.7 mm
6.3 mm
4.7 mm
W4 64-0217
MPP-8
MPP Manifold, 8 ports
W4 64-0339
MPP-24
MPP Manifold, 24 ports
Body Length
18 mm
18 mm
22 mm
21 mm
Input Tubing
PE-50
PE-50
PE-160
PE-160
Output Tubing
PE-50
PE-10
PE-160
PE-160
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
101
accessories
MHH-25/MHH-38 and FR-50/FR-55S
Manifolds and Flow Valves
Tools for fluid management
Electrode/Manifold Holders
Vacuum/Solution Flow Valve
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
accessories
Vacuum/Solution Flow Valves
Electrode/Manifold Holders
The MHH-25 and MHH-38 Holders permit convenient mounting of
manifolds and electrode holders or other devices with 6.3 or 9.5 mm
diameters. The holder head can be pivoted ±90° from the axial position
and rotated 360° about the axis. Friction holds the head firmly in the set
position. Holder head and coupler are made from Delrin®. The anodized
aluminum handle is 6.3 mm diameter x 6.3 cm long and will fit most
positioners. The MHH-25 electrode/manifold holder is compatible with
E and Q Series Electrode Holders, and the MHH-38 with PE Series and
Theta Electrode Holders, as well as the MP and MPP Series Manifold.
Order #
102
Model
FR-50 and FR-55S flow valves are used for fine control of solutions in a
gravity fed perfusion system or for vacuum used to evacuate a chamber.
When used for chamber evacuation, the FR-50 provides the fine control
critical to a properly operating system. Solution flow rate is adjustable
from zero to a maximum of 10 ml/min., (measured with a solution head of
30 cm). Model FR-55S includes a convenient on-off switch for interrupting
the flow without disturbing the flow rate setting.
Specifications
Materials
Teflon® and Delrin® plastics
Input/Output
Stainless steel tubing compatible with PE-160 tubing
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0220 FR-50
Flow Valve
W4 64-0221 FR-55S
Flow Valve with On-Off Switch
Product
W4 64-0218 MHH-25
Holder for 6.3 mm (1/4 in) Devices
W4 64-0219 MHH-38
Holder for 9.5 mm (3/8 in) Devices
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
gas controllers
Harvard CO2 Gas/pH Controller
Precise solution pH control using CO2 gas
A BNC connector on the rear of the unit provides an output (0 to 5 V)
signal proportional to the pH. This connection can be used to continuously
log the pH values to a chart recorder, data acquisition system, or other
recording device. The unit is powered by 12 VDC universal power supply
for benchtop use. The pH controller is shipped with a controller, power
supply, AC/DC adaptor, combination pH electrode and quick disconnect
fittings matching front panel connectors for input and output hoses.
gas controllers
When used with the Harvard Apparatus series of heating/cooling
micro-incubators, this controller provides a complete pH/temperature
controlled environment ideal for long term cell or tissue studies. The pH
controller has a 4-digit LCD display capable of displaying the full pH range
from 0 to 14 pH. The supplied microminiature combination pH electrode
is ideal for applications involving placement of the pH electrode in a
small area. The system is also compatible with any standard combination
pH electrode.
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Auto Mode: the controller uses the set-point to regulate the flow of CO2
automatically.
Specifications
Range
0 to 14 pH
Resolution
0.01 pH
• CO2 flow regulation from 0 to 2 liters per minute
• Microminiature combination pH glass electrode
included with system
• Easy setup
• Analog recorder output
• 12 V DC powered
Accuracy
±0.02 pH
Input Resistance
1012 Ω
Calibration:
Offset
±2 pH units through offset trimmer
Slope
80 to 110% through slope trimmer
CO2 Flowmeter
2 L per min
Gas Input/Output
Quick disconnect fittings
This compact, stand-alone controller is designed to precisely regulate the
pH of biological solutions. It can be used in a number of experiments
requiring regulated pH, such as isolated organs (heart, lung, kidney, etc.)
or isolated tissues.
pH Analog Output
BNC connector 4-20 mA, isolated
Maintaining pH is accomplished by either “bubbling” CO2 through the
solution or flowing gas over the surface of the medium. CO2 is supplied via
an external source, such as a bottle.
To maintain pH, the “set-point” of the controller is adjusted to the desired
level. When the pH exceeds the programmed set point, the flow of
acidifying CO2 is started. Adjusting the controller’s flow rate regulator
determines the rate of pH drop; the higher the flow rate the faster the
drop in pH. The controller’s flow regulator allows the user to adjust the
CO2 flow between 0 to 2.0 liters per minute. Once the pH reaches the set
point, gas flow automatically stops.
Electrode Response Time
~0 sec
Electrode Slope
55 mV/pH in pH range of 1 to 14
Electrode Impedance
200 MΩ
Electrode Stability
0.05 pH/day
Electrode Dimensions
1.5 x 0.03 in (38.1 x 0.75 mm), L x D
System Power
50/60 Hz adapter)
12 VDC (Universal 90/240 VAC,
Dimensions (H x W x D)
12.2 x 15.2 x 12.7 cm (4.8 x 6 x 5 in)
Weight
0.8 kg (1.75 lb)
Order #
Model
W4 70-2116
Product
Harvard CO2 Gas/pH Controller
Accessories and Replacement Parts
A three-position (manual override) switch on the front panel provides
several ways to control CO2 gas delivery.
W4 69-0494
W4 65-0105
Input/Output Connector Fitting, pkg. of 5
By-Pass Mode: the flow of CO2 is continuous and the flow rate is
controlled by adjustment of the regulator.
Momentary Mode: CO2 flows as long as the switch is depressed. The
switch is spring loaded and the regulator will return to the Auto Mode
when released.
W4 72-1015 R-3603
Tygon Tubing, 1⁄8 x 1⁄16 in (OD x ID x 50 ft)
Replacement pH Electrode
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
103
Oxystreamer®
gas controllers
Dual Stream O2 and CO2 Controller
Simultaneous control of both gas and liquid phases, useful for live cell microscopy
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
buttons. The closed-loop dynamic gas control system then automatically
monitors and adjusts the output gas stream to the pre-programmed ratios
in the controllers. This technique maintains the output (mixed) gas
concentration to within 0.2% of the selected set-point levels.
gas controllers
The flow rate for each stream is independently controlled for efficiency
and provides a method for setting a reproducible rate at which the gas is
delivered to the cell culture chamber and/or diffused into the cell culture
media or perfusate. Inlet ports on the back of the unit are 1/4 inch hose
barb fittings and will take standard 1/4 inch ID tubing. Output ports are
quick-disconnect fittings using 1/16 inch or 1/8 inch ID tubing.
Options include a Windows® based software package that provides trend
plotting, data logging, and remote operation via RS-232 connection to
your PC. Multiple Oxystreamer® models can be daisy-chained via an
optional RS-485 interface.
Specifications
• Provides two identical streams of any mix of O2
and CO2 gas
• Full range, real-time control of both gases
• Easily switch from one gas concentration
to another
• Eliminates the inflexibility and high cost of
premixed gas, and inaccuracies due to gas
stratification in premixed gas tanks
• Vertical footprint saves bench space
The Oxystreamer® has two output streams that can be used to
simultaneously condition (1) the atmosphere in a microscope stage
mount cell culture incubator/chamber and (2) the dissolved oxygen and
carbon dioxide levels in a media or perfusate. The following is a list of
the major benefits derived from replacing pre-mixed gas cylinders:
O2/CO2 /N2 Inlet Gas
Supply Connectors
1/4 in hose barb
Outlet Gas Stream
Connectors
Plastic quick disconnects for 1/16 in and
1/8 in ID tubing
Independent Channel
Flow Control
0 to 100 ml/min, 0 to 50 ml/min
O2 Range
0.1% to 99.9%
CO2 Range
0.1% to 20.0%
Accuracy
±5% of reading; 2% full scale
O2 Sensor
Fuel Cell
CO2 Sensor
Infrared
Serial Comm.
RS-232/RS-485
O2 Analog Output
0 to 100 mV DC linear
CO2 Analog Output
0 to 1 V DC linear
Dimensions (H x W x D)
36.1 x 23.6 x 33.0 cm (14.2 x 9.3 x 13.0 in)
Power
12 V DC Universal Wall Adapter
Weight
4.54 kg (10 lbs)
Order #
Model
W4 64-0383 SL2CO
Product
Oxystreamer – 0 to 10 ml/min max
• Precise, variable, selection of oxygen and carbon dioxide gas
concentrations (ratios)
• Substantial cost savings by using standard, low cost cylinders of
oxygen, carbon dioxide and nitrogen gas
• Eliminates the stratification induced concentration errors that are
inherence in premixed gas cylinders
• By independently monitoring and controlling oxygen and carbon dioxide
concentrations of the streams, the OxyStreamer® can monitor and
proportionally mix (blend) oxygen, carbon dioxide and nitrogen gases
into any concentration combination in real time
The OxyStreamer® is easy to use. After calibrating the oxygen and carbon
dioxide sensors, the desired concentrations are simply entered into their
respective controllers using the digital display and up/down control
104
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
OS-250
spill sensor systems
Overflow Sensor System
Because microscopes and liquides don't mix
JC-1
Jumper cable used to
connect two overflow
sensor mats
As little as 3 drops of liquid will cause the OS-250 to respond
spill sensor systems
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
Control Unit
Specifications
Power Requirements
92-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 VA
Operating Humidity
10% to 75%
Switched Outlet Current
8A
Enclosure Dimensions
4.6 x 8.2 x 18 cm (H x W x D)
Shipping Weight
1.4 kg
Warranty
one year
Order #
Model
W4 64-1520 OS-250
Product
Overflow Sensor System
Accessories and Replacement Parts
•
•
•
•
•
Prevent costly downtime
Easy to install
Compatible with upright and inverted microscopes
Visible and audible alarms
Switched power output on alarm
W4 64-1522 MAT-1
Overflow Sensor
Replacement Mats, set of 4
W4 64-1523 MAT-2
Overflow Sensor Mats and
Cable (4 Mats)
W4 64-1589 JC-1
Jumper Cable Used to Connect
Two Overflow Sensor Mats
Warner Instruments is pleased to provide a product designed to detect
solution leaks on your microscope before they cause a problem. As little
as 3 drops of liquid will cause the OS-250 to react.
The system consists of a fluid sensing mat, a material specifically
developed for detecting liquid spills, which simply connects to the OS250. Once assembled, an alarm condition sounds an audible alert, flashes
an LED, and turns the power off to any device plugged into the internal
single outlet, solid-state power controller. The switched power outlet can
control up to 8 amps and will easily handle syringe pumps or valve
controllers.
The OS-250 is supplied with four reusable 30 x 30 cm mats that can be
cut to any size with sharp scissors or knife. Additionally, the OS-250 is
supplied with a mat connecting cable (1.5 m) and an IEC 60320
detachable power connector system.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
105
spill sensor systems
Battery Powered Spill Sensor System
Because microscopes and liquids don't mix
Control Unit
Spill Sensor Mats with Connecting Cable
Perfusion/
Microfluidics
spill sensor systems
•
•
•
•
•
•
Protect your microscope
Audible alarm
TTL cutoff circuitry
Compatible with upright and inverted microscopes
Easy set up and installation
Complete system
Warner Instruments is pleased to provide a system to detect solution
leaks before they cause a problem. This system is ideal for all
environments where leak detection is critical such as on a microscope
or in a chemical cabinet.
The heart of the system is comprised of a special moisture sensitive mat
that has been specifically developed for detecting the presence of fluids.
As little 3 drops of liquid are sufficient to trigger the system.
A simple connection between the moisture sensitive mats and the spill
sensor controller arms the system. When as little as three drops of liquid
come in contact with the moisture sensitive mat an audible alarm is
sounded. In addition, an alarm condition switches the state of a regulated
TTL output on the Spill Sensor allowing you to dynamically control
attached devices.
Specifications
Power Requirements
9 V (internal battery)
Operating Humidity
10 to 75%
TTL Output
User settable;
alarm = TTL high or TTL low
Enclosure
6.6 x 12.1 x 2.1 cm (W x H x D)
Order #
Model
W4 64-1546
Product
Spill Sensor System,
Battery Powered
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-1522
MAT-1
Overflow Sensor Replacement
Mats, set of 4
W4 64-1523
MAT-2
Overflow Sensor Mats
and Cable (4 Mats)
W4 64-1589
JC-1
Jumper Cable Used to Connect
Two Overflow Sensor Mats
The Spill Sensor System is supplied with four 30 x 30 cm mats that can
be cut to any size or shape using sharp scissors or a straight edge.
106
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
temperature control
Section
Page No.
Controllers
108 - 109
Bipolar Temperature Controller, CL-100
110
Bipolar Temperature Controller, CL-200
111
Model LCS-1 Liquid Cooling Systems
112
Bipolar Temperature Controller, TC-202A
113
Temperature Controller, TC-124A
114
Model TC-144 Dual Temperature Controller
115
Warmed Platforms WP-10 & WP-16
116
TC-324B – Single Channel,
see page 108
CL-200 Dual Channel Bipolar
Temperature Controller,
see page 111
Temperature
Control
Chamber System Temperature Controllers,
TC-324B & TC-344B
Solution Heaters
In-Line Solution Heaters, SH-27B, SH-27G & SF-28 117
Dual In-Line Solution Heater/Cooler, SC-20
118
Multi-Line In-Line Solution Heaters,
SHM-6 & SHM-8
119
Eight Line In-Line Solution Heater, SHM-828
120
SH-27B and SF-28,
see page 117
Other Cooler/Warmers
Heater/Cooler Jackets, PHC Series
121
Objective Warmer, OW Series
122
Temperature Control
Accessories,
see page 127
Syringe Warmers
Syringe Warmer for six 10cc Syringes, SW-10/6
123
60cc Syringe Warmer, SW-61
124
60cc Syringe Heating System, SW-60 & SW-707
125
Syringe Warmers for 10c, 60cc and 140cc,
SWS-10, SWS-60 & SWS-140
126
Accessories
Holders for In-Line Solution Heaters
127
Cables and Thermistors
127
Three-Scale Thermistor Temperature Monitor,
TM-3
128
Power Interface, PI-1
129
Syringe Heater Stand, PS-560
129
TM-3 Temperature Monitor,
see page 128
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
107
TC-324B and TC-344B
controllers
Chamber System Temperature Controllers – Single and Dual Channel
Quiet operation optimized for patch clamp electrophysiology!
Temperature
Control
controllers
TC-324B – Single Channel
•
•
•
•
•
Ramped DC power for quiet operation
Single control temperature adjustment
Manual DC setpoint
Ambient to 50°C operation
High temperature models available
The TC-324B and TC-344B heater controllers have been designed to
provide quiet power to a variety of perfusion heating devices including
Warner Series 20 heater platforms, solution in-line heaters, and culture
dish heaters.
TC-344B – Dual Channel temperature controller shown with in-line solution
heater and heated platform with connecting cable.
Thermistor Readouts
Each channel reads two thermistors simultaneously: T1 for feedback
control of the system, and T2 for any point of interest. Temperatures are
displayed on the meter and are also available at front panel outputs for
recording devices. Unical thermistors are used throughout and can be
replaced without the need for recalibration.
Temperature controllers require the use of an adapter cable (CC-28) to
connect to Series 20, Series 30 and QE Series platforms. In-line solution
heaters do not require an additional connecting cable.
Each channel can supply up to 18 watts into an 8 Ω load. Maintenance of
temperature setpoint is controlled automatically via thermistor feedback.
A loop-speed selector allows for selection of three feedback speeds to
optimize the stability of the thermal response of the device being heated.
Temperature setpoint may also be manually set in MANUAL mode.
Ease of Use
In AUTO mode, the desired temperature is set with a single SET
TEMPERATURE control. The connected platform, solution heater, or other
device is automatically driven to the set temperature. Accuracy is typically
better than ± 1°C, and under ideal conditions will approach ± 0.1°C.
In MANUAL mode, the controller provides DC output to the heater blocks,
adjustable from zero to +12 volts.
Set temperatures range from ambient to 50°C, or from ambient to 65°C
for high temperature models.
Quiet Operation in Recording Setups
Highly filtered DC supplies and slow-ramped analog switching circuitry
deliver power without adding noise to the system. As such, the TC-324B
and TC-344B have been optimized for electrophysiology applications.
108
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
controllers
TC-324B and TC-344B
Chamber System Temperature Controllers – Single and Dual Channel (continued)
controllers
Temperature
Control
TC-344B Dual Channel
Specifications (per channel)
Order #
Max. Output Voltage
12 V DC
W4 64-0100 TC-324B
Max. Output Current
1.5 Amps
W4 64-0101 TC-344B
Heater Controller, Dual Channel
W4 64-1453 TC-324BHT
Perfusion Heater Controller
Single Channel with High Temp
Modification, 65°C
W4 64-1454 TC-344BHT
Perfusion Heater Controller
Dual Channel with High Temp
Modification, 65°C
Max. Output Power
18 W (8 Ω load)
Manual Voltage Range
0 to 12 V
Temperature Range
Ambient to 50°C or ambient to 65°C
Recorder Outputs
T1 (Control Thermistor) 100 mV/°C
T2 (Monitor Thermistor) 100 mV/°C
Inputs
Rear Panel BNC for T2
(TA-29 Thermistor Cable assembly)
Meter
3 1/2 digit LED display of:
Set Temperature, 50°C maximum
T1 (Control Thermistor) temperature
T2 (Monitor Thermistor) temperature
Heater Voltage, 12 V maximum
Power Requirements
Model
Product
Heater Controller, Single Channel
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0106 CC-28
Cable Assembly for
Series 20 Heater Platforms
W4 64-0109 CC-35
Cable Assembly with
Unterminated Outboard End
100-130/220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 70 VA
Enclosure Dimensions (H x W x D):
TC-324B
8.9 x 20 x 25.4 cm;
Shipping weight 3.6 kg
TC-344B
8.9 x 43 x 25.4 cm;
Rack Mount hardware included;
Shipping weight 6.8 kg
Warranty
Two years, parts & labor
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
109
CL-100
controllers
Bipolar Temperature Controller
Optimized for the SC-20 In-line Solution Heater/Cooler
ACC-1 – Adapter cable
for 8 pin Din heaters
Temperature
Control
controllers
•
•
•
•
•
Quiet operation
Built-in protection for Peltier devices
Single control temperature adjustment
Freeze alert
External inputs for computer control
The CL-100 Temperature Controller is an automatic single channel
controller capable of accurately maintaining a Peltier device between
0° and 50°C. The CL-100 will also maintain a resistive heater from
ambient to +65°C.
While the instrument has several uses, it is specifically designed to
control the Warner SC-20 Dual In-line Solution Heater/Cooler. When
coupled with the SC-20, the CL-100 provides efficient control of perfusion
solution temperatures.
The unit is simple to use with a single control for temperature adjustment
and a loop speed switch to optimize the response of the system. Power
for the instrument is provided by an ultra low noise power supply making
it suitable for use in sensitive electrophysiology applications.
Built-in circuitry limits the maximum temperature of the Peltier to prevent
damage and a freeze alert indicates when the cold side of the Peltier
reaches 0°C.
Specifications
Max. Output Voltage
±15 V DC
Max. Output Current
2.4 A
Max. Output Power
36 W (8 Ω load)
Manual Voltage Range
0 to ±15 V
Temperature Range
0 to 50°C Peltier,
ambient to +65°C resistive
Recorder Outputs:
Control Temp Out
100 mV/°C
Monitor Temp Out
100 mV/°C
Inputs:
Front Panel BNC
for external thermistor
Rear Panel BNC
for external set temperature
Rear Panel BNC
for external voltage set
Rear Panel
15 pin female “D”
Meter (3-1⁄2 digit LED display of):
Peltier Set Temperature 0 to 50°C maximum
Control Temperature
Monitor Temperature
Output
Voltage, ±15 V maximum
Power Requirements
100-130/220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 80 VA, user selectable
Enclosure Dimensions
8.9 x 20.0 x 25.4 cm (H x W x D)
Shipping weight
5.6 kg
Warranty
Two years, parts & labor
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0352
CL-100
Bipolar Temperature Controller
Accessories and Replacement Parts
110
W4 64-0353
SC-20
Solution Heater/Cooler Two Line
W4 64-1430
SHM-828
Solution Heater Eight Line
No Manifold
W4 64-1427
ACC-1
Adapter Cable for
8 pin Din Heaters
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Cable with Bead Thermistor
for Heater Controllers
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
controllers
NEW CL-200
Single control temperature adjustment
Specifications
Built-in protection for Peltier devices
Max. Output Voltage
±15V Heat/Cool, 0-15V Heat-Only
Open thermistor fault protection
Heat loss compensation mode
Quiet operation
Max. Output Current
5.0 Amps DC each channel
Max. Output Power
75 Watts @ 3Ω load each channel
Set-Temperature Range
-6 °C to 65 °C Heat/Cool ambient to
65 °C resistive
Recorder Outputs, each channel
Control Temperature, 100mV/°C
Monitor Temperature, 100mV/°C
Inputs, each channel
Monitor Thermistor, 10KΩ @25 °C
100KΩ @25 °C (switchable)
External Temp Set (auto mode)
External Voltage Set (manual mode)
I/O Connector, each channel
15-pin “D” connector
Panel Meter, each channel
3-digit LED display of:
Heat Loss Compensation Temp
Set Temperature
Control Temperature
Monitor Temperature
Output Voltage
Output Current
Panel Meter Resolution
0.1 °C / 0.01 V / 0.01 A
Power Requirement
97-265 VAC / 200VA Max
Weight
4.54 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD)
8.9 x 42.6 x 29.2 cm (H x W x D)
Warranty
One year, parts & labor
The CL-200 Dual Temperature Controller is an automatic two channel
controller capable of accurately maintaining two Peltier devices between 6° and 65°C. Power for the instrument is provided by an low noise power
supply making it suitable for use in sensitive electrophysiology
applications.
While the instrument has broad compatibility, it is specifically designed to
control the SC-20 Dual In-line Solution Heater/Cooler in combination with
any of our heated and cooled stage chambers.
The CL-200 is simple to use with a single control for temperature
adjustment. While total automatic control is provided in the automatic
mode, a manual control mode is also available. A loop-speed selector is
available to optimize the feedback response of the system to the intrinsic
thermal delay characteristics of the setup.
In addition, the CL-200 has a new heat-loss compensation control that
allows the instrument to control the temperature at a location downstream
from the temperature source.
A feedback thermistor switch allows the user to select which thermistor is
used for feedback control. Choosing T1 (control thermistor) uses the builtin thermistor attached to the peripheral device. Selecting T2 (monitor
thermistor) allows control at the user selected location of the monitor
thermistor (T2).
Built-in circuitry limits the maximum temperature of the Peltier to prevent
thermal damage, and a freeze alert/alarm indicates when the cold side of
the Peltier reaches 0°C.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1708
CL-200
Dual Channel Bipolar
Temperature Controller
controllers
•
•
•
•
•
Temperature
Control
Dual Channel Bipolar Temperature Controller
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0353
SC-20
W4 64-1659
QE-1HC
Solution Heater/Cooler Two Line
Quick Exchange Stage Incubator
W4 64-1632
TB-3 CS
Thermal Insert for Prior
NanoScanZ and chamber
slides
W4 64-1636
TB-3 CCD
Thermal Insert for Prior
NanoScanZ and 35 mm
Petri dishes
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
111
Model LCS-1
controllers
Liquid Cooling System
Temperature
Control
controllers
Specifications
Pump rate
4201/hr (111 gal/hr)
Power Input
Universal Input 100-240 VAC 50/60Hz
Power Output
12 VDC 540 mA
Power Connector Type
15 pin Male “D”
Physical Dimensions:
Chassis Size
(D x W x H) 49.5 x 21.3 x 9.5 cm
Weight
3.63 kg (81 lbs)
Chassis material
Aluminum
Water Jacket Ports
Male thread to1/8" Barb Fittings
Warranty
One Year
• Complete self contained liquid cooling system
• Designed for use with all Peltier driven devices
from Warner Instruments
• Electrically and mechanically quiet
Order #
Model
The LCS-1 Liquid Cooling System from Warner Instruments is a versatile
and simple to use thermal control accessory. This apparatus circulates
water through a fan/radiator housing and is designed to easily and quietly
remove excess heat from the Peltier portion of all Warner devices
employing this technology.
Compatible with these items
This heat exchanger can also be used with any apparatus, allowing the
quiet removal of heat energy via the movement of circulating water. A
great deal of effort has been dedicated towards making this system both
mechanically and electrically quiet.
W4 65-0043 PDMI-2
Open Perfusion Micro-Incubator
W4 65-0044 PSMI
Patch Slice Micro-Incubator
W4 65-0101 CSMI
Chambered Slide Micro-Incubator
W4 64-1922 LCS-1
Product
Liquid Cooling System
Replacement Parts
W4 64-1704 ANT-1
Replacement antifreeze Propylene
Glycol non-toxic 2oz
W4 64-0353 SC-20
Solution Heater/Cooler
W4 64-0450 BLM-TC
Bilayer Thermocycler System
W4 64-1632 TB-3 CS
Thermal Insert for Chambered Slides
W4 64-1636 TB-3 CCD Thermal Insert for 35 mm Dishes
The LCS-1 is supplied with 20 feet of 1/8" ID x 1/4" OD Tygon tubing, one
bottle of antifreeze, and a desktop power supply with line cord.
112
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
controllers
TC-202A
Bipolar Temperature Controller
Works with all Harvard Apparatus Micro-Incubation and Tissue Slice Chambers
Flexible
The TC-202A allows the researcher to control the command temperature
from alternative locations. In the case of the PDMI-2, PSMI, and CSMI
micro-incubators, temperature is controlled either from a thermistor
placed in the bath, or from a second thermistor permanently positioned
on the plate containing the regulated surface of the Peltier devices.
•
•
•
•
•
Low Noise
Bipolar or monopolar operation
Temperature control from 0° to 50°C
Digital display
Excellent stability
The TC-202A Bipolar Temperature Controller is the next generation of the
TC-102 Monopolar Temperature Controller. This instrument operates with
all Harvard Apparatus micro-incubators to provide both heating and
cooling functions for life science research purposes.
Because the TC-202A is bipolar, it is ideally suited for use with Peltier
devices such as those built into our PDMI-2 Open Perfusion Microincubator, PSMI Patch Slice Micro-incubator, and CSMI Chambered Slide
Micro-incubator.
While the unit has multiple uses, it has been designed as an ideal
companion for Harvard Apparatus/Medical Systems Peltier-based
micro-incubators. In its monopolar mode, the TC-202A efficiently controls
microincubators that use resistive heaters such as the Leiden Microincubator Systems and the BSC-BU Brain/Tissue Slice Chamber units.
Specifications
Temperature Setting Range
0 to 50°C
Temperature Regulation
±0.2°C
Temperature Display
0.1°C resolution
Chamber Temperature
Sensor
Thermolinear type, 36 KΩ
nominal at 25°C
Voltage Range
0 to ±5 V
Current Range
0 to ±6 A DC
Case Size (W x H x D)
48.3 x 8.9 x 33.7 cm (19 x 3.5 x 13.25 in),
19 in. rack mountable
Weight
5.7 kg (12.5 lb)
Power
150 W, 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
user selectable
Other Features
• Low electrical noise for sensitive electrophysiology recordings
• Stable long term operation
• Excellent temperature stability at user selectable set points
• Easy to use, digitally set command temperatures
• Versatile monopolar or bipolar operation (heat only or heat and cool)
• Temperature profile monitoring capability
• Over-temperature shut down
Order #
Model
W4 65-0045 TC-202A
controllers
Accurate thermal control (±0.2°C) is achieved by sensing temperature
with a miniature thermistor, digitizing the thermistor signals, and then
proportionally regulating a low noise DC current output. Current output is
also regulated to match the thermal time constants of small systems
(such as micro-incubators), thus minimizing initial overshoot and
oscillations about the set point.
Temperature
Control
Accurate
Product
Bipolar Temperature Controller
for use with PDMI-2, PSMI, CSMI,
LU-CB-1, LU-CPC-CEH, and BSC-BU.
Includes BSC-T3 Thermistor
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 65-0057 BSC-T3
Bath Thermistor for use with
PDMI-2, PSMI, LU-CB1, and
TC-202A (36 KW total)
W4 65-0056 BSC-T3A
Bath Thermistor for use with
LU-CPC-CEH
W4 65-0098 BSC-T2
Old Style Bath Thermistor for
Obsolete TC-102
W4 65-0016 BSC-T2A
Old Style Bath Thermistor for
use with LU-CPC-CEH and TC-102
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
113
controllers
TC-124A
Temperature Controller
Designed for use with Warner OW Series Objective Warmers and SWS Series Syringe Warmers
TC-124A shown with
warmed platforms
for 35 mm Petri
dishes
Temperature
Control
controllers
BAC-1 – Battery
adapter cable
This compact instrument takes up very little space and may be powered
from the 12 VDC wall power supply (included), or a 12 volt battery for low
noise applications.
Specifications
•
•
•
•
Easy to use
Command temperatures digitally set
Ambient to 65°C temperature range
Can be powered from 12 volt battery for
sensitive electrophysiology applications
9 to 16 VDC
Max. Output Current
1.2 A
Max. Output Power
13 W
Temperature Ranges (4)
Set by DIP Switch:
Ambient to +65°C
Meter
3-Digit LED display
Meter Resolution
0.1°C
Panel Indicators
Red: Heat-up Condition
Green: Heat-down Condition
Yellow: Displaying Set-Temperature
Features
Pushbutton entry of Set-Temperature SetTemperature displayed for 3 seconds after
adjustment
Enclosure Dimensions
2.1 x 6.6 x 11.1 cm (H x W x D)
Weight
92 grams
The TC-124A Temperature Controller from Warner Instruments is a
simple, low cost device designed for use with our microscope objective
warmers and the SWS Series syringe warmers.
Warranty
One year, parts & labor
This unit is a basic on-off controller with slowly ramped switching speeds
making it ideal for large mass devices where the temperature changes
slowly.
W4 64-1545 TC-124A
Temperature Controller,
120 VAC US
W4 64-1545E TC-124AE
Temperature Controller,
240 VAC Europe
W4 64-1606 BAC-1
Battery Adapter Cable
The LED display reports the actual temperature of the connected device.
Adjustment of the set temperature using either the heat up or heat down
buttons causes the display to momentarily report the set temperature.
114
Input Voltage Range
Order #
Model
Product
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
controllers
Model TC-144
Dual Temperature Controller
Specifications
Input Voltage Range
9 to 16 VDC
Maximum Output Current
1.2 A (per channel)
Maximum Output Power
13 W (per channel)
Temperature Ranges (4)
Set by DIP switch: ambient to +65C
Meter Resolution
0.1 °C
Display
LED, 3 digit, 10 mm (0.4 in) high
controllers
Temperature
Control
Objective Warmer
Panel Indicators:
Red
• Ambient to 65°C temperature range
• Compatible with Warner’s objective warmer,
syringe warmers, and warmed stage insert
• Can be powered from 12 volt battery for
sensitive electrophysiology applications
• Large, easy to read LED display
Heat-up condition
Green
Heat-down condition
Yellow
Displaying set-temperature or view
temperature
Features
Pushbutton entry of modes, dust-proof,
splash-proof case
Physical Dimensions:
Case Size
2.1 x 6.6 x 11.1 cm (H x W x D)
Shipping Weight
The TC-144 Dual Temperature Controller from Warner Instruments is a
simple, low cost device designed for use with our microscope objective
warmer or the SWS Series syringe warmers. This device is capable of
driving two objective warmers simultaneously.
This compact instrument is a basic on-off controller with a slowly ramped
switching speed, making it ideal for large mass devices where the
temperature changes slowly.
The LED display reports the actual or set temperature of either channel.
Front panel LED’s indicate the currently displayed information.
Supplied with universal input voltage power supply and plug kit for major
countries.
Warranty
0.5 kg
One year, parts & labor
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1655
TC-144
Temperature Controller Dual
Accessories/Replacement Parts
W4 64-1606
BAC-1
Battery Adapter Cable
W4 64-1665
OW-1
Objective Warmer for 23-28 mm
Objectives
W4 64-1662
WP-10
Warmed Platform 10 mm Aperture
W4 64-1663
WP-16
Warmed Platform 16 mm Aperture
W4 64-1584
SWS-10
Syringe Heater for 10 cc Syringes
W4 64-1560
SWS-60
Syringe Heater for 60 cc Syringes
W4 64-1585
SWS-140 Syringe Heater for 140 cc Syringes
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
115
Model WP-10 and WP-16
controllers
Warmed Platforms for 35 mm Petri Dishes
Temperature
Control
controllers
• Temperature control from 25 to 65 C
• Stage adapters for all major brand microscopes
• Low Cost Systems available
Specifications (continued)
Physical Dimensions:
Warmed Platforms (D x L)
79.4 x 3.2 mm
Aperture Size (D)
10 mm-WP-10, 16 mm- WP-16
Warner Instruments warmed platforms are designed to maintain the
temperature of 35 or 50 mm Petri dishes and glass or chambered slides.
Weight
50 g
Cable Length
2.4 m
Available with aperture sizes of 10 and 16 mm, these aluminum platforms
provide excellent mechanical access from below and very good heat
conductivity. Platforms are finished in black anodize for corrosion
protection and to minimize stray light reflectance. A grove in the top
surface of the platform allows Petri dishes with a raised bottom to
achieve full contact with the platform heated surface.
Connector Type
Control of platform heating is provided by our TC-124A and TC-144
temperature controllers. Complete systems are available for Nikon
microscopes using a 108 mm stage insert and for Olympus microscopes
using a 110 mm insert.
Complete systems include a warmed platform (choice of aperture), a
TC-124A temperature controller (select line voltage), and a SA-NIK stage
adapter for the Nikon systems or a SA-OLY/2 stage adapter for the
Olympus systems.
Stage adapters are available for all major microscopes; the warmed
platforms use Warner’s series 20 stage adapters. Please see page 64
for detailed information regarding the stage adapters.
Warranty
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1662
WP-10
Warmed Platform 10 mm Aperture
W4 64-1662D WP-10D
Warmed Platform 10 mm Aperture
for use with TC-324B/TC-344B
Temperature Controllers
W4 64-1663
Warmed Platform 16 mm Aperture
WP-16
W4 64-1663D WP-16D
116
25° to 65°C
Accuracy
±0.1°C
Feedback Thermistor
Built in Unical 10kΩ at 25°C
Controller
TC-124A / TC-144 Single and Dual
Channel Controllers
Warmed Platform 16 mm Aperture
for use with TC-324B/TC-344B
Temperature Controllers
Systems Below Include TC-124A Temperature Controller,
Warmed Platform, and Stage Adapter
W4 64-1666
WPN-10
Warmed Platform for Nikon
10 mm Aperture
W4 64-1667
WPN-16
Warmed Platform for Nikon
16 mm Aperture
W4 64-1668
WPN-10E
Warmed Platform for Nikon
10 mm Aperture (for 240 VAC)
W4 64-1669
WPN-16E
Warmed Platform for Nikon
16 mm Aperture (for 240 VAC)
W4 64-1670
WPO-10
Warmed Platform for Olympus
10 mm Aperture
W4 64-1671
WPO-16
Warmed Platform for Olympus
16 mm Aperture
W4 64-1672
WPO-10E
Warmed Platform for Olympus
10 mm Aperture (for 240 VAC)
W4 64-1673
WPO-16E
Warmed Platform for Olympus
16 mm Aperture (for 240 VAC)
Specifications
Temperature Range
4 pin Male RJ-22
One Year
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
solution heaters
SH-27B, SH-27G and SF-28
In-line Solution Heaters
Quiet Temperature Control for Flowing Solutions
SH-27G
•
•
•
•
Quiet operation
Ambient to 50°C
Fast or slow flow
Designed to work with the TC-324B and TC-344B
Temperature Controllers
In-line solution heating is the simplest and most effective method of
warming perfusion solutions. The heater is connected to the chamber
with a short length of tubing such that the warmed perfusate flows
directly into the chamber bath. Depending on bath volume and other
factors, in-line solution heating by itself may be sufficient for many
applications.
The model SH-27B will accommodate flow rates up to 10 ml/min while
the model SF-28 is designed for slower flow rates of 2 ml/min or less.
Both models feature a straight flow path for easy cleaning. The stainless
steel flow channel in both models may be lined with polyethylene tubing
(PE-50) when exposing compounds to metal is a problem.
Specifications
Heater Resistance
10 Ω
Voltage Requirement
Variable to 12 V max.
Maximum Temperature
50°C
Internal Dead Volume
262 µl
Perfusion Lines
Type 316 Stainless Steel
0.083 in OD x 0.067 in ID,
2.1 mm x 1.70 mm
solution heaters
Temperature
Control
SH-27B
and SF-28
Maximum Flow Rate at 37°C:
SF-28
2 ml/min
SH-27B/SH-27G
10 ml/min
Temperature of 37°C can be maintained at ±1°C under
following conditions: a) Solution temperature at input
(nominally 21°C) varies no more than ±10%; b) Solution flow
rate varies no more than 25%
Physical Dimensions:
Body (D x L)
12.5 mm x 12.5 cm
Cable Length
1.9 m
Warranty
One year
These In-line Solution Heaters require either the TC-324B single or the
TC-344B dual channel temperature controller. See pages 108 and 109.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0103
SF-28
Slow Flow Solution Heater
Each heater is supplied with a thermistor cable assembly (p/n TA-29)
which allows for monitoring the actual bath temperature during use
(T2 output on heater controllers TC-324B/TC-344B).
W4 64-0102
SH-27B
Solution Heater
W4 64-1503
SH-27G
Solution Heater with
Banana Connectors
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Replacement Cable with
Bead Thermistor
W4 64-0108
TA-30
Replacement Cable with
Glass Thermistor
W4 64-0100
TC-324B
Heater Controller, Single
W4 64-0101
TC-344B
Heater Controller, Dual
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
117
SC-20
solution heaters
Dual In-line Solution Heater/Cooler
Bipolar Temperature Control for Flowing Solutions
Specifications
Temperature
Control
Minimum Temperature
0°C (2 ml/min. max flow)
Maximum Temperature
50°C
Maximum Flow Rate at 5°C
5 ml/min.
Accuracy
±0.1°C
Internal Dead Volume
330 µl
Perfusion Lines
Type 316 Stainless Steel
0.032 in ID x 0.062 in OD
Water Jacket Ports
Type 316 Stainless Steel
0.12 in ID x 0.147 in OD
Controller
Model CL-100 Bipolar Controller
Physical Dimensions:
solution heaters
• Heats and cools from 0° to 50°C
• Compatible with Warner Series 20 Chambers
• Optimized for use with the CL-100 Bipolar
Temperature Controller
In-line solution heating has proven to be one of the most effective
methods of maintaining the temperature of perfusion solutions. The
SC-20 Dual In-line Solution Heater/Cooler utilizes Peltier thermoelectric
devices to regulate temperature both above and below ambient levels.
The SC-20 is designed to thermally regulate one or two solutions at the
same temperature. Solution temperature can be maintained at 0°C at
flow rates of 2 ml/min., 5°C at 5 ml/min., or as high as 50°C at 5 ml/min.
Body (D x L)
21 x 165 mm
Weight
109 g
Cable Length
1.9 m
Connector Type
15 pin Male “D”
Warranty
One year
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0353
SC-20
Solution Heater/Cooler Two Line
W4 64-0352
CL-100
Bipolar Temperature Controller
Replacement part
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Cable with Bead Thermistor
for Heater Controllers
An integral water jacket is used to remove excess heat from the SC-20
peltier device. Running water either from a tap or a large reservoir can
be used. Flow rates as low as 4 liters per hour are sufficient to maintain
cooling efficiency.
The SC-20 can be used with either one or two discrete perfusate
solutions, or with a solution/gas combination. When coupled with a
PHC Series Imaging Chamber Heater/Cooler Jacket, the SC-20 provides
an effective means of temperature control in a Warner chamber, even
in the absence of solution flow.
Each SC-20 is supplied with a TA-29 Thermistor Cable Assembly for
monitoring the bath temperature during use, 10 feet of PE-160 tubing and
10 feet of 1/8" I.D. x 1/4" O.D. Tygon tubing.
118
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
SHM-6 and SHM-8
solution heaters
Multi-Line In-Line Solution Heaters
SHM-6 Shown with Optional
Magnetic Base and Clamp
Specifications
Voltage Requirement
10 Ω
Maximum Temperature
50°C
Internal Heater Volume
94 µl/line
Manifold Dead Volume
30 µl (input of manifold to output tip)
Maximum Flow Rate
at 37°C
5 ml/min
Heater Resistance
• Six-line and eight-line models
• Single outflow line
• Plugs into TC-324B and TC-344B Heater
Controllers
• Removable manifold for easy cleaning
• Low dead volume
In-line solution heating is the simplest and most effective method of
warming perfusion solutions. The minimal dead space manifold (see right
image) at the output allows this heater to be used in any application
where from 2 to 8 perfusion lines are connected to a chamber or other
device. The manifold dead volume is 30 µl.
The heater is connected to the chamber using a short length of tubing
such that the warmed perfusate flows directly into the chamber bath.
Connections are made by press fitting (PE-160) tubing onto the 18 gauge
stainless steel hypodermic tubes. Cap plugs are supplied to block any
unused inputs.
Depending on bath volume and other factors, in-line solution heating
itself may be sufficient for many applications. The heaters will
accommodate flow rates up to 5 ml/min. Solution reservoir heaters from
Warner are recommended if outgassing of solutions is a problem.
Variable to 12 V max
solution heaters
SS tube 1.2 mm O.D. x 0.84 mm I.D.
Temperature
Control
Manifold
Temperature of 37°C can be maintained at ±2°C under following conditions:
a) Solution temperature at input (nominally 21°C) varies no more than ±10%;
b) Solution flow rate varies no more than 25% with 3 ml/min max flow rate
Physical Dimensions:
Body (D x L)
16.5 x 165 mm
Weight
104 g
Cable Length
1.9 m
Warranty
One year
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0104
SHM-6
Six-Line Solution Heater
W4 64-0105
SHM-8
Eight-Line Solution Heater
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Replacement Cable with
Bead Thermistor
W4 64-0108
TA-30
Replacement Cable with
Glass Thermistor
W4 64-0755
PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing, 3 m (10 ft.)
W4 64-0060
MB/B
Magnetic Base
W4 64-0564
U9404
3-Prong Clamp
W4 64-0100
TC-324B
Heater Controller Single
W4 64-0101
TC-344B
Heater Controller Dual
These solution heaters require either a single or dual channel
temperature controller. See pages 108 to 116.
Each heater is supplied with a TA-29 thermistor cable assembly which
allows for monitoring the actual bath temperature (T2 output on heater
controllers TC-324B/TC-344B), and 3 meters of PE-160 tubing, a three way
valve and replacement O-rings.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
119
SHM-828
solution heaters
Eight Line In-Line Solution Heater
Warms up to eight independent perfusion lines to the same temperature
For a multi-line solution heater with a single
output, see page 119 for the SHM-6
and SHM-8 Solution Heaters.
Specifications
Voltage Requirement
6.7 Ω
Maximum Temperature
50°C
Internal Dead Volume
157 µl / line
Perfusion Lines Type
316 Stainless steel 1.2 mm OD x 0.84 mm ID
Maximum Flow Rate at 37°C
5 ml/min (with all eight lines flowing)
Temperature
37°C can be maintained at ±0.2°C
Heater Resistance
Variable to 15 V max
Temperature
Control
Physical Dimensions:
Body (D x L)
18 x 168 mm
Tube Length
215 mm
solution heaters
Weight
98 g
Cable Length
1.9 m
Warranty
One year
Order #
Model
W4 64-1430 SHM-828
Product
Solution Heater Eight Line,
No Manifold
W4 64-1430L SHM-828LP Solution Heater Eight Line Low
Power, No Manifold
W4 64-0352 CL-100
Bipolar Temperature Controller
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
• Straight flow path for all eight lines
• Connects to the CL-100 Bipolar Temperature
Controller
• Easily cleaned
• Perfusion lines remain independent
Polyethylene Tubing PE-160, 10 ft.
W4 64-0752 PE-50/10
Polyethylene Tubing PE-50, 10 ft.
W4 64-0107 TA-29
Replacement Cable with
Bead Thermistor
W4 64-0108 TA-30
Replacement Cable with
Glass Thermistor
W4 64-0211 MP-8
Perfusion Manifold MP Series 8 to 1
W4 64-0199 ML-8
Perfusion Manifold ML Series 8 to 1
The SHM-828 is an eight line solution heater designed for superfusion.
Construction is such that all eight lines can be used simultaneously.
The solution is heated as it flows through 21.5 cm of 18 gauge type 316
stainless steel tubing. The straight flow path allows for easy cleaning.
If contact with stainless steel tubing is undesirable, polyethylene tubing
(PE-50) can be drawn through the heater tubes. This eliminates metal
contact and reduces the dead volume of the tubes.
For single output applications an MP-8 Perfusion Manifold can be
connected directly to the 18 gauge tubes. An ML-8 Miniature Manifold
may be used if PE-50 polyethylene tubing is pulled inside the heater tubes.
Solution temperatures can be maintained at 37°C for flow rates up to
5 ml/min., or 50°C at 3 ml/min., per line. Higher flow rates at any given
temperature can be achieved if fewer lines are used.
Each heater is supplied with a TA-29 Thermistor Cable Assembly which
allows for monitoring the actual bath temperature and 3 meters of PE-160
Tubing. This heater requires the CL-100 Bipolar Temperature Controller;
see page 110.
120
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
other coolers/warmers
PHC Series
Heater/Cooler Jackets
Maintains temperature in both perfused and static baths
PHC-1
Model PHC-3 shown with mounting platform and mounted
in a Nikon stage adapter
• Designed for Series 20 chambers
• Optimized for the SC-20 In-line Solution
Heater/Cooler
• Jackets available for both upright and inverted
microscopes
• Includes Series 20 platform
Individual heater/cooler jackets shown without mounting platform
RC-27 Chamber
22 x 40 mm Coverslip
other coolers/warmers
PHC-3
Temperature
Control
PHC-2
Jacket Outlet Tube
PHC-1 Jacket
Jacket Inlet Tube
The Warner PHC Heater/Cooler Jackets are designed to bring heating and
cooling to our classic Series 20 Imaging and Recording Chambers.
Accurate temperature control from 5° to 50°C can be achieved using the
PHC jackets in concert with the SC-20 Dual In-line Solution Heater/Cooler.
Heated or chilled water flows from the SC-20 into a PHC jacket which is
in direct thermal contact with the chamber bottom coverslip.
22 x 50 mm Coverslip
Platform
Clamps
Mounting Platform
The PHC-1 is used for upright microscopes and provides a thermal barrier
between the chamber-forming coverslip and the local environment. The
PHC-2 and PHC-3 are designed for inverted microscopes and provide
either rectangular or round openings.
Heater/Cooler Jackets are provided with a mounting platform, which
replaces the standard platforms used with Series 20 chambers. The
platform functions as a base for the jacket/chamber sandwich and
provides the clamping pressure to make a tight seal. Mounting platforms
are machined from black Delrin and are compatible with all Series 20
stage adapters, see pages 64 to 69.
Stage
Adapter
Assembly of Series 20 chamber with cooling jacket and stage adapter
Model
Aperture Size
For Chamber Model
Order #
PHC-1
17.0 x 37 mm
RC-22/22C/24N/26/26G/26GLP/26Z
RC-27/27N/27NE/28/RC-27L/RC-29
W4 64-0354 PHC-1
Heater/Cooler Jacket, Upright
W4 64-0355 PHC-2
Heater/Cooler Jacket, Inverted
W4 64-0356 PHC-3
Heater/Cooler Jacket, Inverted
PHC-2
15 mm diameter
RC-22/22C/24N/26/26G/26Z/26GLP
PHC-3
8.0 x 25 mm
RC-27/27N/27NE
Model
Product
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
121
other coolers/warmers
OW Series
Objective Warmers
Reduces the thermal gradient between objective and specimen
Temperature
Control
other coolers/warmers
• Reduces thermal gradient between objective
and sample
• No direct contact between warmer and
objective
• Heated collar warms the surrounding air which
then gently warms the objective
• Fits microscope objectives from most
manufactures
• Can be powered from Warner’s low noise
TC-324B/TC344B temperature controller or a12
volt battery for sensitive electrophysiology
applications
A common problem with immersion optics is the loss of thermal control of
the solution directly adjacent to the microscope objective. The need to
keep a sample at a temperature different from ambient during observation
is directly compromised by the heat-sink character of the microscope
objective.
The OWS Series Objective Warmer from Warner Instruments provides a
simple and effective method for maintaining a stable temperature within
a microscope objective. This in turn reduces the thermal gradient between
the lens and sample.
A thermally controlled collar attaches to the microscope objective via soft
silicone rings. The collar incorporates a resistive heater and thermistor
which allows the included electronic controls to maintain the objective
warmer at a constant and well maintained temperature.
Heat generated by the isolated collar is not directly communicated to the
objective but is instead distributed around the objective via a conducting
sleeve.
The conducting sleeve warms the surrounding air, which in turn gently
warms the objective. This approach allows the apparatus to take full
advantage of the thermal characteristics of the surrounding air. The
warmer achieves its task without directly contacting or exposing the
objective to significant stresses associated with temperature gradients.
Systems include heated collar
and temperature controller
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1664
OWS-1
Objective Warmer System for
23-30 mm Lens Includes
TC-124A Controller
W4 64-1676
OWS-2
Objective Warmer System for
30-35 mm Lens Includes
TC-124A Controller
W4 64-1664E OWS-1E
Objective Warmer System for
23-30 mm Lens Includes
TC-124A Controller (240VAC)
W4 64-1676E OWS-2E
Objective Warmer System for
30-35 mm Lens Includes
TC-124A Controller (240VAC)
Accessories / Replacement Parts
W4 64-1665
OW-1
Objective Warmer Collar for 23-30 mm
Lens; Requires a TC-124A Controller
W4 64-1674
OW-2
Objective Warmer Collar for 30-35 mm
Lens; Requires a TC-124A Controller
W4 64-1665D OW-1D
Objective Warmer Collar for 23-30 mm
Lens; Requires a TC-324B/344B Controller
W4 64-1674D OW-2D
Objective Warmer Collar for 30-35 mm
Lens; Requires a TC-324B/344B Controller
Temperature Controllers
W4 64-1545
TC-124A
Temperature Controller 100-120 VAC
W4 64-1545E TC-124AE Temperature Controller 240 VAC
W4 64-1655
TC-144
Temperature Controller Dual Channel
Universal Input Voltage
Collars are available to fit objectives from most microscope
manufacturers and custom designs are available.
122
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
SW-10/6
syringe warmers
Syringe Warmers
Eliminates the need for a large heated water bath
SW-10/6 shown with
optional Support Stand RS-1,
Heater Controller TC-324B,
Perfusion Manifold MP-6
and Flow Valve FR-50
Specifications
Syringe Size
10 cc
Heater Resistance
10 Ω
Voltage Requirement
Variable to 12 V maximum
Temperature Range
Ambient to 50°C
Temperature Accuracy
±1°C
Body (H x W x D)
7.5 x 17.8 x 2.5 cm
Cable Length
1.9 m
Weight
680 g
Warranty
One year
Model
W4 64-0111 SW-10/6
Product
Six 10 cc Syringe Heater
Accessories and Replacement Parts
•
•
•
•
W4 64-0165 SL-6
Stopcock with Luer Connector, pkg. of 6
W4 64-0162 RS-1
Support Stand
W4 64-0220 FR-50
Flow Valve
W4 64-0221 FR-55S
Flow Valve with On-Off Switch
W4 64-0210 MP-6
6 to 1 Perfusion Manifold
W4 64-0755 PE-160/10
Polyethylene Tubing
syringe warmers
Order #
Temperature
Control
Physical Dimensions:
Accommodates 6 x 10 cc syringes
Compact design
Quiet operation in recording setups
Compatible with TC-324B and TC-344B
Heater Controllers
Solution reservoir heating is an important technique used to eliminate
outgassing of solutions in a heated perfusion chamber. Since the gas load
of a solution has dependence on pressure and temperature, preheating a
solution at the final pressure before delivery to the chamber will minimize
the occurrence of bubbles in the bath, even if the solution is allowed to
cool en route. Solution reservoir heaters from Warner Instruments are
designed for applications where the use of a large heated water bath
is inconvenient.
Designed to accommodate six 10 cc syringes, the SW-10/6 heater
housing is made of anodized aluminum which is both corrosion resistant
and serves as an excellent conductor. These heaters may be mounted on
any 3/8" or 1/2" diameter lab rod. Solutions will reach set temperature
approximately 15 minutes after the application of power.
Each unit is supplied with a cable assembly for connection to Warner’s
TC-324B or TC-344B heater controllers, see pages 108 and 109. Also
supplied is a TA-29 thermistor for monitoring the temperature within
any syringe.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
123
SW-61
syringe warmers
Syringe Warmers
Eliminates the need for separate water bath
SW-61 Syringe Warmer
Specifications
Syringe Size
60 cc
Heater Resistance
10 Ω
Voltage Requirement
Variable to 12 V maximum
Temperature Range
Ambient to 50°C
Temperature Accuracy
±1°C
Physical Dimensions:
Temperature
Control
Body (H x W x D)
14.8 x 8.1 x 6.4 cm
Cable Length
1.9 m
Weight
900 g
Warranty
One year
Order #
Model
syringe warmers
W4 64-0112 SW-61
Product
60 cc Syringe Heater
Accessories and Replacement Parts
• Compatible with TC-324B and TC-344B
Heater Controllers
• Accommodates a single 60 cc syringe
• Particularly useful for applications where use of
a water bath is undesirable (e.g. a shared facility)
Solution reservoir heating is an important technique used to eliminate
outgassing of solutions in a heated perfusion chamber. Since the gas load of a
solution has dependence on pressure and temperature, preheating a solution at
the final pressure before delivery to the chamber can minimize the occurrence
of bubbles in the bath, even if the solution is allowed to cool en route.
Solution reservoir heaters from Warner Instruments are designed for
applications where the use of a large heated water bath is inconvenient.
W4 64-0165 SL-6
Stopcock with Luer Connector,
pkg. of 6
W4 64-0162 RS-1
Support Stand
W4 64-0182 PS-560
Syringe Heater Stand*
*see page 129.
TC-324B & TC-344B
Heater Controllers
One or two heater blocks may be powered from the single
channel TC-324B or dual channel TC-344B heater controller,
respectively. See pages 108 and 109 for details on these models.
Dual Channel TC-344B Heater Controller, see page 108
Designed to accommodate one 60 cc syringe, the SW-61 Heater housing
is made of anodized aluminum which is both corrosion resistant and
serves as an excellent conductor. These heaters may be mounted on any
3/8" or 1/2" diameter lab rod, and each unit is supplied with a cable
assembly for connection to Warner’s TC-324B or TC-344B heater
controllers, see pages 108 and 109.
Also supplied is a TA-29 thermistor for monitoring the temperature
within any syringe. Solutions will reach set temperature approximately
15 minutes after the application of power.
124
Single Channel TC-324B Heater Controller, see page 109
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
syringe warmers
SW-60 and SW-707
Syringe Heating System
Independent temperature control for multiple syringes
Specifications
Syringe Heater
SW-60
Syringe Size
Heater Resistance
6.67 Ω
Temperature Range
Ambient to 50°C
Input Voltage
12 V nominal, 16 V max
14.8 x 8.1 x 6.4 cm (H x W x D)
Weight
900 g
Warranty
One year
Syringe Heater Stand
PS-560
Dimensions:
Base, H x W x D
1.9 x 91.4 cm
Sub Poles, D x L
1.2 x 30.4 cm
Weight
Order #
Solution reservoir heating is an important technique used to eliminate
outgassing of solutions in a heated perfusion chamber. Since the gas load of
a solution is dependent on partial pressure and temperature, preheating the
solution at atmospheric pressure before delivery to the final heater will
minimize the occurrence of bubbles in the bath, even if the solution is
allowed to cool en route.
The ability to independently
control each heater block allows
the researcher to control the
initial temperature of each
solution without influencing other
nearby solutions. This system is
available to fit 60 cc syringes.
The heater housing is made of
anodized aluminum which is both
corrosion resistant and serves as
an excellent conductor of heat. Heater blocks can be mounted on any 9.5 mm
(3/8 inch) diameter metal rod with an insulating bushing supplied with each
SW-60. If multiple SW-60 heaters are to be mounted, the stand must have a
heavy base for stability.
2.5 x 30.4 x 30.4 cm
Main Pole, D x H
3.7 kg
Model
Product
W4 64-0179 SW-60
Syringe Heater for 60 cc Syringe
W4 64-0182 PS-560
Syringe Heater Stand
W4 64-0181 SW-707
Power Controller
syringe warmers
Physical Dimensions
Temperature
Control
60 cc
SW-707
Syringe Power Controller
As many as six SW-60’s
can be controlled with the
model SW-707 Power
Controller. When used in
the local mode, the
SW-707 allows the
temperature of each
syringe block to be independently set. A master mode allows all
syringe blocks to be set to the same temperature. Both the set
temperature and the actual temperature of each syringe block
can be displayed on the LED meter.
Specifications
Temperature Range
Ambient to 50°C
Max. Output
12 VCD, 144 W
LED Display
Monitor to set and read temperatures
Power Requirements
100-130 or 220-250 VAC, 50/60Hz
PS-560 Syringe Heater Stand
Physical Size
9 x 22 x 26 cm (H x W x D)
Having a large base for stability, the syringe heater stand will accommodate up
to eight syringe heaters. Mounting rods are thermally non-conducting plastic.
The 90 cm long vertical rod permits a wide range of height adjustment.
Warranty
2 years
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
125
accessories
SWS-10, SWS-60 and SWS–140
Syringe Warmers
Independent temperature control for individual syringes
Mounts easily onto syringe
Temperature
Control
10 cc
60 cc
Scale marking ports
140 cc
accessories
SWS-60
mounted on a
Harvard Apparatus
Pump 33 Dual
Syringe Pump
• Designed for use on a syringe pump or
support stand
• Accommodates 10, 60 and 140 cc syringes
• Scale marking ports permit volume monitoring
during use
• Can be powered from 12 volt battery for
sensitive electrophysiology applications
The SWS-Series Syringe Warmers provide a simple and effective method
for maintaining a stable temperature within a syringe. The compact
design of this warmer allows it to be used either with a syringe pump or
mounted on a support stand.
Specifications
Voltage Requirement
18 Ω
Temperature Range
Ambient to 65°C
Temperature Accuracy
±1°C
Cable Length
2.4 m
Warranty
One year
Heater Resistance
Variable to 12 V maximum
Model
Weight
Length
OD
ID
Syringe Type
SWS-10
32.7 g
38.2 mm
22.2 mm
16.2 mm
Becton
Dickinson
SWS-60
76 g
83.7 mm
35.0 mm
29.1 mm
Becton
Dickinson
SWS-140
192 g
109.5 mm
51.0 mm
41.4 mm
Monoject
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1584
SWS-10
Syringe Heater for 10 cc Syringes
W4 64-1560
SWS-60
Syringe Heater for 60 cc Syringes
The thermally controlled heater housing slides onto a 10, 60, or 140 cc
syringe and is held in place with a self adjusting friction band. The
housing incorporates a resistive element and thermistor, which when
connected to a TC-124 temperature controller, allows the syringe warmer
to be maintained at a constant temperature.
W4 64-1585
SWS-140
Syringe Heater for 140 cc Syringes
W4 64-1545
TC-124A
Temperature Controller, 120 VAC US
W4 64-1545E
TC-124AE
Temperature Controller, 240 VAC
Europe
W4 64-1655
TC-144
Temperature Controller
The heater housing is made of anodized aluminum which is both corrosion
resistant and serves as an excellent thermal conductor. Solutions usually reach
the set temperature approximately 15 minutes after application of power.
W4 64-1606
BAC-1
Battery Adapter Cable
Be sure to order the TC-124 temperature controller with your syringe warmer.
126
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
accessories
Temperature Control Accessories and Cables
SHH-1, SHH-2, SHH-3 and SHH-4 Holders for In-line Solution Heaters
SHH-1 w/ Model SH-27B
SHH-3
SHH-2
An ideal tool for holding Warner In-line Solution Heaters close to the
chamber. Machined from a solid Delrin block, these sturdy holders can
be secured to your microscope stage using gaffer or duct tape.
Order #
W4 64-1555 SHH-1
Model
Product
Holder for Solution Heaters
Models SH-27B & SF-28
• The SHH-1 works with both our SH-27B and SF-28 Solution Heaters.
• The SHH-2 mounts our SC-20 In-line Solution Heater/Cooler.
• The SHH-3 is used for the SHM-6, SHM-8, and SHM-828 Multiline
In-line Heaters.
• The SHH-4 works with our FR-50 and FR-55S flow valves.
W4 64-1556 SHH-2
Holder for Solution Heaters
Model SC-20
W4 64-1557 SHH-3
Holder for Solution Heaters
Models SHM-6, SHM-8, SHM-828
W4 64-1558 SHH-4
Holder for Flow Valves
Models FR-50 and FR-55S
accessories
SHH-4 Shown with a
FR-55S Flow Valve
Temperature
Control
SHH-1
Cables and Thermistors
CC-15
CC-28
CC-35
CC-102
TA-29
Order #
TA-30
Model Product
W4 64-0303 CC-15
Cable Assembly with Connector
with Tinned Leads
W4 64-0106 CC-28
Cable Assembly for Series 20
Heater Platforms
W4 64-0109 CC-35
Cable Assembly with Unterminated
Outboard End
W4 64-1425 CC-102
Cable Assembly, Male Banana to 1 mm
Jacks (for use with Warner Field
Stimulation Chambers)
W4 64-0107 TA-29
Replacement Cable with Bead Thermistor
W4 64-0108 TA-30
Replacement Cable with Glass Thermistor
Additional replacement parts are shown on page 62 (Platforms).
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
127
accessories
Model TM-3 Three-Scale Thermistor
Temperature Monitor
Fahrenheit, celsius, Kelvin
Optional Temperature Probes
Temperature
Control
TA-29
accessories
TA-32
TA-31
Specifications
Temperature Range:
Celsius
0 °C to 104 °C
Fahrenheit
2 °F to 220 °F
Absolute (Kelvin)
• Celsius, Fahrenheit, or Absolute (Kelvin) scales
• Analog output for data acquisition systems or
pen recorders
• Dust-proof, splash-proof and battery powered
for use in the field
• Compatible with any 10kΩ unical thermistor
• Large easy to read LCD display
The TM-3 is a portable thermistor thermometer built for lab accurate
temperature measurement. Designed to use any 10 KΩ unical thermistor,
no recalibration is required when changing probes. The meter features
three scales, Celsius, Fahrenheit, and Absolute (Kelvin), pushbutton
selectable from the dust-proof and splash-proof front panel interface.
128
256 K to 378 K
Accuracy
0.3°C ± 1 digit between 20° to 60°C
Meter Resolution
0.1 degrees
Display
LCD, 4 digit, 10 mm (0.4in) high
Sensor
10kΩ Unical Thermistor
Input & Output Connectors
BNC female
Analog Output
10 mV/°C
Power Requirements
AC wall adapter
9 Volt transistor alkaline battery or supplied
Physical Dimensions:
Case Size
2.4 x 7.9 x 12.8 cm (H x W x D)
Shipping Weight
0.5 kg
Warranty
Two years, parts & labor
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1654
TM-3
Three-Scale Temperature Monitor
Meter will operate for approximately 100 hours with a single 9 volt
alkaline battery or may be powered from the supplied AC wall adapter.
A front panel LED indicates low battery condition.
W4 64-1654E
TM-3
Three-Scale Temperature Monitor
230 VAC
Probe (thermistor) not included. Select from Thermistor Options
to the right.
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Bead Thermistor 1 mm Diameter
W4 64-1657
TA-31
Probe Thermistor 2 mm Diameter
10 mm Long Plastic Housing
W4 64-1656
TA-32
Probe Thermistor 1.63 mm Diameter
32 mm Long Stainless Steel Housing
Thermistor Options
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
accessories
Temperature Control Accessories and Cables
PI-1 Power Interface
PI-1 Power Interface
The PI-1 Power Interface Module will allow a single syringe warmer to run
from a 12 volt battery or power supply. Voltage outputs at 100 mV/°C are
provided to monitor both the set and actual temperatures. Fuse protected.
12 V nominal 16 V maximum
Connectors
1 mm jacks
Physical Size
2.8 x 5.7 x 2.2 cm (H x W x D)
Warranty
One year
Fuse
1.5A - 3AG
PS-560 Syringe Heater Stand
The PS-560 syringe heater stand will accommodate up to eight syringe
heaters. The stand has a large base for stability. Mounting rods are
thermally non-conducting plastic. The 90 cm long vertical rod permits
a wide range of height adjustment.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0180
PI-1
Power Interface
PS-560 Syringe Heater Stand
assembled with Syringe
Heaters and Syringe Power
Controller
accessories
Input DC Voltage
Temperature
Control
Specifications
Specifications
Dimensions:
Base, H x W x D
2.5 x 30.4 x 30.4 cm
Main Pole, D x H
1.9 x 91.4 cm
Sub Poles, D x L
Weight
1.2 x 30.4 cm
3.7 kg
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0182
PS-560
Syringe Heater Stand
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
129
Notes:
controller
Temperature
Control
notes
130
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubation
Section
Page No.
Okolab Microscope Incubators
Overview
Electric Stage Incubators
132
133-139
Cryo-Water-Jacketed CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator
140 - 147
CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator
148 - 158
Okolab Microscope Incubators,
see pages 132-158
Okolab Gas Mixers
Digital Gas Mixer, DGTCO2BX
159
160 - 161
Culture Dish Heater,
see page 162
Micro-Incubators
Culture Dish Heater DH-35
162
Microincubator System for 35 mm
Cell Culture Dishes DH-35i
163
Microincubator System DH-40i
164
MicroIncubation
Two Gas Mixer, 2GF_Mixer
1" x 3" Slide Heated Platform,
see page 169
Model TB-3 CCD Thermal Insert
for Prior Nano Z Stage
165
Open Perfusion Microincubator PDMI-2
166
Patch Slice Microincubator PSMI
167
Model TB-3 CS Thermal Insert for Prior
Nano Z Stage
168
Heated Platform for Chambered Slides, CSH-1
169
Microscope Stage Incubator, CSMI
170
Accessories for PDMI-2, PSMI, CSMI
& Leiden Chambers
171
QE-1 Heated Platform,
see page 172
Culture Dish Platforms
Quick Exchange Heated Platform with
Perfusion 35 mm, QE-1
172
Quick Exchange Heated Platform with
Perfusion 35 mm, QE-1HC
173
Quick Exhchange Heated Platform with
Perfusion 50 mm, QE-2
174
Brain/Tissue Slice
Chamber System,
see page 176
Accessories
Accessories for Warner
Micro-Incubation Chambers
175
Heated Top Coverslip for DH-35i &
DH-40i Chambers
175
Glass Bottom Cell Culture Dishes, 35 & 50 mm
175
Superfusion-Brain/Tissue Slice Chamber System 176 - 178
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
131
micro-incubators
NEW Okolab Microscope Incubators
Okolab and Warner Instruments-Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
Available in USA Only
Okolab microscope incubators provide your cells with
an ideal environmental condition for Live Cell Imaging.
The CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator is designed to
completely enclose your microscope and works to
maintain the required conditions for cell culture
within your microscopy workstation. This enables
prolonged observations on biological specimens and
allows sufficient space for other equipment.
The CO2 Microscope Stage Incubators offer excellent
incubation stability combined with ease of
movement on and off the microscope; a real plus for
shared facilities.
Typically, cage Incubators are custom designed to meet the needs of
your imaging workstation.
Okolab Microscope Stage Incubators
The CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator is a compact solution designed to
create a suitable environment for cell culturing directly on the
microscope stage, again allowing prolonged observations of living cells.
Cells cultured within the microscope stage incubator have been shown
to proliferate as well as in a regular bench-top incubator. Operating
temperatures are from 10°C to 50°C and thermal cycles are possible.
Tests of both products in comparison with a CO2
Benchtop Incubator show how these systems set the
standard in Live Cell Microscopy.
• ELECTRIC: Temperature range: Ambient + 3°C to 50°C.
Electrically heated.
Overview of technologies
Okolab Microscope Cage Incubator
• BASIC Water Jacket: Temperature range: Ambient + 3°C to 50°C.
Water Jacket.
The Cage Incubator is sold as a complete system and includes the
enclosure, a temperature control module, CO2 and humidity modules,
and a stage chamber.
• CRYO Water Jacket: Capable of heating and cooling in the
temperature range: 10°C to 50°C. Temperature cycle capable.
The cage features full accessibility to the microscope via access
doors on the front and side. If your application requires, we can place
132
additional panels in strategic locations. The cage also features easy
turn-to-open hinges allowing the incubator to be assembled and
disassembled in less than five minutes.
A wide choice of chambers and interchangeable inserts adds
flexibility to the equipment and allows use of any cell culture support
(Petri-dishes, chamber slides, multiwell plates, and others).
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW Electric CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
CO2 Regulation
CO2 is mixed with air in the supplied control unit and this mixture is
continuously fed into the incubating chamber to control medium pH. An
optional third gas line can also be fed into the controller.
Humidity Regulation
A humidifying and a pre-heating module (optional) prevent evaporation of
medium and avoids water condensation within the chamber.
Software (optional)
Read Temperature Software is available to read the incubator
temperature and to store the data in computer memory.
Low cost solution for long term experiments
One model fits all XY stages
Suitable for high magnification microscopy
Temperature control from Ambient + 3°C to 50°C
Wide selection of cell culture support adapters
The Electric CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator is the latest release in the
family of Stage Top Incubators. It represents a one-button solution for
long term experiments. The same model fits all the XY stages on the
market, and it is suitable at the same time for high magnification
microscopy and multipoint experiments. A wide choice of interchangeable
inserts adds flexibility to the equipment and accepts any cell culture
support (Petri-dishes, glass slides, multiwell plates, etc.).
Ambient + 3°C to 50°C
Accuracy
±0.3°C (Chamber temperature feedback)
±0.2°C (Specimen temperature feedback)
Heating Technology
Electric
Type of Controller
Hardware
Temperature Feedback
Chamber temperature feedback
Specimen temperature feedback (optional)
Humidification Module
Not heated (optional heated version)
CO2 Range
0 to 100%
Physical Dimensions:
(L x W x H)
159 x 110 x 18 mm
Weight
405 g
micro-incubators
•
•
•
•
•
Temperature Range
MicroIncubation
Specifications
Temperature Regulation
In the Electric Microscope Stage Incubator, specimen temperature is
regulated by the combined action of two controllers acting on the power
dissipated by the electric resistances, embedded both in the base and in
the lid of the incubating chamber. Two temperature feedback mechanisms
are available:
• Chamber temperature feedback
• Specimen temperature feedback
In the Chamber temperature feedback mode a thermocouple reads the
temperature of the incubating chamber. A careful calibration performed in
our laboratories guarantees that specimen temperature is maintained at
the desired value. The advantage of this solution is that the thermocouple
is not visible since it is embedded into the chamber.
In the Specimen temperature feedback mode a thermocouple wire reads
the temperature of a reference well placed in the incubating chamber
very close to the specimen. The advantage of this configuration is in the
accuracy of the temperature control.
Available in USA Only
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
133
micro-incubators
NEW Electric CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
Accessories
H301-EC-LID
H301-EC-HG
A 1 mm glass lid with heated metal frame.
Requires at least one LID adapter and one
BASE adapter.
A 2 mm transparent heated lid.
Requires at least one BASE adapter.
H301-EC
MicroIncubation
Universal electrically heated chamber, fits any mechanical and
motorized XY stage. Requires at least one plate adapter. The condenser
working distance is 22 mm without chamber riser and 28 mm with
chamber riser.
micro-incubators
134
H301-EC-6MWLID
H301-EC-12MWLID
H301-EC-24MWLID
6-well plate Lid adapter.
12-well plate Lid adapter.
24-well plate Lid adapter.
H301-EC-48MWLID
H301-EC-96MWLID
48-well plate Lid adapter.
96-well plate Lid adapter.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW Electric CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
Accessories (continued)
H301-EC-GS35LID
H301-EC-GS35LID
H301-EC-35LID
One standard chamber slide and two 35 mm
Petri dish LID adapter.
One standard chamber slide and two 35 mm
Petri dish LID adapter.
Four 35 mm Petri dish LID adapter.
H301-EC-GS35BASE
H301-EC-[57mm]GS35BASE
Four 35 mm Petri dish BASE adapter.
One standard chamber slide and two 35 mm
Petri dish BASE adapter.
One 57 chambered coverglass and two 35 mm
Petri dish BASE adapter.
H301-EC-GSLID
H301-EC-GSLID
H301-EC-60LID
Two standard chamber slides LID adapter.
Two standard chamber slides LID adapter.
Two 60 mm Petri dish LID adapter.
H301-EC-GSBASE
H301-EC-[57 mm]GSBASE
H301-EC-60BASE
Two standard chamber slides BASE adapter.
Two 57 mm chamber coverglass BASE adapter.
Tow 60 mm Petri dish BASE adapter.
H301-EC-GS60LID
H301-EC-GS60LID
H301-EC-GS3560LID
One standard chamber slide and one 60 mm
Petri dish LID adapter.
One standard chamber slide and one 60 mm
Petri dish LID adapter.
Two 35 mm and one 60 mm Petri dish
LID adapter.
H301-EC-GS60BASE
H301-EC-GS60BASE
H301-EC-GS3560BASE
One standard chamber slide and one 60 mm
Petri dish BASE adapter.
One standard chamber slide and one 60 mm
Petri dish BASE adapter.
Two 35 mm and one 60 mm Petri dish
BASE adapter.
micro-incubators
MicroIncubation
H301-EC-35BASE
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
135
micro-incubators
NEW Electric CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
Accessories (continued)
H-FST-R108-RING
108 mm Ring Adapter for all Flat Stage Plate
Adapters (Nikon).
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
H301-EC-GSPA-FST
H301-EC-35PA-FST
Plate adapters for flat stages with circular insert.
Fits stage with round 108 mm insert (Nikon), add
H-FST-R108-RING, for stages with R110 mm
insert (Olympus), add H-FST-R110-RING.
Plate adapters for two 35 mm Petri dishes for
flat stages with circular insert. Fits stage with
round 108 mm insert (Nikon), add H-FST-R108RING, for stages with R110 mm insert
(Olympus), add H-FST-R110-RING.
110 mm Ring Adapter for all Flat Stage Plate
Adapters (Olympus).
TIPA
IC-VICE-TI-SR
Stage insert for Nikon Ti-S-E
and Ti-S-ER motorized stage.
Tool to fix incubating chambers on Nikon T/TiSR XY stage.
SAMPA
136
H-FST-R108-RING
MVR-SA
Stage adapter for mounting Okolab chambers
Adapts the H301-EC electric stage incubator
with bottom rectangular shape 95 x 135 mm on
to the Olympus CK40-MVR and IX-MVR
T/Ti-SP plain stage equipped with T/Ti-SAM
mechanical stages.
attacheable mechanical stage, replaces the
Nikon plate adapter.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
micro-incubators
MicroIncubation
NEW Electric CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
Accessories (continued)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
137
micro-incubators
NEW Electric CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
Accessories (continued)
Order #
Model
Product
Stage Chambers
W4 99-0717 H301-TC1
Chamber Temperature Controller, controls the temperature of the base and lid of the
stage incubator. With this controller specimen temperature accuracy is ± 0.3°C.
W4 99-0718 H301-TC2
Specimen Temperature Controller, controls the temperature of the specimen and the
lid of the stage incubator, improves temperature accuracy to ± 0.2°C
W4 99-0719 H301-TM
Temperature Meter, an external temperature probe, measure ambient temperature or
specimen temperature
W4 99-0720 H301-TS
Read Temperature Software - Acquire temperature data measured during the experiment,
H301-TM required
Humidifying Module
W4 99-0730 H301-BC
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
138
Bubbling column - humidifies the gas stream before it enters chamber
W4 99-0731 H301-HMTC
Humidifying Module Temperature Controller, controls bubbling column temperature
W4 99-0670 H301-HM-FRAME
Humidifying Module Frame-humifies gas stream before it enters chamber, substitutes
H301-BC and H301-HMTC, Suitable for flat stages
W4 99-0732 H301-EC
Universal electrically heated chamber- Fits on Prior, Ludl, Marzhauser, ASI XY Stages
Choose between H301-EC-LID and H301-EC-HG-LID- requires at least one BASE plate adapter
Condenser working distance: 22 mm without the chamber riser and 28 mm with the chamber riser
W4 99-0679 H301-EC-LID
1 mm lid with heated metal frame - requires at least one LID adapter
W4 99-0932 H301-EC-HG-LID
2 mm Transparent Glass Heated LID
W4 99-0681 H301-EC-MCLTi
Electrically heated chamber for Mad City Labs Nano-Z100-N Piezo stage
on Nikon TI-S-E XY stage. Includes Transparent Heated LID H301-EC-HG-LID,
requires at least one BASE plate adapter. Condenser working distance: 21 mm
without the chamber riser and 28 mm with the chamber riser
LID and BASE adapters for motorized stages, compatible with H301-EC and H301-EC-MCLTi
W4 99-0682 H301-EC-6MWLID
6-well plates - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0683 H301-EC-6MWBASE
6-well plates - Base adapter
W4 99-0684 H301-EC-12MWLID
12-well plates - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0685 H301-EC-12MWBASE
12-well plates - Base adapter
W4 99-0686 H301-EC-24MWLID
24-well plates - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0687 H301-EC-24MWBASE
24-well plates - Base adapter
W4 99-0688 H301-EC-24MWLID-NUNC
24-well NUNC plates - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0689 H301-EC-24MWBASE-NUNC
24-well NUNC plates - Base adapter
W4 99-0690 H301-EC-48MWLID
48-well plates - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0709 H301-EC-48MWBASE
48-well plates - Base adapter
W4 99-0934 H301-EC-96MWLID
96-well plates - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0693 H301-EC-96MWBASE
96-well plates - Base adapter
W4 99-0694 H301-EC-GSLID
Two standard chamber slides - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID (common to H301-EC-GSBASE
and H301-EC-[57 mm]GSBASE)
W4 99-0695 H301-EC-GSBASE
Two standard chamber slides - Base adapter
W4 99-0696 H301-EC-[57 mm]GSBASE
Two 57 mm chambered coverglass - Base adapter
W4 99-0697 H301-EC-GS35LID
One standard chamber slide and Two 35 mm Petri-dish - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
(common to H301-EC-GS35BASE and H301-EC-[57 mm]GS35BASE)
W4 99-0698 H301-EC-GS35BASE
One standard chamber slide and Two 35 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
W4 99-0699 H301-EC-[57 mm]GS35BASE
One 57 mm chambered coverglass and Two 35 mm Petri-dish - base adapter
W4 99-0700 H301-EC-GS60LID
One standard chamber slide and One 60 mm Petri-dish - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
(common to H301-EC-GS60BASE and H301-EC-[57 mm]GS60BASE)
W4 99-0701 H301-EC-GS60BASE
One standard chamber slide and One 60 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
W4 99-0702 H301-EC-[57 mm]GS60BASE
One 57 mm chambered coverglass and One 60 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW Electric CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
Accessories (continued)
Order #
Model
Product
W4 99-0703 H301-EC-35LID
Four 35 mm Petri-dish - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0704 H301-EC-35BASE
Four 35 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
W4 99-0705 H301-EC-60LID
Two 60 mm Petri-dish - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0706 H301-EC-60BASE
Two 60 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
W4 99-0707 H301-EC-3560LID
One 35 mm and One 60 mm Petri-dish - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
W4 99-0708 H301-EC-3560BASE
One 35 mm and One 60 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
One standard chamber slide - Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID Suitable for flat stages
with circular insert
W4 99-0992 H301-EC-GSPA-FSTBASE
One standard chamber slide - Base adapter. Suitable for flat stages with circular insert
For stages with R108 mm insert (Nikon), add H-FST-R108-RING; for stages with
R110mm insert (Olympus), add H-FST-R110-RING
W4 99-0993 H301-EC-GS35PA-FSTLID
One standard chamber slide and One 35 mm Petri-dish. Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID
Suitable for flat stages with circular insert
W4 99-0994 H301-EC-GS35PA-FSTBASE
One standard chamber slide and One 35 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
Suitable for flat stages with circular insert For stages with R108 mm insert (Nikon),
add H-FST-R108-RING; for stages with R110 mm insert (Olympus), add H-FST-R110-RING
W4 99-0995 H301-EC-35PA-FSTLID
One 35 mm Petri-dish. Lid adapter for H301-EC-LID. Suitable for flat stages
with circular insert
W4 99-0996 H301-EC-35PA-FSTBASE
One 35 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter. Suitable for flat stages with circular insert
For stages with R108 mm insert (Nikon), add H-FST-R108-RING; for stages with
R110 mm insert (Olympus), add H-FST-R110-RING
W4 99-0997 H-FST-R108-RING
108 mm Ring Adapter for all Flat Stage Plate Adapters (Nikon)
W4 99-0998 H-FST-R110-RING
110 mm Ring Adapter for all Flat Stage Plate Adapters (Olympus)
Fixing tools
W4 99-0825 TIPA
Stage insert for Nikon Ti-S-E and Ti-S-ER Motorized XY stage
W4 99-0744 IC-VICE-TI-SR
Tool to fix incubating chambers on Nikon T/Ti-SR XY stage
W4 99-0742 SAMPA
Stage Adapter that allows to use Okolab Chambers with bottom rectangular shape
95 x 135 x 5 mm on T/Ti-SP Plain Stage equipped with T/Ti-SAM Attachable Mechanical
Stage replaces the Nikon plate adapter
W4 99-0909 H301-EC-ASI-PA
Stage insert for ASI XY Stage
W4 99-0910 MVR-SA
Allows use of H301-EC(-MCLTi) electric stage incubator on the Olympus CK40-MVR
and IX-MVR Mechanical Stages
W4 99-0911 H301-EC-AB
Electrically heated chamber for Applied Biophisics. Fits on Prior, Ludl,
Marzhauser XY Stages
W4 99-0912 H301-EC-PZ100
Electrically heated chamber for Prior PZ100 Nanoscan Z-stage NZ100 and NZ200
It hosts One 35 mm pertri or One chamber slide
W4 99-0913 H301-EC-LG
Electrically heated chamber for Leica Galvo Stage, requires at least
one base plate adapter. Condenser working distance: 20 mm
W4 99-0914 H301-EC-LG-GSBASE
One standard chamber slide - Base adapter
W4 99-0915 H301-EC-LG-[57 mm]GSBAS
One 57 mm chambered coverglass - Base adapter
W4 99-0916 H301-EC-LG-35BASE
One 35 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
W4 99-0917 H301-EC-LG-60BASE
One 60 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
W4 99-0918 H301-ECS-FST
SINGLE HOLDER - Electrically heated chamber for mechanical flat XY stage with
circular opening (i.e. Nikon T/Ti-SR and T/Ti-SSR & Olympus IX2-SFR and IX2-SLV2).
Transparent Heated LID Integrated humidifying module with active temperature control,
requires at least one plate adapter. Condenser working distance: 22 mm without the
chamber riser and 27 mm with the chamber riser
W4 99-0919 H301-ECS-FST-S35PABASE
One 35 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
W4 99-0920 H301-ECS-FST-S60PABASE
One 60 mm Petri-dish - Base adapter
W4 99-0921 H301-ECS-FST-GSPABASE
One standard chamber slides - Base adapter
micro-incubators
W4 99-0991 H301-EC-GSPA-FSTLID
MicroIncubation
Plate adapters for manual Flat Stages, compatible with H301-EC and H301-EC-MCLTi. They require H-FST-R[…]-RING
W4 99-0922 H301-ECS-FST-[57 mm]GSPABASE One 57 mm chambered coverglass - Base adapter
W4 99-0923 H301-ECS-IX2SFR-TIS-SI
External rectangular frame required to lock the H301-ECS-FST chamber on the XY stage
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
139
micro-incubators
NEW Basic-Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
• Superior incubation stability for long term
experiments
• Models to fit all XY stages on the market
• Suitable for high magnification microscopy
• Temperature control from Ambient+3°C to 50°C
• Wide selection of cell culture support adapters
The Basic-Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator provides
superior incubation stability. Water is pumped from a water bath into the
base plate and into the lid, which are both water jackets. Models fitting
all XY stages on the market are available.
Chambers suitable for high magnification microscopy and multipoint
experiments are available. A wide choice of inserts adds flexibility to the
equipment and allows the use of any cell culture support (Petri-dishes,
chamber slides, multiwell plates, etc.).
Specimen Temperature Regulation
Temperature is directly measured inside a reference Petri dish and
temperature is controlled by software from a water bath into the water
jacket. The software controller reads the temperature in the reference
well and updates the set point temperature of the water bath, ensuring a
specimen temperature stability of ± 0.1°C.
CO2 Regulation
CO2 is mixed with air in the control unit and is continuously fed into the
incubating chamber to control medium pH. An optional third gas can also
be fed into the incubating chamber.
Humidity Regulation
Software: Temperature Control Basic
Temperature Control Software communicates with both the water bath
and the temperature meter, ensuring a temperature stability of ± 0.1°C.
Temperature Control Software reads the sample temperature every
minute and stores it in computer memory. Intelligent software tools avoid
thermal shock to the specimen when the CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
is opened (thermal shock prevention). A software temperature offset
compensates the heat sink caused by oil immersion objectives (oil
immersion compensation).
Software Features
Specimen temperature display Yes
Specimen temperature storage Yes
Thermal shock prevention
Yes
Oil immersion compensation
Yes
Temperature cycles
No
Specifications
Temperature Range
Ambient+ 3°C to 50°C
Accuracy
±0.1°C
Heating Technology
Water jacket
Type of Controller
Software / PC required
Temperature feedback
Specimen temperature feedback
Humidification module
Heated
CO2 range
0 to 100%
Physical Dimensions:
(L x W x H)
159 x 142 x 31 mm
Weight
450 g
A humidifying and a pre-heating module prevents evaporation of medium
and avoids water condensation on glass and plastic surfaces.
The gas stream is warmed up by flowing into a copper coil immersed into
the water bath and then is humidified by bubbling into a glass column
filled with distilled water and immersed into the water bath.
Available in USA Only
To reach a nearly saturated atmosphere in the incubation chamber,
without causing water condensation, the humid gas is equilibrated with
the chamber by flowing into a tube embedded into the water jacket.
140
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW Basic-Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator (continued)
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
• Data of cell proliferation in the CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator and in a CO2 bench-top incubator
are compared for a period of three days.
Cell line: Panc-1
• As shown in the graph, cells proliferate as well as
in the CO2 bench-top incubator
• A combined action of the humidifying module and
of the water reservoirs in the incubating chamber
minimizes medium evaporation
• System design guarantees similar evaporation in
all the wells
• Low evaporation rate allows long term
experiments
MicroIncubation
Reduced Evaporation
• Overall system performance can be assessed by
measuring cell proliferation in time
micro-incubators
Cell Proliferation
Temperature Stability Within ±0.1°C
• Water jacket design of the incubating chamber
and PID software insure a thermal stability and
uniformity within ±0.1°C
• Thermal stability is very important to reduce focus
drift, while thermal uniformity in the chamber is
essential to prevent water condensation
Available in USA Only
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
141
micro-incubators
NEW Cryo-Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
Software: Temperature Control Cryo
Temperature Control Software communicates with the water bath and the
temperature meter ensuring a temperature stability of ± 0.1°C. Temperature
Control Software reads sample temperature every minute and stores it in
computer memory. Intelligent software tools avoid thermal shock to the
specimen when the CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator is opened (thermal
shock prevention). A software temperature offset compensates the heat sink
caused by oil immersion objectives (oil immersion compensation). Thermal
cycle module allows thermal cycles (ramps, waves, etc).
Software Features
Specimen temperature display Yes
Oil immersion compensation Yes
Specimen temperature storage Yes
Temperature cycles
Thermal shock prevention
Yes
Yes
MicroIncubation
Specifications
micro-incubators
• Superior incubation stability for long term
experiments
• Models to fit all XY stages on the market
• Suitable for high magnification microscopy
• Temperature control from10C° to 50°C
• Wide selection of cell culture support adapters
Temperature Range
The Cryo-Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator provides superior
incubation stability above and below room temperature. Water is pumped
from a water bath into the base plate and into the lid, which are both
Water Jackets. Models fitting all XY stages on the market are available.
Physical Dimensions:
5°C to 50°C
Accuracy
±0.1°C
Heating Technology
Water jacket
Type of Controller
Software / PC required
Temperature feedback
Specimen temperature feedback
Humidification module
Heated
CO2 range
0 to 100%
(L x W x H)
159 x 142 x 31 mm
Weight
450 g
Chambers suitable for high magnification microscopy and multipoint
experiments are available. Wide varieties of inserts are available and
accept any cell culture support (petri-dishes, chamber slides, multiwell
plates, etc.). The Cryo water bath allows thermal cycling.
Specimen Temperature Regulation
Temperature is directly measured inside a reference Petri-dish and is
controlled by a software PID controller by circulating water from a cryostatic
water bath into the Water Jacket. The software controller reads the
temperature in the reference well and updates the set point temperature of
the water bath, ensuring a specimen temperature stability of ± 0.1°C.
CO2 Regulation
CO2 is mixed with air in the control unit and is continuously fed into the
incubating chamber to control medium pH. An optional third gas line can
also be fed into the controller.
Humidity Regulation
A humidifying and a pre-heating module prevents evaporation of medium
and avoids water condensation on glass and plastic surfaces.
The gas stream is warmed up by flowing into a copper coil immersed into
the water bath and then is humidified by bubbling into a glass column
filled with distilled water and immersed into the water bath.
To reach a nearly saturated atmosphere in the incubation chamber,
without causing water condensation, the humid gas is equilibrated with
the chamber by flowing into a tube embedded into the water jacket.
142
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW Basic and Cryo Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator & Accessories
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
Interchangeable plate adapters for multiwell plates
Plate adapter for Petri dishes and chamber slide
Universal WJ CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
micro-incubators
MicroIncubation
Slim Water Jacket CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
Usually mounted on a manual XY stage. This chamber fits any
Ludl/Marzhauser/Prior motorized stage, any rectangular 160 x 110 mm
mechanical stage (i.e. Ludl BioPrecison and BioPoint, Marzhauser SCAN
IM 120 x 100, Prior H107 and H117) and all mechanical flat stages.
A dedicated stage insert for the Nikon TI-S-E motorized XY stage is also
available. For A.S.I. stages, please see the model "Universal for A.S.I. stage".
Dimensions: 207 x 155 x 22 mm.
Universal Model
This chamber can accommodate any cell culture support. Interchangeable
adapters allow use of multiwell plates (6-12-24-48-96), 35 mm Petridishes, and chambered slides.
Adapters for round 25 mm #1.5 thickness coverslips
Slim 2-Well Model
This model is especially designed to be used with high NA objectives,
such as 63x and 100x. Its slim profile design allows it to be used with
high NA condensers as well. It can host two 35 mm Petri dishes or one
chamber slide. The temperature probe can be inserted in a second 35 mm
Petri dish or into a rectangular well filled with water inside the chamber.
Typical applications are time-lapse observations of a
single field of view. Access ports allow insertion of
perfusion tubes. Tubes are placed on the top of the
chamber to pre-heat the perfusion medium before it enters
into the sample.
Designed to increase reproducibility and versatility this chamber improves
experimental efficiency, and can be used both with long working distance
and oil-immersion objectives. Two holes on the chamber body allow the
insertion of perfusion tubing.
Typical applications are time-lapse observations of more than one field of
view. To fully benefit from the multi-accommodation design, this chamber
should be mounted on a microscope equipped with motorized focus and
motorized XY stage. It fits any 160x110mm sized stage (i.e. Ludl
BioPrecison and BioPoint, Marzhauser SCAN IM 120x100, Prior H107 and
H117) and all mechanical flat stages.
A dedicated stage insert for the Nikon TI-S-E motorized XY stage is also
available, For A.S.I. stages, please see the model "Universal for A.S.I. stage".
Dimensions: 159 x 142 x 31 mm.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
143
micro-incubators
NEW Basic and Cryo Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator & Accessories (continued)
Universal WJ CO2 Microscope Stage Incubator
H101-WJC-6035PA
Plate adapters for two 35 mm Petri dishes and
one 60 mm Petri dish.
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
144
H101-WJC
Universal water jacket chamber, fits on 160 x 110 mm stage insert (i.e. Ludl BioPoint and
BioPrecision, Marzhauser SCAN IM 120 X 100, PRIOR H107 AND H117 stages. It also fits Nikon
motorized XY stages with insert TIPA. Requires at least one plate adapter. The condenser working
distance is 35 mm.
H101-WJC-6MWPA
H101-WJC-12MWPA
H101-WJC-24MWPA
Plate adapters for 6-well plates.
Plate adapters for 12-well plates.
Plate adapters for 24-well plates.
H101-WJC-60PA
H101-WJC-[57 mm]GSPA
H101-WJC-[57 mm]GS35PA
Plate adapters for two 60 mm Petri dishes.
Plate adapters for two 57 mm chambered
coverglass.
Plate adapters for one 57 mm chambered
coverglass and two 35 mm Petri dishes.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW Basic and Cryo Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator & Accessories (continued)
H101-WJC-GS35PA
H101-WJC-35PA
Plate adapters for two standard chamber slides.
Plate adapters for two 35 mm Petri dishes and
one standard chamber slide.
Plate adapters for four 35 mm Petri dishes.
H101-WJC-48MWPA
H101-WJC-96MWPA
H101-WJC-GS60PA
Plate adapters for 48-well plates.
Plate adapters for 96-well plates.
Plate adapters for one standard chamber slide
and one 60 mm Petri dish.
micro-incubators
MicroIncubation
H101-WJC-GSPA
H101-WJC-GS35PA
Deep set kit for high N.A. condensers (working
distance 21 mm). Accommodates one standard
chamber slide or one 35 mm Petri dishes.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
145
micro-incubators
NEW Basic and Cryo Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator & Accessories (continued)
H101-WJC with
H101-WJCMWPA
DIMENSIONS
MicroIncubation
H101-WJC-SLIM
Slim water jacket chamber, suitable for high N.A. condensers. Requires at least one plate adapter.
Condenser working distance 24 mm.
micro-incubators
H101-WJC-SLIM with
H101-WJC-SLIM-35PA
H101-WJC-SLIM-35PA
H101-WJC-SLIM-GSPA
Plate adapters for two 35 mm Petri-dishes.
Plate adapters for two standard chamber slides.
DIMENSIONS
146
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW Basic and Cryo Water-Jacket CO2 Microscope
Stage Incubator & Accessories (continued)
W4 99-0801 H101-CRYO
W4 99-0802
W4 99-0810
W4 99-0811
W4 99-0812
H101-CRYO-S
H101-HM
H101-BC
H101-WJC
W4 99-0813
W4 99-0814
W4 99-0815
W4 99-0816
W4 99-0817
W4 99-0818
W4 99-0824
W4 99-0927
W4 99-0820
W4 99-0928
W4 99-0929
W4 99-0821
W4 99-0822
W4 99-0823
W4 99-0933
H101-WJC-6MWPA
H101-WJC-12MWPA
H101-WJC-24MWPA
H101-WJC-24MWPA-NUNC
H101-WJC-48MWPA
H101-WJC-96MWPA
H101-WJC-GSPA
H101-WJC-[57mm]GSPA
H101-WJC-GS35PA
H101-WJC-[57mm]GS35PA
H101-WJC-GS60PA
H101-WJC-35PA
H101-WJC-6035PA
H101-WJC-60PA
H101-WJC-DS-GS35PA
W4 99-0930
W4 99-0825
W4 99-0744
W4 99-0742
H101-WJC-PA-CUSTOM
TIPA
IC-VICE-TI-SR
SAMPA
W4 99-0826 H101-WJC-SLIM
W4 99-0827 H101-WJC-SLIM-35PA
W4 99-0828 H101-WJC-SLIM-GSPA
W4 99-0832 H101-WJC-ASI
Maximum plate height 17mm
W4 99-0813 H101-WJC-6MWPA
W4 99-0814 H101-WJC-12MWPA
W4 99-0815 H101-WJC-24MWPA
W4 99-0816 H101-WJC-24MWPA-NUNC
W4 99-0817 H101-WJC-48MWPA
W4 99-0818 H101-WJC-96MWPA
W4 99-0824 H101-WJC-GSPA
W4 99-0927 H101-WJC-[57mm]GSPA
W4 99-0820 H101-WJC-GS35PA
W4 99-0928 H101-WJC-[57mm]GS35PA
W4 99-0665 H101-WJC-GS60PA
W4 99-0821 H101-WJC-35PA
W4 99-0822 H101-WJC-6035PA
W4 99-0823 H101-WJC-60PA
W4 99-0840 H101-WJC-AB
Product
Heating unit- Includes water bath, temperature sensor, temperature meter,
control temperature software
Heating / Cooling unit- Includes cryostatic water bath, temperature sensor,
temperature meter, cryo-control temperature software
Temperature cycles software -enables temperature cycels and ramps
Humidity module- Includes gas preheating system and bubbling column
Bubbling column Included in item H101-HM
Universal water jacket chamber for 160x110 mm stage insert (i.e Ludl BioPoint and
BioPrecision, Marzhauser SCAN IM120x100, Prior H107 and H117) Requires at least
one plate adapter (Condenser working distance: 35mm)
Plate adapters for 6-well plates
Plate adapters for 12-well plates
Plate adapters for 24-well plates
Plate adapters for 24-well Nunc plates
Plate adapters for 48-well plates
Plate adapters for 96-well plates
Plate adapters for #2 standard chamber slides
Plate adapter for #2 57 mm chambered coverglass
Plate adapters for #2 35mm Petri-dish and #1 standard chamber slide
Plate adapters for #1 57 mm chambered coverglass and #2 35mm Petri-dish
Plate adapters for #1 standard chamber slide and #1 60mm Petri-dish
Plate adapters for #4 35mm Petri-dish
Plate adapter for #2 35mm Petri-dish and #1 60mm Petri-dish
Plate adapters for #2 60mm Petri-dish
Deep set kit for high N.A. condensers (working distance 21 mm) hosts one
standard chamber slide or one 35mm Petri-dish
Custom water jacket plate adapter
Stage insert for Nikon Ti-S-E and Ti-S-ER Motorized XY stage
Tool to fix incubating chambers on Nikon T/Ti-SR XY stage
Stage Adapter allows to use Okolab Chambers with bottom rectangular shape
95x135x5mm on T/Ti-SP Plain Stage equipped with T/Ti-SAM Attachable
Mechanical Stage. It replaces the Nikon plate adapter
Slim water jacket chamber Suitable for high N.A. condensers Requires at least one
plate adapter Condenser working distance: 24mm
Plate adapter for #2 35mm Petri-dish
Plate adapter for #2 chamber slides
Water jacket chamber for ASI XY stage. Requires at least one plate adapter
MicroIncubation
Model
W4 99-0800 H101-BASIC
micro-incubators
Order #
Plate adapters for 6-well plates
Plate adapters for 12-well plates
Plate adapters for 24-well plates
Plate adapters for 24-well Nunc plates
Plate adapters for 48-well plates
Plate adapters for 96-well plates
Plate adapters for #2 standard chamber slides
Plate adapter for #2 57 mm chambered coverglass
Plate adapters for #2 35mm Petri-dish and #1 standard chamber slide
Plate adapters for #1 57 mm chambered coverglass and #2 35mm Petri-dish
Plate adapters for #1 standard chamber slide and #1 60mm Petri-dish
Plate adapters for #4 35mm Petri-dish
Plate adapter for #2 35mm Petri-dish and #1 60mm Petri-dish
Plate adapters for #2 60mm Petri-dish
Water jacket chamber for Applied Biophisics. (Fits on 160x110 mm stage insert: i.e
Ludl BioPoint and BioPrecision, Marzhauser SCAN IM120x100, Prior H107 and H117)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
147
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
The CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator is designed to maintain the required
environmental conditions for cell culture around your microscopy
workstation, thus enabling prolonged observations on biological
specimens and allowing space for other equipment.
Cells cultured within the microscope cage incubator have been shown to
proliferate as well as in a regular bench-top incubator.
Temperature is controlled by gentle stream of warm air. A small
thermocouple is inserted into a reference well to control the temperature
as close as possible to the sample, ensuring a specimen temperature
stability of ±0.1°C.
Models for virtually any inverted and upright microscope are available. A
wide choice of chambers and interchangeable plate adapters allow the
use of any cell culture support (petri, glass slides, multiwell plates, etc.).
Compatible with manual and digital CO2 / O2 gas controllers.
• Stable temperature control for upright and
inverted microscopes
• Temperature is controlled by blowing warm air
into the cage
• Built from removable panels for fast assembly
• Temperature control from ambient +3°C to 50°C
• Obscuring panels available for fluorescence
applications
Specifications
Temperature Range
Ambient + 3°C to 50°C
Accuracy
±0.1°C
Heating Technology
Warm air
Type of Controller
Software / PC required
Temperature feedback
Specimen temperature feedback
Humidification module
Heated
CO2 range
0 to 100%
Physical Dimensions:
Custom enclosures depend on microscope brand
and options installed
Available in USA Only
148
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator (continued)
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
Specimen Temperature Regulation
Temperature is directly measured inside the Petri-dish and controlled by
blowing warm air from a fan heater into the plastic box around the
microscope. A PID controller reads the temperature in the reference well
and updates the temperature of the fan heater, ensuring a specimen
temperature stability of ± 0.1°C.
Micro-Environmental Chamber
The Micro Environmental Chamber fits into the microscope stage and
hosts the sample. Pre-mixed and pre-humidified air / CO2 is continuously
fed into the chamber. Interchangeable adapters for all cell culture
supports are available.
Medium pH is controlled by mixing CO2 and air in the control unit and
continuously feeding this mixture into the micro-environmental chamber.
An optional third gas line can be fed into the controller. A heated
humidifying module prevents evaporation of culture medium and prevents
water condensation on glass and plastic surfaces.
MicroIncubation
CO2 and Humidity Regulation
Several doors on the front and side panels allow full and easy access to
the microscope. In particular, two openings on the bottom of the front
panel give unrestricted access to the focus knob. Additional doors can be
added upon request.
Turn-to-open hinges permit direct removal of both the front and upper
panel. Once these panels have been removed, the rest of the cage
incubator can be easily moved backwards. When needed, the cage
incubator can be reassembled around the microscope in five minutes.
micro-incubators
Features
Obscuring panels for fluorescence microscopy can be attached to the
outside of cage incubator by means of turn-to-open hinges.
Available in USA Only
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
149
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator (continued)
Assessing System Performance
Microscope Enclosure System Components
The Okolab microscope enclosures are made up from modular
components giving the user tremendous flexibility in building a system to
best match their experimental requirements. All major components may
be ordered as individual items, a complete system will consist of the
following items:
Custom design Lexan microscope enclosure
A few photos of your microscope are generally all that are needed to
design your enclosure. Obscuring panels can be added to the Lexan
enclosure to create a dark environment.
Temperature Controller
Temperature accuracy of +/- 0.1 C is maintained with in a reference well
by controlling the power to a warm air blower connected to a port at the
rear of enclosure. Temperature uniformity with in the enclosure is
insured by the action of two strategically placed vents, reducing
temperature induced focus drift.
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
150
Available Read Temperature Software allows storage of the temperature
profile during the experiment. The temperature graph can be visualized in
real time, recording temperature fluctuation and the set point. Data can
be reloaded off line, or exported to a file. The software also features a
water consumption window which predicts when the bubbler will need
refilling. Software also allows real time temperature monitoring through
UDP transfer protocol for third part software synchronization.
O2 / CO2 Controller
Micro Environmental Chamber
The micro environmental chamber fits into the microscope stage and
hosts the sample. The stage chamber allows the humidified stream of
premixed gas to be continuously streamed around the cells. Plate
adapters for the chamber allow the use of a verity of cell culture supports
from Petri dishes to multiwell plates. Chambers can be used with both
long working distance and oil-immersion objectives.
The chamber will fit into any 160 x 110 mm stage, i.e. Ludl BioPrecision
and BioPoint, Marzhauser SCAN IM 120 x 100, Prior H107 and H117, and
all mechanical flat stages. It also fits into the Nikon TI-S-E, motorized XY
stage with insert TIPA. Models fitting piezo stages are also available.
A two gas manual mixer is the most economical solution to gas control,
typically used to mix air with CO2 regulated to a 95% / 5% mixture.
Humidity Module
A three gas manual mixer can be used to mix N2/CO2/O2 using floating
ball flowmeters. Digital CO2 and O2 controllers offer sensor and PID
closed loop feedback control for greater accuracy.
A bubbling column placed into the microscope enclosure is used to
humidify the air and CO2 stream before entering into the
microenvironment chamber.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator (continued)
Assessing System Performance
micro-incubators
Medium evaporation below 2% per day
• A combined action of the humidifying module
and of the water reservoirs in the
micro-environmental chamber minimize medium
evaporation
• System design guarantees similar evaporation in
all the wells
• Low evaporation allows long lasting experiments
Temperature Stability Within ±0.1°C
• Temperature stability and uniformity is
guaranteed by forced ventilation into the cage
incubator
• Temperature accuracy is obtained by controlling
the temperature very close to the sample
• Initial warm up requires two hours
MicroIncubation
Superior Products for Live Cell Imaging
Cell proliferation
• Overall system performance can be assessed by
measuring cell proliferation in time.
• Data of cell proliferation in the CO2 microscope
cage incubator and in a CO2 bench-top incubator
are compared for a period of four days. Cell line:
lymphocytes (jurkat)
• As shown in the graph, cells proliferate as well
as in in the CO2 bench-top incubator.
Available in USA Only
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
151
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Accessories
Universal Stage Chamber Slim
H201-MEC-SLIM
Universal Micro environmental chamber for 160 x 110 mm stage inserts
(i.e. Ludl BioPoint and BioPrecision, Marzhauser SCAN IM 120 x 100, Prior
H107 and H117). Chamber willaccommodate 6,12, 24, 48, and 96
multiwell plates.
For other supports, add the corresponding plate adapter. Condenser
working distance is 22 mm without chamber riser and 27 mm with
chamber riser.
MicroIncubation
H-210-MEC-3GSPA
Plate adapter for 4 Petri dishes
Plate adapter for three standard
chambered slides
H-210-MEC-GS60PA
H-210-MEC-3
(57mm)GSPA
micro-incubators
H-210-MEC-35PA
Plate adapter for one chamber
slide and one 60 mm Petri dishes
Plate adapter for three 57 mm
chambered coverglass
H-210-MEC-60PA
H-210-MEC-6035PA
Plate adapter for two 60 mm
Petri dishes
Plate adapter for one 60 mm Petri
dish and two 35 mm
H-210-MEC-G35PA
Plate adapter for two standard
chamber slides and two 35 mm
Petri dishes
152
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Accessories
Universal Stage Chamber Slim (continued)
CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Universal Stage
Chamber Slim Fixing Tools
TIP
MicroIncubation
Stage insert for Nikon Ti-S-E and TiS-ER motorized XY stage
H-210-MEC-SLIM
Without chamber riser
H-210-MEC-SLIM
micro-incubators
With chamber riser
IC-VICE-TI-SR
Tool to fix incubating chambers on Nikon T/Ti-SR XY stage
H-210-MEC-SLIM
With chamber riser
SMPA
Stage adapter for mounting Oko chambers with bottom rectangular shape 95 x 135 mm on T/Ti-SP
plain stage equipped with T/Ti-SAM attachable mechanical stage, Replaces Nikon plate adapter.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
153
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Accessories
(continued)
CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Stage Chamber For
Piezo Prior NZ250 and NZ500
CO2 Microscope Cage
Incubator Stage Chamber
for Prior NZ100 and NZ200
Chamber Riser
Included in the H201-MEC-NZ500. Needed for
multiwell plates higher than 17 mm
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
H201-MEC-NZ500
Micro environmental chamber for Prior
NanoScan Z- stage NZ250 and NZ500.
Accomodates 6,12,24,48,and 96 multiwell
plates. For other supports add the
corresponding plate adapter. Condenser
working distance: 22 mm without chamber
riser and 26 mm with chamber riser.
H201-MEC-PZ100
Micro environmental chamber for Prior
NanoScan Z- stage NZ100 and NZ200.
Accomodates one 35 mm Petri dish or one
chamber slide.
154
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Accessories
(continued)
H201-MEC-MCLTi
Micro environmental chamber for Mad City Labs Nano Z100 piezo stage.
CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Stage
Chamber for ASI Stage H201-MEC-ASI
Chamber Riser
Included in the H201-MEC-ASI. Needed for multiwell plates
higher than 17 mm
H-210-MEC-ASI
micro-incubators
Micro environmental chamber for ASI stage, accomodates 6,12, 24,
48, and 96 multiwell plates. For other supports add the
corresponding plate adapter.
MicroIncubation
CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Stage
Chamber for Mad City Labs Piezo Stage
H-210-MEC-ASI
Micro environmental
chamber for ASI stage
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
155
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Accessories
(continued)
CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Stage
Chamber for Leica SP5 Galvo Stage
H201-MEC-LG
ME-CHAMBER
Plate adapter for two 60 mm Petri dishes
H-210-MEC-LG
MicroIncubation
H-210-MEC-LG35PA
Plate adapter for four 35 mm Petri dishes
Micro environmental chamber for Leica SP5 Galvo Stage
micro-incubators
CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Stage
Chamber for Manual Stage H201-MEC-MAN
H-210-MEC-MAN
Micro environmental chamber for mechanical flat XY stages.
Accomodates 6, 12, 24, 48, and 96 multiwell plates. For other
supports, add the corresponding plate adapter.
H-210-MEC-LG-GS35PA
Plate adapter for two #2 chamber slides and two mm Petri dishes
H-210-MEC-MAN-35PA
H-210-MEC-LG-(57 mm)GSPA
Plate adapter for two 35 mm Petri dishes
Plate adapter for two 57 mm chambered coverglass
156
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Accessories
(continued)
Order #
Model
W4 99-0650 H201
W4 99-0652 H201-OP
W4 99-0654 H201-T1
W4 99-0655 H201-T2
W4 99-0674 H201-TS
W4 99-0677 H201-BC
Product
Microscope lexan enclosure
Obscuring panels can be added to the lexan enclosure to create a dark environment
Temperature contol unit Includes: PID Temperature control unit; air heater;
auxiliary fans, temperature sensor
Temperature contol unit with two heaters Includes PID Temperature control unit;
2 air heaters; auxiliary fans, temperature sensor. Required if room temperature is
less than 21°C
ReadTemperature Software records the temperature profile during the experiment
Bubbling column - humidifies the gas stream before the inlet into the chamber
W4 99-0294 H201-MEC-NZ500
W4 99-0931 H201-MEC-ASI
Universal Micro environmental chamber for 160 x 110 mm stage insert (i.e Ludl BioPoint
and BioPrecision, Marzhauser SCAN IM120 x 100, Prior H107 and H117) accomodates
6, 12, 24, 48, 96 multiwell plates. Condenser working distance: 22 mm without the
chamber riser and 27 mm with the chamber riser
Micro environmental chamber for Prior NanoScan Z-stage NZ250 and NZ500
accomodates 6-12-24-48-96 multiwell plates. Condenser working distance: 21 mm
without the chamber riser and 26mm with the chamber riser
Micro environmental chamber for ASI stage accomodates 6, 12, 24, 48, 96 multiwell
plates. Condenser working distance: 20 mm without the chamber riser and 28 mm
with the chamber riser
Plate Adapters
W4 99-0295
W4 99-0660
W4 99-0680
W4 99-0692
W4 99-0926
W4 99-0710
W4 99-0691
W4 99-0661
H201-MEC-3GSPA
H201-MEC-1S2[57mm]GSPA
H201-MEC-GS35PA
H201-MEC-GS60PA
H201-MEC-35PA
H201-MEC-60PA
H201-MEC-6035PA
H201-MEC-PA-CUSTOM
Plate adapter for #3 standard chamber slides.
Plate adapter for #1 standard chamber slide and #2 57 mm chambered coverglass
Plate adapter for #2 standard chamber slides and #2 35 mm Petri-dish
Plate adapter for #1 standard chamber slide and #1 60 mm Petri-dish
Plate adapter for #4 35 mm Petri-dish
Plate adapter for #2 60 mm Petri-dish
Plate adapter for #1 60 mm Petri-dish and #2 35 mm Petri-dish
Customized plate adapter
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
W4 99-0658 H201-MEC-SLIM
MicroIncubation
Chambers
157
micro-incubators
NEW CO2 Microscope Cage Incubator Accessories
(continued)
Order #
Model
Product
Fixing Tools
W4 99-0825 TIPA
W4 99-0744 IC-VICE-TI-SR
W4 99-0742 SAMPA
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
158
Stage insert for Nikon Ti-S-E and Ti-S-ER Motorized XY stage
Tool to fix incubating chambers on Nikon T/Ti-SR XY stage
Stage Adapter that allows to use Okolab Chambers with bottom rectangular
shape 95 x 135 x 5 mm on T/Ti-SP Plain Stage equipped with T/Ti-SAM
Attachable Mechanical Stage
W4 99-0878 H201-MEC-PZ100
Micro environmental chamber for Prior NanoScan Z-stage NZ100 and NZ200
accommodates one 35 mm Petri-dish or one chamber slide
W4 99-0879 H201-MEC-MCLTi
Micro environmental chamber for Mad City Labs Nano-Z100-N Piezo stage on
Nikon TI-S-E XY stage
W4 99-0880 H201-MEC-LG
Micro environmental chamber Leica SP5 Galvo Stage
W4 99-0881 H201-MEC-LG-3GSPA
Plate adapter for #3 standard chamber slides
W4 99-0882 H201-MEC-LG-35PA
Plate adapter for #4 35mm Petri-dish
W4 99-0883 H201-MEC-LG-GS35PA
Plate adapter for #2 standard chamber slides and #2 35 mm Petri-dish
W4 99-0884 H201-MEC-LG-[57mm]GSPA
Plate adapter for #2 57 mm chambered coverglass
W4 99-0885 H201-MEC-LG-S35PA
Plate adapter for #1 35 mm Petri-dish
W4 99-0886 H201-MEC-LG-S60PA
Plate adapter for #1 60 mm Petri-dish
W4 99-0887 H201-MEC-FST
Micro Environmental chamber for mechanical flat XY stage with circular opening
(i.e. Nikon T/Ti-SR and T/Ti-SSR & Olympus IX2-SFR and IX2-SLV2) accomodates
6-12-24-48-96 multiwell plates. Condenser working distance: 22 mm without the
chamber riser and 27 mm with the chamber riser
W4 99-0888 H201-MEC-FST-35PA
Plate adapter for #2 35 mm Petri-dish. Circular bottom shape
W4 99-0889 H201-MEC-FST-GSPA
Plate adapter for #2 Standard Chamber Slides. Circular bottom shape
W4 99-0890 H201-MEC-FST-[57MM]GSPA
Plate adapter for #2 57 mm Chambered Coverglass, Circular bottom shape
W4 99-0891 H201-MEC-FST-S60PA
Plate adapter for #1 60 mm Petri-dish. Circular bottom shape
W4 99-0892 H201-MEC-FST-SI
External rectangular frame required to lock H201-MEC-FST on Nikon T/Ti-SR
and Ti-SSR and Olympus IX2-SFR and IX2-SLV2 XY stages
W4 99-0893 H201-MEC-MAN
Micro environmental chamber for Zeiss mechanical flat XY stages with Object Guide
130 x 85 and ObjectTraverser M. accomodates 6, 12, 24, 48, 96 multiwell plates
W4 99-0894 H201-MEC-MAN-35PA
Plate adapter for #2 35 mm Petri-dish
W4 99-0895 H201-MEC-UPRIGHT
Micro environmental chamber for upright microscopes. It allows to work both
with LD and immersion objectives, requires a plate adapter
W4 99-0896 H201-MEC-UPRIGHT-LID-F
Flat lid for long distance objectives
W4 99-0897 H201-MEC-UPRIGHT-LID-WIMM Lid for immersion objectives, two parts: one part rests on the main body,
the top one has an hole allowing objective insertion. The top part can slide on
the fixed part, allowing to move the H201-MEC-UPRIGHT
W4 99-0898 H201-MEC-UPRIGHT-LID-MM
Flat sliding lid Suitable to use H201-MEC-UPRIGHT along with MicroManipulators
W4 99-0899 H201-MEC-UPRIGHT-35PA
Plate adapter for #1 35 mm Petri-dish
W4 99-0900 H201-MEC-UPRIGHT-60PA
Plate adapter for #1 60 mm Petri-dish
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
Two Gas Mixer 2GF_Mixer
Two Gas Mixer
2GF_Mixer is a two gas mixer, it is generally used to generate CO2- Air
mixtures with an adjustable CO2 concentration in the range 0-15%.
2GF_Mixer can be used as a stand-alone device as well as in combination
with any kind of microscope incubator.
Air and CO2 flows are regulated by two floating ball flow meters in the
range 0.2 – 1.7 Nl/min and 0.013 – 0.13 Nl/min, respectively. As an
example, Table 1 reports a set of flow rates to obtain a concentration of
CO2 equal to 5%.
A more Comprehensive table is reported in the manual.
Second gas set point range
0-15%
Accuracy of second gas
concentration
±0.1%
Filtering device
Reusable PTFE membrane with
0.2 mm pores
Compatibility
Any microscope incubator
MicroIncubation
Specifications
•
•
•
•
Works with any brand microscope incubator
CO2 concentrations in the 0-15% range
Reusable PTFE membrane filter
Accessories:
- gas filter
- pressure gauge for CO2 with regulator
- two white rigid tubes of 6mm O.D. 3m long
- one blue rigid tube of 6mm O.D. 2 m long
(L x W x H)
220 x 128 x 178 mm
Weight
1.9 kg
micro-incubators
Physical Dimensions:
Air / CO2 flow rates to obtain a 5% CO2 mixture
Target Gas %
Gas flow rate values
to set (Nl/min)
Air
CO2 (%)
Air
CO2 (%)
Total
95.0
5.0
0.8
0.04
0.84
Order #
Model
W4 99-0484 2GF_Mixer
Product
Two Gas Mixer
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
159
micro-incubators
Digital Gas Mixer DGTCO2BX (-D-RS232)
5%, accuracy is ± 0.25%. DGTCO2BX can be used as a stand-alone
device as well as in combination with any kind of microscope incubator.
The air flow is regulated by a floating ball air flow meter in the range 0.2
to 0.8 Nl/min.
Sensing Technology
A CO2 infrared sensor continuously measures CO2 concentration in the
mixed gas stream and a PID closed loop controller gives feedback to a
fine valve regulating CO2 flow. The measured value of CO2 concentration
is displayed in real time in green. An alarm can be set on CO2
concentration so that if CO2 concentration goes below set value, the
display color turns red and a buzzer turns on.
Specifications
MicroIncubation
Sensing technology
Non dispersive infrared (NDIR) dual
wave length decator
CO2 Set Point value range
0-20%
Accuracy
±5% of CO2 concentration, i.e.
±0.25% if CO2 is 5%
Repeatability of CO2
micro-incubators
•
•
•
•
Works with any brand microscope incubator
CO2 concentrations in the 0-20% range
Stand alone or Software driven
Accessories:
- gas filter
- pressure gauge for CO2 with regulator
- two white rigid tubes of 6mm O.D. 3 m long
- one blue rigid tube of 6mm O.D. 2 m long
- RS232 serial cable (-D-RS232 version only)
- CD with control software (-D- RS232 version
only)
Concentration
Below 0.1%
Air flow rate
From 0.2–1.8 Nl/min
Filtering device
Reusable PTFE membrane with
0.2 mm pores
Digital interface (-D-RS232)
RS232 to PC
Communication Software
(-D- RS232)
Stand alone version and Plug-in
Version for all Okolab software
Compatibility
Any microscope incubator
Voltage/frequency
110-230 VAC 50-60 Hz
Physical Dimensions:
(L x W x H)
206 x 178 x 310 mm
Weight
3.5 kg
Order #
160
Model
Product
Digital Gas Mixer
W4 99-0486 DGT-CO2BX
The DGTCO2BX is a Digital Control Unit that generates a CO2-Air mixture
with an adjustable CO2 concentration in the range 0-20%, with an
accuracy of ± 5% of CO2 concentration, for example, if CO2 set point is
W4 99-0487 DGT-CO2BX (-D-RS232) Digital Gas Mixer
(stand alone with serial
cable and software)
Digital Gas Mixer
(stand alone)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
Digital Gas Mixer (Continued)
Performance Assessment
Fig. 2 CO2 concentration during 2-days experiments
micro-incubators
MicroIncubation
Figure 2 and 3 report CO2 concentration as a function of time in a fixed
set point value experiment (Figure 2) and in a step change experiment.
Fig. 3 CO2 concentration in step up and step down experiments
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
161
micro-incubators
DH-35
Culture Dish Heater
Deep heating for 35 mm culture dishes
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
DH-35 Culture Dish Heater work with Corning 35 mm tissue culture dishes
(Corning p/n 25000) and are designed for mounting on most microscopes.
The holder is machined in two pieces. The top half is easily removed
for replacement of dishes.
Dishes can be placed in the holder with or without dish covers. The
holder is supplied with two additional holder covers, one of which has
openings to allow for perfusion or insertion of probes or electrodes.
The base of the DH-35 has a 19 mm diameter aperture. Stage adapters
are available for many microscopes, see pages 64 to 69. The DH-35 is
used with the CC-28 Cable Assembly.
Corning P/h 2500 W4 65-0054 LU-PD Sleeve of plastic 35 mm dishes,
pkg of 20, see page 175.
Specifications
Height
14.7 mm
Base ø
79.3 mm
Well
4 mm depth
Order #
Base Height
6.3 mm overall
W4 64-0110 DH-35
Culture Dish Heater, 35 mm
W4 64-0106 CC-28
Cable Assembly for Heater
Platforms
W4 64-0350 AR-1
Adapter Ring for Willco Dish
Thermograph DH-35 with a Corning 35 mm Petri dish.
Model
Product
Popular Stage Adapter Microscopes
W4 64-0291 SA-NIK
Nikon Diaphot, TE200 & TE300
W4 64-0295 SA-OLY/2
Olympus IMT-2, IX & BX50WI
W4 64-0296 SA-20LZ
Zeiss Axiovert , Leica DMIRB
& DMIL
For other microscopes, please consult our technical support
department.
162
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
DH-35iL
micro-incubators
Micro-incubation System for 35mm Cell Culture Dishes
Complete environment on the microscope - New light weight for use in Z stages 105 grams
DH-35iL fully assembled
Heating
Elements
Suction
Outlet
Open setup for easy
access
Gas Port
Perfusion
Inlet
Dish
Clamps
Magnetic
stainless
steel
• Designed for glass bottom 35 mm dishes
• Permits imaging, temperature and gas
environment control
• Compatible with Corning, Falcon, MatTek, Nunc,
Willco Wells and WPI Dishes
• Unique dish clamps permit easy cell access
• Compatible with Warner’s RC-37 Cell Culture
Dish Perfusion Chamber Inserts
The introduction of glass bottomed 35 mm culture dishes extended their
use into areas such as confocal microscopy, fluorescence microscopy, and
high resolution image analysis. The DH-35iL Culture Dish Incubator is a
system designed for imaging live cells in an open culture dish (for easy
access) or in a closed dish (for gas atmosphere control).
DH-35iL Incubators work well with 35 mm culture dishes from all
suppliers. Adapter rings are supplied to ensure a close fit for the
supported dish. Dishes can be placed in the holder with or without dish
covers.
The holder is machined in three pieces. The midsection and top are easily
removed for dish replacement and enables the positioning of electrodes
at low angles. Resistive heating of the DH-35iL is provided via the
optional Warner TC-324B/TC-344B Temperature Controllers and a CC-28
cable. Clamps are provided to ensure good contact between the dish and
the heated surface and to prevent unwanted movement. The removable
midsection is magnetically secured and has several ports to allow multichannel perfusion, atmospheric maintenance, and aspiration of the dish.
The base of the holder has a 25 mm aperture and the removable cover
features a 36 mm glass aperture.* Included with the system are an MP-2
Perfusion Manifold and a set of 6 culture dish adapter rings.
micro-incubators
MicroIncubation
Adapter rings for Corning, Falcon, and
Willco 35 mm dishes
When combined with the Warner RC-37 Cell Culture Perfusion Chamber Insert,
a complete micro-environmental system is achieved, and this system is
compatible with Warner’s SH-27B and SF-28 In-line Solution Heaters.
Series 20 Stage adapters are available for all major microscopes. Custom
or modified stage adapters are also available; call our technical support
department for details. See pages 64 to 69 for Stage Adapters.
* Distance between bottom and top cover glass is 18.3 mm.
Order #
Model
W4 64-0349 DH-35iL
Product
Culture Dish Incubation System,
Includes Set of 6 Adapter Rings
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0351 AR-4
Retaining Clips, Magnetic Holders
MAG-1 and MAG-3, Wire Probe
Support, Lift Tool, PE-160/10 CFlex Tubing
W4 64-0100 TC-324B
Heater Controller,
Single Channel
W4 64-0101 TC-344B
Heater Controller, Dual Channel
W4 64-0106 CC-28
Cable Assembly for Heater
Platforms
W4 64-0102 SH-27B
In-line Solution Heater
W4 64-0103 SF-28
In-line Solution Heater
W4 64-1543 HSC-1
Heated Top Coverslip
W4 64-1544 HSC-RPL
Replacement ITO Coverslip
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
163
DH-40i
micro-incubators
Micro-Incubation System
Complete environment on the microscope
Permits imaging with perfusion, temperature and gas control
CFlex or
PE160
Perfusion & Suction
Tube Controls
Tygon Tubing
Heating
Elements
Suction
Outlet Tube
Perfusion
Inlet Tube
PE160
Chamber
Clamps
Exhaust
Ports (2)
Magnetic
Stainless Steel
Gas Port
MicroIncubation
Used as an open chamber with
35 mm dish insert
Adapter rings for Corning, Falcon, and Willco 35 mm dishes
Clamps
Suction Tube
Perfusion Tube
micro-incubators
Magnetic
Holders
Base 7.3 mm
height for Petri
dish approx.
6.0 mm deep
• Designed for RC-40 Quick Change Imaging
Chambers and 35 mm culture dishes
• Adapters for Willco Wells, Corning, Nunc, WPI,
MatTek and Falcon dishes
• Heated top coverslip (optional) eliminates
condensation when used as a closed chamber
• Accommodates upright and inverted microscopes
The DH-40i Micro-Incubator is a system designed for imaging live cells at
the required temperature and atmospheric conditions. This versatile
chamber is designed for high resolution image analysis, fluorescence
microscopy and time-lapse imaging studies.
Resistive heating of the DH-40i is provided by means of our TC-324B/
TC-344B Temperature Controllers and a CC-28 cable. Heating of perfusate
is achieved by our SH-27B or SF-28 In-line Solution Heaters.
The DH-40i chamber includes a set of 6 adapter rings, suction and
perfusion tubes, magnetic holders, clamps for RC-40 series chambers and
35 mm dishes, PE-160 tubing (10 ft.), 1/16" ID Tygon tubing (25 ft.), and
5 replacement 40 mm coverslips. See page 175 for replacement parts,
weighs 238.7 grams without ring and dish.
Series 20 Stage adapters are available for all major microscopes, see
pages 64 to 69. Custom or modified stage adapters are also available, call
our technical support department for details.
Order #
Model
Product
DH-40i incubators work with Warner RC-40 Quick Change Imaging
Chambers and 35 mm culture dishes. The removable top section of the
incubator is magnetically held in place and has several sealed ports to
allow perfusion, aspiration, and gas atmosphere maintenance. Perfusion
and suction tubes can be easily adjusted without disturbing the cell
environment. When used as an open bath chamber, magnetic holders are
supplied to allow entry of perfusion and suction tubes into Series 40
chambers and 35 mm dishes. Clamps are provided to insure good contact
between the chamber and the heated surface, and to prevent movement.
Adapter rings are supplied to insure a close fit for 35 mm culture dishes.
W4 64-0388 DH-40i
Culture Dish Incubation System
The base of the holder has a 25 mm diameter aperture and the removable
top section features a 40 mm glass aperture.* An optional heated top
coverslip eliminates condensation when used as a closed chamber.
W4 64-0103 SF-28
In-line Solution Heater
W4 64-1543 HSC-1
Heated Top Coverslip
W4 64-1544 HSC-RPL
Replacement ITO Coverslips
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-0351 AR-4
Replacement Adapter Ring Kit
set of 6
W4 64-0100 TC-324B
Heater Controller, Single Channel
W4 64-0101 TC-344B
Heater Controller, Dual Channel
W4 64-0106 CC-28
Cable Assembly for Heater
Platforms
W4 64-0102 SH-27B
In-line Solution Heater
* Distance between bottom and top cover glass is 18.3 mm.
164
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micro-incubators
Model TB-3 CCD
Thermal Insert for Prior Nano Z Stage
The Warner TB-3 CCD Thermal Insert is a versatile platform for cell
culture and tissue work on the NanoScanZ stage from Prior Scientific. It
is designed to work with Warner RC-40 quick change imaging chambers
and all 35 mm cell culture dishes. Precise temperature control of the
media is possible when used with our low noise CL-100 temperature
controller and heat exchanger (TCM-1, Thermal Cooling Module).
An integral water jacket is used to remove excess heat from the internal
Peltier device. Running water either from a tap or from Warner’s TCM-1
may be used.
Magnetic clamps hold cell culture dishes and quick change imaging
chambers securely in place. Magnetic stainless steel along the perimeter
of the platform allows for the use of included magnetic suction and
perfusion tube holders.
The TC-3 CCD is supplied with a 35 mm adapter ring kit, set of six, three
sets of magnetic clamps for holding Petri dishes, one humidifying cover,
one TA-29 bead thermistor, one MAG-3 magnetic holder for wires, one
perfusion tube with magnetic holder, one suction tube with magnetic
holder, four M-2 x 10 mm mounting screws for the Prior stage, 10 feet of
PE-160 tubing, 20 feet of 1/8” ID x 1/4” OD soft tubing, 50 feet of 1/16”
Tygon tubing, an allen wrench, and a lift tool.
While designed to fit the NanoScanZ stage, adapters are available for
other major microscope stages.
Specifications
Temperature Range
5° to 50°C
Accuracy
±0.1°C
Feedback Thermistor
Built in Unical 10kΩ at 25°C
Controller
CL-100 Bipolar Controller
Physical Dimensions:
Aperture Size (D x L)
Thermal Insert Size(D x L x H)
25.4 mm
64.0 x 92.2 x 10.5 mm
Weight
105 g
Cable Length
2.4 m
Connector Type
15 pin Male “D”
Water Jacket Ports
1/8” Barb Fittings
Warranty
One Year
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1636
TB-3 CCD
Thermal Insert for
35 mm Dishes
micro-incubators
• Designed for use with Prior Scientific NZ200CE
NanoScanZ Piezo Z stage
• Optimized for 35 mm culture dishes and Warner
RC-40 quick change imaging chambers
• Adapters for all major brand 35 mm dishes
• Temperature control from 5° to 50°C
• Magnetic stainless steel allows use of
magnetic holders
• Additional stage adapters available
MicroIncubation
Precise temperature control from 5º to 50º C in a compact design
Accessories / Replacement Parts
W4 64-0352
CL-100
Bipolar Temperature Controller
W4 64-1922
LCS-1
Liquid Cooling Sytem
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Cable with Bead Thermistor
W4 64-1404
PT-QE1
Perfusion Tube
W4 64-1553
MAG-6
Mini Magnetic Clamp for 18
gauge tube
W4 64-1403
ST-QE1
Suction Tube
W4 64-1554
MAG-7
Mini Magnetic Clamp for 16
gauge tube
W4 64-0297NZ SA-20KZnano Stage Adapter for the (K) stage
W4 64-0296NZ SA-20LZnano
Stage Adapter for the Zeiss
W4 64-0291NZ SA-NIKnano
Stage Adapter for the Nikon
108 Dia.
W4 64-0295NZ SA-OLY/2nano Stage Adapter for the Olympus
110 Dia.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
165
PDMI-2
micro-incubators
Open Perfusion Micro-Incubator
Complete environment on the microscope
PDMI-2
Micro-Incubator
W4 65-0047
MSC-PTD
Coverslip Dish
MSC-TD
Coverslip Dish
MicroIncubation
• Heats and cools from ~5° below ambient to 50°C
• Maintains pH, O2 and temperature using Peltier
technology
• Flexible chamber option
micro-incubators
The PDMI-2 operates equally well under static or perfused conditions.
When operated with perfusion, the Micro-Incubator’s unique design
places flexible tubes carrying inflowing perfusate in contact with a
temperature regulated Peltier driven plate, thus heating or cooling the
incoming fluid to a command temperature. This eliminates the need for
auxiliary preheating or cooling. The Peltier plate heats or cools the cell
carrying central chamber uniformly when no perfusate is flowing.
Flexible Temperature Range
The operating temperature range of the PDMI-2 Open Perfusion MicroIncubator is nominally ~5° below ambient to 50°C when used with the
TC-202A Temperature Controller; see page 113. Lower temperatures can
be achieved (approximately 10°C below ambient) by using an optional
cool water-carrying coil which attaches to the perimeter of the PDMI-2.
Temperatures stabilize quickly throughout the operating range and
temperature uniformity across the chamber is excellent.
Specifications
Chamber Options
Corning 35 mm Petri dishes, LU-CSD, MSC-TD
or MSC-PTD, LU-CSD Special
Recommended Gas Flow
0.5 to 2.0 L/min
Temperature Range
~5° to 10°C below ambient to 50°C
Temperature Stability
±0.2°C with TC-202A, at 37°C with 1 ml/min perfusion
Temperature Gradient
Across Chamber
2°C with 1.5 ml media volume,
1 ml/min perfusion
Built-In Temperature Sensor Thermistor, 100 kΩ at 25°C
Peltier Device Current Rating 6 A maximum
Media Perfusion Rates
Up to 3.0 ml/min
Overall Dimensions
17 x 152 mm (0.67 x 6.0 in), H x D
Weight
0.5 kg (17.9 oz)
Microscope Stage Mounting Call for options
Chambers:
Cover Slips
25 mm D thickness #1 or 2
Overall Dimensions
LU-CSD/MSC-TD: 19 mm D round optical window
MSC-PTD: 9.5 x 19 mm (WxL) slotted optical window
Weight
17 g (0.6 oz)
Dish Materials
Teflon® and stainless steel
Optimal and Flexible Perfusion
Order #
Two temperature controlled perfusion lines deliver perfusates through
the Micro-Incubator into the chamber at a nominal rate of 3 ml per minute
each. Fluid level is maintained by placing an aspirator (model LU-ASP)
in the chamber. Fluid height is easily adjusted via a simple screw
mechanism; a cleverly designed suction port eliminates fluid flutter
making aspiration quiet; a magnetic base secures the aspirator to
the Micro-Incubator at a user selectable convenient location.
W4 65-0043 PDMI-2
Open Perfusion
Micro-Incubator, comes with
LU-PD and LU-ASP (Stage Adapter
not included, see page 175)
W4 65-0058
Copper Cooling Tube for PDMI-2
Model
Micro-incubator Chambers
W4 65-0049 LU-CSD-S
Leiden Multi Well Cover Slip
Dish; Special 35 mm D Teflon Dish with two
(2) kidney-shaped inner optical window
wells, approx. 15 x 8 mm (L x W) (max.) and
one (1) 31.50 mm D surrounding well
W4 65-0050 MSC-PTDS
Teflon Glass Cover Slip Dish;
35 mm D, 9.5 x 19 mm (W x L)
rectangular optical window, rounded at
each end; low volume (less than 1 ml),
fast fluid transfer and maximum mixing
W4 65-0051 MSC-TD
Teflon Glass Cover Slip Dish;
35 mm D with Removable Handle,
19 mm D optical window, 31.50 mm D
working area, 1 ml approx. fluid volume
Excellent pH Control
The PDMI-2 also provides gas flow over the top of the chamber for
pH control and improved temperature uniformity. The open design
provides excellent mechanical and optical access to the media.
166
Product
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
PSMI
micro-incubators
Patch Slice Micro-Incubator
Complete micro-environment for patch clamp on the microscope
Specifications
Chamber Type
PS-CSD Cover Slip Dish
Temperature Stability
±0.2°C with TC-202A, at 37°C with
1 ml/min perfusion
Temperature Gradient
Across chamber: 2°C with 1.5 ml media
volume, 1 ml/min
Temperature Range
5-10°C below ambient to 50°C
Built In Temp. Sensor
Thermistor type: 100 kΩ at 25°C
Peltier Device
Current rating: 6 A max
Media Perfusion Rates
Up to 3.0 ml/min
Dimensions, H x Dia
17 x 152 mm (0.67 x 6.0 in), overall
Weight
0.5 kg (17.9 oz)
• Small entry angles ideal for patch slice
recordings
• Shallow fluid level minimizes pipette capacitance
• Heats and cools from ~5° below ambient to 50°C
• Peltier heat pump maintains cell conditions
for hours
Model
Product
W4 65-0044 PSMI
Patch Slice Micro-Incubator
with PS-CSD
W4 65-0109
Copper Cooling Tube for PSMI
W4 65-0053 PS-CSD
Patch Slice Cover Slip Dish for
PSMI
W4 65-0052 MI-M
Mini Magnets for Top Surface
of Micro-Incubators
(LU-CB-1, PDMI-2 or PSMI), set of 4
The Patch Slice Micro-Incubator System provides a complete solution to
the challenge of electrophysiological study of synaptic connections at
physiological temperatures. Low noise whole cell patch recording, with
or without water immersion of the microscope objective in the recording
medium, are possible with the PSMI.
MicroIncubation
Order #
micro-incubators
PSMI Micro-Incubator
This Micro-Incubator is a shallow, annular assembly which surrounds the
central slice holding dish. Room temperature perfusant is delivered to
the incubator which in turn delivers it to the dish at a precisely controlled
temperature you select. The perfusant is removed (via user supplied
suction) by an included, height adjustable aspirator (LU-ASP). Two
independent perfusant channels flow through the PSMI into the chamber
via replaceable plastic tubing (of low volumes <100 µl) to allow rapid
switching of media via an upstream valve for pharmacological studies.
A separate inlet provides temperature controlled gas delivery across
the dish.
The TC-202A provides temperature control (~5° below ambient to 50°C)
using the Micro-Incubator warming/cooling plate as the control point.
Lower temperatures (approximately 10°C below ambient) may be
obtained by using an optional cooling tube. The cover slip dish (PS-CSD)
consists of two 22 mm diameter cover slips held in a circular frame. The
slice sits on the top cover slip with the immersion objective reaching the
fluid surface. The bottom cover slip prevents condensation for optimal
illumination and viewing. To enable placement of the patch electrode,
entry angles as small as 15° can be achieved for slice access.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
167
micro-incubators
Model TB-3 CS
Thermal Insert for Prior Nano Z Stage
Temperature control from 5º to 50º C in a compact design
Heating and Cooling using Peltier
Technology
Complete system with CL-100
Temperature Controller and TCM-1
Thermal Cooling Module
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
• Designed for use with Prior Scientific NZ200CE
NanoScanZ Piezo Z stage
• Optimized for rectangular chambered slides and
chambered coverglass
• Can accept up to 1 x 3" slides
• Temperature control from 5° to 50°C
• Magnetic stainless steel allows use of magnetic
holders
• Additional stage adapters available
Temperature Range
5° to 50°C
Accuracy
±0.1°C
Feedback Thermistor
Built in Unical 10kΩ at 25°C
Controller
CL-100 Bipolar Controller
Physical Dimensions:
Aperture Size (D x L)
21.5 x 52.3 mm
Thermal Insert Size
(D x L x H)
64.0 x 92.2 x 10.5 mm
Weight
105 g
Cable Length
2.4 m
Connector Type
15 pin Male “D”
The Warner TB-3 CS Thermal Insert is a versatile platform for cell/tissue
culture work on the NanoScanZ stage from Prior Scientific. It is designed
to accommodate rectangular chambered slides and coverglass from
several manufactures. Slides up to 1x3" can be used.
Water Jacket Ports
1/8" Barb Fittings
Warranty
One Year
Order #
Model
Product
Precise temperature control of the media is possible when used with our
low noise CL-100 temperature controller and heat exchanger (TCM-1,
Thermal Cooling Module).
W4 64-1632
TB-3 CS
Thermal Insert
W4 64-0352
CL-100
Bipolar Temperature Controller
An integral water jacket is used to remove excess heat from the internal
Peltier device. Running water either from a tap or from Warner’s TCM-1
may be used.
W4 64-1922
LCS-1
Liquid Cooling Sytem
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Cable with Bead Thermistor
W4 64-1404
PT-QE1
Perfusion Tube
W4 64-1553
MAG-6
Mini Magnetic Clamp
for 18 Gauge Tube
W4 64-1403
ST-QE1
Suction Tube
W4 64-1554
MAG-7
Mini Magnetic Clamp
for 16 Gauge Tube
Thermal Insert for Prior Nano Z Stage
Magnetic clamps hold slides and chambered coverglasses securely in
place. Magnetic stainless steel along the perimeter of the platform allow
the use of magnetic tools.
The TC-3CS is supplied with two “L” shaped chambered slide holding
brackets, two chambered slide hold-down clamps, one TA-29 bead
thermistor, one MAG-3 magnetic holder for wires, four M-2 x 10 mm
mounting screws for the Prior stage, 20 feet of 1/8" ID x 1/4" OD soft
tubing, an allen wrench, and lift tool.
Optional magnetic holders for perfusion and suction tubes allow perfusion
in the wells. Stage adapters are available for several major microscopes
in addition to the NanoScanZ stage.
168
Specifications
Accessories/Replacement Parts
W4 64-0297NZ SA-20KZnano Stage Adapter for the (K) Stage
W4 64-0296NZ SA-20LZnano Stage Adapter for the Zeiss
W4 64-0291NZ SA-NIKnano Stage Adapter for the
Nikon 108 Dia.
W4 64-0295NZ SA-OLY/2nano Stage Adapter for the
Olympus 110 Dia.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
CSH-1
micro-incubators
Heated Platform for Chambered Slides and 1" x 3" Slides
A specially designed, heated chamber for 1x3 inch slides
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1592 CSH-1
Heated base for chamber slides
W4 64-0100 TC-324B
Single Channel Heater
Controller
W4 64-0101 TC-344B
Dual Channel Heater Controller
W4 64-0106 CC-28
Cable Assembly for Heater
Platforms
W4 64-0102 SH-27B
In-line Solution Heater
Rectangular Slide Heated Platform
W4 64-0103 SF-28
In-line Solution Heater
The Warner CHS-1 heated platform is a versatile base for many popular
disposable glass slides and chambered coverglasses.
W4 64-0360 MAG-3
Magnetic Clamp
MicroIncubation
• Open design for easy cell access
• Ideal for use with chambered coverglass
• Magnetic stainless steel platforms allow use
of magnetic holders
• Stage Adapters permit mounting on all major
microscopes
Clamps hold slide securely in platform
micro-incubators
Open low profile platform for easy cell access
The platform is at home on both upright and inverted microscopes and
includes resistive heating elements. Magnetic stainless steel along the
perimeter of the CHS-1 permits the use of Warner’s MAG-3 magnetic
clamps. The base has a 21.5 x 52.3 mm viewing aperture.
The MAG-3 clamps are equipped with an adjustable arm that can be
used to bring perfusion and aspiration lines into the chamber.
Control of CSH-1 resistive heating is provided via our TC-324B/TC-344B
Temperature Controllers and a CC-28 cable. Heating of perfusate is
achieved using our SH-27B or SF-28 In-line Solution Heaters.
Stage adapters are available, see page 64 for all major microscopes.
The CSH-1 uses the Series 30 stage adapters. Custom or modified stage
adapters are also available. Call our Technical Support Department
for details.
Each chamber includes 2 special version MAG-3 magnetic clamps with
adjustable wire arms.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
169
CSMI
micro-incubators
Microscope Stage Incubator
A versatile microscope-stage incubator for cell/tissue culture work on chambered glass slides
CSMI Micro-Incubator
Specifications
Temperature Range
~5° to 10°C below ambient to 50°C
Disposable Chambers
Accommodated
• Nalge Nunc chambered slides & cover slips
• Becton Dickinson Falcon chambered slides
Microscopes
Accommodated
• Zeiss Axiovert with attachable
mechanical stage
• Leica DAS Microscope DMIL and
DMIRB/E with attached mechanical stage
• Nikon Diaphot
• Olympus IX50/70 or IMT-2 fixed stage
Peltier TED Current Rating 6 A DC max
Built In Plate Thermistor
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
• Ideal for use with rectangular chambered slides
and chambered coverglass
• Controls pH, temperature, perfusion and gas
atmosphere
• Uses Peltier heat pump; heats and cools from
~5° below ambient to 50°C
• Accommodates up to 4 perfusion lines
• Unique aspirator for perfusate removal
The CSMI is a versatile microscope stage-incubator for cell/tissue culture
work. It is designed to accommodate disposable rectangular Chamber
Slides™ and Chambered Coverglass from the Nunc Lab-Tek® series, and
the Falcon® Culture slide series from Beckton Dickinson.
100 kΩ at 25°C
Perfusion Inlet Lines
26 AWG Teflon capillary up to 4 lines
can be installed simultaneously
Perfusion Rate
3 ml/min nominal total
Perfusate Outlet
LU-ASP aspirator
Gas Port
1/16 in. barb
Gas Superfusion Rate
0.5 to 2.0 L/min
Weight
17.9 oz (0.5 kg)
Overall Dimensions
6.5 x 4 x 1 in (16.5 x 10.2 x 2.5 cm)
Order #
Model
Product
W4 65-0101 CSMI
Chambered Slide
Micro-Incubator
W4 65-0102 CSMI
Chambered Slide
Micro-Incubator Special
Design Version for 3 Plate
Mechanical Stages
W4 65-0045 TC-202A
Bipolar Temperature Controller
W4 65-0103 –
Copper Cooling Tube for CSMI
W4 65-0052 MI-M
Mini Magnets for Top Surface
of Micro-Incubators (LU-CB-1,
PDMI-2 or PSMI), set of 4
The CSMI, in combination with a matching low noise TC-202A temperature
controller, facilitates long term maintenance of tissue or cell cultures on a
microscope stage. This allows optical monitoring of dyes, micro-injection,
electrical recording, and micro-manipulation for many hours or even days.
The CSMI not only facilitates the precise regulation and manipulation
of bath temperature, but also supports multi-channel perfusion (up to
4 lines), gas atmosphere maintenance, and CO2 superfusion for pH control.
The CSMI is based on a successful design of the Medical Systems PDMI-2
Micro-Incubator for 35 mm Petri dishes. The CSMI utilizes Peltier
technology to regulate temperature over a wide range of temperatures,
both above and below ambient levels. Lower temperatures (approximately
10°C below ambient) may be obtained by using an optional cooling tube.
The CSMI fits on the stage of inverted microscopes from major
microscope manufacturers including Zeiss, Nikon, Olympus and Leica.
Harvard Apparatus offers custom-made rectangular adapters for these
microscopes.
170
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Accessories
micro-incubators
for PDMI-2, PSMI, CSMI and Leiden Chambers
Zeiss Fixing Platform
Zeiss, Nikon
and Olympus
Alignment Rings
Order #
Model
Product
Alignment Ring for Leica Microscope, 88 x 1.8 mm (OD x Thickness)
W4 65-0059 PDMI-ARN
PDMI-2/PSMI Alignment Ring for Nikon Diaphot (Old or 300/200) TMD Stage, 4.242 x .071 in (D x Thickness)
W4 65-0060 PDMI-ARO
PDMI-2/PSMI Alignment Ring for Olympus IX50/70 or IMT-2 Fixed Stage, 4.320 x .071 in (D x Thickness)
W4 65-0061 PDMI-ARZ
PDMI-2/PSMI Alignment Ring for Zeiss Axiovert Gliding or Rotary Stages, 4.046 x .071 in (D x Thickness)
W4 65-0062 PDMI-FPL
PDMI-2/PSMI Fixing Platform for Leica DAS Mikroskop DMIL and DMIRB/E w/Attachable Mechanical Stage
W4 65-0063 PDMI-FPZ
PDMI-2/PSMI Fixing Platform for Zeiss Axiovert with Attachable Mechanical Stage, M-Type Stage
W4 65-0058 PDMI-TUBE
PDMI-2 Copper Cooling Tube Coil (Shaped to Conform to Fin Channel) with Open Ends
W4 65-0064 LU-FPL
LU-CB-1 Fixing Platform for Leica DAS Mikroskop DMIL and DMIRB/E with Attachable Mechanical Stage
W4 65-0065 LU-FPZ
LU-CB-1 Fixing Platform for Zeiss Axiovert with Attachable Mechanical Stage, M-Type Stage
Miscellaneous
W4 65-0047 LU-ASP
Leiden Aspirator, Cover Slip Dish Fluid Level Setting Device, 38 mm H
W4 65-0052 MI-M
Mini Magnets for Top Surface of Micro-Incubators (LU-CB-1, PDMI-2 or PSMI), set of 4
W4 65-0053 PS-CSD
Patch Slice Cover Slip Dish for PSMI
W4 65-0054 LU-PD
Sleeve of Plastic 35 mm Petri Dishes, pkg. of 20
W4 65-0055 BSC-TH
Magnetic Thermistor Holder for LU-CB-1
micro-incubators
W4 65-0093 PDMI-ARL
MicroIncubation
Alignment Rings and Fixing Platforms
Thermistors
W4 65-0057 BSC-T3
Bath Thermistor for Use with PDMI-2, PSMI, LU-CB1, and TC-202A
W4 65-0056 BSC-T3A
Bath Thermistor for Use with LU-CPC-CEH and TC-202A
W4 65-0098 BSC-T2
Replacement-Bath Thermistor for Obsolete TC-102
W4 65-0016 BSC-T2A
Replacement-Bath Thermistor for Use with LU-CPC-CEH and TC-102
Micro-Incubator Replacement Parts
W4 65-0066 D-ORING-1
Cover Slip Dish O-Rings Replacement for LU-CSD or MSC-TD, 1 Small (approx. 23.80 mm OD)
and 1 Large (approx. 29.80 mm OD), set of 2
W4 65-0067 D-ORING-2
Cover Slip Dish O-Rings, Replacement for MSC-PTD, 1 Small (approx. 20.80 mm OD) and
1 Large (approx. 29.80 mm OD), set of 2
W4 64-0705 CS-25R
Cover Glass 25 mm round thickness #1, pkg. of 100
W4 65-0069 CS-GLASS-2
Glass Cover Slips (#2) for LU-CSD or MSC-PTD, 0.18 to 0.25 x 25 mm (Thickness x D), pkg. of 100
W4 65-0070 MI-T
Perfusion/Aspiration Teflon Tubing Replacements for PDMI-2/PSMI, 2 ft L x 26 AWG, pkg. of 8
W4 65-0071 LU-CPC-P
Silicone Rubber Plugs for LU-CPC or LU-CPC-CEH, set of 4
W4 65-0072 TC-CA
Replacement Output Cable to Connect TC-102 Temperature Controller to LU-CB-1 or LU-CPC-CEH
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
171
micro-incubators
QE-1
Quick Exchange Heated Platform with Perfusion for 35 mm dish format
Ideal for imaging and electrophysiology applications
QE-1 shown with
RC-42LP Chamber
QE-1 with Series 40 Chamber
and Stage Adapter
Perfusion
Tube
Suction
Tube
Heating
Elements
Open low profile platform for easy cell access
MicroIncubation
micro-incubators
• Open design for easy cell access
• Removable perfusion and suction tube holders
• Designed for 35 mm dishes and Series 40
chambers
• Quick exchange of chamber or 35 mm dish
• Magnetic stainless steel allows for the use of
magnetic holders
The QE-1 Quick Exchange Platform is a versatile base for the RC-40 Series
chambers, as well as many popular 35 mm glass bottom dishes. The
platform is at home on both upright and inverted microscopes and
includes resistive heating elements. The base has a 25 mm diameter
aperture. Magnetic stainless steel along the perimeter of the QE-1
permits the use of Warner’s MC-1 Magnetic Clamp Kit, which includes
a variety of holding tools.
Removable perfusion and suction tubes allow perfusion in any of the
RC-40 Imaging Chambers or 35 mm dishes. Suction and perfusion tubes
also feature set-screw locks for the horizontal location, and adjustable
presets on the vertical for setting the bath height. These adjustments
permit easy and exact positioning/repositioning of the suction and
perfusion tubes. A redesigned suction tube eliminates tidal action and
fluid flutter, making aspiration very quiet.
Adapter Rings for Corning,
MatTek, Falcon, Nunc, Willco
and WPI 35 mm Dishes
QE-1 with Adapter Ring and
Dish
Order #
Model
W4 64-0375 QE-1
Product
Quick Exchange Heated Base
with Perfusion and Adapter Ring Kit
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-1404 PT-QE1
Perfusion Tube for QE-1
W4 64-1403 ST-QE1
Tube Suction Micro-Slit Design
for QE-1
W4 64-0103 SF-28
Slow Flow Solution Heater
Adapter rings are supplied for Corning, Falcon, Nunc, WPI, MatTek and
Willco 35 mm dishes to ensure a close fit within the QE-1.
W4 64-0351 AR-4
Replacement Adapter Ring Kit
for 35 mm Dishes
Series 20 stage adapters are available for all major microscopes. Custom
or modified stage adapters are also available; call our Technical Support
Department for details or see pages 64 to 69.
W4 64-0100 TC-324B
Single Channel Heater Controller
The QE-1 includes 10 ft. of PE-160 polyethylene tubing and adapter rings
for a variety of 35 mm culture dishes.
Resistive heating of the QE-1 is provided by means of our TC-324B/TC-344B
Temperature Controllers and a CC-28 Cable. Heating of perfusate is
achieved using our SH-27B or SF-28 In-line Solution Heaters.
W4 64-0101 TC-344B
Dual Channel Heater Controller
W4 64-0106 CC-28
Cable Assembly for Heater Platforms
W4 64-0102 SH-27B
Solution Heater
W4 64-0357 MCK-1
Magnetic Clamp Kit
* QE-1 weight without stage adapter 134 g.
172
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
culture dish platforms
QE-1HC
Quick Exchange Heated / Cooled Platform for 35 mm Petri Dishes
Temperature control from 5º to 50º C for the Leica Galvo Z stages
• Designed for use with 35 mm Petri dishes and
Series 40 quick change imaging chambers
• Open design for easy cell access
• Dish adapters for all major brand 35 mm dishes
• Temperature control from 5° to 50°C
• Magnetic suction and perfusion tube holders
• Magnetic dish clamps
• Available stage adapters for all microscopes
The Warner QE-1HC is designed to work with Warner RC-40 quick
change imaging chambers and all 35 mm cell culture dishes. Precise
temperature control of the media is possible when combined with our low
noise CL-100 temperature controller and TCM-1 Thermal Cooling Module
(heat exchanger). An integral water jacket is used to remove excess heat
from the internal Peltier device.
Magnetic clamps hold cell culture dishes and quick change imaging
chambers securely in place. Magnetic stainless steel along the perimeter
of the platform allows for the use of included magnetic suction and
perfusion tube holders (included).
Specifications
Temperature Range
5° to 50°C
Accuracy
±0.1°C
Feedback Thermistor
Built in Unical 10kΩ at 25°C
Controller
CL-100 Bipolar Controller
Physical Dimensions:
Aperture Size (D x L)
25.4 mm
Thermal Insert Size
(D x L x H)
64.0 x 92.2 x 10.5 mm
Weight
105 g
Cable Length
2.4 m
Connector Type
15 pin Male “D”
Water Jacket Ports
1/8" Barb Fittings
Warranty
One Year
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1659
QE-1HC
Quick Exchange Stage Incubator
W4 64-0352
CL-100
Bipolar Temperature Controller
W4 64-1922 LCS-1
culture dish platforms
Complete system with CL-100
Temperature Controller and TCM-1
Thermal Cooling Module
MicroIncubation
Shown with glass
bottom 35 mm cell
culture dish
Liquid Cooling Sytem
Fits Series 20 stage adapters. All major microscope stages are
accomodated. Custom or modified stage adapters are also available; call
our Technical Support Department for details or see visit our website.
Accessories/Replacement Parts
The QE-1HC is supplied with a 35 mm adapter ring kit, set of six, three
sets of magnetic clamps for holding Petri dishes, one humidifying cover,
one TA-29 bead thermistor, one MAG-3 magnetic holder for wires, one
perfusion tube with magnetic holder, one suction tube with magnetic
holder, 10 feet of PE-160 tubing, 20 feet of 1/8" ID x 1/4" OD soft tubing,
50 feet of 1/16” Tygon tubing, and a lift tool.
W4 64-0297
SA-20KZ
Stage Adapter for the (K) sSage
W4 64-0296
SA-20LZ
Stage Adapter for the Zeiss
W4 64-0291
SA-NIK
Stage Adapter for the Nikon 108 Dia.
W4 64-0295
SA-OLY/2
Stage Adapter for the Olympus 110 Dia.
W4 64-0107
TA-29
Cable with Bead Thermistor
W4 64-1404
PT-QE1
Perfusion Tube
W4 64-1553
MAG-6
Mini Magnetic Clamp for 18 Gauge Tube
W4 64-1403
ST-QE1
Suction Tube
W4 64-1554
MAG-7
Mini Magnetic Clamp for 16 Gauge Tube
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
173
culture dish platforms
QE-2
Quick Exchange Heated Platform with Perfusion for 50 mm dish format
The QE-1 in a 50 mm culture dish format
QE-2 shown with
Willco Wells 50 mm
glass bottom dish
RC-61 Series
50 mm disposable
chamber inserts
Open low profile platform for
easy cell access
MicroIncubation
culture dish platforms
• Designed for 50 and 60 mm culture dishes
• Removable perfusion and suction tube holders
• Open design for easy cell access
• Adapters for Willco Wells, Corning, Nunc,
and Falcon dishes
• Magnetic stainless steel perimeter allows
use of magnetic holders
Order #
Model
W4 64-1542 QE-2
Product
Quick Exchange Heated Base
with Perfusion and Adapter
Ring Kit
Accessories and Replacement Parts
W4 64-1403 ST-QE1
Tube Suction Micro-Slit Design
for QE-1
W4 64-0100 TC-324B
Single Channel Heater
Controller
The Warner QE-2 Quick Exchange Platform is a versatile base for many
popular 50 and 60 mm glass bottom and plastic dishes. The platform is
at home on both upright and inverted microscopes and includes resistive
heating elements. The base has a 36 mm diameter aperture. Magnetic
stainless steel along the perimeter of the QE-2 facilitates use of Warner’s
MC-1 Magnetic Clamp Kit, which includes a variety of holding tools.
W4 64-0101 TC-344B
Dual Channel Heater
Controller
W4 64-0106 CC-28
Cable Assembly for
Heater Platforms
Suction and perfusion tube holders are slotted and allow easy adjustment
of the vertical position for setting the bath height. A specially designed
suction tube eliminates tidal action and fluid flutter, making aspiration very
quiet and even. Drop in one of Warner’s RC-61 Series of 50 mm disposable
chamber inserts and turn your dish into a low cost perfusion chamber.
W4 64-0102 SH-27B
Solution Heater
W4 64-0357 MCK-1
Magnetic Clamp Kit
W4 64-0760 D5040P
Glass Bottom Willco 50 mm
Dishes, pack of 20
Resistive heating of the QE-2 is provided by means of our TC-324B/TC-344B
temperature controllers and a CC-28 cable. Heating of perfusate is
achieved using our SH-27B or SF-28 In-line Solution Heaters.
Adapter rings for Corning, Falcon, Nunc and Willco 50 mm dishes are
supplied. The following tissue culture dishes are supported:
Corning (p/n 25060, 60 x 15 mm), Falcon (p/n 351006, 50 x 9 mm),
Nunc (p/n 150326, 60 x 15 mm), and Willco (D5030 and D5040).
Stage adapters are available for all major microscopes. The QE-2 uses the
Series 30 stage adapters, see page 64. Custom or modified stage
adapters are also available. Call our Technical Support Department for
details.
174
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
accessories
Adapter Rings, Coverslips and Culture Dishes
Accessories and Replacement Parts for Warner Micro-incubation Chambers
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0350 AR-1
Adapter Ring for DH-35 and
Willco Dish
W4 64-1455 AR-2
Adapter Ring for AttoFluor® cell
chamber in DH-35i/QE-1
W4 64-0351 AR-4
Adapter Ring Kit, set of 6, for
Willco, Corning, Nunc, WPI, MatTek
and Falcon Dishes
W4 64-1507 RPC-2
Replacement Clamps for
DH-35i/DH-40i/QE-1
W4 64-1500 CS-40R
Cover Glass, 40 mm round, #1.0
thickness, 60 pc.
Heated Top Coverslip for DH-35i and DH-40i Chambers
DH-40i with heated coverslip
HSC-1
Developed for use in our DH-35i and DH-40i Micro-incubation chambers,
this heated coverslip assembly replaces the 40 mm coverslip normally supplied
with these chambers. Once installed, the HCS-1 eliminates condensation
which occurs when these chambers are used in the closed mode.
The heated coverslip derives its power from the heated base of the DH-35i or
DH-40i chamber and does not require an additional temperature controller.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1543 HCS-1
Heated Top Coverslip
W4 64-1544 HCS-RPL
Replacement ITO Coverslip
MicroIncubation
RPC-2
accessories
AR-4
Glass Bottom Cell Culture Dishes (35 and 50 mm), #1.5 Thickness (0.17 mm)
• Highest quality
construction, sterilized
• #1.5 Cover glass for
microscope imaging
• Glass fully covers
bottom
• Compatible with all
Warner Dish Heaters
Glass Bottom Cell Culture Dishes
High quality polystyrene dishes with No. 1.5 cover glass bottoms are
available in 35 mm and 50 mm diameters, available both in pouch packs
(20/pouch) and individual blister packs (120/case). All dishes are sterilized
before packaging.
Order #
Model
Product
Pouch-Pack Dishes, 20 sterilized dishes/pouch
W4 64-0757 D3512P
35 x 9.9 mm, 12 mm Well Diameter
W4 64-0758 D3522P
35 x 9.9 mm, 22 mm Well Diameter
W4 64-0759 D5030P
50 x 7.2 mm, 30 mm Well Diameter
W4 64-0760 D5040P
50 x 7.2 mm, 40 mm Well Diameter
Blister-Pack Dishes, individual packaged sterile dishes,
case of 120
W4 64-0762 D3522B
35 x 9.9 mm, 22 mm Well Diameter
W4 64-0763 D5030B
50 x 7.2 mm, 30 mm Well Diameter
Note: 35 mm dishes supplied with triple vented lids for optimum ventilation.
50 mm dishes have low side walls to facilitate microinjection.
50 mm dishes are 7 mm in height.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
175
superfusion
Brain/Tissue Slice Chamber System
Sensitive recordings without electrical interference
Submerged or interfacial chambers for the in vitro study of tissue slices
BSC-BU Base Unit with
BSC-HT Haas Top (interface
chamber) and TC-202A
Temperature Controller
• Maintains brain slices
for 10 hours or more
on the bench-top
• Modular design
accommodates
submersible or
interface chambers
• Over 20 years of use
in leading labs
This unique and versatile Brain/Tissue Slice Chamber System offers the
investigator two in vitro methods of studying a thin tissue slice bathed by
perfusates of interest.
MicroIncubation
The BSC-HT (Haas Top) is an interface-type chamber in which one surface
of the slice is wet by a perfusing solution while the other surface is kept
moist by a humidified gas mixture. The BSC-ZT (Zbicz Top) is a
submersion- type chamber in which solution flow is transverse to fully
superfusion
BSC-BU
Base Unit
BSC-BU Base Unit
The function of the Base Unit
is to warm the superfusing
solution. The BSC-BU consists
of a double walled cylinder
which is filled with distilled
water and encloses a nichrome
heating element. The cavity also contains two separate sets of PVC
tubing which can transport one or two superfusing solutions to the slice
chamber. The base unit holds an aerator to humidify vapor when the Haas
Top is employed.
submerged slices. Each top allows rapid solution replacement, and both
provide excellent access to slices for electrophysiological recording or
other observations.
Designed by Experts
Over twenty years ago, Drs. Haas and Zbicz, two leading
electrophysiologists, designed these chambers for use in their own
research.
No Electrical Interference
Low noise temperature controllers (TC-324B, TC-344B, TC-202A) ensure
even the most sensitive electrophysiologic recordings (such as single
channel patch clamping) can be made from slices without electrical
interference.
Convenient
Temperature regulated perfusion lines are built in for rapid changeover of
superfusing fluids without the need for an external temperature regulated
perfusate supply tank.
Components
All components must be purchased individually. See ordering information
on the following pages.
Specifications
Dimensions, L x W x H
114.6 x 139.4 x 111.1 mm
(4.5 x 5.4 x 4.3 in)
Weight
618 g (1 lb 5.8 oz)
Order #
Model
Product
W4 65-0073 BSC-BU
Base Unit
W4 65-0088 BSC-ACC-KIT Base Unit, Haas & Zbicz
Tops Accessory Kit (Replacement
Screws, Fittings and Mesh)
The BSC-BU is mounted on legs which suspend the heating cylinder. This
prevents the thermal expansion of the heating cylinder from moving the
top unit and slice during temperature changes. The BSC-BU is specifically
designed to accept both the BSC-HT and the BSC-ZT top units, providing
economy and versatility. Includes connecting cable six pin DIN to Banana.
BSC-PC Prechamber
BSC-PC Prechamber
The BSC-PC chamber allows
several (10 to 12) brain slices to
be stored in vitro for several hours
while maintaining excellent
viability. A mixture of 95:5% O2:CO2
is bubbled through physiological
saline. This initiates a circular
Insert
flow, and oxygen enriched saline
continuously permeates the slices. Slices remain viable for hours while
awaiting transfer to an examining chamber. Gas flow pressure should not
exceed 5 p.s.i. 1 insert included with prechamber.
176
Specifications
Dimensions, L x W x H
112.6 x 48.9 x 95.4 mm
(4.4 x 1.9 x 3.7 in)
Weight
362 g (12.8 oz)
Internal Dimensions
OD
ID
1.5 in
1.25 in
1.13 in
38.1 mm
31.75 mm
28.7 mm
Order #
Model
L
Product
W4 65-0076 BSC-PC
Prechamber (for holding slices)
W4 65-0608
Insert for BSC-PC Prechamber
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
superfusion
Brain/Tissue Slice Chamber System (continued)
BSC-ZT Zbicz Top
The BSC-HT Haas Top is an
interface-type chamber utilizing
semi-submersion principles. It
provides for rapid exchange of
superfusing fluids and excellent
stability for intracellular recording.
Slices rest on a nylon mesh below
which a thin sheet of the perfusate
of interest flows. The bottom side of the slice is wet by capillary action as
solution saturates the mesh. Slices are oxygenated by a warmed,
humidified mixture of 95% O2/5% CO2 which flows across the top surface
of the slice. The BSC-HT has been designed such that, if desired, one can
study the effects of two drugs simultaneously. One drug flows down the
left portion of the chamber and the second down the right.
The BSC-ZT Zbicz Top is a
submersion type chamber in which
tissue slices are supported on a
stiff nylon mesh. The perfusate
flows transversely across both cut
surfaces. The steady flow of
warmed media across the cut
surfaces of the slice is sufficient to
keep many tissues alive and responsive for 10 hours or more. The fluid
level is set to 1 mm above the mesh by a dam at the end of the chamber.
The chamber is 6 mm wide and the trough is 24 mm long; this provides
adequate room for slices and instrumentation, yet minimizes the well
volume to optimize drug exchange times. Fluid overflowing the dam is
drained to waste via vacuum.
Laboratory results confirm a good performance history for the semisubmersion top design:
Advantages
Advantages
• Maintains a stable intracellular membrane
potential of more than -60 mV.
• Facilitates action potentials with overshoots close
to 100 mV in amplitude, duration of less than 2
msec at 32°C, when used with
hippocampal pyramidal and granular cells.
• Maintenance of the membrane resting potential is
possible for more than 1 hour, undisturbed by
changes in perfusion fluids.
• Preparation slices remain viable for up to 12 hours.
• Flow rates of 1 ml/min will completely exchange
the chamber fluid in less than 1 minute.
BSC-HT:
Dimensions, L x W x H
111.1 x 85.4 x 23.8 mm (4.3 x 3.3 x 0.9 in)
Weight
130 g (4.6 oz)
BSC-ZT:
Dimensions, L x W x H
98.5 x 101.6 x 28.1 mm (3.8 x 4.0 x 1.1 in)
Weight
124 g (4.4 oz)
Model
• The slices are mechanically stable. They are placed
on a special ribbed nylon mesh and may be held
in place by 3 to 4 stimulating electrodes or a
plastic insert. This stability is attributed to the stiff
nylon mesh which does not rise or sag with
changes in fluid flow, therefore, moderate changes
in the transverse laminar flow can be well
tolerated during intracellular and extracellular
recordings. These features allow for switching of
solutions with minimal risk of tissue movement
and loss of neurons while recording.
• The low volume of the chamber cavity and the
relatively fast flow rate allows rapid exchange of
solution (1 to 2 minutes) which facilitates drug
application studies.
• Slices remain moist and viable because they are
wetted on both sides and do not dry out due to
surrounding air currents.
Specifications
Order #
• Slices remain viable for 10 hours or more.
MicroIncubation
BSC-ZT (Zbicz Top)
superfusion
BSC-HT Haas Top
BSC-HT
(Haas Top)
Product
W4 65-0075 BSC-HT
Haas Top including 2 slice holds
W4 65-0074 BSC-ZT
Zbicz Top including nylon mesh
• The mesh surface holding the slice is
semipermanent and can be cleaned easily. The
BSC-ZT comes with extra mesh which can be
easily installed when necessary.
• Because the fluid depth is shallow (400 to 600
microns), the electrode capacitance remains low;
an important consideration in single
microelectrode voltage and patch clamping.
• Bubble formation is minimal. Bubbles, which form
in the heating unit, escape by the path formed at
the entrance of the trough. Movement of the slice
will not result should bubbles inadvertently form
under the mesh. The flow of solution over the
slice’s top surface will maintain tissue viability.
• The solution temperature at the slice can be
precisely regulated due to the close proximity of
an optional thermistor to the slice.
• Slices can be transilluminated.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
177
superfusion
Brain/Tissue Slice Chamber System (continued)
BSC-BUW Base Unit and Warner
TC-324B Temperature Controller
Order #
Model
W4 65-0073 BSC-BU
Product
Base Unit Including Tubing,
Heating Element and Electrical Terminals
W4 64-1525 BSC-BUW Base Unit Slice Heater for Warner
Temperature Controllers
includes W4 64-1591 Cable
W4 65-0074 BSC-ZT
Zbicz Top Including Nylon Mesh
W4 65-0075 BSC-HT
Haas Top Including 2 Slice Holders
W4 65-0076 BSC-PC
Prechamber for Holding Slices
Accessories and replacement parts
Choice of Temperature Controllers
W4 65-0098 BSC-T2
Replacement T2 Thermistor for
TC-102
W4 65-0057 BSC-T3
Thermistor (Bath) for Use with
Brain Slice Chamber
W4 65-0078 BSC-AIR
Aeration Element Replacement,
set of 2
MicroIncubation
The BSC-BU Base unit is offered in two versions, the original unit for use
with the model TC-202A, and a new version, the BSC-BUW, designed to
work with Warner’s TC-324B and TC-344B temperature controllers.
W4 65-0080 BSC-HE
Base Unit Heating Element
Replacement
Order #
W4 64-1697 –
Replacement Heating Element
for BSC-BUW
Model
Product
superfusion
W4 64-0100 TC-324B
Temperature Controller,
Single Channel
W4 64-0101 TC-344B
Temperature Controller,
Dual Channel
W4 65-0045 TC-202A
Biopolar Temperature Controller
Output cable for temperature controllers
W4 65-0079 BSC-ORING Base Unit (BSC-BU) Replacement
Gasket Set
W4 65-0081 BSC-TUBE Base Unit (BSC-BU) Tubing Set
Replacement, Tygon .031 x .093 (ID x OD)
W4 65-0082 BSC-G10
Haas Top (BSC-HT) Tissue Insert
Replacement, set of 2
W4 65-0083 BSC-HTC
Haas Top (BSC-HT) Plastic Cover
Replacement
W4 65-0084 BSC-HT-AG Haas Top (BSC-HT) Ground Wire
Replacement
W4 65-0086 BSC-ZTC
Zbicz Top (BSC-ZT) Plastic Insert
Replacement
W4 65-0087 BSC-PC-VAL Prechamber (BSC-PC) Valve
Replacement
W4 65-0088 BSC-ACC-KIT Base Unit, Haas & Zbicz Tops
Accessory Kit (Replacement
Screws, Fittings and Mesh)
W4 65-0091 BSC-CABLE BSC-BU/TC-102 Replacement
Power Cable
W4 65-0090 BSC-MESH Haas Top (BSC-HT) Zbicz Top
(BSC-ZT) Replacement Mesh
300 µm grid, 5 x 5 in, pkg. of 4
Ordering Information
All components are ordered individually. Most researchers order the
BSC-BU Base unit with either the Haas or Zbicz top, depending on
individual research. The pre-chamber is an effective accessory for slice
preservation, but is not necessary for system operation. We recommend
ordering the BSC-ACC-Kit since it contains valuable replacement parts
such as screws, fittings, and mesh.
References:
1. Zbicz, K.L. & Weight, F.F. “Transient Voltage and Calcium Dependent Current...” J. Neurophys 53,1038-1058 (1985).
2. Haas, H.L. et al “A Simple Perfusion Chamber for the Study of Nervous Tissue Slices in Vitro” J. Neurosci
Meth 1, 323-325 (1979).
178
W4 65-0104 –
Output Cable, 6-Pin to Banana for
TC-202A or BSC-BU
W4 65-0100 –
Output Cable, 6-Pin to 1 mm for BS4
TC-202A, BS4 LU-CB1 and
BS4 LU-CPC-CEH
W4 64-1591 –
Output Cable, 8-Pin to Banana for
temperature controller to BSC-BUW
base, includes thermistor
(Warner Temperature Controllers)
Comes with BSC-BUW
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
electrophysiology
Page No.
Patch Clamps
180 - 183
Bilayer Workstation
Complete Bilayer Workstation
184
Bilayer Workstation Component List
185
Bilayer Clamp, BC-535
186 - 187
Faraday Cage and Table
188
Bilayer Chambers and Cuvettes
BCH-M13 & BCH-M22
189
Perfusion Bilayer Chambers, BCH-P
190
Perfusion System for Bilayer, BPS-2 & LPF-8
191
LPF-8 Bessel Filter
191
SUNStir-3 (SUNStir Controller, SUN-1 lamp
and SPIN-2 stirplate)
192 - 193
Instrument Rack, RAC-14
194
BLM Starter Kit
194
Head Stage Holder, HST-1 & MBB
194
BLM-TC Bilayer Thermocyler
195
On Site Setup and Training
195
Variable Channel Stimulator, CM-3
196
Fixed Channel Stimulator, CM-1
196
Stereo Zoom Microscope
197
Power Line Conditioner
197
Acquisition Hardware and Software
198
Oocyte Systems and Clamps
199 - 204
Intracellular Electrometers
Intracellular Electrometer, IE-210
205 - 207
Differential Amplifers, IE-251A
208 - 209
Intracellular Electrometer/
Differential Amplifier, HiZ-223
210
Low Pass Filters
211 - 212
Ussing/Diffusion
Introduction to Ussing Systems
213 - 215
U9500 & U2520 Ussing Chambers
216 - 218
Self-Contained Ussing Chambers
219 - 220
U9926 & U2500
Navicyte Diffusion Systems
221 - 227
EasyMount Vertical Diffusion/
Ussing Chamber Systems
228 - 229
Epithelial Voltage Clamps
EC-800, EC-800LV & EC825A
230 - 231
Multi-Channel Epithelial
Voltage Clamps, VCC-MC
232 - 233
Single Channel Epithelial Voltage Clamp, VCC-600 234
DM MC6, EP MC6, DM660 and DM Input
Manifolds and Dummy Membranes
235
Computer Controlled Multi-Clamp w/Software
236
Data Acquisition & Analysis System
237
HAI-118 Data Acquisition & Analysis System 238 - 240
Patch Clamp,
see page 180
Bilayer Workstation,
see page 184
Oocyte Clamp,
see page 201
Intracellular Electrometer,
see page 207
8 Pole Bessel Filter,
see page 211
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Section
Ussing System,
see page 219
Stimulus Isolation Unit,
see page 247
Vibration Isolation
BenchMate Series Vibration-Free Platforms
Vibralite Breadboards
Series Labmate Tables
High Performance Lab Tables
Stimulators
Neurolog™ System
241
242
243 - 244
245 - 246
247 - 250
251 - 272
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
179
PC-505B
patch clamp
Patch Clamp
The lowest noise, switchable, resistive-feedback patch clamp amplifier currently available
Electrophysiology
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lowest noise — approaching theoretical limit
Calibrated Cap Comp and Series R circuitry
% Compensation circuitry
Independent V hold and I hold controls
Zap safety switch
LED meter
3 year warranty
The PC-505B has three modes of operation: voltage clamp, zero current
clamp, and current clamp.
V Clamp
In voltage clamp mode, the input range is ±1 V. Active commands (V hold,
junction and auto zero, test pulse, zap) and external inputs are scaled and
summed at the headstage input. Capacity compensation and speed test
are also active.
Io
patch clamp
The PC-505B is the lowest noise, switchable, resistive-feedback patch
clamp amplifier available. This model also has features of particular
interest to those doing whole cell studies. The slow capacitance
compensation circuitry has been combined into a single control and
allows direct measurement of membrane capacitance. The companion
Series R control displays the access resistance and the new % correction
circuit compensates up to 90% of the access resistance. These and other
features make the PC-505B an extremely capable amplifier.
Switching Headstages
Two selectable feedback resistors in the headstages permit single
channel and whole cell recording on the same cell. A 50 GΩ resistor is
used in both switching models for low noise single channel recording
with currents to 200 pA.
Zero current is essentially a standby mode used to preset voltage hold or
current hold levels before switching to voltage or current clamp. All
commands are inactive with the exception of junction zero which, in this
case, functions as an offset control for the electrode and tip potentials
associated with the pipette.
I Clamp
Current clamp mode clamps the cell to a current level determined by the
current hold setting and any external commands. Capacitance
compensation is inactive in this mode.
Commands
Voltage and current commands applied to the cell include: voltage and
current hold, junction and auto zero, test pulse, speed test, and zap.
LC-201B Headstage (50 GΩ/500 MΩ)
This headstage with 500 MΩ feedback resistor will handle whole cell
currents up to 20 nA.
V & I Hold
For larger whole cell currents, the 50 MΩ resistor in this headstage
permits currents up to 200 nA.
Junction & Auto Zero
HC-202B Headstage (50 GΩ/50 MΩ)
Bilayer Headstage
W4-205B Bilayer Headstage (50 GΩ/500 MΩ modified)
The 50 GΩ resistor headstage is modified for artificial bilayer
capacitances up to 250 pF.
Headstage Resistor Selection
Headstage feedback resistance is dynamically switched at the amplifier
front panel. LED’s indicate resistor selection and the corresponding
multiplying factor applied to the current gain [Im] switch setting.
180
Operating Modes
Holding potentials and currents are set with separate controls eliminating
the need to reset levels when switching between voltage and current
clamp modes.
Adjusting for offset potentials is performed with either the manual
junction zero control or with auto zero. The offset potential is read on the
meter or at the Vc x10 output.
Test Pulse & Speed Test
Test Pulse and Speed Test are internally generated 50/60 Hz signals.
Test pulse is attenuated by the command sensitivity and is useful for
monitoring the formation of a gigaseal. The speed test signal is applied to
the headstage input to allow for tuning the headstage response. A rear
panel speed test switch allows for an external signal to be used.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
patch clamp
PC-505B
Patch Clamp (continued)
Zap
Specifications (continued)
Variable duration pulse used to rupture the cell membrane for whole cell
recording.
Fast Capacitance Compensation (Voltage Mode):
Signals applied to the command input are attenuated at one of three
levels with the command sensitivity selector.
Whole Cell Compensation:
Outputs
Signals at the Im output are filtered at the selected cutoff frequency set
with the 4-pole Bessel filter. Selecting Bypass presents the full bandwidth
signal to the Im output. Filtered and unfiltered Im output is also available
at the instrument rear panel. Additional outputs are the membrane voltage
Vm x10 and the sum of the voltage commands Vc x10, both at x10 gain.
Voltammetry with PC-505B
PC-505B functions as an excellent low-noise potentiostat for voltammetric
and other electrochemical measurements. In this mode, the V hold
(electrode potential) is increased to a maximum of ±1 volt and the
maximum external command signal to ±2 volts at electrode or sensor.
C Slow
0-100 pF with 10 turn control
Series R
0-10 MΩ with 10 turn control
% Correction
0-90% of Series R
Leak Subtraction
50 GΩ Headstage Resistor ∞ to 50 GΩ
500 MΩ Headstage Resistor ∞ to 500 MΩ
50 MΩ Headstage Resistor ∞ to 50 MΩ
Front Panel Outputs: Im (membrane current), selected in the range of:
Gains of 0.05 to 10 mV/pA with 50 MΩ headstage resistor
Gains of 0.5 to 100 mV/pA with 500 MΩ headstage resistor
Gains of 5 to 1000 mV/pA with 50 GΩ headstage resistor
Vc x10
Summation of all commands amplified by 10
Vm x10
Membrane voltage amplified by 10
Im Low-Pass Filter
0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 kHz and Bypass
(4-Pole Bessel)
Panel Meter:
31⁄2 Digit LED reads (full scale):
Junction Zero
±199.9 mV
Vc + h In
Sum of all commands and V Hold, ±199.9 mV
Vc
Sum of all commands, ±199.9 mV
Vm
Membrane voltage (current clamp mode) ±199.9 mV
Im
Membrane current, ±1999 pA
RMS Noise
1.999 pA
Rear Panel Outputs:
Gain Telegraph
From 0.5 to 7.0 V in 0.5 V steps.*
Filter Telegraphs
From 0.2 to 2.0 V in 0.2 V steps.*
Im/Vm Telegraph
Logic levels, V-Clamp=1, I-Clamp=0
Sync Out
Signal for synchronizing an oscilloscope to internal test
Power Requirements
110 to 130 or 220 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz , 15 VA
Physical Dimensions:
Main Unit
8.9 x 43.2 x 30.5 cm, H x W x D
Headstage
1.9 x 3.5 x 5.7 cm, H x W x L, with 1.8 m cable
Mounting Rod
6.3 mm D x 6.3 cm cm L
Specifications
Shipping Weight
11.4 kg
Headstages:
Warranty
Three years, parts and labor
LC-201B Headstage (50 GΩ/500 MΩ)
Single channel currents to 200 pA, whole cell currents to 20 nA.
* Compatible with Axon pClamp and Heka PatchMaster.
HC-202B Headstage (50 GΩ/50 MΩ)
Single channel currents to 200 pA, whole cell currents to 200 nA.
Order #
Model
Product
Line operating voltage if other than 100-130 VAC.
W6-205B Bilayer Headstage (50 GΩ/500 MΩ modified)
For artificial bilayer capacitances up to 250 pF, currents to 20 nA.
Noise (referred to input)
Measured with an 8-pole Bessel filter, input open, 50 GΩ resistor:
DC to 1 kHz
0.035 pA RMS
DC to 5 kHz
0.150 pA RMS
Bandwidth
W4 64-0000 PC-505BLC
W4 64-0001 PC-505BHC
Patch Clamp PC-505B with
LC-201B Headstage*
Patch Clamp PC-505B with
HC-202B Headstage*
Patch Clamp PC-505B with
HB-205B Bilayer Headstage*
25 kHz
W4 64-0002 PC-505BHB
Command In BNC
±10 V Max, AC or DC, applied to input
* Supplied with model cell and rack mount hardware.
Voltage Hold
±200 mV Max with 10-turn control
Additional/Replacement Headstages
Junction Zero
±100 mV Max with 10-turn control
Internal Test Pulse
1 V 50/60 Hz (line freq.) square wave
attenuated by Command Sensitivity
W4 64-0004 LC-201B
W4 64-0005 HC-202B
W4 64-0006 HB-205B
Voltage Clamp Commands:
Command Sensitivity x0.1, x0.01, and x0.001
Zap
1.0 V Pulse, adjustable duration from 0.1 to 10 msec
Current Clamp Commands:
Command In
±1000 pA max with Command Sensitivity @ x0.1
±100 pA max with Command Sensitivity @ x0.01
±10 pA max with Command Sensitivity @ x0.001
Current Hold
±1 nA with 10-turn control
Internal Test Pulse
1 nA 100 Hz square wave through Command Sensitivity
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Stray capacitance between the input and electrode resistance is
compensated with two pair of controls, C-Fast 1 and C-Fast 2. Amplitude
and time constant of each pair is independently adjustable. Whole cell
capacitance compensation is adjusted with the single control, C-Slow.
Membrane capacitance is read from the C-Slow calibrated dial. The
companion Series R control is used in conjunction with the C-Slow and its
calibrated dial provides a reading of the access resistance. C-Slow may
be disabled to view the uncompensated signal. The % Correction control
is used to increase the command signal to compensate for the voltage
drop across the access (Series R) resistance. Correction is adjustable up
to 90%.
0.1 to 1.75 µsec, 0 to 5 pF
0.33 to 8.5 µsec, 0 to 15 pF
patch clamp
Capacitance & Resistance Compensation:
Fast Compensation
C Fast 1
C Fast 2
50 GΩ/500 MΩ Headstage
50 GΩ/50 MΩ Headstage
50 GΩ Headstage for Bilayer
Electrode Holders for PC-501A and PC-505B
W4 64-0821
W4 64-0822
W4 64-0823
W4 64-0978
W4 64-0824
QSW-A10P
QSW-A12P
QSW-A15P
QSW-A17P
QSW-A20P
Straight Holder 1.0 mm glass OD
Straight Holder 1.2 mm glass OD
Straight Holder 1.5 mm glass OD
Straight Holder 1.7 mm glass OD
Straight Holder 2.0 mm glass OD
Command Sensitivity x 0.1, x 0.01, and x 0.001
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
181
Patch
Clamp Equipment
PC-501A
patch clamp
Patch Clamp
A workhorse patch clamp amplifier equally at home in research and teaching labs
Electrophysiology
• Independent V Hold and I Hold
• Stability in Current Clamp with selection of three
I Clamp response speeds
• 4-Pole low-pass Bessel filter
• Internally generated test signals
• Zap circuit with variable duration
patch clamp
The PC-501A Patch Clamp is a “workhorse” equally at home in research
and teaching labs. Most single channel and whole cell studies are easily
handled with this modestly priced instrument.
With a choice of four headstages, a wide range of patch, whole cell and
bilayer applications are covered.
Headstage Choices
Four resistive-feedback headstages are available for the PC-501A:
• 5101-10G (10 GΩ) headstage for recording single channel currents
up to ±1 nA. Noise level measured at 1 kHz is 60 fA.
• 5101-01G (1 GΩ) headstage for whole cell studies with currents to
±10 nA.
• 5101-100M (100 MΩ) headstage for whole cell studies with
currents to ±100 nA.
• 5101-10GB (10 GΩ) headstage modified for bilayer capacitances
up to 250 pF. Maximum current is ±1 nA.
Operating Modes
• V Clamp Mode: Input is clamped to a maximum of ±1 V.
Commands are the sum of the holding voltage and any external
input signals.
• Zero Current Mode: Bridges the voltage and current clamp modes.
All commands are inactive except the junction zero, which
functions in this case as an offset control for the electrode and tip
potentials associated with the pipette.
182
• I Clamp Mode: In current clamp mode, active commands are the
current hold and any external command input signals, summed.
Clamp stability is enhanced with the selection of three clamp
speeds.
Compensation Controls
• Voltage Offsets (including junction potentials): are automatically
compensated with the auto zero or manually with the junction
zero.
• Capacity Compensation: Paired controls; fast (0-5 µsec), medium
(0-2 msec) and slow (0-20 msec) compensate the current transient
caused by a step command signal. Each pair has a separate
control for amplitude and time constant.
• Series Resistance: Signal errors contributed by the electrode
(access) resistance in whole cell recording are subtracted from the
output with the series R comp control. The compensated
resistance (0-100 MΩ) is read from a 10-turn dial.
• Leak Subtraction: Used to compensate leakage current due to the
voltage drop across the seal (shunt) resistance.
Outputs/Signal Conditioning
The Im signal is bandwidth limited by a 4-pole Bessel filter with six frequency
cut-offs and can be bypassed to obtain the full 10 kHz bandwidth. Gain is
selected with a 7 position switch and scaled to the headstage resistor.
Additional outputs are Vm x 10 (membrane voltage at x10 gain) active in
current clamp mode and ∑Vc x 10 (the sum of all commands at x10 gain).
Rear panel outputs include; gain telegraph and sync output.
Voltammetry with PC-501A/V
A simple modification to the PC-501A makes it suitable for voltammetric
measurements. This includes increasing the holding voltage potential to
±1 V and the external voltage signal level to ±2 V maximum. Internal
switches can be installed to allow switching between normal [patch] and
voltammetry operation. Contact our technical support department for details.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
PC-501A
patch clamp
Patch Clamp (continued)
Specifications
Specifications (continued)
Headstages:
Physical Dimensions:
5101-10G Headstage With 10 GΩ resistor for single channel recording,
maximum current ±0.8 nA*
Control Unit
13.3 x 43.2 x 25.4 cm, H x W x D
Headstage
5.7 x 2.9 x 2.5 cm, H x W x L, with 1.8 m long cable
5101-01G Headstage With 1 GΩ resistor for whole cell currents to ±8 nA*
Detachable
Mounting Rod
6.2 mm dia x 6.3 cm L
Noise:
Measured with an 8-pole Bessel filter and 10 GΩ
headstage, input open.
DC to 1 kHz
0.06 pA RMS
DC to 5 kHz
0.20 pA RMS
DC to 10 kHz
0.40 pA RMS
High Frequency Boost
11.4 kg (25.1 lbs)
Warranty
Three years, parts & labor
* Output volt maximum 8V/Rf
** Molecular Devices pClamp and Heka PatchMaster.
Order #
Model
Applied voltage attenuated by Command Sensitivity,
Max input ±10 V
Command Sensitivity Attenuates CMD IN by x0.1, x0.01 or x0.001.
V Hold
Adjustable from zero to ±200 mV with 10 turn control.
Junction Zero
Adjustable between ±100 mV with 10 turn control.
Test Pulse
100 Hz square wave, amplitude at the electrode
dependent on Command Sensitivity;
100 mV @ x0.1
Patch Clamp PC-501A with
5101-10G Headstage (10 GΩ)
W4 64-0008 PC-501A/9
Patch Clamp PC-501A with
5101-01G Headstage (1 GΩ)
W4 64-0009 PC-501A/8
Patch Clamp PC-501A with
5101-100M Headstage (100 MΩ)
W4 64-0010 PC-501A/10B
Patch Clamp PC-501A with
5101-10GB Bilayer Headstage
W4 64-0012 PC-501AV/9
Patch Clamp PC-501A for
Voltammetry with 5101-01G
Headstage (1 GΩ)
W4 64-0013 PC-501AV/8
Patch Clamp PC-501A for
Voltammetry with 5101-100M
Headstage (100 MΩ)
10 mV @ x0.01
1.0 mV @ x0.001
Zap
1.5 V pulse with duration adjustable from 0.1 to 10 msec
Current Clamp Commands:
Command Input
±1.0 nA max. with Command Sensitivity @ x0.1
±100 pA max. with Command Sensitivity @ x0.01
±10 pA max. with Command Sensitivity @ x0.001
Product
W4 64-0007 PC-501A/10
Increases bandwidth to 10 kHz. Front panel adjustable
with Speed Test for 1 GΩ and 10 GΩ headstages
Voltage Clamp Commands:
Command Input
Shipping Weight
Supplied with rack mount hardware. Electrode Holder must be purchased
separately based on your glass outer diameter.
Also, specify line operating voltage if other than 100-130 VAC.
Electrode Holders for PC-501A and PC-505B
Zero to 100 MΩ, read from 10 turn digital dial
W4 64-0821 QSW-A10P
Straight Holder 1.0 mm glass OD
Compensation
Capacity
Three ranges with amplitude and time constant
W4 64-0822 QSW-A12P
Straight Holder 1.2 mm glass OD
W4 64-0823 QSW-A15P
Straight Holder 1.5 mm glass OD
Compensation
Fast (0-5 µsec), Medium (0-2 msec), Slow (0-20 msec)
Straight Holder 1.7 mm glass OD
Leak Subtract
Adjustable from ∞ to 10 GΩ for 10 GΩ headstage, ∞ to 1
GΩ for 1 GΩ headstage, ∞ to 100 MΩ for 100 MΩ
headstage
W4 64-0978 QSW-A17P
W4 64-0824 QSW-A20P
Straight Holder 2.0 mm glass OD
Im Output Low Pass Filter
4 pole Bessel with -3 dB frequencies at 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2,
and 5kHz. Bypass allows full 10 kHz bandwidth
Series Resistance
Outputs:
Im (membrane current) Gain is adjustable, in the range of: 10 to 1000 mV/pA with
10 GΩ headstage 1 to 100 mV/pA with 1 GΩ headstage
0.1 to 10 mV/pA with 100 MΩ headstage
Additional/Replacement Headstages
W4 64-0014 5101-10G
Headstage with 10 GΩ Resistor
W4 64-0015 5101-01G
Headstage with 1 GΩ Resistor
W4 64-0016 5101-100M
Headstage with 100 MΩ Resistor
W4 64-0017 5101-10GB
Headstage with 10 GΩ Resistor
for Bilayer
V c x10
Sum of all commands (Vc +h, Junction Zero, Auto Zero
and Series R) x 10
Optional Accessories
Vm x10
Membrane Voltage x 10
W4 64-0018 MC-10G
Gain Telegraph
DC voltage scaled to Im:
Model Cell for 5101-10G (10 GΩ)
Headstage
Output (rear panel)
From 3.0 to 4.2 Volts for 10 GΩ headstage, 0.2 V steps
From 1.6 to 2.8 Volts for 1 GΩ headstage, 0.2 V steps
From 0.2 to 1.4 Volts for 100 MΩ headstage, 0.2 V steps
Compatible with acquisition software.*
W4 64-0019 MC-01G
Model Cell for 5101-01G (1 GΩ)
Headstage
W4 64-0020 MC-100M
Panel Meter
3 ⁄2 digit LCD provides DC or average readout of:
Model Cell for 5101-100M
(100 MΩ) Headstage
Vc + h In
∑ Vc
Sum of all commands and V Hold, ±199.9 mV
W4 64-0021 MC-10GB
Model Cell for 5101-10GB (10 GΩ)
Bilayer Headstage
Vm
Membrane voltage (current clamp mode) ±199.9 mV
Im
Power Requirements
1
Sum of all Commands, ±199.9 mV
Equipment
physiology
5101-10GB Headstage With 10 GΩ modified for bilayer capacitances up to
250 pF Maximum current is ±1 nA
PC-501A patch clamp
ElectropatchElectrophysiology
clamp
5101-100M Headstage With 100 MΩ resistor for whole cell currents to ±80 nA*
Membrane Current, ±1999 pA
100 -130 VAC or 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
183
bilayer workstation
Bilayer Workstation
The Planar Lipid Bilayer Workstation
The tool for measuring pico- to nano-scale charge currents across a lipid membrane
The Planar Lipid Bilayer (BLM) Workstation from Warner Instruments integrates every significant component
required for the use of a working BLM rig. This unique device allows the user to quickly get up to speed in
performing research using this powerful technology.
Electrophysiology
bilayer workstation
• Integrated instrumentation for Planar Lipid
Bilayer recording
• Simple and integrated design
• Complete System
• Optional power line conditioning
• Popular data acquisition packages
• Available on-site setup and training
Vibration
Isolation Table
Bilayer Clamp
Amplifier
8-Pole
Bessel Filter
Faraday Cage
Perfusion System
Instrument
Rack
Integrated
Controller for
Stirplate
and Lamp
184
The BLM Workstation is comprised of an FC Series Faraday cage, a
BenchMate vibration isolation table from Kinetic Systems, our BC-535
bilayer clamp amplifier and LPF-8 8-pole Bessel filter, a SUN-1 halogen
lamp, a SPIN-2 bilayer stirplate, the SUNStir integrated controller (for the
stirrer and lamp), and the BPS-2 perfusion system. The HST-1 headstage
holder with magnetic base rounds out the package. Also included is a
RAC-14 table top rack and the BLM-ST starter kit which includes a red
sable artist dotting brush, glass capillary tubing for lipid application,
BNC’s and grounding cables, spare stirbars for bilayer cups and chambers,
and rubber matting for traction control of the bilayer chamber.
Planar Lipid
Bilayer
Workstation
BLM Starter
Kit (Cables, Glass,
Tubing and
Brushes)
Headstage Holder
Bilayer Stirplate
Low Temperature,
Noise-Free
Halogen Lamp
Data
Acquisition
System and
Software
Optional components include the BLM-TC Bilayer Thermocycler, the
ON-750 power line conditioner and a stereo zoom microscope for
viewing the membrane. We also supply accessories useful for
bilayer work. These include the CM-3 (variable) and CM-1
(fixed value) single channel simulators.
Additional items required for a complete Workstation
include our popular BCH-13A or BCH-22A bilayer
cups and chambers, acquisition hardware/software
and a computer.
The BLM workstation supports the use of either pClamp
(Molecular Devices, Union City, CA) or PatchMaster (HEKA
Instruments, Bellmore NY) for data acquisition. You may
purchase your acquisition system directly from the vendor or
from us at no additional charge (Technical support and
warranty are through the manufacturer).
The complete system from Warner includes everything you need
(except the computer) to begin collecting data.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
bilayer workstation
Bilayer Workstation
The Planar Lipid Bilayer Workstation (continued)
Model
Product
W4 64-0452P BLM-WS-P
Bilayer Workstation
Passive Table
W4 64-0451 BCH-M13
W4 64-0452A BLM-WS-A
Bilayer Workstation
Active Table
Classic 13 mm Cuvettes
Bilayer Chamber (Includes Two
2 x 5 mm Stirbar Magnets)
W4 64-0404 CP13A-150
Polystyrene with 150 µm Aperture
System Includes
W4 64-0403 CP13A-200
Polystyrene with 200 µm Aperture
FC-Series Cage
Faraday Cage with Vibration Isolation Table
W4 64-0402 CP13A-250
Polystyrene with 250 µm Aperture
BC-535
Bilayer Clamp Amplifier
W4 64-0410 CD13A-150
Delrin with 150 µm Aperture
LPF-8
Bessel Filter, 8 Pole, Low Pass
W4 64-0409 CD13A-200
Delrin with 200 µm Aperture
SUNStir-3
Dual Function Rack Mountable Controller
with SUN-1 Lamp and SPIN-2 Stirrer
W4 64-0408 CD13A-250
Delrin with 250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0416 CF13A-150
Polysulfone with 150 µm Aperture
BPS-2
Bilayer Perfusion System
W4 64-0415 CF13A-200
Polysulfone with 200 µm Aperture
RAC-14
Instrument Rack
W4 64-0414 CF13A-250
Polysulfone with 250 µm Aperture
HST-1
Headstage Holder with Magnetic Base
BLM-ST
Bilayer Starter Kit
Purchase of a bilayer cup and chamber, and a data
acquisition system are needed to complete the Workstation
All components available separately. Please contact our
Sales Department.
Cup Chamber Set B
Order #
Model
Product
Classic 22 mm Chamber (3 ml volume)
W4 64-0453 BCH-M22
Bilayer Chamber (Includes Two
2 x 7 mm Stirbar Magnets)
Classic 22 mm Cuvettes
W4 64-0407 CP22A-150
Polystyrene with 150 µm Aperture
Add on Acquisition System (to complete the system)
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0406 CP22A-200
Polystyrene with 200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0405 CP22A-250
Polystyrene with 250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0436 DIGI
W4 64-0413 CD22A-150
Delrin with 150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0412 CD22A-200
Delrin with 200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0411 CD22A-250
Delrin with 250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0419 CF22A-150
Polysulfone with 150 µm Aperture
Product
W4 64-0418 CF22A-200
Polysulfone with 200 µm Aperture
On-site Setup and Training
2 Day Minimum. Price Per Day*
W4 64-0417 CF22A-250
Polysulfone with 250 µm Aperture
Cup Chamber Set C
Order #
Model
Product
Perfusion Bilayer Chamber (1 ml volume)
Accessories
Order #
Model
W4 64-0083 OST-1*
Molecular Devices – Digidata
1440 + pClamp 10
W4 64-0450 BLM-TC
Bilayer Thermocycler
W4 64-0026 CM-3
Single Channel Simulator,
Adjustable Characteristics
W4 64-0024 CM-1
Single Channel Simulator,
Fixed Characteristics
W4 64-0069 ON-750A
6.5 A Power line conditioner
W4 64-1803 Z850
Stereo Zoom Horizontally Mounted
Microscope with Boom Stand
W4 64-0424 CP-P-150
W4 64-0420 MAG-13
2 x 5 mm Stirbars for 13 mm
Chambers and Cuvettes (pkg. of 5)
Polystyrene Perfusion Cup with
150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0425 CP-P-200
W4 64-0421 MAG-22
2 x 7 mm Stirbars for 22 mm
Chambers and Cuvettes (pkg. of 5)
Polystyrene Perfusion Cup with
200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0426 CP-P-250
Polystyrene Perfusion Cup with
250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0427 CD-P-150
Delrin Perfusion Cup with
150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0428 CD-P-200
Delrin Perfusion Cup with
200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0429 CD-P-250
Delrin Perfusion Cup with
250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0423 BCH-P
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Order #
bilayer workstation
Ordering Information
Cup Chamber Set A
Order #
Model
Product
Classic 13 mm Chamber (1 ml volume)
Perfusion Bilayer Chamber
(Includes Two 2 x 5 mm Stirbar Magnets)
Perfusion Bilayer Cups
Note: Price is per day with a 2 day minimum. Travel expenses are additional.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
185
BC-535
bilayer workstation
Bilayer Clamp Amplifier
The only amplifier specifically dedicated to research using the planar lipid bilayer
The BC-535 is the newest version of our popular bilayer clamp amplifier. Warner Instruments is the only company to
supply an instrument specifically designed for research using planar lipid bilayer technology and this device forms
an integral component of the BLM Workstation.
Electrophysiology
bilayer workstation
Major improvements in this model include:
• Reduced noise and wider bandwidth
• Improved stability with gains to 1000 mV/pA
• Digital hold potential
• AutoZero function
• Digital readout of membrane capacitance
• Multi-step 4-pole Bessel filter
• Hold potentials to 1400 mV; currents to 20 nA
Resistive Feedback Headstage
The BC-535 sports a VCO circuit providing auditory feedback during
membrane formation. This feature is selectable from the front panel and
an internal speaker is included. An external speaker output is provided on
the instrument rear panel.
Capacitance Test
This test circuit has been completely redesigned and is used to monitor
the formation of the bilayer membrane. A calibrated triangular waveform
is applied to the command input and the amplitude of the resulting square
wave is proportional to the membrane capacitance. When selected, the
membrane capacitance is read directly from the meter.
The BC-535 sports an advanced, resistive feedback headstage which
provides high bandwidth and low noise recording. The switchable
headstage resistance is automatically selected based on the gain selection.
The low current mode provides up to 100 pA of current carrying capability,
while the high current mode provides up to 20 nA of current capacity!
4-Pole Bessel Filter
Hold Control
Capacitance Compensation
The hold control for the BC-535 has been redesigned to function entirely
within the digital domain. This unique approach allows the user to make
holding potential adjustments in highly reproducible and discrete steps of
1, 10, and 100 mV, up to ±400 mV. Hold potentials up to ±1000 mV or step
sizes greater than 100 mV can be applied at the Command Input BNC’s
located on the front and rear panels of the instrument. Internal and
external hold potentials sum for a possible total of 1400 mV.
Large capacitance transients are cancelled using both fast (0-10 µs) and
slow (0-2 ms) controls. Each control provides separate adjustment of both
amplitude and time constant. Maximum capacitance compensation is
500 pF.
AutoZero
The large currents flowing through the low resistance aperture prior to
bilayer formation saturates the amplifier input. Under these conditions,
junction potential offsets can be easily nullified by using the AutoZero
function. Once armed, the AutoZero measures and compensates for any
offset potentials within the conducting pathway. Traditional manual
controls remain for making small corrections or for resetting the offset
potential without re-activating the AutoZero cycle.
186
Audio Output
The filtering capacity if the instrument has been expanded to include a
low pass, 4-pole Bessel filter ranging from 0.05 to 20 kHz in 1-2-5 steps.
The internal filter can be bypassed allowing realization of the instrument’s
full 75 kHz bandwidth.
I/O
Input and output BNC’s have been duplicated or moved to the instrument
rear panel except for those requiring user interaction. Front panel BNC’s
include Command Input, Vc x 10 and Im Output. Rear panel BNC’s include
the headstage connecter, Im Output, Cap Sync, Command In, and Gain
and Filter telegraphs. A speaker output is also available on the rear panel.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
bilayer workstation
BC-535
Bilayer Clamp Amplifier (continued)
Specifications
Noise
frequency
Bandwidth
Order #
Measured with 8-pole Bessel filter at specified cutoff
Frequency Range Open Input
100 pF at Input
DC to 1 kHz
DC to 100 Hz
0.82 pA RMS
0.28 pA RMS
0.060 pA RMS
0.009 pA RMS
Model
W4 64-0432 BC-535
Product
Bilayer Clamp Amplifier
75 kHz
Digital; 1, 10 or 100 mV steps to ±400 mV maximum
Command In
Front and rear external input, 10 V/V (applied voltage is
attenuated by 10/100/1000 at the command electrode)
Junction zero
AutoZero or manual adjust. AutoZero lockout feature.
Cycle time 1.5 s. Correction to ±120 mV
Audio
VCO with off switch and volume control. Internal
speaker and external speaker output
Capacitance Test
Triangle wave applied to command electrode.
Derived membrane capacitance read from meter up
to 1000 pF. Calibrated (1 mV/pF) square wave
available at Im output. Cap Sync (rear panel)
synchronized with input triangle wave
Gain
Membrane current gain selectable from 0.5 to 1000
mV/pA in 1-2-5 steps
Filter
4-pole Bessel selectable from 0.05 to 20 kHz in 1-2-5
steps, or bypassed for full amplifier bandwidth
Capacity Compensation
Fast (0-10 µs) and slow (0-2 ms) with adjustment of
amplitude and time constant for each range.
Maximum compensation 500 pF
Headstage:
Switching:
Low Current Mode 50 gigohm feedback, 100 pA maximum current
High Current Mode 500 megohm feedback, 20 nA maximum current
I/O:
Front Panel:
Command Input
BNC input up to ±10 V. Attenuated by 10, 100 or 1000
Im Output
Membrane current scaled by amplifier gain setting
Vc x 10 Output
Applied command voltage x 10
Rear Panel:
Im Output
Membrane current scaled by amplifier gain setting
Cap Sync
TTL compatible
Cap Out
Reports calculated membrane capacitance scaled
to 1 mV/pF
Command Input
BNC input up to ±10 V. Attenuated by 10, 100 or 1000
Gain Telegraph
Stepped DC voltage 0.5 to 5.5 V in 0.5 V steps for gain
settings of 0.5 to 1000 mV/pA. Telegraphed value of
0.0 V for bypass
Filter Telegraph
Stepped DC voltage 0.5 to 4.5 V in 0.5 V steps for filter
settings of 0.05 to 20 kHz. Telegraph value of 5.0 V for
full bypass
External Speaker
Standard RCA jack
bilayer workstation
Internal Hold
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Input Commands:
Digital Meter:
3.5 digit LED
±1999 mV full scale
Junction offset
±120 mV full scale
Cap Test
0 to 1999 pF
Vc
±1999 mV full scale
Im
±1999 pA full scale
Power
100-125 or 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Dimensions (H x W x D):
Case
9 x 42 x 25 cm (3.5 x 16.5 x 10 in.)
Headstage
2.3 x 2.8 x 5.8 cm (0.9 x 1.1 x 2.25 in.) 1.8 m connecting cable
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
187
bilayer workstation
FC Series
Faraday Cages
A self-contained, tabletop Faraday cage with vibration isolation
The Faraday cage provides critical shielding of electromagnetic interference from outside sources and is an integral
component of the Bilayer Workstation. FC Series Faraday cages from Warner include the vibration isolation table and
are designed to optimize the user’s experience.
The Table
The cage is shipped with a custom 16" x 19" table manufactured for
Warner Instruments by Kinetic Systems, Inc. When installed, the table is
entirely contained within the cage enclosure and this design successfully
isolates the tabletop from external acoustic and mechanical noise
sources. The table has a steel top allowing the attachment of
magnetically coupled devices to its surface.
Specifications
25 x 22 x 18 in.
Materials
Aluminum with durable powder coat finish.
Solid brass grounding block
Design
Electrically continuous cage with solid wall
construction. Cage base accommodates 16" x 19"
vibration isolation table (either automatic or manual
support) manufactured by Kinetic Systems, Inc. Table
top forms cage floor. Large panel doors with
magnetic closures. Dual fan-fold front doors. Large
panel doors on top and sides. Cage base has wing
doors for access to vibration isolation table controls.
Access ports on back panel for electrical connection
to cage contents
Table
Specifications are supplied by Kinetic Systems, Inc.
Contact our offices or Kinetic Systems for a copy of
the table specifications
Electrophysiology
Dimensions (H x W x D)
bilayer workstation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Convenient benchtop design
Enclosed vibration isolation table
Passive or active support mechanisms
Large access doors
Magnetic closures
Solid brass grounding block
Durable powder coat finish
The Cage
The Faraday cage is a critical component in the Bilayer Workstation since
it functions to shield the sensitive electronics contained therein from
externally generated electrical interference. Without such, the ability to
make single channel measurements would be mitigated.
FC Series cages from Warner are designed to be conveniently placed on a
sturdy workbench and are supplied with a choice of automatic or manual
vibration isolation table. A version of the cage without a table is also
available.
Large access doors allow entry into the cage from all sides and the fanfold front doors are designed to be placed out of the way when open.
Doors along the base of each side allow access to table controls. There
are also ports on the rear panel for entry of electronic cabling into the
cage enclosure.
188
Model:
FC-2
Faraday cage with automatic pneumatic vibration
isolation table
FC-1
Faraday cage with manual pneumatic vibration
isolation table, includes hand pump
FC-0
Faraday cage without vibration isolation table. This
model has a shallow (1.5"), weighted base for
improved access and stability in the absence of the
enclosed table
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0062
FC-0
Faraday Cage without
Vibration Isolation Table
W4 64-0063
FC-1
Faraday Cage with Manual
Vibration Isolation Table
(Includes Hand Pump)
W4 64-0064
FC-2
Faraday Cage with Automatic
Vibration Isolation Table
(Requires Pressurized Air)
W4 64-0081
KS-1
Vibration-Free Platform,
16 x 19 in, Manual Air,
(Includes Hand Pump)
W4 64-0082
KS-2
Vibration-Free Platform,
16 x 19 in, Automatic Air
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
bilayer workstation
BCH-M13 and BCH-M22
Classic Bilayer Chambers and Cuvettes
The standard membrane support system
Since the pioneering work on black lipid membranes by Paul Mueller and co-workers in the early ‘60s, several
generations of membrane biologists have exploited this model membrane for biophysical and reconstitution studies.
The planar bilayer formed by painting lipids across a small aperture in a partition is one of the simplest techniques
available to the novice and expert alike, and the cup/chamber system has been used to reconstitute and record the
single-channel behavior of a wide variety of ion channel proteins from diverse tissues.
Bilayer Cuvettes
Polystyrene has been a favored material for cuvettes for several years.
The physical properties of this material make for a high quality membrane
support. However, its poor resistance to organic solvents can lead to
degradation of the aperture.
Polystyrene, polysulfone or Delrin cuvettes
Precision machined apertures of 150, 200 or 250 µm
cis and trans stirbar wells
Stirbar included with each cup and chamber
Viewing window
Shipments from stock
Order #
Model
Product
Classic 13 mm Chamber (1 ml volume)
W4 64-0451 BCH-M13
Bilayer Chamber (Includes Two
2 x 5 mm Stirbar Magnets)
Classic 13 mm Cuvettes
The Basics
W4 64-0404 CP13A-150
Polystyrene with 150 µm Aperture
Classic design cups and chambers from Warner Instruments are designed
such that addition of equal volumes to the cis and trans sides results in a
balanced solution height, thus minimizing mechanical gradients across
the bilayer membrane.
W4 64-0403 CP13A-200
Polystyrene with 200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0402 CP13A-250
Polystyrene with 250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0410 CD13A-150
Delrin with 150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0409 CD13A-200
Delrin with 200 µm Aperture
All cuvettes have a 0.5 mm well milled into their base to confine the
motion of stirbars and to reduce mechanical noise artifacts. A 2 x 5 mm or
2 x 7 mm Teflon-coated stirbar is supplied with each cuvette. Standard
available aperture diameters are 150, 200 or 250 µm. Contact our offices
for custom aperture sizes. The wall thickness at the aperture is 250 µm.
W4 64-0408 CD13A-250
Delrin with 250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0416 CF13A-150
Polysulfone with 150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0415 CF13A-200
Polysulfone with 200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0414 CF13A-250
Polysulfone with 250 µm Aperture
Bilayer Chambers
W4 64-0453 BCH-M22
Chambers are made from black Delrin and have a 0.5 mm recessed well
milled into the floor of the non-cup side to confine the motion of stirbars
and to reduce mechanical noise artifacts. A 2 x 5 mm or 2 x 7 mm Tefloncoated stirbar is supplied with each chamber.
bilayer workstation
•
•
•
•
•
•
Warner Instruments now offers bilayer cups made from polysulfone. This
material has many of the mechanical properties of polystyrene coupled
with enhanced solvent resistance. The choice of material will depend on
your application.
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Cuvettes have also been made from DeIrin (acetyl resin) and many users
report good membrane formation as well as easier maintenance. It should
be noted, however, that Delrin cuvettes do not work equally well in all
applications and with all users.
Classic 22 mm Chamber (3 ml volume)
Bilayer Chamber (Includes Two
2 x 7 mm Stirbar Magnets)
Classic 22 mm Cuvettes
W4 64-0407 CP22A-150
Polystyrene with 150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0406 CP22A-200
Polystyrene with 200 µm Aperture
Polyethylene centrifuge tubes (supplied) serve as intermediate wells for
electrical connections between the headstage electrodes and the cup or
chamber. Chambers include a nylon screw and rubber plug to secure the
cups during use. The classic model has a window for viewing the aperture
during membrane formation.
W4 64-0405 CP22A-250
Polystyrene with 250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0413 CD22A-150
Delrin with 150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0412 CD22A-200
Delrin with 200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0411 CD22A-250
Delrin with 250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0419 CF22A-150
Polysulfone with 150 µm Aperture
Classic Models BCH-M13 and BCH-M22
W4 64-0418 CF22A-200
Polysulfone with 200 µm Aperture
Two classic models are offered: The BCH-M13 is a small volume chamber
(1.0 ml) with a 13 mm (1⁄2") diameter cuvette. The BCH-M22 is a larger
volume chamber with (3.0 ml) chamber with a 22 mm (7⁄8") diameter cuvette.
W4 64-0417 CF22A-250
Polysulfone with 250 µm Aperture
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
189
BCH-P
bilayer workstation
Perfusion Bilayer Chamber
Helps minimize membrane breakage and maintains solution volume
Order #
Model
W4 64-0423 BCH-P
Product
Perfusion Bilayer Chamber
Perfusion Bilayer Cups
W4 64-0424 CP-P150
1 ml Polystyrene Perfusion Cup,
150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0425 CP-P200
1 ml Polystyrene Perfusion Cup,
200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0426 CP-P250
1 ml Polystyrene Perfusion Cup,
250 µm Aperture
W4 64-0427 CD-P150
1 ml Delrin Perfusion Cup,
150 µm Aperture
W4 64-0428 CD-P200
1 ml Delrin Perfusion Cup,
200 µm Aperture
W4 64-0429 CD-P250
1 ml Delrin Perfusion Cup,
250 µm Aperture
Electrophysiology
Perfusion Design
• Polystyrene or Delrin cuvettes
• Precision machined apertures of 150, 200 or 250 µm
• cis and trans stirbar wells
• Stirbar included with each cup and chamber
• Maintains fixed volume
• Dedicated perfusion line ports
• Unique aspiration shelf
bilayer workstation
The Perfusion Bilayer Chamber is designed to simplify the exchange of
solutions in both the cup and chamber. The BCH-P incorporates unique
features which can improve your perfusion success rate.
The design of the BCH-P has two features not found in our classic cup
and chamber. First, ports have been permanently milled into both the
chamber and cup body for attachment of perfusion lines. The input port is
routed to the bottom of the cup (or chamber) while the output port
collects solution from the top of the cup (or chamber).
A second improvement is the incorporation of an aspiration shelf in both
the cup and chamber. This shelf provides two advantages. First, the
aspiration line can remain attached to the chamber without introducing
noise artifacts into the bath. Second, the fixed height of the shelf,
coupled with rapid aspiration of overflow solutions, helps maintain the
working volume.
Connection between your PE perfusion lines and the perfusion ports is
conveniently made via standard 200 µl pipette tips. Alternatively, PE-90
tubing can be attached directly to the cup (or chamber) to minimize dead
volume.
The BCH-P chamber is machined from black Delrin and has a working
volume of 1 ml. Cups are available in either white Delrin or polystyrene
and have a working volume of 1 ml.
Not compatible with BLM-TC Thermocycler.
190
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
bilayer workstation
BPS-2 and LPF-8
Bilayer Perfusion System and 8-Pole Bessel Filter
An easy to use perfusion system that helps reduce
membrane breakage
One of the best
8-Pole Bessel Filter
Bilayer Perfusion System
•
•
•
•
Complete gravity-feed system
Quiet operation
High volume flow rates possible
Includes everything shown (except for the cup,
chamber, and stirplate)
The BPS-2 Bilayer Perfusion System from Warner Instruments provides a
simple and straightforward way to exchange solutions in either the bilayer cup
or the chamber. The magnetic base holds the perfusion head ready for quick
insertion into your solution when expedited solution exchange is necessary.
This instrument features optically encoded circuitry which permits frequency
selection with a single control. Since the set frequency control is not a
physical part of the filtering circuit, adjustments to the instrument do not
introduce noise artifacts into the output signal. This unique design uses no
mechanical switching and ensures long term instrument reliability.
The LPF-8 is a signal conditioner combining an 8-pole low-pass Bessel
filter and DC amplifier. Special features include digital frequency readout,
visual input offset indicator, clipping indicator, and gain telegraph outputs.
bilayer workstation
BPS-2 Bilayer
Perfusion System
The LPF-8 is the premier low-pass Bessel filter from Warner Instruments
and provides superior control of analog signal filtering. This instrument
incorporates both low-pass signal filtering and output gains from 1 to 200.
Selectable dual signal inputs allow the instrument to be configured to
operate in normal, inverted or differential modes.
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
• 8-Pole low-pass Bessel filter with cutoff
frequencies from 0.1 Hz to 20 kHz.
• Differential amplifier gains to x200
• Frequency selection with single control
• Input offset adjustment
• Digital frequency readout
• Rack mountable
Specifications
Input
DC differential
Input impedance
1 MΩ each channel
Input range
± 10 V
Input offset
control
2 Ranges, ± 100 mV and ± 1 V, variable from 0 with 10-turn
The gravity-feed mechanism allows the device to support flow rates of up
to 10 ml/min without breaking the bilayer membrane. The commonly
available syringe reservoirs are easily replaced to reduce crosscontamination between different reservoir solutions.
Offset indicator
20 LED display
A perfusion system is a critical component of a Bilayer Workstation. The
ability to exchange solutions on both sides of the bilayer membrane is
important if complicated experimental protocols are to be performed.
Warner Instruments recommends the use of a gravity-driven system as
this is the best way to remove biological and chemical materials with a
minimum of noise.
High range resolution 10 Hz
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0050 LPF-8
W4 64-0431
BPS-2
Basic Bilayer Perfusion System
W4 64-0774
G200-3
Capillary glass, 2 mm OD
Low frequency range
0.1 to 199.9 Hz
Low range resolution
0.1 Hz
High frequency range 10 to 19.99 kHz
Gains
x1, x2, x5, x10, x20, x50, x100 and x200
Output impedance
50 Ω
Power requirements
100-130 VAC or 200-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Order #
Model
Product
LPF-8 Bessel Filter, Low Pass
Filter/DC Amplifier. Specify Line
Operating Voltage if Other Than 100-130 VAC
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
191
bilayer workstation
SUNStir-3 System
Lamp, Stirplate and Dual Function Controller
An integrated system for stirring and illumination
The SUNStir-3 System is comprised of the SUNStir controller, a SUN-1 lamp and a SPIN-2 stirplate.
This convenient, rack-mountable system is designed to provide simultaneous control for both the SUN-1 lamp
and the SPIN-2 stirplate.
SUN-1 Halogen Lamp
SPIN-2 Bilayer Stirplate
Electrophysiology
SUNStir Controller
bilayer workstation
Lamp
• Dichroic reflector
• Noise-free electronics
• Halogen bulb
• Adjustable spotlight intensity with external
control device
• Magnetic base with gooseneck and
swivel-head lamp
SPIN-2 Stirrer
• Very low noise!
• Stir while recording
• Independent cis/trans dipoles
• Minimized magnetic flux through
bilayer membrane
• Magnetic steel side panels
Controller
The SUNStir controller is a rack-mountable instrument designed to
provide quiet and efficient control of the SUN-1 Lamp and SPIN-2 Stirrer.
Lamp
The SUN-1 is an externally controlled, noise-free halogen light source
suitable for inclusion in a shielded enclosure. The magnetic base attaches
securely to any steel tabletop and the lamp swivel-head allows projection
of the beam in virtually any direction. Modifications to the design of the
reflector result in significant improvements in the lamp’s performance.
The lamp is comprised of a magnetic base with 12" gooseneck for
accurate positioning of the illumination spot. A jointed swivel-head at the
end of the gooseneck allows the beam to easily subtend a solid angle of
2π steradians (half of a sphere).
Beam intensity is adjustable to one of eight levels via the rack-mount
controller. The lamp electronics are well isolated to prevent the
introduction of external EMF into the Faraday cage enclosure and allows
recording of data even while the lamp is on.
A dichroic reflector reduces much of the projected heat from the lamp and
allows longer illumination times without significantly warming the object
under study.
192
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
bilayer workstation
SUNStir-3 System
Lamp, Stirplate and Dual Function Controller (continued)
Stirrer
SUNStir Controller Specifications
Bilayer work often requires stirring of contents on both sides of a bilayer
membrane. The SPIN-2 Bilayer Stirplate achieves this task by providing
two spinning dipoles in a mechanically quiet apparatus.
SUNStir
Master power switch, Power on LED
Lamp control
Power on LED
Eight position intensity selection with on/off switch,
Stirring of solutions in a bilayer cup and chamber has traditionally been
achieved using a commercial stirplate. Unfortunately, these devices are
not designed for use in a bilayer rig and present a single rotating
magnetic dipole to the bilayer chamber.
Stirrer control
switch, Power on LED
Continuously variable speed control with on/off
20 W-12 V internal, 100-125 VAC, 60 Hz external
Dimensions
1.75 x 16.5 x 8 in (H x W x D)
SUN-1 Lamp Specifications
Lamp
High impact polyamide housing; swivel head; spot
reflector; clear lens Halogen bulb, dichroic reflector;
20 W-12 V
Gooseneck
1.4 cm diameter x 30.5 cm length; with PVC sleeve
Spin-2 Stirplate Specifications
Controls:
The SPIN-2 stirplate from Warner Instruments is designed to specifically
address these problems experienced by researchers in the field.
Second, the rotation characteristics (speed and phase) of the two
spinning dipoles is digitally controlled. This allows the device to present
the minimum magnetic flux to the bilayer membrane. A liquid crystal
display allows the researcher to view the rotating dipoles in real-time.
Third, the apparatus is both electrically isolated and mechanically quiet.
In addition, steel strips are provided on each side of the liquid crystal
window for attachment of magnetic holders and the like. This provides a
convenient method of positioning a perfusion head.
Taken together, these features allow the SPIN-2 to be used while
acquiring data.
Power on/off switch, Speed rotary control
Stirplate
Position adjust (rotary)
Display:
Controller
LED; flashes once per complete rotation
Stirplate
Magnetic field display; passive LCD
Speed Range
300 to 600 RPM
Rotor:
Synchronization
Counter-rotating with magnets repelling
Position
Adjustment Range
(center-to-center)
0.4 to 2.5 inches
Electrophysiology
First, it has two separate spinning dipoles, one each for the cis and
trans wells. This design allows the stirbars within each well to be
independently controlled which virtually abolishes cup/stirbar collisions.
The relative separation between the two dipoles is adjustable allowing the
apparatus to be used with bilayer cups and chambers of different sizes.
Controller
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Stirplate
5.5 x 8.0 x 2.3 in
Weight
Stirplate
Order #
3.0 lb
Model
W4 64-0076 SUNSTIR-3
Product
Complete SunStir-3 System,
Includes Sun-1 Lamp, Spin-2
Stirrer and SunStir Controller
bilayer workstation
A result of these characteristics is that it is impossible to simultaneously
stir both wells since the stirbars will be drawn to a common rotational
axis defined by the stirplate magnet. The resulting collisions between the
stirbars and the bilayer cup introduces a noise artifact into the acquired
data. Many researchers avoid this problem by not stirring while recording,
which is an undesirable state of affairs.
Power requirements
System Components
W4 64-0061 SUN-1
Halogen Lamp with
Tabletop Controller
W4 64-0074 SPIN-2
Dual Channel Spin Plate with
Tabletop Controller
W4 64-0075 SUNSTIR
Dual Function Controller
(Lamp plus Stirplate)
W4 64-0065 SUN-DCH
Replacement 12W-12V
Dichroic Bulb for Sun-1 Lamp
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
193
bilayer workstation
Additional Components
RAC-14
HST-1 Headstage
Holder Kit
RAC-14 Instrument Rack
An instrument rack provides an organizing influence on the electronics
and facilitates the tabletop design of the Workstation.
Electrophysiology
The RAC-14 is a 14" tabletop rack and comes with all the hardware
needed to mount your amplifier, filter, stirring-illumination controller and
A/D board into one integrated unit. A ground point is provided for
attachment to a Power Line Conditioner. Powder black finish.
bilayer workstation
Order #
Model
W4 64-0070 RAC-14
Product
Instrument Rack
BLM Starter Kit
Warner Instruments has put together a Starter Kit to aid you in
completing your Bilayer Workstation. The kit includes 3 BNC cables,
grounding cables, a Red Sable artist’s dotting brush, glass capillary
tubing, PE tubing (for your perfusion system), and one replacement pack
of stirbars (2 x 5 mm).
Order #
Model
W4 64-0067 BLM-ST
HST-1 Headstage Holder Kit
•
•
•
•
Shock mounting for headstage
Non-conducting surface
Flexible headstage attachment
Magnetic base with on/off switch
The HST-1 is designed as a shock mount positioning device for the bilayer
headstage. The non-conducting neoprene pad, mounted onto a
polycarbonate base, serves as a stable platform for the headstage. Two
medium elasticity rubber bands are used to fix the headstage to the pad
and provides a secure but flexible attachment.
Convenient positioning of the HST-1 Headstage Holder is provided by an
MB/B magnetic base. The base contains a magnet with on/off switch for
easy re-positioning of the assembly within your application.
Product
Specifications
Bilayer Starter Kit
Platform, H x W x D
5.7 x 4.4 x 1.3 cm (2.24 x 11.2 x 0.5 in)
Material
Polycarbonate base; non-conducting neoprene pad
Shaft, Dia x L
0.6 x 6.4 cm; anodized aluminum
Order #
Model
W4 64-0435 HST-1
Product
Headstage Holder System
Replacement parts
194
W4 64-0422 HH-1
Headstage Holder
W4 64-0060 MB/B
Magnetic Base
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
BLM-TC
bilayer workstation
Planar Lipid Bilayer Thermocycler
On-Site Setup and
Training
Investigators first entering the arena of research using the planar
lipid bilayer can be overwhelmed by the wealth of design and
application issues surrounding the proper assembly and use of a
Bilayer Workstation. While tractable, this state of affairs can
result in an investigator choosing a less effective means to
achieve his or her research goals.
The new BLM-TC from Warner uses Peltier technology to cool, heat, or
thermocycle a planar lipid bilayer membrane.
The tight and reproducible temperature control provided by this unique
device can facilitate the measurement of single channel events at
physiologic temperatures, or at any temperature between 5 °C and 50 °C.
The device heats and cools at an average rate of 3 °C/min when
transitioning between 40 °C to 10 °C. More importantly, the BLM-TC can
maintain a temperature to within 0.2 °C of the set temperature.
The BLM-TC system is comprised of a Peltier-driven bilayer platform
(compatible with Warner's SPIN 2 bilayer stirplate), a CL-100 bipolar
temperature controller, and a an LCS-1 (for the water jacket, see page 142).
Dr. Buck will visit your site, assemble the Workstation and
instruct you in how to use and maintain the equipment. If
desired, he will also provide guidance and insight in the best
way to use your acquisition and analysis software.*
It is our committed goal to quickly and efficiently optimize your
equipment and skill set allowing you to focus your efforts on
data acquisition.
*Support and warranty rights are retained by the manufacturer of
the acquisition software package.
We invite you to contact Dr. Buck to discuss your needs and
application.
References available.
Electrophysiology
Peltier driven
Cools to 5˚C
Heats to 50˚C
Heats and cools at 3˚C/minute
Stable to 0.2˚C
bilayer workstation
•
•
•
•
•
Warner Instruments recognizes the need to make this technology
more accessible and is the only company to establish on-site
assembly and training in the proper care and use of the Bilayer
Workstation. Our senior scientist, Dr. Edmond Buck, has over 18
years experience using this powerful technology and is
committed to providing extensive support for this important
technique.
The purchase of a standard bilayer cup and chamber completes the
package.
Note: If you will be primarily working at temperatures above ambient, then we
recommend using the larger BCH-M22 chamber to reduce the impact of evaporative
losses in the system during use.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0450 BLM-TC
Planar Lipid Bilayer
Thermocycler System
W4 64-0400 BCH-M13
1 ml Bilayer Chamber
(Cup Purchased Separately)
W4 64-0401 BCH-M22
3 ml Bilayer Chamber
(Cup Purchased Separately)
W4 64-1922 LCS-1
Liquid Cooling System
W4 64-0352 CL-100
Bipolar Temperature Controller
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
195
bilayer workstation
CM-3 and CM-1
Channel Model Simulator
Ideal for testing and training
CM-3 Variable Single-Channel Model
Electrophysiology
bilayer workstation
CM-3 Variable Channel Model
CM-1 Fixed Channel Model
• Independent selection of open and close time
constants via calibrated rotary dial
• Selection of unitary channel conductance via
calibrated rotary dial
• Available in 10 and 100 pF membranes
• Small dimensions allow easy attachment to the
amplifier headstage within the Faraday cage
enclosure
• Battery operated
The CM-1 is a fixed variable single channel model which simulates an
actively gating ion channel. Gating transitions from the closed to the
open, and from the open to the closed state, are randomly induced within
the constraints imposed by the mean open and mean close time settings.
Attaches directly to the headstage.
The CM-3 is a continuously variable single channel simulator which
models an actively gating ion channel. Gating transitions from the closed
to the open, or from the open to the closed state are randomly induced
within the constraints imposed by the mean open and mean close time
settings. This unique device provides the researcher with a means to
generate well-defined ion channel gating kinetics allowing critical
analysis of data acquisition hardware and software and data analysis
software. The instrument is also an ideal teaching aid.
Specifications
Mean time constants
Open and closed factory set to 10 ms
Conductance
respectively
20 and 200 pS for patch and bilayer models,
Battery
3 V lithium, 3 years of continuous operation
Dimensions (H x W x D)
2.8 x 5.7 x 2.2 cm
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0024 CM-1/10
Simulator with 10 pF Membrane
W4 64-0025 CM-1/100
Simulator with 100 pF Membrane
W4 64-1618 –
CM Cable for Non-Warner Amps
Specifications
Mean time constants
Individually adjustable from 1-200 ms
Conductance
Continuously variable from 0-750 pS
Battery
9 V, 3 years of continuous operation
Dimensions (H x W x D)
6.6 x 7.6 x 4.2 cm
Order #
196
Model
Product
W4 64-0026 CM-3/10
Variable Simulator with
10 pF Membrane
W4 64-0027 CM-3/100
Variable Simulator with
100 pF Membrane
W4 64-1618 –
CM Cable for Non-Warner Amps
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
bilayer workstation
Accessories
Stereo Zoom Microscope
Power Line Conditioning
The Z850 Stereo Zoom Microscope, when used in conjunction with the
Planar Lipid Bilayer Workstation, is an ideal instrument for viewing the
formation of bilayer membranes. The included boom stand permits the
device to be positioned witin the cage during use and then swung out of
the way after the membrane has stabilized. The microscope can be
mounted both vertically or horizontally for diverse applications. A
binocular version lacking the camera c-mount is also available.
An often overlooked source of noise in electrophysiological recording is
that introduced by fluctuations in the power circuit supplying the
apparatus. Many labs are placed on upper floors in large research
facilities where the power circuit is shared by many other labs. While
most instrumentation used in BLM work are designed to compensate for
variances in the power circuit, these effects cannot be completely
abolished in a distributed network of components.
The rugged boom stand features a 14.3" chrome steel vertical post and a
20.4" horizontal bar. The 42 lb, 10" x 10" rectangle metal base assures
positive stability. The locking collars prevent accidental slippage on the
horizontal and vertical poles.
An elegant solution to this problem is provided by the use of an isolation
transformer to supply power to the entire Workstation. The ON-750 Power
Line Conditioner is a two-sided device wherein one side connects to the
institutionally supplied power and the other, isolated, side connects to the
BLM Workstation. This configuration results in the presentation of a
stable power source to the Workstation which abolishes noise artifacts
introduced from varying loads on the “house circuit”.
The Z850 has a drift free focusing range of 11.5 cm. See pages 338-341
for more details.
Stirbars
Replacement stirbars (magnetic fleas) are available for the BCH Series
bilayer chambers. Stirbars are Teflon coated and are available in two
sizes. Stirbars are sold in packages of 5 each and come in 2 x 7 mm and
the more difficult to find 2 x 5 mm sizes.
Glass Capillary Tubing
Glass capillary tubing has gained favor among bilayerologists as the
preferred tool for applying lipids to the aperture in the bilayer cup. The
advantages of this approach (as compared to Sable hair brushes) are
durability and the ability to sterilize the applicator between uses. Glass
tubing from Warner Instruments has been chosen with dimensions that
facilitate this use. The 1.5 mm OD and 15 cm length of this thick-walled
tubing make for good quality glass applicators.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0067 BLM-ST
Bilayer Starter Kit
W3 64-1803 Z850
Stereo Zoom Microscope
with Boom Stand without
Camera C-Mount
W4 64-1805 Z850
Stereo Zoom Microscope
with Boom Stand and
Camera C-Mount
W4 64-0069 ON-750A-US
Power Line Conditioner
for 120 VAC/60 Hz
W4 64-0073 ON-750A-EU
Power Line Conditioner
for 220 VAC/60 Hz
W4 64-0772 G150-4
Capillary glass 1.5 mm OD
W4 64-1327 WA10-5
Silver wire, 10 cm long,
0.25 mm dia, with 1 mm pin,
2 pack
W4 64-0420 MAG-13
2 x 5 mm Stirbars for 13 mm
Chambers and Cuvettes (pkg. of 5)
W4 64-0421 MAG-22
2 x 7 mm Stirbars for 22 mm
Chambers and Cuvettes (pkg. of 5)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
W4 64-0069
bilayer workstation
W4 64-1805
197
bilayer workstation
Acquisition Hardware and Software
PClamp Package from Molecular Devices
Digidata 1440A Low-noise Data Acquisition
System with pClamp Software
Electrophysiology
Molecular Devices presents the latest Digidata 1440A digitizer for lownoise experiments. This high-resolution 16-bit data acquisition system is
self-contained and communicates with the host computer via a USB 2.0
interface, which means extremely easy installation and setup. Designed
for ease-of-use and fast results, the Digidata 1440A comes with versatile
AxoScope for Windows software and is ready to take data immediately
after installation. Absolutely no programming is necessary.
bilayer workstation
The Digidata 1440A has a maximum sampling rate of 250 kHz per
channel, with an outstanding total data throughput rate of 4
megasamples per second. Both the inherent digitizer noise and channel
crosstalk noise are rated at less than ±1 mV average p-p at 10 kHz, within
a ±10 V input range. The front panel is well laid out with sixteen analog
input channels and four analog output channels, eight general digital
outputs, one dedicated digital output to trigger devices such as
oscilloscopes, trigger inputs to start acquisition and to tag data. The back
panel has four additional analog instrument telegraph inputs, as well as a
DB-25 connector for the digital outputs.
Designed to support continuous data acquisition within a multitasking
operating system, the Digidata 1440A digitizer is fully supported by our
AxoScope 10 for Windows and pCLAMP 10 for Windows
electrophysiology software.
With its USB 2.0 interface, you can easily connect the Digidata 1440A to
a laptop computer without the need for a peripheral PC card.
A data acquisition system is an integral component of
the Planar Lipid Bilayer Workstation. To facilitate a
convenient purchasing experience for our customers,
Warner Instruments can include these products as part
of a Workstation purchase.* We can also install and
configure the acquisition system if you desire. Contact
our Sales Department for details. (*Axon system not
available in Japan.)
198
The pCLAMP 10 software suite fulfills many different experimental needs,
such as synchronized stimulation, event detection, and online analysis. It
is the most widely-used data acquisition and analysis program for the
control and recording of voltage-clamp, current-clamp, and patch-clamp
experiments. Three separate programs are included: Clampex 10,
AxoScope 10, Clampfit 10.
Clampex 10 expands the range and quality of your data acquisition
experiments. These improvements should prove useful for a wide variety
of applications, allowing more flexibility in your experimental protocols.
AxoScope 10 provides a convenient way to produce background
recordings with the included MiniDigi 2-channel digitizer. You can monitor
cells during intra-sweep periods, or create an overview of the entire day's
activities including voice tags.
Clampfit 10 is a powerful solution for analyzing, graphing and layout of all
of your Clampex and AxoScope data. Clampfit includes an extensive array
of filtering and fitting routines. Functionality includes I-V graphs, power
spectrums, and special "linked data views" for threshold (AP), template
(minis) and single-channel modes of event detection and analysis.
The pClamp package (comprised of Molecular Devices’ Digidata 1440
computer interface and pClamp 10 software) represents a state-of-the-art
acquisition system from Molecular Devices Corporation.
Warner Instruments is pleased to include the following information
detailing a compatible acquisition systems from Axon Instruments. We
provide this information and product as a service to our customers and
make it available as an optional component of the Warner Instruments
Planar Lipid Bilayer Workstation. All product warranty and support rights
for this acquisition package are retained by Axon Instruments.
Please contact the vendor directly if you require additional information.
Order #
Product
W4 64-0436 Molecular Devices - Digidata 1440 + pClamp 10
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
voltage clamps
TEV700
Oocyte Two-Electrode Voltage Clamp Workstation
The most common components in a single package
• NEW Automated Two-Electrode
Voltage Clamp System, see page 200
• Oocyte Clamp OC-725C, see pages 201-202
• RC-3Z Oocyte Chamber, see page 13
• MM-33L Manipulator, see page 295
• MM-33R Manipulator, see page 295
• MB/B Magnetic Base, see page 304
BPM-1
BPM-1 shown with components
of our TEV-700 Oocyte voltage
clamp workstation
Steel Base Plate
This solid steel plate provides
a stable platform for mounting
micromanipulators mounted on
magnetic bases. A highly
durable powder coating applied
to the surface makes it impervious to most common spills in the lab.
The TEV700 Workstation provides many of the necessary components
typically used with the OC-725C voltage clamp. When these components
are purchased with the OC-725 Oocyte Clamp, the complete package is
discounted as shown. The individual components of the system are
listed below.
Order #
Model
W4 64-0034 TEV700
voltage clamps
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
W4 64-0034 TEV700 Oocyte Two-Electrode Voltage Clamp Work Station
Product
Complete Oocyte
Two-Electrode Voltage
Clamp Work Station
System Components (included in TEV700)
W4 64-0028 OC-725C
Oocyte Clamp
W4 64-0319 RC-3Z
Oocyte Chamber
W4 64-0055 MM-33L
Left Manipulator
W4 64-0056 MM-33R
Right Manipulator
W4 64-0060 MB/B
Magnetic Base, must purchase
2 for complete system
Accessories
W4 64-1586 BPM-1
Base Plate Magnetic Steel
Specifications
Dimensions
30.5 x 61.0 x 0.95 cm (12 x 24 x 3/8 in)
Weight
14.06 kg (31 lb)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
199
voltage clamps
NEW Automated Two-Electrode Voltage
Clamp Systems
Electrophysiology
voltage clamps
• Single and dual channel systems available
• Eliminates microscope
• Manipulators may be used for both patch and
oocyte voltage clamp experiments
• High efficiency design
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1740
TEV-S12
Automated two-electrode voltage
clamp - single channel for 1.2 mm
electrodes: Includes one OC-725C,
one ChannelMAX 100A Mini, one
VC-8P pinch valve controller, one
perfusion chamber, and two electrodes
holders for 1.2 mm O.D. glass
Warner Instruments in collaboration with NeoBiosystems, Inc., is pleased
to introduce an automated workstation for oocyte two-electrode voltage
clamp experiments.
W4 64-1741
TEV-S15
Automated two-electrode voltage
clamp - single channel for 1.5 mm
electrodes: Includes one OC-725C,
one ChannelMAX 100A Mini, one
VC-8P pinch valve controller, one
perfusion chamber, and two electrodes
holders for 1.5 mm O.D. glass
W4 64-1742
TEV-D12
Automated two-electrode voltage
clamp - dual channel for 1.2 mm
electrodes: Includes two OC-725C,
one ChannelMAX 100A Twin, one
VC-8P pinch valve controller, two
perfusion chambers, and four
electrodes holders for 1.2 mm
O.D. glass
W4 64-1743
TEV-D15
Automated two-electrode voltage
clamp - dual channel for 1.5 mm
electrodes: Includes two OC-725C,
one ChannelMAX 100A Twin, one
VC-8P pinch valve controller, two
perfusion chambers, and four
electrodes holders for 1.5 mm
O.D. glass
This complete workstation is built on a strong foundation of the
NeoBiosystems ChannelMAX 100A Mini computer controlled
manipulators, the Warner Instruments OC-725C oocyte voltage clamp, a
VC-8P eight channel valve control system, and a custom perfusion
chamber.
Save time, money, and increase throughput using a system featuring the
world’s most widely used two electrode whole-cell voltage clamp for
Xenopus oocytes. The unique design of the OC-725C bath clamp
eliminates the need for series resistance compensation. It also provides
an accurate measurement of bath current by creating a virtual bath
ground while simultaneously clamping the bath potential at zero.
The high compliance of ±180 volts, and the AC clamp gain of 2 x 103 in
addition to the DC gain of 1 x 106, ensures accurate clamp voltage is
maintained even when working with high conductance (leaky) oocytes.
200
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
OC-725C
voltage clamps
Oocyte Clamp
Designed for two-electrode whole-cell voltage clamping of Xenopus oocytes
Fast Stable Voltage Clamping
The OC-725C combines high AC and DC gains and a voltage compliance of
±180 volts to insure fast, nonsaturating clamp performance under nearly any
condition. The AC clamp gain is variable up to 2000. An additional DC gain
of 1 x 106 may be employed for high conductance cells (leaky oocytes).
Two clamp speeds are available: The Slow mode is used for screening
oocytes or for applications not requiring fast response times. The Fast mode
is used for accurate voltage clamp of fast whole cell currents. Clamp
response time in the Fast mode is 350 µsec (10-90% rise time) when
applying a 100 mV step to a model cell.
Improved Bath Clamp Headstage
The current measuring range of the OC-725C bath clamp headstage has
been extended at both ends by the addition of a 3 position range
multiplier. Smaller currents are amplified to usable levels and larger
currents up to 1 mA can be recorded without output saturation. The
unique design of the bath clamp eliminates the need for series resistance
compensation. It provides an accurate measurement of bath current by
creating a virtual ground in the bath while simultaneously clamping the
bath potential at zero.
Independent meters provide simultaneous displays of membrane voltage
Vm and membrane current Im. To assure proper impalement of the current
electrode, the current meter displays membrane potential Ve from the
current electrode before the clamp circuit is turned on.
Clamp Commands
The internal Hold control is a digital push button control with two ranges;
±1 to 99 mV (x1) and ±2 to 198 mV (x2). Hold can be incremented in steps
of 1, 2, 10 and 20 mV for I-V studies. External command signals applied to
Command IN ÷10 are attenuated to reduce noise from the command
source. Hold and external commands are summed.
Additional Features
• Buzz controls (1 kHz square wave) for each electrode aid in
penetration of cell membranes with a minimum of leakage.
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Voltage & Current Meters
voltage clamps
The OC-725C Oocyte Clamp is designed for two-electrode, whole-cell voltage
clamping of Xenopus oocytes. The dedicated design of the OC-725C includes
such features as high compliance voltage (±180 V) and unique bath clamp
circuitry. These same features also make the OC-725C ideal for clamping
other large cells and cell structures such as squid axons. Improvements to this
version include an extended current measuring range, decreased noise level
and a 4-pole Bessel filter.
• Overload alarm (audible and visual) indicate when the compliance
voltage is exceeded safeguarding the oocyte and indicating that
current records are subject to saturation.
• DC Offsets for both voltage and current electrodes.
• Electrode Test for both electrodes.
• Capacity Compensation for the Vm voltage input.
Electrode Holders
Two vented electrode holders with silver wires are typically required with
the clamp; a straight type for use with the voltage headstage and a 45°
type with mounting handle for use with current electrodes. Vents have
been added to the electrodes to prevent pressure build-up inside the
electrode which can damage oocytes. A two meter length cable assembly
is provided to connect the current electrode holder to the clamp.
Voltage Headstage Probe
The voltage measuring headstage is a single-ended, high-impedance
probe. Its small size, convenient mounting rod and 2 meter cable make for
easy attachment to a micropositioner. The headstage input is a 2 mm
diameter pin. An electrode holder with a 2 mm jack (supplied) mounts
directly on the headstage.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
201
voltage clamps
OC-725C
Oocyte Clamp (continued)
RC-3Z chamber shown
with the Warner
OC-725 bath clamp
headstage.
Specifications (continued)
Electrode Voltage Ve ±199.9 mV (Current meter reads Ve when clamp mode
switch is off)
Current Electrode Channel:
Compliance Voltage
±180 V
Clamp Speed
350 µsec. (10-90%) with 100 mV square wave command
applied to model cell
Gain
Variable AC/DC: 0 to 2000
Fixed DC Gain
Switch selected: 1 x 106
Ve DC Offset
±200 mV at input (20 mV/turn)
Electrode Test
10 mV/MΩ read on current meter 100 mV/MΩ at Ve x10
output, rear panel
Commands:
Hold
Manually set with digital potentiometer, 2 digit resolution
and 2 ranges:
x1 range: ±1 to 99 mV in 1 mV steps
x2 range: ±2 to 198 mV in 2 mV steps
External
Signals applied to COMMAND IN÷10 are attenuated by a
factor of 10, 1 V applied = 100 mV command
Power Requirements
Dual Oocyte Studies
100-130 V or 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA
Physical Dimensions:
Electrophysiology
Some studies, such as voltage control across gap junctions, require the
clamping of two oocytes in a common bath using two voltage clamps. The
combined currents from the two oocytes cause problems since the bath
clamp headstage cannot separate the individual currents and therefore
cannot provide effective clamping.
OC-725C has two features to address these problems:
• An internal switch permits measurements of the current in series
Case
8.9 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 30.5 cm D
Voltage Headstage
12.5 mm D x 5 cm L with 1.8 m cable
Mounting Handle
4.8 mm D x 6.3 cm L
Bath Headstage
2.3 cm H x 3.5 cm W x 4.2 cm L with 1.8 m cable
Shipping Weight
6.8 kg
Warranty
Three years, parts & labor
*Molecular Devices pClamp and Heka PatchMaster
with the current electrode instead of in the bath.
voltage clamps
• Optional differential voltage headstages (7255 DI): The differential
measurement subtracts the voltage drop across the series
resistance in the bath, which is normally eliminated by the
bath clamp.
Order #
Model
W4 64-0028 OC-725C
Specifications
Test Conditions
1. Model cell used to obtain specifications: model membrane, 1 MΩ in parallel
with 220 nF, 1 MΩ current and voltage electrodes.
2. Noise measurements made with an 8-pole Bessel filter.
Voltage Recording Channel (Vm):
V Probe Input
Impedance
Output Resistance
DC Offset
Noise (0-10 kHz)
0.5 x 10 Ω, 1 pF
100 Ω
12
±200 mV at input, var. from zero with 10 turn control,
(20 mV/turn)
3 µV RMS with input grounded 20 µV RMS with model cell
Electrode Test
10 mV/MΩ read on meter 100 mV/MΩ at Vm x10 output
Meter Range
±199.9 mV full scale
Capacity
Compensation
0 - 90 pF
Current Sensing (Bath Clamp) Channel (Im):
Noise (0-1 kHz)
4.5 nA RMS with bath clamp 10 nA RMS in output leg
I Monitor Output
1 nA/mV to 1 mA/10V in 7 steps and 3 ranges, x0.1, x1, and x10
Gain Telegraph
Output
0.2 to 2.6 V in 7 steps (200 mV/step) and 3 ranges, x0.1, x1,
and x10. Compatible with data acquisition software*
Meter Range,
Full Scale
202
Clamp Current: ±199.9 µA
Product
Oocyte Clamp supplied with
7250V Voltage Headstage, 7251I
Bath Clamp Headstage, 7259C Current
Cable, Model Membrane and Rack
Mount Hardware. Specify line operating
voltage if other than 100-130 VAC.
One straight holder and one 45° holder
purchased separately.
Optional/Replacement Headstages
W4 64-0030 7255DI
Optional Differential Headstage
W4 64-0031 7250V
Replacement Voltage Headstage
W4 64-0032 7251I
Replacement Bath Clamp
Headstage
W4 64-0033 7259C
Replacement Current Electrode Cable
W4 64-0029 725MC
Model Cell
For Use with OC-725C Voltage Probe
W4 64-1008 ESW-F12V
Straight Holder 1.2 mm glass OD
W4 64-1009 ESW-F15V
Straight Holder 1.5 mm glass OD
W4 64-1010 ESW-F20V
Straight Holder 2.0 mm glass OD
W4 64-1007 ESW-F10V
Straight Holder 1.0 mm glass OD
For Use with OC-725C Current Electrode
W4 64-1051 E45W-F10VH
45° Style Holder 1.0 mm glass OD
W4 64-1052 E45W-F12VH
45° Style Holder 1.2 mm glass OD
W4 64-1053 E45W-F15VH
45° Style Holder 1.5 mm glass OD
W4 64-1054 E45W-F20VH
45° Style Holder 2.0 mm glass OD
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
HAI 118
voltage clamps
Data Acquisition System
A fast, high-resolution data acquisition system suitable for most physiological recording studies
W4 69-3130 HAI 118 Data Acquisition System
Speed
The HAI 118 is a fast recorder. At top speed it can collect 100,000, 16 bit
samples per second on a single channel. With 8 channels enabled it can
collect data at 10,000 samples per second on each of the open channels.
USB Connection
Connection to the computer is accomplished over the popular USB port.
This eliminates the need to install special interface cards and makes the
HAI 118 compatible with notebook computers. The HAI 118 has a small
footprint and in combination with a notebook requires very little bench
space.
Software Included
LabScribe Software Features:
Real Units
LabScribe software allows you to calibrate the displayed data in any units
that you choose. Reading your data in mm Hg, g, or mA is a snap.
Display Controls
The HAI 118 is a fast high-resolution data acquisition system suitable for
most data recording studies in the research laboratory. It offers 8 analog
input channels, 8 digital outputs, 4 digital inputs and 2 DACs. The
Hardware connects to PC compatible computers via the popular USB
interface, so setup is plug-and-play easy.
LabScribe uses an AutoScale feature that automatically ensures the
optimal scaling of displayed data. A simple click centers and expands the
data in the display window to fill the available space. Time base or y axis
scaling can be zoomed in or out with a single click.
Hardware Features
DAC
Keyboard input from the user may be time locked to the data to indicate
drug delivery or stimulus points. Annotations can be positioned in the
data much as you would write on chart paper.
The HAI 118 offers two ±10V DACs. Each DAC is independently
programmable and can be synchronized with one another. Basic stimulus
parameters for each DAC, such as pulse width, frequency and amplitude
can be changed on the fly using handy controls located in the LabScribe®
software tool bar. Standard protocols include pulse, train, and step
waveform. Each standard protocol allows the quiescent state to be a
holding voltage thereby making it ideal for voltage clamping applications.
Resolution and Noise
The HAI 118 employs a 16 bit A/D converter to sample data over its ±10 V
input range. Typical noise on any input is less than 1 V. This allows the
recording of signals from 10 mV to 10V without the need for additional
external gain.
Digital Input/Output
8 digital output lines are available. The digital output connectors are
industry standard BNC, eliminating the need for custom cables.
Programming the output lines is point-and-click easy as well - no
complicated scripting language is required. Four digital input lines are
also provided, with one configured as an external trigger.
Realtime Notations
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
100kHz 16 bit A/D converter
Easy to install USB connection
Built-in stimulator and digital outputs
Low noise
Full gain telegraph support for Warner Instruments
clamp amplifiers
voltage clamps
•
•
•
•
•
Powerful LabScribe® software is included with each HAI 118. LabScribe is
provided with a site license at no additional charge and upgrades are free
forever. The program will actually upgrade itself on any Internet
connected machine.
Thirteen Realtime Functions
LabScribe currently supports 13 functions that are calculated and
displayed in realtime, each called from a single click in the main window.
These include Rate, Frequency, Period, Max, Min, Mean, Integral, dV/dt
and Filter. Functions can be applied to raw data in real time or they can
be called after the data has been recorded. No matter how data may be
permuted, raw data is always preserved.
Twenty-Six Off Line Calculations
Twenty-six off line calculations are also supported. These operate on a
selection of data and return a value. The list includes Area Under the
Curve, Max-Min, Slope at a Point, Slope of the Line of Best Fit, and the
mean.
Data Exported to .txt or .png Files
Any view of the data can be exported to the disk as a text file or a
graphic. This is ideal for post calculation in programs like Excel or
MACLAB. Picture formats make reports or poster presentations easy. Of
course you can always print data from any window in the program.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
203
HAI 118
voltage clamps
Data Acquisition System (continued)
Software Features (continued):
Gain Telegraph
Specifications
Input:
LabScribe will automatically calibrate and display the output of Warner
Voltage/Patch clamp amplifiers. This feature takes into account the
changes in gain that may be applied from the voltage clamp.
Number of Inputs
Input Range
±10 V
Fast Scrolling
Noise
1 mV typical
Gain Telegraph
Software or hardware 8 bit
LabScribe display can smoothly scroll data at any speed. This is
particularly useful when high resolution data is compressed on the time
axis to create a data overview.
Input Impedance
8 single ended BNC
1 MΩ
Output:
Number of DACs
2
Settings
DAC Resolution
12 bit
Settings or templates for various experiments are stored in the programs
settings menu. This makes changing program settings to accommodate
different experiments point-and- click easy.
DAC Speed
100 kHz independent of sample speed
Applications Supported:
Oocyte clamp
LabScribe’s gain telegraph feature automatically calibrates the software
to any Warner Oocyte Clamp so that the main display reads in current and
voltage. The on-board stimulator includes a flexible voltage clamp
protocol so an external stimulator is not required. Finally, the digital
output capability of the HAI 118 also adds the ability to automate your
oocyte rig.
DAC Output Range
±10 V
Digital Output Lines
8 TTL
Digital Output
Connector
BNC
A/D Converter:
Sample Speed
1 Hz - 100 kHz
Resolution
16 bit
Interface
USB
Trigger/Digital
Input Lines
4, TTL
Electrophysiology
voltage clamps
Enclosure
Aluminum
Epithelial Clamp
Power
120/220 VAC, 60/50 Hz, CE compliant
Output from Warner Instruments or other epithelial voltage clamps can be
fed directly into the HAI 118. The voltage clamp protocol in the LabScribe
program’s stimulator section makes recordings of four to six channels of
epithelial data possible.
Trigger Modes
External trigger, Threshold trigger from data, User trigger
Display
Real time, User definable screen time independent of
sample rate. User definable units, AutoScale, Full Scale
or User defined scale
DAC Modes
Pulse, Train, Step, DC, Custom
Blood Flow and Blood pressure
DAC Performance:
Blood flow data from doppler devices and blood pressure signals from
available transducer amplifiers can be fed directly into the HAI 118.
Analytical features in the LabScribe software can give beat-to-beat rate,
systolic, diastolic, and mean pressures, as well as dP/dt.
Order #
Hemodynamic Studies
W4 69-3130 HAI 118 Data Acquisition System
Pulse Width
0.01 msec to 6500 msec (Pulse mode)
Frequency
0.2 Hz to 50 kHz (Pulse Mode)
Product
Blood pressure signals from available transducer amplifiers can be fed
directly into the HAI 118. Analytical features in the LabScribe software
can display beat-to-beat rate, systolic, diastolic, and mean pressures as
well as dP/dt. Up to 8 channels of pressure data can be recorded and the
high speed nature of the hardware makes it ideal for use with rapid heart
rate animals such as mice.
Electrophysiology.
The high speed nature of the HAI 118 make it perfect for studies involving
blood pressure and sympathetic nerve activity as well as all types of
cardiac electrophysiology, even in rapid heart rate animals such as mice
where extra speed is required.
204
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
IE-210
amplifiers
Intracellular Electrometer
The IE-210 is an intracellular microelectrode amplifier with low noise, low
drift, and fast response time for recording from high impedance fluidfilled glass electrodes. Current injection (bridge) circuitry permits
simultaneous stimulation and recording through a single electrode. These
features, in combination with a small lightweight headstage, a 4-pole
Bessel low pass filter, and optional probe breakaway make it an ideal
instrument for easy, accurate and reliable intracellular recording and
current injection.
The Headstage
Fluid-filled microelectrodes can have resistances of over 100 mΩ. To
faithfully record potentials with such high resistances, the amplifier input
resistance must be at least 100 times greater. The input resistance of the
IE-210 is 5000 times greater (5 x 1011Ω) to assure accurate
measurements with high resistance electrodes.
To maximize the bandwidth of voltage recording with high resistance
electrodes, care must be taken to limit the input capacitance of the
amplifier and minimize stray capacitance associated with the electrode and
the cable which connects it to the amplifier. The IE-210 headstage is
designed to minimize both. The headstage utilizes bootstrap circuitry and a
driven shield to limit input capacitance to 0.5 pF. Stray input capacitance is
reduced with two design features of the headstage: 1) the pencil-sized
headstage mounts directly on the micromanipulator, therefore the electrode
holder can connect directly to the headstage input and requires no
connecting cable; 2) the headstage driven shield is available at the probe
input to permit attachment of additional shielding. This allows the driven
shield to be extended to surround the electrode holder and further reduce
the stray input capacitance. This method of capacitance neutralization is
preferable to the common method of capacitance neutralization since
capacitance compensation circuitry can increase noise levels.
Electrometer Features
remaining stray input capacitance, up to 50 pF, can be neutralized with Cap
Comp (capacity compensation). Convenient electrode resistance measurement
is available using Electrode Test which produces a voltage proportional to the
electrode resistance. Cell impalement is facilitated with a Buzz voltage
(variable in both frequency and amplitude) applied to the electrode. An
overload condition at the input (blocked electrode or oscillations caused by
excessive capacity compensation) is indicated by the Input Overload light.
Current Injection
Simultaneous stimulation and recording with a single electrode is made
possible with an active bridge circuit. Stimulus currents are generated
either internally with the DC Current source or by a voltage applied to the
external Stimulus Input. The internal source supplies currents up to ±100
nA in the Low range and up to ±1000 nA in the High range. The current
injection feature is often used for iontophoretic injection of dyes or drugs.
External signals can be of any waveform or DC level. Internal and external
stimulus currents are summed when applied simultaneously.
amplifiers
• High impedance microelectrode amplifier for
intracellular studies
• Simultaneous stimulation and recording
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
A high impedance electrometer designed specifically for intracellular studies
Voltage drops across the electrode are subtracted from the Bridge Output
using the DC Balance and AC Balance controls. The remaining output
represents the cell’s response to the applied current. Electrode resistance
can be read directly from the DC Balance dial. Gain of the Bridge Output
signal is x10 at the front panel and can be switch-selected to x20 or x50 at
the rear panel. The output signal is available at either the full amplifier
bandwidth (30 kHz) or filtered with the internal 4-pole Bessel low pass filter.
Additional Features
• Meter: The 31⁄2 digit LED meter provides readouts of the x1
Amplifier Output voltage and the stimulus DC Current, and is
easily viewed in a darkened room.
• Probe Test: Checks of amplifier operation are quick and convenient
with the front panel Probe Test facility, a real time-saver when
troubleshooting set-up problems.
• Differential Amplifier: Signals from another amplifier can be
applied to the Differential Input and are then summed with the IE210 x1 output.
• Filter Telegraph: The filter frequency is encoded by a stepped DC
voltage for input to a data acquisition system.
The probe/electrometer output is available at a gain of one. Amplifier gain is
increased to x10 at the current injection Bridge Output. Input junction
potentials can be compensated with the Input Offset control. If desired,
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
205
amplifiers
IE-210
Intracellular Electrometer (continued)
Specifications (continued)
Electrode Holder
An electrode holder is not included with the IE-210. Please purchase the
holder separately based on your glass outer diameter. Electrical coupling
between the electrode and headstage can be either a Ag wire or Ag-AgCl
pellet and is easily replaceable. The holder is supplied with the silver wire
installed and a pellet is included for conversion to a pellet type holder.
Optional Accessories
The Remote Buzz (RB-1) control provides convenient remote operation of
the Buzz voltage. It is supplied with a 3 m length cable.
Input Offset
±200 mV, referred to input
Electrode Resist. Test 1 mV/MΩ (Low Range)
10 mV/MΩ (High Range)
Buzz
Amplitude variable 0 to 6 V, frequency variable 100 Hz
to 10 kHz
Current Injection Bridge:
Bridge operates in Low and High current ranges.
Specifications shown for each range where applicable.
The Breakaway Box (BB-15) permits the application of large voltages to the
electrode for iontophoretic injection of dyes or drugs. Voltages up to ±200 V
may be applied to the Breakaway input without damage to the probe input.
Breakaway Current = applied voltage ÷ (electrode resistance + 2 MΩ).
W4 64-0964
thru W4 64-0967
Electrode
Holder
Bridge Resist.
0 to 100 MΩ and 0 to 1000 MΩ (Low Range)
Ranges
0 to 10 MΩ and 0 to 100 MΩ (High Range)
Internal DC
0 to ±100 nA (Low Range)
Current Source
0 to ±1000 nA (High Range)
External Stimulus
Current is limited by electrode resistance up
to maximums shown:
±10 V ÷ electrode R or 0.5 µA (Low Range)
±10 V ÷ electrode R or 5 µA (High Range)
Max. Stimulus Input
±15 V
Stimulus Input Resist. 10 KΩ
I Monitor Output
100 mV/nA (Low Range), 10 mV/nA (High Range)
Bridge Output Gain
x10 at front panel, x20 or x50 at rear panel
Bridge Output Filter
4-pole low pass Bessel with cut-offs at 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5,
1, 2, 5, 10 and 20 kHz
Electrophysiology
Bridge Output Resist. 100 Ω
Meter
31⁄2 digit LED, Full Scale Ranges: Amplifier Output:
200 mV, 2 V and 20 V Current: 200 nA and 2 µA
Power Requirements
100 to 130 or 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Physical Dimensions:
amplifiers
BB-15
Breakaway
Box
Probe
12.5 mm D x 6.2 cm L with 1.8 m L cable
Case
8.9 x 43.2 x 30.5 cm (H x W x D)
Shipping Weight
5.5 kg
Warranty
Three years, parts and labor
* At x1 output
RB-1
Remote Buzz
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0039 IE-210
Intracellular Electrometer;
Supplied with Probe and Rack Mount
Hardware. Specify Line Operating
Voltage if Other Than 100 to 130 VAC.
W4 64-0042 2100
Replacement Headstage
Optional Accessories
Specifications
Electrometer Section:
Input Impedance
206
5 x 10 Ω shunted By 0.5 pF
W4 64-0040 BB-15
Breakaway Box
W4 64-0041 RB-1
Remote Buzz Control
W4 64-0964 ESP/W-F10N
Electrode Holder, Straight 1.0mm
for IE-210/251A
11
100 Ω
W4 64-0965 ESP/W-F12N
Output Resistance
Electrode Holder, Straight 1.2mm
for IE-210/251A
Gain
x1 ±0.1%
W4 64-0966 ESP/W-F15N
Probe Input Range
±10 V
Electrode Holder, Straight 1.5mm
for IE-210/251A
Risetime (10-90%)
25 µsec, measured through 20 MΩ
W4 64-0967 ESP/W-F20N
Noise Level
25 µV p-p input shorted
Electrode Holder, Straight 2.0mm
for IE-210/251A
(0.1 Hz – 10 kHz)*
250 µV p-p, 20 MΩ at input
Capacitance
Compensation
0 to 50 pF
Leakage Current
1 pA typical, adjustable to zero
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
amplifiers
IE-251A
Intracellular Electrometer
A moderately priced intracellular electrometer complete with current passing capability
Specifications
Amplifier:
Input Impedance
Noise Level
The amplifier features include:
• Fixed gains are at x1 and x10.
• Capacity Compensation neutralizes input capacitance up to 50 pF.
• Junction potentials up to ±200 millivolts are nulled with the DC
Position control.
• Electrode Test provides convenient electrode
resistance check.
• Push button operated Buzz produces oscillations at pipette tip to
facilitate cell impalement.
• Convenient Probe Test port permits fast check of amplifier
performance.
Current Injection
The injection circuitry of the IE-251A allows simultaneous stimulation and
recording through microelectrode resistances up to 1 GΩ in two ranges.
Voltages at the Stimulus Input are converted to constant currents applied
to the electrode. The steady state and transient components of the
current injection artifact are nulled with the DC and transient balance
controls. The corrected signal is viewed at the single-ended bridge output.
Electrode resistance is read from the DC balance ten-turn dial.
Overdrive Indicators
Two visual indicators call attention to overload conditions:
• Input Overdrive is illuminated whenever the probe input voltage
exceeds ±1 V, caused by either excessive current through the
microelectrode or an open circuit (open or blocked electrode).
• Current Overdrive warns of excessive voltage
(>50 V) applied to the Stimulus Input.
This Intracellular Electrometer is supplied with a probe. An Electrode
Holder must be purchased separately based on your glass outer diameter.
Also, specify line operating voltage if other than 100-130 VAC.
Output Resistance
100 Ω
Gains
x1 and x10
Rise Time (10 to 90%)
10 µsec measured with 20 MΩ resistor
Capacity Compensation
0 to 50 pF
Probe Input Voltage Range
±1 V
DC Positioning Range
±200 mV referred to input
Leakage Current
Adjustable to zero
Electrode Test
1 mV/MΩ
Amplitude variable
0 to 15 V
Frequency variable
100 Hz to 10 kHz
Buzz:
Current Injection:
Balance Ranges
0 to 100 MΩ and 0 to 1000 MΩ
Current Injection Limit
±1 V divided by electrode R or 0.5 µA,
whichever occurs first
Stimulus Input Resistance
3.3 kΩ
Maximum Stimulus Input
±50 V
Bridge Bal. Output Resist.
100 Ω
I Monitor Output Resist.
1 kΩ
I Monitor Output Scale Factor 1V = 50 nA
Power Requirements
100 to 130 or 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Physical Dimensions:
Case Size
12.5 x 20.3 x 25.4 cm (H x W x D)
Probe
9.5 mm x 6.5 cm (D x L) with 1.8 m L cable
Probe Handle
6.5 mm x 6.5 cm (D x L)
Shipping Weight
4.5 kg
Warranty
Two years, parts & labor
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
The IE-251A features a very small active headstage, essentially the same
as used with the more costly IE-210. Epoxy-sealed construction affords
maximum resistance to saline corrosion. Its small size and low mass
permit easy mounting in a micro-positioner. The electrode holder supplied
connects directly to the probe input.
(0.1 Hz to 10 kHz)* 25 µV p-p input shorted
250 µV p-p, 20 MΩ at input
amplifiers
The IE-251A is a moderately priced intracellular electrometer, complete
with current passing capability, incorporating the same basic design as
the more costly IE-210. The important features required for low noise,
drift free recording from glass microelectrodes have been retained in this
lower cost model. The IE-251A is easy to use and an excellent choice for
the budget-conscious researcher or student teaching lab.
>1011Ω shunted by 0.5 pF
* At x1 output.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0090 IE-251A
Intracellular Electrometer
Electrode Holders for IE-210/251A,
110 VAC
W4 64-1514 IE-251A
Intracellular Electrometer
Electrode Holders for IE-210/251A,
200/240 VAC
W4 64-0964 ESP/W-F10N Electrode Holder, Straight
1.0mm glass OD for IE-210/251A
W4 64-0965 ESP/W-F12N Electrode Holder, Straight
1.2mm glass OD for IE-210/251A
W4 64-0966 ESP/W-F15N Electrode Holder, Straight
1.5mm glass OD for IE-210/251A
W4 64-0967 ESP/W-F20N Electrode Holder, Straight
2.0mm glass OD for IE-210/251A
Optional Accessories
W4 64-0043 2510
Replacement Headstage
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
207
amplifiers
DP-301 & DP-304
Differential Amplifier: Single Channel and 4-Channel
Single and four channel AC/DC differential pre-amplifiers suited for EEG, EKG and extracellular recording
DP-304
The DP-300 Series are AC/DC differential amplifiers highly suited for EEG,
EKG and extracellular recording. Features include high input impedance,
high common mode rejection [100 dB @ 60 Hz], low noise, high gain, high
tolerance to DC, and bandwidth filtering.
High Input Z, High CMR
Electrophysiology
High common mode rejection (CMR) is very important in minimizing
electrical interference. The high input resistance of the DP-300 Series
(1012 Ω typical) ensures that the instrument’s high CMR will not be
degraded by differences in source impedance at the input. This is
important in extracellular recording, where the difference in resistance of
the recording and indifferent electrode is often large.
DP-301
Specifications
Voltage Gain, AC & DC
1012 Ω typical
Leakage Current
50 pA typical at the input has 100 m
Common Mode Rejection
100 dB min (100,000:1) at 60 Hz
Noise, Input Shorted
10 µV p-p, 1 Hz to 10 kHz, ≈ 14 nV/ Hz @ 10 KHz
Maximum
amplifiers
Low Frequency (high pass)
Filter Settings
0.1, 1.0, 10 & 300 Hz
High Frequency (low pass)
Filter Settings
0.1, 1.0, 3.0 & 10 kHz
High DC Tolerance
Calibration Signal
1 mV p-p at 10 Hz
Extracellular action potentials are typically measured in microvolts but are
usually accompanied by much larger DC electrode voltages. DP-300 Series
are designed to amplify these microvolt level events with as much as ±3
V DC at the input.
Max. Common Mode Signal
±3 V
Output Voltage Swing
±10 V
Output Resistance
220
Input & Output Connectors
BNC
High Gain, Low Noise & Bandwidth Limiting
Power Requirements:
With gain selections at x100, x1000 and x10,000, even microvolt signals
are sufficiently amplified for computer and recorder inputs. Noise is very
low, typically 10 µV p-p at 1 Hz to 10 kHz bandwidth. Reducing the
bandwidth with the low pass and high pass filters further lowers noise.
Calibration Signal
The internal Cal signal provides a convenient check of amplifier gain and
operation.
DP-301
4 x 9 V alkaline batteries
DP-304
110 to 130 or 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Physical Size, H x W x D:
DP-301
8.8 x 20 x 17.5 cm
DP-304
17.8 x 43.2 x 25 cm
Shipping Weight
DP-301: 2.3 kg; DP-304: 6.8 kg
Warranty:
Battery Powered/Portable DP-301
DP-301
Two years, parts and labor (excluding batteries)
The single channel DP-301 is powered with 4 standard 9 V transistor
batteries yielding approximately 500 hours of normal operation.
DP-304
Three years, parts and labor
The small size of the DP-301 makes it possible to be placed at the
measurement site or inside a Faraday cage. End of battery life is indicated
by the Low Bat light.
Order #
W4 64-0044 DP-301
Model
Differential Amplifier,
Single Channel Bench Top
Rack Mounted DP-304
W4 64-0045 DP-304
Differential Amplifier,
4-Channel Rack Mount Case.
Each Channel Supplied with IC-2S
Input Cables, qty. of 2
W4 64-0046 IC-2S
Replacement Input Cable Set,
qty. of 2
W4 64-0047 IC-4M
Replacement Input Cable Set,
qty. of 2
The DP-304 is housed in a rack mounting cabinet and is line powered.
Input Cables
The standard IC-2S input cables (2/channel) are BNC and unterminated at
the outboard end. Optionally available are BNC cables with 2 mm pin and
alligator clip, (p/n IC-4M). There is no additional cost if specified at time
of order.
208
x100, x1,000 & x10,000
Input Resistance
Product
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
amplifiers
DP-311
Differential Amplifier with Active Headstage
The DP-311 AC/DC differential pre-amplifier is highly suited for EEG, EKG and extracellular recording
The DP-311 AC/DC Differential Amplifier is highly suited for EEG, EKG
and extracellular recording using glass or metal microelectrodes. Features
include high input impedance, high common mode rejection [120 dB at
60 Hz], low noise, high gain, high DC tolerance, bandwidth filtering and
an active headstage.
Specifications
Voltage Gain, AC & DC
x10, x100, x1,000 & x10,000
Input Resistance
1012Ω typical
Leakage Current
1.0 pA typical
Common Mode Rejection
120 dB min (1,000,000 :1) at 60 Hz
Noise, Input Shorted
8 µV p-p, 1 Hz to 10 kHz typical,
≈ 14 nV/ Hz @ 10 KHz Maximum
Low Frequency (high pass)
Filter Settings
DC, 0.1, 1.0, 10 & 300 Hz
High Frequency (low pass)
Filter Settings
0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 3.0 & 10, 50 kHz
Offset Control Range
±600 mV min at output, any gain set
High Input Z, High CMR
Calibration Signal
1 mV p-p at 100 Hz
High common mode rejection is very important in minimizing electrical
interference. The high input resistance of the DP-311 Series (1012 Ω
typical) ensures that the instrument’s high CMR will not be degraded by
differences in source impedance at the input. This is important in
extracellular recording, where the difference in resistance of the
recording and indifferent electrode is often large.
Max. Common Mode Signal
±2 V
Output Voltage Swing
±10 V (±5 V in gain of 10)
High DC Tolerance
Physical Size, H x W x D
5.1 x 21.25 x 18 cm
Extracellular action potentials are typically measured in microvolts but are
usually accompanied by much larger DC electrode voltages. The DP-311 is
designed to amplify these microvolt level events with as much as ±2 Volts
DC at the input.
Shipping Weight
2.3 kg
Warranty
Two years, parts and labor
High Gain, Low Noise & Bandwidth Limiting
W4 64-1422 DP-311
Differential Amplifier
With gain selections at x10, x100, x1000 and x10,000, even microvolt
signals are sufficiently amplified for computer and recorder inputs. Noise
is very low, typically 8 µV p-p at 1 Hz to 10 kHz bandwidth. Reducing the
bandwidth with the low pass and high pass filters further lowers noise.
W4 64-1423 3110
Replacement Headstage
W4 64-1323 PJ2-5
2 mm Jack uninsulated, pkg. of 5
Output Resistance
50 Ω
Input Connectors
2 mm male pins, 0.5" in (12.7 mm) spacing
Output Connector
BNC
Power Requirements
90 to 270 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Order #
Model
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
• Excellent common mode rejection: 120 dB at 60 Hz
• Small active headstage which can be mounted in
micromanipulators
• Suitable for use with high impedance glass or
metal microelectrodes
DP-311 Headstage
amplifiers
DP-311
Product
Calibration Signal
An internal Cal signal provides a convenient check of amplifier gain and
operation.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
209
amplifiers
Model HiZ-223
Dual Channel Differential Electrometer
The HiZ-223 is a very high input impedance, dual channel electrometer designed for measurements
with high resistance ion-selective microelectrodes
Electrophysiology
amplifiers
• 1015Ω Input Resistance
• Designed for measurements with ion-selective
microelectrodes
• Probe Test Port
• Standby mode protects input amplifiers
• Driven Guard Shield reduces stray capacity
and noise
The HiZ-223 is a very high input impedance, dual channel electrometer
designed for measurements with high resistance ion-selective
microelectrodes. The amplifier features two small active headstages,
allowing the first stage of amplification to take place at the electrode
site. Shunt capacity is reduced and electrical interference, such as
electrostatic noise and motion artifact, common with this type of
recording, are greatly minimized.
To further reduce the noise and stray capacity, the probe housing includes
a signal driven guard. A portion of this inner driven shell is exposed at the
probe tip allowing a spring shield to be extended over the electrode
holder and microelectrode.
210
Specifications
Input Resistance
1015 Ω
Input Capacitance
1.0 pF nominal
Input Leakage Current
75 fA max
Voltage Gain
1.000 ± 0.1%
Output Resistance
50 Ω
Input Voltage Swing
± 10 V
Risetime
5 µs (10 -90%, small signal)
Output Noise (input shorted)
100 µV peak-to-peak
Baseline Stability
± 0.1 mV/day
Position Control Range
± 600 mV
Power Requirements
90 to 265 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Physical Dimensions:
Case Size
8.8 x 21 x 17.5 cm (H x W x D)
Probe
12.7 mm x 6.5 cm (D x W) with 1.8 m cable length
Shipping Weight
2.5 kg
Warranty
Order #
Two years, parts & labor
Model
Product
The amplifier features a probe test port that permits testing of the
electrode test feature and setting of the probe leakage current, (IG).
W4 64-1650 HiZ-223
Dual Differential Electrometer
A standby mode is included and should be used when attaching glass
microelectrode or electrode holders to the probe input. While in the
standby mode the voltage at the probe input is clamped near zero volts
thus protecting the input.
W4 64-1651 HiZP
Replacement Probe
W4 64-1658 DG-1
Driven Guard Shield Pkg. 2
W4 64-0980 ESP-F10N
E Series Holder for 1.0 mm glass OD
W4 64-0981 ESP-F12N
E Series Holder for 1.2 mm glass OD
W4 64-0982 ESP-F15N
E Series Holder for 1.5 mm glass OD
W4 64-0983 ESP-F20N
E Series Holder for 2.0 mm glass OD
Accessories/Replacement Parts
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
low pass filters
LPF-8
8-Pole Bessel Filter with DC Differential Amplifier–Single Channel
A signal conditioner combining an 8-pole Bessel filter with a DC amplifier
Specifications
The LPF-8 is the premier low-pass Bessel filter from Warner Instruments
and provides superior control of analog signal filtering from 0.1 Hz to 20
kHz. The instrument incorporates low-pass signal filtering and output
gains from 1 to 200. Dual selectable signal inputs allow the instrument to
be configured to operate in normal, inverted or differential modes.
This instrument features an optically encoded circuit which permits
frequency selection in two ranges with a single control. Since the set
frequency control is not a physical part of the filtering circuit, adjustments
to the instrument do not introduce noise artifacts into the output signal.
DC Differential
Input Impedance
1 MΩ each channel
The unique circuit design uses no mechanical switching which insures
long-term instrument reliability.
Input Range
±10 V
User Conveniences
Input Offset
2 Ranges, ±100 mV and ±1.0 V variable from zero
with 10-turn control; Max offset compensation
• Frequency is dialed up with a single rotary control in 2 ranges.
Resolution is 0.1 Hz or 10 Hz, depending on range selected.
Offset Indicator
20 LED Display
• BYPASS switch selects full amplifier bandwidth for comparison of
filtered and unfiltered signal.
Low
0.1 to 199.9 Hz
High
10 Hz to 19.99 kHz
Input
Frequency Ranges:
Low Range Resolution
0.1 Hz
• The DC OFFSET/CLIPPING indicator is a zero center display serving
two functions; it is used as a null meter with the offset control
and it indicates overload (clipping) conditions.
High Range Resolution
10 Hz
• Gain telegraph signals are provided for data acquisition systems.
Gains
x1, x2, x5, x10, x20, x50, x100 and x200
Gain Telegraph Output
2.5 V to 6.0 V in 0.5 V steps, x1 Gain = 2.5 V
Output Impedance
50 Ω
Power Requirements
100-130 VAC or 200-250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Enclosure
Rack Mount Cabinet, H x W x D, 4.4 x 43.2 x 20 cm
rack hardware included
Shipping Weight
4.6 kg
Warranty
2 years
Order #
Model
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
The LPF-8 is a signal conditioner combining an 8-pole low pass Bessel
filter and DC amplifier. Special features include a digital frequency
readout, visual input offset indicator, clipping indicator, and gain
telegraph outputs.
low pass filters
• Provides greater frequency control for Bilayer,
Patch, and Oocyte Clamps
• High quality 8-pole Bessel filter
• 8-Pole low pass Bessel filter with cutoff
frequencies from 0.1 Hz to 20 kHz.
• Differential amplifier gains to x200
• Frequency selection with single control
• Input offset adjustment
• Digital frequency readout
• Rack mountable
Product
W4 64-0050 LPF-8
Low Pass Filter/DC Amplifier,
Single Channel Rack Mount
100-130 VAC
W4 64-1524 LPF-8
Low Pass Filter/DC Amplifier,
200-240 VAC 50/60 HZ
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
211
low pass filters
LPF-100B and LPF-202A
Low Pass Filters, Single and Dual Channel
These DC amplifier and signal conditioners are used to filter noise and boost signals to levels compatible with
computers, chart recorders, and DAT recorders
LPF-100B (inset) and LPF-202A
Electrophysiology
• Useful with Epithelial and Oocyte Clamps
Specifications
low pass filters
Input Impedance
4-Pole low pass Bessel filters with DC Amplifier
Gains from 1 to 100
1 MΩ
Input Offset
±200 mV @ input
Gains
x1, x2, x5, x10, x20, x50, & x100
LPF DC Amplifier/Filter signal conditioners are used to filter noise and
boost signals to levels compatible with computers, chart recorders and
tape recorders. Built with analog circuitry, these instruments exhibit very
low noise and excellent stability.
Input Range
± 10V
The 4-pole low pass Bessel filter frequencies are selected in six steps,
from 100 Hz to 5 kHz and gains are selectable from 1 to 100 in seven
steps, both in 1, 2, 5 sequence. The full 10 kHz bandwidth is also
available. DC signals at the input can be nulled with the Input Offset
control. If the gain is set too high for the signal being processed, the
Overload indicator will light.
Single & Dual Channel Models
The LPF-100B is a single channel bench top instrument. The LPF-202A is
a dual-channel model packaged in a low profile rack mounting cabinet
(hardware supplied). Both models have input shorting switches that are
handy for quickly establishing a zero level at the input. The LPF-202A
also has a digital meter for reading DC or average voltage levels. Both
models are line powered and covered by a 2-year warranty.
Noise (referred to input)
12 µV RMS DC-5 kHz, 20 µV RMS wideband
Max. Output
±10 V
Bandwidth
10 kHz @ x100 gain
Filter
4-Pole Bessel low pass
-3 dB Frequencies
0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2 & 5 kHz
Digital Meter (LPF-202A):
Low Range
High Range
±1.999 V
±19.999 V
Overload Indicator:
Lights when output exceeds ±10 V
Power Requirements
100-130 VAC or 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3 VA
Physical Size, H x W x D:
LPF-100B
6.3 x 14 x 23 cm, shipping weight 2.3 kg
LPF-202A
4.4 x 43.2 x 20 cm, shipping weight 4.6 kg
Warranty
Order #
Two years, parts and labor
Model
Product
W4 64-0048 LPF-100B
Low Pass Filter/DC Amplifier,
Single Channel
W4 64-0049 LPF-202A
Low Pass Filter/DC Amplifier,
Dual Channel Rack Mount
W4 64-1510 LPF-100B
Low Pass Filter/DC Amplifier,
Single Channel, for 200 to 240 VAC
W4 64-1511 LPF-202A
Low Pass Filter/DC Amplifier,
Dual Channel Rack Mount,
for 200 to 240 VAC
Rack mount hardware supplied with LPF-202A.
212
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
Introduction to Ussing Chamber Systems
For the investigation of ionic transport across epithelial cells, whether by diffusion or active transport
U9500 Classic Ussing System (preamp not included)
A well designed Ussing chamber supports an epithelia
membrane or cell monolayer in such a way that each
side of the membrane is isolated and faces a separate
chamber-half. This configuration allows the researcher
to make unique chemical and electrical adjustments to
either side of the membrane with complete control.
Study Types
Ussing systems can be used for either electrophysiology- or diffusionbased studies, or for a combination of both. They can also be used for
radiotracer studies wherein the ionic species under transport is
radiolabled. For convenience, we will consider radiotracer studies to
operate within the context of a diffusion- or electrophysiology-based
system.
While each approach described above makes use of a chamber and fluid
handling system, an electrophysiology-based setup has the added
dimension of a current and/or voltage clamp amplifier and data
acquisition system. Relevant components include:
Diffusion-based system
Electrophysiology-based system
• A chamber with perfusion
system and
tissue holding apparatus
• A chamber with perfusion
system and
tissue holding apparatus
• Temperature and gas control,
if needed
• Temperature and gas control,
if needed
• The ability to acquire data
• Amplifier
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Epithelia are polar structures possessing an apical (or
mucosal) and basolateral (or serosal) side. It is the
movement of electrolytes, non-electrolytes, and H2O
across this membrane that is of interest to the
researcher. Ussing systems have been used to make
measurements from native tissue including stomach,
large and small intestine, gall and urinary bladder,
skin, and trachea, as well as from tissue derived cell
monolayers from various sources including renal
tubes, pancreas, and salivary and sweat glands.
ussing/diffusion
An Ussing System, used to measure transport across
epithelial membranes, is generally comprised of a
chamber and perfusion system, and, if needed, an
amplifier and data acquisition system. The heart of the
system lies in the chamber with the other components
performing supporting roles. The ‘Classic’ chamber
design, first introduced by the Danish physiologist
Hans Ussing in the early 1950’s, is still in wide use
today. However, several newer designs are now
available that optimize for convenience and for
diffusion- or electrophysiology-based measurements.
• Data acquisition system
and software
A Systems Approach
Warner instruments offers many Ussing system components embodying
several different design philosophies. Fortunately, the various components
are generally interchangeable with each other (i.e., all the amps are
compatible with all the chambers). While this presents the potential for a
great degree of flexibility and customization, it can also increase the
complexity of selecting the optimum combination of Ussing system
components for your needs.
The goal of this article is to outline the advantages and disadvantages
associated with each Ussing chamber design with an eye towards guiding
you in selecting the best components for your application.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
213
ussing/diffusion
Introduction to Ussing Chamber Systems
(continued)
Ussing Measurements
A basic understanding of different Ussing measurements commonly made
can guide you in determining which components best fit your needs when
building a system. As stated earlier, Ussing systems can be defined as
being either diffusion- or electrophysiology-based.
A diffusion-based system is generally focused on measuring
transepithelial fluid transport and is used to follow net movement of H2O
or solute across the membrane. By itself, diffusion-based systems do not
provide specific information regarding the underlying transport
mechanism and are best suited towards measurements of leaky epithelia
characterized by electroneutral transport.
While fluid transport can result in a volume change in the recording
chamber, it is usually quantitated by measuring a corresponding change in
a volume marker. Volume markers include changes in salt or dye
concentration, or changes in physical characteristics such as fluid
capacitance or resistance. Advantages of fluid transport measurements
using a volume marker include good temporal resolution and sensitivity to
small fluxes (volume changes as low as ±1 nl/min have been reported). A
disadvantage is the requirement for small volume chambers.
Electrophysiology
An electrophysiology-based system focuses on measuring transepithelial
electrical responses to experimental perturbations. These systems are
used to quantitate the operation of electrogenic pathways in the
membrane (e.g., ion pumps, channels, etc). As such, an electrophysiologybased system carries the additional hardware requirement of a voltage
and/or current clamp amplifier, a data acquisition system, and
collection/analysis software.
ussing/diffusion
Basic measurement parameters in electrophysiology-based Ussing
systems include transmembrane voltage (Vt), epithelial membrane
resistance (Rt), and short circuit current (ISC; the current required to bring
Vt to 0 mV). A limitation with these systems is that non-electrogenic ion
transport mechanisms such as fluid transport and electroneutral ion
transport cannot be directly monitored. This limitation, however, can be
addressed by employing indirect or secondary measurements such as ion
replacement, transport inhibition, and the use of hormones and second
messengers.
The use of radioisotope tracers is one measurement technique deserving
special mention. This technique can be applied equally well to both
diffusion- and electrophysiology-based measurements and is usually
employed to provide information regarding ion-specific transport
mechanisms. For example, a diffusion-based model cannot identify the
fluid being transported or if the measured volume change is the result of
a hydrostatic or osmotic process. Finally, if an osmotic-driven volume
change is mediated by an ionic mechanism, then the responsible ion is
not identified. By comparison, a limitation with the electrophysiologybased model is that while ionic transport can be measured, the specific
ion crossing the membrane is not specifically determined. This is
especially true for multi-ionic salt conditions. For both cases, the use of a
radiolabeled ionic species allows for directly monitoring ion-specific
translocation for the two measurement systems described above.
214
The Components
An Ussing system is comprised of a chamber and perfusion system, and if
needed, an amplifier and data acquisition package. If working at defined
temperatures, then a circulating water bath is also needed for the heat
jackets.
The Chamber System
While decisions need to be made for each step in assembling a complete
Ussing system, the greatest complexity is associated with choosing the
chamber and its associated tissue support. Once these elements have
been addressed, then the task of selecting the other components
(amplification, data acquisition, etc) is more or less direct.
All Ussing chamber systems have the following features in common: a
means to hold the membrane while minimizing tissue damage, a means
for holding and exchanging solutions, a means to facilitate precise
electrode placement, and a means to control solution temperature
and gas load.
Ussing chamber systems from Warner include the Classic, introduced by
Ussing in the 50’s, Self-Contained, incorporating the full classic setup
within a small housing, and Multi-Channel systems, allowing
simultaneous measurement from many epithelia in parallel. Most
chamber systems, except the Classic and NaviCyte Vertical make use
of inserts allowing them to accommodate various tissues as well as
cultured cells on permeable supports (e.g., Snapwell, Millicell, Falcon,
and Transwell) without having to purchase a separate chamber for
each support.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
Introduction to Ussing Chamber Systems
(continued)
The Classic is the fundamental chamber system as designed by Ussing.
The Amplifier
It is comprised of a cylindrical tissue holder to which the electrodes and
plumbing attach. Tissues are mounted directly onto and are compressed
between the two chamber-halves. A variety of tissue chambers are
available with both round and slotted openings. The enclosed baths
(apical, basolateral) are perfused via a glass circulation reservoir that
mounts above the chamber. The reservoir uses a ‘gas-lift’ mechanism to
drive circulation and to provide gas tension. Reservoirs are available in 4,
10, and 20 ml volumes.
An amplifier is required if making electrophysiology-based measurement.
Warner offers a large selection of amplifiers, all compatible with the
chamber systems described above. Available options include the EC-800
and VCC-600 single channel amplifiers, the EC-825A and VCC-MC2 dual
channel amplifiers, and finally, the VCC-MC6 and VCC-MC8 six and eight
channel amplifiers, respectively.
The Self-contained chamber systems provide all of the features of the
Classic system but houses the full apparatus (chamber, electrodes, and
perfusion system) within a single Lucite block. Tissues or cultured cells
mount into a two piece assembly (an insert) that is easily placed into the
chamber from the top. Temperature control is provided via an external
circulating water bath. Self-contained chambers are available in both
single and dual channel models.
The Multi-channel chamber systems include the Navicyte and
EasyMount designs. Both designs make use of a support assembly to
hold anywhere from 2 to 24 independent chambers (depending on design)
and to couple the perfusion and electronic components to the chambers.
Navicyte chambers are available in both horizontal and vertical
configurations and the EasyMount chambers are only available in
the vertical configuration.
• The Navicyte Horizontal configuration accommodates from 1 to 6
chambers and is ideal for studying mucosal layers at an air/liquid
interface. Navicyte Horizontal chambers make use of a mounting ring or
Snapwell insert to support the tissue of interest.
• The Navicyte Vertical configuration is well designed for
diffusion-based studies and accommodates from 1 to 24 chambers.
Tissues are supported directly in the chamber block and no insert is
required. However, a chamber block supporting a Snapwell insert is
also available.
A second acquisition system offered is the HAI-118. Output from Warner's
EC-800 and EC-825A, as well the VCC Series epithelial voltage clamps,
can be fed directly into the HAI-118. The voltage clamp protocol in the
LabScribe program's stimulator section makes recording of data of four to
six epithelial channels possible.
There is another option, however, that bears special mention. This is the
Computer Controlled Multi-clamp with Software. This is a unique package
that houses several amplifiers (2, 4, or 6), a computer, and the software
all in a single box. As such, a separate amplifier and data acquisition
system are not needed when using the Multi-clamp with Software.
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
system except that the tissues are supported via inserts. This system
also supports cultured cells on Snapwell, Millicell, Falcon, or Transwell
culture cups.
Data acquisition is necessary for collecting data from the Ussing system
(usually from the amplifier when making electrophysiological recordings)
and processing it into a digital form for later analysis on a computer. The
basic system offered for this purpose by Warner is the Acquire and
Analyze acquisition system.
ussing/diffusion
The Classic with Insert chamber system is the same as the Classic
Data Acquisition Packages
• The EasyMount configuration accommodates from 2 to 8 chambers
and are well designed for electrophysiology-based measurements
EasyMount chambers are visually similar to the Navicyte Vertical c
hambers but differ in that they require the use of an insert to secure
and place the tissue into the chamber.
215
U9500 & U2520
ussing/diffusion
Classic Ussing Systems
The Classic system as designed by H.H. Ussing
The investigation of ionic transport across epithelial
cells was greatly facilitated by the development of a
chamber system designed by Dr. H. H. Ussing more
than 40 years ago. Today this equipment bears his
name. The U9500 ‘Classic’ design presented here
varies little from Dr. Ussing’s original equipment
which remains in wide use for the study of
electrophysiological properties of epithelial tissues.
U9500 Classic Ussing System (preamp not included)
A newer design, the U9520 ‘Classic with Inserts’
allows for insertion of cell culture or tissue supports
and greatly increases the functionality of the classic
Ussing chamber. The low initial cost of the Classic
design, coupled with the modest cost of add-on
components, makes this system an ideal option for
classroom instruction and in-the-field research.
The Classic Ussing Chamber Systems
The U9500 and U9520 are complete chamber systems consisting of an
Ussing chamber, chamber support stand, circulation reservoir, 3-prong
clamp, air/gas fitting kit, and electrode set. Both systems are virtually
identical with the difference embodied in the actual chamber.
U9500 ‘Classic’ Ussing Chambers
Electrophysiology
The U9500 ‘Classic’ chambers are machined from solid acrylic into two
halves and have vertical and horizontal ports in each half for connection
to the circulation system and for making electrical connections.
ussing/diffusion
The face of one chamber-half is imbedded with sharp stainless-steel pins
which mate with corresponding holes in the other chamber-half face.
These pins allow for puncturing and positioning of an epithelium
membrane within the chamber. Chambers are available in a variety of
sizes and pin configurations. In the ‘Classic’ design, a separate chamber
must be purchased for each different desired pin configuration. This is a
good choice if you intend to study a single tissue type as the assembly is
direct and simple.
U9520 ‘Classic with Inserts’ Ussing Chambers
The U9520 ‘Classic with Inserts’ chamber is functionally similar to the
U9500 except that it makes use of low-cost adapters (inserts) to position
and support tissues or cultured cells within the chamber body. Inserts are
interchangeable and permit the researcher to investigate a variety of
tissues without having to purchase a separate chamber for each different
tissue. The U9520 ‘Classic with Inserts’ chamber is mounted in the
standard support stand and procedures for experimentation are the same
as with the ‘Classic’ system.
216
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
U9500 & U2520
ussing/diffusion
Classic Ussing Systems (continued)
Tissue Insert Sizes, Openings and Pin Layouts
Circulation
Reservoir
U9500 chambers are available with pinned openings in diameters from
3.8 to 13.5 mm and in slot widths from 1.6 to 3.5 mm to accommodate a
variety of tissue dimensions. The choice of pin configuration depends on
the epithelia under study. The specified diameter designates the main
opening to which the buffer makes contact with the membrane.
U9520 chamber inserts are available with openings in diameters from 3.8
to 13.5 mm. Inserts are also available for culture cups from Falcon,
Millicell, Snapwell, and Transwell.
Both U9500 and U9520 chambers are available with and without drains.
Circulation Reservoirs, 3 Volumes
Available in 4, 10, and 20 ml capacities (per side), circulation reservoirs
are two sided, hand-blown apparatus made from borosilicate glass. Each
side has two outlets at the base for connection to the perfusion fittings
on the associated Ussing chamber-half. Each side also has a separate
air/gas inlet to drive the circulation system. Gas, commonly a 95% O2/5%
CO2 mixture, is forced under low pressure into these inlets and allowed
to come into contact with the buffer solution. The rising bubbles drive
circulation and oxygenate the buffer. This method is commonly referred to
as a ‘gas-lift’ perfusion system.
Each horizontal reservoir arm has either an inlet or outlet port for access
to the water jacket. Water at the desired temperature is pumped through
the jacket and allowing thermoregulation of the perfusion solutions. Glass
condensers are provided to minimize evaporative solution losses from the
top. Reservoirs are.
Electrode Sets and Agar Bridge Fittings
Each chamber is supplied with a U9975A Electrode Set comprised of 4
electrodes, 2 Ag-AgCl pellet electrodes (for voltage) and 2 Ag wire
electrodes (for current). Electrodes include 1 meter (3 feet) of wire and a
connector to plug into the amplifier headstage.
Also supplied are Luer taper fittings that screw onto the electrodes to
provide an agar salt bridge connection into the chamber. Fittings can be
filled with agar either before or after assembly onto the electrodes.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
Chamber configurations
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
*All dimensions in millimeters
217
ussing/diffusion
U9500 & U2520
Classic Ussing Systems (continued)
How To Order:
• Select Base Assembly with desired reservoir size. Systems include support stand with rods, circulation reservoir, 3-prong clamp,
U9303 Air/Gas Fitting Kit, U9975A Electrode Set, and U9965EP Electrode Bridge Fitting Kit.
• Select chamber. Choices are ‘Classic’ or ‘Classic with Insert’. Both available with or without drains.
• Finally, if using ‘Classic with Insert’, select desired insert.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0500R4
U95004R
Classic Ussing Base Assembly with 4 ml circulation reservoir
W4 64-0500R10
U950010R
Classic Ussing Base Assembly with 10 ml circulation reservoir
W4 64-0500R20
U950020R
Classic Ussing Base Assembly with 20 ml circulation reservoir
Base Assembly
‘Classic’ Chambers
Without Drains With Drains
w/o
Electrophysiology
W4 64-0504
W4 64-0512
U9504
‘Classic’ Chamber with 3.8 mm D round opening
W4 64-0505
W4 64-0513
U9506
‘Classic’ Chamber with 6.0 mm D round opening
W4 64-0506
W4 64-0514
U9509
‘Classic’ Chamber with 9.0 mm D round opening
W4 64-0507
W4 64-0515
U9512
‘Classic’ Chamber with 12.0 mm D round opening
W4 64-0508
W4 64-0516
U9513
‘Classic’ Chamber with 13.5 mm D round opening
W4 64-0509
W4 64-0517
U9504SP-1
‘Classic’ Chamber with 1.5 x 7.0 mm slotted opening
W4 64-0510
W4 64-0518
U9504SP-2
‘Classic’ Chamber with 2.5 x 7.0 mm slotted opening
W4 64-0511
W4 64-0519
U9504SP-3
‘Classic’ Chamber with 3.5 x 7.0 mm slotted opening
U9521
‘Classic with Insert’ Chamber, no insert
‘Classic with Insert’ Chamber
Without Drains With Drains
W4 64-0532
ussing/diffusion
Order #
W4-64-0533
Model
Product
Order #
Model
Product
Chamber Inserts
Accessories and replacement parts
Inserts with pins
W4 64-0553
U9565EP Electrode Bridge Fittings,
pkg. of 12, and Adapters, pkg. of 6
W4 64-0554
U9975A
W4 64-0539 U9524B-04
3.8 mm Round Insert with 5 Pins
W4 64-0540 U9524B-06
6.0 mm Round Insert with 5 Pins
W4 64-0541 U9524B-09
9.0 mm Round Insert with 5 Pins
W4 64-0542 U9524B-12
12.0 mm Round Insert with 5 Pins
W4 64-0543 U9524B-13
13.5 mm Round Insert with 5 Pins
Inserts with o-rings
W4 64-0534 U9524A-04
3.8 mm Round Insert with O-Ring
W4 64-0535 U9524A-06
6.0 mm Round Insert with O-Ring
W4 64-0536 U9524A-09
9.0 mm Round Insert with O-Ring
W4 64-0537 U9524A-12
12.0 mm Round Insert with O-Ring
W4 64-0538 U9524A-12
13.5 mm Round Insert with O-Ring
Inserts for culture cups
218
with
Electrode Set, 2 Ag/AgCl Pellet,
2 Ag Wire
W4 64-0555
U9985
Bridge Fitting Adapters, pkg. of 6
W3 64-0556
U9304
Circulation reservoir,
4 ml total volume
W3 64-0557
U9310
Circulation reservoir,
10 ml total volume
W3 64-0558
U9320
Circulation reservoir,
20 ml total volume
W4 64-0560-4ml
U9302-4
Condenser Set for 4 ml
Circulation Reservoir, Set of 2
W4 64-0560-10ml U9302-10 Condenser Set for 10 ml
Circulation Reservoir, Set of 2
W4 64-0549 U9524S
Snapwell™ Adapter
W4 64-0544 U9524F-09
Falcon® Adapter, 9 mm
W4 64-0560-20ml U9302-20 Condenser Set for 20 ml
Circulation Reservoir, Set of 2
W4 64-0545 U9524F-12
Falcon® Adapter, 12 mm
W4 64-0561
U9303
Air/Gas Connection Kit
W4 64-0546 U9524F-25
Falcon® Adapter, 25 mm
W4 64-0562
U9403
W4 64-0547 U9524M-12
Millicell® Adapter, 12 mm
Support Stand with One Ring
Stand Rod
W4 64-0548 U9524M-30
Millicell® Adapter, 30 mm
W4 64-0563
U9403R
Ring Stand Rod
W4 64-0550 U9524T-06
Transwell®
Adapter, 6.5 mm
W4 64-0564
U9404
3-Prong Clamp
W4 64-0551 U9524T-12
Transwell®
Adapter, 12 mm
W4 64-0567
SL-6U
W4 64-0552 U9524T-24
Transwell® Adapter 24 mm
Stopcocks with Luer Connectors
for U9926 and U2500
W4 64-0165
SL-6
Stopcocks, pkg. of 6
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
U9926 & U2500
Self-Contained Ussing Chambers
The Classic system in a small package. Inserts available tfor excised tissue and cultured cells
The U9926 and U2500 Self-Contained Ussing chambers improve on the Classic design by bringing the solution reservoir
into the chamber housing. This dramatically reduces the size of the apparatus and increases the ease-of-use of the system.
U9926 Single
Channel Chamber
Plug-in Cartridge (A)
U2500 Dual Channel
Chamber (2 Inserts)
Exploded View
The Self-Contained Ussing Chamber
Systems
The Self-Contained Ussing Chambers systems come in single- and dualchannel models and offer many advantages over the Classic design. The
single-channel U9926 and dual-channel U2500 are shown above. Both
systems make use of inserts to secure and position the tissue or culture
cup within the chamber body.
Plug-in Cartridge (B)
Chamber Half-Cell
ussing/diffusion
Electrophysiology
U2500 Dual Channel
Chamber (2 Inserts)
Reservoir Cover
Ag Wire
(Current
Electrode)
Water
Jacket
Drain
Valves
O-Ring Seals
Electrode
Bridge
Fittings
Bridge Fitting
Adapters
Ag/AgCl Pellet
(Voltage Electrode)
Clamp
Screws
Air/Gas Luer
Connectors
Chamber bodies (single- and dual-chamber models) consist of chamberhalves which clamp around the insert(s). Each chamber-half has four ports
that enter into its respective bath compartment: a voltage electrode port, a
current electrode port, an air/gas port, and a solution drain port. Solution
warming is provided by pumping heated water through each chamber-half
and there are no delicate glass heat exchangers to be broken. The dualchamber U2500 has the additional feature of including four needle valves for
adjusting the air/gas mixture into each individual chamber-half.
Inserts can be easily exchanged between experiments. Solutions are
removed from the chambers through the drain valves and the halves
unclamped from each other. The insert is then simply replaced. Inserts are
available to support a variety of tissue sizes and culture cups.
Standard Accessories Supplied with U9926
and U2500
Base Plate
Needle Valves
Upright Support,
Air/Gas Manifold
The U9926 (single-channel chamber is supplied with 1 electrode set
(consisting of 2 voltage and 2 current electrodes), 12 bridge fittings with
adapters; and a tubing/ fitting kit. The U2500 (dual channel) chamber is
supplied with two each of the above described accessories. Chamber
inserts are ordered separately.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
219
U9926 & U2500
ussing/diffusion
Self-Contained Ussing Chambers (continued)
How to Order:
• Select Base Assembly. Each system includes one or two U9975A Electrode Set(s) and U9965EP Electrode Bridge Fitting Kit(s)
• Select Insert. Order 1 if using the U9926 and order 2 if using the U2500
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-0575S U2500
W4 64-0595 U9924F-09
Falcon® Adapter, 9 mm
W4 64-0596 U9924F-12
Falcon® Adapter, 12 mm
W4 64-0597 U9924F-25
Falcon® Adapter, 25 mm
Dual-channel Ussing
Chamber Base Assembly,
does not include inserts
W4 64-0598 1U9924M-12
Millicell® Adapter, 12 mm
W4 64-0599 U9924M-30
Millicell® Adapter, 30 mm
W4 64-0600 U9924S
Snapwell™ Adapter, 12mm
W4 64-0601 U9924T-06
Transwell® Adapter, 6.5 mm
W4 64-0602 U9924T-12
Transwell® Adapter, 12 mm
W4 64-0603 U9924T-24
Transwell® Adapter, 24 mm
Inserts for tissue, with o-ring
Electrophysiology
ussing/diffusion
220
Product
Single-channel Ussing
Chamber Base Assembly,
does not include insert
Inserts for U9926 and U2500 Base Assembly
W4 64-0582 U9924A-04
Model
Inserts for Culture Cup
Base Assembly
W4 64-0568S U9926
Order #
Round Insert, 3.8 mm,
with O-Ring
W4 64-0583 U9924A-06
Round Insert, 6.0 mm,
with O-Ring
W4 64-0584 U9924A-09
Round Insert, 9.0 mm,
with O-Ring
W4 64-0585 U9924A-12
Round Insert, 12.0 mm,
with O-Ring
W4 64-0586 U9924A-13
Round Insert, 13.5 mm,
with O-Ring
Inserts for tissue, with pins
W4 64-0587 U9924B-04
Round Insert, 3.8 mm, with 5 Pins
W4 64-0588 U9924B-06
Round Insert, 6.0 mm, with 5 Pins
W4 64-0589 U9924B-09
Round Insert, 9.0 mm, with 5 Pins
W4 64-0590 U9924B-12
Round Insert, 12.0 mm, with 5 Pins
W4 64-0591 U9924B-13
Round Insert, 13.5 mm, with 5 Pins
W4 64-0592 U9924C-03
Slotted Insert, 1.6 x 7.0 mm,
with 6 Pins
W4 64-0593 U9924C-04
Slotted Insert, 2.4 x 7.0 mm,
with 6 Pins
W4 64-0594 U9924C-05
Slotted Insert, 3.5 x 7.0 mm,
with 6 Pins
Replacement Parts
W4 64-0565 U9406
Tubing/Fitting Kit;
Includes 3/16 in x 10 ft (ID x L)
Tygon Tubing, 1/16 in x 10 ft (ID x L)
Tygon Tubing, Eighteen 1/16 in Fittings
(six each of straight, Y and Luer Fittings)
W4 64-0553 U9565EP
Electrode Bridge Fitting Kit;
Includes twelve Bridge Fittings,
six Bridge Fitting Adapters
W4 64-0554 U9975A
Electrode Set; Includes two
Ag-AgCl Pellet Voltage Electrode,
two Ag Wire Current Electrode
W4 64-0555 U9985
Bridge Fitting Adapters, pkg. of 6
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems
NaviCyte and EasyMount Systems
Designed for parallel studies on epithelial membranes
Warner Instruments offers three multichannel Ussing chamber systems capable of supporting up to 24 independent chambers, all operating in
parallel. Two systems position the membrane vertically and the one positions the membrane horizontally. All three multichannel chamber systems
embody the self-contained design and are fully capable of supporting either membranes or cell culture cups. Differences between these systems
exist, however, and are explained below.
Similar to the NaviCyte Horizontal, the NaviCyte Vertical chamber
system is designed for transport studies on filter grown cell monolayers
or excised tissue sections. This system differs, however, in that
membranes are mounted vertically and the chamber blocks do not use
inserts to secure tissues. Instead, tissue is affixed between the opposing
faces of the chamber-halves using a series of pins surrounding the
opening. Chambers are available with both circular and oblong openings,
depending on the tissue type under study, and can also accommodate
Snapwell™ culture cups. Several low volume chambers that reduce the
amount of compound required to conduct permeability studies are also
available. Accepts from 1 to 24 chambers.
NaviCyte Electrodes
The EasyMount chamber systems consist of 2 to 8 vertical Ussing
chambers, a heater block/support stand, needle valves for adjustment of
gas flow (for oxygenation and gas lift stirring), and Ag/AgCl
voltage/current electrodes for measuring transepithelial voltage and for
passing current. Tissue specific inserts are ordered separately.
Navicyte Horizontal and Vertical Chamber Systems
The Harvard/NaviCyte patented line of horizontal and vertical diffusion
chambers is designed for the study of transport across cultured cell
monolayers or excised tissue under dynamic conditions. The basic system
architecture shown here demonstrates the fundamental design of both the
horizontal and vertical diffusion chamber systems.
These systems are extremely well suited for non-electrical applications,
however, the introduction of electrodes can provide the ability to make
electrophysiological measurements. For larger applications, electrical
manifolds can be employed to organize and simplify the connections to
our various voltage/current clamps.
Electrophysiology
The NaviCyte Horizontal chamber system is designed for transport and
toxicology studies using cells or tissue exposed to an air interface such as
occurs in the in vivo environment (e.g., nasal, pulmonary, corneal, or dermal
cells). The chambers create an environment wherein the apical surface can
be exposed to liquids, semi-solid compounds, or to gases while the
basolateral surface remains perfused with medium. NaviCyte Horizontal
chambers accept either tissue mounting rings or Snapwell™ cell culture cups
and can be used in either open or closed configurations. In the closed
configuration, electrodes can be brought to bear to make electrophysiological
membrane resistance measurements. Accepts from 1 to 6 chambers.
ussing/diffusion
Figure 1: Diffusion Chamber Systems
The NaviCyte electrodes can be used with either the NaviCyte horizontal or
vertical chamber systems and provide the ability to make
electrophysiological recordings. Electrodes are terminated with a 2 mm pin
connector and are compatible with the NaviCyte electric manifolds (used to
connect chambers to our current/voltage clamps). The Ag/AgCl reference
electrode is contained in a glass barrel that terminates in a micro-porous
ceramic tip. The barrel is filled with a suitable electrolyte solution, usually
the buffer used for the external media or 3M KCl, and is refillable.
EasyMount Vertical Chamber Systems
The EasyMount Vertical chamber systems are ideal for studies requiring
electrophysiological measurement of transmembrane resistance. While
visually similar to the NaviCyte Vertical chambers, EasyMount chambers
are different in that they use inserts to position and secure tissues or
culture cups within the chamber body. Inserts can be easily exchanged
without removing the chamber from its support assembly or disturbing the
electrodes. Chambers come in standard and low volume designs with a
variety of inserts available for each. All chambers, however, mount into
the same support assembly. Accepts from 2 to 8 chambers.
NaviCyte chamber systems are manufactured from acrylic and can be
temperature controlled.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
221
ussing/diffusion
NaviCyte Horizontal
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems
Optimized for diffusion studies on membranes at an air interface
The NaviCyte Horizontal system features the ability to run up to six chambers simultaneously and is optimized
for transport studies on cells and tissues exposed to an air interface. The included heater block permits
temperature control, with the use of a circulating water bath, for these chambers in both open and closed
configurations. While optimized for diffusion-based studies, the use of optional electrodes permits
electrophysiological membrane resistance measurements.
Horizontal Diffusion Chamber
.567 cm2
Horizontal Diffusion Chamber System
Electrophysiology
ussing/diffusion
Open and Closed Configurations
Open and closed chamber configurations are defined by the use of an
open or closed chamber cap. Either cap completes the chamber and holds
the culture cup or tissue ring into place. Both an open and closed cap is
supplied with each chamber.
The NaviCyte Horizontal chamber system consists of a heater/support
block and up to six horizontal chambers. Chambers require the use of a
supplied open or closed chamber cap into which either a Snapwell™
culture cup or a tissue mounting ring may be fitted. Culture cups or
tissues are mounted on a horizontal plane. Chambers have basolateral
and apical inputs for attachment to perfusion lines, and in the closed
configuration chambers can accept electrodes.
Single or multichannel setups
Chambers can be used singly as a stand-alone entity, or can be mounted
into the heater/support block in sets of up to six chambers per block. The
heater/support block provides chamber heating and is recommended even
if using a single chamber. Inserts are easily exchanged in mounted
chambers. The compact footprint (38.1 x 8.9 x 10.2 cm) of the
heater/support block conserves lab bench space.
222
In the open configuration, the upper surface (usually the apical side) of
the membrane is directly accessible, making the system suitable for drug
transport studies or cytotoxicity testing of liquids or semi-solid materials.
In the closed configuration, the membrane can be exposed to solutions,
exposed to gases, perfused with gas, or perfused with liquid,.
NaviCyte Electrodes and Electrical Manifolds
While optimized for diffusion-based assays, NaviCyte electrodes are
available for making electrophysiology-based measurements from
NaviCyte chambers. Electrodes can only be used with the NaviCyte
Horizontal chamber in its closed configuration.
Electrical manifolds are available to organize the multiple connections
between the amplifiers and the electrodes when making
electrophysiology-based measurements using multiple chambers. Two
manifolds are available, one compatible with the VCC amplifiers and the
other compatible with the ‘Computer Controlled Multi-Clamp with
Software’ package. See the associated amplifiers for these components.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
NaviCyte Horizontal
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems (continued)
How to order:
• Select Base Assembly. This is the heater block and is needed only if using more than one chamber
or if heating.
• Select Chambers. Order from 1 to 6 per heater block. Each chamber includes both open and closed
caps, and electrode port screws (for perfusion-only applications).
• Order a tissue mounting ring if not using Snapwell. Order one per chamber.
• Order electrodes, glass barrels, and open screws if making electrophysiological recordings.
Order #
Product
Base Assembly
W4 66-0017 Heater Block for Horizontal Chambers
NaviCyte Horizontal Chambers
W4 66-0016 Single NaviCyte Horizontal Diffusion Chamber
W4 66-0022 Tissue mounting ring, 9 mm Round Aperture
Electrode Components
W4 66-0023 Ag/AgCl electrodes with KCl, pkg. of 4
Replacement Parts
W4 66-0054 Closed Caps for Horizontal Chambers
W4 66-0055 Open Caps for Horizontal Chambers
W4 66-0053 Closed Screws, Used when perfusion is
not needed, pkg. of 24
W4 66-0056 Male Luer Fitting - 3/32 Bar, pkg. of 24
W4 66-0057 Small O-rings for Electrodes, pkg. of 24
The Package System
W4 66-0005 NaviCyte Horizontal Chamber System –
Includes Base Assembly and
Six Horizontal Chambers only
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
W4 66-0058 Open screw (straight hole) and O-rings,
Serves as an Electrode Holder, pkg. of 24
Electrophysiology
W4 66-0024 Glass barrel for Electrode, with Ceramic Tip,
pkg. of 8
223
ussing/diffusion
NaviCyte Vertical
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems
Optimized for silultaneous diffusion studies on up to 24 membranes
This system features the capacity of running up to
24 chambers simultaneously and is optimized for
transport studies on both filter grown cell
monolayers and surgically excised tissue sections.
14 different chamber types are currently available.
The standard support assembly holds 6 chambers
and the included 12 channel gas manifold provides
Electrophysiology
W4 66-0048
6 Vertical Chamber System with
Gas Manifold and Heating Block
Figure 2: Vertical Diffusion
Chamber System
ussing/diffusion
W4 66-0048
W4 66-0021
24 Chamber Heating Block
for Vertical System
Heater Blocks
W4 66-0008
O-Ring Snapwell
Tubing to
Diffusion
Chamber
Diffusion
Chamber
Gas Manifold
Adjustable
Flow Valve
The standard heater block of the NaviCyte Vertical chamber system
provides efficient and precise temperature control of chambers.
Temperature is regulated by use of an external, user supplied circulating
water bath. An optional 24 channel heat block (shown above) allows a
greater number of simultaneous measurements to be made.
Gas Manifold
The 6-chamber (12-channel) gas manifold distributes gas to the chambers
where media circulation is generated by the previously described gas-lift
process. Gas manifolds can be ganged to accommodate the 24 chamber
heater block.
Externally supplied
O2/CO2
W4 66-0009
Heat Block
Externally supplied
thermostaticallycontrolled H2O
The NaviCyte Vertical chamber system consists of up to six vertical
chambers, a gas manifold, and a heater block. The system can be
extended to 24 channels by the use of an available 24 channel heater
block. NaviCyte Vertical chambers do not use inserts, except for the
Snapwell chamber, and 14 different chambers are currently available.
Chambers are described in detail below.
Single or Multichannel Setups
Chambers can be used singly as a stand-alone entity, or can be mounted in
quantity into the heater/support blocks. The heater/support blocks provide
chamber heating. The standard heater block and associated gas manifold
allows up to six experiments to be run in parallel. The compact design (38.1
x 10.2 x 12.7 cm) of this setup conserves valuable bench space.
224
air regulation to both sides of each chamber. An
included heater block allows for temperature control
with the use of a circulating water bath. While
optimized for diffusion-based studies, the use of
optional electrodes allows for electrophysiological
membrane resistance measurements.
NaviCyte Vertical Chambers
NaviCyte Vertical chambers are primarily designed for work with excised
tissue segments. Chambers are two piece assemblies held together by a
high spring-tension retaining ring to insure leak free operation. Tissue is
affixed between the opposing faces of two half-chambers using a series
of pins that surround the opening. Chambers are available with both
circular and oblong openings of various sizes.
The optimal choice of opening will depend on the size and type of tissue
under study. For example, an oblong opening can increase the effective
sample surface area for an intestinal tissue.
Low Volume Chambers
Several low volume tissue chambers are offered and are designed to
reduce the amount of compound required for permeability studies.
Snapwell™ Chamber
The Snapwell™ chamber is specifically designed for use with Snapwell™
culture inserts from Corning Costar. This chamber accepts the lower
section of the insert, which contains the cultured cell monolayer.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
NaviCyte Vertical
ussing/diffusion
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems (continued)
Perfusion Caps
Perfusion caps provide perfusion capability to the standard volume
Snapwell™, 8 x 24 mm oblong, and 9 mm round chambers. They are not
needed for, and cannot be used with, the other standard volume or any of
the low volume chambers The use of a perfusion cap places a chamber
into its ‘closed’ configuration.
Electrode Caps
Electrode caps provide electrode placement, if making
electrophysiological measurements, within the standard volume
Snapwell™, 8 x 24 mm oblong, and 9 mm round chambers. They are not
needed for, and cannot be used with, the other standard volume or any of
the low volume chambers. The use of an electrode cap places a chamber
into its ‘closed’ configuration. You do not need to use a perfusion cap if
using an electrode cap.
NaviCyte Electrodes and Manifold
Standard Diffusion Chamber
W4 66-0013,0032,0038,0046
Standard Diffusion Chamber
W4 66-0014, 0036
Low Volume Diffusion Chamber
W4 66-0027
Low Volume Diffusion Chamber
W4 66-0034, 0042
ussing/diffusion
Electrical manifolds are available to organize the multiple connections
between the amplifiers and the electrodes when making
electrophysiology-based measurements using multiple chambers. Two
manifolds are available, one compatible with the VCC amplifiers and the
other compatible with the ‘Computer Controlled Multi-Clamp with
Software’ package. See the associated amplifiers for these components.
References
1) Grass, G.M. and Sweetana, S.A., “In vitro measurement of gastrointestinal tissue
permeability using a new diffusion cell”, Pharm. Res. 5372-76 (1988)
2) Hidalgo, I.J., Hilgren, K.M., Grass, G.M., and Borchardt, R.T., “Characterization of the
unstirred water layer in Caco-2 cell monolayers using a novel diffusion apparatus”,
Pharm. Res. 8:222-227 (1991)
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
While optimized for diffusion-based assays, NaviCyte electrodes are
available for making electrophysiology-based measurements with
NaviCyte chambers. Electrodes can be used with NaviCyte Horizontal
chambers in both their open and closed configurations. Snapwell™,
8 x 24 mm oblong, and 9 mm round chambers (standard volume) require
the use of electrode caps for proper electrode placement.
For additional references, please visit our website.
Low Volume Diffusion Chamber
W4 66-0026, 0040
Low Volume Diffusion Chamber
W4 66-0015
Snapwell™ Diffusion Chamber
W4 66-0008
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
225
ussing/diffusion
NaviCyte Vertical
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems (continued)
W4 66-0008 Snapwell Diffusion Chamber with Electrode Caps
W4 66-0050 Electrode
Cap Screws
W4 66-0012
Retaining Ring
Clamp Tool
W4 66-0020 Electrode
Caps for Snapwell
Chambers, pair L/R
Electrophysiology
ussing/diffusion
226
O-Rings for
Snapwell
W4 66-0007 retaining ring and
O-Ring for Snapwell, set of 12
each of the metal retaining
rings and O-Rings
W4 66-0023 Ag/AgCl Electrodes
mounted in a W4 66-0008 Snapwell
Diffusion Chamber
Retaining Rings
W4 66-0019 Perfusion Caps mounted
in a Snapwell Diffusion Chamber
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
NaviCyte Vertical
ussing/diffusion
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems (continued)
Order #
How to order:
• Select Base Assembly. Only needed if using more than one
chamber or if heating.
• Select Chambers. Order from 1 to 6.
• Order Perfusion Caps. Only needed if perfusing in the
standard volume Snapwell, 8 x 24 mm oblong, and 9 mm round
chambers. Not needed if using electrode cap. One set per chamber.
• Order electrodes and glass barrels if making
electrophysiological recordings. One set per chamber.
• Order electrode caps and electrode cap screws if
making electrophysiological recordings in the standard volume
Snapwell, 8 x 24 mm oblong, and 9 mm round chambers. One set per
chamber.
NaviCyte Vertical Chambers
Exposed
Tissue Area
Working Reservoir
Volume
Standard Volume (working volume 5-7 ml per chamber half)
W4 66-0014*
W4 66-0036
W4 66-0013*
W4 66-0032
W4 66-0038
W4 66-0046
9 mm Round
4 mm Round
8 x 24 mm Oblong
4 x 8 mm Oblong
6 x 9 mm Oblong
5 x 24 mm Oblong
0.64 cm2
0.12 cm2
1.78 cm2
0.29 cm2
0.46 cm2
1.15 cm2
5 to 7 ml
5 to 7 ml
5 to 7 ml
5 to 7 ml
5 to 7 ml
5 to 7 ml
Low Volume (working volume 1-4 ml per chamber half)
W4 66-0026
W4 66-0015
W4 66-0027
W4 66-0040
W4 66-0034
W4 66-0042
5 mm Round
9 mm Round
12 mm Round
3 mm Round
2 x 10 mm Oblong
4 x 8 mm Oblong
0.20 cm2
0.64 cm2
1.13 cm2
0.07 cm2
0.10 cm2
0.28 cm2
0.2 to 0.4 ml
1 to 2 ml
2 to 4 ml
1 to 2 ml
2 to 4 ml
2 to 4 ml
1.13 cm2
4 to 6 ml
Specialty
W4 66-0008* Snapwell™
*May require perfusion or electrode caps, available separatel.
Order #
Product
Accessories
W4 66-0019 Tissue Chamber Perfusion Cap, pkg. of 2
W4 66-0021 24-Chamber Heating Block
Electrodes
W4 66-0018
W4 66-0020
W4 66-0050
W4 66-0023
6-Chamber Heating Block
12 Channel (6 chamber) Air Manifold
Clear Front Panel
Retaining Ring and O-Ring, pkg. of 12
Retaining Ring Clamp Tool
Replacement Air Line for Air\Gas Manifold,
6 inch long, pkg. of 12
Electrode Cap for Chambers, pair L/R
Electrode Cap for Snapwell Chambers, pair L/R
Electrode Cap Screws, pkg. of 12
Ag/AgCl Electrodes with KCl, pkg. of 4,
with O-rings
W4 66-0024 Glass Barrel for Electrode with Ceramic Tip,
pkg. of 8
Standard Volume Systems (does not include electrodes)
W4 66-0003 NaviCyte Vertical Chamber System –
Includes base assembly and six 9 mm round
(W4 66-0014) chambers (does not include
perfusion or electrode caps)
W4 66-0037 NaviCyte Vertical Chamber System –
Includes base assembly and six 4 mm round
(W4 66-0036) chambers
W4 66-0002 NaviCyte Vertical Chamber System –
Includes Base Assembly and six 8 x 24 mm
oblong (W4 66-0013) Chambers (does not
include perfusion or electrode caps)
W4 66-0033 NaviCyte Vertical Chamber System –
Includes base assembly and six
4 x 8 mm oblong (W4 66-0032) chambers
W4 66-0039 NaviCyte Vertical Chamber System –
Includes base assembly and six
6 x 9 mm oblong (W4 66-0038) chambers
W4 66-0047 NaviCyte Vertical Chamber System –
Includes base assembly and six
5 x 24 mm oblong (W4 66-0046) chambers
Low Volume Systems (does not include electrodes)
W4 66-0028 Low Volume NaviCyte Vertical Chamber
System – Includes base assembly and six
5 mm round (W4 66-0026) chambers
W4 66-0004 Low Volume NaviCyte Vertical Chamber
System – Includes base assembly and six
9 mm round (W4 66-0015) chambers
W4 66-0029 Low Volume NaviCyte Vertical Chamber
System – Includes base assembly and six
12 mm round (W4 66-0027) chambers
W4 66-0041 Low Volume NaviCyte Vertical Chamber
System – Includes base assembly and six
3 mm round (W4 66-0040) chambers
W4 66-0035 Low Volume NaviCyte Vertical Chamber
System – Includes base assembly and six
2 x 10 mm oblong (W4 66-0034) chambers
W4 66-0043 Low Volume NaviCyte Vertical Chamber
System – Includes base assembly and six
4 x 8 mm oblong (W4 66-0042) chambers
Specialty Systems
W4 66-0009 NaviCyte Vertical Chamber System –
Includes base assembly and six Snapwell
(W4 66-0008) chambers (does not include
perfusion or electrode caps)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
W4 66-0075 6-Chamber Heater Block Assembly – System
includes 6-Chamber Heating Block, 6-Chamber Air/Gas
Manifold, Clear Front Panel, and Retaining Ring Clamp Tool
Chamber Type
W4 66-0009
W4 66-0048
W4 66-0010
W4 66-0007
W4 66-0012
W4 66-0006
The Package Systems
Product
Base Assembly
Order #
Replacement parts
ussing/diffusion
Order #
Product
W4 66-0049 Open Screws (with step) and O-rings, pkg. of 12.
Serves as Electrode Holders for Low Volume Chambers
W4 66-0057 Small O-rings for Electrodes, pkg. of 24
227
EasyMount
ussing/diffusion
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems
Optimized for simultaneous electrophysiological studies on up to 8 membrane
The EasyMount chamber systems are ideal for studies requiring electrophysiological measurement of transmembrane resistance. While visually similar to the
NaviCyte Vertical chambers, EasyMount chambers are different in that they use inserts to position and secure tissues or culture cups within the chamber body.
Diffusion Chamber
The P2300 Series inserts are available to accommodate Snapwell,
Millicell, Nunc, and Transwell culture cups. Inserts are also available with
pins or o-rings in both oblong and round formats.
P2400 Series inserts do not support culture cups but are available with
pins or o-rings in both oblong and round formats.
Electrodes and Accessories
Electrodes
Electrophysiology
ussing/diffusion
The EasyMount chamber systems consist
Inserts
of 2 to 8 vertical Ussing chambers, a
heater block/support stand, needle valves
for adjustment of gas flow (for
oxygenation and gas lift stirring), and
Ag/AgCl voltage/current electrodes for
measuring transepithelial voltage and for passing current. Tissue specific
inserts are ordered separately.
Replacement current and voltage electrodes are available, as are
electrode tips. Additional accessories include electrode lead sets and
chamber filling needles.
How to order:
• Select Chamber Assembly. Each assembly includes heater
block/stand, chambers, needle valves, and electrodes.
• Select Chamber Inserts. Select from P2300 or P2400 Series
depending on the volume of the system assembly chosen. Order at
least 1 insert per chamber.
Multichannel setups
• Select FN15 filling needles and extra electrode tips.
All EasyMount chambers (P2300 and P2400,) use the same stands and
electrodes. Stands are available to support 2, 4, 6, or 8 chambers and can
be readily ganged to allow for higher count applications. Stands have an
incorporated heater block that warms all chambers to the same
temperature. A needle valve assembly (one set per chamber) is mounted
on the rear of the heater block for regulation of the gas flow.
• Select P2300 Chamber Caps if using radioligands or toxic
chemicals with P2300 chambers.
EasyMount Chambers
EasyMount chambers are a two piece assembly using an insert to secure
and position tissues or culture cups. Tissues are placed in the chamber by
loosening a thumbscrew, sliding the tissue holding insert into the space
between the chamber halves, and retightening the thumbscrew.
Chambers do not need to be removed from the heater block, nor are the
electrodes disturbed, when placing an insert. This easy and rapid
replacement process makes the EasyMount system an excellent choice
for high-throughput applications.
Chambers are available in two styles; the P2300 is the standard chamber
and accommodates a large variety of inserts and the P2400 is designed
for low-volume applications. The P2300 has chamber caps available for
sealing the chamber when radioligands or toxic chemicals are used.
EasyMount Inserts
EasyMount inserts are available to mount a variety of tissues and can
also accommodate cell culture cups. Each chamber type has its own
supporting family of inserts.
228
Electrodes are available in sets comprised of two sintered Ag/AgCl pellet
electrodes for voltage sensing (black), two Ag wire electrodes for current
passing (white), and eight electrodes tips. The number of sets provided is
dependent on the system purchased, however, one electrode set is
required for each chamber.
Order #
Model
Product
EasyMount Chamber Assembly
P2300 Chamber Systems (Standard Volume)
W4 69-1070 CSYS-2-HA
P2300 EasyMount Assembly,
2 Chambers, No Inserts
W4 69-1071 CSYS-4-HA
P2300 EasyMount Assembly,
4 Chambers, No inserts
W4 69-1072 CSYS-6-HA
P2300 EasyMount Assembly,
6 Chambers, No Inserts
W4 69-1073 CSYS-8-HA
P2300 EasyMount Assembly,
8 Chambers, No Inserts
P2400 Chamber Systems (Low Volume)
W4 69-1074 LVSYS-2-HA P2400 EasyMount Assembly,
2 Chambers, No Inserts
W4 69-1075 LVSYS-4-HA P2400 EasyMount Assembly,
4 Chambers, No Inserts
W4 69-1076 LVSYS-6-HA P2400 EasyMount Assembly,
6 Chambers. No Inserts
W4 69-1077 LVSYS-8-HA P2400 EasyMount Assembly,
8 Chambers, No Inserts
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
EasyMount
ussing/diffusion
Multichannel Ussing Chamber Systems (continued)
Order #
Model
Aperture
Working Area
Description
P2302
P2302M
P2302N
12 mm Round
8.75 mm Round
8.0 mm Round
1.12 cm2
0.60 cm2
0.50 cm2
For Snapwell cell culture cups
For Millicell cell culture cups
For Nunc/Anopore cell culture cups
W4 69-1083
P2302T
6.5 mm Round
0.33 cm2
For Costar Transwell cell culture cups
W4 69-1084
W4 69-1085
W4 69-0957
W4 69-0958
W4 69-0959
W4 69-0960
W4 69-1086
W4 69-0961
W4 69-0962
W4 69-1087
W4 69-0963
W4 69-0964
W4 69-0965
W4 69-0966
W4 69-1088
W4 69-1089
W4 69-1090
W4 69-1091
P2303
P2303A
P2304
P2305
P2306
P2307
P2308
P2310
P2311
P2311A
P2312
P2313
P2314
P2315
P2316
P2317
P2318
P2319
2.8 x 4.5 mm
2.8 x 4.5 mm
2.8 x 11.0 mm
4.5 x 11.2 mm
2.8 x 1.5 mm
2.0 mm Round
1.0 mm Round
5.0 mm Round
6.2 mm Round
5.7 mm Round
8.0 mm Round
9.5 mm Round
11.3 mm Round
12.7 mm Round
5.0 mm Round
10.8 mm Round
11.3 mm Round
12.7 mm Round
0.10 cm2
0.10 cm2
0.30 cm2
0.50 cm2
0.036 cm2
0.031 cm2
0.008 cm2
0.20 cm2
0.30 cm2
0.26 cm2
0.50 cm2
0.71 cm2
1.00 cm2
1.26 cm2
0.20 cm2
0.93 cm2
1.00 cm2
1.26 cm2
For juvenile mouse intestine
For juvenile mouse intestine or bladder, with pins
For mouse intestine, with pins
For rat and larger animal intestine, with pins
For mouse trachea and similar tissue
For small tissues (e.g., biopsies)
For very small, thin tissues (e.g., lower mouse trachea)
With pins
With pins
With pins
With pins
With pins
With pins
With pins
for Skin, with o-ring
For synthetic membranes, with o-ring
For Frog Skin, with o-ring
For studying mucus layer, with spacer ring
0.10 cm2
0.25 cm2
0.40 cm2
0.04 cm2
0.031 cm2
0.005 cm2
0.002 cm2
0.008 cm2
0.20 cm2
0.50 cm2
0.71 cm2
For small Tissue Specimens
For mouse intestine
For rat and larger animal intestine
For mouse trachea
For biopsies
For biopsies
For biopsies
For biopsies
With pins
With pins
With pins
Chamber Inserts Fits (P2400 Chamber Systems)
W4 69-1092
W4 69-0969
W4 69-0970
W4 69-0971
W4 69-0972
W4 69-1093
W4 69-1094
W4 69-1095
W4 69-0973
W4 69-0975
W4 69-0976
P2403
P2404
P2405
P2406
P2407
P2408
P2408A
P2408B
P2410
P2412
P2413
2.8 x 4.5 mm
2.8 x 9.2 mm
4.5 x 9.2 mm
2.8 x 1.5 mm
2.0 mm round
0.8 mm round
0.5 mm round
1.0 mm round
5.0 mm round
8.0 mm round
9.5 mm round
Order #
Model
Product
W4 69-1096
W4 69-1097
W4 69-1098
W4 69-0990
W4 69-0991
P2300-CAP
FNS15-2
FN15
P2023-20
P2023-50
Chamber Caps for P2300 Chamber – set of 2
Two Syringes with Filling Needles
Replacement Filling Needle
Electrode Tips – 20 Pack
Electrode Tips – 50 Pack
W4 69-0992
P2023-100
Electrode Tips – 100 Pack
ussing/diffusion
W4 69-0956
W4 69-1081
W4 69-1082
Electrophysiology
Chamber Inserts (Fits P2300 Chamber Systems)
Accessories
Replacement Parts
W4 69-0993
P2300
EasyMount Chamber – Standard Volume (Chamber Only)
W4 69-0995
W4 69-0987
W4 69-0988
W4 69-0989
W4 69-3147
W4 69-1099
P2400
P2020-S
P2020-IS
P2020-VS
P2024-36
P2060
EasyMount Chamber – Low Volume (Chamber Only)
Electrode Set (2 current, 2 voltage, 8 tips)
Electrode Set (4 current, 8 tips)
Electrode Set (4 voltage, 8 tips)
Electrode Lead Set (36 in, 4 pk)
Air Control Valve Assembly, Mounts on Stand, Fits One Chamber
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
229
ussing/diffusion
EC-800 and EC-825A
Single and Dual Channel Epithelial Voltage Clamps
Our single and dual channel epithelial voltage clamps
EC-825A
Electrophysiology
ussing/diffusion
Three clamp speeds provide optimum recording conditions for a variety of
applications. In Fast mode, preparations with low access resistance (small
tissues or monolayers) can be clamped with speeds as fast as 10µsec.
Typical Ussing chambers with larger tissues will use Medium or Slow
modes for stable, oscillation free clamping.
Single Channel EC-800 and Dual Channel EC-825A
Internal DC Command (Hold) control for both Voltage clamp and Current
clamp modes.
Epithelial voltage clamps from Warne provide accurate measurements of
transepithelial voltage, short circuit current, and membrane resistance.
Important features include fluid resistance compensation, membrane
resistance readout, choice of voltage compliance, and small water-tight
preamp headstages. Operating modes include voltage clamp, current
clamp, voltmeter, and resistance. The dual channel model includes an
internal timer.
The EC-800 and EC-825A are state-of-the-art instruments with several
unique and important design features offering more reliable recording and
operator convenience.
High CMR
Differential voltage recordings are made with very high common mode
rejection providing accurate measurements free from the effects of
common mode potential changes of a noisy environment.
Membrane Resistance Measurement
Accurate resistance measurements are made with the membrane
mounted in the chamber. This measurement is made using a low
frequency 2 Hz bipolar signal to avoid polarization of the membrane (ideal
for monolayers). Resistances up to 200 kΩ are displayed on the meter
with push-button convenience.
230
Clamp Speed Selection
• For studies of epithelial transport and the
electrical properties of tissue
• High common mode rejection
• Clamp Speed Selection
• Membrane Resistance Measurement Circuit
• Watertight Headstage with Model Membrane
Commands
Watertight Headstage with Model Membrane
The small compact headstage can be located close to the measurement
site to keep input leads short for reduced noise pick-up. The model
membrane circuit simulates a preparation to provide convenient
operational checks of the clamp. Internal circuits are protected against
the invasion of corrosive saline solutions by a watertight seal.
Choice of Voltage Compliance
The EC-800 has a voltage compliance of ±120 V and the EC-825A has a
voltage compliance of ±50 V.
The high voltage compliance of these instruments are important for
studies of low resistance (leaky) epithelial cells and in applications in
which long agar leads in the current passing circuit produce large voltage
drops (which must be compensated). Additionally, the high compliance
helps in charging large membrane capacitances typical of epithelial
tissues, resulting in faster settling times and improved overall clamp
performance.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
EC-800 and EC-825A
Single Channel and Dual Channel Epithelial Voltage Clamps (continued)
EC-800
Specifications (continued)
Onboard Timer Controller
The dual channel EC-825A includes event timers (2) to provide cycle times
and clamp durations up to 2000 seconds. Times are set with 2 digit
thumbwheel switches and 4 position range switches. Once set, the timer
will free run, eliminating the need for a computer or other external device
to control the experiment.
Model EC-800LV ±15 Volt Compliance
Studies with small tissue samples or monolayers in set-ups with low
access resistance may not require high compliance. For these
applications, models EC-800LV offers both a lower cost and a safer
environment for the membrane.
Membrane Resistance 0-2 kΩ, 1mV/Ω
Output (EC-825A)
0-200 kΩ, 10mV/Ω
Panel Meter EC-800
3-1/2 digit LCD; Voltage Range: 200 mV max;
Current Range: 2000 µA max
Panel Meter EC-825A
3-1/2 digit LED; Voltage Range: 200 mV max;
Current Range: 2000 µA max
Outputs:
Voltage Monitor
x10
Current Monitor
10 mV/µA
Compliance:
EC-800
±120 V
EC-800LV
±15 V
EC-825A
±50 V
Timers (A & B) EC-825A:
Range
10 ms to 1000 secs, set with 2 digit resolution and
4 ranges (each channel)
Power Requirements
Specifications
Headstage:
Input Impedance
1 x 1010 Ω shunted by 6 pF
Input Voltage
±1.5 V maximum
Common Mode Voltage
±13 V maximum
Common Mode Rejection
100 dB at 60 Hz
Leakage Current
20 pA maximum
Offset Voltage Range
±120 mV
Voltage Clamp Ranges:
Int. Clamp Potentiometer
±100 mV with 10-turn control
Ext. Command
±1 V
Ext. Command Factor
1 mV/10 mV applied
EC-800, EC-800LV &
EC-825A
8.9 x 43.2 x 30.5 cm
Headstage
7.7 x 7.7 x 5 cm
Shipping Weight:
EC-800 & EC-800LV
6.4 kg
EC-825A
9.1 kg
Warranty
Order #
Two years, parts & labor
Model
Clamp Potentiometer
±1 mA
External Command
±10 mA
Command Factor
1 µA/10 mV applied
Speed
10 µsec measured with model membrane
Fluid Resistance
Compensation Range
0-100 Ω standard
0-1 k Ω optional
Membrane Resistance
Measurement
(made with 2 Hz bipolar constant current square wave)
Ranges
Product
W4 64-0035 EC-800
Single Channel Voltage Clamp
with ±120 V Compliance* for Leaky Tissue
W4 64-1508 EC-800
Single Channel Voltage Clamp
with ±120 V Compliance*
for Leaky Tissue, 200 - 240 VAC
W4 64-0036 EC-800LV
Single Channel Voltage Clamp
with ±15 V Compliance* for Tight
Tissue and Culture Type Monolayers
W4 64-1509 EC-800LV
Single Channel Voltage Clamp
with ±15 V Compliance* for Tight Tissue
and Culture Type Monolayers, 200 - 240 VAC
W4 64-1605 EC-825A
Dual Channel Voltage Clamp
with ±50 V Compliance*
Current Clamp Ranges:
Resistance:
100-130 VAC or 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Physical Dimensions, H x W x D:
EC-800, EC-800LV, EC-825A
Electrophysiology
The clamp can be operated by an external programmer, lab timer or
computer. Logic control of clamp mode and clamp command levels is
possible as well as simultaneous mixing of external linear commands.
ussing/diffusion
External Control
*Supplied with rack mount hardware.
0-2 kΩ, injected current = 10 nA
0-200 kΩ, injected current = 1 nA
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
231
VCC-MC
ussing/diffusion
Multichannel Epithelial Voltage Clamps
Supports from 2 to 8 amplifiers in a single package
The VCC-MC family of epithelial voltage/current clamps are ideal instruments for use with the multichannel
chamber systems described earlier. Configurations range from 2 to 8 amplifiers and these systems integrate
fully with the Acquire and Analyze software package.
Electrophysiology
ussing/diffusion
W4 69-0938 6-Channel Voltage/Current
Clamp shown with Harvard NaviCyte Vertical
Diffusion Chamber System, see page 221
The VCC-MC family of voltage/current clamps and accessories have
been designed to be flexible tools for studying ion transport across
epithelial tissue.
The VCC-MC family is of particular benefit in high throughput, multi-channel
applications and where laboratory bench space is limited. All models in this
family provide similar capabilities and specifications as the VCC-600 single
channel clamp to control the voltage or the current across the epithelium.
However, unlike the VCC-600, these clamps are modular in design.
The VCC-MC2 contains two voltage/current clamp modules, a pulse
generator, and a computer interface in a compact 9.5 inch chassis.
The VCC-MC2 is best suited for small scale applications and for student
laboratories. The VCC-MC2 is compatible with all chamber systems
offered by Warner. Each VCC-MC2 comes complete with two single
channel input modules (DM MC6) for connection to electrodes.
A useful feature built into the VCC-MC6 and VCC-MC8 instruments is a
master control section. This section enables the investigator to quickly
change the function, mode, and meter settings on each clamp module
from a single switch bank. This markedly simplifies the use of the
instrument and removes some of the tedium associated with continually
having to change multiple, identically placed switches (e.g., changing the
meter switch to display current instead of voltage on eight channels).
The VCC-MC Multichannel clamps are well suited for the NaviCyte and
EasyMount systems. For use with the NaviCyte systems, a special 24-lead
input module (EP-MC6) replaces the individual DM-MC6 input modules for
making electrode connections. The EP-MC6 mounts between the heat block
and air manifold on the NaviCyte system and must be ordered separately.
The VCC-MC6 and VCC-MC8 are multichannel chassis that can be
configured with 2 to 8 voltage/current clamp channels, depending on
model. These instruments are ideally suited for experiments where
multiple specimens are sampled in parallel. They offer the distinct
advantage of expandability within the same instrument chassis.
232
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
VCC-MC
Multichannel Epithelial Voltage Clamps (continued)
Specifications
Ω, differential
Common Mode Rejection ≥ 100 dB
VCC Series
Amplifier
w/DM-MC6
w/EP-MC6
w/DM-MC6-HV
Input Module
Input Module Input Module
(for EasyMount) (for NaviCyte) (High Voltage)
(for EasyMount)
w/EP-MC6-HV
Input Module
(High Voltage)
(for NaviCyte)
W4 69-0933
---
W4 69-0934
---
2-Channel
W4 69-0946
W4 69-0944
W4 69-0947
W4 69-0945
4-Channel
W4 69-0942
W4 69-0940
W4 69-0943
W4 69-0941
6-Channel
W4 69-0938
W4 69-0936
W4 69-0939
W4 69-0937
W4 69-1003
---
W4 69-1001
---
Frequency Response
4-stage adjustment via internal switch
Display:
channel
3.5 digit, 3/8 in LCD with green backlight for each
VCC-MC2
Transepithelial
Voltage
±199.9 mV
VCC-MC6
Transepithelial
Current
±19.90, ±199.9, ±1999 µA, jumper selectable
Switches
Push button, digital switching with LED indicators
Power
100/125 VAC, 60 Hz or 200/250 VAC, 50 Hz,
user selectable
Meter
Selects current or voltage to be displayed
on panel meter
Function:
Three position switch with LED indicator of state
Zero
Standby mode, voltage inputs are internally grounded
Open
Open circuit, voltage inputs are connected to
sensing electrodes
Clamp
Feedback loop is closed to control either current
or voltage
Mode:
Two switches select operating modes
VCC-MC8
8-Channel
VCC Amplifiers (CE Version)
VCC Series
Amplifier
w/DM-MC6
w/EP-MC6
Input Module
Input Module
(for EasyMount) (for NaviCyte)
(for EasyMount)
w/DM-MC6-HV w/EP-MC6-HV
Input Module Input Module
(High Voltage) (High Voltage)
(for NaviCyte)
VCC-MC2
W4 69-0933CE
---
W4 69-0934CE ---
Voltage/Current (I/V) Selects transepithelial voltage or current to be
controlled when Function is on Clamp
Remote (REM)
Selects control to be from front panel switches or
from remote interface
VCC-MC6
2-Channel W4 69-0946CE
W4 69-0944CE
W4 69-0947CE W4 69-0945CE
Offset Potential
±10 or ±100 mV, set via precision 10-turn dial, jumper
selectable ranges and lighted polarity switch
4-Channel W4 69-0942CE
W4 69-0940CE
W4 69-0943CE W4 69-0941CE
Fluid Resistance
Push-button current injection, compensation set by
precision 10-turn dial, jumper selectable ranges
6-Channel W4 69-0938CE
W4 69-0936CE
W4 69-0939CE W4 69-0937CE
On/Off
‘On’ sends pulse output to clamp, red indicator light
Polarity
Selects +, - or bipolar pulses to be generated
Single Pulse
Injects single pulse during interval between pulses
---
W4 69-1001CE ---
Reset
Initializes interval timer and injects pulse
Amplitude
0 to 10 mV in 1 mV steps at X1 gain; 0 to 100 mV in
10 mV steps at X10 gain
Order #
Period
0.1 to 99.9 sec time period between pulses;
set by 3-decade thumbwheel switch
Accessories and replacement parts
Duration
0.01 to 9.99 sec duration of each pulse;
set by 3-decade thumbwheel switch
DC Clamp Level:
Sets DC holding voltage or current
Voltage Clamp
±100 mV via 10-turn dial, lighted polarity switch
Current Clamp
Current gain dependent, 50% of max.
displayed current
Master Override
VCC-MC8
8-Channel W4 69-1003CE
Model
W4 66-0025
W4 69-1004
Product
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
≥
ussing/diffusion
Input Resistance
VCC Amplifiers
109
6-Channel Electrical Manifold
for NaviCyte Chamber Systems
MC601
Add-on/replacement amplifiers
for VCC amplifier case for
NaviCyte Chamber Systems
Permits control of function, mode, and meter features
on all installed clamp channels
I/O Connection Specifications
Electrode Inputs
2 mm pin tip via DM-MC6 single channel input
module, 1 per channel (VCC-MC6 and VCC-MC8)
2 mm pin tip via electrode panel (EP-MC6) for
Harvard/Navicyte chamber system (VCC-MC6)
Recorder Output Voltage 10 mV/mV, x10 transepithelial voltage
Recorder Output Current Jumper selectable, 1, 10 or 100 mV/µA
Pulse Generator
0 to ±100 mV and 0 to ±1 V
External Input
Allows arbitrary analog input signal to be clamped
Remote Interface
9-pin DB connector, 1 per channel (VCC-MC2)
25-pin DB connector (all others)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
233
ussing/diffusion
VCC-600
Single Channel Epithelial Voltage Clamp
A single channel epithelial voltage clamp
The VCC-600 is a single channel voltage/current clamp for epithelial tissue. It is the most versatile instrument
in the VCC series. Basic features include 10-turn dials for electrode offset and fluid (series) resistance
compensation, user selectable current gain and response frequency.
Specifications (cont’d)
W4 69-0930 Single Channel Voltage/Current Clamp
Power
100/125 VAC, 60 Hz or 200/250 VAC, 50 Hz, user selectable
Meter
Selects current or voltage to be displayed on
panel meter
Function:
Three position rotary switch
Zero
Standby mode, voltage inputs are internally grounded
Open
Open circuit, voltage inputs are connected to
sensing electrodes
Clamp
Feedback loop is closed to control either current
or voltage
Mode:
Electrophysiology
The VCC-600 epithelial clamp amplifier is a versatile single channel
instrument. In addition to its basic features, a clamp level control allows
the holding voltage or current to be set while a built-in pulse generator
provides unipolar or bipolar step changes from the holding level for tissue
conductance/resistance measurements.
ussing/diffusion
Voltages and currents can be monitored via recorder outputs on the front
panel and by a bright 3.5 digit LED digital panel meter. An interface
connector, for remote instrument control and data acquisition, is provided
on the rear panel. A high voltage option is also available to increase the
output compliance voltage to ±35 V DC for certain types of experiments.
The VCC-600 also has special features making it a popular instrument for
electrophysiological studies of epithelia. These features include an active
headstage that incorporates a virtual grounding amplifier for current
measurement and an extra level of current gain to measure currents in the nA
range. This allows the instrument to be used for studies on very small tissues
such as isolated renal tubules and single isolated colonic crypts. A switch and
buffer amplifier in the headstage allows selection and continuous measurement
of the potential on either side of the epithelium. The output on the rear of the
instrument can be used as a reference for microelectrode experiments so that
the intracellular voltage can be directly measured across either apical or
basolateral membranes regardless of side of impalement. Similarly, it can be
used as the reference voltage in pH stat experiments, thereby eliminating a
problem with some combination electrodes and pH meters in which a fraction
of the transepithelial current may be shunted to ground.
Specifications
W, differential, ≥
Input Resistance
Common Mode Rejection
≥100 dB
Frequency Response
4-stage adjustment via internal switch
Display:
1012
W available as option
±13 V standard, ±35 V optional high voltage
3.5 digit, 1/2 in red LED
Transepithelial Voltage ±199.9 mV
Transepithelial Current ±1.990, ±19.90, ±199.9, ±1999 µA, jumper-selectable
234
Local/Remote
Selects control to be from front panel switches or
from remote interface
Offset Potential
±10 mV, set via precision 10-turn dial
Fluid Resistance
Push-button current injection, compensation set
by precision 10-turn dial, jumper selectable ranges
On/Off
‘On’ sends pulse output to clamp, red indicator light
Polarity
Selects +, - or bipolar pulses to be generated
Single Pulse
Injects single pulse during interval between pulses
Reset
Initializes interval timer and injects pulse
Amplitude
0 to 10 mV in 1 mV steps at X1 gain; 0 to 100 mV in
10 mV steps at X10 gain
Period
0.1 to 99.9 sec time period between pulses; set by
3-decade thumbwheel switch
Duration
0.01 to 9.99 sec duration of each pulse; set by
3-decade thumbwheel switch
DC Clamp Level:
Sets DC holding voltage or current
Voltage Clamp
±100 mV and ±300 mV via 10-turn dial
Current Clamp
Current gain dependent, 50% and 150% of max.
displayed current
Headstage
Active input stage for sensing voltage and current
near preparation, cable length 6 ft
Reference Buffer
Switch selectable to send V1 or V2 inputs to buffer
amplifier in headstage; allows monitoring of bath
potential on either side of epithelium; output via
rear panel permits micro-electrode impalements
or pH electrodes to be referenced to either V1 or V2
I/O Connection Specifications
Electrode Inputs
109
Clamp Output
Two switches select operating modes
Voltage/Current (I/V) Selects transepithelial voltage or current to be
controlled when Function is on Clamp
Banana jacks on headstage
Recorder Output Voltage 10 mV/mV, x10 transepithelial voltage
Recorder Output Current Jumper selectable, 1, 10, 100 or 1000 mV/µA
Pulse Generator
0 to ±100 mV and 0 to ±1 V
External Input
Allows arbitrary analog input signal to be clamped
Remote Interface
9 pin DB connector
Order #
Model
Switches
Subminiature toggle
W4 69-0930 VCC600
Grounding
Signal (circuit) ground is isolated from chassis and
power grounds; binding posts on rear panel allow
connection of circuit to chassis ground
W4 69-0931 VCC600HV
Product
Single Channel Voltage/Current
Clamp
Single Channel Voltage/Current
Clamp with High Voltage Option
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
DM MC6, EP MC6, DM660 and DM6
Input Manifolds and Dummy Membranes
The VCC MC family of instruments utilizes standard 2 mm pintip jacks for
connection to the electrode leads. The DM MC6 is a single channel input
module that can be mounted close to individual Ussing chambers and is
compatible with the all of the VCC MC series of voltage/current clamps. It
connects to modular plugs on the rear of the VCC MC instruments via
shielded cable. The DM MC6 contains an integral dummy membrane, see
below, that is activated by a slide switch on the module. One DM MC6 is
required for each clamp channel/Ussing chamber and is compatible with
both EasyMount and Harvard/Navicyte chamber systems.
W4 69-0950 DM MC6 Single Chamber
Input Module and Dummy Membrane
The EP MC6 is 6-channel (24 pintip jacks) electrode input manifold is
designed specifically for use with the Harvard/NaviCyte vertical diffusion
chamber system. The EPMC6 mounts directly behind the heat block and in
the front of the air valve manifold to provide clean, organized connection to
the electrode leads (W4 69-0998 not included). Connection between the EP
MC6 and VCC MC6 is by means of a flat cable assembly (included).
Dummy membranes are useful both for quickly verifying the operating
status of the instrument during an experiment and as a learning aid for
students.
W4 69-0932 DM660
Single Channel Dummy
Order #
W4 69-0952
DM6 Six Channel Dummy
Model
Product
W4 69-0950 DM MC6
Single Channel Electrode Input
Module and Dummy Membrane
W4 69-0951 EP MC6
Electrode Input Panel for VCC MC6
Vertical Diffusion
W4 69-0932 DM660
Single Channel Dummy Membrane
W4 69-0952 DM6
6-Channel Dummy Membrane for
VCC MC6
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
Finally, the DM6 is a 6-channel dummy membrane for VCC MC6 in which
each dummy membrane may be individually manipulated. The DM6
connects to the VCC MC6 by way of the EP MC6 flat cable assembly.
Electrophysiology
The DM660 is a single channel dummy membrane for use with the
VCC600. A similar dummy membrane is built into the DM MC6 input
module for the multi-channel clamps.
235
ussing/diffusion
Computer Controlled Multi-Clamp with Software
Data Acquisition and Analysis System with integrated amplifiers
Acquire data, analyze data, and control up to 8 amplifiers from a single integrated software/hardware package!
The system provides individual data acquisition and control for 2, 4 or 6 chambers and is fully compatible with
the NaviCyte horizontal/vertical Ussing chamber systems. Windows 95/98/2000/XP compatible.
Figure 3
Figure 1
• Individual voltage clamp, current clamp or open circuit control for
each chamber
• Overlay of uni/bipolar current pulses with variable parameters for
dynamic definition of Gt/Rt
• I/V and V/I curves with freely adjustable parameters
• Minimum pulse duration 200 ms, max. amplitude ±250 µA for
dynamic definition of Gt/Rt
• Alphanumeric display of measured parameters
• Ability to input marker and comments and save with data file
• Printout of parameters in variable timetable
W4 69-0300, W4 69-0301 or
W4 69-0302 2-, 4- or 6- Channel
Microcomputer Current/Voltage
Clamp System
Electrophysiology
ussing/diffusion
The Computer Controlled Multi-Clamp with Software is a combined
voltage/current clamp and data acquisition system in one compact
microcomputer controlled unit. The amplifiers are entirely controlled by
the associated acquisition and analysis software running on a Windows
PC computer. This makes for a clean, elegant, and simple to operate
system. In its full configuration the multi-clamp can be used to control
and collect electrophysiological data from up to six NaviCyte horizontal or
vertical diffusion chambers.
• Data format compatible to Excel
• Continuous graphics display
• Experimental time up to 8 hours
Specifications
Channels
2, 4 or 6
A/D Subsystem for
Analog Data Acquisition
13 Bit
Current Source by D/A
12 Bit, isolated
Serial Connection to PC
COM1 / COM2 for bi-directional data transfer
Case Dimensions
24.5 x 11.4 x 19.7 cm (9.6 x 4.5 x 7.8 in)
The system provides independent chamber control in three different modes:
voltage clamp, current clamp, and open circuit. An change between these
modes is possible during the experiment at each time point.
Power
100/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Input Resistance
> 109 Ω differential
The Multi-Clamp is available in 2-, 4- or 6-channel configurations and is fully
compatible with both NaviCyte Ussing chamber systems. The clamp provides
a separate A/D converter and isolated current source for each chamber, and
current and voltage electrodes from each half-cell are connected to the
Multi-Clamp via an electrode manifold. Data exchange between the PC and
the Multi-Clamp is via standard COM ports, and depending on the number of
ports available, a single PC can handle several clamps.
Input Current
< 100 pA
An interesting option consists of the incorporation of a gas delivery system
into a NaviCyte/Multi-Clamp system. This gas delivery system consists of
12 precision gas flow meters mounted to a stabilizing base and connect to
a 6-channel NaviCyte vertical or horizontal chamber systems. The 600 x
400 mm stabilizing base also houses an electrode manifold for connecting
each Ag/AgCl electrodes to their respective half-cells.
Software
The Multi-Clamp system comes complete with an easy to use Windows
95/98/2000/XP based control and data acquisition software package that
allows for the individual control and monitoring of each chamber.
System Parameters
Input Voltage
±400 mV, 0.1 mV step
Current Output
±2000 µA, 1 µA step
Product of Current and
13 V
External Resistance Max
Order #
Product
W4 69-0300 2-Channel Voltage/Current Clamp System
with Software
W4 69-0301 4-Channel Voltage/Current Clamp System
with Software
W4 69-0302 6-Channel Voltage/Current Clamp System
with Software
Perfusion and Electrical Accessories
W4 69-0303 12-Channel Precision Flowmeter and
Electrode Manifold
W4 66-0025 6-Channel Electrical Manifold for
NaviCyte Chamber Systems
Some features of the software include:
• Automatic compensation of fluid resistance and electrode
potential during the experiment
236
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
Data Acquisition & Analysis System
Acquire & Analyze
Acquisition and analysis system to accompany our epithelial voltage clamps
Acquire & Analyze is a comprehensive data acquisition and analysis package designed specifically for
recording transepithelial electrophysiological data from epithelia mounted in Ussing chambers. The system
consists of a data acquisition hardware and software to record current, voltage and conductance/resistance
from up to 8 tissues as well as analysis software that enables one to quickly extract selected data and output it
to summary spreadsheets.
Data Acquisition and Analysis Capabilities
Acquire & Analyze runs under Windows and includes a data acquisition
card, input/output cables, and software. The system can measure currents
and voltages from up to 8 voltage-current clamp channels.
• Activate/deactivate acquisition on individual clamp units
• Setup and toggle between fast and slow acquisition speeds to
capture transient events; speeds can be set by user and can be
changed at any time during experiment
• Graphically display current, voltage, conductance, resistance,
calculated open circuit voltage and calculated Isc during data
acquisition in multiple formats
• Graphical/digital readout of current, voltage or conductance vs.
time
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
• Place time marks into file to indicate when experimental
manipulations (e.g., drug additions) have been made; marks can be
predefined and selected from menu or be entered from keyboard
Unlike general-purpose data acquisition packages, Acquire & Analyze is
written specifically for the study of epithelial tissues.
• User definable x, y scaling; zoom all, in, out, or previous; pan left,
right, up or down
For example, say you want to measure the dose/response curve of an
agent on the Isc and Gt by progressive additions in eight tissue samples.
To do this you monitor the Isc and Gt on the computer until stable basal
readings are attained. You then place an event mark in the file and make
the first addition to all 8 tissues. When the current reaches a new stable
level (or a specified time has passed) you place another event mark and
make the second addition. This process is repeated until all additions
have been made.
• Extract data under movable, adjustable width time bar in file
format compatible with spreadsheet files.
To summarize the effect of the additions, use Analyze to graph the data
for all 8 tissues. Begin by displaying the movable data bar and positioning
it over the basal currents just to the left of the first event mark. Rightclick the mouse to save the mean values of current, conductance and
voltage to a spreadsheet. Simply repeat the mouse movements and clicks
to obtain the data for each subsequent addition. The spreadsheet thus
created can be saved and imported directly into Excel for further analysis.
• Extracted data may be individual points or mean values.
• Extracted data may be imported into commercial graphics
packages to produce publication quality graphs.
ussing/diffusion
• Plot raw or area corrected data
• Linear regression analysis of conductance vs. current can be
performed on data within time bar to estimate pericellular
pathway conductance.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 69-3145 –
Acquire & Analyze
Data Acquisition and
Analysis Software
W4 69-0954 MOD 08/A
Interface Module for VCC 600,
VCC MC2, EC-800 and
EC-825A amps
W4 64-1705 DB9EC800
Interface Cable for EC-800
W4 64-1706 DB15EC825A
Interface Cable for EC-825A
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
237
ussing/diffusion
Data Acquisition & Analysis System
HAI-118
The HAI-118 is a fast, high-resolution data acquisition system suitable for most data recording needs in the
research laboratory, including studies of epithelial tissue. The system consists of data acquisition hardware and a
programmable software package used to record current, voltage, and conductance/resistance from 4 to 6 tissues.
Electrophysiology
W4 69-3130 HAI 118 Data Acquisition System
ussing/diffusion
The HAI-118 includes hardware from iWorx and the popular LabScribe®
software package. This system offers 8 analog input channels, 8 digital
outputs, 4 digital inputs and 2 DACs. The hardware connects to PC
compatible computers via USB, so setup is plug-and-play easy.
DACs
The HAI-118 offers two ± 0V DACs. Each DAC is independently
programmable and can be synchronized with one another. Basic stimulus
parameters for each DAC, such as pulse width, frequency, and amplitude
can be changed on the fly using handy controls located in the LabScribe
software tool bar. Standard protocols include pulse, train, and step
waveform. Each standard protocol allows the quiescent state to be a
holding voltage thereby making it ideal for voltage clamping
applications.
Resolution
Speed
The HAI-118 can collect 16 bit samples at 10kHz bandwidth on a single or
up to eight channels simultaneously.
USB Connection
Connection to the computer is accomplished over the popular USB port.
This eliminates the need to install special interface cards and makes the
HAI 118 compatible with notebook computers. The HAI 118 has a small
footprint and in combination with a notebook requires very little bench
space.
Software Included
Powerful LabScribe® software is included with each HAI 118. LabScribe is
provided with a site license at no additional charge and upgrades are free
forever. The program will actually upgrade itself on any Internet
connected machine.
A 16 bit A/D converter is used to sample data over the full input range.
Typical noise on any input is less than 1 mV. This allows the recording of
signals from 10 mV to 10 V without the need for additional external gain.
Digital Input/Output
Eight digital output lines are available and the digital output connectors
are industry standard BNC, eliminating the need for custom cables.
Programming output lines is point-and-click and no complicated scripting
language is required. Four digital input lines are also provided. One
digital input line can be configured as as external trigger.
238
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
ussing/diffusion
Data Acquisition & Analysis System
HAI-118 (continued)
as well the VCC Series epithelial voltage clamps can be fed directly into
the HAI-118. The voltage clamp protocol in the LabScribe program's
stimulator section makes recording of data of four to six epithelial
channels possible.
Oocyte Studies - LabScribe's gain telegraph feature automatically
calibrates the software to Warner's Oocyte Clamp so that the main
display reads in current and voltage. The on-board stimulator includes a
flexible voltage clamp protocol so an external stimulator is not required.
Finally, the digital output capability of the HAI-118 also adds the ability to
automate your oocyte rig. Organ and Tissue Bath Studies - LabScribe's
smooth data recording interface and available 8 channels area perfect fit
for tissue and organ bath studies. Real-time displays of force in grams as
well as real-time annotations are ideal for these types of studies. In
addition, the on board stimulator and digital outputs make automation of
tasks like filling and draining baths or delivering drugs very
straightforward. An available 8 channel high voltage field stimulator is
directly controlled by the HAI-118 and LabScribe software.
Electrophysiology Studies - The high speed nature of the HAI-118 make
it perfect for studies involving blood pressure and sympathetic nerve
activity as well as all types of cardiac electrophysiology, even in rapid
heartrate animals such as mice where extra speed is required.
Labscribe Data Acquisition Software The cornerstone of the HAI-118 data
acquisition system is the LabScribe software. A single program, LabScribe
detects what hardware it is connected to and self-configures. LabScribe
is, by far, the easiest to use data recording and analysis solution
available. It strikes the ideal balance between flexibility and simplicity.
Just push the "Start" button, then use the AutoScale feature to center and
expand your data; and you're recording! The ‘click and play’ approach of
the software extends to a useful assortment of analyses, such as rate,
integral, and conversion to real units. And, of course, built-in online help
is always available.
LabScribe Software Features:
Simplified User Interface
• Only two mouse-clicks are required to record most data
• Only one mouse-click is required for most online functions
• Use of screen-time makes time calculations quick and simple
AutoScale
• Automatically ensures the optimal scaling of displayed data
• A simple click centers and expands the data in the display
window to fill the available space
• You can toggle between Best View and a preset viewing range or
you can zoom the time base or y axis scaling with a single click
Fast Scrolling
• LabScribe’s display can smoothly scroll data at any speed
Real Units
• LabScribe software allows you to calibrate the displayed data in
any units that you choose
• Reading your data in mm Hg or grams or A takes the guesswork out
of analysis
Real-time Annotation
• Keyboard input from the user may be time locked to the data to
indicate drug delivery or stimulus points
• You can search and "Go To Annotations" anywhere in the data
Real-time Functions
• LabScribe currently supports 17 functions that are calculated and
displayed in real-time, each is called from a single click in the
Main window
• These include Periodic (rate, freq., period, max, min,
mean), dV/dt, integral, Channel Math, Cardiac, EEG and Spirometry
• Functions can be applied to raw data in real-time or they can be
called after the data has been recorded
Volt Meter Panel
• LabScribe can display a voltmeter status panel
• Values recorded on each channel are displayed in large type, easily
visible from across the room
• Display DAC output on any channel
• Ability to revert back to Raw Data at any time
Electrophysiology
Epithelial Studies - Output from Warner's EC-800 and EC-825A,
• LabScribe reports can
Journal
• LabScribe reports can be prepared and edited, all within the
program's own Journal.
• No need to export to word processor or spreadsheet programs.
• The onboard journal also serves as a collecting place for the various
measurements made in the Analysis window.
ussing/diffusion
Supported Applications
• The journal saves automatically with the file in .rtf format, which
can be opened by any word processor.
Offline Functions
• Twenty-six offline calculations are also supported. These operate on
a selection of data and return a value. While more are being added
all the time, the current list includes area under the curve, max-min,
slope at a point, slope of the line of best fit and the mean.
XY Plot
• In the Analysis window you can choose to overlay selected portions
of your data or you can plot different channels against one another
in an XY style plot.
• In XY mode, the available measurement functions adjust to
the xy mode.
• Useful when high resolution data is compressed on the time axis to
create a data overview.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
239
ussing/diffusion
Data Acquisition & Analysis System
HAI-118 (continued)
LabScribe Software Features: (continued)
Export
Specifications
Input:
• Recorded data may be exported in text (.txt), pictures (.png) or
MatLab (.mat) format.
Number of Analog Inputs
8 single ended BNC
Input Impedance
1 MΩ
• This is ideal for post analysis in programs like Excel or MatLab
and export picture formats make reports or poster presentations
easy to create.
Input Range
±10 V
Noise
1 mV typical
Gain Telegraph
Software or hardware 8 bit
• Of course, you can always print data from any window in
the program.
The Stimulator
• LabScribe has full support for the analog outputs on HAI hardware.
• The user can specify simple pulses or complex protocols involving
trains and stepped voltage patterns.
• When used with HAI 118 hardware, LabScribe supports two
simultaneous outputs.
Digital I/O
• When used with the HAI 118 the LabScribe software allows the
user to configure eight digital inputs or outputs.
A/D Converter:
Sample Speed
1 sample/sec - 100k sample/sec
Resolution
16 bit
Interface
USB
Trigger or Digital Input Lines
4, TTL
Output:
Digital Output Lines
8 TTL
Digital Output Connector
BNC
DAC Performance:
Number of DACs
2
DAC Resolution
12 bit
Electrophysiology
DAC Speed
• Digital inputs can show frequency, period, duty cycle, time on or
raw data
100k sample/sec, Independent
of sample speed
DAC Output Range
±10V
DAC Modes
Pulse, Train, Step, DC, Custom
• Digital outputs can be assembled into control protocols for
external devices
Pulse Width
0.01 ms to 6500 ms (pulse mode)
Frequency
0.2 Hz to 50kHz (pulse Mode)
Settings
ussing/diffusion
• Settings or templates for various experiments are stored in the
program's settings menu
Trigger Modes
External Trigger, Data Threshold
Trigger, User Trigger
Display
Real time user definable screen
independent of sample rate. User
definable scale units: Auto Scale,
Full Scale or User Scale
Enclosure
Aluminum
Power
120/220 VAC, 60/50 HZ, CE compliant
• This makes changing program settings to accommodate different
experiments point-and-click easy
Broadcast
• A version (LS/16MC) of LabScribe is available that transmits
recorded data in real-time over your local area network!
• Ideal for teaching or student labs where everyone can not
get data first hand, this feature allows the network to share
what the broadcast version sees
Order #
Model
Product
W4 69-3130
IX118
Data acquisition system with
hardware and Labscribe® software
Gain Telegraph
• LabScribe will automatically calibrate and display the out put of
Warner Instrument Voltage/Patch Clamp amplifiers
• This feature takes into account the changes in gain that may be
applied from the voltage clamp
Software license allows copying on all departmental and student computers.
240
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
2200 Series
vibration isolation
BenchMate Vibration-Free Platforms
Applications (Partial List)
• Atomic Force Microscopes
• Microhardness Testers
• Profiometers
• Balances
• Audio Equipment
• Precision Measuring and Testing Equipment
Specifications
Min. Load @ 20 psi
Vertical Natural Frequency:
Isolation Efficiency @ 5 Hz
52%
Isolation Efficiency @ 10 Hz
83%
Horizontal Natural Frequency:
2.9 Hz
Isolation Efficiency @ 5 Hz
40%
Isolation Efficiency @ 10 Hz
92%
Max. Load @ 80 psi
Vertical Natural Frequency:
70%
Isolation Efficiency @ 10 Hz
91%
Horizontal Natural Frequency:
These 2200 Series BenchMate Vibration-Free Platforms enhance the
performance of precision tabletop equipment.
2.1 Hz
Isolation Efficiency @ 5 Hz
1.8 Hz
Isolation Efficiency @ 5 Hz
81%
Isolation Efficiency @ 10 Hz
95%
The 2210 Series is a Manual-Air design using an included hand pump
(good for situations where an air source is not available). It requires
periodic manual leveling.
Gross Load Capacity @ 80 psi:
The 2212 Series is an Automatic-Air design that requires an external air
source for use (not included). It is a self-leveling unit and is recommended
for regular use.
Finish
W4 72-4728 to W4 72-4733
90.8 kg (200 lbs)
All Others
204 kg (450 lbs)
Ferromagnetic stainless steel,
Ferromagnetic stainless steel with
1
⁄4-20 x 1" centers or Ferromagnetic
stainless steel with M6 x 25mm on center
These tables are not compatible with the Planar Lipid Bilayer workstation.
Catalog No. Depth x Width
Max. Capacity
Air Movement
W4 72-4755
16 x 19 in
up to 200 lbs
Manual Air
Ferromagnetic SS
W4 72-4756
16 x 19 in
up to 200 lbs
Automatic Air
Ferromagnetic SS
W4 64-0081
16 x 19 in
up to 200 lbs
Manual Air
Custom table for Bilayer Workstation, includes hand pump
W4 64-0082
16 x 19 in
up to 200 lbs
Automatic Air
Custom table for Bilayer Workstation
W4 72-4728
20 x 24 in
up to 200 lbs
Manual Air
Ferromagnetic SS
W4 72-4729
20 x 24 in
up to 200 lbs
Manual Air
Ferromagnetic SS SPILLPRUF with 1⁄4-20 x 1" centers
W4 72-4730
20 x 24 in
up to 200 lbs
Manual Air
Ferromagnetic SS SPILLPRUF with M6 x 25mm centers
W4 72-4731
20 x 24 in
up to 200 lbs
Automatic Air
Ferromagnetic SS
W4 72-4732
20 x 24 in
up to 200 lbs
Automatic Air
Ferromagnetic SS SPILLPRUF with 1⁄4-20 x 1" centers
W4 72-4733
20 x 24 in
up to 200 lbs
Automatic Air
Ferromagnetic SS SPILLPRUF with M6 x 25mm centers
W4 72-4734
24 x 30 in
up to 450 lbs
Automatic Air
Ferromagnetic SS
W4 72-4735
24 x 30 in
up to 450 lbs
Automatic Air
Ferromagnetic SS SPILLPRUF with 1⁄4-20 x 1" centers
W4 72-4736
24 x 30 in
up to 450 lbs
Automatic Air
Ferromagnetic SS SPILLPRUF with M6 x 25mm center
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Unmatched price / performance
Low profile Manual-Air or Automatic-Air designs
VibraDamped construction
Low natural frequency
Excellent horizontal isolation
SPILLPRUF spill management
Class 100 Cleanroom Compatible - Class 10
available
vibration isolation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.3 Hz
Platform Top
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
241
vibration isolation
5600 Series
Lightweight VIBRALITE Breadboards
•
•
•
•
•
Electrophysiology
Nominal broadband damping
High natural frequency
Magnetic
Thickness: 1 inch or 2 inch nominal
1⁄8 inch Ferromagnetic stainless steel top and
bottom skin
• Extruded structural aluminum core
• Flatness: ±0.004 inch over 24 x 24 inch
• SPILLPRUF mounting holes English 1⁄4-20 x 1
inch or Metric M6 x 25 mm grid
Order #
WxD
Top
W4 72-4741
18 x 24 in
English SPILLPRUF 1⁄4-20 x 1 in
W4 72-4742
18 x 24 in
Metric (45 x 60 cm) SPILLPRUF
M6 x 25 mm
W4 72-4743
24 x 48 in
English SPILLPRUF 1⁄4-20 x 1 in
W4 72-4744
24 x 48 in
Metric (45 x 120 cm) SPILLPRUF
M6 x 25 mm
W4 72-4745
24 x 24 in.
English SPILLPRUF 1⁄4-20 x 1 in
W4 72-4746
24 x 24 in
Metric (60 x 60 cm) SPILLPRUF
M6 x 25 mm
W4 72-4747
24 x 36 in
English SPILLPRUF 1⁄4-20 x 1 in
W4 72-4748
24 x 36 in
Metric (60 x 90 cm) SPILLPRUF
M6 x 25 mm
W4 72-4749
24 x 48 in
English SPILLPRUF 1⁄4-20 x 1 in
W4 72-4750
24 x 48 in
Metric (60 x 120 cm)
SPILLPRUF M6 x 25 mm
W4 72-4751
36 x 48 in
English SPILLPRUF 1⁄4-20 x 1 in
W4 72-4752
36 x 48 in
Metric (90 x 120 cm)
SPILLPRUF M6 x 25 mm
Accessories
W4 72-4753
Level-Lok Tie-downs, qty. of 4
W4 72-4754
Level-Lok Tie-downs, qty. of 5
vibration isolation
These economical 5600 Series VIBRALITE breadboards feature a
lightweight construction with 1⁄8 inch ferromagnetic stainless steel top
and bottom skins with an aluminum core to reduce weight. They are an
excellent economical choice. VIBRALITE breadboards are thinner and
smaller than full-size optical tables, these “mini-tables” are built with the
same precision tooling and high quality materials. Furnished with
SPILLPRUF tapped mounting holes.
Optional, Level-Lok™ tie-downs fasten your breadboard to another surface,
enabling you to level your work surface and lock it down. They are
available in packages of 4 or 5 tie-downs.
242
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
9100 Series
vibration isolation
LabMate VIBRAPLANE Workstations
The 9100 Series VIBRAPLANE Workstations are available for two load capacities, and is field convertible to the
desired capacity. Faraday Cages are offered as accessories.
Applications (Partial List)
• Analytical Balances
• Cell Injection
• Confocal Microscopes
• Patch Clamping
• Optical Microscopes
• Wafer Probing
• Mask Aligning
• Atomic Force Microscopes
*Guard rails and side rails must be purchased separately.
Supplied in packages of 2.
Warranty 1 year.
Specifications
Minimum Load @ 20 psi
•
•
•
•
Vertical vibration isolation
Horizontal vibration isolation
VibraDamped steel frame
High performance automatic-air suspension
Maintains a preset zero deflection level
(regardless of load addition or removal)
Choice of tabletops
Choose from 12 sizes
Ergonomic styling
Class 100 Cleanroom Compatible - Class 10
available
70%
Isolation Efficiency @ 10 Hz
90%
Horizontal Natural Frequency:
2.2 Hz
Isolation Efficiency @ 5 Hz
64%
Isolation Efficiency @ 10 Hz
90%
Max. Load @ 80 psi
Vertical Natural Frequency:
1.5 Hz
Isolation Efficiency @ 5 Hz
85%
Isolation Efficiency @ 10 Hz
97%
Horizontal Natural Frequency:
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
•
•
•
•
•
1.9 Hz
Isolation Efficiency @ 5 Hz
1.2 Hz
Isolation Efficiency @ 5 Hz
91%
Isolation Efficiency @ 10 Hz
97%
Gross Load Capacity @ 80 psi:
9101
363 kg (800 lbs)
9102
590 kg (1300 lbs)
vibration isolation
Vertical Natural Frequency:
Finish:
Standard
Linear White Polyurethane
Class 10
White Epoxy Powder Coat
Note: Typical performance efficiencies are for microdisturbances
Labmate vibraplane workstations do not include any accessories; all must
be purchased separately.
- Sliding shelf
- Guard Rails
- Side Rails
- Padded Arm Rests
- Castors
- Power Outlet Strip
LMVW Require a fork lift for transport when delivered, Aprox. 500 lbs.
Guard and side rails ship together (wooden pkg), Aprox 45 lbs
(43 x 15 x 8 in)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
243
vibration isolation
9100 Series
LabMate VIBRAPLANE Workstations (continued)
Electrophysiology
Order #
Load Capacity
Depth x Width
Tabletop
W4 72-4701
648 lbs
30 x 36 in
2" White Composite w/White Plastic Laminate
W4 72-4702
648 lbs
30 x 36 in
2" White Composite w/Stainless Steel Laminate
W4 72-4703
627 lbs
30 x 36 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb 1⁄4-20 x1 in. centers
W4 72-4704
627 lbs
30 x 36 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb M6 x 25 mm centers
W4 72-4706
598 lbs
30 x 48 in
2" White Composite w/White Plastic Laminate
W4 72-4707
598 lbs
30 x 48 in
2" White Composite w/Stainless Steel Laminate
W4 72-4708
569 lbs
30 x 48 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb 1⁄4-20 x1 in. centers
W4 72-4709
569 lbs
30 x 48 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb M6 x 25 mm centers
W4 72-4711
548 lbs
30 x 60 in
2" White Composite w/White Plastic Laminate
W4 72-4712
548 lbs
30 x 60 in
2" White Composite w/Stainless Steel Laminate
W4 72-4713
512 lbs
30 x 60 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb 1⁄4-20 x 1 in. centers
W4 72-4714
512 lbs
30 x 60 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb M6 x 25 mm centers
W4 72-4716
679 lbs
24 x 36 in
2" White Composite w/White Plastic Laminate
W4 72-4717
679 lbs
24 x 36 in
2" White Composite w/Stainless Steel Laminate
W4 72-4719
558 lbs
36 x 48 in
2" White Composite w/White Plastic Laminate
W4 72-4720
558 lbs
36 x 48 in
2" White Composite w/Stainless Steel Laminate
W4 72-4721
523 lbs
36 x 48 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb 1⁄4-20 x 1 in. centers
W4 72-4722
523 lbs
36 x 48 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb M6 x 25 mm centers
W4 72-4724
562 lbs
36 x 60 in
2" White Composite w/White Plastic Laminate
W4 72-4725
562 lbs
36 x 60 in
2" White Composite w/Stainless Steel Laminate
W4 72-4726
954 lbs
36 x 60 in
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb 1⁄4-20 x 1 in. centers
4" SPILLPRUF Honeycomb M6 x 25 mm centers
W4 72-4727
954 lbs
36 x 60 in
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1458
RC-4
Retractable Casters, set of 4
W4 64-1459-36
GR-36
Guard Rails, 36 inch length, front and rear
W4 64-1459-48
GR-48
Guard Rails, 48 inch length, front and rear
W4 64-1459-60
GR-60
Guard Rails, 60 inch length, front and rear
W4 64-1459-72
GR-72
Guard Rails, 72 inch length, front and rear
W4 64-1460
PA2
Padded Arm Rests, pkg. of two
W4 64-1461-10
SS-10
Sliding Shelf, 10 inch width, 31 inch length
W4 64-1461-12
SS-12
Sliding Shelf, 12 inch width, 31 inch length
W4 64-1461-14
SS-14
Sliding Shelf, 14 inch width, 31 inch length
W4 64-1462
PAC
Portable Air Compressor
W4 64-1463
EOS
Electrical Outlet Strip
W4 64-1607
SDR
Side Rails
Accessories
vibration isolation
W4 72-4737
24 x 36 in
Kinetic Systems Faraday Cage*, Height 48 in
W4 72-4738
30 x 36 in
Kinetic Systems Faraday Cage*, Height 48 in
W4 72-4739
30 x 48 in
Kinetic Systems Faraday Cage*, Height 48 in
W4 72-7733
30 x 60 in
Kinetic Systems Faraday Cage*, Height 48 in
W4 72-4740
36 x 48 in
Kinetic Systems Faraday Cage*, Height 48 in
W4 72-7734
36 x 60 in
Kinetic Systems Faraday Cage*, Height 48 in
W4 72-6021
36 in
Side Rails for Kinetic Systems Faraday Cage
W4 72-6023
24 in
Side Rails for Kinetic Systems Faraday Cage
*Requires Side and Guard Rails
244
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
vibration isolation
63-500 Series
High-Performance Lab Tables
• Vertical and
horizontal isolation
• Gimbal piston™
isolators
• Aluminum height
control valves
• Internal piston
travel restraint
• Rugged built-in
leveling feet
• Choice of tabletops
Stainless Steel Laminate
Recommended for applications that require a strong magnetic attachment
and will not involve repeated exposure of the top to corrosive liquids. This
top does not have the precision flatness of our CleanTop II honeycomb
top. Flatness is 0.030 in. ( 0.8 mm).
Plastic Laminate on Stainless Steel
An easy-to-clean alternative to stainless steel without sacrificing
structural performance. A plastic laminate is added to the top surface,
which reduces ferromagnetic attachment strength.
CleanTop II
Features a spill-proof, drilled and tapped mounting hole array. Tops are 4
in. (100 mm) thick and have 1/4–20 holes on 1 in. spacing or M6 holes on
25 mm spacing. The small cell-size steel honeycomb design provides
stiffer damping than the stainless steel laminate. Guaranteed flat to
0.005 in. (0.13 mm).
Accessories
Front and Rear Support Bars
These adjustable steel rails mount on the table’s front and rear legs. They
may be cantilevered and have slots in which shelves can be mounted. A
front support bar is required for use with 60-4555 armrest pads. A front
and rear support bar is required for use with sliding shelves. Support bars
cannot be used in conjunction with the Faraday cage.
Armrest Pads
Available for both
Faraday cage and nonFaraday cage
applications. Adjustable
leather forearm rests
Armrest Pads
fasten to the Front
Support Bar or Perimeter Enclosure and can slide from side to side for
added comfort. Sold in sets of two pads.
Sliding shelves are made of wood with white plastic laminate covering all
sides. Available in 6, 10, 14 and 20" widths. A metal bracket on the front
edge of the shelf fits into the slot in the front support bar. Shelves slide
freely from side to side and are easily lifted from the support bars. Builtin stops prevent shelves from sliding out of slots.
Casters
A set of four retractable
casters with a total
weight capacity of 1,000
lb (450 kg) can be
mounted to the base of
the table legs. Fits all
Casters (set of 4)
tables.
Fixed Full-Perimeter Enclosures
A fixed, welded-steel structure that completely surrounds the table top to
provide non-isolated support for the Faraday Cage and the sliding side
shelf. Only accepts 8" wide Sliding Side Shelf.
Type II
Faraday Cage
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Table Tops
Sliding Shelves for Non-Faraday Cage Applications
vibration isolation
The 63-500 Series High-Performance Lab Table provides an excellent
vibration-free working surface for loads up to 350 lb (160 kg). Now with
modular construction, these tables are recommended for use in such
diverse applications as electrophysiology, cell injection, ultramicrotomy,
photomicroscopy, scanning tunnel microscopy, and confocal laser
scanning microscopy.
Type II Faraday Cage
The Type II Faraday Cage offers improved
access and simplified assembly. The
“window-shade” type retracting front
panel is easy to operate and causes
reduced disturbance when adjusted. The
front panel may be positioned anywhere
between fully opened and fully closed,
and stays in position without a fastener.
The Type II Faraday cage requires the
full-perimeter enclosure to mount to the
63-500 Series table.
Sliding Shelf for Faraday Cage Applications
An 8" wide shelf that slides freely from side to side within the Faraday
cage enclosure.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
245
vibration isolation
63-500 Series
High-Performance Lab Tables
Specifications
Vertical natural frequency:
High Input
1.2 Hz
Low Input
1.5-2.0 Hz
Isolation efficiency @ 5Hz
70-85%
Isolation efficiency @ 10Hz
90-97%
Horizontal natural frequency:
High Input
1.0 Hz
Low Input
1.2-1.7 Hz
Isolation efficiency @ 5Hz
75-90%
Isolation efficiency @ 10Hz
90-97%
Gross load capacity
1400 lb (640 kg)
Net load capacity
350 lb (160 kg)
Finish
Black powder coat frame
Stainless steel top
Facilities required
80 PSI
Tables
Electrophysiology
Description
25" x 36"
30" x 30"
30" x 36"
30" x 48"
36" x 48"
Stainless steel top
W4 60-4750
W4 60-4751
W4 60-4752
W4 60-4753
W4 60-4754
Plastic laminate top
W4 60-4755
W4 60-4756
W4 60-4757
W4 60-4758
W4 60-4759
Cleantop II, 1⁄4-20 thread ---
---
---
--- W4 60-4760
W4 60-4761
W4 60-4762
Cleantop II, M6 thread
---
---
--- W4 60-4763
W4 60-4764
W4 60-4765
---
vibration isolation
Accessories for Non-Faraday Cage Applications
Description
25" x 36"
30" x 30"
30" x 36"
30" x 48"
36" x 48"
Front support bar
W4 60-4536
W4 60-4535
W4 60-4536
W4 60-4537
W4 60-4537
Rear support bar
W4 60-4540
W4 60-4539
W4 60-4540
W4 60-4541
W4 60-4541
Armrest pads (set of 2) W4 60-4567
W4 60-4567
W4 60-4567
W4 60-4567
W4 60-4567
Sliding shelf, 6" wide
W4 60-4543
W4 60-4547
W4 60-4547
W4 60-4547
W4 60-4551
Sliding shelf, 10" wide
W4 60-4544
W4 60-4548
W4 60-4548
W4 60-4548
W4 60-4552
Sliding shelf, 14" wide
W4 60-4545
W4 60-4549
W4 60-4549
W4 60-4549
W4 60-4553
Sliding shelf, 20" wide
W4 60-4546
W4 60-4550
W4 60-4550
W4 60-4550
W4 60-4554
Casters (set of 4)
W4 60-4798
W4 60-4798
W4 60-4798
W4 60-4798
W4 60-4798
Accessories for Faraday Cage Applications
246
Description
30" x 36"
30" x 48"
36" x 48"
Faraday Cage
W4 60-4799
W4 60-4800
W4 60-4801
Perimeter enclosure for
stainless steel and laminated
tops (required for cage)
W4 60-4804
W4 60-4806
W4 60-4808
Perimeter enclosure
for Cleantop tops
(required for cage)
W4 60-4805
W4 60-4807
W4 60-4809
Armrest pads (set of 2)
W4 60-4568
W4 60-4568
W4 60-4568
Hanging shelf
W4 60-4571
W4 60-4572
W4 60-4572
Sliding side shelf, 8" wide
W4 60-4811
W4 60-4811
W4 60-4815
Casters (set of 4)
W4 60-4798
W4 60-4798
W4 60-4798
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
stimulators
SIU-102
Stimulus Isolation Unit – Bipolar High Current
Designed for use with Warner's imaging chambers and dish inserts with field stimulation electrodes
CC-102 Cable
Designed for use with Warner imaging chambers having field stimulation
electrodes, the SIU-102 features optical isolation at the input and
transformer isolation at the output. Timing pulses can be controlled by
any device capable of generating a TTL level positive pulse – a computer
with data acquisition, for example.
Positive or negative pulses, positive or negative DC, and bipolar pulses
are possible in constant current or constant voltage delivery modes. For
bipolar delivery, a positive pulse during the input pulse is followed
immediately by a negative pulse of equal duration and amplitude. Bipolar
pulse widths from 100 µs to 100 seconds per each polarity are possible.
Output amplitude is set using a range mode switch in conjunction with
a ten-turn potentiometer to set a percentage of the selected range.
Indicator lights keep the user apprised of the following:
Output Waveform
DC, Current Pulse or Voltage Pulse
Output Current Ranges
1, 10, and 100 mA
Output Voltage Ranges
10 and 100 V
Output Impedance
Voltage Mode
10 V Range: 1 kΩ
100 V Range: 10 kΩ
Output Compliance
100 V
Output Polarity
Selected by Mode Switch
Red connector is positive in any
positive mode: Red connector is
negative in any negative mode
Amplitude Control
Multi-turn dial
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Specifications
stimulators
• Constant current and constant voltage modes
• Bipolar, pulse and DC modes
• Optical coupling is used to isolate the stimulator
from pulse source
• Current up to 100 mA, voltage up to 100 V
• For imaging applications only
Input Pulse Requirements TTL level, positive pulse 3 V,
1 mA minimum Minimum
Pulse Width
100 µs Maximum Pulse Width: 100 s
(Bipolar Mode Only)
Input Connector
BNC
Output Connector
Banana Jacks
Power Requirements
90 to 270 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
Physical Size, H x W x D
8.9 x 20 x 25.4 cm
Shipping Weight
3 kg
Warranty
Two years, parts and labor
High voltage:
Lights red when output voltage above 30 volts
Order #
Model
Product
Compliance:
Lights when impedance across output is too high
for current setting
W4 64-1424
SIU-102
Stimulus Isolation Unit
T>100 Sec:
Lights when pulse width input is longer than 100
seconds in Bipolar mode
W4 64-1425
CC-102
Cable, male banana to 1 mm jacks
(for use with Warner field
stimulation chambers)
Ext. Trigger:
Lights when a valid input is applied to the Pulse In
BNC
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
247
DS4
stimulators
Bipolar Isolated Stimulator
Compatible with electrophysiology recording
Specifications
Output
Biphasic constant current proportional to the
input voltage
Output Ranges
±10_A; ±100_A; ±1mA; ±10mA for a full scale input
Output Duration
>2_s
Compliance
±48V from 8x GP23A batteries
Linearity
±3% of full scale output for each output range
Output Impedance
>900Mohms
Output Rise Time
<5_s (1kohm load), <40_s (1Mohm load)
Frequency Response
Expected DS4 output is maintained for frequencies
up to 5kHz.
Inputs
IN
Ranges
Input Impedance
Electrophysiology
•
•
•
•
•
No interference with recordings
No ground loops
Bi-phasic constant current
Gated operation allows multiple units
Battery powered energy saver circuitry
stimulators
The DS4 provides an isolated biphasic constant current stimulus in
response to an external command voltage signal. Generally speaking, the
command signal is a computer generated DAC signal via software.
The DS4 accepts a variety of voltage input ranges from ±1V to ±10V and
produces a constant current output in 4 overlapping ranges from ±10_A to
±10mA. The compliance voltage is ±48V.
GATE
Range: TTL; Gate OFF if Low; Gate ON if High or open
circuit. Limit of ±15V max.
Input Impedance: 10kohm
Inactivity Sensor
The output is disabled if the voltage input remains
within 0±0.2% of the full scale value for a user
selectable period of 100ms, 200ms, 1s or 2s. This time
period can be adjusted with an internal jumper.
Connections
Output - 2mm shrouded, touch-proof sockets (red and
black) spaced at 0.75"
Input - Front panel BNC socket
Gate - Front panel BNC socket
Battery Test - Six 2mm sockets
Power - Socket for external power supply
Controls:
Gate - On/Off toggle (off overrides BNC input)
Output Range - 4 position rotary switch
Power - On/Off toggle switch
Indicators
Power ON - LED Green (lit when the power supply is
connected and DS4 is switched On)
Gate Enabled - LED Amber (lit when Gate is On and
the Gate Input is held TTL high)
Phase+ve - LED Amber (lit when input exceeds +0.2%
of full scale voltage)
Phase-ve - LED Amber (lit when input exceeds -0.2%
of full scale voltage)
Power
Included external power supply (input voltage
110V - 220V) providing ±15V DC output
10 x 12V GP23A Batteries.
Mounting
One or two stimulators may be mounted in a 19" rack
using a specially fabricated frame (D121-11)
Dimensions (w x h x d)
190 x 110 x 80 mm (7.5 x 4.3 x 3.1 in)
Weight (approx.)
500g (1.1 lbs)
In addition, the DS4’s GATE input allows multiple DS4's to be connected
to a single analog voltage source, with each DS4 capable of being
independently enabled.
One problem with stimulators that use an external voltage source to
define the stimulus waveform is that small offsets or noisy baseline
signals from the DAC's can result in battery drain or low amplitude
stimulation. The DS4 uses a special "inactivity sensor" to monitor the
input voltage and disable the output if this voltage falls within 0.2% of
the full scale value for a user selectable time period. This "inactivity
sensor" reduces battery usage and damaging "leak currents" during
infrequent stimulation, while at the same time maintaining low zero
crossing distortion for repetitive waveforms.
The DS4 uses an external power supply to power the input control
circuitry and inexpensive batteries to provide an opto-isolated voltage
source.
248
±1; ±2.5; ±5; ±10 V full scale (selected by
an internal jumper) with a limit of ±12V max
without damage
1Mohm
Order #
Model
W4 65-0364 DS4
Product
Biphasic Stimulus Isolator
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
stimulators
DS2A and DS3
Constant Voltage and Constant Current Isolated Stimulators
A bettery operated stimulator useful for electrophysiology experiments
Specifications
Maximum Output
99 V (High), 9 V (Low) selected by front panel switch;
square wave pulse shape, typical rise
Voltage (DS2A)
Time < 1 µsec fall time < 3 µsec into resistive load
Output Ranges (DS3)
2 to 32 µA, 20 to 320 µA, 0.2 to 3.2 mA and 2 to 32 mA
Output Compliance (DS3)
90 V
Output Impedance (DS2A)
Dependent on position of amplitude control, 1.25 K max.
at center position, 200 Ω at ends of travel
Pulse Width Controls*:
Two dials providing continuous adjustments over range
20 µsec to 2 sec, as well as selection of input pulse width
1)
6-Position Switch for pulse widths 10 µsec, 100 µsec,
1 msec, 10 msec, 100 msec with ±10% accuracy or
equal to input pulse width
2)
Multiplier continuously variable over range x2 to x20;
pulse width is product of two dial settings
Single shot push button provided
Batteries
Self contained batteries are used to provide isolated
source of power; current is drawn only when delivering
output pulse; max. current drain is 30 mA plus load current
Battery Type
11 x PP3 - (IEC-6R61) style 9V batteries
Dimensions:
Panel Size
Depth
80 mm (3.15 in) over knobs
Weight
Order #
•
•
•
•
•
Minimal interference with recordings
No ground loops
DS2A: 100 V maximum at up to 50 mA
DS3: 2 µA - 32 mA from 90 Volts
Battery powered energy saver circuitry
190 x 110 mm (7.5 x 4.3 in)
800 g (28.2 oz) with batteries installed
Model
Product
W4 65-0329 DS2A
Isolated Stimulator,
Constant Voltage
W4 65-0550 DS3
Isolated Stimulator,
Constant Current Output
W4 65-0337 D121-11
19 Inch Rack Mounting Frame,
holds two DS2A/ DS3/DG2
stimulators
Single Shot*
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
Trigger Isolation*
Optical coupling is employed between trigger source and
stimulator circuitry; capacity coupling less than 3 pF
*Note: Fulfilled by both DS2A and DS3.
Many experiments in electrophysiology use a brief pulse of current as a
stimulus to excite nerve or muscle fibers. It is desirable that the source of
this E.M.F. should be isolated both from ground and from the timing
generator used to release the stimulus. The DS2A and DS3 fulfill these
requirements by using self contained batteries as the source of power
and optical coupling is employed to isolate the stimulator from the trigger
source. Precise timing of stimulus application can be controlled by a PC or
other stimulus generating device such as the DG2 Trigger Generator. The
duration of the stimulator output is adjustable over the range of 20
microseconds to two seconds by controls on the stimulators or can be the
same as the applied trigger pulse.
Current is drawn from the batteries only and instruments have nonconductive enclosure. A single shot button is provided, which operates
at all times irrespective of the trigger input.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
249
stimulators
DG2A
Train/Delay Generator
Designed for control of normal repetitive stimulation as well as for defining the Effective Refractory Period using a second, delayed pulse
Specifications (continued)
Input:
Connector
BNC socket
Levels
TTL high (>1.5 V), TTL low (<0.8 V)
Polarity
Active High (GATE/TRAIN) and Positive edge (SINGLE) or
Active Low and Negative edge by Internal Jumper
Internal Jumper
Enable “Active Low” - allowing for an Input that is Low
during its active phase
Push-button
Has same function as a valid input signal
Indicator
“TOO FAST” Red LED that flashes if a Trigger is received
while the unit is busy
Duration:
•
•
•
•
Trigger timing generator
Ideal for electrophysiology
Perfect match for DS2A and DS3
Internal battery
Total range
10 msec - 12 sec in three overlapping ranges
Control
Single turn control marked 1 – 12 sec with intermediate
integer panel marks
Accuracy
±1% at ‘1’ and ‘12’ marks, ±5% at intermediate marks
Multiplier
x0.01 ; x0.1 ; x1
Internal Jumper
Enable “x10” - giving a 100 msec - 120 sec total range
Repetition (Frequency):
Electrophysiology
The DG2A is a compact, free-standing, battery powered instrument which can
be used to generate trigger pulses required for repetitive stimulation. Also
featuring DELAY controls, it is useful for determining nerve or axonal Effective
Refractory Period (ERP) through the production of a delayed second pulse.
stimulators
Various modes allow output pulses to be produced singularly (SINGLE),
continuously (FREE-RUN & GATED) or in a burst (TRAIN), with the
burst/train duration and pulse frequency determined by the front panel
controls. In each of the modes (except FREE-RUN), outputs can be
initiated either by the front panel push button, a TTL compatible
trigger/gating pulse or a suitable foot switch.
The unit has control of train duration over three full decades, pulse
repetition rate (or frequency) within that train over five decades and
control of the delayed pulse over three decades. It has two BNC output
sockets (i) the SYNC output produces a pulse to trigger recording devices
or synchronize other equipment and (ii) the OUT output produces either a
delayed version of the same or by toggle switch selection, pairs of
delayed and non-delayed pulses (as would be necessary for ERP studies).
Total Range
0.01 - 1200 Hz in five overlapping ranges
Control
Single turn control marked 1 – 12 Hz with intermediate
integer panel marks
Accuracy
±1% at ‘1’ and ‘12’ marks, ±5% at intermediate marks
Multiplier
x0.01 ; x0.1 ; x1 ; x10 ; x100
Delay:
Total Range
1 - 1200 msec in three overlapping ranges
Control
Single turn control marked 1 - 12 msec with intermediate
integer panel marks
Accuracy
±1% at ‘1’ and ‘12’ marks, ±5% at intermediate marks
Multiplier:
x1 ; x10 ; x100
Internal Jumper
Enable “x10” - giving a 10 msec - 12 s total range
Indicator
“TOO LONG” Red LED that flashes if DELAY longer than
can be produced for each pulse
Outputs – SYNC:
Connector
BNC socket
Signal
Positive going, 200µs pulse, TTL compatible pulse
(5 V amplitude)
Outputs – OUT:
Connector
BNC socket
The unit is especially suitable for use with our DS2A Isolated Constant
Voltage and DS3 Isolated Current Isolated Stimulators which have their
own Pulse Duration controls.
Signal
Positive going, 200µs pulse, TTL compatible pulse
(5 V amplitude)
Control
Selection of only the Delayed pulse (upwards) or both the
Sync and Delayed pulses
The instrument is powered by an internal 9V battery (PP3 - 6R61 style)
and replaces our DG2 Trigger Generator.
Indicator
Amber LED that flashes for each OUT output pulse
Internal Jumper
Enable “Active Low” - giving an Output that is Low during
its active phase
A mounting frame (part number W4 65-0337) is available so that two
units of either DG2A, DS2A or DS3 can be mounted in 19” rack.
Specifications
Power:
Control
ON/OFF toggle: OFF is down
Consumption
<2 mA
Internal
PP3 - (IEC-6LR61) style, alkaline preferred
Battery Life
250 Hours with EverReady 6LF22 or Duracell MN1604
The unit always produces a pulse to synchronize other equipment at SYNC and a
pulse delayed from SYNC by DELAY controls.
Dimensions, H x W x D
110 x 188 x 60 mm (4.3 x 7.4 x 2.4 in)
Modes:
Weight
490 g (17.3 oz) with battery installed
Control Functions Four position rotary switch
250
SINGLE
Input signal triggers a single Output pulse
FREE-RUN
Continuous Output pulses as set by REPETITION controls
GATED
Input signal enables unit to produce pulses as set by
REPETITION controls
TRAIN
Input signal Triggers unit to produce pulses as set by
REPETITION controls for the time as set by the
DURATION controls
Order #
Product
W4 65-0641 Train Delay Generator DG2A
W4 65-0337 19 in Rack Mounting Frame, Holds 2 DG2 generators
Note: No other accessories, other than a battery, are supplied.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL900D and NL905
Rack (Case) with Power Supply
The NeuroLog™ System
The NeuroLog™ System is now widely accepted throughout the world by scientists who demand high quality,
dependability and innovation in their research instrumentation.
Because the NeuroLog™ System is fully modular, it has the following well-recognized advantages over nonmodular “multi-purpose” instruments.
• It is more flexible. Complex systems can be quickly assembled or modified.
• It is more efficient. Modules can be shared among several set-ups, expanding capabilities without duplication. Only those modules required
for a particular task are tied up and occupy rack space.
• Fewer interface problems. Input and output levels, impedances, connectors, etc., of different modules in the system are compatible,
minimizing the problems encountered in interconnecting pieces of equipment of diverse origin.
• It is less costly. Only those modules actually required are purchased. You do not pay for all those functions added to an instrument to make it
“general purpose”.
• Individual modules can be added to the system at any time, as the scope and orientation of your application changes.
NL905
W4 65-0283S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Intracellular Recording
Extracellular Recording
Spike Detection
Electrical Stimulation
Pulse & Train Generation
Multi-channel EMG or EEG Recording
Pressure or other Transducer Recordings
High quality, dependable and efficient
Modular — easy to install modules as you need them
Fewer interface problems
Less costly than general purpose instruments
Built in logic circuit indicates excessive loading
The NeuroLog™ power supply produces three voltages (+15 V, +5 V, and -15
V), stabilized against line and load variations. The voltage outputs are
rated at 650 mA, 3.0A, and 650 mA, respectively. All three supplies have
internal ‘fold-over’ current limiting; the 15V supplies, in addition, are
protected with series fuses. Each supply has less than 15 mV line ripple at
maximum load. The power supply transformer employs a sectionalized
winding former for additional safety and complies with the requirements
of IEC601 part 1 and BS5724. The power supply provides sufficient power
for almost any mix of NeuroLog™ modules.
neuolog™ system
NL900D
W4 65-0283
The NeuroLog™ case has an integral module retention system, consisting
of a simple, slide action lever on the power supply panel. Therefore,
fittings such as retained screws, D-locks, etc., on individual module front
panels are unnecessary. This simple design enables easy, rapid, changes
in module arrangements, and ultimately reduces the cost of the modules.
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
The NeuroLog™ module frame and power supply are housed in a fully
finished, enclosed case. The case has handles and integral rack mounting
hardware so that it can be shifted directly between rack and bench top.
The case contains 13 module bays plus power supply panel.
A unique feature of the NeuroLog™ power supply is a built-in logic circuit
which indicates (by extinguishing the power supply indicator on the front
panel) excessive loading of one or more of the three supply outputs. While
it is expected that a power supply failure will never occur using
NeuroLog™ modules, the fault indication is invaluable when testing
custom circuits built in the NL50 Blank Module.
The NL905 Compact Case and Power unit is an enclosed case which will
accept up to 4 single width NeuroLog System modules. This case is
designed as a more compact counterpart to the full width NL900D.
Specifications
Model
NL900D
Dimensions, H x W x D
133 x 483 x 317 mm (5.25 x 19 x 12.5 in), without feet
Weight
5.5 kg (12.1 lb), without modules
Order #
Model
Product
W4 65-0283 NL900D
Rack (Case) with Power Supply
W4 65-0283S NL905
Small Rack (Case) with
Power Supply
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
251
neurolog system
™
NL50
Blank Module
Each module has a split ring handle attached to its
front panel. This handle serves as a cable run and as
a handle for withdrawing or inserting the module into
the case. All module outputs are short circuit proof.
The extensive use of standard transistor-transistor
logic (TTL, the standard logic in small computers) and
standard linear integrated circuits ensures the lowest
possible cost and highest possible compatibility with
other instruments. The output levels and impedances
of the linear inputs and outputs are appropriate for
general purpose oscilloscopes and low gain chart
recorders, etc. The NeuroLog™ System is also
compatible with the components most frequently
used in special circuitry built by individual
investigators to meet their own particular needs.
Module Interconnection
Electrophysiology
The general problem of module interconnection has been minimized in the
NeuroLog™ System by a unique method of automatic connection of outputs
and inputs of neighboring modules through the case edge connectors.
Thus, for many linear arrangements of modules, only the input and output
cables connecting the system to the preparation and to output devices
such as oscilloscopes, recorders, etc., are required. Front panel controls
are therefore not obscured by cables which merely connect each module
to the next. More complex module arrangements will, however, require
some front panel cable interconnection; between 5 and 10 cables of
various lengths will be required for a typical 13-module system. No cables
are supplied with the case, see NeuroLog™ accessories on page 206.
Cables
Only microminiature coaxial connectors with a ‘snap-on’ action are used in
the NeuroLog™ System, eliminating the nuisances caused by connectors
such as the BNC and UHF types which have a ‘twist-on’ or ‘screw-on’
action. All external connections between modules are made through
miniature, screened coaxial cable, which reduce cross-talk and transient
pick-up, as well as eliminating the tangling of fine, unscreened wires and
1 mm (or 2 mm or 4 mm) plugs frequently used for patching in other
modular systems.
A variety of assembled cables, plugs, sockets, BNC to NeuroLog™ adaptors
and ‘T’ connectors are available from Harvard Apparatus, see NeuroLog™
accessories list page 206.
NeuroLog™ Module Dimensions
Dimensions, H x W:
Front Panel (All modules)
122 x 30 mm (4.8 x 1.2 in)
Attached Printed Circuit Board
102 x 152 mm (4.0 x 6.0 in)
NL50 Blank Module
The NL50 Blank Module consists of an undrilled, finished front panel and
an unassembled printed circuit board. The printed circuit board has a 76
mm (3 inch) by 102 mm (4 inch) area of drilled soldering pads on 2.54 mm
(0.1 inch) centers, for mounting components and supporting solder
connections. The gold-plated edge connector has pads labeled for the
appropriate power supply voltages and back connections. Input and output
jumpers and pin sockets are supplied with the same configuration used in
factory constructed modules. The front panel can be labeled with white
letraset and lacquered, to give an appearance very similar to other
NeuroLog™ modules. The NL50 can be used to construct modules of your
own design, compatible with the NL900 Case and power supply.
Order #
neuolog™ system
252
Model
W4 65-0219 NL50
Product
Blank Module
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL102G
The NL102G is a direct-coupled preamplifier is designed specifically for
intracellular recording. With features such as capacity neutralization,
current injection, low leakage current and low DC drift, it is particularly
suitable for intracellular measurements through high impedance fluid-filled
electrodes. The input stage is conveniently located at the end of a 2 meter
cable for direct attachment to a micro electrode stepper.
The high impedance headstage of the NL102G is fitted in a metal tube at
the end of a 2 meter cable. The Headstage is matched with the main
amplifier module supplied with it. It is not interchangeable with other
NL102G DC Preamplifier modules without recalibration (the serial numbers
on the headstage and module match). The central 2 mm input socket (IN)
is the capacity-compensated signal input through which current can be
injected. The shield socket is the X1 output and may be used as a
capacitance ground or shield at the electrode and preparation. The third
socket is the system earth (ground) and connection should be made to the
indifferent electrode only.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neuolog™ system
• Electrode impedance check
• Calibrator
• Four current injection ranges (±100 nA, ±50 nA,
±20 nA, ±10 nA) with four corres-ponding bridge
balance ranges (100 MΩ, 200 MΩ, 500 MΩ, and
1000 MΩ)
• External gating of above facilities
• Bridge balance
• Back-off (DC Level) control
• Constant current capacitance compensation
(neg. cap.) which largely eliminates readjustment,
due to changes in input source resistance,
common with voltage feedback circuits.
The NL102G is now supplied with the hand held
NL412 Pulse Box providing remote, push button
overcompensation (ZAP!) control in order to
assist membrane penetration
• Dye/clean (+ OFF - ) toggle switch can be used
for clearing blocked microelec-trodes or
depositing dyes through extracellular pipettes
(max. current ±1.0 µA)
• x1 output amplifier has ±10 V dynamic input
signal range
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
DC Pre-Amplifier
253
neurolog system
™
NL102G
DC Pre-Amplifier (continued)
Specifications
Specifications (continued)
Input Resistance
1011Ω
Voltage Gains
x1, x10 fixed
Input Voltage Range
±10 V, absolute max. of ±14 V
Gate Leakage Current
Adjustable to zero
Risetime
Zero Source Resistance: 1 µsec (20 MΩ source
resistance): 15 µsec
Injection Current/
Bridge Balance
Selectable ranges: 100 nA/100 MΩ, 50 nA/200 MΩ, 20 nA/
500 MΩ, and 10 nA/1000 MΩ
Zero Stability
(Referred to Input)
±100 µV/day
Capacity Compensation
NL102G has front panel control to adjust amplifier section
to compensate for capacity to ground at electrode;
adjustment is easily made by switching on impedance
check signal and setting NEG CAP control for fast rise
time square wave without excessive overshoot at output;
range is sufficient to compensate for capacities up to
30pF; amplifier can be deliberately put into oscillatory
mode by push button adjacent to NEG CAP control and is
of use when penetrating cell membrane during electrode
manipulation
Calibration
Square wave calibration signal built into NL102G for
calibration through complete system; select it through
front panel switch as one of two magnitudes: 10 mV or
100 µV. Can be gate controlled by TTL signal applied to
front panel sockets; signal (approx. 150 Hz) is summed
with bridge balance signal at input of x10 amplifier section
Output Impedance
600 Ω
Capacity Neutralization
0 to 30 pF
Max. Noise Level
At 10 kHz bandwidth, referred to input (zero source
resistance): 20 µV peak-to-peak (4 µV RMS): (10 MΩ
source resistance): 180 µV peak-to-peak (36 µV RMS)
Order #
DC Level Range
±2 V (referred to input)
W4 65-0222 NL102G
Output Voltage Range
±11 V
DC Pre-Amplifier includes
Headstage and NL412 Pulse Generator
W4 65-0223 NL102GH
Replacement Headset
(Including Fitting)
Electrode Impedance Check x1 out
x10 out
Calibrator
1 mV/MΩ
10 mV/MΩ
Model
Product
10 mV or 100 µV 150 Hz square wave
External Stimulus Input Range ±10 V corresponds to ±full scale current, depends
on range selected
Electrophysiology
Amplification:
2 outputs available:
x1 Out
Voltage present at ‘+’ input referred to GND including any
potential dropped across electrode resistance by injection
stimulus current applied. Max. voltage range of amplifier ±10 V
x10 Out
x10 signal present at ‘+’ input referred to GND less voltage
generated across electrode resistance Re when bridge
balance control is correctly set for value of Re
neurolog™ system
Bridge Balance
Range ±10 V corresponds to 100 MΩ at 100 nA, 200 MΩ at
50 nA, 500 MΩ at 20 nA, and 1000 MΩ at 10 nA depending on
setting of inject current selector (printed circuit board mounted)
DC Level Control
Enables x10 amplifier to back off up to ±2 V at input
Current Injection:
Stimulus currents can be injected into electrode system
in either direction under following conditions:
1
Set by current inject control in magnitude, direction by
front panel HYPER/DEP switch and gated ON or OFF by
TTL gate pulses at front panel socket
2
Set in magnitude and direction by analog voltage applied
at front panel socket signal range ±10 V; current injection
can be combination of both control systems; full scale
current injection conditions are printed circuit board
selector at 100 nA, 50 nA, 20 nA or 10 nA
Monitor Out Socket
Allows connection of oscilloscope to monitor injection
current (±10 V full scale injection current)
Other Injection Current Possibilities:
254
1
Max. non-controlled current for dye injection to
preparations or clearing of blocked electrodes; current is
dependent on electrode resistance and can be up to ±1
µA max.; repeated reversal of selector switch usually
cleans blocked electrodes
2
Impedance check measurement selected by front panel\
switch injects current (1 nA) through electrode giving
signal at x1 output which is pulse wave of amplitude
1mV/MΩ or 10 mV/MΩ at x10 output
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL104A AC Preamplifier
The NL100AK Headstage is a differential input, low noise, high impedance
buffer amplifier contained in a metal tube and supplied with a 2 meter
long flexible cable. The NL100AK is supplied as standard with a
removable 6.4 mm (0.25 inch) diameter stainless steel mounting rod.
Power is supplied by the NL104A AC preamplifier via a 4 way lemo plug
and socket. This headstage can also be used in conjunction with other
NeuroLog™ amplifiers (NL103, NL104, NL107), please specify with order.
The NL104A AC Preamplifier is a low noise, high input impedance,
differential, preamplifier. It can be used alone for making recordings from
low resistance (gross) electrodes, or with the NL100AK Headstage for
microelectrode recordings. The NL104A features a wide dynamic balance
adjustment for asymmetrical inputs (useful for balancing out interference
and shock artifacts), a choice of two input time constants, 8 gain ranges
and 3 high frequency filter settings. An internal 50Hz oscillator is provided
for precisely balancing the input (input switch in the CM position).
Specifications
Input Resistance
100 MΩ
Specifications
Gain
±1.0
Gain
100, 200, 500, 1 k, 2 k, 5 k, 10 k or 20 k
Input Noise
< 2 µV (peak to peak) with inputs shorted; < 25 µV for a
typical tungsten microelectrode in saline; < 30 µV with a
MΩ resistor between inputs (bandwidth in all three cases,
10 Hz to 10 kHz)
Input Resistance
10 MΩ
High Frequency Cutoff
Selectable for 100 Hz, 700 Hz, 6 kHz or W.B. (> 40 kHz)
Low Frequency Cutoff
0.1 Hz or 10 Hz
35.6 x 9.5 mm (1.4 x 0.375 in) diameter
Common Mode
Rejection Ratio
10,000:1 at 50 Hz
Dimensions, L x OD
Connections:
+ IN
2 mm socket for non-inverting input accepts plugs
supplied, as well as (optional) NL101 electrode chambers
or NL08 micro-electrode adapters
- IN
1 mm socket for inverting input connection to reference
electrode or via U connector (supplied) to ground socket
(GND)
GND
Input Noise
< 10 µV (peak to peak) with inputs shorted to ground and
bandwidth of 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz
Dynamic Balance
Adjustment
Gain for one input can be varied ±50% with respect to other
Output Voltage Range
±12 V max.
Screen connected to mains earth
Order #
Order #
neuolog™ system
NL100AK Headstage
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
NL100AK and NL104A
Model
Product
W4 65-0220 NL100AK
Headstage
W4 65-0396 NL08
Metal Microelectrode Adapter pin,
2 mm to 0.8 mm
Model
W4 65-0224 NL104A
Product
AC Pre-Amplifier
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
255
neurolog system
™
NL100RK, NL101 and NL04
• Allows stimulation and recording through the
same electrode
• Stimulus can be controlled manually or from
external device
NL100RK Pre-Amplifier and Stimulus Relay
The NL100RK consists of an NL100AKS head-stage and the NL100C
Stimulus Control module designed for use with the NL104A AC
Preamplifier and allowing stimulation and recording through the same
electrode. The NL100C allows a voltage of up to 100V to pass through the
NL100AKS head-stage and recording electrode under the control of a
three position switch on the NL100C front panel. The switch has “On”,
“Off” and “Ext” positions, allowing presentation of the stimulus to be
controlled manually or via a gating pulse from an external device.
Order #
Model
W4 65-0642 NL100RK
Product
Pre-Amplifier and Stimulus Relay
NL101 Electrode Chambers
Electrophysiology
NL101 Electrode Chambers are compatible with all NeuroLog™ system
headstages. They are available with two different plug sizes; Both of
these are available in four sizes to fit glass capillaries. For example,
NL101B3 will plug into a NL100AK or NL102G and hold a glass capillary
with an outside diameter of 1.5 mm.
neurolog™ system
Order #
Model
Electrode Chamber OD
Plug Size
Color
W4 65-0221
NL101A
1 mm
1 mm
Yellow
W4 65-0389
NL101A
1.2 mm
1 mm
Green
W4 65-0390
NL101A
1.5 mm
1 mm
Blue
W4 65-0391
NL101A
2 mm
1 mm
Red
W4 65-0392
NL101B*
1 mm
2 mm
Yellow
W4 65-0393
NL101B*
1.2 mm
2 mm
Green
W4 65-0394
NL101B*
1.5 mm
2 mm
Blue
W4 65-0395
NL101B*
2 mm
2 mm
Red
*Fits NL100AK and NL102G headstages.
Tungsten Micro-Electrode Holder
The NL04 Micro-Electrode Holder is a 26 gauge hypodermic needle tube
soldered into a drilled out 2 mm pin. This holder is for use with NL100AK
and NL100AKS headstages.
Order #
Model
W4 65-0638 NL04
256
Product
Tungsten Micro-Electrode Holder
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL108A Pressure Amplifier
The NL106 AC-DC Amplifier features attenuation or amplification which is
continuously adjustable, using a locking ten-turn potentiometer, from 0 to
x10, or 0 to x100. Its input controls are similar to those of conventional
oscilloscope vertical amplifiers, allowing operation in AC or DC coupled,
single-ended (inverting or non inverting) or differential modes. Up to ±2
VDC at either input can be zeroed using the ten-turn DC OFFSET
adjustment. The output voltage is shown by 4 light-emitting diodes: two
red LED’s show outputs in excess of 50 mV and 1.0 V; two green LED’s
show corresponding negative outputs. Thus, adjustment of gain and DC
offset can be accomplished without an oscilloscope monitor. Low drift, low
noise, and moderate input impedance make the NL106 suitable either as
an amplifier for low impedance sources, or as variable gain stage
following a preamplifier.
The NL108A Pressure Amplifier module provides two gain settings, one
appropriate for blood pressure measurement (1.0 V at the output
corresponds to 100 mmHg pressure at the transducer) and the other for
low pressure measurement such as intratracheal pressure (100 mV at the
output equals 1 cm H2O at the transducer port). An internal voltage
calibrate signal provides the appropriate deflection (1.0 V or 100 mV) for
these two ranges. Other features include excellent DC stability, a push
button switch for setting the zero pressure baseline on the recording
instrument, and a sensitive zero offset control. Although the NL108A is
designed to mate perfectly with our own pressure transducer, due to its
internally adjustable gain and bridge excitation voltage, it can be used
with a variety of other standard pressure transducers. Call Harvard
Apparatus for additional information.
Specifications
Specifications
Input Voltage Range
±15 V
Input Voltage Range
Input Impedance
1 MΩ
Input Impedance
109, typical
Gain
0 to X10 or 0 to X100 continuously variable by
10-turn potentiometer
Gain
1 V/100 mmHg or 100 mV/cmH2O, for pressure transducer
having out put of 50 µV/mmHg
Small Signal
±1 V out >30 kHz Frequency Response
DC Offset
±80 cmH2O, ±60 mmHg, when switched to appropriate range
Low Frequency Cutoff
In AC Mode 2 Hz
Bandwidth
DC to 150 Hz
Output Voltage Range
±12 V
O/P Voltage Range
±12 V
Output Impedance
600 Ω
DC Offset Range
±2 V at either input, 10-turn potentiometer adjustment
CMRR
> 2500; 1 at 50 Hz
Order #
Model
W4 65-0225 NL106
±10 V
O/P Impedance
600 Ω (nom) except ‘zero out’, where O/P is S/C direct to ground
Bridge Supply
0 to 24 V DC (25 mA)
Product
Order #
Model
AC-DC Amplifier
W4 65-0227 NL108A
neurolog™ system
NL106 AC-DC Amplifier
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
NL106 and NL108A
Product
Pressure Amplifier
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
257
neurolog system
™
NL108T4
Pressure Transducer
Order #
Model
Product
W4 72-4222 NL108T4
Pressure Transducer, pkg. of 1
W4 72-4223 –
Replacement Dome for
W4 72-4222, pkg. of 1
W4 72-4224 –
Replacement Dome for
W4 72-4222, pkg. of 10
W4 65-0631 NL108L4
Lead for NL108T4 to NL108A
Electrophysiology
neurolog™ system
Suitable for both arterial and venous blood pressure monitoring, the
NL108T4 can be attached via a lead (NL108L4) to the NL108A pressure
amplifier, allowing continuous pressure monitoring. The NL108T4 is a
highly accurate and rugged re-useable transducer, which is used in
conjunction with disposable domes (NL108D4). These disposable domes
are easy to fill and attach to the transducer body and are available in
packs of 10 or individually (one dome is included with each transducer).
The components of the transducer are electrically isolated from the
transducer housing, which is in turn isolated from the saline solution by
the silicone membrane of the dome. The transducer is gold plated, making
it easier to clean.
The transducer is designed primarily for use during blood pressure
monitoring, but equally well operates as a monitor for intracranial,
gastrologic or intrauterine pressures, as well as urodynamic
measurements.
Specifications
Pressure range
20 to 300 mmHg
Max. Overpressure
10000 mmHg
Sensitivity
50 µV/V/cmHg
Resonance Frequency
300 Hz typical (transducer and dome)
Max Electrical Excitation
15 V DC or AC
Input Resistance
1000 Ω (or equipment specified)
Output Resistance
700 Ω (or equipment specified)
Non-Linearity and Hysteresis max. 0.5% of full scale
Zero Balance
Thermal Sensitivity
0.15%/ºC
Thermal Zero Shift
max. 0.25 mmHg/ºC
Operating/Storage
Temperature Range
258
max. ±30 mmHg
+10 to +50ºC/-20 to +70ºC
Insulation Resistance
min. 10 Ω
Leakage Current
max. 1.5 µA at 250 V, 50 Hz
High Voltage Resistance
10000 V between saline in dome and transducer leads
Weight
26 g (without cable)
Length of Cable
0.3 m
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL108T2 and NL120S
(NL120 pictured)
The NL108T2 Pressure Transducer is a low cost alternative to the isolated
unit NL108T1 which can be used with the NL108A Pressure Amplifier.
Although the transducers are classed as ‘disposable’, it has been found
that they can be used several times. The NL108T2 is connected by the
NL108L2 lead, which is reusable. These transducers are for animal use
only. Supplied individually or in a package of ten.
The NL120S Audio Amplifier is a power amplifier for driving a 4 or 8 ohm
loudspeaker. It has sufficient power amplification to raise a ±20 mV signal
to moderate sound level. The module features an input selector for
switching between two input signals, and the options of amplifying only
positive or negative peaks, useful when baseline noise masks the sounds
of nerve spikes of interest. The output is shaped to improve the low
frequency response of small loudspeakers, and is power limited to
minimize the nuisance caused by large transients such as shock artifacts.
Specifications
Specifications
NL108T2 Disposable Pressure Transducer
Pressure Range
-50 mmHg to +300 mmHg
Input Impedance
Over-Pressure Tolerance
10000 mmHg
10 kΩ
Bandwidth
20 Hz to >15 kHz
Bridge Resistance
Input Resistance
1000 W nominal
Output Voltage Range
±1.5 V
3Ω
Output Resistance
350 W nominal
Min. Load Resistance
Across Output
Excitation Voltage
Up to 10 V DC or AC max. up to 5kHz
Recommended Loud Speaker W4 65-0323 (NL985)
Zero Offset
±40 mmHg, max.
Maximum Inaccuracy
±2% of reading or 1 mmHg, whichever is greater
Thermal Coefficient
of Sensitivity
±0.3 mmHg/ºC
Order #
Model
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
NL120S Audio Amplifier
neurolog™ system
• Low cost alternative to isolated NL108TA
• Can be reused several times
• Available individually or in a package of 10
Product
W4 65-0236 NL120S
Audio Amplifier
W4 65-0323 NL985
Loudspeaker
Thermal Coefficient of Zero 2 µA at 120 VAC, 60 Hz
Electrical Leakage
400 Ws, maximum across 50 W lead
Resonant Frequency
145 Hz with 30 cm pressure tubing, 43 Hz with 150 cm
pressure tubing
Order #
Model
Product
W4 65-0229 NL108T2
Disposable Pressure Transducer,
pkg. of 1
W4 65-0230 NL108T2/10
Disposable Pressure Transducer,
pkg. of 10
W4 65-0231 NL108L2
Lead for NL108T2 to NL108A
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
259
neurolog system
™
NL125/6, NL134, NL135, NL136 and NL 144
NL125/6 Filter (High & Low Pass,
50/60Hz Notch)
Electrophysiology
neurolog™ system
The NL125/6 filter module employs two active sections to control the high
and low pass characteristics. The low frequency cutoff point can be set
continuously from 0.5Hz to 5kHz with a single turn potentiometer, in four
switched ranges. Similarly the high frequency cutoff can be set
continuously from 5Hz to 50kHz in four switched ranges. DC and WB (wide
band) switch positions bypass the lower and upper filter sections,
respectively. An active notch filter is provided for the rejection of line
frequency interference; this can be operator set at 50Hz or 60Hz, with a
20Hz notch width (-3dB points).
Specifications
Input Voltage Range
Input Impedance
4-Channel Filters
The NL134, NL135 and NL136 are 4-channel, 2-pole (second order) low pass
filters. Both the NL135 and NL136 have an AC power rejection notch filter
module that is an ideal partner for the NL820A Isolated Amplifier System
with its 2/4 channel AC or DC pre-amplifiers. The filter settings have been
selected for most electrophysiological and clinical protocols but special
frequencies can be factory set. Call Harvard Apparatus for details. The
NL144* is a high-pass version of this filter and does not have a notch filter.
*Note: Has frequency settings of 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30,
50, 100, 200 Hz and DC.
±10 V
56 kΩ
Specifications
Low Frequency
Cutoff Range
DC, 0.5 Hz to 5 kHz continuously adjustable
Input Volta Fge Range
High Frequency
Cutoff Range
Wide band (> 50 kHz) and 5 Hz to 50 kHz,
continuously adjustable
Input Impedance
120 kΩ
Gain Within Passband
x1
Filter Settings (-6 dB)
10, 20, 30, 50, 100, 200, 300, 500, 1k, 2k, 3k, 5k, 10k, 20k and WB
Cut-Off Accuracy
(±2% ±1.25 Hz < 630 Hz) or (±2% ±62.5 Hz > 630 Hz)
Gain Before Cut-Off
+1.0
Attn. Beyond Cut-Off
40 dB/decade, 12 dB/octave
Attenuation Beyond Cutoff 40 dB/decade
Notch Attenuation
Notch Width
Output Impedance
Order #
> 50 dB
20 Hz
Output Voltage Range
Model
W4 65-0237 NL125/6
260
• NL134, NL135 and NL135 – Low Pass
• NL144 – High Pass
±10 V
600 Ω
Product
Filter (Low Cut, High Cut
and 50 Hz Notch)
±15 V max, ±10 V operating
Notch Attn/Width (-3 dB)
> 50 dB/20 Hz
Crosstalk // Noise
Better than -60 dB // < 100 µVrms
Order #
Model
Product
W4 65-0239 NL134
4-Channel Low-Pass Filter
without Notch Filter
W4 65-0240 NL135
4-Channel Low-Pass Filter
with 50 Hz Notch Filter
W4 65-0241 NL136
4-Channel Low-Pass Filter
with 60 Hz Notch Filter
W4 65-0242 NL144
4-Channel High-Pass Filter*
without Notch Filter
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL201 Spike Trigger
The NL143 Difference Amplifier allows the difference between two
signals to be continuously monitored during the course of an experiment.
The module has four inputs and three outputs, allowing three alternative
“differences” to be recorded simultaneously from each module. Internal
settings define the channels to be subtracted. The module also features a
post-subtraction offset control which allows the output to be offset to a
desired level e.g. for zeroing at the start of an experiment. While this
module was originally designed to allow the differences between two
biological parameters to be continuously monitored, it could also be used
to remove unwanted offsets introduced into analogue signals originating
from computer DAC interface cards.
The NL201 Spike Trigger is an amplitude discriminator for nerve spikes and
other events, with an output that shows the levels superimposed on the signal.
It produces separate output pulse trains for spikes which: (a) cross the Upper
voltage threshold; (b) cross the Lower voltage threshold; (c) cross the Lower but
not the Upper threshold. The window height potentiometer sets the DC level of
the ‘window’ and the aperture potentiometer sets the separation between the
two voltage thresholds of this window. Thus, slight changes in signal
amplitude require adjustments of only one setting, and it is impossible to set
the upper voltage threshold lower than the lower voltage threshold. The
monitor output socket provides a display of the input signal with the lower and
upper levels superimposed on it to enable easy setting of the discrimination
levels. There is a choice of two internally selected input voltage ranges and a
front panel switch selects either positive or negative slope and level triggering.
This module is essential for converting spike trains (which are analogue
signals) into trains of digital pulses; these can be analyzed using other modules
(such as the NL700 Log Display) or used to synchronize displays, trigger
averaging, etc. An internal jumper allows the input to be AC or DC coupled.
Order #
Model
W4 65-0643 NL143
Product
Three Channel Difference Amplifier
neurolog™ system
NL143 Three Channel Difference Amplifier
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
NL143 and NL201
Specifications
Input Voltage
±10 V max.
Input Impedance
1 MΩ
Input Time Constant
0.2 sec or DC
Lower Range (Height)
0 to 5 V
Aperture Range
0.2 to 5 V
Gain
x1 or x10 (internally)
Triggering
+ve or -ve slope
Threshold Calibration
±10%
Output - Upper
TTL, 230 µsec (±10%) pulse
Output - Lower
TTL, 200 µsec (±10%) pulse
Gate
TTL, 15 µsec (±10%) pulse
Monitor
Input plus upper and lower levels
Order #
Model
W4 65-0243 NL201
Product
Spike Trigger
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
261
neurolog system
™
NL301 and NL304
Electrophysiology
• Monitors the difference between two signals
continuously
• Monitor up to three pairs of signals
NL301 Pulse Generator
neurolog™ system
The NL301 Pulse Generator, replaces the NL300, is a low cost module for
producing trains of uniform TTL pulses. It can be operated continuously,
switched off, or a single pulse can be triggered manually. A Gate input socket
allows synchronous trains of pulses to be gated-on by an externally applied
TTL high logic level. An internal jumper either excludes (as with the NL300)
or produces an output pulse coincident with the start of the Gate signal.
Pulse frequency is continuously variable over more than three decades
using a single 12:1 control and a three-position decade switch. Three fixed
output pulse widths are available. The frequency range and pulse widths
were chosen to make this module suitable as a timing source for electrical
stimulation of the nervous system, without the necessity of additional
modules for determining pulse widths.
The NL301 is also useful for a variety of other timing purposes where a widely
variable rate is desirable, and precision is important but not critical. It has an
on-board jumper that allows the user to select a frequency range 1⁄10 of that
shown on the front panel. This allows a frequency range of < 0.1 to > 120 Hz.
NL304 Period Generator
The NL304 Period Generator (replaces the NL303) contains a crystal
oscillator and frequency dividers for producing a precise, stable frequency
standard. It can be externally gated (Gate In) and synchronized with an
external source (Reset input). The pulse train can be switched off and a
single output pulse can be triggered manually. Eight decades of pulse rate
are available. The NL304 is the basic ‘clock’ of the NeuroLog™ System: it
provides the ‘fine grain’ (1 µsec increments) necessary for digital control of
pulse width, cycle duration, delay, etc., using the NL603 Counters.
Specifications
Output
TTL pulses
Period Accuracy
0.01%
Period Range
1 µsec to 10 min by 1 µsec, 10 µsec, 100 µsec, 1 msec,
10 msec, 100 msec, 1 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec and 60 sec
Period switch and x1, x2, x5, and x10 MULT switch
Output Pulse Width
0.5 µsec
Order #
Model
W4 65-0248 NL304
Product
Period Generator
Specifications
Frequency
< 1 to > 1200 Hz
Control Marked
1 to 12 (0.5 to 12 possible)
Accuracy
±1% at ‘1’ and ‘12’ marks, ±5% at other scale marks
Multiplier
x1, x10, x100
Output Pulse Widths
50, 150 or 500 µsec (±10%)
Output Fan-Out
10 TTL inputs
Order #
Model
W4 65-0247 NL301
262
Product
Pulse Generator
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL510 Logic Gate
The NL410 Calibration Module can be used for the precise calibration of
the gain of an amplifier system or for adding a pulse of accurate
amplitude and duration to a recording trace. The output of the Calibrator is
isolated allowing for the user to choose the best method of preparation
grounding to optimize recordings. Switches allow selection of 1 of 3
calibrated output levels with 1 of 2 calibrated triggered pulse widths of
either polarity. The calibration level at the preset amplitude and polarity
may also be enabled or pulsed manually from a front panel switch.
The NL501 Logic Gate module contains two logic gates each with two
inputs and complementary outputs. Both of these gates can be
independently configured by PCB mounted switches as either 2-input AND
gates or 2-input OR gates. The open circuited inputs are automatically
held low for the OR function or high for the AND function and a further
switch allows expansion of the second gate to take the output of the first
as a third input. This enables a 4-input AND gate or a 4-input OR gate to
be realized. A further possibility is a 3-input AND or OR gate where one of
those inputs is a 2-input OR or AND function from the other gate.
Provision is made for input 1 of gate 1 to be connected to the output of
the module to the left and all 4 outputs are available for selection as the
output to the module to the right. This is done by jumper plugs at the rear
of the PCB.
Specifications
Trigger Level
+2 V on positive edge with 200 mV hysteresis
Trigger Input Limit
Trigger Input Impedance
> 1 MΩ
Output Level
0.1 mV, 1 mV, 10 mV switch selectable
Output Level Accur.
±2%
Output Pulse Duration
1 or 10 msec (triggered) or under manual control
Pulse Duration Accur.
Polarity
±15 V max.
±2% (triggered)
Positive or negative switch selectable
Output Impedance
2 Ω, 20 Ω, 200 Ω for output levels of 0.1 V, 1 V, 10 mV
respectively
Output Isolation
> 50 V
Specifications
Input
TTL
Outputs
TTL
Output Fan-Out
10 TTL inputs
Order #
Model
W4 65-0253 NL501
Order #
Model
W4 65-0252 NL410
neurolog™ system
NL410 Calibration Module
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
NL410 and NL510
Product
Logic Gate
Product
Calibration Module
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
263
neurolog system
™
NL405
Width Delay
Specifications
Input:
TTL pulse, 1 TTL load
Trigger Edge
Positive or Negative, selected from front panel
Manual
Push-button, operation on push
Output (Width):
TTL, Output will drive 10 loads
Polarity
Both active-high and active-low sockets
Range
1 µs - 999 s
Control
001 - 999
Multiplier
1 µs, 10 µs, 100 µs, 1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1 s
Accuracy
±0.5%
Delay from
Trigger In
<200 ns
Indicator
Amber LED on for approximately 100 ms for each pulse
Output (Delay):
TTL, Output will drive 10 loads
Polarity
Active-high
Duration
0.5 µs, 1.5 µs, 5 µs ±20%
50 µs, 150 µs, 500 µs ±10%, by on-board jumpers
Output:
Electrophysiology
neurolog™ system
The NL405 Width Delay is a digitally controlled pulse duration generator
and is used to produce precise pulses of adjustable duration with high
accuracy and repeatability. The NL405 produces TTL logic output pulses
(of both polarities) that have a duration set using three decades of
thumbwheels and a seven (7) position range switch. It also features a
press to start button, LED indication of an output and a separate logic
output signal at the end of the defined WIDTH time. It was designed as a
replacement for the NL401 and in most places where the NL403 would
have been used.
Mode
Fixed Width or Re-Triggered, selected from
front panel
Reset/Inhibit
450 ms ±20%, after change of rotary range control
Order #
Model
W4 65-0630 NL405
Product
Width Delay
The NL405 can be triggered off either positive or negative-going edges of
the input pulses and the NL405 is capable of 100% duty cycles. An
external push to make switch can be used when -ve edge triggering is
selected. In the “FIXED WIDTH” mode, the NL405 produces an Output
pulse as specified by the front panel controls; In the “RE-TRIGGER” mode,
any valid Input trigger arriving whilst the Output is active will restart the
timing and therefore extending the Output pulse duration. As long time
periods can be generated (999 seconds is over 16 minutes) any change in
position of the rotary range switch will stop the current Output and inhibit
further input triggers for 450 ms.
The “DELAYED” Output socket provides a short duration pulse (set
internally) that is produced at the end of the timed WIDTH pulse. This
provides a trigger-out after the set Delay time.
The NL405 can be used for digital control of pulse duration or for
introduction of a delay to a trigger pulse. The logarithmic or exponential
nature of the many biological responses make the very wide continuous
adjustment (from µs to minutes) particularly beneficial.
Rear connections to the motherboard allow Input and Output
interconnections between this and other logic modules without the need
of front panel cables.
264
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL412
Pulse Generator
Specifications
Button LED
release)
Only produces an output pulse on “Press” (not
Amber - illuminates for approximately 250 ms after
each press
Pulse Duration:
Range
1 to 10 ms
Accuracy
Better than 20% at all scale markings
Output:
< 100 µs
Battery
Standard 9 V, 6LR61 style. (Non-alkaline supplied) we recommend the Duracell Ultra MN1604
alkaline battery
Power Consumption
< 5 µA (static)
Cable
2 m (nom) with standard Lemo connector fitted
Dimensions, H x W x D
105 x 61 x x 28 mm plus 15 mm on “d” for knob
Weight
< 170 g including battery
Order #
Model
W4 72-4220 NL412
Product
Pulse Generator
Start
On pressing the button the NL412 generates an active high pulse which
will trigger remote modules.
Gating
The front panel control on the NL412 provides control for output pulse
durations over the range of 1 to 10 ms. Setting this control allows
different durations of trains of pulses when the NL412 is combined with a
Pulse Generator such as the NL301.
Use with NL102G
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
The NL412 PULSE is a small, handheld, general purpose pulse generator
which can be used to “start” experiments, command the “gate” of a train
of pulses or be used with an NL102G to “Buzz” electrodes. The NL412 is
self-powered by a standard internal 9 V battery and is fitted with a 2 m
lead terminating in the standard Lemo connector.
9 V, with new battery.
Rise and Fall Times
neurolog™ system
Level
When used with a NL102G (that incorporates external “Buzz” control
circuitry) the duration of the “Buzz” is set by the front panel control.
Technical Note - NL102G use
During intracellular micro-electrode recording, cell penetration is often
facilitated by use of a Buzz button, a feature included on the front panel
of the NL102G DC pre-amplifier. Pressing the Buzz button fully activates
the capacitance compensation circuitry, causing the amplifier voltage to
oscillate. This oscillation often aids passage of the electrode into the
intracellular millieu. In certain situations, it may be necessary to operate
the Buzz button in combination with microelectrode manipulation, making
the front panel location of the Buzz button less convenient for the user. To
make the Buzz feature more accessible, a remote NL412 Pulse box has
been developed by Digitimer Ltd. This small handheld unit provides
control over Buzz duration (1-10ms) and has a single push button for Buzz
pulse delivery.
The NL412 is connected via its own 2m long Lemo cable to a modified
version of the NL102G, incorporating an external Buzz control input
socket. Existing users of NL102G modules can have the modification
made at Digitimer Ltd.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
265
neurolog system
™
NL505 and NL506
Electrophysiology
neurolog™ system
NL505 Flip-Flop
NL506 Analog Switch
The NL505 Flip-Flop can be operated either as a “set-reset” flip-flop or as
a “toggled” complementing flip-flop. This makes it useful in setting up
conditional and “single-shot” stimuli, and testing logic outputs for the
presence of pulses, logic levels etc.
The NL506 Analog Switch contains a single pole change-over switch, the
state of which is controlled by a logic signal. This signal can be generated
externally or by the internal Flip-Flop that can be toggled by a logic input.
A front panel switch allows direct selection of the switch state which is
indicated by an LED. The switch is bi-directional allowing it to be used as
a 1-input 2-output or a 2-input 1-output device. Also, as the switch is
analog; it can handle signals up to ±15 volts as well as being of low
enough impedance to handle TTL signals.
It has three inputs, Set, Complement and Clear, and two outputs (Q and
Q’) all of which drive or are driven from TTL logic (ie +5V and 0V).
A LED indicator is illuminated when the Q output is at a high level.
The table below shows the relationship between inputs and outputs.
Complement
Set
Clear
0
0
0
Q0
Q’0
Static Condition
X
0
1
0
1
Clear Ouput
X
1
0
1
0
Set Output
X
1
1
1
1
*see below
^
0
0
Q
Q0
Q’
Q’0
Function
Complement
Where a 1 is a logic high (+5V)
0 is a logic low (0V) or unconnected inputs
X is irrelevant
Qo is the previous output
^ is a positive going pulse
* This is a non-stable situation, it will only remain whilst Set and Clear are both held high.
N.B. The Set and Clear inputs overide the Complement input, that is why the output is
only affected by the complement input when both of these are low.
Order #
Model
W4 65-0254 NL505
Product
Note: The analog switch is robust but has a current limit, especially when
the NeuroLog™ power supply is off. Only signals originating from within
the same NL900 should be coupled to the NL506.
Specifications
Analog Switch:
Range
±15 V
Impedance Per Socket
ON Resistance
< 35 Ω
OFF Leakage
< 50 nA
Switching Time
< 200 nsec
Break-Before-Make Delay
< 10 nsec
Indicator
Amber LED indicates switch position
Switches
SET/-/RESET toggle forces selection of analog
switch; also presets internal Flip-Flop; in mid
position, IN/FF switch selects control signal for
analog switch
Flip-Flop
Is preset by SET/-/RESET toggle switch and
toggled by negative (-ve) going edge of logic
input signal
Flip Flop
Input Allowed Signal
±15 V max.
Input Logic Threshold
+1.4 V approx. (suits TTL)
Input Impedance
Order #
Model
W4 65-0255 NL506
266
1 MΩ
10 kΩ approx.
Product
Analog Switch
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL530 4-Channel Conditioner
The NL510A Pulse Buffer converts TTL logic pulses into 0 to 10V pulses,
which can be used to drive the NL800A STIMULUS ISOLATOR. The output
pulses in the ISOLATOR DRIVE mode are offset to match the input
characteristics of the NL800A. Output amplitude is adjusted with a
precision 10-turn potentiometer and turns counting dial. The mode switch
has an OFF position, a useful feature when more than one stimulator is
used. The NL510A can be used as a voltage stimulator, relay driver,
solenoid drive, oscilloscope beam brightener, etc.
The NL530 Conditioner module is designed to give Gain and Offset setup
controls when interfacing signals to the Analog-to-Digital Converters
(ADCs) of PCs.
Specifications
Output Voltage Range
The module contains four channels. Each has independently adjustable
filter settings and front panel Gain and Offset presets. There is also a
master ADC offset control to allow unipolar ADCs to be used with bipolar
signals. ADC boards have precise input ranges (outside of which damage
may occur) and this module features on-board preset controls to set all
channels to ‘CLIP’ or limit at independently set positive and negative (or
zero) levels.
0 to 10.0 V
Output Resistance
< 10 Ω
Specifications
Output Current
50 mA
Each Independent Channel
Output Rise & Fall Times
< 1 µsec
Input:
Absolute Max.
Order #
Model
W4 65-0256 NL510A
Product
Pulse Buffer
Impedance
neurolog™ system
NL510A Pulse Buffer
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
NL510A and NL530
±100 V
20 kΩ
Gain
x0.1, x0.2, x0.5, x1, x2, x5, x10
Variable Gain
x1 (CAL) to x2.5 (nominal)
Offset Control
±1 V or ±5 V
Filters
100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, none
Bandwidth
DC to 100 kHz
Crosstalk
< -56 dB between channels
Output:
Range
±11 V min.
Impedance
< 5 Ω (for up to 10 mA load)
Common To All Channels
Clip Limits:
Positive
+4 V to +11 V min
Negative
-11 V to 0 V
ADC Offset
Output
Order #
Zero (0 volts) or +2.5 V
[Input x Gain] + [(ADC + variable) offsets]
Model
W4 65-0259 NL530
Product
4-Channel Conditioner
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
267
neurolog system
™
NL512
Biphasic Pulse Buffer
Specifications
IN
Input Voltage Range:
±15 V max
For Full Scale Output ±10 V; ±5 V; ±2.5 V or ±1 V by on-board jumper selection
Input Impedance
Frequency Response
1 MW
> 1 MHz; this will usually be limited to less than this
by the NL800
Gate:
Logic Levels
TTL compatible
Function
ON (unit working) - TTL high (> 2.8 V or no connection)
OFF (unit disabled) - TTL low (< 0.8 V)
Input Voltage Range:
Input Impedance
Response Time
ON/OFF Switch
±15 V max
~85 kW
< 5 µs
This overrides the GATE input to disable the module when
set to OFF
OUT
Output DC Offset for NL800 < 0.7 to > 2.3 V - Separately set for each phase
Output Voltage Range
Electrophysiology
The NL512 Biphasic-Pulse Buffer is the interface between any bipolar
signal and two of the NeuroLog™ NL800A ISOLATORS so that bipolar,
isolated, constant current signals can be used for stimulation. This is
“current out for voltage in”.
neurolog™ system
The NL512 features a high input impedance and four input ranges to
allow a number of different modules, or an external signal (such as from
the ADC in a PC), to be used for the input signal. A GATE input allows
multiple units to be connected to a single analogue source with each
channel being digitally enabled separately. The switch, in the OFF
position, disables the module.
0 to +10 V
Output Current for NL800
Up to 20 mA
Output Impedance
< 10 W
Rear connections
To the NL900 motherboard allow an input interconnection
for IN or GATE and the module to the immediate left
without the need of a front panel cable
Order #
Model
W4 72-4221 NL512
Product
Biphasic Pulse Buffer
The NL800A ISOLATOR features no battery usage except for when a
stimulus is being presented which is achieved by using an input optocoupler. This does suffer from having a low impedance and a DC offset
which is different for each unit but the NL512 removes these problems.
The NL512 provides easily adjustable internal finger controls for the DC
offset of each of the NL800A’s.
An on-board jumper allows the unit to be driven by one of four different
ranges for Full Scale current output from the NL800’s. These are ±10V, ±5
V, ±2.5 V and ±1 V. The 1 mm jumper system on the board allows the unit
to be driven from the unit on its immediate left, if required, via the
Motherboard in the NL900 Rack and Power Supply.
268
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
NL603 Counter
The NL601 Pulse Integrator has a digital counter which produces an
analog output proportional to the count. A pulse at the input socket
increments the counter towards a full scale count of 255, 2550 or 25500
which is pre-selectable by the front panel scale switch. The counter will
continue to increment on input pulses until the unit is reset. This can be
done manually (with the on, off/reset switch) or by applying a pulse to the
reset socket. Alternatively, with the unit set to internal-reset, when the
counter reaches full scale the unit will automatically reset. There is one
other reset function, the external reset/latch function. On a reset pulse the
output will be held at the previous count level until the next reset pulse. In
effect the counter is reset but the output is held at its value at the time of
the pulse. The NL601 has two outputs, the first is a simple pulse out when
the counter reaches full scale count the output goes high until the
counters are reset. The second is the analog output. Adjustable between 1
volt and 11 volts for full scale count (using the front panel output adjuster
pot) the output will increase by 1/255 (for a full scale count of 255) for
every pulse in and will stay at maximum voltage for every pulse after 255
until the unit is reset.
The NL603 Counter is a 2-digit preset decade counter with a 2-digit light
emitting diode decimal readout. The counters can be externally reset and
gated; they can be operated in one of three modes: Preset-Reset in which
the counters are reset to zero when the count equals the preset switch
settings; Preset-Stop in which the count is stopped when the preset
number is reached; and FREE RUN, in which the preset number does not
affect the count. A pulse occurs at the output when the count equals the
preset number (Free Run and Preset-Reset modes); a high logic level
appears at the output during counting in the Preset-Stop mode. Up to 3
NL603 Counters can be cascaded to give arbitrarily large counts. Carry,
reset and preset logic signals are automatically relayed to adjacent
Counters through rack edge connectors when the Counters are cascaded.
NL603 modules can be used for digital control of pulse width, cycle
duration, pulse delay (phase), number of pulses in trains, etc. Precision
obtainable when used with the NL304 Period Generator is better than
0.01% in minimum steps of 1 µsec. The LED display of the NL603 enables
it to be used to count responses, number of stimuli delivered, etc., in
addition to controlling pulse trains.
Specifications
Specifications
Inputs
TTL pulses
Inputs
TTL pulses
Pulse Out
TTL
Output Fan-Out
10 TTL inputs
Analog Out
Adjustable between 1 V and 11 V for full scale via
front panel pot
Output Pulse Width
(Free Run and Preset-Reset modes) 0.5 µsec (nominal)
Max. Counting Rate
5 MHz
Output Steps
255
Pre-Scaler
None, 10, or 100
Order #
Model
W4 65-0260 NL601
Product
Order #
Model
W4 65-0261 NL603
neurolog™ system
NL601 Pulse Integrator
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
NL601 and NL603
Product
Counter
Pulse Integrator
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
269
neurolog system
™
NL703 and NL800A
Electrophysiology
NL703 EMG Integrator
NL800A Stimulus Isolator-Constant Current
The NL703 EMG Integrator module was designed to produce an analogue
signal to represent muscle activity. The unit will accept signals up to ±1 V
which it full-wave rectifies and applies to a ‘leaky integrator’. The output
of the integrator is buffered and the overall gain is set at unity. The time
constant of the integrator is set by a 6-position rotary switch. A toggle
switch is also provided so that the direct signal can be viewed.
neurolog™ system
Input
Max. signal that can be processed without distortion is ±1 V
Input Overload
Input is protected up to ±75 V
Time Constants
Setable to 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 and 1000 msec;
accuracy better than 10%
The NL800A Stimulus Isolator is a battery powered, light-coupled isolated
stimulator. It has a constant current output, with very high output
impedance, making it suitable for stimulation through microelectrodes as
well as with gross electrodes. Can be driven by the NL510A Pulse Buffer
or NL512 Biphasic Buffer. When used with the NL510A, output current is
set by the 10-turn AMPLITUDE control on the NL510A itself. Alternatively,
the NL512 allows biphasic analogue waveforms (e.g. from a PC) to be
converted into a biphasic stimulus when used in conjunction with two
NL800A units. In both cases, output pulses have the same timing as input
pulses. Features of the NL800A are its very small physical size (for
mounting close to the preparation), low battery consumption, excellent
isolation (< 1 pF output to input or ground coupling), and fast rise time.
Integrate/Direct
Either Integrated signal or input signal is selectable by
this switch; if Direct is selected, Integrator is reset to zero
Specifications
Output
Output produces signal which has gain of unity from input
but integrated with respect to time at time constant
selected
Specifications
Output Impedance
600 Ω in integrate; connected to INPUT socket in Direct
Input Requirements
10 V at 30 mA (nominal) for full scale output
Output Current Range
0 to 10 mA in 4 overlapping decade ranges
Output Risetime
Output Resistance
Order #
Model
W4 65-0266 NL703
Product
EMG Integrator
> 900 MΩ
Input-Output
Capacitative Coupling
< 1 pF
Accuracy and Linearity
±3% of full scale output for each output range
Dimensions
38 x 54 x 98 mm (1.50 x 2.13 x 3.5 in) excluding knob
Order #
270
< 5 µsec (1 kΩ load); < 20 µsec (typical tungsten microelectrode load); < 40 µsec for 1 MΩ resistor across output
Model
Product
W4 65-0276 NL800A
Stimulus Isolator,
Constant Current
W4 65-0363 NL800BATT
Set of Five Batteries for NL800A
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
neurolog system
™
The NL844 pre-amplifier is specifically designed to operate in conjunction
with the NL820A Isolator. Its low noise and high impedance differential
inputs make it particularly suitable for use as a headstage pre-amplifier
close to the preparation, ideal for isolated EMG, EEG or ECG applications.
It features 4 pairs of colour coded 1.5mm DIN “touch proof” sockets for
electrode connection as well as a COM input. The unit can be operated in
1, 2, 3 or 4 channel modes with unused channels switched off using the
rear panel toggle switches. This unit is particularly suited for use where
there are very large stimulus artefacts, for example when used close to a
magnetic stimulator coil. The input circuit automatically adjusts to the DC
input conditions plus a non-linear filter modifies its time constant if the
differential input signal exceeds its normal ± 0mV working range.
Therefore, fast, short artefacts do not block the subsequent stages. This
results in an amplifier with a very fast recovery time from stimulus
artefact pulses.
Specifications
Gain
x100, x1,000, x10,000 (operated in channel pairs)
Low Frequency Cut
3, 10, 30 Hz (operated in channel pairs)
High Frequency Cut
With NL820A > 35 kHz -3dB
Input Impedance
100 MΩ
Input Channels
4
Common Mode
10,000:1 (-80 dB) (with NL820A -120 dB)
Noise
5 µV RMS full bandwidth
Lead Length
2.5 m
Order #
Model
W4 65-0362 NL844
Product
4-Channel Pre-Amplifier
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Electrophysiology
ElectroEquipment
physiology
NL844 4-Channel Pre-Amplifier
neurolog™ system
NL844
271
neurolog system
™
NeuroLog™ System Accessories
Order #
Cables
Model
W4 65-0386 NL951-15cm
W4 65-0387 NL951-30cm
Order #
Model
Product
Panel-Mounted Sockets
Cable With Male Connectors
(Lemo Type F00250) on Both Ends,
15 cm L
W4 65-0301 NL944
Lemo 4-Pole, as on NL103 and NL107
W4 65-0302 NL944K
Lemo 4-Pole,as on NL104A, NL108A
W4 65-0303 NL964
Lemo RA00250
(Standard NeuroLog™ Socket)
W4 65-0304 NL969S
Lemo 9-Pole Insulated,
as on NL820A
Cable With Male Connectors
(Lemo Type F00250) on Both Ends,
30 cm L
W4 65-0388 NL951-45cm
Cable With Male Connectors
(Lemo Type F00250) on Both Ends,
45 cm L
W4 65-0284 NL951-1m
Cable With Male Connectors
(Lemo Type F00250) on Both Ends,
1mL
W4 65-0385 NL951-2m
Cable With Male Connectors
(Lemo Type F00250) on Both Ends,
2mL
Cable Mounted Sockets
W4 65-0305 NL965
4-Pole (Matches NL100A)
W4 65-0306 NL965K
4-Pole (Matches NL100AK/NL850A)
W4 65-0307 NL966K
6-Pole (Matches NL102GH)
Adapters
W4 65-0308 NL957
4-Way for NL100AK to NL103, 2 m L
W4 65-0309 NL957K
Cable With Male Connector at
One End and Tinned Leads at
Other End, 2 m L
4-Way Adapter for NL100A to
NL104A, 2 m L
W4 65-0310 NL960
BNC Plug to Lemo Socket
W4 65-0311 NL961
Lemo One-Pole ‘T’ Connector
W4 65-0286 NL953
4-Way Cable With One Plug
(Mates with NL103/NL107), 2 m L
W4 65-0312 NL969T
‘T’ Connector for Two NL822/832
W4 65-0287 NL953K
4-Way Cable With One Plug
(Mates with NL104A/NL108A), 2 m L
W4 65-0313 NL973A
NL100AK Headstage Accessory Kit
Two-Way With 2 x 4 mm Plugs
(for NL120), 1 m L
W4 65-0314 NL976
NL102G Headstage Accessory Kit
One-Way With Plug
(Standard NeuroLog™ Style), 10 cm L
W4 65-0632 NL910D-1
Single Width Panel
W4 65-0633 NL910D-2
Double Width Panel
W4 65-0290 NL954
4-Way Extension Cable for
NL100A/NL103/NL107, 2 m L
W4 65-0634 NL910D-4
Quad Width Panel
W4 65-0635 NL910D-6
Hex Width Panel
W4 65-0291 NL954K
4-Way Extension Cable for
NL100AK/ NL104A/NL108A/NL850A,
2mL
W4 65-0636 NL910D-8
Octal Width Panel
W4 65-0637 NL911D-1
Single Width Panel with Handle
and Panel Screws, No PCB Mounts
W4 65-0285 NL952
Electrophysiology
W4 65-0288 NL975
Extension Cables
W4 65-0289 NL950
neurolog™ system
272
Product
W4 65-0292 NL955
6-Way Extension Cable for
NL102 (With Split Socket), 2 m L
W4 65-0293 NL955K
6-Way Extension Cable for
NL102 (Standard Keyway), 2 m L
W4 65-0294 NL956K
6-Way Extension Cable for
NL102G, 2 m L
Accessory Kit
Blank NeuroLog Front Panels for Current
Royal Blue NL900D’s
™
Blank Panels for older NL900™ Models are available. Please contact Customer
Service for availability.
Other Items
W4 65-0320 NL970/10
Stacking Plugs, 1 mm D,
pkg. of 10
Plugs
W4 65-0321 NL972/10
Gold Plugs, 2 mm D, pkg. of 10
W4 65-0295 NL962
Lemo 1-Pole
(Standard NeuroLog™ Plug)
W4 65-0322 NL980
W4 65-0296 NL963
Lemo 4-Pole for NL103/NL107
Edge Connector Extender Cable;
Allows Access to Both Sides of
Working Module for Trimmer
Adjustments, Calibration and Servicing
W4 65-0297 NL963K
Lemo 4-Pole for NL104A/NL108A
W4 65-0323 NL985
Loudspeaker for NL120S
W4 65-0298 NL967K
Lemo 6-Pole for NL102G
W4 65-0325 NLMAN
W4 65-0299 NL968K
Lemo 2-Pole for NL410
W4 65-0300 NL969P
Lemo 9-Pole Insulated for NL820A
NeuroLog™ Operators Manual
(Supplied with NL900 but also
Sold Separately)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
cell biology
PLI-10,
see page 275
PLI-100,
see page 276
Mechanical Manipulators,
see page 295
Motorized Manipulators,
see page 297
E-Series Electrode Holders,
see page 305
Cell Biology
Section
Page No.
Microinjection
Introduction to Microinjection
274
Pico Injection/Micromanipulation System, PLI-10
275
Pico-Injector Systems, PLI-100
276 - 277
Pico-Injector Systems, PLI-100A
278 - 279
Pico-Injector Systems, PLI-90
280
PLI Injector Accessories
281
PLS-1 Pico Injection/Micromanipulation System
282
Air-1 Ultra Low Noise Air Compressor
283
BH-2 Neurophore
284 - 288
Nanoject II/Auto Nanoliter Injector
289
Screw-Actuated Air Syringes
290
Screw-Actuated Micrometer Driven
Hamilton Syringe
290
PM-8 & PM-4 Multi-Port Pneumatic
Injection System 4/8-Channel
291 - 292
Micropositioning
Micromanipulator Selection Guide
293 - 294
Standard Manual Control Manipulators
295
Dovetail Micromanipulators
296
High Resolution Motorized
Micromanipulator, SM-3
297
Stardard Motorized Control Manipulators
298
Control Units for Motorized Manipulators
299
Joystick Manipulator
300
Ultraprecise Micromanipulators
301
Microdrive Controller Type 864
302
DC Microdrive Controller Type 864/1
303
DC Microdrive Controller Type 864/2
303
Magnetic Bases
304
Microelectrode Holders
E Series Electrode Holders
305 - 310
Q Series Electrode Holders
311 - 315
ME Series Electrode Holders
316 - 317
PE Series Electrode Holders
318
PE30W Series Holders, 15 NEW Models
for Patch Perfusion
319
MP Series Electrode Holders
320
MHH-25 & MHH-38 Holders
321
Theta Glass Electrode Holders
321
THP Pressurized Holder for Theta Glass
322
Electrode Holders Replacement Parts
323
Capillary Glass
Warner Premium Capillary Glass
324 - 325
Patch Clamp Capillary Glass
326
Premium Standard
Wall Borosilicate,
see page 324
Programmable Pipette Pullers,
see page 331
Clark Capillary Glass
Pipette Sterilization & Storage Container
7-Barrel Iontophoresis Micropipette
Pipette Pullers
Introduction to Pipettes & Pullers
Programmable Pipette Pullers
Microforge-Grinding Center, MF-5 & MG-5
Tissue Sampling
EMS Automatic Oscillating Tissue
Slicer, OTS 5000
327 - 329
330
330
331
332 - 333
334
335 - 336
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
273
microinjection
Introduction to Microinjection
microinjection
The use of Glass Needle (Fine Glass Microcapillary Pipette) based
techniques for intracellular/extracellular microinjection and
perfusion has become a popular procedure in numerous areas of
experimental biology research (e.g. In vitro fertilization, transgenics,
etc.). These techniques can best be described as micro surgical
procedures that are conducted on a single cell using either a single
or multiple barrel glass micropipette a precision positioning device
(micromanipulator) and a microinjector or microperfusor. The
micropipettes used in these procedures are formed using a Pipette
Puller. The capillary glass tubing is heated to its softening point
and ‘pulled’ to create the proper size tip diameter and taper for the
desired application. The small tip diameters (as low as 0.2 µm) of
these micropipettes combined with the high precision of the
Micromanipulator and Microinjection/Perfusion Apparatus, allows
for precise and accurate delivery. This precision allows for accurate
and repeatable injections down to the sub-picoliter liter range into
or around various types and sizes of cells with accuracy to 0.1
micron. The process of extruding substances through these
micropipettes is accomplished through the use of either direct
hydrostatic pressure (Pressure Injection) or by moving charged ions
that are the result of an applied electric field (Iontophoresis)
without the use of hydraulic flow.
Cell Biology
Applications of microinjection range from assisted (In vitro) cell
fertilization techniques to the transport of molecular and cellular
elements. These substances are typically injected into the cell to
manipulate and/or monitor the fundamental biochemistry of a
specific living cell. Substance that can be injected include, cellular
organelles, kinases, histochemical markers (such as horseradish
peroxidase or lucifer yellow), proteins, metabolites, microbeads,
ions, antibodies, genes, molecular biology mRNA and DNA, etc.
The precise delivery (microperfusion) of small volumes (picoliter to
milliliter) of various agents and drugs to a cell or group of cells for
applications such as pharmacological drug testing can also be
accomplished using these techniques.
Warner and Harvard Apparatus Clark Capillary Glass, pages 324-330
Harvard Apparatus/Medical Systems Picoliter Injectors, pages 275 to 282
Harvard/Apparatus Medical Systems NeuroPhore, see pages 284 to 292
In order for the researcher to conduct any of the above experiments
and get meaningful results, the tools (equipment) used in these
experiments must provide not only the specific functionality, but
they also need to be of the highest quality and provide the
necessary reliability, accuracy and repeatability to insure proper
results. Harvard Apparatus, Inc. manufactures and sells the
complete range of product that are needed to successfully
microinject and/or microperfuse.
Pressure Injection Systems, pages 291 and 292
Pipette Pullers, pages 331 to 334
274
Micromanipulators, pages 295 to 304
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
NEW Model PLI-10
microinjection
• Femtoliter to microliter injections
• Digital readouts for injection pressure,
time, and count
• Reliable optically encoded circuit for
injection time set
• Easy to use
The PLI-10 Pico-Injector reliably delivers ejections from femtoliters to
nanoliters through micropipettes by applying a regulated pressure for a
digitally set period of time.
Pressure to the pipette is controlled precisely through a multi-turn
regulator, and is reported digitally for reproducibility. Injection time is set
using an optically encoded circuit which permits fine and coarse settings
from a single knob.
The system timer can be controlled in three ways, front panel push
button, foot switch, and external trigger input BNC.
Typical applications are large volume injections, (large volume is
considered to be in the 10-100 Pico liter range), extracellular sample
delivery, and
Xenopus Oocyte injection because of their large size (1.0 mm).
Specifications
Input Gas Pressure
75 PSI Recommended, 105 PSI Maximum
Injection Pressure
0.2 to 60 PSI (413 KPa) regulated
Injection Time
0.01 to 99.99 Seconds
Injection Time Accuracy
±0.01% (Crystal Time Base)
Pressure Display
3½ Digits, 0.1 PSI or 1 KPa Resolution
Injection Count Display
0 to 9999 Injections
Trigger Mode
Front Panel, Footswitch, TTL (Gate In)
Pressure Monitor Output
BNC, Rear Panel, 10 mV/PSI or 1 mV/KPa
Power Input
External 9VDC @ 400mA (min) Power Supply
universal input voltage 90 to 264 VAC
Weight
2.3 kg
Dimensions (HxWxD)
89 x 215 x 175 mm (3.5 x 8.5 x 6.9 in)
Warranty
One year, parts & labor
Order #
Model
Cell Biology
microinjection
Low Cost Pico Injector
Product
W4 64-1707 PLI-10
Pico-liter includes input hose,
output hose, and foot switch
W4 64-1626 AO161.0
Acrylic pipette holder for
1.0 mm pipettes
W4 64-1627 AO161.2
Acrylic pipette holder for
1.2 mm pipettes
W4 64-1628 LPLI-PPH
Acrylic pipette holder for
1.5 mm pipettes
W4 64-1629 AO162.0
Acrylic pipette holder for
2.0 mm pipettes
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
275
PLI-100
microinjection
Medical Systems Pico-Injector
A full featured workhourse microinjector
W4 65-0001 PLI-100 Pico-Injector
microinjection
Cell Biology
•
•
•
•
•
•
5 pressures: inject, balance, clear, fill and hold
Reliable
Femtoliter to microliter injections
Reproducible performance
Easy to use
Popular applications:
- Injection of mouse, frog, zebrafish and other
oocytes
- Extracellular brain injections
- Injection of DNA, mRNA, microbeads,
neurotransmitters, kinases and other proteins
• Most Published Injector
The PLI-100 Pico-Injector reliably delivers a wide range of volumes through
micropipettes by applying a regulated pressure for a digitally set period of
time. Compressed gas allows the user to deliver desired volumes from
femtoliters to microliters while simultaneously holding a cell. Whether you
need to do large injections into capillaries or very small injections into
mammalian nuclei, the PLI-100 is well suited for your experiment.
The PLI-100 has become a favorite of prestigious national microinjection
workshops like Cold Spring Harbor Laboratories and other researchers
worldwide. Other companies have tried to design similar systems, but the
PLI-100 remains unparalleled in terms of ease of use, durability, precision,
and cost.
Researchers Say:
“The PLI-100 is very robust, in constant use in our lab.”
“Most importantly, the PLI-100 valves prevent cytosol and yolk backflow
into my pipette after oocyte injection.”
“It’s very easy to control.”
276
“The PLI-100 is heavily used on a daily basis, and works great.”
“I like the fact that I can use the PLI-100 with TTL pulses.”
“It works great in conjunction with my imaging system.”
“The balance pressure is a good option.”
“My injection pipettes rarely clog.”
Easy to Use
Inject with the touch of a button or a tap of the foot switch — it’s as easy
as that!
Reproducible
Pressure to the pipette is controlled precisely through a multi-turn
regulator, and is reported digitally for easy repeat. Injection time is
digitally controlled in 10 msec steps between 0.01 to 0.99 seconds (and in
1 second steps between 1 to 99 seconds). Pipette tip diameter, and hence
delivered volume, are easy determinations once the timing and pressure
are known.
Versatile
Deliver volumes from femtoliters to microliters with the same instrument,
resulting in a wide range of applications.
Pressure Capabilities
The PLI-100 features two negative and three positive pressure pneumatic
capabilities.
The negative, or vacuum functions allow the user to:
1. Fill micropipettes from their tips, reducing wastage of valuable
injectables.
2. Provide a means to secure and manipulate a cell using a holding
pipette.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
PLI-100
microinjection
The positive pressures allow the user to:
Specifications
1. Eject precise amounts of fluids.
Input Gas Pressure
70 to 105 p.s.i. (480 to 720 kPa)
2. Create a balance pressure which prevents backflow into the
micropipette following an injection.
Injection Pressure
0.2 to 60 p.s.i. (413 kPa), regulated, multi-turn control
Balance Pressure
0.1 to 3.5 p.s.i. (68.9 kPa), regulated, multi-turn control,
other ranges available upon request
Unique Features
The PLI-100’s important ‘Balance’, ‘Hold’ and ‘Clear’ functions are not
found on other microinjection units.
Fill Vacuum
Internally produced, -12.0 p.s.i. (-82 kPa), unregulated
Holding Vacuum
Internally produced, 0 to 3 in H2O (0 to 0.75 kPa or 0 to
0.1 p.s.i.), regulated
Clearing Pressure
Input gas pressure, unregulated
Injection Timer
Pulse Width
0.01 to 0.99 sec in 10 msec steps; 1 to 99 sec in 1 sec
steps
In addition to the ejection pressure, the Pico-Injector offers a secondary
balance pressure. This secondary balance maintains a positive pressure
on the injection pipette before and after injections. This eliminates
dilution caused by capillary action and aids in the prevention of clogging.
Wasteful continuous injection, which often occurs when no separate
balance pressure is offered by an injection device, is avoided.
Injection Count Display
Digital, 0 through 9999
Balance
Duration Mode
Internally timed or externally gated
Time Trigger
Front panel, foot switch, or external TTL pulse (BNC)
Pressure Units
p.s.i./kPa; switch selectable
Pressure Monitor
BNC connector, 10 mV/p.s.i.
Pressure Readout
Inject, balance, clear, output port
Fill/Hold
Line Voltage
100/110/220/240 VAC
There are two built-in vacuum generators to fill a micropipette from the
tip and to hold suspended cells. Filling the pipette from the tip is easier
than back filling. Suspended cells can be held with a second (holding)
pipette. The holding vacuum’s range accommodates most cell types.
Power Usage
220 W
Meter Accuracy
0.1% full scale
Foot Switches
Inject, fill, hold, and gated; provided in plus and deluxe
pkgs.
Clear
A high-pressure pulse can be used for clearing a pipette, should it happen
to clog. This is particularly useful when working with pipettes sized for
smaller volumes.
Electrical Connectors
BNC type connectors are available at the front panel to ease integrating
the Pico-Injector with other equipment. Synchronization of injections to
other stimulations or recordings is therefore possible.
Selection Guidelines
The PLI-100 is available in three packages: Plus, Basic and Deluxe. The
basic unit is supplied with an input hose, output hose, holding hose,
power cord and instruction manual. The plus unit also includes a foot
switch, pipette holder and input hose adapter. The deluxe unit includes all
the previously mentioned accessories plus an additional foot switch and
one pipette holder.
Accessories
Available accessories for the PLI-100 Injection Systems are located on
page 281.
Weight
6.8 kg (15 lb)
Dimensions, H x W x D
11 x 38 x 25.5 cm (5 x 15 x 10 in)
Accessories Supplied
Input, output and holding hoses
Order #
Model
Product
W4 65-0001 PLI-100
PLI-100 Basic Pico Injector with
Injection, Balance, Clear, Filling
and Holding Pressures; Comes with
Input Hose, Output Hose, Holding Hose,
Power Cord and Instruction Manual
W4 65-0002 PLI-100 Plus
PLI-100 Plus Pico Injector with
Injection, Balance, Clear, Filling
and Holding Pressures; Comes with
Input Hose, Output Hose, Holding
Hose, Power Cord, Instruction
Manual, Foot Switch (W4 65-0029),
Pipette Holder (W4 65-0013)
and Input Hose Adapter
Cell Biology
3. Clear a micropipette of material in it.
microinjection
Medical Systems Pico-Injector (continued)
W4 65-0003 PLI-100 Deluxe PLI-100 Deluxe Pico-Injector
with Injection, Balance, Clear,
Filling and Holding Pressures,
Comes with Input Hose, Output
Hose, Holding Hose, Power Cord,
Instruction Manual, Two Foot
Switches, Two Pipette Holders
and Input Hose Adapter
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
277
PLI-100A
microinjection
Pico-Injector
microinjection
• Femtoliter to microliter injections
• Digital readouts for injection pressure, time,
and count
• Reliable optically encoded circuit for injection
time set
• 5 pressures: inject, balance, clear, fill and hold
The PLI-100A Pico-Injector reliably delivers ejections from femtoliters to
nanoliters through micropipettes by applying a regulated pressure for a
digitally set period of time.
Cell Biology
Pressure to the pipette is controlled precisely through a multi-turn
regulator, and is reported digitally for reproducibility. Injection time is set
using an optically encoded circuit which permits fine and coarse settings
from a single knob.
The system timer can be controlled in three ways, front panel push
button, foot switch, and external trigger input BNC.
Whether you need to do large injections into capillaries or very small
injections into mammalian nuclei, the PLI-100A is up for the task.
Pressure Capabilities
The PLI-100A features two negative and three positive pressure pneumatic
capabilities. The negative or vacuum functions allow the user to:
1. Fill micropipettes from their tips, reducing waste of pipettes.
2. Provide a means to secure and manipulate a cell using holding pipette.
Unique Features
The PLI-100A's important 'Balance', 'Hold' and 'Clear' functions are
features not found on other microinjection units.
Balance
In addition to the ejection pressure, the Pico-Injector offers a secondary
balance pressure. This adjustable pressure keeps a positive pressure on
the injection pipette before and after injections. This eliminates dilution
caused by capillary action and aids in the prevention of clogging.
Wasteful continuous injection, which often occurs when no separate
balance pressure is offered by an injection device, is avoided.
Fill/Hold
There are two built-in vacuum generators to fill a micropipette from the
tip and to hold suspended cells. Filling the pipette from the tip is easier
than back filling. The PLI-100A features a Fill Vacuum adjustment on the
front panel. Suspended cells can be held with a second (holding) pipette.
The holding vacuum’s range accommodates most cell types.
Clear
A high-pressure pulse can be used for clearing a pipette, should it happen
to clog. This is particularly useful when working with pipettes sized for
smaller volumes.
Electrical Connectors
BNC type connectors are available at the front panel to ease integrating
the Pico-Injector with other equipment. Synchronization of injections to
other stimulations or recordings is therefore possible.
The positive pressures allow the user to:
• Eject precise amounts of fluids
Selection Guideline
• Create a balance pressure which prevents
backflow into the micropipette following an
injection
The PLI-100A is available in three packages: Basic, Plus, and Deluxe.
The Basic unit is supplied with an input hose, output hose, holding hose,
and input hose adapter.
• Clear a micropipette of material in it
The Plus unit also includes a foot switch, pipette holder, and input hose
adapter.
The Deluxe unit includes all the accessories included with the Plus and
an additional foot switch and pipette holder.
278
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microinjection
PLI-100A
Pico-Injector (Continued)
Specifications
Order #
Product
microinjection
Input Gas Pressure
W4 64-1735 PLI-100A
PLI-100A Basic Pico Injector
with Injection, Balance, Clear,
Filling and Holding Pressures;
Comes with Input Hose, Output
Hose, Holding Hose, and Input
Hose Adapter
Cell Biology
Rear Panel
W4 64-1736 PLI-100A Plus
PLI-100A Plus Pico Injector
with Injection, Balance, Clear,
Filling and Holding Pressures;
Comes with Input Hose,
Output Hose, Holding Hose,
Foot Switch (65-0029),
Pipette Holder (65-0013),
and Input Hose Adapter
Output Hose
Holding hose with cell release bulb
75 PSI Recommended, 105 PSI Maximum
Injection Pressure
0.2 to 60 PSI (413 KPa), regulated
Balance Pressure
0.1 to 9.9 PSI (68.9 KPa) regulated, multi-turn
control, other ranges available on request
Fill Vacuum
Internally produced 0 to -12 PSI (0 to-82 KPa),
regulated
Holding Vacuum
Internally produced 0 to -0.1 PSI (0 to -0.75 KPa),
regulated
Clearing Pressure
Input gas pressure, unregulated
Injection Time
0.01 to 99.99 Seconds
Injection Time Accuracy
±0.01% (Crystal Time Base)
Duration Mode
Internally timed or externally gated
Time Trigger
Front panel, foot switch,
or external TTL pulse (BNC)
Pressure Units
PSI /KPa switch selectable
Pressure Monitor Output
BNC, Rear Panel, 10 mV/PSI or 1 mV/KPa
Pressure Readout
Inject, balance, clear, output port
Pressure Display Resolution 3½ Digits, 0.1 PSI or 1 KPa
Injection Count Display
0 to 9999 Injections
Power Input
External 9VDC @ 400mA (min) Power
Weight
5.44 kg (12 lb)
Pipette Holder (W4 65-0013)
Model
W4 64-1737 PLI-100ADeluxe PLI-100A Deluxe Pico-Injector
with Injection, Balance, Clear,
Filling and Holding Pressures,
Comes with Input Hose, Output
Hose, Holding Hose, Two Foot
Switches, Two Pipette Holders,
and Input Hose Adapter
Supply universal input 90 to 264 VAC
Dimensions (HxWxD)
89 x 432 x 250 mm (3.5 x 17 x 9.8 in) (H x W x D)
Warranty
One year, parts & labor
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
279
PLI-90
microinjection
Medical Systems Pico-Injector
Precise and reproducible injection
Specifications
Input Gas Pressure
W4 65-0004 PLI-90 Pico-Injector
microinjection
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 pressures — inject, balance, and clearing
Eliminates backflow into pipette after injection
Reproducibly delivers femtoliters to microliters
Easy to use
Economical
Precise
70 to 105 p.s.i. (480 to 720 kPa)
Injection Pressure
0.2 to 60 p.s.i. (413 kPa), regulated, multi-turn control
Balance Pressure
0.1 to 9.9 p.s.i. (68.9 kPa), regulated, multi-turn control,
other ranges available upon request
Clearing Pressure
Input gas pressure, unregulated
Injection Time
0.01 to 0.99 sec in 10 msec steps; 1 to 99 sec in 1 sec
steps
Pressure Display
Digital, three and a half digits
Duration Mode
Internally timed or externally triggered
Trigger Mode
Foot or panel switch
Pressure Readout
Inject, balance, clear, output port
Line Voltage
100/110/220/240 VAC
Power Usage
220 W
Foot Switch(es)
Optional inject and gating
Accessories Supplied
Input hose, output hose and power cord
Weight
6.8 kg (15 lb)
Dimensions, H x W x D
11 x 38 x 25.5 x cm (5 x 15 x 10 in)
Order #
Model
Cell Biology
W4 65-0004 PLI-90 BASIC
Pico-Injector with Injection,
Balance and Clear Pressures;
Includes Input Hose (PLI-IHN) and
Output Hose (PLI-OHN), Handle,
Power Cord and Instruction
Manual. Applications: Basic setups
that do not need suction.
W4 65-0005 PLI-90 PLUS
Pico-Injector Basic Model and
Acces-sories (Shown Above), Plus
One Each PLI-FS Foot Switch,
PLI-PH1 Pipette Holder and PLI-IHA
Input Hose Adapter
The PLI-90 Pico-Injector, like the reliable PLI-100 Pico-Injector, controls the
precise and reproducible regulation of injection pressure and time.
Simplicity
Because the PLI-90 features only the injection, balance, and clearing
pressures, it is a lower cost alternative to the PLI-100. This simplicity
makes it even easier to use than the PLI-100.
Selection Guidelines
The PLI-90 is ideal for the user who does not require vacuum for
filling pipette barrels or if using a holding pipette for holding cells is not
essential to your application.
Product
The PLI-90 is available in two packages: Basic and Plus. The basic model
includes an input and output hose, handle, power cord and instruction
manual. The plus model is supplied with all of the same parts as the basic
model but also includes a Footswitch, Pipette Holder, and Input Hose
Adapter.
280
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
PLI-100 and PLI-90
microinjection
PLI-100 and PLI-90 Accessories
Order #
Model
Product
Model
Stainless Steel Pipette Holder,
130 mm L for 1 to 1.5 mm OD
Glass Pipettes
W4 65-0014 PLI-PH1A
Stainless Steel Pipette Holder,
80 mm L for 1 to 1.5 mm OD
Glass Pipettes
W4 65-0017 PLI-SRG
Silicone Rubber Gasket
Replacement for use with
PLI-PH1 and PLI-PH1A,
10.2 cm (12 in)
W4 65-0015 PLI-SRG1.5
Silicone Rubber Gasket
Replacement for use with 1.5 mm
Glass Pipettes
W4 65-0018 PLI-SSB
Stainless Steel Bushing
Replacement for use with PLI-PH1
and PLI-PH1A Pipette Holders
W4 65-0019 PLI-PC
Stainless Steel Pipette Cap
Replacement for use with PLI-PH1
and PLI-PH1A Pipette Holders
W4 65-0020 PLI-HN
Stainless Steel Hose Nut
Replacement for use with PLI-PH1
and PLI-PH1A Pipette Holders
W4 65-0021 PLI-PH-KIT
Pipette Holder Hardware
Replacement Kit for use with
PLI-PH1 and PLI-PH1A Pipette
Holders, Includes 1 each PLI-SSB,
PLI-PC, PLI-HN and PLI-SRG
W4 65-0022 PLI-PHA
Stainless Steel Pipette Holder
(PLI-PH series) Adapter for
Eppendorf ECET FEMTOTIP
Product
Accessories
W4 65-0029 PLI-FS
W4 65-0030 PLI-RM
Footswitch for Inject, Hold, Fill or
Gate (Order more than one if
frequent use of footswitch is needed
for more than one of these functions.)
Frame to Mount PLI-90 or PLI-100
in 19-in. Wide Instrument Rack
Hosing
W4 65-0006 PLI-IHA
W4 65-0007 PLI-IHO
Input Hose Adapter (1⁄4 in Male
W4T Pipe Thread) Gas Bottle Regulator
Fitting; Connects with PLI-IHO/N
Gas Input Hose (Tygon Tubing),
9 ft x 0.250 in (6.35 mm) x 0.125 in
(3.18 mm) x 0.062 in (1.57 mm)
(L x OD x ID x Wall Thickness);
Connects to PLI-IHA and PLI 90/100
Gas Input, Brass Screw Fitting Type - Old
W4 65-0008 PLI-IHN
Gas Input Hose (Tygon Tubing) 9 ft
L x 0.250 in (6.35 mm) OD x 0.125 in
(3.18 mm) ID x 0.062 in (1.57 mm)
Wall Thickness; Connects to PLI-IHA
and PLI 90/100 Gas Input, Quick
Connect/Disconnect Type - New
W4 65-0009 PLI-OHO
Output Hose (Tygon Tubing) 9 ft
L x 0.071 in (1.80 mm) OD x 0.039 in
(1 mm) ID x 0.016 in (0.41 mm) Wall
Thickness; Connects to MSC Pipette
Holders, Brass Screw Fitting Type - Old
W4 65-0010 PLI-OHN
Output Hose (Tygon Tubing) 9 ft
L x 0.071 in (1.80 mm) OD x 0.039 in
(1 mm) ID x 0.016 in (0.41 mm) Wall
Thickness; Connects to MSC Pipette
Holders and PLI 90/100 Gas Output, Quick
Connect/Disconnect Type - New
W4 65-0011 PLI-HHO
W4 65-0012 PLI-HHN
Holding Hose with Cell Release
Bulb; 9 ft L x 0.071 in (1.80 mm)
OD x 0.039 in (1 mm) ID x 0.016 in
(0.41 mm) Wall Thickness; Connects to
MSC Pipette Holders and PLI-100 Hold
Output, Brass Screw Fitting Type - Old
Holding Hose with Cell Release
Bulb; 9 ft L x 0.071 in (1.80 mm)
OD x 0.039 in (1 mm) ID x 0.016 in
(0.41 mm) Wall Thickness.
Connects to MSC Pipette Holders
and PLI-100 Hold Output, Quick
Connect/Disconnect Type - New
Optional “Easy Insert” Acrylic Pipette Holder
W4 64-1626 AO16 1.0
Acrylic Pipette Holder for
1.0 mm Pipettes
W4 64-1627 AO16 1.2
Acrylic Pipette Holder for
1.2 mm Pipettes
W4 64-1628 PLI-PPH
Acrylic Pipette Holder for
1.5 mm Pipettes
W4 64-1629 AO16 1.2
Acrylic Pipette Holder for
2 mm Pipettes
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Cell Biology
Order #
W4 65-0013 PLI-PH1
microinjection
Pipette Holder/Adapter/Parts
281
microinjection
PLS-1
Pico Injection/Micromanipulator System
microinjection
The PLS-1 Pico Injection/Micromanipulator System combines our popular
PLI-100 pico injector, a motorized micromanipulator, and magnetic base in
a single package.
Cell Biology
The PLI-100 Pico-Injector delivers a wide range of volumes through
micropipettes by applying a regulated pressure for a set period of time.
The system features 5 pressures: inject, balance, clear, fill, and hold. The
injector comes complete with input and output hoses, foot switch and
pipette holder.
For precise and convenient movement of the electrode our three axes
motorized micromanipulator and push button controller are included. This
micromanipulator features hands free spatial resolution of 0.5 µm which
enables positioning in the sub-micro range. Flexible motor coupling
ensures no vibration of probe during movement.
The MB/B magnetic base provides a convenient position device for the
micromanipulator.
Order #
282
Model
Product
W4 64-1608 PLS-1
Pico-Injector Micromanipulator
System
W4 65-0002 PLI-100 Plus
Pico Injector
W4 60-0571
Right-handed motorized
micromanipulator
W4 60-0577
Push button controller
W4 64-0060
MB/B Magnetic base
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microinjection
Model Air-1 Ultra Low Noise Air Compressor
Specifications
Input Voltage Range
120 or 230 VAC specify at time or order
Maximum Current
[email protected] 120 VAC [email protected] 230 VAC
Motor
0.54 HP / 0.40kW
Displacement
60 l/min or 2.12 CFM
FAD @ 8 bar
32 l/min or 1.13 CFM
Max. Pressure
8 bar / 120 psi
Tank Size
4 liters / 1.1 gallon
Noise Level
45 dB(A)
Physical Dimensions:
Size, H x W x D
382 x 300 x 334 mm (15 x 11.8 x 13.2 in)
Weight
23 kg (50.6 lb)
Model
Product
W4 64-1701 AIR-1 U
Ultra low noise 120VAC
W4 64-1702 AIR-2
Ultra low noise 230VAC
• Suitable for installation directly at point of use
• Lowest noise and vibration level in the market
45dB(A) you won’t even know it’s on
• Complete compressed air package
• Ideal for use with our microinjection systems
When a reliable supply of clean and quiet compressed air is required, this
oil-lubricated compressor is the perfect choice. The noise level is 45 dB(A)
- far below the level of normal conversation. Quiet, vibration-free and
reliable this compressors compact design easily allows mounting at the
place of use.
The oil-lubricated piston compressor is supplied ready for use. The unique
synthetic SJ-27 oil designed especially for AIR-1 optimizes the lubrication
of the compressor.
microinjection
Order #
One year, parts & labor
Cell Biology
Warranty
Furthermore, the internal motor is mounted in a closed motor house,
reducing the noise level even further. Due to the design of the motor, the
oil is also used for cooling the motor.
The motor is mounted on springs inside the motor housing, which means
that hardly any vibrations are imparted to the surroundings. Two noise
reduction chambers on the intake side and two noise reduction chambers
on the pressure side ensure absorption of the noise. The compressor is
also supplied with rubber feet, preventing vibrations from imparting to the
mounting bolts and foundation. The noise level of the oil-lubricated
compressor is 45 dB (A) – below the noise level of a refrigerator.
The oil minimizes the wear and tear of the vital parts in the compressor,
prolonging the lifetime and at the same time ensuring low maintenance
costs.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
283
microinjection
Harvard Neuro Phore BH-2 System
Micro-Iontophoresis and Micro Injection
Harvard Neuro Phore BH-2 System
In the past few decades, the application of drugs and other dissolved agents from multibarrel electrodes/pipettes
has evolved into a practical method of testing their effects on cells or cellular systems. The versatile Neuro
Phore BH-2 System is designed to facilitate controlled ejection of fluids from multibarrel micropipettes.
Extracellular ejections of minute volumes can be delivered using up to five pumps in serial or parallel. The
ejection schedule for each pump can be independently programmed for sequential or simultaneous output.
Ejection cycles can be internally timed, triggered manually, or synchronized to external events.
This flexible system allows the use of iontophoretic pump modules, pneumatic pump modules, or a
combination of both. By interchanging the IP-2 Iontophoresis Pump Module with a PPM-2 pneumatic pressure
pump, the overall system capability can be expanded for simultaneous pressure and iontophoretic injection of
drugs from a multibarrel pipette.
The Neuro Phore BH-2 System was developed under the guidance of active researchers with extensive
experience in iontophoresis techniques. These researchers needed a system to provide precise stimulation and
quantitative control for ejection of drugs in their pharmacological studies of drug evoked responses such as
neurosynaptic discharges, contraction, and changes in chemical concentration. What emerged was a reliable,
accurate, easy to use, Neuro Phore BH-2 system that is capable of accommodating high impedance multibarreled micro-electrode pipettes.
microinjection
- Digitally controlled eject and pause timing utilizes easy to read
and set digital panel switches on each iontophoretic or pressure
module/channel
- Unbalance and out of compliance indicators are a great aid in
troubleshooting clogged pipettes and other problems
Cell Biology
- External analog input control allows external programming of complex,
or closed loop injection protocols
The Neuro Phore BH2 System Unit pictured contains three IP-2 Pump
Modules and two PPM-2 Pump Modules and one BM-2 Control and
Balance Module
- Current and electrode resistance readout with large bright easy to read
digital displays
System Configuration
The Neuro Phore BH-2 System is modular and is comprised of the
following components (all ordered separately):
•
•
•
•
•
•
Used by leading researchers for over 20 years
Modular
Minimal noise
Up to 6 channels
Digitally controlled eject and pause timing
Mix and match pump types
- One BH-2 Mainframe Chassis, W4 65-0600 that can accommodate 1 to
5 Iontophoretic Pump and/or Pressure Pump Modules; Mainframe
Chassis can be rack mounted or set on table
- One BM-2 Control and Balance Module, W4 65-0602
- IP-2 Iontophoretic Pump Modules, W4 65-0603 and/or
- PPM-2 Pressure Pump Modules, W4 65-0604
- One low noise MS-2 Power Supply, W4 65-0601
Features
- Successfully utilized in key laboratories around the world for over 20
years, with many journal articles published as a result
- Modular design; buy what you need now and add additional modules
later as your protocol evolves
- Blank Panel DP-1 Dummy Module, W4 65-0605 used to maintain
timing if less than 5 Pump Modules are installed
- One Model OC-01 output cable, W4 65-0215
- One Model NL-952 lemo cable, W4 65-0285
- Accommodates 7 barrel micropipettes, supports the most complex and
demanding injection and recording protocols
- Extremely low noise, ±105 volts compliance, allows rapid iontophoretic
injection with even the smallest micropipette tips
- Automatic current neutralization for minimal electrical artifacts
284
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microinjection
Harvard Neuro Phore BH-2 System
Micro-Iontophoresis and Micro Injection (continued)
BH-2 Mainframe Chassis
Specifications
The BH-2 Mainframe Chassis is pre-wired to accept one Control and
Balance module and five Iontophoretic Pump Modules and/or Pneumatic
Pump Modules. The selected modules are specified by the researcher and
depend on applications. Although all components are ordered separately,
the unit is assembled, calibrated, and balanced by Harvard Apparatus
before shipping.
Neutralization (balance)
Pump Range
Compliance ±105 V linear constant current source;
manually adjustable 0 to 500 nA by pump control;
polarity selected +/OFF/- switch
Digital Meter Display
3 digits and sign
Unbalance Current/Current Pump Switch:
Unbalance
Digital display reads unbalance (ground going)
current in nA
Current Mode
In this mode, automatic current neutralization is
provided
Current Pump Mode Automatic balance feature is switched off; display
reads amount of current in nanoamperes passed
through balance barrel as adjusted by pump control
Single Cycle Mode
In single cycle mode, start switch or external trigger
initiates each cycle
Recycle Mode
In recycle mode, once start switch or external trigger
is actuated, repetitive cycles commence automatically
Time Unit Switch
Two basic time units can be selected, 10 msec or 1
sec. In 10 msec position, Eject and Pause time
switches of IP-2 Modules can be set to cover time
range from 10 to 990 msec with 10 msec resolution. In
1 sec position, time scale is expanded from 1 to 99 sec
with 1 sec resolution.
Inputs
Cycle start, stop, trigger/gate #1 through #5; banana
jacks terminals, floating input, optically coupled; input
voltage ±5 to ±15 V TTL compatible
Analog Input
Lemo miniature receptacle, ground referenced 5
mV/nA; input impedance 100 kΩ
Analog Output
Lemo miniature receptacle, 5 mV/nA ground
referenced
*Brain Slice Chambers are available in a variety of formats. Please visit
our website for more information.
Order #
Product
W4 65-0600 BH-2 Mainframe Chassis (Does Not Include
BM-2 Balance Module, see Below)
W4 65-0602 BM-2 Control and Balance Module with
OC-01 and NL-952
Application Note: Working Unit:
One (1) each of BH-2 Main-Frame, MS-2 power supply, BM-2 Control
& Balance module and any combination of one (1) to five (5) modules
selected from IP-2 and/or PPM-2. If less than five (5), DP-1 module is
required to fill the spaces.
MS-2 Power Supply
The AC power supply is self contained in a rack-mounted cabinet and
provides all voltages required to operate the Neuro Phore System. The
power supply interconnects with the mainframe via flexible cable. The
supply works with 115 or 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz mains source.
Sync Output
Lemo miniature receptacle, TTL pulse
Output Connector
7-pin miniature connector, mates with ultra flexible
cable leading to micro-electrode holder
Dimensions, H x W x D
21 x 47 x 35 cm (8.75 x 19 x 14 in)
Weight
8.2 kg (18 lb)
microinjection
In addition to providing current neutralization (automatic feedback and
control of inverse sum of all pump currents), the balance module has
independent capability of current pump settings with a working range of 0
to 500 nanoamperes. The Balance Module includes a digital display, time
clock, provisions for electrical and manual cycle start/stop and single
cycle/recycle switch, trigger, and gate input terminals to initiate externally
controlled eject pumping action of respective modules. Analog input for
balance or drive with override capability. Analog output for monitoring of
unbalance currents.
Current Pump
Cell Biology
BM-2 Balance Module: Balance and More
Max. ±2500 nA automatically controlled
Specifications
Outputs
±125 V at 0.1 A
±15 V at 0.5 A
-5 V at 3 A
Line operated 115 to 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Dimensions, H x W x D
13 x 47 x 35 cm (5-1/4 x 19 x 14 in)
Weight
11 kg (24 lb)
Order #
Product
W4 65-0601 MS-2 Power Supply with Power Cord
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
285
microinjection
Harvard Neuro Phore BH-2 System
Micro-Iontophoresis and Micro Injection (continued)
Specifications
Cycle Start, Cycle Stop,
Trigger/Gate Inputs
Input Voltage
±5 to ±15 V
Minimum Trigger
Pulse Width
5 µsec at 5 V
Sync Out
Lemo miniature connector TTL pulse
Single Cycle Mode
In single cycle mode, start switch or external trigger
initiates each cycle
Recycle Mode
In recycle mode, once start switch or and
external trigger is actuated, repetitive cycles
will continue until stopped
Time Unit Switch
Two basic time units can be selected: 10 msec or 1
sec. In 10 msec position, Eject and Pause time
switches of PPM-2 Modules can be set to cover time
range from 10 to 990 msec with 10 msec resolution. In
1 sec position, time scale is expanded to 1 to 99 sec
with 1 sec resolution
Power
115 VAC, 50/60 Hz (100 or 220 VAC optional)
Dimensions, H x W x D
21 x 47 x 35 cm (8.75 x 19 x 14 in)
Weight
5.5 kg (12 lb) PPS-2 Mini-Frame System:
mainframe, power supply and CM-1 Control Panel.
PPM-2 Modules not included.
PPS-2 Mini-Frame
microinjection
Cell Biology
The rack mountable PPS-2 Mini-Frame was designed as a less expensive
alternative to the BH-2 for those applications that require pressure
injections only. The PPS-2 is a multichannel pneumatic pumping system,
designed especially for short-term pressure ejection of small quantities of
fluids through micropipettes. The system can operate with up to four PPM2 Pump Modules. Each module can be programmed to its own schedule of
ejection and pause times, coordinated with the other modules. Ejection
and pause times cover a range of 10 to 990 milliseconds with 10
millisecond resolution and 1 to 99 seconds with 1 second resolution.
Continuous and cyclical modes of operation are also available.
System Configuration
The PPS-2 system (Order # W4 65-0606) includes a Control Module and a
power supply. It is pre-wired to accept up to four PPM-2 Pneumatic
Pressure Modules (Order # W4 65-0604) which are ordered separately.
The Control Module CM-1 includes a time clock. Panel mounted pushbuttons as well as TTL electrical inputs are provided to control the
following functions: Cycle Start/Cycle Stop, Trigger (each PPM-2), and
Gate (each PPM-2). In essence, the CM-1 Control Module provides all
necessary signals to operate the sequential and single shot timing for the
installed PPM-2 Pneumatic Pump Modules.
A Self Cycle mode control switch controls independent self timing action of
each of the pneumatic pump modules. The self-timing action permits each
PPM-2 Pump Module to eject and pause for a predetermined period.
Actuating any of the self cycle control switches causes the respective PPM2 Module to be engaged into the self timing mode. The push buttons at the
corresponding trigger/gate terminals initiate the self cycle timing action.
Push-button, and banana jack terminals;
floating input, optically coupled
Application Note:
Working Unit
Mini-Frame, Power Supply, and Control Panel plus four (4)
modules selected from PPM-2 and DP-1
Order #
Product
W4 65-0606 PPS-2 Mini-Frame with Power Supply, Control
Module and NL-952 Power Cord and Manual
W4 65-0604 PPM-2 Pneumatic Pump Module with
OH-01 and IH-01, PPS-2 System Can
Support 1 to 4 Modules
W4 65-0605 DP-1 Dummy Module (to Maintain Timing)
PPS-2 System Can Support 1 to 4 Modules
W4 65-0210 Model SC-01, Tygon Flexible Hose Micropipette
Interface Coupling for Pneumatic (PPM-2) Use
W4 65-0211 Model SC-02, Tygon Flexible Hose Micropipette
Interface Coupling for Current (IP-2)/Pneumatic
(PPM-2) Use
W4 65-0212 Model IH-01, Input Hose 2.7 m (9 ft) Coupling
to PPM-2
W4 65-0213 Model OH-01, Output Hose 2.7 m
(9 ft) Including SC-01 Coupling
W4 65-0214 Model OH-02, Output Hose 2.7 m
(9 ft) Including SC-02 Coupling
W4 65-0215 Model OC-01, Output Cable 2.7 m
(9 ft) with (7) Seven-Pin Lemo Connector
W4 65-0285 Model NL-952, Cable 2 m (6.5 ft) with Lemo
Miniature Connector at One End and Tinned
Leads at Other (Sync. Output or Analog
Input/Output Cable)
286
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microinjection
Harvard Neuro Phore BH-2 System
Micro-Iontophoresis and Micro Injection (continued)
Operating Modes
Ejection Timing and Mode Switch
The sync output provides a TTL pulse that coincides with the eject time.
This output is provided to trigger external devices such as a computer,
event counter, etc.
Specifications
Current Pump
Compliance ±105 V, linear constant current source
Ejection Current
Pulsing controlled by Ejection Timing Mode Switch;
amplitude adjustable by 10-turn ejection control and
range switch from 0 to 50 or 0 to 500 nA; polarity is
selected by polarity switch; accuracy of ±l nA
Ejection Indicator
Red LED lamp indicates Eject time period; green LED
lamp indicates pause time period
Retention Current
Amplitude adjustable by front panel dial from 0 to 50
nA; polarity automatically set opposite to ejection
current polarity, socket (x3)
Analog Input
Lemo miniature receptacle, ground referenced 5
mV/nA; input impedance 100 kΩ , socket (x3)
Analog Output
Lemo miniature receptacle, ground referenced 5
mV/nA, socket (x3)
Sync Output
Lemo miniature receptacle, TTL pulse time incident
with eject pulse
Current and Resistance
Digital Meter Display 3 digits and sign
Metering System
The mode switch provides five push-button controls which include
operations such as cycle, trigger, gate, continuous, and termination.
Cycle Mode
In the cycle mode by virtue of selecting single or recycle operation on the
BM-2 Module an incoming trigger or cycle start push-button will initiate
the current ejection pumping action. In this mode each succeeding Pump
Module is automatically triggered after the pause time of the preceding
event has been completed. Both eject and pause times can be preset to
cover a range from 10 to 990 milliseconds with a 10 millisecond resolution
and 1 to 99 seconds with a 1 second resolution.
Trigger Mode
When the TRIG. switch is energized the eject time interval will be started
by virtue of the incoming trigger pulse applied to the respective inputs on
the BM-2 Balance Module. Eject timing interval can be preset covering a
range from 10 to 990 milliseconds with a 10 millisecond resolution and 1
to 99 seconds with a 1 second resolution.
Gate Mode
When the GATE switch is energized the eject current will be started by
virtue of a gate input signal applied to the respective trigger/gate
terminals on the BM-2 Balance Module. The eject and pause time settings
are not operative in this mode, since the eject time function is slaved to
the duration of the gate input.
Resistance/Current Switch:
Current Mode
Switch in center ‘nA’ position, digital display reads
total current in nA passed through micro-electrode
pipette (sum of retention and ejection current)
Resistance Mode
Switch in either (pos) or (neg) MΩ position, digital
display reads actual electrode barrel resistance in
MΩ derived by passing positive or negative constant
current (50 nA) through electrode pipette
Compliance Exceeded
Digital display will flash whenever electrode barrel
resistance
Indicator
exceeds working range of current pump (i.e., when
electrode resistance times current exceeds
compliance of ±105 V)
Voltage Readout Switch
Depressing switch will cause digital display to read
voltage across pipette
Continuous Mode
When the CONT. switch is energized the ejection pump current is
continuously maintained.
microinjection
Each IP-2 Module includes controls for precise settings of current
magnitude and polarity (retention 0 to 50 nanoamperes, ejection 0 to 500
nanoamperes). The actual current and polarity is continuously displayed
digitally and can be externally monitored at the analog output terminal.
Sync Output
Cell Biology
IP-2 Iontophoresis Pump Module
Termination Mode
When the TERM. switch is energized the output is automatically diverted
from the preparation into an internal ‘dummy load’ (100 MΩ). This
function is particularly useful for testing of possible instability in the
preparation pipette.
Order #
Product
W4 65-0603 IP-2 Iontophoresis Pump Module
Analog Input
The analog input terminal is available to facilitate externally controlled
current pumping action. An external voltage applied to the input will
generate a pumping current at a ratio of 5 millivolts/nanoamperes. This
current will be summated with any preset pump current governed by both
the retention and ejection controls. The combined magnitude and sign of
the summated pumping current is displayed on the digital display of each
corresponding Pump Module. This input can be connected to a computer
D/A converter when external programming is desired.
Analog Output
The analog output terminal provides a buffered voltage which is proportional
in magnitude and polarity to the actual current passed from the current
pump into the pipette. The conversion ratio is 5 mV/nA. This output can be
polygraphically recorded to monitor progress of the experiment.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
287
microinjection
Harvard Neuro Phore BH-2 System
Micro-Iontophoresis and Micro Injection (continued)
PPM-2 Pneumatic Pump Module
Designed specifically for pressure injection of drugs in pharmacological
studies of drug evoked responses (i.e. synaptic discharges, contraction,
etc.) Emphasis has been given to pressure control and regulation (0 to 30
p.s.i.; optional 0 to 10 or 0 to 90 p.s.i.) as well as precise timing. The PPM2 Module is comprised of a precise pressure regulator, digital display,
transducer, and a timing mode switch. It connects to an external pressure
source (such as a compressed bottle of N2) which can be set to provide
continuous or periodic pressure pulses ranging from 0 to 30 p.s.i. Outputs
include (0 to 1 volt) proportional to output pressure as well as a sync pulse
coincident with pressure cycle.
Operating Modes
Ejection Timing and Mode Switch
not operative in this mode, since the eject time function is slaved to the
duration of the gate input.
Continuous Mode
Eject pump action is continuously maintained when CONT. switch is energized.
Termination Mode
When the TERM. switch is energized, the output pressure is automatically
diverted from the preparation. This function is particularly useful for
setting up the desired pressure range and timing while preventing
ejection of any drug from the pipette.
Specifications
microinjection
Source Gas
Air or Nitrogen recommended (no explosive or
combustible gases)
The mode switch provides five push-button controls which include
operations such as cycle, trigger, gate, continuous, and termination.
Input Pressure
125 p.s.i.g. (7.8 kg/cm2) maximum
Input Filter
5 µm element
Cycle Mode
Output Pressure
0 to 99.9 p.s.i.g. (0 to 7 kg/ cm2), 30 p.s.i. standard
In the cycle mode, after selecting single or recycle operation, the start
push-button will initiate the ejection pumping action. In this mode each
succeeding pump module is automatically triggered after the pause time
of the preceding event has been completed. Both eject and pause times
can be preset to cover a range from 30 to 990 milliseconds with a 10
millisecond resolution and 1 to 99 seconds with a 1 second resolution.
Output Pressure Display
Three decimal digits
Trigger Mode
Cell Biology
When the TRIG. switch is energized the eject time interval will be started
by virtue of an externally applied trigger pulse fed to the respective inputs
on the CM-l control panel. Eject timing intervals can be preset to cover a
range from 30 to 990 milliseconds with a 10 millisecond resolution and 1
to 99 seconds with a 1 second resolution.
Gate Mode
When the GATE switch is energized pumping action will be started by
virtue of a gate input signal applied to the respective trigger/gate
terminals on the CM-l control panel. The eject and pause time settings are
Pressure Pulse Width:
Minimum
30 msec
Maximum
99 sec (990 sec optional)
Gas Input and
Output Couplings
Quick disconnect type
Analog Output
Lemo miniature connector, voltage proportional to
output pressure, 0 to -999 mV full scale in p.s.i.g.
setting; 0 to -700 mV full scale in kg/cm2 setting
Sync Output
Lemo miniature connector TTL pulse, time incident
with output pressure pulse
Eject Time Indicator
Red LED
Pause Time Indicator
Green LED
Order #
Product
W4 65-0604 PPM-2 Pneumatic Pump Module with
Input/Output Hose
7-Barrel Iontophoresis Micropipette
Fully-pulled
Micron tip
Pre-pulled Blank
•
•
•
•
288
Easy filling
Minimal tip resistance
Minimal leakage
Available pre-pulled or fully-pulled
The MS-7P Micropipette has been designed for iontophoretic use as well
as pneumatic ejection of drugs. The standard blank consists of seven
barrels, Pyrex Omegadot tubing, 1.5 mm outer diameter and 1.2 mm inner
diameter, pre-pulled to 2 mm formation as shown. For complete details,
see our Warner Instruments Cell Biology Catalog.
Order #
Model
Micropipettes
W4 65-0207 MS-7PB
Micropipette 7-Barrel, 1.5 mm OD
Borosilicate Glass, Pre-Pulled
Plank, 20 per box
W4 65-0208 MS-7MT
Micropipette 7-Barrel, 1.5 mm OD
Borosilicate Glass, Fully-Pulled
Approx. 20 µm Tip, 10 per box
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Nanoject II
microinjection
Auto Nanoliter Injector
Micromanipulator and
Stand sold separately
⁄2" Ø
1
⁄2" Ø
1
Needs Micromanipulator to attach to Support Stand. Universal adapter
now included for all NJ2’s.
Lower volume (2.3 nl) capability
Positive displacement technology
2.3 to 69.0 nl range of volumes
Minimal vibration
New improved high torque motor
Membrane key pad
Improved micropipette holder
Two speed injection/fill rates
Auto ‘Home’ capability
The Nanoject II is the latest development in the Nanoject family of
microinjectors. One unique features of the Nanoject II is the use of a high
torque motor to provide smooth operation resulting in substantially
reduced tip movement. A new collect configuration holds the micropipette
more securely thereby reducing air infiltration and oil leakage. The twospeed fill/inject mode allows the user to fill and inject at half speed,
facilitating the use of smaller micropipettes. The handling of more viscous
samples is also improved. All of the above factors enhance the precise
delivery of sample.
Automatic
Glass Properties
Softening point 780°C
Glass Dimensions
1.14 x 0.053 mm (0.045 x 0.021 in) (OD x ID)
Injection Speed:
Fast: 46 nl/sec; Slow: 23 nl/sec
Fill Speed:
Fast: 46 nl/sec; Slow: 23 nl/sec
Empty Speed
92 nl/sec
Volume Range
2.3 nl to 69.0 nl
Change Volume
Dip switches #1 to #4
Change Inject Speed
Dip switch #5
Weight
99.2 g (3.5 oz)
Order #
Cell Biology
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Operation
microinjection
Specifications
Product
W4 69-0130* Nanoject II Nanoliter Injector, 115 V, 60 Hz,
US Plug
W4 69-0131* Nanoject II Nanoliter Injector, 230 V, 50 Hz,
European Plug
W4 69-0132* Nanoject II Nanoliter Injector, 230 V, 50 Hz,
UK Plug
Replacement Parts
W4 69-0133
Replacement Glass, 88.9 x 1.14 x 0.053 mm
(3.5 x 0.045 x 0.021 in) (L x OD x ID), Vial of 100
W4 69-0134
Replacement Glass, 177.8 x 1.14 x 0.053 mm
(7 x 0.045 x 0.021 in) (L x OD x ID), Vial of 100
Volumes for the Nanoject II range from 2.3 nl to 69 nl. The smaller tips and
smaller injection volumes of the Nanoject II allow users to perform injections
into other specimens/applications that previously could not be performed.
W4 69-0135
Flared Glass, 90 mm (3.5 in), Vial of 100
W4 69-0136
Standard O-Ring
W4 69-0137
Special Flared O-Ring
Positive displacement technology and the use of precision micropipettes,
eliminate the need for tedious calibration when the viscosity of the sample
changes. Contaminants in the sample do not hinder or change the injection
volume as with some other injectors. An optional universal mounting adapter
provides easy mounting of the Nanoject II to a variety of micromanipulators and
stereotaxic frames.
W4 69-0138
Replacement Wire Plunger
W4 69-0139
Needle, 30 ga x 51 mm (2 in)
W4 69-0142
Universal Mounting Adapter, see above photo
Accessories (Must be ordered separately)
W4 69-0140
Footswitch
W4 69-0141
Support Base
*Universal adapter now included for all NJ2’s
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
289
microinjection
Screw-Actuated Syringes
microinjection
Screw-Actuated Air Syringes
Cell Biology
• For air-assisted microinjection and
microaspiration
• Uncomplicated and easy to use
• Accurate
• Sensitive control
• High suction/pressure
These air-assisted microinjection/microaspiration syringes provide the user
with sensitive control and an extremely low dead-air volume. The capacity
of the syringe is 10 ml. When required, the syringes can be used to
generate high pressure or suction.
The Screw-Actuated Syringe is a small compact unit incorporated into a
heavy circular base. Its convenient dimensions enable it to be
ergonomically positioned next to the control lever of a micromanipulator to
facilitate single-handed operation of both instruments.
The syringe is connected by hard polyethylene tubing to a micropipette,
which in turn, may be fitted to a micromanipulator or positioning device.
Suction/injection is obtained by turning the metal colored actuator screwcontrol on the top of the syringe. The syringe provides a solution to the
problem of capillary action when working with small micropipettes. A
small balance (equilibrating) pressure can be maintained to offset the
effects of capillary action. A conveniently situated release-button on-top
of the screw-control is provided to achieve equilibration.
Order #
Product
W4 69-0105 Screw-Actuated Air Syringe
Screw-Actuated Micrometer Driven
Hamilton Syringe
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ideal for oil-filled injection/aspiration
Easy to use
Hamilton syringe incorporated
Accurate
Sensitive control
Low dead-air volume
High suction/pressure
Easy to exchange or replace the syringe
This screw actuated syringe is a micrometer-actuated syringe mechanism
mounted on a small base. This syringe is for oil/air-assisted microinjections and micro-aspirations. Its compact dimensions enable it to be
ergonomically positioned next to the control lever of a micromanipulator to
facilitate single-handed operation of both instruments.
Suction/injection is achieved by using the rotary-actuator with a fine
micrometer-thread, which has a 15 mm movement range. A 1 ml gastight
Hamilton glass syringe with a Luer-taper is incorporated. A Luer-taper
hypodermic needle is mounted on the taper of the Hamilton syringe. The
syringe is connected by hard polyethylene tubing to a micropipette, which
in turn, may be fitted to a micromanipulator or similar instrument. The 1 ml
Hamilton syringe can be easily exchanged for any other Hamilton 1700
syringe series including the 1000, 500, 200, 100 and 50 µl sizes, visit
www.harvardapparatus.com for complete details.
Order #
Product
W4 69-0107 Screw-Actuated Micrometer Driven
Hamilton Syringe
290
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
PM-8 and PM-4
microinjection
8- and 4-Channel Pressure Injection Systems
Besides programmable timers and counters, there are 16 programmable
and savable injection/perfusion sequences with 32 programmable steps in
each sequence. Each sequence can be repeated continuously or triggered
manually. The interval time between steps can be programmed for
automatic sequential cycle or manual trigger. There are two foot switch
connectors for sequential step trigger and injection trigger. A digital
remote port can be connected to an optional remote key pad or be
controlled by a computer. With exceptional versatility and extremely
precise control, either the PM-4 or 8 is an ideal multi-channel
injection/perfusion engine.
The PM-4 and PM-8 programmable 4 and 8-Channel Pressure Injector
Systems are designed for one to eight channel intracellular injection and
extracellular perfusion. These microinjection and perfusion engines are
especially designed for pharmacological drug testing, molecular biological
DNA, RNA transferring, intracytoplasmic sperm injection and cell
electrophysiological applications.
microinjection
• Multiple function system for micro-injection and
perfusion
• Up to 8 injection/perfusion outputs, one hold cell
output, and one synchronized drain out channel
• Programmable timers, counters, and step
sequences which can be stored for reuse
• Manual control or automatic sequential step cycle
operation
• Front panel display for pressures and
programming information
Combining an advanced micro-controller with precision pneumatic
components, these systems can simultaneously control up to eight
injection micropipettes or eight perfusion vials, one cell holding pipette,
and one drain pipette. The four (PM-4) or eight (PM-8) injection/perfusion
output ports can be controlled separately or combined together to perform
actions such as injection, capillary action balancing, suction or clear up.
The cell holding output port can produce an adjusted gentle suction to
hold a cell, eject a pressure to push a cell, or completely clear the holding
pipette. Another drain output port can simultaneously produce an adjusted
suction to drain and clear out liquid before the next channel microperfusion. The PM-4/8 can deliver different quantity agents and drugs
from picoliters to continuous perfusion. All output pressures and vacuums
can be regulated and can be displayed real-time on the front panel display.
Previous pressure readings can also be recovered on the display for
setting comparison.
Cell Biology
W4 69-0153 8-Channel
Pressure Injection
System
Connection Diagram for Extracellular Micro-Perfusion and Intracellular Micro-Injection Systems
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
291
microinjection
PM-8 and PM-4
8- and 4-Channel Pressure Injection Systems (continued)
Order #
W4 69-0152 4-Channel
Pressure Injection
System
Model
Product
W4 69-0152 PM-4
4-Channel Pressure Injection System
W4 69-0153 PM-8
8-Channel Pressure Injection System
Options and Accessories
microinjection
Cell Biology
292
W4 69-0154 IP-1
Input Tubing with Connector
W4 69-0155 OP-1
Output Tubing with Connector and
4.5 ml Vial
W4 69-0156 OP-2
Output Tubing with Connector only
W4 69-0157 FSW
Footswitch
W4 69-0158 PM-KP
Remote Key Pad
W4 69-0160 RK-2
Rack Mounting Kit with Handles
for PM 4/8
W4 69-0163 PP-7
Pulled Seven Barrel Pipette (each)
Below are the components supplied with each of the Pressure Injection
Systems.
W4 69-0164 PP-4
Pulled Four Barrel Pipette (each)
W4 69-0165 HOLD-1
Holder for Single-Barrel Pipette
Pressure Injection System
Order #
Product
W4 69-0166 HOLD-4
Holder for Four-Barrel Pipette
W4 69-0167 HOLD-7
Holder for Seven-Barrel Pipette
PM-4
Qty.
PM-8
Qty.
W4 69-0154 IP1 Input Tubing with Connector
1
1
W4 69-0156 OP2 Output Tubing with
Connector Only
6
10
W4 69-0157 FSW Foot Switch
1
1
W4 69-0164 PP-4 Pulled 4-Barrel Pipette
1
-
W4 69-0166 HOLD4 Holder for 4-Barrel Pipette
1
-
W4 69-0163 PP-7 Pulled 7-Barrel Pipette
-
1
W4 69-0167 HOLD7 Holder for 7-Barrel Pipette
-
1
-
Power Cord
1
1
-
User’s Manual
1
1
W4 69-0156 Output Tubing with
Connector for use with:
W4 69-0152, see above
W4 69-0153, see above
W4 69-0150, see pages 332-333
W4 69-0151, see pages 332-333
W4 69-0154 Input Tubing with Connector
for use with:
W4 69-0152, see above
W4 69-0153, see above
W4 69-0150, see pages 332-333
W4 69-0151, see pages 332-333
Specifications
Output Channels
Four (PM-4) or eight (PM-8) injection / perfusion
outputs, one synchronized drain out and one cell hold
channel
Input Gas Pressure
30 to 100 p.s.i.
Clearing Pressure
Same as input pressure
Clear Hold Pressure
0 to 3 p.s.i. (regulated)
Injection Pressure
0.05 to 60 p.s.i. (regulated)
Balance Pressure
0.05 to 10 p.s.i. (regulated)
Fill Vacuum
0 to 24 in Hg (regulated)
Hold Vacuum
0 to 30 in of water (regulated)
Drain Vacuum
0 to 30 in of water (regulated)
Repeatability
±0.02 p.s.i.
Display Accuracy
±0.05 p.s.i. for pressure, ±0.2 in for vacuum (< 2 in H2O)
Timer Setting Range
10 msec to 327.67 sec (10 msec resolution for whole
range)
Counter Setting Range
1 to 255
Savable Sequences
16 sequences
Programmable Steps
32 steps for each sequence
Remote Control Ports
DB9 connector for remote key pad, foot switch jack
and BNC for negative TTL trigger, jack connector for
injection foot switch
Signal Output Ports
Eight BNCs for injection signal on output port 1 to 4
Power Consumption
100, 120 or 220 VAC, 35 W
W4 69-0164 and W4 69-0163 Pulled
Pipettes for use with:
W4 69-0152, see above
W4 69-0153, see above
W4 69-0155 Output Tubing with
Connector and 4.5 ml Vial for use with:
W4 69-0152, see above
W4 69-0153, see above
W4 69-0150, see pages 332-333
W4 69-0151, see pages 332-333
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micromanipulators
Micromanipulator Selection Guide
Manipulator Selection Guide Chart
Coarse
Fine
Ratio
Movement
Movement
Adjustment Travel
Resolution Travel
Resolution Mounting
Features/
Options
Order #
Page
Mechanical Manipulators
–
X: 65 mm
X, Y, Z:
Z fine:
Z fine:
Mounting Base
Y: 29 mm
100 µm
2.2 mm
10 µm
0.5 in Rod Clamp Tiltable Arm
Brass Construction W4 72-6030
Z: 65 mm
–
X: 37 mm
X, Y, Z:
X: 10 mm
max, Y, Z:
100 µm
max
X: 10 µm
296
W4 72-6031
296
W4 72-6032
296
W4 72-6033
296
10, 12 mm, 0.5 in Single
W4 64-0056
295
Rod Clamp
W4 64-0055
295
Electrode
X: 37 mm
X, Y, Z:
X: 10 mm
max, Y, Z:
100 µm
max
X: 10 µm
20 mm max
1:15 to 1:150
X: 37 mm
–
Y: 20 mm
Z fine:
–
3 mm
10, 12 mm, 0.5 in Dual Tool/
W4 60-0569
295
Rod Clamp
Electrode
W4 60-0570
295
Tilting Base
Holder
Mounting Base
Joystick
0.5 in Rod Clamp
W4 60-0582
300
W4 60-0583
300
W4 60-0594
301
Z: 25 mm
–
–
–
X, Y, Z:
X, Y, Z:
Integrated 25°
Large Spindle
25 mm
5 µm
Tilting Base
Knobs, High
max
Mass for Stability
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Cell Biology
–
micromanipulators
20 mm max
293
micromanipulators
Micromanipulator Selection Guide
Manipulator Selection Guide Chart (continued)
Coarse
Fine
Ratio
Movement
Movement
Adjustment Travel
Resolution Travel
Resolution Mounting
Features/
Options
Order #
Page
7 mm Clamping
DC Motor-
W4 73-0003
303
Bolt Parallel to
Controlled
W4 73-0011
303
Motorized Manipulators
–
–
–
10 mm
0.5 µm
max
Working Axis
–
–
–
25 mm
1 µm
max
12 mm Clamping DC MotorFitting, 10 mm
Controlled
Clamping Width
–
X: 37 mm
X, Y, Z:
X, Y, Z:
X, Y, Z:
10, 12 mm, 0.5 in Can use either
W4 60-0571
298
max, Y, Z:
100 µm
100 µm
0.5 µm
Rod Clamp
Joystick or Push-
W4 60-0572
298
Tilting Base
Button Controller
W4 60-0574
298
W4 60-0600
298
W4 60-0601
298
20 mm max
micromanipulators
–
–
–
Cell Biology
X, Y:
X, Y:
Integrated 25°
Velocity of ≤36 mm/ W4 60-0586
301
25 mm
1 µm*
Tilting Base
sec, 40,000 steps/
W4 60-0588
301
301
max
–
–
–
µm revolution
X, Y, Z:
X, Y, Z:
Integrated 25°
Velocity of ≤36 mm/ W4 60-0590
25 mm
1 µm*
Tilting Base
sec, 40,000 steps/
max
–
–
–
X, Y, Z;
25 mm
max
W4 60-0592
µm revolution
25 nm
–
Designed for
Electrophysiology
Applications
W4 64-1731
W4 64-1732
W4 64-1733
297
297
297
* In conjunction with MCL Controller 0.01 µm Resolution
294
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micromanipulators
Standard Manual Control
Classic design at a reasonable price
of travel. Two adjustments are provided. The coarse adjustment is
graduated in 0.1 mm increments while the fine adjustment provides 10
mm of travel with precision positioning graduated in 0.01 mm increments.
A unique and valuable feature of these standard manual control
micromanipulators is that the three control knobs are located in a single
plane. This positioning permits one-handed control of a single instrument,
without taking the operator’s eyes from the microscope. It also allows several
micromanipulators to be closely positioned side-by-side with all control knobs
easily accessible. They are available for both right- and left-handed use.
Tool/Electrode Holder
Standard Manual Control
Micromanipulator
with 2 Tool/Electrode
Holders,
Micropipette
not included
• 20 mm of travel in lateral (Y-axis) and vertical
(Z-axis) graduated in 0.1 mm increments
• 37 mm of travel in probe direction (X-axis)
graduated in 0.1 mm increments plus 10 mm of
travel with fine positioning in 0.01 mm
increments
• All three control knobs located in a single plane
for one-handed operation and close positioning
of several instruments side-by-side
• For use with microscope magnifications up to
250x
These micromanipulators have three stacked, stainless steel roller
bearing raceways providing movement in the X, Y and Z axes. Rack and
pinion drives minimize backlash and provide fast positioning and long life.
The lateral (Y-axis) and vertical (Z-axis) planes each have 20 mm of travel
graduated in 0.1 mm increments. The probe direction (X-axis) has 37 mm
Each micromanipulator is supplied complete with one or two tool/
electrode holders. The second holder has two fine controls that allow
movement of 8 mm in both the lateral (Y) and probe (X) direction
independent of the micromanipulator. Two additional fine controls allow
this second tool/electrode holder to be tilted and swiveled.
micromanipulators
W4 60-0570 Left-Handed
Standard Manual Control
Micromanipulator
with 1 Tool/Electrode
Holder,
Micropipettes
not included
Its rigidity and scope make it ideal for any application. For repetitive
work, where a number of stations may be required, the Standard
Manual Control Micromanipulator with its numerous options generally
meets any requirement. To hold freely mobile cells or manipulate
larger cells, the Micromanipulator with Mechanical Joystick, see
page 300, is flexible yet stable.
Tilt Base or Clamp Mounting
Each micromanipulator is offered with a choice of either a tilt base or a clamp
to mount the micromanipulator on a 13 mm (1⁄2 in) OD vertical rod. Other
clamps are available as accessories. For a selection of stands with 13 mm (1⁄2
in) OD rods, see the Stronghold Clamps, Stands and Lattices on the Harvard
Apparatus website: www.harvardapparatus.com. The tilt base permits the
micromanipulator to be tilted 80° from the vertical. The manipulators with
clamp mount are supplied with a 1⁄2 in. to 10 mm bushing which permits
mounting on a magnetic base, see page 304.
Cell Biology
Micromanipulators are recognized as classic pieces of research
equipment. How they work is precision engineering. How they ‘feel’ is
art. These micromanipulators have set the standard worldwide for
decades. They are the most popular and widely used. Selecting the
correct micromanipulator for the application is important. If you are
buying one instrument for general laboratory use, then select the
Ultraprecise Micromanipulator, see page 301.
Standard Manual Control Micromanipulator
One Holder
Two Holders
Right-Handed
Clamp
W4 64-0056
W4 60-0569
Tilt Base
W4 64-0058
–
Clamp
W4 64-0055
W4 60-0570
Tilt Base
W4 64-0057
–
Order #
Product
W4 69-1066
10 mm Rod Clamp, for use with Magnetic Bases
W4 69-1067
12 mm Rod Clamp, for use with Magnetic Bases
W4 60-0604
Tool Holder, pkg. of 3
W4 64-1652
Rod Clamp, 1⁄2 in
Left-Handed
W4 64-1652WB Rod Clamp, 1⁄2 in with 1⁄2" to 10 mm bushing
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
295
micromanipulators
Dovetail Slide Micromanipulators
For applications requiring a robust holder
micromanipulators
Electrode Holder not included.
Retangular base (W4 72-6034) and
10c mounting ring bracket (W4 726051) need to purchase separately
Cell Biology
• Brass dovetail slide construction – strong and
durable
• Available with fixed or tiltable X-axis arm
• Stable probe clamp allows for firm hold of 1⁄4 to
1⁄2 inch probe, rod or electrode
• Available for right- or left-handed use
Manufactured from brass, these Dovetail Slide Micromanipulators are
significantly more durable, and hold greater weight without slippage or
drift, than any ball bearing slide micromanipulator available.
Micromanipulators are available with a fixed or a tiltable X axis arm. The
fixed arm version has the X axis locked at precisely 90°. The tilt arm
version can be rotated to any desired angle and securely locked.
The dovetail slides are driven by rack and pinion mechanisms for rapid
positioning to a resolution of 0.1 mm on the coarse vertical (Z) and lateral
(Y) drives. The probe direction (X) drive is also graduated in 0.1 mm
increments, and has an anti-backlash worm drive for more precise control
of movement.
The fine drive, graduated in 0.01 mm increments, is located on the base
of the Z axis. This is especially useful where the specimen is in a Petri
dish or microtiter tray. The probe holder allows mounting of any rod or
pipette, even up to 1⁄2 inch diameter. These micromanipulators can be
mounted directly on several bases via the most secure dovetail slide
mount. Alternatively, a mounting ring bracket is available, which allows
mounting onto any 1⁄2 inch rod.
296
The adjustable probe clamp allows firm hold of the widest range of probe
and electrode diameters, providing absolutely steadfast grip of any probe,
rod or electrode holder from 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 inches.
Rectangular base and mounting ring bracket must be purchased
separately.
Specifications
Axis
Range
Resolution
X
65 mm
0.1 mm
Y
29 mm
0.1 mm
Z
65 mm
0.1 mm
Z fine
2.2 mm
0.01 mm
Weight (without base)
1.25 kg
Order #
Product
W4 72-6030
Right-Handed Fixed Axis
W4 72-6031
Right-Handed Tilt Arm
W4 72-6032
Left-Handed Fixed Axis
W4 72-6033
Left-Handed Tilt Arm
W4 72-6034
Rectangular Base
W4 72-6051
Mounting Bracket*
*Rectangular base not included
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
NEW SM-3
micromanipulators
Magnetic base not included.
The SM-3 is a high-resolution, three axes motorized micromanipulator
featuring a compact design, 25 nm resolution, and a low noise controller.
Linear amplifiers, used to drive the stepper motors, eliminate stray
electromagnetic radiation, a key feature for patch clamp and noise
sensitive electrophysiology applications.
The mechanical design of the SM-3 manipulator is compact and is
optimized for direct attachment to a microscope stage. The x-slide may be
tilted by 90 degrees making precise positioning of the tool assembly
simple and direct. Additionally, an integral swivel device allows the tool
holder to tilt to one side permitting rapid exchange and easy cleaning of
micro tools.
Stepper motors with 40,000 steps per revolution, and single steps of
25 nm, enable vibration-free operation with no backlash. Full travel
range is 25 mm in all three axes, eliminating the need for a course
manual adjustment.
The included controller features a 4 line display, and includes a front
panel switch enabling stand-alone operation via joystick. The controller
comes complete with user-friendly WinCommander software, a joystick,
an RS-232 interface cable, and motor cables. The software can store up
to 999 position coordinates for automated operation. For users wishing to
write their own software, a complete set of function commands and a DLL
library are included.
Specifications
Resolution
25 nm/step 40,000 steps/revolution
Travel range
25 mm each axis
Control method
Joystick, RS-232/software
Maximum speed
4 mm/sec
Power Input
120 to 260 VAC switch selectable
Weight Micromanipulator
1.400 Kg
Controller
3.1Kg
Dimensions Micromanipulator
(H x W x D)
106 x 135 x 135 mm
(4.1 x 5.3 x 5.3 in)
Controller
(H x W x D)
89.9 x 25.4 x 228.5 mm
(3.5 x 1 x 9 in)
Order #
Model
Description
W4 64-1731
SM-3
Compact high resolution three
axis motorized micromanipulator
with MCL3 controller
W4 64-1732
MCL3
Controller for SM-3
micromanipulator Includes
RS-232 interface, cables,
software, and joystick
W4 64-1733
SM-3MO
Compact high resolution
three axis motorized
micromanipulator without
controller
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Cell Biology
micromanipulators
High Resolution Motorized Micromanipulator
297
micromanipulators
Standard Motorized Control Micromanipulators
Hands-off control for fine positioning
W4 60-0571 Standard Motorized
Control Micromanipulator with
W4 60-0577 Push Button Control
Unit (Tool Holder Included)
micromanipulators
Cell Biology
• Requires one of two control units offered on the
facing page.
• Available with choice of:
– 1- or 2-tool/electrode holders
– Tilt base or clamp mounting
– Right- or left-handed use
• 20 mm of travel in lateral (Y-axis) and vertical
(Z-axis) graduated in 0.1 mm increments
• 37 mm of travel in probe direction (x-axis)
graduated in 0.1 mm increments
• All three control knobs located in single plane for
ease of operation and close positioning of several
instruments side-by-side
• For use with microscope magnifications up to
250x
• Positioning in sub-micron range is possible
• Smallest step size is 0.5 µm
• Micromanipulator does not have to be touched
for fine adjustment
• Flexible motor coupling ensures zero vibration of
probe during movement
This Standard Motorized Micromanipulator has the same manual coarse
adjustment for each of the three axes graduated in 0.1 mm increments:
X-axis 37 mm of travel; Y- and Z-axes 20 mm of travel each. On each of
the three axes there is installed an additional fine adjustment slide with
built-in miniature DC-motors rotating micrometer spindles. This motorized
fine adjustment has 10 mm (2-1/2 in) of travel on each axis and the scales
read to 0.01 mm. (Note: For operation, these motorized micromanipulators
require one of the control units listed on the facing page.)
298
Detail of Fine
Adjustment Control
These micromanipulators provide ‘hands off’ control for fine adjustments.
Each axis has a controller motor with a flexible coupling to the micrometer
spindle which ensures that the probe can be moved with zero vibration.
They are available with one or two tool/electrode holders. The
micromanipulator with two tool/electrode holders has a swing-in/swingout platform. This feature permits the entire x-axis platform with tool
holder to be swung out to the side for rapid and easy exchange and
cleaning of tools, capillaries, electrodes, etc. After exchange/cleaning of
tools, the platform swings back to the prior working position without
losing time for readjustment. The micromanipulators with this X-axis tilt
should always be mounted in the vertical position to make best use of the
tilting fine control.
Standard Motorized Control Micromanipulator
* Two
One
with X-Axis
Electrode
Platform
Holder
Swing-Out
Right-Handed
Clamp Base
W4 60-0571
W4 60-0600
Clamp Base
W4 60-0572
(20 x 12 x 11 cm)
W4 60-0601
Tilt Base
–
Left-Handed
W4 60-0574
Note: These Standard Motorized Control Micromanipulators require one of the control
units described on page 299.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micromanipulators
Control Units for Motorized Manipulators
Hands-off control for fine positioning
Choice of two control units with
increasing complexity
• Push button control unit
• 3-direction joystick control unit
3-Direction Joystick Control Unit
Push Button Control Unit
• For either ‘step’ or continuous motion
• Simple push button control
Movement, forward or back, in each of three axes is controlled by six push
buttons. The amount of time the button is depressed determines the type
of movement that occurs. By pressing a button for less than 1 second, a
‘step’ movement is provided. Pressing the button for more than 1 second
activates continuous movement until the button is released.
This control unit has two control knobs: one for ‘step’ size and one for
continuous motion speed. The ‘Step’ size knob ranges from 0.5 to 10
microns graduated in 0.5 micron increments. The continuous motion knob
provides speeds up to 0.2 mm/sec. The ‘step’ size and speed are equal for
all three axes. Backlash on reversing directions has been essentially
eliminated with this control unit. At each reversal an additional current
pulse compensates almost completely for gear/spindle slack. This is
particularly important in the step mode as it eliminates ‘dead steps’ when
the motor turns but the micromanipulator does not move. For use on either
115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Order #
• Provides simultaneous movement in three axes
• Permits easy placement of probe within accuracy
of 2 or 3 µm
Cell Biology
micromanipulators
W4 60-0577 Push Button
Control Unit
This control unit permits control of movement in three directions
simultaneously. The speed and direction of forward or backward
movement is regulated by the degree of displacement of the joystick from
the central null position. The third axis of simultaneous movement is
obtained by rotating the joystick handle. For use on either 115/230 VAC,
50/60 Hz. Supplied with a screened cable. Joystick requires W4 60-0577
for operation.
Order #
Product
W4 60-0581 3-Direction Joystick Control Unit
W4 60-0580 Replacement Screened Cable
W4 60-0604 Tool Holder, pkg. of 3
W4 69-1066 10 mm Rod Clamp, for use with Magnetic Bases
W4 69-1067 12 mm Rod Clamp, for use with Magnetic Bases
Product
W4 60-0577 Push Button Control Unit
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
299
Joystick
micromanipulators
Micromanipulator Joystick
Simple, multi-dimensional control
micromanipulators
Cell Biology
• Joystick reduction gear ratio from 1:15 to 1:150
• Fine positioning on Z-axis (vertical) gives 3 mm
(0.12 in) of movement per revolution
• Lever tips the tool quickly for such actions as
hanging a petri dish and the preset stop returns
tool tip to focus plane
• Stop screw prevents damaging probe tip
• Probe holder tilts to 90°
• Available for right- or left-handed use
With this very sensitive mechanical joystick micromanipulator, motion,
even in the micron range, is possible. This micromanipulator is so stable
and strong that it can accommodate even piezo-steppers. Joystick
micromanipulators provide movement of probes that are direct reductions
of the speed and direction of the hand movement. Under the microscope,
the probe appears to move directly with the hand.
Typical applications for the Joystick micromanipulator are positioning of
holding pipettes, to grab and hold freely mobile cells, or the manipulation
of larger cells. The joystick drives the probe in the X (probe) and Y
(horizontal) directions. The reduction of the joystick travel relative to the
hand may be adjusted from 1:15 to 1:150. The travel of the joystick ranges
from 0.35 to 4 mm (0.014 to 0.16 in) depending on the reduction gear ratio
being employed.
The Z-axis also has a fine movement with a reduction gear ratio of 1:10
relative to the coarse movement. This fine movement is operated by a
further knob on the Z-axis providing 3 mm (0.12 in) of movement per
300
revolution. The Z-axis has a lever on the coarse adjust which enables the
operator to lift the tool tip quickly for such operations as changing a petri
dish. A preset stop ensures that the tool tip will return to the previous
focusing plane when again lowered. The stop screw prevents the probe
from being inadvertently broken by being driven into the slide or dish. The
stop screw also prevents downward drift of the micromanipulator so that
the pipette or electrode may be left in a stable position over a long period
of time. The probe holder may be tilted up to 90°.
This joystick micromanipulator is offered in right- or left-handed versions.
It is also offered with a mounting clamp for a 13 mm (1⁄2 in) OD vertical rod
or with a wide table clamp, when particularly stable mounting is required.
Joystick Micromanipulator Coarse Positioning
Axis
Travel
X (probe)
37 mm (1.45 in)
Y (horizontal)
20 mm (0.79 in)
Z (vertical)
25 mm (1 in)
Order #
Product
W4 60-0582 Right-Handed Joystick Micromanipulator with
Mounting Clamp for 13 mm (0.5 in) Rod
W4 60-0583 Left-Handed Joystick Micromanipulator with
Mounting Clamp for 13 mm (0.5 in) Rod
W4 60-0604 Tool Holder, pkg. of 3
W4 69-1066 10 mm Rod Clamp, for use with Magnetic Bases
W4 69-1067 12 mm Rod Clamp, for use with Magnetic Bases
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micromanipulators
Ultraprecise Micromanipulators
For accurate, reproducable, and precise positioning
These ultraprecise micromanipulators have the mass, 6 kg (13.2 lb),
and solid workmanship to support the most precise movement with a
minimum of hand-transmitted vibration, backlash or drift.
The instrument can be used alone or can serve as an ideal mount
for even more precise microdrives. For ultimate precision the
Ultraprecise Motorized Control
Micromanipulator
ultraprecise micromanipulator is available with motorized control on
either two or three axes for essentially vibration-free steps as small
as 0.01 mm.
• Available with manual control or
motorized control
W4 60-0594 Ultraprecise Manual Control
Micromanipulator, Micropipette Not Included
Cell Biology
The movement can be programmed on a thumb wheel switch and is started
by a press button. Alternatively, advance and retraction may be controlled
by manual operation of buttons. A return button causes the probe to be
retracted to the zero position. The Motorized Controller is available with or
without a display. The Controller with Display monitors the location of the
probe on a six digit LED counter. A clear button resets the position to zero.
Movement may also be made by joystick. These joystick movements are
also monitored and may be both displayed on the controller and read via
the RS-232 interface. The Controller may be used either alone or computer
driven via the RS-232 interface. Power 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
micromanipulators
This ultraprecise motorized control micromanipulator is offered either with
stepper motors on two axes or on all three axes. These motors are controlled
by a precision controller that is supplied with the instrument. The same
micrometers are used, as with the manual version, with a travel of 25 mm (1
in). The controller provides fast motor speed of 9 revolutions/sec which
allows a maximum velocity of 36 mm/sec. Speed is infinitely variable to a
slowest speed of 40,000 steps per revolution which corresponds to 0.01 µm
per step. Only by these extremely small single steps can an operator be
assured of essentially vibration-free movement. The controller works in a
vector mode, that is, the target coordinates are approached directly in a
straight line from the starting point. In all modes there are end stop switches.
Ultraprecise Motorized Control Micromanipulator
With Stepper Motors
Ultraprecise Manual Control
Micromanipulator
The base of the manual micromanipulator is in keeping with the mass and
stability of the entire instrument. It is 14 x 14 cm (5-1/2 x 5-1/2 in), has a
three point rest and is bored for four M6 bolts. The large diameter
micrometer spindles on each axis have fine adjustment only with 25 mm
(1 in) of travel that can be read direct to 5 µm and interpolated to a 1 µm
positioning resolution.
Controller
On 2 Axes
On 3 Axes
With Display
W4 60-0586
W4 60-0590
Without Display W4 60-0588
W4 60-0592
Order #
Product
W4 60-0594 Ultraprecise Manual Control Micromanipulator
W4 60-0604 Tool Holder, pkg. of 3
W4 69-1066 10 mm Rod Clamp, for use with Magnetic Bases
W4 69-1067 12 mm Rod Clamp, for use with Magnetic Bases
The entire micromanipulator can be tilted forward up to 25° so that cells
can be penetrated along the axis of one of the drives. The same locking
screw that controls the tilt also provides coarse height adjustment. The
probe holder has multiple locking swivels allowing it to be positioned at
any angle relative to the X, Y or Z axes.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
301
micromanipulators
HSE-HA Microdrive Controller 864
Hands-off control for precise positioning
Specifications
Operating Mode
Pulse width modulation under microprocessor control
Accuracy
Real information on resolution obtainable, positioning
accuracy, compensation of play and min/max
displacement speed cannot be provided for controller
alone; these are affected largely by drive mechanics,
loading, sliding and sticking friction in guides,
operating position, and manufacturing tolerances
Motor Voltage
10 to 15 V DC (depending on mains supply unit used)
Motor Current
Nominally 100 mA
Overload Protection
Output current is monitored continuously to protect
drive mechanics and motor; switch-off limit can be
adapted by trimmer potentiometer to suit individual
micrometer drive used
Continuous Operating
Mode
Manual displacement proportional to movement of
joystick in IN or OUT direction
Stepping Operating Mode Step-wise displacement by amount set on STEP
BS4DTH potentiometer
micromanipulators
Cell Biology
302
Fast Mode
Changes displacement speed for fast movement of
micrometer drive
Backlash Compensation
Backlash in gearing is compensated by means of
additional displacement pulse on change of direction;
pulse length can be adjusted to individual mechanism
• Single-axis motorized micrometer drive controller
• Alternative to hydraulically-operated micro drive
Monitor LEDs
Brightness-modulated indicating LED for IN and OUT
directions to indicate control voltage produced
Beep
Short audible signal when triggering pulse in stepping
mode or error message on over-current switch-off
The HSE-HA Microdrive Controller Type 864 is a single-axis control unit
with microprocessor control for operating motorized micrometer drives
(vernier controls) with DC motor. It has been specially developed to meet
the requirements in physiological and pharmacological research. It is
ideally suitable as control unit for the remote operation and vibration-free
movement of microelectrodes or capillaries, e.g. in intracellular potential
recording, patch clamp experiments or stereotaxic investigations in the
brain. When used with either the micrometer drive HSE-HA 864/1 or
864/2, see page 303, the Microdrive Controller thus represents a
complete alternative to hydraulic micro drives which have now become
very expensive. Apart from its compact size, similar to a remote control
for a TV set, a special feature is the combination of continuous and
stepping linear operation. In the continuous mode the micrometer drive is
operated by the joystick shift in the direction IN or OUT. The drive speed
is proportional to the displacement of the joystick. In the switch mode the
micrometer drive is moved by the joystick either IN or Out by a preset
step. The size of the step can be adjusted continuously with the STEP
BS4DTH potentiometer from ~0.5 µm to approx. 0.1 mm per step. This
operating mode is particularly useful when advancing glass
microelectrodes into the cell membrane for intracellular potential
recording. In order to reduce interference emission to a minimum, e.g. in
the input circuit of a microelectrode amplifier, special attention has been
paid in the design of the instrument to good electrical de-coupling and
screening. The system consists of the Microdrive Controller 864, mains
adapter, ground cable, foil-screened connecting cable for micrometer drive
and operating instructions.
Supply
suit
230 V AC (115 V AC) through external mains adapter to
local supply, or directly by 12-15 V DC or AC, 150 mA
Dimensions, W x H x L
45 x 130 x 70 mm (1.8 x 5.1 x 2.8 in)
Weight
250 g (8.8 oz)
Note: The motorized micrometer drive required for operation is not included with the
controller and has to be ordered additionally, e.g. HSE Type 864/1 or Type 864/2.
Order #
Product
W4 73-0000 Microdrive Controller 864, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
W4 73-0001 Microdrive Controller 864, 220 VAC, 50 Hz
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
micromanipulators
Microdrive 864/1 and 864/2
Hands-off control for precise positioning
The motorized micrometer drive Type 864/1 is based on the motor X axis
of the long-established micromanipulator DC-3K. Together with the HSEHA Microdrive Controller Type 864 it permits remotely controlled
displacement of microelectrodes or capillaries, e.g. in intracellular
potential recording, patch clamp experiments or stereotaxic investigations
in the brain. It thus represents a complete alternative to hydraulic micro
drives which have now become very expensive. The mechanism is based
on a conventional micrometer screw with a displacement of 10 mm. The
micrometer scale is visible and permits reading to 10 µm. The drive is
powered by a flange-mounted DC motor with gearbox. The micrometer
drive slider moves on a precision crossed-roller guide.
The excellent rolling properties of the guide ensure absence of sticking
and sliding friction, and therefore no stick-slip effect, so that this design is
ideally suitable for precision displacement systems. The micrometer drive
is mounted at its back through a 7 mm dia. mounting bolt parallel to the
working axis. The drive can therefore be mounted e.g. on the non-remotecontrol micromanipulator MM-3 in place of the microelectrode holder.
Specifications
Spindle
Precision micrometer
Displacement Range
10 mm
Resolution
2 µm
Drive
DC motor (12 V, 100 mA nom. current)
Gearbox
Spur gearing; compensation of gearing backlash is through
backlash correction setting of HSE Microdrive Controller
Type 864
Connection Cable
Foil-screened cable with moulded Mini-DIN plug suitable
for HSE Microdrive Controller Type 864 (approx. 1.60 m
long)
Scale
According to displacement, 0 to 10 mm, reading accuracy 10
µm
Case
Rigid aluminium, black anodized
Mounting
On back, offset 7 mm clamping bolt parallel to working axis
The motorized micrometer drive Type 864/2 offers excellent displacement
characteristics, as required e.g. for inserting glass microelectrodes during
intracellular measurement. Together with the control unit (HSE-HA
Microdrive Controller Type 864) the Microdrive Type 864/2 represents a
complete alternative to previous hydraulic micro controls for the remote
operation and vibration-free insertion of the microelectrode into the cell
membrane. In addition to the compact construction, a special feature is
the backlash-free circulating-ball spindle and the limit switch built into the
mechanism. The circulating-ball spindle requires no maintenance and
operates virtually without friction, unlike a micrometer spindle with sliding
bearing. Freedom from backlash is achieved through the use of factoryselected balls and is maintained through a very long operating life.
Absence of sliding friction inside the circulating-ball spindle ensures
freedom from the so-called stick-slip effect. As a result the mechanism
accurately follows even the slightest displacement settings.
Specifications
Spindle Drive
Hardened and ground circulating-ball spindle,
freedom from axial play through use of selected balls
Resolution
~1 µm
Maximum Loading
in both directions 50 N
Displacement Range
25 mm (50 and 75 mm options also available)
Bi-Directional Repeatability ±2 µm
Uni-Directional Repeatability ±0.1 µm
Drive
DC motor with flanged gearbox (12 V, 170 mA nom.
current)
Gearbox
76:1, with backlash (optionally without backlash);
backlash compensation normally through backlash
correction adjustment of HSE Microdrive Controller
Type 864
Connection Cable
Foil-screened cable with moulded Mini-DIN plug
suitable for HSE Microdrive Controller Type 864
(approx. 1.60 m L)
Limit Switch
To protect drive unit, wired internally, with evaluation
of displacement direction
Scale
To suit displacement, 0 to 25 mm
Dimensions (H x W x D) 112 x 25 x 32 cm (4.4 x 1 x 1.3 in), sizes without fitted
microelectrode holder and mounting bolt
Case
Rigid aluminium, black anodized
Mounting
Clamping fitting 12 mm D and 10 mm clamping width
Weight
Dimensions
Length 196 mm, motor case D. 20 mm
Order #
320 g (11.3 oz)
Product
W4 73-0003 DC Microdrive Type 864/1
micromanipulators
• Resolution down to 2 µm
Cell Biology
HSE-HA Microdrive 864/1
•HSE-HA Microdrive 864/2
Perfect for intracellular recording
Spindle Connection
M6 x 0.5 mm, 6 mm deep
Weight
360 g (12.7 oz)
Order #
Product
W4 73-0011 DC Microdrive Type 864/2
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
303
micromanipulators
Magnetic Bases
W4 69-0225
W4 69-0226
W4 69-0227
W4 69-0230
W4 69-0229
• Holds with powerful magnetic force
• Perfect for use with micromanipulators
• Easy on-off control lever
W4 69-0237
W4 69-0231
W4 69-0234
micromanipulators
Magnetic bases offer a convenient way to mount various tools such as
micromanipulators in various positions near to your working site. The easy
to use on-off control lever allows for easy placement of the magnetic base
in the off position. When the control knob is moved to the on position the
magnet is engaged and a powerful magnet field holds the magnetic base
(and tool) securely in place.
Cell Biology
A wide variety of models are available with varying rod sizes, mounting
holes and magnetic base mounts to meet every need. When combined
with our line of lightweight breadboards, see page 242, it provides a
configurable platform for all of your positioning needs. Other
configurations of bases are available, please call our Technical Sales
Department for details.
W4 69-0233
Order #
W4 69-0232
Product
W4 69-0235 Sub Pole, 10 x 165 mm (D x L)
W4 69-0236 Sub Pole, 12 x 165 mm (D x L)
W4 69-1066 10 mm Rod Clamp
W4 69-1067 12 mm Rod Clamp
304
Magnetic Bases
Base
Order #
Width
Length
W4 69-0225
50 mm
58 mm
W4 69-0226
50 mm
W4 69-0227
W4 69-0229
W4 69-0230
Height
Main Pole
Diameter Length
1st Sub Pole
Diameter Length
2nd Sub Pole
Diameter Length
Hold Force
55 mm
12 mm
176 mm
10 mm
165 mm
–
–
800 N
58 mm
55 mm
12 mm
194 mm
10 mm
165 mm
–
–
800 N
50 mm
58 mm
55 mm
14 mm
178 mm
12 mm
165 mm
–
–
800 N
50 mm
73 mm
55 mm
20 mm
178 mm
14 mm
165 mm
12 mm
130 mm
1000 N
50 mm
58 mm
55 mm
16 mm
315 mm, flex with holder for 8 mm rod
800 N
Magnetic Holders
Holder
Order #
Width
Length
Height
Tapped Hole
Mounting Screw Holes
Diameter Thread Depth Qty. Diameter Depth
Span
Hold Force
W4 69-0231
50 mm
58 mm
55 mm
M8
1.25
7
–
–
–
–
800 N
W4 69-0232
45 mm
45 mm
20 mm
M8
1.25
6
4
M6
6
25
65 N
W4 69-0233
65 mm
65 mm
20 mm
M8
1.25
6
8
M4
6
25
200 N
W4 69-0234
90 mm
90 mm
20 mm
M8
1.25
6
8
M4
6
25
250 N
W4 69-0237
50 mm
73 mm
55 mm
M8
1.25
7
–
–
–
–
1000 N
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
E Series
E-Series Electrode Holders
ERW-FxxN
E45-MxxP
E45-FxxN
Cell Biology
ESW-MxxP
microelectrode holders
Microelectrode holders for every application and manufacturer
ESP-FxxN
•
•
•
•
•
Intracellular recording
Extracellular recording
Iontophoresis
Ported or vented versions
Compatible with MHH-25 holder
ERP-MxxP
E Series
Specifications
Applications include intracellular and extracellular recording,
iontophoresis and ion specific measurements. They are available with
choice of body style and electrical coupling and may be specified with or
without a port or vent (see accompanying chart). The holders are used
with microelectrode amplifiers that have either a 2 mm pin or 2 mm jack
headstage connector. Amplifier headstages with the BNC connector will
use a Q Series holder.
Body Material
Acrylic, 6.3 mm diameter
Body Styles
Straight, 45°, and 90°
Connectors
2 mm Pin or 2 mm Jack
Coupling
Ag Wire or Ag-AgCl Pellet
Port
2 mm diameter Polycarbonate
Vent
0.8 mm diameter Hole
Standard Glass Sizes
1.0, 1.2, 1.5 and 2.0 mm
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
305
microelectrode holders
E Series
E Series Straight Body Holders
E-SERIES Straight Body Holders
Order #
Wire/Pellet Connector
Port
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
W4 64-0992
Pellet
No
1.0
ESP-M10N
W4 64-0993
1.2
ESP-M12N
W4 64-0994
1.5
ESP-M15N
W4 64-1260
2.0
ESP-M20N
1.0
ESP-M10P
W4 64-0996
1.2
ESP-M12P
W4 64-0997
1.5
ESP-M15P
W4 64-0998
2.0
ESP-M20P
1.0
ESP-F10N
W4 64-0981
1.2
ESP-F12N
W4 64-0982
1.5
ESP-F15N
W4 64-0983
2.0
ESP-F20N
1.0
ESP-F10P
W4 64-0985
1.2
ESP-F12P
W4 64-0986
1.5
ESP-F15P
2 mm Pin
W4 64-0995
Yes
microelectrode holders
W4 64-0980
2 mm Jack
W4 64-0984
No
Yes
Cell Biology
W4 64-0987
2.0
ESP-F20P
1.0
ESW-M10N
W4 64-1012
1.2
ESW-M12N
W4 64-1013
1.5
ESW-M15N
2.0
ESW-M20N
1.0
ESW-M10P
W4 64-1016
1.2
ESW-M12P
W4 64-1017
1.5
ESW-M15P
W4 64-1018
2.0
ESW-M20P
W4 64-1011
Wire
2 mm Pin
No
W4 64-1014
W4 64-1015
306
Yes
port
port
port
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
E Series
E Series Straight Body Holders (continued)
E SERIES-Straight Body Holders (continued)
Port
W4 64-0999
Wire
No
2 mm Jack
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
1.0
ESW-F10N
W4 64-1000
1.2
ESW-F12N
W4 64-1001
1.5
ESW-F15N
2.0
ESW-F20N
1.0
ESW-F10P
W4 64-1004
1.2
ESW-F12P
W4 64-1005
1.5
ESW-F15P
W4 64-1006
2.0
ESW-F20P
W4 64-1002
W4 64-1003
Yes
W4 64-1007
1.0
ESW-F10V
W4 64-1008
Vent*
1.2
ESW-F12V
W4 64-1009
1.5
ESW-F15V
W4 64-1703
1.7
ESW-F17V
W4 64-1010
2.0
ESW-F20V
port
*Vented models are standard with the Warner OC-725 Oocyte Clamp.
How to Decode E Series Model Numbers
Body Style
S - straight
45 - 45 degree
R - right angle (90)
Connector
F - 2 mm jack
M - 2 mm pin
Port/Vent
N - no port or vent
P - with port
V - with vent
E
H
Coupling
P - Ag-Ag CI pellet
W - Ag Wire
Glass Size
10 - 1.0 mm
12 - 1.2 mm
15 - 1.5 mm
17 - 1.7 mm
20 - 2.0 mm
microelectrode holders
Wire/Pellet Connector
Cell Biology
Order #
H - with handle
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
307
microelectrode holders
E Series
E Series 45˚ Body Holders
E SERIES-45˚ Body Holders
Order #
Wire/Pellet Connector
Port
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
W4 64-0908
Pellet
No
1.0
E45P-M10N
W4 64-0909
1.2
E45P-M12N
W4 64-0910
1.5
E45P-M15N
W4 64-0911
2.0
E45P-M20N
1.0
E45P-M10P
W4 64-0913
1.2
E45P-M12P
W4 64-0914
1.5
E45P-M15P
W4 64-0915
2.0
E45P-M20P
1.0
E45P-F10N
W4 64-0901
1.2
E45P-F12N
W4 64-0902
1.5
E45P-F15N
W4 64-0903
2.0
E45P-F20N
1.0
E45P-F10P
W4 64-0905
1.2
E45P-F12P
W4 64-0906
1.5
E45P-F15P
2 mm Pin
W4 64-0912
Yes
microelectrode holders
W4 64-0900
2 mm Jack
W4 64-0904
No
Yes
Cell Biology
W4 64-0907
2.0
E45P-F20P
1.0
E45W-M10N
W4 64-0925
1.2
E45W-M12N
W4 64-0926
1.5
E45W-M15N
2.0
E45W-M20N
1.0
E45W-M10P
W4 64-0929
1.2
E45W-M12P
W4 64-0930
1.5
E45W-M15P
W4 64-0931
2.0
E45W-M20P
W4 64-0924
Wire
2 mm Pin
No
W4 64-0927
W4 64-0928
W4 64-0916
1.0
E45W-F10N
W4 64-0917
1.2
E45W-F12N
W4 64-0918
1.5
E45W-F15N
W4 64-0919
2.0
E45W-F20N
1.0
E45W-F10P
W4 64-0921
1.2
E45W-F12P
W4 64-0922
1.5
E45W-F15P
W4 64-0923
2.0
E45W-F20P
W4 64-0920
308
Yes
Wire
2 mm Jack
No
Yes
port
port
port
port
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
E Series
E Series 45˚ Body Holders
E SERIES-90˚ Body Holders
Port
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
W4 64-0940
Pellet
No
1.0
ERP-M10N
W4 64-0941
1.2
ERP-M12N
W4 64-0942
1.5
ERP-M15N
W4 64-0943
2.0
ERP-M20N
1.0
ERP-M10P
W4 64-0945
1.2
ERP-M12P
W4 64-0946
1.5
ERP-M15P
W4 64-0947
2.0
ERP-M20P
1.0
ERP-F10N
W4 64-0933
1.2
ERP-F12N
W4 64-0934
1.5
ERP-F15N
W4 64-0935
2.0
ERP-F20N
1.0
ERP-F10P
W4 64-0937
1.2
ERP-F12P
W4 64-0938
1.5
ERP-F15P
2.0
ERP-F20P
1.0
ERW-M10N
W4 64-0957
1.2
ERW-M12N
W4 64-0958
1.5
ERW-M15N
2.0
ERW-M20N
1.0
ERW-M10P
W4 64-0961
1.2
ERW-M12P
W4 64-0962
1.5
ERW-M15P
W4 64-0963
2.0
ERW-M20P
2 mm Pin
W4 64-0944
Yes
W4 64-0932
2 mm Jack
W4 64-0936
No
Yes
W4 64-0939
W4 64-0956
Wire
2 mm Pin
No
W4 64-0959
W4 64-0960
W4 64-0948
Yes
1.0
ERW-F10N
W4 64-0949
1.2
ERW-F12N
W4 64-0950
1.5
ERW-F15N
W4 64-0951
2.0
ERW-F20N
1.0
ERW-F10P
W4 64-0953
1.2
ERW-F12P
W4 64-0954
1.5
ERW-F15P
W4 64-0955
2.0
ERW-F20P
W4 64-0952
2 mm Jack
No
Yes
port
port
microelectrode holders
Wire/Pellet Connector
Cell Biology
Order #
port
port
*Vented models are standard with the Warner OC-725 Oocyte Clamp.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
309
microelectrode holders
E Series
E Series Holders with Handle
Holders include a 6.3 mm diameter 6.3 cm long handle for mounting in a micropositioner.
Handles are screwed together except for vented models which are joined by a pin and jack for easy removal from
the handle.
E-SERIES with Handle
Order #
Wire/Pellet Connector
Port
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
W4 64-1023
Pellet
No
microelectrode holders
1.0
E45P-F10NH
W4 64-1024
1.2
E45P-F12NH
W4 64-1025
1.5
E45P-F15NH
1.5
E45P-M15NH
2.0
E45P-F20NH
1.0
E45P-F10PH
W4 64-1040
1.2
E45P-F12PH
W4 64-1041
1.5
E45P-F15PH
W4 64-1042
2.0
E45P-F20PH
W4 64-1033
2 mm Jack
2 mm Pin
W4 64-1026
W4 64-1039
W4 64-1019
Yes
Cell Biology
1.0
E45W-F10NH
W4 64-1020
1.2
E45W-F12NH
W4 64-1021
1.5
E45W-F15NH
W4 64-1022
2.0
E45W-F20NH
1.0
E45W-F10PH
W4 64-1036
1.2
E45W-F12PH
W4 64-1037
1.5
E45W-F15PH
W4 64-1038
2.0
E45W-F20PH
1.0
E45W-F10VH
W4 64-1052
1.2
E45W-F12VH
W4 64-1053
1.5
E45W-F15VH
W4 64-1372
1.7
E45W-F17VH
W4 64-1054
2.0
E45W-F20VH
W4 64-1035
W4 64-1051
Wire
2 mm Jack
No
Yes
Vent*
port
port
*Vented models are standard with the Warner OC-725 Oocyte Clamp.
310
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
Q Series
Q Series Electrode Holders
QSW-TxxP
QRW-AxxN
Q45W-AxxP
How to Decode Q Series Model Numbers
Body Style
S - straight
M - right angle (90˚)
45 - 45˚
QSW-MxxP
Connector
F - 2 mm jack
M - 2 mm pin
A - 1 mm pin
B - BNC
T - 1 mm pin w/threaded collar
Cell Biology
QSW-Bxxp
microelectrode holders
Microelectrode holders for every application and manufacturer
Q
• Patch Clamp Recording
• Intracellular Recording
Coupling
W - Ag Wire
W - Hybrid
(Straight
Body Only)
Specifications
Body Material
Polycarbonate, 6.3 mm diameter
Body Styles
Straight, 45°, and 90°
Connectors
1 mm Pin, 1 mm Pin Threaded and BNC
Coupling
Ag Wire or Ag-AgCl Hybrid
Port
2 mm diameter Polycarbonate
Standard Glass Sizes
1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 1.7 and 2.0 mm
Glass Size
10 - 1.0 mm
12 - 1.2 mm
15 - 1.5 mm
17 - 1.7 mm
20 - 2.0 mm
Port/Vent
N - no port or vent
P - with port
V - with vent
Connector and Amplifier Headstage Compatibility
Connector
Headstage
A (1 mm pin)
Warner PC-505A/B, PC-501A
Axon Patch Clamps prior to 2/1/95
B (BNC)
List and Dagan
F (2 mm jack)
Warner PC-501 & Electrometers
M (2 mm pin)
Axon Axoclamp & Axoprobe prior to 2/1/95
T (1 mm pin/threaded
All Axon after 2/1/95
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
311
microelectrode holders
Q Series
Q Series Electrode Holders with 1 mm Pin
Compatible with Warner PC-501 and PC-505 Patch Clamps, and Axon Patch Clamps (prior to 2/1/95)
NOTE: Holders without ports are not suitable for patch clamp recording.
Q SERIES Holders with 1 mm Pin
Order #
Wire/Pellet Connector
Port
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
W4 64-1105
Wire
No
1.0
QSW-A10N
W4 64-1106
1.2
QSW-A12N
W4 64-1107
1.5
QSW-A15N
W4 64-0745
1.7
QSW-A17N
W4 64-1108
2.0
QSW-A20N
1.0
QSW-A10P
W4 64-0822
1.2
QSW-A12P
W4 64-0823
1.5
QSW-A15P
W4 64-0978
1.7
QSW-A17P
W4 64-0824
2.0
QSW-A20P
Straight
W4 64-0821
Yes
microelectrode holders
W4 64-0841
1.0
Q45W-A10N
W4 64-0842
45°
1.2
Q45W-A12N
W4 64-0843
1.5
Q45W-A15N
W4 64-1098
1.7
Q45W-A17N
W4 64-0844
2.0
Q45W-A20N
W4 64-1055
No
Cell Biology
1.0
Q45W-A10P
W4 64-1056
Yes
1.2
Q45W-A12P
W4 64-1057
1.5
Q45W-A15P
W4 64-0968
1.7
Q45W-A17P
W4 64-1058
2.0
Q45W-A20P
W4 64-0861
1.0
QRW-A10N
W4 64-0862
90°
No
1.2
QRW-A12N
W4 64-0863
1.5
QRW-A15N
W4 64-1103
1.7
QRW-A17N
2.0
QRW-A20N
1.0
QRW-A10P
W4 64-1076
1.2
QRW-A12P
W4 64-1077
1.5
QRW-A15P
W4 64-0973
1.7
QRW-A17P
W4 64-0864
W4 64-1075
Yes
W4 64-1078
2.0
QRW-A20P
1.5
QSH-A15N
W4 64-1352
1.7
QSH-A17N
W4 64-1353
2.0
QSH-A20N
1.5
QSH-A15P
W4 64-1355
1.7
QSH-A17P
W4 64-1356
2.0
QSH-A20P
W4 64-1351
W4 64-1354
Hybrid
Straight
No
Yes
port
port
port
port
HP-205 (W4 64-1288)
with Teflon™ Sleeve
312
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
Q Series
Q Series Holders with 1 mm Pin, Threaded Collar
Compatible with: Axon Patch Clamps and Microelectrode Amps post 2/1/95
NOTE: Holders without ports are not suitable for patch clamp recording.
Q SERIES Holders with 1 mm Pin, Threaded Collar
Port
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
W4 64-1121
Wire
No
1.0
QSW-T10N
W4 64-1122
1.2
QSW-T12N
W4 64-1123
1.5
QSW-T15N
W4 64-0749
1.7
QSW-T17N
W4 64-1124
2.0
QSW-T20N
1.0
QSW-T10P
W4 64-0838
1.2
QSW-T12P
W4 64-0839
1.5
QSW-T15P
W4 64-1097
1.7
QSW-T17P
W4 64-0840
2.0
QSW-T20P
Straight
W4 64-0837
Yes
W4 64-0857
1.0
Q45W-T10N
W4 64-0858
45°
1.2
Q45W-T12N
W4 64-0859
1.5
Q45W-T15N
W4 64-1102
1.7
Q45W-T17N
W4 64-0860
2.0
Q45W-T20N
W4 64-1071
No
1.0
Q45W-T10P
W4 64-1072
Yes
1.2
Q45W-T12P
W4 64-1073
1.5
Q45W-T15P
W4 64-0972
1.7
Q45W-T17P
W4 64-1074
2.0
Q45W-T20P
1.0
QRW-T10N
W4 64-0878
1.2
QRW-T12N
W4 64-0879
1.5
QRW-T15N
W4 64-0744
1.7
QRW-T17N
2.0
QRW-T20N
1.0
QRW-T10P
W4 64-1092
1.2
QRW-T12P
W4 64-1093
1.5
QRW-T15P
W4 64-0977
1.7
QRW-T17P
W4 64-1094
2.0
QRW-T20P
1.5
QSH-T15N
W4 64-1364
1.7
QSH-T17N
W4 64-1365
2.0
QSH-T20N
1.5
QSH-T15P
W4 64-1367
1.7
QSH-T17P
W4 64-1368
2.0
QSH-T20P
W4 64-0877
90°
No
W4 64-0880
W4 64-1091
W4 64-1363
W4 64-1366
Yes
Hybrid
Straight
No
Yes
port
port
microelectrode holders
Wire/Pellet Connector
Cell Biology
Order #
port
port
HP-205 (W4 64-1288)
with Teflon™ Sleeve
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
313
microelectrode holders
Q Series
Q Series Holders with BNC Connector
Q45-BxxP
Compatible with: Heka, List and Dagan Patch Clamps
NOTE: Holders without ports are not suitable for patch clamp recording.
Q SERIES Holders with BNC Connector
microelectrode holders
Order #
Wire/Pellet Connector
Port
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
W4 64-1109
Wire
No
1.0
QSW-B10N
W4 64-1110
1.2
QSW-B12N
W4 64-1111
1.5
QSW-B15N
W4 64-0746
1.7
QSW-B17N
W4 64-1112
2.0
QSW-B20N
1.0
QSW-B10P
W4 64-0826
1.2
QSW-B12P
W4 64-0827
1.5
QSW-B15P
W4 64-0979
1.7
QSW-B17P
W4 64-0828
2.0
QSW-B20P
1.0
Q45W-B10N
W4 64-0846
1.2
Q45W-B12N
W4 64-0847
1.5
Q45W-B15N
W4 64-1099
1.7
Q45W-B17N
W4 64-0848
2.0
Q45W-B20N
1.0
Q45W-B10P
W4 64-1060
1.2
Q45W-B12P
W4 64-1061
1.5
Q45W-B15P
W4 64-0969
1.7
Q45W-B17P
W4 64-1062
2.0
Q45W-B20P
W4 64-0825
W4 64-0845
Cell Biology
W4 64-1059
314
Straight
Yes
45°
No
Yes
port
port
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
Q Series
Q Series Holders with BNC Connector (continued)
Q SERIES Holders with BNC Connector
Wire/Pellet Connector
W4 64-0865
90°
Port
Model
1.0
QRW-B10N
W4 64-0866
1.2
QRW-B12N
W4 64-0867
1.5
QRW-B15N
W4 64-1104
1.7
QRW-B17N
W4 64-0868
2.0
QRW-B20N
1.0
QRW-B10P
W4 64-1080
1.2
QRW-B12P
W4 64-1081
1.5
QRW-B15P
W4 64-0974
1.7
QRW-B17P
2.0
QRW-B20P
1.5
QSH-B15N
W4 64-1358
1.7
QSH-B17N
W4 64-1359
2.0
QSH-B20N
W4 64-1079
No
Glass
OD (mm)
Yes
W4 64-1082
W4 64-1357
Hybrid
Straight
W4 64-1360
No
1.5
QSH-B15P
W4 64-1361
Yes
1.7
QSH-B17P
W4 64-1362
2.0
QSH-B20P
W4 64-0833*
Straight
Yes
1.0
QSW-M10P
W4 64-0834*
Straight
Yes
1.2
QSW-M12P
W4 64-0835*
Straight
Yes
1.5
QSW-M15P
W4 64-0836*
Straight
Yes
2.0
QSW-M20P
port
port
Cell Biology
*Compatible with Axon.
microelectrode holders
Order #
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
315
microelectrode holders
ME Series
ME Series Electrode Holders
Microelectrode holders for every application and manufacturer
• Intracellular and Extracellular Recording
• Microiontophoresis
10-16 Thread
Pressure Ports
MEW-FxxT
A
Accepts 1.5 mm (1⁄16") tubing
B
Accepts 2.4 mm (3⁄32") tubing
ML
Accepts female Luer fitting
FL
Accepts male Luer fitting
T*
Accepts 1⁄4-28 male thread fitting
10-32 Thread
* Holders with the T port are compatible with the Picospritzer® system
made by General Valve Corp.
MEW-FxxFL
Specifications
microelectrode holders
Body Material
9.3 mm diameter acrylic
Body Style
Straight
Connector
2 mm jack
Coupling
Ag/AgCl pellet or Ag Wire
Standard Glass Sizes
1.0, 1.2, 1.5 and 2.0 mm
Handle
6.3 mm diameter x 6.3 cm long, threaded to attach to
holder.
ME SERIES Holders
Cell Biology
Order #
Wire/Pellet
Body Style
Port
Connector
W4 64-1220
Wire
2 mm Straight
Jack
1
Model
1.0
MEW-F10A
W4 64-1221
1.2
MEW-F12A
W4 64-1222
1.5
MEW-F15A
2.0
MEW-F20A
W4 64-1223
W4 64-1224
1.0
MEW-F10B
W4 64-1225
1.2
MEW-F12B
W4 64-1226
1.5
MEW-F15B
W4 64-1227
2.0
MEW-F20B
3
W4 64-1232
⁄32" barb
1.0
MEW-F10ML
W4 64-1233
male Luer
1.2
MEW-F12ML
W4 64-1234
1.5
MEW-F15ML
W4 64-1235
2.0
MEW-F20ML
W4 64-1228
1.0
MEW-F10FL
W4 64-1229
1.2
MEW-F12FL
W4 64-1230
1.5
MEW-F15FL
W4 64-1231
2.0
female Luer
MEW-F20FL
W4 64-1236
threaded
1.0
MEW-F10T
W4 64-1237
1
⁄4-28
1.2
MEW-F12T
W4 64-1238
1.5
MEW-F15T
W4 64-1239
2.0
MEW-F20T
W4 64-1180
316
⁄16" barb
Glass
OD (mm)
1.0
MEP-F10A
W4 64-1181
Pellet
2 mm Straight
Jack
⁄16" barb
1.2
MEP-F12A
W4 64-1182
1.5
MEP-F15A
W4 64-1183
2.0
MEP-F20A
1
port (A)
port (B)
port (ML)
port (FL)
port (T)
port (A)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
ME Series
ME Series Electrode Holders (continued)
ME SERIES Holders
W4 64-1184
Wire/Pellet
Body Style
Port
Connector
⁄32" barb
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
1.0
MEP-F10B
W4 64-1185
1.2
MEP-F12B
W4 64-1186
1.5
MEP-F15B
2.0
MEP-F20B
1
W4 64-1187
W4 64-1192
1.0
MEP-F10ML
W4 64-1193
1.2
MEP-F12ML
W4 64-1194
1.5
MEP-F15ML
W4 64-1195
2.0
MEP-F20ML
W4 64-1188
male Luer
1.0
MEP-F10FL
W4 64-1189
female Luer
1.2
MEP-F12FL
W4 64-1190
1.5
MEP-F15FL
W4 64-1191
2.0
MEP-F20FL
1.0
MEP-F10T
W4 64-1196
threaded
W4 64-1197
1
⁄4-28
MEP-F12T
1.5
MEP-F15T
W4 64-1199
2.0
MEP-F20T
port (ML)
port (FL)
port (T)
Cell Biology
1.2
W4 64-1198
port (B)
microelectrode holders
Order #
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
317
microelectrode holders
PE Series
PE Series Electrode Holders
Microelectrode holders for every application and manufacturer
Specifications
PESW-BxxP
Body Material
Polycarbonate
Body Style
Straight
Connectors
1 mm Pin, 1 mm Pin Threaded and BNC
Coupling
Ag Wire
Port
2 mm diameter Polycarbonate
Perfusion Port
30° port accepts tubing up to 1 mm diameter
Standard Glass Sizes
1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 1.7 and 2.0 mm
Ø 9.5 mm, compatible with MHH-38
Patch Clamp Compatibility
microelectrode holders
PESW-TxxP
• Microperfusion (perfusion at the pipette tip)*
For microperfusion inside the pipette
Cell Biology
Perfusion at the electrode tip is possible with the PE Series holders.
They include an additional port at 30° to the glass bore allowing for the
insertion of micro-bore tubing into the pipette. This port includes a
threaded cap and seal for up to 1 mm diameter tubing. See references
below for information on the microperfusion technique.
For Use With
1 mm Pin
Warner Patch Clamp Models PC-501
& PC-505 Axon Patch Clamps prior
to 2/1/95
BNC
List, Heka and Dagan Patch Clamps
1 mm Pin with
threaded collar
Axon Patch Clamps and Microelectrode
Amps prior to 2/1/95
*References:
1) Nehr, E. and Eckert, R.: Fast patch-pipette internal perfusion with minimum solution flow.
Grinnel, A.D., Armstrong, D. and Jackson, M.B.: Calcium and Ion Channel Modulation,
Plenum Press, N.Y.
2) Cull-Candy, S.G., Miledi, R. and Parker, I.: Single glutamate-activated channels recorded
from locust muscle fibers with perfused patch clamp electrodes. J. Physiology 32-, 195-210.
3) Pusch, M. and Nehr, E. (1987) Kinetics of loading small cells with various compounds by use
of patch pipettes. Pflugers Archives (Spring Meeting of the Physiol. Ges.).
4) Tang, J.M., Wang, J. and Eisenberg, R.S. (1992) Perfusing patch pipettes. Methods in
Enzymol. 207, 176-181.
PE SERIES Holders
Order #
Wire/Pellet
Body Style
Port
Connector
Glass
OD (mm) Model
W4 64-1144
Wire
Straight
Yes
1 mm Pin
1.0
PESW-A10P
W4 64-1145
1.2
PESW-A12P
W4 64-1146
1.5
PESW-A15P
W4 64-1371
1.7
PESW-A17P
W4 64-1147
2.0
PESW-A20P
W4 64-1148
318
Connector
1.0
PESW-B10P
W4 64-1149
BNC
1.2
PESW-B12P
W4 64-1150
1.5
PESW-B15P
W4 64-1369
1.7
PESW-B17P
W4 64-1151
2.0
PESW-B20P
W4 64-1160
1 mm pin
1.0
PESW-T10P
W4 64-1161
Threaded
1.2
PESW-T12P
W4 64-1162
Collar
1.5
PESW-T15P
W4 64-1373
1.7
PESW-T17P
W4 64-1163
2.0
PESW-T20P
port
port
port
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
NEW PE30W Series
PE30W Series Electrode Holders for Patch Perfusion
Specifications
Body Material: Polycarbonate
Body Style: 30
Connectors: 1 mm Pin, 1 mm Pin
Threaded and BNC
Coupling: Ag Wire
PE30W-BxxP
Port: 2 mm diameter
Polycarbonate
Perfusion Port: port accepts
tubing up to 1 mm diameter
Standard Glass Sizes: 1.0, 1.2,
1.5, 1.7 and 2.0 mm
For use with
1 mm Pin
Warner Patch Clamp Models PC-501 & PC-505
Axon Patch Clamps prior to 2/1/95
• Microperfusion (perfusion at the pipette tip)*
BNC
List, Heka and Dagan Patch Clamps
For microperfusion inside the pipette
1 mm Pin with
threaded collar
Axon Patch Clamps and Microelectrode
Amps prior to 2/1/95
Perfusion at the electrode tip is possible with the PE Series holders.
They include an additional port in-line with the glass bore allowing for
the insertion of microbore tubing into the pipette. This port includes a
threaded cap and seal for up to 1 mm diameter tubing. See the reports
referenced below for information on the microperfusion technique.
*References:
1) Nehr, E. and Eckert, R.: Fast patch-pipette internal perfusion with minimum solution
flow. Grinnel, A.D., Armstrong, D. and Jackson, M.B.: Calcium and Ion Channel
Modulation, Plenum Press, N.Y. Cull-Candy, S.G., Miledi, R. and Parker, I.: Single
glutamate-activated channels recorded from locust muscle fibers with perfused
patch clamp electrodes. J. Physiology 32-, 195-210.
2) Pusch, M. and Nehr, E. (1987) Kinetics of loading small cells with various compounds
by use of patch pipettes. Pflugers Archives (Spring Meeting of the Physiol. Ges.).
Tang, J.M., Wang, J. and Eisenberg, R.S. (1992) Perfusing patch pipettes. Methods in
Enzymol. 207, 176-181.
PE30W SERIES Holders
Order #
Wire/Pellet Body Style Port
W4 64-1761 Wire
Yes
Model
1 mm Pin
1.0
PE30W-A10P
W4 64-1762
1.2
PE30W-A12P
W4 64-1763
1.5
PE30W-A15P
W4 64-1764
1.7
PE30W-A17P
W4 64-1765
2.0
PE30W-A20P
W4 64-1766
Straight
Glass
Connector OD (mm)
1.0
PE30W-B10P
W4 64-1767
BNC
1.2
PE30W-B12P
W4 64-1768
1.5
PE30W-B15P
W4 64-1769
1.7
PE30W-B17P
W4 64-1770
2.0
PE30W-B20P
W4 64-1771
1 mm pin
1.0
PE30W-T10P
W4 64-1772
Threaded
1.2
PE30W-T12P
W4 64-1773
Collar
1.5
PE30W-T15P
W4 64-1774
1.7
PE30W-T17
W4 64-1775
2.0
PE30W-T20P
Cell Biology
Connector
PE30W-TxxP
microelectrode holders
Patch Clamp Compatibility
port
port
port
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
319
microelectrode holders
MP Series
MP Series Electrode Holders
Microelectrode holders for every application and manufacturer
Pressure Ports
MP-SxxB
A
Accepts 1.5 mm (1⁄16") tubing
B
Accepts 2.4 mm (3⁄32") tubing*
ML
Accepts female Luer fitting
FL
Accepts male Luer fitting
T*
Accepts 1⁄4-28 male thread
fitting
Specifications
MP-SxxT
• Microinjection
microelectrode holders
Body Material
Acrylic
Body Style
Straight
Port
1
Glass Sizes
1.0, 1.2, 1.5 and 2.0 mm
Handle
6.3 mm diameter x 6.3 cm long, threaded to attach to
holder.
⁄16" barbed (1⁄16" tubing ID), 3⁄32" barbed (3⁄32" tubing ID),
male Luer, female Luer and 1⁄4-28 female threaded
MP SERIES Holders
Order #
Body Style
Port
W4 64-1261
Straight
1
⁄16" barb
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
Cell Biology
1.0
MP-S10A
W4 64-1262
1.2
MP-S12A
W4 64-1263
1.5
MP-S15A
2.0
MP-S20A
1.0
MP-S10B
1.2
MP-S12B
W4 64-1264
W4 64-1265
⁄32" barb*
3
W4 64-1266
W4 64-1267
1.5
MP-S15B
W4 64-1268
2.0
MP-S20B
1.0
MP-S10ML
1.2
MP-S12ML
W4 64-1273
male Luer
W4 64-1274
W4 64-1275
1.5
MP-S15ML
W4 64-1276
2.0
MP-S20ML
1.0
MP-S10FL
1.2
MP-S12FL
W4 64-1269
female Luer
W4 64-1270
W4 64-1271
1.5
MP-S15FL
W4 64-1272
2.0
MP-S20FL
W4 64-1278
threaded
1.0
MP-S10T
W4 64-1279
1
⁄4*-28**
1.2
MP-S12T
W4 64-1280
1.5
MP-S15T
W4 64-1281
2.0
MP-S20T
port (A)
port (B)
port (ML)
port (FL)
port (T)
* Shaft Diameter
** Threads/Inch
320
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
MHH-25, MHH-38 and Theta Glass Holders
Microelectrode holders for every application and manufacturer
MHH-38 and MHH-25
A Diameter
Model
Diameter
MHH-25
6.3 mm (1⁄4”)
MHH-38
9.5 mm (3⁄8”)
Electrode/Manifold Holders MHH-25, MHH-38
Device Compatibility
The MHH-25 and MHH-38 Holders permit convenient mounting of manifolds
and electrode holders or other devices with 6.3 or 9.5 mm diameters. The
holder head can be pivoted ±90° from the axial position and rotated 360°
about the axis. Friction holds the head firmly in the set position. Holder head
and coupler are made from Delrin®. The anodized aluminum handle is 6.3 mm
diameter x 6.3 cm long and will fit most positioners.
Order #
Model
Description
W4 64-0218
MHH-25
E and Q Series Electrode
Holders
W4 64-0219
MHH-38
PE Series and Theta Electrode
Holders MP and MPP Series
Manifolds
Cell Biology
Specifications
Specifications
THS-FxxP
Theta Glass Holders
microelectrode holders
A
Body Material
Acrylic
Body Style
Straight
Coupling
Ag wire (2)
Connector
2 mm jack
Port
2 mm diameter polycarbonate
Standard Glass Sizes
1.5 and 2.0 mm
Handle
6.3 mm diameter x 6.3 cm long, threaded to attach to
holder.
• Microinjection or microiontophoresis with theta glass
Theta Glass Electrode Holders
Order #
Port
Handle
W4 64-1164
No
No
W4 64-1165
W4 64-1172
Yes
W4 64-1173
W4 64-1168
Yes
No
W4 64-1169
W4 64-1176
W4 64-1177
Yes
Glass
OD (mm)
Model
1.5
THS-F15
2.0
THS-F20
1.5
THS-F15H
2.0
THS-F20H
1.5
THS-F15P
2.0
THS-F20P
1.5
THS-F15PH
2.0
THS-F20PH
port
port
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
321
microelectrode holders
THP Pressurized Holder for Theta Glass
This holder allows quick and easy coupling of theta tubing to a pressurized source
Complete Kit
Adhesive bond
Theta Glass
Male luer to 1/16" barb
microelectrode holders
Handle 6.3 mm diameter
19 mm
190 mm
Cell Biology
•
•
•
•
•
Allows microinjection using theta glass
Kit includes everything needed
Light weight acrylic electrode holder
Easy coupling to pressure source
Rated to 100 PSI
The new THP holder from Warner Instruments allows quick and easy
coupling of theta tubing to a pressure source.
Complete kits are available for both 1.5 mm and 2.0 mm theta tubing.
A drop of included hot glue adhesive bonds the theta to a flexible fill
capillary tube. A barb fitting at the output permits coupling to the
pressure source with 1/16" I.D. Tygon tubing. The light weight, fully
adjustable holder makes assembly a breeze.
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1620
THP-15
Pressurized Holder Kit for 1.5 mm
Theta Tubing
W4 64-1621
THP-20
Pressurized Holder Kit for 2.0 mm
Theta Tubing
W4 64-1624
THP
Pressurized Holder Only
W4 64-1642
FTC-35
Flexible Fill Capillary Tubes 350 µm
W4 64-1643
FTC-45
Flexible Fill Capillary Tubes 450 µm
W4 64-0810
TG150-4
Theta Glass 1.5 mm OD
W4 64-0811
TG200-4
Theta Glass 2.0 mm OD
W4 64-1622
Barb Fittting 1/16" Male Luer (25)
Included with the THP-15:
322
1
THP acrylic theta tubing holder with integrated handle
1
THP acrylic theta tubing holder with integrated handle
1
Package of 10 Flexible Fill Capillary Tubes 350µ O.D.
O.D.Package of 10
1
Package of 10 Flexible Fill Capillary Tubes 450µ
O.D.Package of 10
50
Feet of 1/16" Tygon tubing
50
Feet of 1/16" Tygon tubing
1
Hot Glue Gun
1
Hot Glue Gun
5
Hot Glue Sticks
5
Hot Glue Sticks
1
Package of male luer to 1/16" barb fittings, (25 pcs/pkg.)
1
Package of male luer to 1/16" barb fittings, (25 pcs/pkg.)
1
Package of 1.5 mm O.D. Theta glass, (100 pcs/pkg.)
1
Package of 2.0 mm O.D. Theta glass, (100 pcs/pkg.)
1
Package of 10 Flexible Fill Capillary Tubes 350µ O.D.
O.D.Package of 10
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microelectrode holders
Electrode Holder Replacement Parts
Microelectrode Replacement Parts
Order #
Qty/Pkg
Model
Coupling Elements
Description
W4 64-1297
3
SP-1M
Molded Ag-AgCl pellet assembly
W4 64-1282
10
AG25-10
Ag wire, 0.25 mm diameter x 70 mm long
AG10W
Ag wire, 0.25 mm diameter x 2 m (6'6")
HP-205
Hybrid Ag-AgCl pellet/Ag wire assembly with 40 mm
teflon sleeve sealed at junction of pellet and silver wire
W4 64-1319
W4 64-1288
1
4 mm
HP-205
Ø2.3
mm
PS-XX
SP-1M
1 mm
AG-25
PS-XX
Pipette and Wire Seals
10
PS-10
Pipette seal for 1.0 mm diameter glass
W4 64-1290
10
PS-12
Pipette seal for 1.2 mm diameter glass
W4 64-1291
10
PS-15
Pipette seal for 1.5 mm diameter glass
W4 64-1374
10
PS-17
Pipette seal for 1.7 mm diameter glass
W4 64-1292
10
PS-20
Pipette seal for 2.0 mm diameter glass
W4 64-1298
10
WS-1
Wire seal for E, ME, MP and theta holder
W4 64-1299
10
WS-2
Wire seal for Q and PE Series holders
W4 64-1300
10
WS-3
Wire seal for Q and PE Series holders with
threaded “T” connector
PS-XX
HP-205
AG25
WS-1
SP-1M
PS-xx
PS-XX
WS-1
WS-1
WS-1
4mm
OD
WS-2
WS-2
WS-1
WS-2
WS-2
3mm OD
Glass Seal Compression Caps
WS-3
WS-3
2mm OD
WS-3
WS-2
WS-3
W4 64-1293
2
QC-10
Compression cap for 1.0 mm glass holders
W4 64-1294
2
QC-12
Compression cap for 1.2 mm glass holders
W4 64-1295
2
QC-15
Compression cap for 1.5 mm glass holders
W4 64-1375
2
QC-17
Compression cap for 1.7 mm glass holders
W4 64-1296
2
QC-20
Compression cap for 2.0 mm glass holders
WS-3
QC-xx
microelectrode holders
W4 64-1289
W4 64-1283
3
HC-10M
1 mm pin for Q and PE holders with A or T
connectors
W4 64-1284
3
HC-13M
1.3 mm pin for Q and PE holders with B
(BNC) connector
W4 64-1285
3
HC-20M
2 mm threaded pin for E, ME and theta holders
W4 64-1286
3
HC-21F
2 mm jack assembly for all series holders
W4 64-1287
3
HC-22M
2 mm pin for Q and PE holders with M connector
Cell Biology
Connector Pins and Jacks
QC-XX
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
323
capillary glass
Premium Capillary Glass
Warner capillary glass is known worldwide for its consistent high quality
• Ends are fire polished to prevent damage to the
rubber gaskets when inserted into electrode
holders
• Glass is cleaned with deionized water before
being packed in dust-free containers
OD
mm
ID Length
mm mm
Qty/Pkg
W4 64-0765 G100-3
1.0
0.58
75
500
Order #
Model
capillary glass
W4 64-0766 G100-4
1.0
0.58
100
500
Warner capillary glass is known worldwide for its consistent high
quality. The glass is precision drawn to insure reliability and
consistency from batch to batch. The full line of glass capillaries
listed here is stocked for fast shipment.
W4 64-0770 G120-6
1.2
0.69
150
350
W4 64-0771 G150-3
1.5
0.86
75
225
W4 64-0772 G150-4
1.5
0.86
100
225
W4 64-0773 G150-6
1.5
0.86
150
225
Standard Wall/Thin Wall
W4 64-0774 G200-3
2.0
1.16
75
125
Tubing is available in two wall thickness, standard wall and thin
wall. Additionally, a variety of diameters is offered to cover most
needs of micropipette and microelectrode research.
Premium Thin Wall Borosilicate
Capillaries with Filament
Order #
A small diameter filament is fused to the glass inside diameter to
facilitate rapid solution filling through capillary attraction. This is
especially important for the very small diameter of sharp electrodes
typically used for intracellular studies and microiontophoresis.
Premium Corning Type 7740 (Pyrex)
Cell Biology
Corning 7740 Borosilicate is the most commonly used glass in
electrode fabrication because of its mechanical strength, chemical
durability, electrical resistivity, and its ability to withstand thermal
stress. It is also easy to work with and suitable for a wide range of
applications. Corning 7740 glass is offered in a choice of diameters,
in standard or thin-walled format, and either with or without inner
filament; they are additionally available in Theta style. Single barrel
glass is available in 3 lengths: 75, 100 and150 mm. Theta glass is
offered in 100 mm lengths only.
Specifications
Composition
324
Premium Standard Wall
Borosilicate
81% SiO2,
13% B2O3,
4% Na2O,
2% Al2O3
Softening Temp.
821°C
Dielectric Constant
4.6
OD
mm
ID
Length
mm mm
Qty/Pkg
W4 64-0778 G100T-4
1.0
0.78
100
500
W4 64-0780 G120T-3
1.2
0.94
75
350
W4 64-0781 G120T-4
1.2
0.94
100
350
W4 64-0783 G150T-3
1.5
1.17
75
225
W4 64-0784 G150T-4
1.5
1.17
100
225
W4 64-0785 G150T-6
1.5
1.17
150
225
Model
Premium Standard Wall
Borosilicate with Filament
OD
mm
ID
Length
mm mm
Qty/Pkg
W4 64-0786 G100F-3
1.0
0.58
75
500
W4 64-0787 G100F-4
1.0
0.58
100
500
W4 64-0788 G100F-6
1.0
0.58
150
500
W4 64-0789 G120F-3
1.2
0.69
75
350
W4 64-0790 G120F-4
1.2
0.69
100
350
W4 64-0791 G120F-6
1.2
0.69
150
350
W4 64-0792 G150F-3
1.5
0.86
75
225
W4 64-0793 G150F-4
1.5
0.86
100
225
W4 64-0794 G150F-6
1.5
0.86
150
225
W4 64-0795 G200F-3
2.0
1.16
75
125
W4 64-0796 G200F-4
2.0
1.16
100
125
Order #
Model
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
capillary glass
Premium Capillary Glass (continued)
Premium Thin Wall Borosilicate
with Filament
OD
mm
ID
Length
mm mm
Qty/Pkg
W4 64-0798 G100TF-3
1.0
0.78
75
500
W4 64-0799 G100TF-4
1.0
0.78
100
500
W4 64-0800 G100TF-6
1.0
0.78
150
500
W4 64-0801 G120TF-3
1.2
0.94
75
350
W4 64-0802 G120TF-4
1.2
0.94
100
350
W4 64-0804 G150TF-3
1.5
1.17
75
225
W4 64-0805 G150TF-4
1.5
1.17
100
225
Order #
Model
Premium Theta Glass
(100 pcs/pkg.)
OD
mm
ID Septum
mm mm
Length
mm
W4 64-0810 TG150-4
1.5
1.0
0.2
100
W4 64-0811 TG200-4
2.0
1.4
0.2
100
Model
Cell Biology
capillary glass
Order #
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
325
Patch Clamp Glass
capillary glass
Custom 8520 glass has been shown to be equal in noise performance to the discontinued Corning 7552
Choosing patch clamp glass is generally based on noise
performance and the ability to form and maintain a seal. No single
type of glass works best in all applications and some trial and error
is usually required to find the type yielding optimum results in your
experiment. Patch glass is manufactured without an inner filament.
This glass is offered in both the standard and premium models. The
premium glass has fire polished ends and is cleaned with deionized
water before being packed in dust-free containers.
Patch Glass
CustomClark
8520Custom
Patch Glass
Premium Corning 7056 (Alkali Barium
Corning
7056
(Alkali Barium Borosilicate) Pa
Borosilicate)
Patch
Glass
Now Available in Premium Line!
Corning 7056 glass is now offered in place of the 7052 glass, last melted
in 1992 and no longer available. The 7056 formula has also been
discontinued by Corning (last melt in 1995) but stocks of this material are
still available. The properties of the 7056 glass are similar to the 7052 as
is its performance in patch experiments.
Specifications
Now Available in Premium Line!
capillary glass
The custom patch glass from Clark was introduced in 1997 as a substitute
for the Corning 7052 glass, a favorite amongst researchers performing
patch clamping. Initial tests showed the 8520 glass to be equal to the
7052 in noise performance. More importantly, seals were formed faster
and maintained for longer periods.
Cell Biology
Specifications
Composition
>10% SiO2, >10% B2O3, >1% Al2O3, >1% K2O, <1% Na2O,
<1% Li2O, <1% ZnO, <1% As2O3, <1% TiO2, <1% ZrO2
Softening Temperature
720°C
Dielectric Constant
4.6
Premium Custom 8520 Patch Glass
OD
ID
Length
Order #
Model
mm mm mm
Qty/Pkg
W4 64-0817 G85150T-3 1.50
1.16
75
225
W4 64-0818 G85150T-4 1.50
1.16
100
225
W4 64-0819 G85165T-3 1.65
1.28
75
190
W4 64-0820 G85165T-4 1.65
1.28
100
190
Clark Custom 8520 Patch Glass
OD
ID
Length
Order #
mm
mm
mm
W4 30-0091
326
1.2
0.93
75
Composition
68% SiO2, 18% B2O3, 9% K2O, 3% Al2O3,
1% Li2O, 1% Na2O
Softening Temperature
718°C
Dielectric Constant
5.7
Premium Corning 7056 Patch Glass
OD
ID
Length
Order #
Model
mm mm mm
Qty.
W4 64-0813 G75150T-4
1.50
1.10
100
225
W4 64-0814 G75165T-4
1.65
1.20
100
190
Premium Corning 8161 (Potash Rubium
Corning
8161 (Potash Rubium Lead) Patch
Lead) Patch
Glass
This glass pulls at a lower temperature and is easily shaped. It is
recommended for low noise recordings. However, the lead content should
be considered for the intended application.
Specifications
Qty.
350
W4 30-0089
1.2
0.93
100
350
W4 30-0090
1.2
0.93
150
350
W4 30-0094
1.5
1.16
75
225
W4 30-0092
1.5
1.16
100
225
W4 30-0093
1.5
1.16
150
225
W4 30-0097
1.65
1.28
75
190
W4 30-0095
1.65
1.28
100
190
W4 30-0096
1.65
1.28
150
190
Composition
51% PbO, 39% SiO2, 6% K2O, 2% BaO
Softening Temperature
600°C
Dielectric Constant
8.3
Premium Corning 8161 (Potash Rubium Lead) Patch Glass
OD
ID
Length
Order #
Model
mm mm mm
Qty.
W4 64-0815 G86150T-4
1.50
1.10
100
225
W4 64-0816 G86165T-4
1.65
1.20
100
190
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Clark Capillary Glass
capillary glass
An old favorite
Discounts on Quantity Purchases:
Borsilicate Capillaries
Discount apply to only single part number quantities (no mixing).
High quality borosilicate glass
Five outside diameters available
Available with either thin or standard wall
Ratio of outside to inside diameters preserved
to tip
• Economical
Borosilicate
Thin Wall
without
Filament
Borosilicate
Thin
Wall without
Filament
none
5 to 9
5%
10+
10%
Specifications
Composition
80.9% SiO2
12.9% B2O3
4.4% Na2O
1.8% Al2O3
Softening Temp.
815°C
Dielectric Constant
4.7
Borosilicate Standard Wall without
FilamentBorosilicate Standard Wall without Filament
Borosilicate Standard Wall without Filament
OD
ID
Length
Order #
mm
mm
mm
Wall Qty.
W4 30-0018
1.0
0.58
75
0.21
500
W4 30-0016
1.0
0.58
100
0.21
500
W4 30-0017
1.0
0.58
150
0.21
500
W4 30-0043
1.2
0.69
75
0.25
350
W4 30-0042
1.2
0.69
100
0.25
350
Borosilicate Thin Wall without Filament
OD
ID
Length
Order #
mm
mm
mm
Qty.
W4 30-0041
1.2
0.69
150
0.25
350
W4 30-0037
1.0
0.78
75
500
W4 30-0056
1.5
0.86
75
0.32
225
W4 30-0035
1.0
0.78
100
500
W4 30-0054
1.5
0.86
110
0.32
225
W4 30-0036
1.0
0.78
150
500
W4 30-0053
1.5
0.86
100
0.32
225
W4 30-0049
1.2
0.94
75
350
W4 30-0055
1.5
0.86
150
0.32
225
W4 30-0047
1.2
0.94
100
350
W4 30-0073
2.0
1.16
75
0.42
125
W4 30-0048
1.2
0.94
150
350
W4 30-0070
2.0
1.16
100
0.42
125
W4 30-0064
1.5
1.17
50
225
W4 30-0071
2.0
1.16
150
0.42
125
W4 30-0065
1.5
1.17
75
225
W4 30-0127
3.0
1.62
75
0.69
55
W4 30-0062
1.5
1.17
100
225
W4 30-0080
3.0
1.62
100
0.69
55
W4 30-0063
1.5
1.17
150
225
W4 30-0081
3.0
1.62
150
0.69
55
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
capillary glass
•
•
•
•
1 to 4
Cell Biology
The properties of borosilicate glass make it the most popular
material among researchers for the fabrication of electrodes and
micro-pipettes. Its low softening temperature combined with its
mechanical strength, chemical durability, high electrical resistivity,
and its ability to withstand thermal stress, make these capillaries the
most widely used in the world. Clark borosilicate capillaries are
offered in a variety of diameters and wall thickness (standard or thin
walled) with or without an inner filament. They are available in fused
multi-barrel configurations, as well as in theta style. Single barrel
glass is available in 75 mm (3 in), 100 mm (4 in) and 150 mm (6 in)
lengths.
327
capillary glass
Clark Capillary Glass (continued)
Borosilicate Capillary Glass with
FilamentThin Wall with Filament
Borosilicate
Borosilicate Double and Triple Barrel
SpecialsBorosilicate Double Barrel Special
Borosilicate with Filament
Standard Wall
Thin Wall
• Easy filling
• Available in standard or thin wall configurations
with selection of three outside diameters
• Exceptionally low tip impedance (less than
50 MΩ)
• Good for patch clamp pipettes and microinjection
needles
Borosilicate with Filament
OD
ID
Order #
mm
mm
Length
mm
Qty.
Borosilicate Standard Wall with Filament
Borosilicate Double and Triple Barrel Specials
OD
ID
Length
Order #
mm
mm
mm
Qty.
capillary glass
W4 30-0034
1.0
0.50
75
500
W4 30-0032
1.0
0.50
100
500
Double Barrel
W4 30-0033
1.0
0.50
150
500
W4 30-0004
1.5
0.86
75
100
1.5
0.86
100
100
1.5
0.86
150
100
W4 30-0021
1.0
0.58
75
500
W4 30-0005
W4 30-0019
1.0
0.58
100
500
W4 30-0006
Cell Biology
W4 30-0020
1.0
0.58
150
500
Triple Barrel
W4 30-0046
1.2
0.69
75
350
W4 30-0011
1.5
0.86
75
100
W4 30-0044
1.2
0.69
100
350
W4 30-0009
1.5
0.86
100
100
W4 30-0045
1.2
0.69
150
350
W4 30-0010
1.5
0.86
150
100
W4 30-0060
1.5
0.86
75
225
W4 30-0057
1.5
0.86
100
225
W4 30-0058
1.5
0.86
150
225
W4 30-0076
2.0
1.16
75
125
W4 30-0074
2.0
1.16
100
125
W4 30-0075
2.0
1.16
150
125
W4 30-0084
3.0
1.62
75
55
W4 30-0082
3.0
1.62
100
55
W4 30-0083
3.0
1.62
150
55
Borosilicate Thin Wall with Filament
328
• High quality borosilicate glass
• Special two barrels - one barrel with filament,
one without
• Ratio of outside to inside diameter preserved
to tip during pull
W4 30-0040
1.0
0.78
75
500
W4 30-0038
1.0
0.78
100
500
W4 30-0039
1.0
0.78
150
500
W4 30-0052
1.2
0.94
75
350
W4 30-0050
1.2
0.94
100
350
W4 30-0051
1.2
0.94
150
350
W4 30-0068
1.5
1.17
75
225
W4 30-0066
1.5
1.17
100
225
W4 30-0067
1.5
1.17
150
225
W4 30-0128
2.0
1.56
75
125
W4 30-0077
2.0
1.56
100
125
W4 30-0078
2.0
1.56
150
125
Borosilicate Theta Glass
Borosilicate Theta Glass
• Easy to fill
• Two channels in a single diameter
Borosilicate Theta Glass
OD ID
Order #
mm mm
A
B
Septum Length
mm
mm
Qty.
W4 30-0116
1.5
0.23
0.17
75
100
W4 30-0114
1.5
0.23
0.17
100
100
W4 30-0115
1.5
0.23
0.17
150
100
W4 30-0119
2.0
0.30
0.22
75
100
W4 30-0117
2.0
0.30
0.22
100
100
W4 30-0118
2.0
0.30
0.22
150
100
A: 0.435 mm
B: 0.59 mm
HRC = 1⁄2
(OD - 2 x Wall Sept)
Half Channel
Radius = A or B
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
capillary glass
Clark Capillary Glass (continued)
Borosilicate
Multi-Barrel
Borosilicate Multi-Barrel
Aluminosilicate Capillaries with Filament
OD
ID
Length
Order #
mm
mm
mm
Qty.
W4 30-0110
1.0
0.53
75
500
W4 30-0108
1.0
0.53
100
500
W4 30-0109
1.0
0.53
150
500
Barrels
Qty.
W4 30-0003 1.5
0.86
75 mm
2
100
W4 30-0001 1.5
0.86
100 mm
2
100
W4 30-0002 1.5
0.86
150 mm
2
100
W4 30-0007 1.2
0.69
100 mm
3
100
W4 30-0008 1.2
0.69
150 mm
3
100
W4 30-0012 1.2
0.69
100 mm
5
65
W4 30-0013 1.2
0.69
150 mm
5
65
W4 30-0014 1.0
0.58
100 mm
7
60
W4 30-0015 1.0
0.58
150 mm
7
60
Aluminosilicate Capillaries
In recent years there has been a developing interest in fabricating
micropipettes from aluminosilicate glass. Like silicon, aluminum
combines with oxygen to form Tetrahedral Networks and the Al-O
bonds are very strong. In comparison with borosilicate glass,
aluminosilicate provides increased hardness, improved chemical
durability, reduced electrical conductivity and a lower coefficient of
thermal expansion. Also, while the original ratio of a borosilicate
capillary’s inner to outer diameter will remain unchanged over its
total taper length, aluminosilicate glass demonstrates a marked
tendency to thin out as it is drawn to a tip. This behavior allows
extremely fine tips to be formed.
Cell Biology
Aluminosilicate
Capillaries
Filament
Aluminosilicate
Capillaries
with with
Filament
Borosilicate Multi-Barrel
OD
Wall # of
Order #
mm
mm
Septum
capillary glass
• High quality borosilicate glass
• Two, three, five and seven barrel configurations
with filament
• Capillaries fused along their full length
For more information, see:
1. Na/H Exchange, Vaughan-Jones, RD.; Grinstein Press, Ch.1 p.8;
2. Effects of intracellular and extracellular pH on contraction in isolated
mammalian cardiac muscle, Bountra, C. & Vaughan-Jones, R.D.; Journal of
Physiology Volume 418 (1989)
Specifications
Composition
51.9% SiO2, 22.0% Al2O3, 7.8% P2O5, 7.7% MgO,
6.9% CaO, 2.1% B2O3, 1.4% BaO and 0.2% As2O3
Softening Temperature
950°C
Dielectric Constant
6.2
Borosilicate
Glass Rod
Borosilicate
Glass Rod
Borosilicate Glass Rod
OD
Order #
mm
Length
mm
Qty.
W4 30-0087
1.0
75
500
W4 30-0085
1.0
100
500
W4 30-0086
1.0
150
500
• High quality borosilicate glass
• Available in two diameters
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
329
capillary glass
Pipette Sterilization and Micropipette
Designed for iontophoretic applications and pneumatic
ejection of drugs through up to seven barrels
The Pipette storage container is both convenient
and easy to use
Pre-pulled
Blank
Fully-pulled
Micron tip
7-Barrel Iontophoresis Micropipette
capillary glass
•
•
•
•
Pipette Sterilization and Storage
Container
Cell Biology
• Ideal for dry heat sterilization of pipettes
• Pyrex-type glass covers make contents easily
visible
• Holds 21 pipettes
• Available for 1.0, 1.2, 1.5 and 2.0 mm diameter
pipettes
This container is a convenient and easy to use pipette storage container. It
is ideal for both storage and dry heat sterilization of micropipettes. In most
application pipettes must be free from contamination at all times. By
storing completed pipettes and partially made pipettes (between
operations), the cleanliness of the micropipettes can be assured. Because
the covers are made of Pyrex glass, the complete container with pipettes
in-situ can be dry-heat sterilized, ensuring contamination-free pipettes.
The base accepts 21 pipettes. Select from containers holding either 1.0,
1.2, 1.5 or 2.0 mm OD pipettes.
Easy filling
Minimal tip resistance
Minimal leakage
Available pre-pulled or fully-pulled
The MS-7P Micropipette has been designed for iontophoretic use as well
as for pneumatic ejection of drugs. The standard blank consists of seven
barrel, pyrex Omegadot tubing, 1.5 mm outer diameter and 1.2 mm inner
diameter, pre-pulled to 2.0 mm formation as shown. The design of the
micropipette readily lends itself to electrical connection by inserting Ag
wire or to pressure tube attachment for pneumatic use. The overall length
of the blank assembly is 10 centimeters. The micropipette is supplied as
either pre-pulled blanks or fully-pulled to a micron tip as shown. The
micron tip is not bumped and therefore can be finalized prior to use.
Features
- The orifice ratio of each barrel is 0.80 and thus is optimized for minimal
tip resistance when pulled to micron size.
- Omegadot tubing permits easy filling.
- Fanned-out outer barrel assembly provides separation thus avoiding
leakage due to spills and any cross-coupling between barrels.
- The 22 mm long twisted segment of the blank assembly assures
singular tip formation during pulling action thus provides flexibility
in a selection of a desired tip configuration.
Order #
Order #
Product
Model
Micropipette 7-Barrel,
1.5 mm OD Borosilicate Glass,
Pre-Pulled Blank, pkg. of 20
W4 65-0208 MS-7MT
Micropipette 7-Barrel,
1.5 mm OD Borosilicate Glass,
Fully-Pulled, approx. 20 µm Tip,
pkg. of 10
W4 69-0114 Pipette Sterilization and Storage Container for
1.0 mm Pipettes
W4 69-0316 Pipette Sterilization and Storage Container for
1.2 mm Pipettes
W4 69-0317 Pipette Sterilization and Storage Container for
1.5 mm Pipettes
Micropipettes
W4 65-0207 MS-7PB
W4 69-0318 Pipette Sterilization and Storage Container for
2.0 mm Pipettes
330
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Pipette Pullers
pipette pullers
A state of the art, microprocessor controlled horizontal pipette puller designed to simultaneously pull two identical,
single barrel pipettes
Needle micropipette fabrication devices include instruments intended to pull, bevel, or forge various types and styles of glass micropipette
needles for ICSI, IVF, transgenics, patch recording or other similar procedures involving the use of micropipettes in electrophysiological recording,
microinjection, and microperfusion techniques.
The first step in the process involves the initial fabrication of the micropipette itself using either single or multibarrel capillary tubing. This tubing
typically ranges in size from between 1 and 2 mm OD and is usually made from borosilicate glass although other materials such as
aluminosilicate or quartz are also used in some applications. The capillary tubing is then placed in a micropipette puller where a point on the
capillary tubing is brought to its softening point through the use of a heating device such as an electrical filament, laser or gas flame. Once the
capillary tubing’s softening point temperature is reached, a mechanical parallel pulling force is applied to each end of the capillary tube and it is
‘pulled’ to the desired tip diameter and profile. Depending on a number of preset variables such as capillary material type, temperature, filament
type and pulling force, numerous types of tip profiles and tip diameters can be fabricated. Using this technique tip sizes as small as 0.02 µm can
be achieved. Pipette pullers can range in complexity from a simplistic spring/counter weight mechanical puller to highly sophisticated
programmable microprocessor controlled pullers.
Cell Biology
Harvard Apparatus manufactures and sells a complete range of high quality equipment and supplies to fabricate micropipettes.
pipette pullers
To reshape the pipette or to fuse the tip into a different geometry, a microforge system is used. A microforge uses a heating element,
microscope, illumination, micromanipulators and microtools to change the shape of or contact fuse other elements to the micropipette pipette by
heating certain sections of the micropipette to either soften (for bending) or melting (fusing) the micropipette. Some types of microforges can also
be fabricate metal and glass microtools.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
331
Pipette Pullers
pipette pullers
Programmable Pipette Pullers
A state of the art, microprocessor controlled horizontal pipette puller for pulling single- or multi-barrel micropipettes
W4 69-0151
pipette pullers
Cell Biology
• Two models available:
– Single-barrel
– Multi-barrel
• Microprocessor controlled system performs
programmable multiple step pulling sequences
• Produces micropipettes for patch clamping,
intracellular electrodes, injection micropipettes,
micro needles, etc.
• Consistent pulling force by utilizing pneumatic
pressure instead of gravity or magnetic fields
The PMP-102 is a state of the art microprocessor controlled horizontal
pipette puller that has been designed to pull two identical single barrel
pipettes at the same time. The pipettes can be used as patch clamp
electrodes, intracellular electrodes, injection micropipette or microneedles.
The PMP-107 is similar to the PMP-102, but is designed to pull a single 4or 7-barrel pipette. Under program control, the PMP-107 can automatically
heat, twist and pull a multi-barrel pipette. There is no need for any manual
rotation or any inconsistent timing interrupt control.
Exclusive Optical-Digital Taper Measurement
Instead of a mechanical tip length setting as on other pipette pullers, the
PMP-102 and PMP-107 use an exclusive optical-digital ruler to perform
precise taper length setting, real-time measuring and controlling. With this
feature, a user can handle the taper pulling of pipette tips precisely and
very easily. Equipped with a powerful computerized tip sensing function,
the PMP-102 and PMP-107 can automatically finish the tip pulling.
Computerized Heater Control
The PMP-102 and PMP-107 use an advanced microcontroller design to
perform real-time heater monitoring and pulling control. Thus, they will
always provide precise heating power, despite multiple/consecutive
pipette pullings or changes in thermal/electrical characteristics.
Programmable Sequences for Creation and
Reproduction
There are 25 user programmable pulling sequences with 18 steps in each
sequence. Users can start the pulling sequence by just pressing the Start
button.
Factory Installed Preset Programs for Major
Different Pipette Pulls
Every pipette puller is pre-installed with a number of different pipette
pulling programs. With just a few modifications to these steps or
parameters new programs can be configured.
Pneumatic Pulling Force
Both pullers use a precise controlled pneumatic pressure as the pulling
force rather than gravity or magnetic fields used by other manufacturers.
This technique provides more controlled, even, and consistent dragging
characteristics allowing the units to pull an ideal injection tip or
microelectrode tip. A precision micro-linear ball bearing rail, and advanced
pneumatic components are used to provide no fault pulling movement.
Programming
A simple 4x4 keypad and full information display allows the user to easily
control and read all pulling parameters. Programming functions include
sequences, steps, time, timing, heater level, heater control, and tip length
and actions.
These units are supplied with input tubing and connector, spare heater
filament, tweezers, power cord and manual.
332
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Pipette Pullers
pipette pullers
Programmable Pipette Pullers (continued)
W4 69-0150
Pneumatic
Multi-Barrel Pipette
4- or 7-barrel (W4 69-0150 only)
Each Barrel Pipette
1 mm OD
Heater
Nichrome coil
Heater Control
Microcontroller
Heating
74 general heat levels (24 to 99), 54 auto heat levels
(45 to 98)
Number of Sequences
25
Steps in Each Sequence
18
Taper Length Setting
0.5 to 20 mm
Pressure 1 Regulator
0.1 to 10 p.s.i.
Pressure 2 Regulator
0.1 to 60 p.s.i.
Pressure Gas Input
30 to 60 p.s.i.
Actions
Pull 1, pull 2, pull 2/cool, rotation (W4 69-0150 only),
cool air, return
Display
20 x 4 LCD
Power Input
110/240 VAC
Power Consumption
Max. 150 W
Dimension, H x W x D
17.8 x 27.9 x 35.6 cm
Cell Biology
Pulling Force
pipette pullers
Specifications
Weight:
W4 69-0150
6.8 kg (18 lbs)
W4 69-0151
5.9 kg (13 lbs)
Order #
Product
W4 69-0150 PMP-107 Programmable Multi-Barrel
Pipette Puller
W4 69-0151 PMP-102 Programmable Single-Barrel
Micropipette Puller
W4 69-0161 Unpulled 7-Barrel Pipette for W4 69-0150 Only
W4 69-0162 Unpulled 4-Barrel Pipette for W4 69-0150 Only
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
333
MF-5 and MG-5
pipette pullers
Microforge-Grinding Center
Glass micropipette polishing, shaping, tipping. Bending, beveling, and grinding - all in one compact platform
Microforge and
Microgrinder
Microforge
Microgrinder
An included foot switch, or a heat/speed adjustment dial, can be used to
regulate the attached heater or grinder. In addition to the included
heater/grinder foot switch, the MFG-5A has an second foot switch for the
regulation of pressurized air. Air from an external source is connected to
the Microforge/Grinding Center and, when the foot switch is activated, is
directed to an output channel. Pressure air from this source can be used
for clearing a pipette of dust after grinding, or for expanding or cooling a
pipette during forging.
pipette pullers
Cell Biology
• Glass micropipette tip polishing, shaping,
tipping, bending, bevelling, and grinding all in
one compact platform.
• Quick changeable platinum heater and
microgrinder as center tools.
• Precise, convenient movement controls for
heater/grinder, pipette locations, and optical
focus.
• Universal pipette holder for one to seven barrel
pipette holding and 0-180 degree bevelling.
• Up to 40x long working distance objective and
20x eyepiece optics combination, plus scale
eyepiece for precision measurement.
• Adjustable precision power supply for variable
grinder speed and heating level.
• Pressurized air for pipette tip clearing, expanding
and cooling. Foot switch controllable.
The MFG-5 Microforge/Grinding Center is designed for precise and
efficient modification of micropipette and multi-pipette tips. This unique
apparatus combines a precision microforge with a full-function
microgrinder in a compact platform.
The optical system of the MFG-5 is based on a high-power, horizontally
mounted, binocular microscope. A precision focusing system, with a dualaxial pipette holder, can conveniently and precisely position single or
multi-barrel pipettes. The pipette holder is capable of rotating through
180° to allow a multitude of beveling angles and pipette bending
positions.
The MFG-5 uses high quality optical components which include 10x and
20x wide field eyepieces, and 4x, 10x/0.25, and 40x/0.6 long working
distance plan achromatic objectives. The 10x wide field scale eyepiece
can be used as an independent and accurate measurement tool. Two high
intensity LED’s provide a powerful light source.
334
The MFG-5 can be purchased comprised of the microforge only, the
microgrinder only, or comprised of both components. For the latter
system, the microgrinder and the microforge mini-heater can be quickly
and easily exchanged since both components use the same quick
connector and temperature/speed control system. Finally, the MFG-5 can
be combined with a PMP-102 or a PMP-107 micropipette/multipipette
puller to assemble a complete micropipette production work station.
Specifications
Pipette Movement
Two-axial manipulator and coarse-fine focusing
adjustment
Heater Movement
Three-dimensional adjustment
Pipette Holder
180 degree turnable for single or multipipette holding
Body
Horizontal Binocular microscope
Eyepiece
10x, 20xWF Optional 10x Scaled
Objective Lenses
4x, 10x/0.25, 40x Optional: 25x, 40x/0.6 Long Working
Distance
Heater
Platinum wire
Light
Two super bright white LED’s
Air In/Output
Optional air jet foot switch, in/output tubing and
connector
Microgrinder
Optional changeable microgrinder One foot switch
Accessory
Extra foot switch
Power Supply
20W, 120/240VAC
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1610 MF-5
Microforge
W4 64-1611 MG-5
Microgrinder
W4 64-1612 MFG-5
Microforge-Grinding Center
W4 64-1613 MFG-5A
Microforge-Grinding Center w/ Air
W4 64-1614 MF-5E
Microforge 220/240VAC
W4 64-1615 MG-5E
Microgrinder 220/240VAC
W4 64-1616 MFG-5E
Microforge-Grinding Center
220/240VAC
W4 64-1617 MFG-5AE
Microforge-Grinding Center
with Air 220/240VAC
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
tissue sampling
NEW Automatic Oscillating Tissue Slicer (OTS 5000)
and accuracy and it meets or exceeds the performance of units on the
market costing twice as much.
Automatic Oscillating Tissue Slicer (OTS 5000)
The OTS-5000 Oscillating Tissue Slicer represents the most thoughtfully
designed solution to sectioning either fixed or fresh tissue, and can
prepare sections as thin as 5 microns. Embedding or freezing of the sample
is not required, thus tissue preparation time is reduced dramatically. The
risk of distortion and artifacts normally associated with these procedures
are eliminated. The OTS-5000 meets the highest standards for precision
To minimize the time between harvesting consecutive slices, the OTS-5000
features a user programmable travel window (cutting window). This allows
the section-cutting range of the blade to be customized to the specimen
sample. In conjunction with the “home button”, the programmable
window guarantees rapid sectioning of even the largest of specimens. As
well, the OTS-5000 allows the sectioning of samples in two different
modes. In the single-slice mode, the unit prepares one section at a time
and the blade repositions itself and waits to perform the next slice upon
triggering by the user. In the multiple-slice mode, the OTS-5000 will
automatically perform multiple uniform slices.
The OTS-5000 control panel has been redesigned to allow for
ambidextrous and ergonomical operation. The keypad has been sealed to
avoid exposure from buffer spills. The tray is made from molded clear
polycarbonate for improved viewing of the slicing operation. The tray is
removable to facilitate specimen mounting and cleaning. Two white LED’s
are installed in the blade head, which provide constant cold-illumination of
the specimen during the slicing process.
Cell Biology
Updates and Advantages of the OTS 5000 Series:
• Cutting window for automatic sectioning allows
for faster and more reliable sectioning.
• Control pad with membrane buttons is now
separated from the slicer module for improved
ergonomics and protection of electronic
components.
• 3-axis adjustable specimen mounting pedestal.
• Easy to release slicer head for safety and ease of
specimen mounting.
• Slice thickness is now adjustable from 1-999
microns (in 1 micron increments).
• One touch “home” button to return the blade arm
to a predetermined point near the specimen.
• The specimen tray is made from clear
polycarbonate for improved viewing of the slice
operation.
• The pivot pins which come as a standard on the
pedestal as well as the vice holder allow changing
of the angle of the pedestal relative to the blade.
Easy sample orientation in all directions.
• The tray includes a lock-on feature for a more
secure mount to the platform.
• The standard unit comes complete with our
unique pivotal tissue pedestal (you can mount the
specimen directly on the pedestal without the
need for vices or blocks mounted in the sample
tray).
tissue sampling
The OTS 5000 now features a new innovative design of the slicer head
which minimizes Z-Axis vibration. This improvement dramatically improves
slice surface integrity and is especially beneficial in the use of fresh tissue
where IR/DIC imaging methods are used. The unique blade holder has the
ability to accept sapphire blades as well as razor blades.
The OTS-5000 is engineered for maximum stability, allowing even the most
delicate of tissue to be cut successfully every time. The knife holder allows
the blade to be well-secured and the blade angle set from 10-20 degrees.
The specimen mount is adjustable on the x, y, and z axis. Blade oscillation
is adjustable from 50-5000 cycles/minute, the knife advance is
continuously adjustable with a touch of the keypad from 0-5mm/s, and the
section thickness is adjustable in 1 micron increments ranging from 1-999
microns. This precision slicer features automatic touch selection of section
thickness, blade speed, advance, and a user-defined travel window so that
consecutive sections may be cut easily and rapidly. Other OTS-5000
features include: Touch pad control of the blade height, slice counter /
slice thickness, precise bar graph displays of blade oscillation and advance
speeds.
The OTS-5000 is designed for easy operation and maintenance. The
specimen collecting tray is removable and easy to clean. All controls may
be set with one hand with options for multiple slicing modes.
The unit comes complete with gooseneck magnifying lens, media tray (2.5”
wide) and pedestal, specimen vice holder, blocks, as well as a foot switch
with 6’ cable. A large tray (3.5” wide) is available as an option and comes
complete with fixed stage and adjustable pedestals.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
335
tissue sampling
NEW Automatic Oscillating Tissue Slicer (OTS 5000)
(continued)
OTS-5000 Continued
The tissue pedestal with pivotal pin (included with media tray) allows for
the mounting of a specimen directly to the pedestal and the ability to
change the angle of your specimen relative to the blade, offering maximum
flexibility in specimen orientation. The sample vice with pivotal pins (also
included in package) allows for the adherence of your specimen directly to
a mounting block.
Specifications
Vertical Travel:
28 mm
Slice Thickness:
Adjustable from 1 to 999 microns in
1 micron increments
Blade Speed:
Adjustable from 50- 5000 cycles per minute
Blade Angle Adjustment:
Adjustable from 15° to 35°
Blade Travel:
35 mm total
The OTS-4500 Tissue Slicer
Blade Types:
Sapphire, Razor, Diamond, Glass
The OTS-4500 Tissue Slicer is a scaled down version of the OTS-5000. All
of the specifications of the OTS-5000 are the same for the OTS-4500. The
only differences between the two units are as follows:
Blade Advance Speed:
Continuously adjustable from
100 microns-5 mm per second
Blade Reverse Speed:
2.5 mm per second
Specimen Size:
25 x 25 x 15 mm (1 x 1 x .6 in) (W x D x H)
maximum volume
Functional Features
Magnifier:
4 in diameter, X2 lens mounted on 12 in
(30 cm) gooseneck, 9 in working distance
1. Adjustable window
Lighted:
White LED’s mounted on the knife holder
aimed at blade edge.
The OTS 4500 does not include:
2. Multi-Slice function
3. Home functionality
Accessories
1. Foot Switch
tissue sampling
Cell Biology
336
Dimensions:
Slicer
Keypad
27 x 40 x 21.5 cm (10.5 x 16 x 7.5 in)
17 x 8.5 x 3.4 cm (6.7 x 3.4 x 1.35 in)
Weight: 13kg (30 lbs)
Power Requirements:
110-240VAC, 50-60Hz universal power input.
Available with CE Mark
Display:
3 segment LED display of slice counter and
thickness. (Changes with appropriate buttons)
20 segment LED’s bar graph display blade
oscillation and advance speed.
Specimen Mount:
X, Y, Z axis adjustable pedestal: 1 3/4 x 2 1/2 in
2. Tissue Blocks
3. Vice Holder
The OTS-5000 Refrigerated Controller and Tray
The OTS-5000 Refrigerated Controller and Tray provide refrigeration
capabilities to the OTS-5000 Tissue Slicer. The refrigeration controller’s
three-digit LED displays the current temperature of the bath medium in
degrees C. The temperature is maintained within 0.5°C. The temperature
range on the unit is between 0-10°C.
The refrigerated tray is fitted with a Peltier heat exchange unit. A cold
water source is circulated through the assembly to transfer heat. The
tubing is connected to the tray with quick connect fittings. No tools are
necessary for installation. The fittings are self sealing to prevent leaking
during installation. The tray fits directly to the mounting platform of the
OTS 5000.
Mounting Blocks
1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 in (3 each) /1 x 1 x 1 in (3 each)
Working Space Requirements:
30 x 45 x 25 cm (12 x 18 x 10 in) (W x D x H)
5000 Series Refrigeration Controller and Tray
Temperature Control Range
0°- 10°C
Temperature Indication
3 digit LED display indicates temperature in
0.1°C with a negative sign indicator.
Power Requirements
115/230V AC 50-60 Hz auto ranging fused at
1 amp max current
Dimensions:
Control Module
Cooling Tray
20.9 x 15.9 x 13.9 cm (8.25 x 6.25 x 5.5 in)
10.8 x 8.9 x 6.7 cm (4.25 x 3.5 x 2.625 in)
with a 3 ft cable (91.4cm)
Order #
Product
W4 69-0266
OTS 5000 Tissue Slicer
W4 69-0267
OTS 5000 with Refrigeration
W4 69-0265
OTS 4500 Tissue Slicer
W4 69-0264
Sapphire Blade for Tissue Slicers
W4 69-0262
Slicer Kit
W4 69-0257
Specimen Adhesive Pk/5
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microscopy
Section
Page No.
Microscopes
Stereo Zoom Microscope Series, Z850
338 - 341
Series Compound Microscope, 3025
342
Inverted Phase Contrast Microscope, 3032PH
343
Cameras
ProgRes Digital Microscope Cameras
344 - 348
XYClone
349 - 352
Z850,
see page 338
Illuminators
Intralux 5100 Fiber Optic Cold Halogen
Light Sources
353
V-Lux 1000 Fiber Optic Cold Light Source
354
NCL 150 Fiber Optic Cold Light Source
354
IntraLED 2020 Fiber Optic Cold Light Source
355
Light Source Filters
355
Spare Lamps and Power Cords
356
Ring Light Adapters
ProgRes Digital
Microscope Cameras,
see page 344
356
Fiber Optic Ringlights
357 - 360
Gooseneck Light Guides
361 - 362
Articulating Arm and Modular Accessory System
363
Glass Light Fiber Backlights
364
Brightfield/Darkfield Base
364
Accessories
365
Intralux 5100,
see page 353
Microscopy
Coverslips
LED light Source,
see page 355
Coverslips,
see page 365
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
337
microscopes
NEW Model Z850 Stereo Zoom Microscope Series
• High performance optics at an affordable price
• Excellent zoom range 0.8x-5.0x
• 115 mm working distance for easy access to
specimens
• Binocular or trinocular viewing heads are inclined
45° and can rotate 360°
The Z850 Series is a versatile, high performance, ergonomically designed
zoom stereo microscope ruggedly built to withstand years of heavy use.
With a zoom ratio of 6.3:1 the Z850 provides superior optical performance
at an affordable price.
These Microscopes are supplied in several complete systems with either
Trinocular or Binocular zoom bodies and six different stand options.
Select from the plain focusing stand or the LED illuminator stand. The
booms stands do not have illumination, but permit working with large
objects.
microscopes
LED Illuminator Stand
Microscopy
Simultaneous variable reflected and transmitted LED illumination can be
utilized on this stand. The compact, thin design of the base allows users
to keep sample positions low and maintains easy accessibility to the
variable light controls. The reflected LED illuminator is powered by a 12
volt, 2 watt LED system and the transmitted LED illuminator by a 12 volt,
4 watt LED system. Both light sources are variable and controlled by a
universal power supply (110–240V).
Plain Focusing Stand
The Plain Focusing Stand’s thin design helps keep sample positions low
resulting in increased user comfort. The focus mount is easily removable
and can be positioned at two different points on the dovetail to offer
maximum flexibility when working with small or large size samples.
338
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microscopes
NEW Model Z850 Stereo Zoom Microscope Series
(continued)
Articulating Swing Arm Stand
Boom Stand
The boom stand features safety tracks on the horizontal arm and Delrin
inserts in the focus block to ensure smooth, precise movements.
Designed for maximum freedom and flexibility this stand will deliver the
adjustability you need. Ideal for the inspection of specimens that require
a lot of movement or to scan a large sample area, the articulating arm
can be easily adjusted into hard to reach positions and moved easily out
of the way.
Ball Bearing Boom Stand
Diascopic/Embroyo Transfer Stand
For users seeking precise, stable movements the ball bearing boomstand
is the recommended choice. Sturdy and ruggedly built, the ball bearing
boom stand is ideal for observation applications where magnification
adjustment and the ability to move across a sample are important
considerations.
This cost-effective transmitted illumination stand provides bright, even
illumination across the entire magnification range. A tiltable mirror
provides direct and oblique illumination for low contrast specimens. This
unit can be configured with either a 6V, 20W halogen illuminator or 150W
fiber optic illuminator.
Microscopy
microscopes
®
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
339
microscopes
NEW Model Z850 Stereo Zoom Microscope Series
(continued)
Specifications
Viewing Body
Optical System
Twin zooming objective
Viewing Bodies
Binocular or Trinocular with 50/50 light split
ESD Protection
Viewing body is made from anti-electrostatic materials
Anti-Mold
Anti-mold and airtight design
Magnification
0.8x to 5.0x with click stops at 1x, 2x, 3x, 4x and 5x
Zoom Ratio
6.3:1
Working Distance
115 mm (4.5 in)
Viewing Angle
45 degrees
Interpupillary Distance Adjustment
52-75 mm
Camera Adaptability
0.4x or 0.5x C-mount adapters, photo tube
Eyepieces (with diopter adjustment)
WF 10x/22 mm with reticle holder (Reticle size: 27 mm), WF 15X/16 mm with reticle holder (reticle size: 20 mm),
WF 20x/12.5 mm
Auxiliary Objectives
0.5x (211 mm working distance) and 2.0x (43.5 mm working distance)
Stands
microscopes
Microscopy
340
Plain Focusing Stand
76 mm focus mount diameter, 100 mm focusing stroke, 240 x 290 x 318 mm (9.4 x 11.4 x 12.5 in) (LxDxH), 125 mm black & white plate
LED Reflected/Transmitted
Illuminated Stand
76 mm focus mount diameter, 100 mm focusing stroke, 240 x 292 x 318 mm (9.4 x 11.5 x 12.5 in) (LxDxH), 100 mm clear glass and
black & white plate. Variable Transmitted & Reflected LED illumination. Average LED life expectancy - 7,000 hours, Color
temperature: 6200-7000° Kelvin
Diascopic Stand with Transmitted
Illumination Attachment
76 mm focus mount diameter, 100 mm focusing stroke, 255 x 310 x 382 mm (10 x 12.2 x 15 in) (LxDxH), 280 mm clear glass plate.
Tiltable mirror provides direct and oblique illumination. Choice of 6V, 20 W halogen or 150 W fiber optic illuminators
Pole Stand
76 mm focus mount diameter, 305 mm pole height, 193 mm focusing stroke, 240 x 290 x 318 mm (9.4 x 11.4 x 12.5 in) (LxDxH),
125 mm black & white plate
Boom Stand
Base dimensions: 254 x 254 mm (10 x 10 in), Vertical Post - 365 mm, Horizontal Post - 518 mm. Physical weight 37 lbs. (16.8 kg)
Ball Bearing Boom Stand
Base dimensions: 254 x 254 mm (10 x 10 in),Vertical Post - 394 mm, Horizontal Post - 585 mm. Physical weight 42 lbs. (19 kg)
FlexArm/Swing Arm Stand
The Swinging Arm has a 3 ft scanable range and a lockable 14.5 in vertical motion range with an
adjustable counterbalanced support. Horizontal or vertical clamp mount
Eyepiece Specifications
Auxiliary
Objective
Working
Distance
(mm)
-
WF 10x/22
WF 15x/16
WF 20x/12.5
Total
Magnification
Visual Field
Total (mm)
Total
Magnification
Visual Field
Total (mm)
Total
Magnification
Visual Field
Total (mm)
115x
8-50x
27.5-4.4x
12-75x
20.0-3.2x
6-100x
15.6-2.5x
0.5x
211x
4-25x
55.0-8.8x
6-37.5x
40.0-6.4x
8-50x
31.2-5.0x
2x
43.5x
16-100x
13.8-2.2x
24-150x
10.0-1.6x
32-200x
7.8-1.3x
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microscopes
Product
W4 64-1802
Trinocular Zoom Stereo Microscope on LED stand Incident & Transmitted ESD Trinocular viewing head, 50/50 light split,
0.8x to 5.0x zoom range, inclined at 45°, 115 mm W.D., interpupillary distance adj. 52-75 mm, glass lens shield Widefield 10x
eyepieces with built-in diopter adjustment (paired), 22 mm field of view Variable LED incident (12v/2w) and transmitted (12v/4w)
focusing stand with stageclips, universal power supply Frosted, clear glass, black & white stage plates, dust cover and manual
C-mount adapters and cameras sold separately
Binocular Zoom Stereo Microscope on Boom Stand Binocular viewing head, 0.8x to 5.0x zoom range, inclined at 45°,
115 mm working distance, interpupillary distance adj. 52-75 mm, glass lens shield Widefield 10x eyepieces with built-in diopter
adjustment (paired), 22 mm field of view, Bonder arm focusing mount, boom stand, dust cover and manual
Trinocular Zoom Stereo Microscope on Boom Stand Trinocular viewing head, 50/50 light split, 0.8x to 5.0x zoom range,
inclined at 45º, 115mm W.D., interpupillary distance adj. 52-75 mm, glass lens shieldWidefield 10x eyepieces with built-in
diopter adjustment (paired), 22 mm field of view, Bonder arm focusing mount, boom stand, dust cover and manual C-mount
adapters and cameras sold separately
Trinocular Zoom Stereo Microscope on Ball Bearing Boom Stand Trinocular viewing head, 50/50 light split, 0.8x to
5.0x zoom range, inclined at 45°, 115 mm W.D., interpupillary distance adj. 52-75 mm, glass lens shield Widefield 10x
eyepieces with built-in diopter adjustment (paired), 22 mm field of view, Bonder arm focusing mount, ball bearing boom
stand, dust cover and manual C-mount adapters and cameras sold separately
Trinocular Zoom Stereo Microscope on Flex Arm Stand Trinocular viewing head, 50/50 light split, 0.8x to 5.0x zoom range,
inclined at 45°, 115 mm working distance, interpupillary distance adj. 52-75 mm, glass lens shield Widefield 10x eyepieces
with built-in diopter adjustment (paired), 22 mm field of view, Bonder arm focusing mount, flexible articulating arm stand
with c-clamp mount Dust cover and instruction manual, C-mount adapters and cameras sold separately
Viewing Heads ESD safe Binocular viewing head, 0.8x to 5.0x zoom range, inclined at 45°, 115 mm working distance,
interpupillary distance adj. 52-75 mm, glass lens shield
Viewing Heads ESD safe Trinocular viewing head, 50/50 light split, 0.8x to 5.0x zoom range, inclinedat 45º, 115 mm W.D.,
interpupillary distance adj. 52-75 mm, glass lens shield
Camera and Video Adapters 0.5x c-mount adapter
Camera and Video Adapters 1.0x video adapter with c-mount (no lens)
Eyepieces WF10x eyepiece with built-in diopter adjustment, 22mm field of view. Eyepiece accepts a 26.5 mm reticle
Eyepieces WF15x eyepiece with built-in diopter adjustment, 16mm field of view. Eyepiece accepts a 20 mm reticle
Eyepieces WF20x eyepiece with built-in diopter adjustment and eyeguard, 12.5 mm field of view, does not accept a reticle.
Eyepieces Roll down rubber eyeguards (pair) - small
Eyepieces Roll down rubber eyeguards (pair) - large
Reticle 26.5 mm eyepiece reticle, 10 mm/100 divisions with crossline
Reticle 26.5 mm eyepiece reticle, 10 mm/100 divisions without crossline
Reticle 20 mm eyepiece reticle, 10 mm/100 divisions with crossline
Reticle 20 mm eyepiece reticle, 10 mm/100 divisions
Stage Micrometer, 1 mm/1 - division (each division 0.010 mm)
Calibration slide
0.5x Auxilliary objective, working distance 211 mm
2.0x Auxiliary objective, working distance 43.5 mm
Plain focusing stand with ø76 mm pod holder, black and white contrast plate
Variable LED incident (12v/2w) and transmitted (12v4w) focusing stand with ø76mm pod holder, stage clips,
universal power supply,
Diascopic stand for embroyo transfer with tiltable mirror reflector and ø76mm pod holder (fiber optic or halogen
illuminator sold seperately)
Pole stand with focus mount, black and white plate - no illumination
Variable Halogen incident (12v15w) and variable transmitted (12v15w) focusing stand with ø76 mm pod holder, stage clips,
glass and black & white plate Stages and Stage Plate
Universal boom stand, horizontal arm with bonder port, base dimensions 10 x 10 in, 14 3/8 in vertical post, 20 3/8 in
horiztonal post, order with W4 64-1834 Bonder arm
Ball bearing boom stand, horizontal arm with bonder port, base dimensions 10 x 10 in, Vertical post 15.5 in,
Horizontal arm 23 order with W4 64-1834 Bonder arm
Ball bearing boom stand extension post
Flexible arm stand, lockable 14.5 in vertical motion range, 3 foot scanable range, adjustable counterbalanced support
use with W4 64-1833
Horizontal or vertical c-clamp mount for use with W4 64-1832
Bonder arm (E-Arm) with ø76 mm pod holder, 5/8 in mounting pin
W4 64-1803
W4 64-1804
W4 64-1805
W4 64-1806
W4 64-1807
W4 64-1808
W4 64-1809
W4 64-1810
W4 64-1811
W4 64-1812
W4 64-1813
W4 64-1814
W4 64-1815
W4 64-1816
W4 64-1817
W4 64-1818
W4 64-1819
W4 64-1820
W4 64-1821
W4 64-1822
W4 64-1823
W4 64-1824
W4 64-1825
W4 64-1826
W4 64-1827
W4 64-1828
W4 64-1829
W4 64-1830
W4 64-1831
W4 64-1832
W4 64-1833
W4 64-1834
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Microscopy
Order #
microscopes
NEW Model Z850 Stereo Zoom Microscope Series
(continued)
341
microscopes
NEW 3025 Series Compound Microscope
Specifications
Optical System
AIS Infinity Corrected
Viewing Body
Ergonomic binocular head angled 0-35°
Eyepieces
EWF 10x focusing eyepieces with eyeguards, 22 mm
field of view
Nosepiece
Reversed quintuple nosepiece
Stage
Tension adjustable ceramic stage with low position
coaxial controls, right hand control
Condenser
N.A. 1.25 Abbe condenser with built-in aperture iris
diaphragm
Focusing Mechanism
Coaxial coarse and fine focusing mechanism with
marking on fine focus knobs. Fine focus sensitivity
to 0.002 mm
Objectives
Plan Achromat, 4x, 10x, 40xR, 100xR oil
Illumination
Variable Koehler 6 volt 30 watt halogen illumination
Filter
Clear blue standard, optional frosted blue, green and
yellow filters are available
Stand
Cast alloy aluminum
Shipping weight
27 lbs (12.25 kg)
Shipping Dimensions
18 x 16 x 24 in (46 x 41 x 61 cm) (H x W x D)
Order #
Product
W4 64-1840 3025-BE-CS Ergo binocular microscope,
EWF 10x/22mm focusing eyepieces, AIS Plan 4x,
10x, 40xR, 100xR oil objectives, ceramic coated
stage with tension adjustment, 6v30w illumination
microscopes
•
•
•
•
Advanced clinical microscope
AIS Plan 4x, 10x, 40x, 100xR oil objectives
Ceramic coated stage with tension adjustment
6 volt 30 watt illumination
Microscopy
Designed for research and other clinical applications, the 3025 features
AIS infinity optical system renowned for resolution, contrast, and clarity
that is among the very best in this class of microscope.
As configured the 3025 is supplied complete with the following
components: ergo binocular microscope, EWF 10 x 22 mm focusing
eyepieces, AIS Plan 4x, 10x, 40xR, 100xR oil objectives, ceramic coated
stage with tension adjustment, 6 volt 30 watt illumination. Popular addons are listed in the order information section.
Popular Add-ons
W4 64-1841 25-2000-E Photo/video intermediate attachment
for use with ergonomic binocular viewing head
W4 64-1842 25-3179-PL AIS 50xR oil plan achromat objective,
N.A. 0.90
W4 64-1843 25-3177-PL AIS Planachromat 20x objective,
N.A. 0.40, W.D. 5.1 mm
W4 64-1844 25-3178-PL AIS Plan achromat 60xR objective
W4 64-1845 5048 C-Mount adapter sleeve
W4 64-1846 5041 0.67 c-mount adapter for 1/1.8 chip
sensors - high resolution
W4 64-1782 (C3) ProgRes® C3 '- 1/1.8" 3.3 mega pixel
CCD camera, 2080 x 1542 pixel Includes software
W4 64-1784 (C3 USB) ProgRes® C3 USB (without cooling)
'- 1/1.8" 3.3 mega pixel CCD camera,
2080 x 1542 pixel Includes software
W4 64-1785 (C5) ProgRes® C5 '- 2/3” 5.02 mega pixel CCD
camera, 2580 x 1944 pixel Includes software
W4 64-1786 (C5-C) ProgRes® C5 - version with cooling '- 2/3"
5.02 mega pixel CCD camera, 2580 x 1944 pixel
342
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microscopes
NEW 3032PH Inverted Phase Contrast Microscope
Specifications
Optical System
AIS Infinity Corrected
Eyepieces
EWF10x focusable eyepieces with eyeguards,
22 mm field of view, 48-75 mm interpupillary distance
settings, ±5 diopter adjustment
Viewing Head
Siedentopf trinocular viewing head with photo tube,
inclined 30°, rotatable 360° (c-mount adapter sold
seperately)
Light Distribution
Binocular 100% or binocular/trinocular 20%/80%
Nosepiece
Side facing quintuple nosepiece
Objectives
Infinity PL 4x, PLPH 10x, PLPH 20x
Stage
Fixed plain stage 160 mm x 250 mm with glass insert
Condenser
ELWD condenser, N.A. 0.3, working distance 72 mm
Illumination
Variable Koehler 6 volt 30 watt halogen illumination
Filters
Clear blue, green and ground glass filters, Precentered phase slider with 10x and 20x annuli and
brightfield position
Shipping Dimensions
19 x 16 x 26 in (48 x 41 x 66 cm)
Shipping weight
30 lbs (13.6 kg)
Trinocular inverted phase contrast microscope
Ideal for tissue culture and cell biology
Hard coated stage with glass insert
6 volt 30 watt illumination
Sharp, high contrast images driven by the AIS infinity optical system
make the 3032 inverted microscope an outstanding performer for routine
applications in embryology, tissue culture, pharmacology and
immunology.
The 3032’s ergonomic, modular design allows users to add a fluorescence
illuminator with a 2 position filter cube slider. A third position on the
filter slider is left open to quickly switch to brightfield or phase contrast.
A wide variety of accessories allow the 3032 to be used for examining
cell viability in petri dishes, culture flasks and well plates.
As configured the 3032PH is supplied complete with the following
components: EW10x22 eyepieces, infinity PL 4x, PLPH 10x, PLPH 20x,
plain stage - glass insert, 6 volt 30 watt halogen illumination, dust cover,
and power cord.
Product
W4 64-1847
3032PH Trinocular inverted microscope,
EW10x/22 eyepieces, infinity PL 4x, PLPH10x,
PLPH 20x, plain stage - glass insert, 6v30w
halogen illumination
W4 64-1848
AIS LWD Plan Phase 40x objective, N.A. 0.60,
W.D. 2.6 mm
W4 64-1849
Universal attachable mechanical stage, right
hand coaxial controls, movement range 120 x 78 mm
W4 64-1850
32-35PD Ø35 mm petri dish holder
W4 64-1851
32-54SGH Ø54 mm Slide Glass Holder
W4 64-1852
32-TH Teraski holder
W4 64-1845
5048 C-mount adapter sleeve
W4 64-1846
5041 0.67 c-mount adapter for 1/1.8 chip sensors
- high resolution
W4 64-1782
(C3) ProgRes® C3 '- 1/1.8" 3.3 mega pixel
CCD camera, 2080 x 1542 pixel Includes software
W4 64-1784
(C3 USB) ProgRes® C3 USB (without cooling)
'- 1/1.8" 3.3 mega pixel CCD camera,
2080 x 1542 pixel. Includes software.
W4 64-1785
(C5) ProgRes® C5 '- 2/3" 5.02 mega pixel CCD
camera, 2580 x 1944 pixel Includes software
W4 64-1786
(C5-C) ProgRes® C5 - version with cooling '- 2/3"
5.02 mega pixel CCD camera, 2580 x 1944 pixel
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Microscopy
•
•
•
•
Order #
microscopes
Optional AIS Infinity Phase 40xR objective, Plan Achromat 10x, 20x, and 40xR objectives,
attachable mechanical stage, Ø35 mm petri dish holder, teraski holder and Ø54 mm glass
slide holder.
343
microscope cameras
NEW ProgRes® Digital Microscope Cameras
microscope cameras
Microscopy
344
• Large selection of CMOS and CCD cameras
• Powerful ProgRes® CapturePro software included
with all camers
• Works with Microsoft Windows®
or Mac® OSX Systems
• Superior image quality at an affordable price
ProgRes® Digital Microscope Cameras
Microscope cameras of the ProgRes® family are based on more than two
decades experience in the development and production of high-end
solutions for digital imaging. ProgRes® cameras are suitable for all
contrast methods in light microscopy and can be easily integrated into
each laboratory via C-Mount and USB 2.0/ FireWire interfaces.
ProgRes® cameras provide rapid frame rate capability while keeping
power consumption at low levels – all this in support of Green
Microscopy and for the sake of our environment. High frame rates provide
fast live images and provide easy workflow and convenient use
.Furthermore, the high sensitivity of the ProgRes® research grade cameras
meet the strict requirements of low-light applications. The exact
reproduction of colors, and the display of fine details due to the high
resolution capability of these cameras, make them particularly well suited
for demanding analysis and reliable documentation.
ProgRes® Image Capture Software
All ProgRes® microscope cameras come with the powerful ProgRes®
CapturePro image capture software .This is an intuitive software suite
that directly guides the user to an optimal image. The software is suitable
for both routine as well as advanced applications and is thoroughly
designed for professional use. The ProgRes® software can be operated as
a standalone application and as twain plug-in. Of course, the ProgRes®
CapturePro software can be operated on Windows as well as the Apple
operating system platforms.
ProgRes® Cameras - Software Benefits
Multi-Fluorescence Mode
Measurements
• Definition of up to 5 color filters
Guided Workflow for multifluorescence images
• Calibration Options
• Storage with the captured image
• Auto-fluorescence reduction
• Reproducible Data
Programmable Resolution
Live Image Functions
Time Lapse
• Various Resolutions
• Rotate/Mirror
• ROI and crop functionality
• Focus tool
• Adjustment of delay and duration
of capture sequences
• Microscanning
• Automatic exposure
• Storage as movie file
• Various Measurement Tools
User Preferences
• Storage of individual user settings
• Connection of up to 5 different
cameras to one computer
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microscope cameras
NEW ProgRes® CMOS Microscope Cameras
ProgRes® Digital Microscope Cameras (Continued)
The ProgRes® CMOS Camera Range:
• ProgRes® CT3
• ProgRes® CT5
Benefits:
• Highest frame rates
• Good color reproduction
• Available in color (CT3, CT5)
and monochrome (CT5)
Experience the High Performance
ProgRes® CMOS Cameras
Designed to provide the highest versatility and cost-effectiveness, the
digital microscope cameras of the ProgRes® CMOS range allow for quick
and precise setting of both specimen and microscope. The fast live
images coupled with the outstanding CMOS technology and high
resolutions make these cameras the first choice in education institutes
and training labs.
Fields of Application
Image analysis, documentation and archiving in micro- and macroscopy in
the fields of:
• Material Science, Geology & Mineralogy
• Life Science, Diagnostics
• Quality Control
• Education and Teaching
CT3
CT5
Image Sensor
1/2" CMOS
Color
1/2.5" CMOS
Color / Monochrome
Sensor Resolution [max]
2048 × 1536 pixel [3.15 Mpix]
2592 x 1944 pixel [5 Mpix]
Sensor Size [H x V]
6.55 x 4.92 mm (.26 x .19 in)
5.70 x 4.28 mm (.22 x .17 in)
Pixel Size
3.2 µm2
2.2 µm2
A / D Conversion
10 bit
12 bit
Pixel Clock
48 MHz | 36 MHz
48 MHz
Dynamic Range
58 dB
68 dB
Exposure Times
50 µs - 3 s
75 µs - 3 s
Analog Gain
1x - 8x
1x - 8x
Max. Frame Rate [image size]
typical via USB 2.0)
12 fps [2048 x 1536 pixel]
9 fps [2048 x 1536 pixel]
9 fps [2592 x 1944 pixel]
5 fps [2048 x 1536 pixel]
Image Resolution Binning:
2x, 3x
2x, 4x
Cooling
no
no
Digital Interface
USB 2.0 / FireWire A
USB 2.0
Optical Connection
C-Mount (0.5× TV Pref.)
Trigger In / Out
Synchronization with external devices; configurable via control software
Voltage Supply
USB / FireWire A Powered
USB Powered
Power Consumption
Approx. 1.9 W | 2.5 W
Approx. 1.8 W
Ambient Conditions
Temperature: +5°C - +55°C / Humidity: 5% - 80%, not condensing
Stock Conditions
Temperature: -20°C - +70°C
Temperature: -20°C - +70°C
Dimensions (L × W × H)
89 × 84 × 93 mm (3.5 x 3.3 x 3.6 in)
89 × 84 × 93 mm (3.5 x 3.3 x 3.6 in)
Weight
Approx. 700 g (1.5 lbs)
Software
ProgRes CapturePro PC / MAC (TWAIN for PC only); ProgRes SDK
External Camera Driver
Available at: www.progres-camera.com
Hardware Requirements
PC: MS WIN 2000 / XP / Vista | Mac: OS X 10.4 or higher, 3 GHz CPU, 1 GB RAM, 64 MB graphics, FireWire a or USB 2.0
®
Microscopy
ProgRes® Camera Type
microscope cameras
Specifications
Approx. 700 g (1.5 lbs)
®
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
345
microscope cameras
NEW ProgRes® CCD Routine Microscope Cameras
ProgRes® Digital Microscope Cameras (Continued)
The ProgRes® CCD Routine Camera Range:
• ProgRes® C3
• ProgRes® C5
• ProgRes® C7
Benefits:
• Perfect color reproduction
• Excellent image quality
• High resolution & fast live image
Visualize Exact Colors
ProgRes® CCD Routine Cameras
Excellent color reproduction and high resolution are the distinguishing
features of the cameras of the ProgRes® CCD Routine range. With up to 7
megapixel resolution, these cameras are ideal tools for high quality image
documentation and elementary imagine analysis. To facilitate precise
focusing and positioning of specimens, a high resolution, fast, live image
frame rate (up to 50 fps) is available.
Fields of Application
Image analysis, documentation and archiving in micro- and macroscopy in
the fields of:
• Material Science, Geology & Mineralogy
• Life science, Diagnostics
• Quality Control
• Pathology and Cell Biology
• Forensics
Specifications
microscope cameras
Microscopy
346
ProgRes® Camera Type
C3
C5
C7
Image Sensor
1/2" CCD
Color
2/3" CCD
Color
1/2.5" CCD
Color
Sensor Resolution [max]
2080 x 1542 pixel [3.3 Mpix]
2580 x 1944 pixel [5.0 Mpix]
3072 x 2304 pixel [7.1 Mpix]
Sensor Size [H x V]
8.10 x 6.64 mm
9.74 x 7.96 mm
5.71 x 4.29 mm
Pixel Size
3.45 µm
3.4 µm
1.86 µm2
A / D Conversion
12 bit
12 bit
12 bit
Pixel Clock
12 MHz
12 MHz | 18 MHz
32 MHz
Dynamic Range
61 dB
61 dB | 60 dB
60 dB
Exposure Times
500 µs - 180 s
400 µs - 180 s
200 µs - 5 s
Analog Gain
1x - 8x
1x - 8x
1x - 16x
Max. Frame Rate [image size]
18 fps [1040 x 770 pixel]
9 fps [1290 x 972 pixel]
11 fps [1228 x 920 pixel]
Image Resolution Binning:
2x - 5x
2x - 4x
4x
Program Scan:
346 × 256 | 692 × 512
644 × 490 | 1290 × 972
614 x 466 | 1228 x 932
Cooling
Optional
Optional
No
Digital Interface
FireWire A
FireWire A
FireWire A
Optical Connection
C-Mount (0.5× TV pref.)
C-Mount (0.63× TV pref.)
C-Mount (0.5× TV pref.)
Trigger In / Out
Synchronization with external devices; configurable via control software
Voltage Supply
USB powered
FireWire Powered
FireWire Powered
Power Consumption
Approx. 4 W
Approx. 6 W
Approx. 6 W
Ambient Conditions
Temperature: 0°C - +35 °C / Humidity: 5% - 80%, not condensing
Stock Conditions
Temperature: -20°C - +70°C
Temperature: -20°C - +70°C
Temperature: -20°C - +70°C
Dimensions (L × W × H)
89 × 84 × 93 mm (3.5 x 3.3 x 3.6 in)
89 × 84 × 93 mm (3.5 x 3.3 x 3.6 in)
89 × 84 × 93 mm (3.5 x 3.3 x 3.6 in)
Weight
Approx. 700 g (1.5 lbs)
Approx. 700 g (1.5 lbs)
Approx. 700 g (1.5 lbs)
Software
ProgRes CapturePro PC / MAC (TWAIN for PC only); ProgRes SDK
External Camera Driver
Available at: www.progres-camera.com
Hardware Requirements
PC: MS WIN 2000 / XP / Vista | Mac: OS X 10.4 or higher, 3 GHz CPU, 1 GB RAM, 64 MB graphics, FireWire a or USB 2.0
2
2
®
®
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
microscope cameras
ProgRes® CCD Research Microscope Cameras
ProgRes® Digital Microscope Cameras (Continued)
Discover Highest Image Quality
The ProgRes® CCD Research Camera Range:
• ProgRes® CF
• ProgRes® CFcool
• ProgRes® CFscan
• ProgRes® C14plus
• ProgRes® M
• ProgRes® MFcool
• ProgRes® MFscan
Benefits:
• Perfect, reproducible color reproduction
• Outstanding image quality
• High sensitivity combined with a broad
dynamic range
• Highest resolution & fast live image
ProgRes® CCD Research Cameras
All cameras of the ProgRes® CCD Research range have been optimized for
applications requiring exacting capabilities. These cameras are
particularly well suited for acquiring brilliant images when working with
specimens under low-light conditions. Smooth operation is facilitated by
sensitive CCD sensors, optionally available with cooling, that offer high
frame rates and abroad dynamic range. Sophisticated Microscanning
Technology provided in the scanning ProgRes® cameras allows for
capturing images of up to 12.5 megapixels, even in true color.
Fields of Application
Image analysis, documentation and archiving in micro- and macroscopy in
the fields of:
• Fluorescence Microscopy
• Phase Contrast Microscopy
• Macroscopy
• Life Science, Diagnostics
• Quality Control
• Pathology and Cell Biology
ProgRes® Camera Type
CF / MF
CFcool / MFcool
CFscan / MFscan / C14plus
Image Sensor
2/3" CCD progress. scan
2/3" CCD progress. scan
2/3" CCD progress. scan
Color / Monochrome
Color / Monochrome
Color / Monochrome
Color / Monochrome
Sensor Resolution [max]
1360 x 1024 pixel [1.4 Mpix]
1360 x 1024 pixel [1.4 Mpix]
1360 x 1024 pixel [1.4 - 12.5 Mpix]
Sensor Size [H x V]
8.8 x 6.6 mm
8.8 x 6.6 mm
36.07 x 24.05 mm
“35 mm format”
Pixel Size
6.45 µm²
6.45 µm²
6.45 µm²
A / D Conversion
12 bit
14 bit
14 bit
Pixel Clock
12 MHz | 24.5 MHz
12 MHz | 24.5 MHz
12 MHz | 24.5 MHz
Dynamic Range
65 - 67 dB
67 - 69 dB
67 - 69 dB
Exposure Times
200 µs - 180 s
200 µs - 300 s
200 µs - 600 s [C14plus]
Analog Gain
1x - 8x
1x - 8x
1x - 8x
Max. Frame Rate [image size]
15 fps [1360 x 1024 pixel]
13 fps [1360 x 1024 pixel]
13 fps [1360 x 1024 pixel]
Image Resolution Binning:
2x - 8x
2x - 5x
2x - 5x
Microscan
No
No
4080 x 3072, 2740 x 2048
True Color
No
No
Yes [C14plus]
Cooling
No
Yes
Yes
Digital Interface
USB 2.0 / FireWire A
FireWire A
FireWire A
Optical Connection
C-Mount (0.5× TV pref.) C-Mount (0.63× TV pref.)
Trigger In / Out
Synchronization with external devices; configurable via control software
Voltage Supply
USB / FireWire Powered
FireWire Powered
FireWire Powered
Power Consumption
2.5 W | 5 W [FireWire]
8W
8W
Ambient Conditions
Temperature: 0°C - +35°C / Humidity: 5% - 80%, not condensing
Stock Conditions
Temperature: -20°C - +70°C
Dimensions [L x W x H]
89 x 84 x 93 mm (3.5 x 3.3 x 3.7 in) [USB], 145 x 93 x 123 mm (5.7 x 3.7 x 4.8 in) [FireWire]
Weight
Approx. 700 / 800 g (1.5 /1.8 lbs)
Capture Software
ProgRes® CapturePro PC / MAC (TWAIN for PC only); ProgRes® SDK
External Camera Driver
Available at: www.progres-camera.com
Hardware Requirements
PC: MS WIN 2000 / XP / Vista | Mac: OS X 10.4 or higher, 3 GHz CPU, 1 GB RAM, 64 MB graphics, FireWire a or USB 2.0
Approx. 800 g (1.8 lbs)
Microscopy
Specifications
microscope cameras
• Forensics
Approx. 800 g (1.8 lbs)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
347
microscope cameras
NEW ProgRes® Digital Microscope Cameras
(Continued)
Order #
Model
Product
W4 64-1778
CT3 USB
ProgRes® CT3 - USB version - 1/2" 3.15 mega pixel CMOS camera, 2048 x 1536 pixel
W4 64-1779
CT3 FireWire
ProgRes® CT3 - IEEE1394 a version - 1/2" 3.15 mega pixel CMOS camera, 2048 x 1536 pixel FireWire version
W4 64-1780
CT5-C
ProgRes® CT5 - color version - 1/2.5" 5 mega pixel CMOS camera, 2592 x 1944 pixel USB2.0
W4 64-1781
CT5-M
ProgRes® CT5 - monochrome version - 1/2.5" 5 mega pixel CMOS camera, 2592 x 1944 pixel USB2.0
W4 64-1782
C3
ProgRes® C3 - 1/1.8" 3.3 mega pixel CCD camera, 2080 x 1542 pixel
W4 64-1783
C3 cool
ProgRes® C3 - version with cooling - 1/1.8" 3.3 mega pixel CCD camera, 2080 x 1542 pixel
W4 64-1784
C3 USB
ProgRes® C3 USB (without cooling) - 1/1.8" 3.3 mega pixel CCD camera, 2080 x 1542 pixel
W4 64-1785
C5
ProgRes® C5 - 2/3" 5.02 mega pixel CCD camera, 2580 x 1944 pixel
W4 64-1786
C5-C
ProgRes® C5 - version with cooling - 2/3" 5.02 mega pixel CCD camera, 2580 x 1944 pixel
W4 64-1787
C5 USB
ProgRes® C5 USB (without cooling) - 2/3" 5.02 mega pixel CCD camera, 2580 x 1944 pixel
W4 64-1788
C7
ProgRes® C7 - 1/2.5" 7.1 mega pixel CCD camera, 3082 x 2304 pixel
W4 64-1789
CF USB
ProgRes® CF - USB version - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel color CCD camera, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1790
CF FireWire
ProgRes® CF - FireWire version - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel color CCD camera, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1791
CF cool
ProgRes® CFcool - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel color CCD camera, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1792
CF scan
ProgRes® Cfscan - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel color CCD camera, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1793
C14 plus
ProgRes® C14plus - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel color CCD camera, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1795
MF USB
ProgRes® MF - USB version - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel CCD camera - monochrome, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1796
MF FireWire
ProgRes® MF - IEEE1394 a FireWire version - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel CCD camera
- monochrome, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1797
MF cool
ProgRes® MFcool - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel CCD camera - monochrome, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1798
MF scan
ProgRes® MFscan - 2/3" 1.4 mega pixel CCD camera - monochrome, 1360 x 1024 pixel
W4 64-1800
OHCI PCI Host Adapter Fireboard blue for PC operation
W4 64-1801
Adapter-Set for Notebook operation (includes 4pin-6pin FireWire cable & power supply)
product
Microscopy
348
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
laser systems
NEW XYClone Laser System*
XYClone Software Features:
• Laser Panel: Adjustable laser power (mW) and pulse time (µs). The size
of the ablated area is controlled by varying the laser pulse time and the
laser power.
• Target Options: Isotherm Rings, Circle or Arrow targets. The patented
Isotherm Rings are used to preview heat generation based on the
selected laser power and pulse times selected.
The XYClone delivers a highly focused laser beam to the targeted area
permiting non-contact ablation of targeted membranes or structures. The
XYClone laser module consists of a high power, Class 1, 1450 nm infrared
laser integrated with a specially designed 40x or 20x objective that
functions in both visible and near infrared wavelengths. Compatible with
most inverted microscopes, the XYClone laser attaches to the turret just
like a typical objective and allows full use of all the microscope’s
standard features, such as fluorescence and Hoffman imaging. In
addition, the laser is factory-aligned and locked in place to ensure safe
ablation while minimizing service. The XYClone system may be configured
for use on either a desktop or laptop computer. Dual systems with both
40x and 20x laser modules are also available.
Why use the XYClone:
• Increase productivity and efficiency
• Easy to learn and use
• Video Recording: One touch video recording allows storage of .avi
files. Record in real-time or time-lapse mode.
• Measurement Tool Box and Documentation: Allows measurements
of various cell characteristics with automatic calculation of means and
standard deviations.
• Image Toolbox: Add freehand text, drawings, and measures to any
captured image.
automatically with
• Auto-labeling: Captured images may be labeled
user-defined input. Multiple labels may be stored and enabled.
• Scale Bar: Visible on the live image, the scale bar is saved on captured
images and videos.
• Report Generation: Create comprehensive reports combining general
information, measurements, and pre- and post-treatment images.
Options
XYClone RED-i Target Locator
Visible through the microscope eyepieces, the RED-i LED target locator
speeds workflow by allowing you to position the cell under the laser
beam without looking at the monitor.
XYClone Staccato
Staccato software allows rapid, multi-pulse firing for near-continuous
application of laser to the sample.
Laser Control Panel
• Eliminates need for sharp micropipettes
The XYClone laser control panel optimizes use of the laser with other
imaging systems, such as the Oosight™ from CRi. A standalone laser
control panel is configured to work side by side with the imaging
software and installed camera.
• No expensive needles or pipettes required
Footswitch
• Micromanipulators not needed for operation
An optional foot switch may be used to fire the laser, to allow hands-free
laser control. A double footswitch is also available for working in dual
laser mode.
• Mercury-free system
• Xenogenic-free process
• May be used with fluorescence
• Compatible with Oosight™ imaging system from CRi
laser systems
About the XYClone Laser System
• Image Capture Controls: Images may be stored manually or
automatically upon laser firing. You may also choose to save the
graphic image overlays within the image.
Microscopy
Applications
• Blastocyst and 8-cell Injections
• Inner Cell Mass Isolation
• Somatic Cell Nuclear Transfer
• Embryo Biopsy
• Laser-Assisted IVF
• Laser-Assisted Hatching
• Developmental Biology
• Cell Culture Maintenance
• Portable between labs - great for field work
* XYClone is for non-clinical research use only in USA. hESC research using the XYClone
should be conducted in accordance with any applicable Federal, State or local laws and
regulations.
Please Note: The XYClone™ is for use ONLY with ANIMAL and STEM CELL APPLICATIONS.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
349
laser systems
NEW XYClone Laser System (continued)
Specifications
Laser:
Type
Power
Laser Pulse Length
Laser Power
Laser Mode
Firing
Target Marker
Optional
Crosshairs
Laser Alignment
Target
Safety
1480 nm, Infrared Solid State Diode
300 mW @ focus (Class I)
Adjustable from 1 microsecond to 3000 microseconds, slider resolution - 1, 10, and 100 microsecond intervals
Adjustable from 1% to 100%
Single mode standard, Double Mode
By mouse (Optional foot switch firing)
Circle or arrow, adjustable “Blink Time” after firing; Isotherm Rings, showing peak temps and hole size.
Select which rings to display;
RED-i LED target locator
Activation, size and color set by user (used for positioning embryo)
Aligned and locked at factory. No on-site physical laser alignment required
Adjust target alignment on-screen
Class I Laser: Laser pulse and energy cannot exceed Class I limits.
Objective:
Standard
Scale Calibration
Scale Bar
40x or 20x, 0.60 N.A., I.R. (High transmission in both the visible and near-infrared, long working distance)
Performed interactively on-screen; Calibrate and save multiple objectives
Scale bar graphic overlay automatically adjusts based on calibrated objective; May be saved with images/video.
Video:
Camera
Image Area
Zoom
Illumination
Double Validation Panel:
Image Capture and Storage Utility:
High resolution analog or digital color
NTSC: 640 x 480 pixels: Digital: 1280 x 1024 pixels
2x, 4x, and 8x with user defined image panning
Microscope, image on screen
Set two separate power and pulse length combinations
Capture and store unlimited images. Images stored in user-selected JPG, BMP, or TIF format.
Capture unlimited thumbnail images and select which to save. Automatic image capture on laser fire. Manual or
automatic file naming. Images may be saved with graphic overlay.
laser systems
Microscopy
Image Annotation Tools:
Unlimited automatic image labels may be stored and enabled. Freehand text, circles, rectangles, lines,
and image measurements may be added to captured images.
Video Capture:
Capture and store real time and time lapse video in .avi format. Ability to set maximum recording length.
Manual and automatic naming options. Open and play saved videos within program.
Measurement Toolbox:
Tools allow measurement of various embryo parameters on captured images. Each measure visible as graphic overlay,
including length in micron.
Zona: 5 zona thickness measurements; Mean & Standard Deviation
Embryo: 2 diameter measurements; Mean & Standard Deviation; Blastomere count.
Pronuclei: 2 diameter measurements for two separate pronuclei; Mean for each pronuclei
Drill: 5 hole size measurements; Mean & Standard Deviation
Ruler: 5 user-defined measurements Mean & Standard Deviation
Reports and Output:
Data Input: Data from keyboard, Data from measurements, ASCII Import critical fields
Report: Ova/embryo information, procedure/protocol information, choice of 2 images plus evaluation data or 4 images
Output: Printout of report, Report stored in JPG format, ASCII output of all numerical and alphanumeric fields in
TXT & MER formats
Dimensions H x W x D in. (mm) / lb (kg)
XYClone Module
XYClone Controller
Desktop Computer
Monitor
Laptop Compute
1.65 (42) x 1.1 (28) x 2.1 (54) / 0.5 (0.22)
3.8 (95) x 2.5 (63.5) x 1.8 (46) / 1.0 (0.45)
16.1 (408) x 7.4 (187) x 17 (433) / 26.5 (12)
16.8 (427) x 17.5 (445) x 7.9 (198) / 12.6 (5.7)
1.48 (37.5) x 13.99 (355) x 10.24 (27) / 6.36 (2.89)
Electrical
Input Voltage
Power
Line Frequency
Desktop: 100/240 VAC, Monitor: 110-240 VAC, Laptop: 100-240 VAC
Desktop: 300 W, Monitor: 30 W, Laptop: 90W
Desktop: 50/60 Hz, Monitor: 50/60 Hz, Laptop: 50/60 Hz
XYClone Computer Specifications (subject to change without notice)
Type
O.S.
CPU
Memory
Drives
Display
Ports
Network
350
Desktop
Windows XP Pro
Pentium Dual Core 2.7 GHz
2 GB
250 GB HD, 16x DVD-RW
20" flat panel, UXGA
Serial, Parallel, USB 2.0, PS/2
10/100/1000 Mps Ethernet
Laptop
Windows XP Pro
Pentium M or Dual Core 2 GHz
512 RAMI GB
250 GB HD, 16x DVD-RW
5.4" (typical), WXGA
Serial, Parallel, USB 2.0, VGA
10/100/1000 Mps Ethernet, Wireless Network (802.11bg)
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
laser systems
NEW XYClone Laser System (continued)
Order #
Product
XYClone Desktop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1870
Includes 40x APO II Objective and analog camera
W4 64-1871
Includes 40x APO I Objective and analog camera
W4 64-1872
Includes 40x APO II Objective and digital camera
W4 64-1873
Includes 40x APO I Objective and digital camera
Includes 40x APO II Objective and analog camera
W4 64-1875
Includes 40x APO I Objective and analog camera
W4 64-1876
Includes 40x APO II Objective and digital camera
W4 64-1877
Includes 40x APO I Objective and digital camera
XYClone RED-i Desktop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1878
Includes 40x APO II Objective and analog camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1879
Includes 40x APO I Objective, analog camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1880
Includes 40x APO II Objective and digital camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1881
Includes 40x APO I Objective and digital camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1882
Includes 40x APO II Objective and analog camera, and RED-i target locator
XYClone Laptop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1874
Includes 40x APO II Objective and analog camerA
W4 64-1875
Includes 40x APO I Objective and analog camera
W4 64-1876
Includes 40x APO II Objective and digital camera
W4 64-1877
Includes 40x APO I Objective and digital camera
Microscopy
W4 64-1874
laser systems
XYClone Laptop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
XYClone RED-i Desktop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1878
Includes 40x APO II Objective and analog camera, and RED-i target locatoR
W4 64-1879
Includes 40x APO I Objective, analog camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1880
Includes 40x APO II Objective and digital camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1881
Includes 40x APO I Objective and digital camera, and RED-i target locator
XYClone RED-i Laptop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1882
Includes 40x APO II Objective and analog camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1883
Includes 40x APO I Objective and analog camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1884
Includes 40x APO II Objective and digital camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1885
Includes 40x APO I Objective and digital camera, and RED-i target locator
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
351
laser system
NEW XYClone Laser System (continued)
Order #
Product
XYClone Desktop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1886
Includes 20x Leica Objective and analog camera
W4 64-1887
Includes 20x Leica Objective and digital camera
XYClone Laptop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1888
Includes 20x Leica Objective and analog camera
W4 64-1889
Includes 20x Leica Objective and digital camera
XYClone Desktop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1890
Includes 20x Leica Objective and analog camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1891
Includes 20x Leica Objective and digital camera, and RED-i target locator
XYClone Laptop System for laser ablation of oocyte membranes, embryo membranes and ICM excision
W4 64-1892
Includes 20x Leica Objective and analog camera, and RED-i target locator
W4 64-1893
Includes 20x Leica Objective and digital camera, and RED-i target locator
Accessories
laser systems
Microscopy
352
W4 64-1894
Staccato software enables rapid multi-pulse and standard single pulse laser firing.
Requires XYClone version 5.2 or higher.
W4 64-1895
20x Laser added onto a 40x XYClone System to create a dual laser system
W4 64-1896
20x Laser added onto a 40x XYClone System to create a dual laser system - for previously installed laser systems
W4 64-1897
40x Laser added onto a 20x XYClone System to create a dual laser system
W4 64-1898
40x Laser added onto a 20x XYClone System to create a dual laser system - for previously installed laser systems
W4 64-1899
20x Laser added onto a 40x XYClone System to create a dual laser system with RED-i target locator
W4 64-1900
20x Laser added onto a 40x XYClone System to create a dual laser system with RED-i target locator
-for previously installed laser systems
W4 64-1901
40x Laser added onto a 20x XYClone System to create a dual laser system with RED-i target locator
W4 64-1902
40x Laser added onto a 20x XYClone System to create a dual laser system with RED-i target locator
- for previously installed laser systems"
W4 64-1903
CIVA software with color anaolg camera. Stand alone imaging software based on imaging, video, measurement and
reporting functions of the laser software. Includes analog color camera.
W4 64-1904
CIVA software with color anaolg camera and computer. Stand alone imaging software based on imaging, video,
measurement and reporting functions of the laser software. Includes analog color camera and computer.
W4 64-1905
Remote Foot Switch for hands-free laser firing. Includes USB interface #W4 30-1205
W4 64-1906
Remote Foot Switch for hands-free laser firing in Double Validation Mode. Includes USB Port #W4 30-1205
W4 64-1907
Analog color camera includes video capture device and power supply
W4 64-1908
Color digital camera - 1280 x 1024, High resolution, USB 2.0 Replaces standard color analog camera
Upgrades
W4 64-1909
40x RED-i target locator upgrade. Upgrade after purchase of a XYClone System.
Requires return of original laser prior to upgrade.
W4 64-1910
20x RED-i target locator upgrade. Upgrade after purchase of a XYClone System.
Requires return of original laser prior to upgrade.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
illuminators
Intralux® 5100
High Intensity Cold Halogen Light Source
Recessed handle for
portability
Low noise
and
vibration
free fan
Filter
insertion for
blue, red,
green,
yellow and
daylight
filters
•
•
•
•
•
•
Average Lamp Life (calculated value, in continuous operation at line voltage
230V / 121V / 100V):
110% Intensity
100 hours
100% Intensity
200 hours
90% Intensity
520 hours
80% Intensity
1700 hours
75% Intensity
3600 hours
Color Temperature at
110% Intensity
3433K
Illumination Intensity at 12.3 M Lux
110% Voltage at Lightguide
Input (DIN 58141-10)
Superior
light
intensity
8-step
switch for
electrical
light
intensity
adjustment
from 75% to
110%
Specifications
No light
leakage at
the work
station
Made in the USA
Compatible with all Volpi Fiber Optic Components
Ergonomic design with small footprint
Quick bulb replacement, reducing downtime
Solid metal housing, designed for industrial use
Certified for electronic and mechanical safety
150 watt cold light source with superior
illumination intensity and long lamp life
Maximum Illuminated
Light Guide-Ø
13 mm
Mechanical Light Guide
Connector Ø
15 mm
Light Adjustment
electrical, 8-step switch 75 to 110% Crescent shaped
diaphragm (Volpi Patent) 16-steps
Halogen Reflector Lamp
EKE 21 V/150 W
Line Voltages ±10%
230 V, 50 Hz or 121 V, 60 Hz or 100 V, 60 Hz
Power Consumption
190 W
Protection Class
1
Weight
4.6 kg (10 lbs)
Housing
Metal, powder coated, color RAL 9002
Approvals
UL61010-1, CAN/CSA 61010-1,CE/Product Safety :
IEC/EN 61010-1:2001 EMC: Emission: IEC/CISPR 11,
Class B/Immunity: IEC 61000-4-2 to 6 and 11
Manufactured in U.S.A.
Order #
Product
W4 72-6195 Intralux® 5100 Light Source, USA, 121V, 60Hz
W4 72-6196 Intralux® 5100 Light Source, EURO, 230V, 50Hz
illuminators
Quick lamp exchange
(snap lock)
W4 72-6198 Intralux® 5100 Light Source, CH, 230V, 50Hz
W4 72-6197 Intralux® 5100 Light Source, JAP, 100V, 60Hz
Accessories and Spares
W4 72-0227 Halogen Spare Lamp EKE 21V/150W
W4 72-0219 Blank Filter Holder for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Microscopy
Crescent
shaped
diaphragm for
brightness
adjustment
(constant
color
temperature
and light
emitting angle:
Volpi Patent)
W4 72-0220 Blue Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Intralux® light sources have represented the best in Fiber Optic Cold Light
Illumination the world for over 25 years. They provide reliable,
dependable, high-intensity cold halogen light for use with all Volpi fiber
optic components in microscopy applications.
The Intralux Series is equipped with the most advanced features and
highest quality components available. It includes InfraRed Reflecting
Filters to ensure the coldest light possible and the unique patented
Crescent Shaped Diaphragm, which provides constant color temperature
and light emitting angle, and continuous intensity adjustment.
W4 72-0221 Red Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
W4 72-0222 Green Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
W4 72-0223 Yellow Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
W4 72-0224 Daylight Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
W4 72-0310 Set of Filters
Fiber optic components consist of:
• Ringlights
• Goosenecks (sliding Sleeve: Volpi Patent)
• Flexible Light Guides
• Backlights
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
353
V-Lux 1000 and NCL-150
illuminators
Fiber Optic Cold Light Sources
V-Lux 1000
Made in the USA
V-Lux 1000 Cold
Light Source
NCL 150 Cold
Light Source
• For Microscope
Illumination
• Constant color
temperature and light
emitting angle
• Continuous intensity
adjustment
•
•
• Low-cost alternative to the Intralux series
• Use with fiber optic ringlights, goosenecks, and
flexible light guides
The V-Lux 1000 is a low-cost quality fiber optic cold light source featuring
many high-end features such as compact design, constant color temperature,
long lamp life and low noise/vibration. It is ideal for any microscopy
applications. The V-Lux 1000 will provide reliable, dependable, high-intensity
cold halogen light for use with all Volpi fiber optic components in microscopy
applications. Although it is factory equipped with DDL Lamps, EKE bulbs may
be easily substituted for slightly more light output. Has integrated resettable
fuse transformer. This unit has a fixed power cord.
Specifications
20V/150W
Constant color
temperature
High/Low setings
Filter shot
•
•
• Use of DDL or EKE bulbs
• Continuous intensity adjustment brightness
• Long lamp life
• Low noise/vibration
Specifications
Rated Lamp Life
DDL 400/1400 hrs*, EKE 100/900 hrs*
Constant Color Temperature
DDL 3280°K/3140°K, EKE 3310°K/3120°K
Light Adjustment
Crescent shaped diaphragm
High/Low Settings
25 dB noise level
Filter Slot
98° F Housing temperature
Lamp
DDL-20V/150W or EKE-21V/150W
Dimensions, H x W x D
10.5 x 21.9 x 21.9 cm (4.125 x 8.625 x 8.625 in)
Weight
* Average of continuous operation,
Manufactured in U.S.A.
4.5 kg (10 lb)
illuminators
Microscopy
Uniformly Illuminated Light
Guide Diameter
13 mm
Rated Lamp Life
DDL 800 hrs*, EKE 350 hrs*
Order #
Constant Color Temperature
DDL 3120°K, EKE 3190°K
Light Adjustment
Crescent shaped diaphragm
W4 72-0311 NCL 150, 120V USA/Canada
W4 72-0312 NCL 150, 230V Euro
Lamp
DDL-20V/150W or EKE-21V/150W
Accessories and Spares
Dimensions, H x W x D
9.5 x 17.1 x 21.0 cm (3.75 x 6.75 x 8.25 in)
Weight
* Average of continuous operation,
Manufactured in U.S.A.
4.5 kg (9.92 lb)
Product
W4 72-0226 DDL Lamp, 20V/150W
W4 72-0227 Halogen Spare Lamp, EKE Lamp, 21V/150W
W4 72-0220 Blue Filter
W4 72-0221 Red Filter
Order #
Product
W4 72-0222 Green Filter
W4 72-0215
W4 72-0216
W4 72-0217
W4 72-0218
W4 72-0231
W4 72-0232
V-Lux 1000, 120 V, USA/Canada
V-Lux 1000, 230 V*
V-Lux 1000, 230 V**
V-Lux 1000, 230 V***
V-Lux 1000, 230 V****
V-Lux 1000, 230 V*****
W4 72-0223 Yellow Filter
Accessories and Spares
W4 72-0227
W4 72-0219
W4 72-0220
W4 72-0221
W4 72-0222
W4 72-0223
W4 72-0224
W4 72-0310
Halogen Spare Lamp EKE 21V/150W
Blank Filter Holder for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Blue Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Red Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Green Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Yellow Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Daylight Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Set of Filters
W4 72-0224 Daylight Filter
W4 72-0238 Standard/Compact Ringlight
W4 72-0262 Ringpolarizer Set
W4 72-0264 Diffuser
W4 72-0267 Bifurcated Gooseneck, 4.7 mm Ø
W4 72-0266 Bifurcated Gooseneck, 5.4 mm Ø
W4 72-0329 Incident Gooseneck
W4 72-0269 Focusing Lens
W4 72-0273 Polarizing Cap for p/n W4 72-0270
W4 72-0342 Backlight, 2"x 2"
W4 72-0287 Single Light Guide 10 mm
All volpi light sources are compatible with all volpi fiber optics.
*
Argentina/Austria/Belgium/Brazil/China/Denmark/Finland/France/Germany/
Indonesia/Netherlands/Norway/Sweden/Switzerland/Thailand/Vietnam
**
Australia/New Zealand/Fiji
***
UK
**** South Africa
***** Ireland/Italy
354
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
IntraLED 2020 and Filters
illuminators
Fiber Optic Cold Light Sources
IntraLED 2020
This high power LED light source
represents a viable alternative to
halogen light sources. It achieves
its high light yield of more than 6
MLux at a total power
consumption of just 15W. With a
color temperature of 6500K, the
IntraLED 2020 emits a very white
light that is far superior to halogen lamps. The illumination intensity is
controlled manually using keys on the front panel or digitally via an RS
232 interface.
Optical Characteristics:
Light Source
High Power LED White CIE 1931
Illumination Intensity
>6,000,000 Lux
Efficiency
>440,000 Lux/W
Max. Optical Efficiency
65lm/W
Aperture (Viewing Angle a/2)
10°
Color Temperature Typical
6500K
Color Reproduction Index
80
Degradation Period of LEDs
>50,000h1)
Optical Output
<10mm (2/5 inch)
Regulation of emittance
on Vs area illuminated1)
Constant @ Vs =12V ±10% and
T = 10°C to 40°C
LED Radiation Class
1M LED Product
• Blue Filters enhance red and yellow objects and
lighten blue and green objects
• Red Filters will darken blue and green objects
and are useful for black and white applications
• Green Filters increase contrast for blue and red
objects and brighten yellow and green objects
• Yellow Filters of specific band widths may be
used as a safe light when working with
photosensitive materials
• Daylight Conversion Filters increase the Kelvin
Temperature of the halogen light to 5500°K,
which is daylight. Daylight Filters reduce glare
from highly reflective material such as muscle
tissue and metals
Electrical Characteristics:
Supply Voltage Vs
12V DC
Current Consumption
Approximately 1.250mA
Communication
RS 232
Connector
M8 Male; 4 Poles2)
Mechanical Characteristics:
Dimension
89mm x 84mm x 159mm
(including connectors)
Enclosure
Aluminum body, anodized
Light Source Filters provide contrast enhancement. When the composition
of an object is made of two or more colors, a filter may be used to darken
the color that is most important and, therefore, be able to observe it
better. When the composition of an object is pale, a filter of the opposite
or complementary color may enhance the detail. Specifically, when the
composition of the object is highly dense and color saturated, a filter of
the same color will most likely enhance the detail on the object. Custom
filters of a specific band width are also available upon request.
Forced Cooling, Fan Noise
39dB(A)
Enclosure Rating
IP 20
Order #
Adapter
15mm standard Volpi ferrule
W4 72-0219 Blank Filter Holder for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Weight
Approximately 1.1kg
W4 72-0220 Blue Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
illuminators
Specifications
Light Source Filters
Microscopy
The IntraLED 2020 is suitable for clean room applications and outperforms
halogen light sources with respect to bulb life and efficiency.
Product
W4 72-0221 Red Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Ambient Conditions:
Ambient Temperature
Operation: 0°C to 40°C
Storage: 0°C to 50°C
W4 72-0222 Green Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Humidity
Maximum 95%, relative not
condensing
W4 72-0224 Daylight Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
Order #
Product
W4 72-0322
IntraLED 2020
W4 72-4667
IntraLED 2020 with Schott-Foster Receptacle
W4 72-0223 Yellow Filter for Intralux 5100/NCL-150
W4 72-0310 Set of Filters
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
355
illuminators
Light Source Spare Parts and Accessories
Spare Lamps and Lamp Socket
Made in the USA
Ring Light Adapters
Made in the USA
Spare Lamps and Power Cords
Ringlight Adapters
Order #
• Ringlight adapters available for all brand
microscopes
• Provide direct and indirect mounting
• Low-Cost
Product
W4 72-0227 EKE Spare Lamp for Intralux 5100
/V-Lux 1000/Intralux DC 1100 (21 V/150 W)
W4 72-0226 DDL Spare Lamp for Intralux 5100
/V-Lux 1000 (20 V/150 W)
W4 72-0356 Spare Lamp Socket-Round for Intralux 5100
/V-Lux 1000/Intralux DC 1100/NCL-150
W4 72-0348 Power Cord, United Kingdom
sed with Standard/Compact and 4-Point Standard Ringlights for
attachment to all brand microscopes. If your microscope is not listed here,
please contact customer service for assistance.
W4 72-0349 Power Cord, France
illuminators
W4 72-0350 Power Cord, Italy
W4 72-0351 Power Cord, Switzerland
W4 72-0352 Power Cord, Germany
W4 72-0353 Power Cord, The Netherlands
W4 72-0354 Power Cord, Spain/Portugal
Order #
Product
W4 72-0249 Ringlight Adapter for Leica Classic Stereo Zoom
1-5 without Attachment Lens
W4 72-0250 Ringlight Adapter for Leica New Family
SZ4/SZ6/Photo/Plus without Attachment Lens
Microscopy
W4 72-0305 Ringlight Adapter for Leica New Family
SZ4/SZ6/Photo/Plus with Attachment Lens
Note: All Volpi Light Sources are compatible with all Volpi Fiber
Optic Components.
W4 72-0251 Ringlight Adapter for Leica Stereo Zoom 7/GZ7
without Attachment Lens
W4 72-0252 Ringlight Adapter for Leica M3B/C/Z; Leica MZ6
Achromatic 0.32x/0.5x/0.63x/0.8x/1.0x
W4 72-0257 Ringlight Adapter for Olympus SZ/ without
Attachment Lens
W4 72-0258 Ringlight Adapter for Olympus SZH9/SZH12 and
Nikon SMZ Series without Attachment Lens
W4 72-4666 Ringlight Adapter for SZM 180 Stereo Zoom
Microscopes
356
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
illuminators
LED Ringlights
White LED Ringlights
White LED Ringlights
Twin Row Spot Focused LED Ringlight
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Twice as bright
• Available with white or yellow LEDs
• Applications:
- Scratch & Flaw
- General purpose illumination
- Inspection (yellow LED)
White Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are now available in a ringlight to
produce uniform, shadow-free illumination comparable to that of fiber
optic ringlights. This exciting new technology is available in 5500˚K
Temperature (Daylight) and 7800˚K Temperature for working distances of
30-150 mm. Metal housing design produces minimal heat for cool light
illumination. Powered with an 8W/24V DC power supply (included), these
ringlights offer flicker-free illumination. The most unique feature of these
White LEDs is by far their rated life of 7,000-10,000 hours. White LED
ringlights have the standard 66 mm inside diameter and are adaptable to
all microscopes and lenses through a series of available ringlight adapters.
This ringlight is supplied with slim line power supply
Order #
Product
W4 72-4656 Standard White LED Ringlight, 30-70 mm
Working Distance
W4 72-4657 Diffuse Standard White LED Ringlight, 30-90 mm
Working Distance
W4 72-4658 Spot/Focused White LED Ringlight, 70-160 mm
Working Distance
W4 72-4659 Daylight LED Ringlight-5500°K Temp - Short
Working Distance, 30-70 mm Working Distance
W4 72-4660 Daylight LED Ringlight-5500°K Temp - Long
Working Distance, 70-160 mm Working Distance
W4 72-4661 Rheostat Accessory for use with all LED Ringlights
W4 72-4662 Ring Polarizer Set with Glass Analyzer for all
LED Ringlights
W4 72-0321 Slim Line Power Supply, works with all
LED Ringlights
Uniform shadow-free illumination. LED light source with extremely stable
and homogeneous light output. Optimal working distance 3-6 inches.
Includes on/off switch and power supply.
Specifications
Illumination Type
High Intensity LED
White 7800K
Yellow 6400K
Expected Life
> 10,000 Hours*
Slim Line Power Supply
110V (included)
Maximum Voltage
24 Volt DC
Cable
1.5M
Wiring
Black = GND
White = +
Microscopy
Compact, Metal Design
Flicker-Free Light
7,000 to 10,000 LED life
7800˚K Temp
Working Distance Range of 30 to 150 mm
Adaptable to all microscopes
illuminators
Made in the USA with some components from Volpi AG
Black Anodized Aluminum Body
* Average of continuous operation
Order #
W4 72-0319
W4 72-0320
W4 72-0321
Product
Twin Row Spot
Focused LED
Ringlight White
Twin Row Spot
Focused LED
Ringlight Yellow
Slim Line Power
Supply (included)
Number
of LEDs
84
84
Power
Consumption
7.2W
7.2W
Mounting
Diameter
66 mm
66 mm
Working
Distance
75-150 mm
(3-6 inches)
75-150 mm
(3-6 inches)
Made in the USA with some components from Volpi AG
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
357
Fiber Optic Ringlights
illuminators
Standard Ringlight
•
•
•
•
Standard Ringlight
25 to 90 mm working distance
Uniform and shadow-free illumination
Full-circular
Adaptable to all microscope brands
Full circular glass fiber ringlight provides homogeneous, shadow-free
illumination for working distances of 25 to 90 mm. Inside diameter is
66 mm for mounting on all microscopes through a series of ringlight
adapters listed on 360.
Order #
Product
Made in the USA with some components from Volpi AG
W4 72-0238 Standard Ringlight with 750 mm (30 in)
flexible length
W4 72-0239 Standard Ringlight with 1200 mm (48 in)
flexible length
W4 72-0240 Standard Ringlight with 2400 mm (96 in)
flexible length
Compact Ringlight
•
•
•
•
Compact Ringlight
Compact design
15 to 70 mm working distances
Uniform and shadow-free illumination
Adaptable to all microscope brands
illuminators
Full circular glass fiber ringlight provides homogenous, shadow-free
illumination for working distances of 15 to 70 mm. Inside diameter is 66
mm for mounting on all microscopes through a series of ringlight adapters
listed on 360. Standard Flexible length is 750 mm (30 in). Longer lengths
available.
Microscopy
Order #
Product
Made in the USA with some components from Volpi AG
W4 72-0233 M10 Compact Ringlight
4-Point Standard Ringlight
4-Point Standard Ringlight
• Depth perception
• 70 to 100 mm working distance
• Adaptable to all microscope brands
Standard ringlight with four fiber points provides illumination with depth
perception for working distances of 70 to 100 mm. Inside diameter is 66
mm for mounting on all microscopes through a series of ringlight adapters
listed on page 360. Standard Flexible length is 750 mm (30 in). Longer
lengths available.
Order #
Product
W4 72-0248 4-Point Standard Ringlight
358
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
illuminators
Fiber Optic Ringlights (continued)
Mini Ringlight
•
•
•
•
•
Mini Ringlight
Small diameter
Full circular
5 to 175 mm working distances
Shadow-free
Direct mounting for 20 to 32 mm objectives
Small full circular glass fiber ringlight provides homogeneous, shadowfree illumination for working distances of 5 to 25 mm. Long Working
Distance version is available for distances of 25 to 175 mm. Can be used
for fiber optic illumination on Compound Microscope objectives. Mounting
diameter ranges from 20 to 32 mm with the presence of 3 mounting
screws without the need for adapters. Standard Flexible length is 900 mm
(40 in). Longer lengths available.
Order #
Made in the USA with some components from Volpi AG
Product
W4 72-0246 Short Working Distance Mini Ringlight
W4 72-0247 Long Working Distance Mini Ringlight
Large diameter
Full circular
50 to 120 mm working distance
Diffuse light
High intensity
Large full circular diameter glass fiber ringlight that provides homogenous,
shadow-free illumination for working distances of 50 to 120 mm. Large
diameter and shallow fiber angle produces wonderful darkfield effect on
large surface areas. Inside diameter is 150 mm and can be adapted to
SMD stations and stereomicroscope columns. Standard Flexible length is
480 mm (19 in) with longer lengths available on request.
Order #
illuminators
•
•
•
•
•
SMD/MAXI Ringlight
Made in the USA with some components from Volpi AG
Microscopy
SMD/MAXI Ringlight
Product
W4 72-0245 SMD/MAXI Ringlight
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
359
illuminators
Ringlights and Accessories
Ergo/Olympus SZ/SD Ringlight
• Ergonomic
• Long working distance starting at 100 mm
• Direct mounting to Olympus
Ergo/Olympus SZ/SD Ringlight
Tapered ringlight for direct mounting on Olympus SZ/SD Microscopes with
minimum loss of working distance. Flexible length exits at 45˚ angle
allowing maximum work space. Long Working distance starting at 100 mm
with long flexible lengths available. Adapter included.
Order #
Product
W4 72-0242 Ergo/Olympus SZ/SD Ringlight
Made in the USA
Accessories for Standard/Compact and
4-Point Ringlights
Diffuser
• Reduces or eliminates unwanted reflections
• Extends standard ringlight working distance range
• Used with standard, compact and 4-point
standard ringlights
Ring Polarizer Set
illuminators
Eliminates unwanted reflections of highly reflecting materials such as
tissue and metallic objects. Glass analyzer is used with plastic polarizer
for the best possible cross-polarization effect. Can be used with Standard,
Compact, and 4-Point Standard Ringlights.
Ring Polarizer Set
Made in the USA
Toric Lens
Extends the working distance of Standard and Compact Ringlights from 90
to 150 mm. Longer distance ringlights are also available as an alternative.
Microscopy
Diffuser
Reduces unwanted reflections of highly reflecting materials such as tissue
and metallic objects. Can be used with Standard, Compact, and 4-Point
Standard Ringlights.
Order #
Product
W4 72-0262 Ring Polarizer Set for Standard/Compact
Ringlights
W4 72-0265 Toric Lens for Standard/Compact Ringlights
W4 72-0264 Diffuser for Standard/Compact Ringlights
Note: All Volpi Light Sources are compatible with all Volpi Fiber
Optic Components.
360
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Gooseneck Light Guides
illuminators
Gooseneck Light Guides
Gooseneck light guides provide fiber optic incident illumination using
semi-obedient, self-supporting arms with no spring-back action. You can
position each arm independently and with the key system in place, there is
no rotation. Single Arm and bifurcated Goosenecks are available with
4.7 mm and 5.4 mm diameter.
Special Volpi Patent: Sliding Sleeve allows fiber bundles to move
independently of the outer tubing for minimal fiber breakage over time.
Gooseneck Arms are repairable. Light sources are sold separately.
Order #
Product
W4 72-0268* Single Arm Gooseneck Light Guide,
4.7 mm x 500 mm fiber diameter
W4 72-0309 Single Arm Gooseneck Light Guide,
5.4 mm x 500 mm
W4 72-0267 Bifurcated Gooseneck Light Guide,
4.7 mm x 500 mm fiber diameter (each arm)
W4 72-0266* Bifurcated Gooseneck Light Guide,
5.4 mm x 500 mm fiber diameter (each arm)
Gooseneck Accessories
Standard Focusing Lens: A spherical lens used to focus light to a
Focusing Lens with
Polarizing Cap
concentrated spot.
Polarizing Cap: Fits onto focusing lens.
Order #
Microscopy
Made in the USA
illuminators
* 20" long, Ferrule diameter = 10mm
Product
W4 72-0269* Standard Focusing Lens
W4 72-0304 Polarizing Cap for Standard Focusing Lens
For Modular Accessory System, see page 363
* Fits on 10mm Ferrule
Made in the USA
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
361
illuminators
Gooseneck Light Guides (continued)
Incident Gooseneck
Light Guides
Flexible Light
Guides
Made in the USA
Flexible Light Guides
Made in the USA
Incident Gooseneck Light Guides
• Bifurcated Gooseneck and flexible light
guide combination
• Attachable to columns of all brand microscopes
through available adapters
• Great flexibility in the placement of light source
• Available in different lengths
• Uses standard Gooseneck accessories
illuminators
This combination of a Semi-Obedient Bifurcated Gooseneck and a Flexible
Light Guide provides incident illumination. Fiber Optic Incident Goosenecks
attach to the columns of microscopes or other work station columns with
specialized adapters. Each arm can be positioned and adjusted
independently. The flexible length size can vary to allow the placement of
the light source away from the microscope and work station.
Microscopy
Utilizes standard Gooseneck accessories such as Focusing Lens
W4 72-0269, Polarizing Caps W4 72-0304 and Modular Accessory System
found on pages 361 and 363. Light sources are sold separately.
Order #
Product
W4 72-0329 Incident Gooseneck Light Guide,
4.7 mm fiber diameter (each arm), 75 cm (30 in)
W4 72-0330 Incident Gooseneck Light Guide,
4.7 mm fiber diameter (each arm), 100 cm (40 in)
W4 72-0331 Incident Gooseneck Light Guide,
4.7 mm fiber diameter (each arm), 150 cm (60 in)
W4 72-0333 Incident Gooseneck Light Guide Adapter
for 20 to 25 mm Round Columns
W4 72-0334 Incident Gooseneck Light Guide Adapter
for 32 mm Round Columns
W4 72-0335 Incident Gooseneck Light Guide Adapter
for Nikon SM5/6 and SMZ 6/10
W4 72-0336 Incident Gooseneck Light Guide Adapter
for Olympus SZX9/12
W4 72-0308 Incident Gooseneck Articulated Arm Support
Adapter for Leica G26, MS5, M26, M28, M212
362
•
•
•
•
•
Point illumination
Highly flexible
PVC metal tubing provides durability.
3 to 13 mm fiber diameters
Standard and custom lengths available
Highly flexible and durable light guides available in 3 to 13 mm of fiber
diameters and various standard and custom lengths. Outer tubing is
composed of PVC metal tubing to provide both flexibility and protection.
Standard single arm and twin arm versions available. Customized versions
are available upon request.
Flexible Light Guides
Fiber Diameter (mm)
3
5
Bushing Diameter
5
10
Single Arm Lengths
8
10
13
10*
13*
16*
50 cm W4 72-0283 W4 72-0287 W4 72-0291 W4 72-0295 W4 72-0299
(20 in)
100 cm W4 72-0284 W4 72-0288 W4 72-0292 W4 72-0296 W4 72-0300
(40 in)
150 cm W4 72-0285 W4 72-0289 W4 72-0293 W4 72-0297 W4 72-0301
(60 in)
200 cm W4 72-0286 W4 72-0290 W4 72-0294 W4 72-0298 W4 72-0302
(80 in)
* Does not fit standard focusing lense
Twin Arm Lengths
100 cm
(40 in)
–
W4 72-0313 W4 72-0316
–
–
150 cm
(60 in)
–
W4 72-0314 W4 72-0317
–
–
200 cm
(80 in)
–
W4 72-0315 W4 72-0318
–
–
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Light Guide Accessories
illuminators
Modular Accessory
System
Made in the USA
Modular Accessory System
• Fixed point illumination
• Accurate adjustment for quick, simple
and precise positioning
• Unrestricted movement – 220 mm radius of action
• Very durable
• Use with Goosenecks and up to 8 mm OD
Flexible Light Guides
• Allows combination of filters and other
accessories
• Very versatile
Articulating Support Arm provides unrestricted movement and accurate
fine adjustment for fixed point illumination. Adjustment is simple and
precise with 220 mm radius of action. Articulating Arms are available with
M6/M6 and M6/M8 thread ends. Flexible Light Guides can be attached
with small (9 to 12 mm OD) and large (11 to 16 mm OD) holders depending
on flexible light guide outer ferrule diameters.
Modular Holder has a 10 mm mounting diameter and attaches onto ends
of goosenecks and up to 8 mm OD flexible light guides. Modular
Accessory Holder and each of the Modular Accessories are threaded to
accept one another. Modular accessories include the Modular color filters,
Modular focusing lens, Modular diffuser, Modular polarizing filter, and
Modular iris diaphragm. One or all can be attached at any one time.
Custom filters are also available upon request.
3 Components
W4 72-0324
W4 72-0322
W4 72-0325 or W4 72-0326 depending on light grid brushing ø
Order #
Product
Microscopy
Articulating Arm with Heavy Steel Base
illuminators
Made in the USA
W4 72-0270 Modular Accessory Holder
W4 72-0271 Modular Focusing Lens
Order #
Product
W4 72-0272 Modular Iris Diaphragm
W4 72-0323 Articulated Support Arm, M6/M6 Thread
W4 72-0273 Modular Polarizing Filter
W4 72-0324 Heavy Steel Base for Articulated Support Arm
W4 72-0274 Modular Daylight Filter, plastic
W4 72-0325 Holder for Articulated Support Arm, ferrule
diameter 9 to 12 mm (0.35 to 0.47 in)
W4 72-0275 Modular Blue Filter, plastic
W4 72-0326 Holder for Articulated Support Arm, ferrule
diameter 11 to 16 mm (0.43 to 0.63 in)
W4 72-0277 Modular Green Filter, plastic
W4 72-0276 Modular Red Filter, plastic
W4 72-0278 Modular Yellow Filter, plastic
W4 72-0280 Modular Blank Filter, plastic
W4 72-0279 Modular Diffuser, plastic
Note: All Volpi Light Sources are compatible with all Volpi Fiber
Optic Components.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
363
Backlights and Base
illuminators
Glass Fiber Backlights
Bright/Darkfield Base
12.7 cm (5 in) Backlight
Made in the USA
Made in the USA
5 cm (2 in) Backlight
Made in the USA
Made in the USA
Brightfield/Darkfield Base
Made in the USA
7.6 cm (3 in) Backlight
Glass Light Fiber Backlights
• Homogeneous, diffuse backlight illumination
• Used in the image processing, brightfield
illumination on stereo microscopes, pattern
recognition of different transparencies, area
recognition of different colors, side illumination,
dimensional gauging, shape verification, etc.
illuminators
Glass Fiber Backlights provide homogeneous, diffuse illumination. Glass
fiber used is extremely durable and heat tolerant. Can be adapted to most
brand microscope bases.
Available in three sizes: 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in), 7.6 x 7.6 cm (3 x 3 in), and
12.7 x 12.7 cm (5 x 5 in). Additional specifications listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
Transmitted bright/darkfield illumination
Uses standard/compact ringlight illumination
Low cost alternative
Compact design
Adapts to all brand name microscopes
This is a low-cost, intense, contrast-rich, transmitted, light
Bright/Darkfield Base used with Standard or Compact Fiber Optic
Ringlights. It provides transmitted bright/darkfield illumination. Easily
accessible knob allows quick and easy change between brightfield and
darkfield. Adapts to all brand name microscopes.
Order #
Product
W4 72-0337 Bright/Darkfield Base
W4 72-0339 Polarizer to Base
W4 72-0340 Diaphragm to Objective, 0.5/0.63X
Microscopy
W4 72-0341 Diaphragm to Objective, 1.5/2.0X
Specifications
W4 72-0342
W4 72-0343
W4 72-0344
Product
2 inch Backlight
3 inch Backlight
5 inch Backlight
Homogeneous
Illumination Field
5 x 5 cm
(2 x 2 in)
7.6 x 7.6 cm
(3 x 3 in)
12.7 x 12.7 cm
(5 x 5 in)
Note: All Volpi Light Sources are compatible with all Volpi Fiber
Optic Components.
Dimensions, H x W x D 1.3 x 10.2 x 6.4 cm 2.3 x 17.2 x 12.1 cm 2.3 x 22.2 x 17.2 cm
(0.5 x 4.0 x 2.5 in) (0.9 x 6.75 x 4.75 in) (0.9 x 8.75 x 6.75 in)
Uniformity
±10%
±10%
±10%
Fixing Holes (4 each)
Diameter
6.3 mm (0.25 in)
6.3 mm (0.25 in)
6.3 mm (0.25 in)
Flexible Light Guide
(Met/PVC)
91.4 cm (36 in)
91.4 cm (36 in)
91.4 cm (36 in)
Light Source Adapter
Intralux Series
Intralux Series
Intralux Series
Order #
Product
W4 72-0342 Glass Fiber Backlight, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in)
W4 72-0343 Glass Fiber Backlight, 7.6 x 7.6 cm (3 x 3 in)
W4 72-0344 Glass Fiber Backlight, 12.7 x 12.7 cm (5 x 5 in)
364
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
accessories
Coverslips
Large selection of high quality coverslips stocked for immediate delivery
Now Available in #1.5 Thickness!
High quality Coverslips are essential for microscopy imaging. At high
resolutions (40X, 60X or 100X), choosing the correct coverslip is critical
for good performance. Warner has recently expanded its line of coverslips
to include German borosilicate glass at #1.5 thickness. Except CS-40R,
CS-30R and CS-24/60.
Stocked in depth in the sizes used with RC Series, Series 20 and the new
Series 40 chambers. Consult the chart to select the correct cover glass for
your chamber.
Order #
Model
Quantity
Dimension
Chamber Used With
CS-5R
100
5 mm D
Fits inside 96-well culture plate
W4 64-0701
CS-8R
100
8 mm D
Fits inside 24-well culture plate
W4 64-0702
CS-12R
100
12 mm D
RC-25, RC-48LP
W4 64-0703
CS-15R
100
15 mm D
RC-20, RC-20H, RC-25F, RC-37WC, RC-37FC
W4 64-0384
CS-18R
100
18 mm D
RC-37WC, RC-41LP, RC-43C
W4 64-0704
CS-22S
100
22 x 22 mm
RC-21B
W4 64-0705
CS-25R
100
25 mm D
RC-21BR, RC-21BRFS, RC-21BRW, RC-21BDW,
RC-40LP, RC-40HP, RC-43C, RC-46SNLP, RC-46SLP,
RC-47FSLP, RC-50
W4 64-1500
CS-40R
60
40 mm D
RC-30WA
W4 64-0706
CS-22/30
50
22 x 30 mm
RC-30, RC-30HV
W4 64-0707
CS-22/40
50
22 x 40 mm
RC-22, RC-22C, RC-24, RC-24E, RC-24N,
RC-26, RC-26G, RC-26GLP, RC-26GS, RC-30, RC-50
W4 64-0708
CS-22/50
50
22 x 50 mm
RC-26Z, JG-23N/HP, JG-23W/HP, JG-23W/LP
W4 64-0709
CS-24/50
50
24 x 50 mm
RC-27, RC-27L, RC-27N, RC-27NE, RC-28, RC-29
Microscopy
W4 64-0700
accessories
Coverslip Thickness #1: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Coverslip Thickness #1.5: 0.17 mm (0.0067 in.)
W4 64-0712
CS-12R15
100
12 mm D
RC-25, RC-48LP
W4 64-0713
CS-15R15
100
15 mm D
RC-20, RC-20H, RC-25F, RC-42LP, RC-37WC
W4 64-0714
CS-18R15
100
18 mm D
RC-37FC, RC-41LP, RC-43C
W4 64-0715
CS-25R15
100
25 mm D
RC-21BR, RC-21BRFS, RC-21BRW, RC-21BDW,
RC-40LP, RC-40HP, RC-43C, RC-46SNLP, RC-46SLP,
RC-47FSLP, RC-50
W4 64-1499
CS-30R
90
30 mm D
RC-30WA
W4 64-0716
CS-22/3015
50
22 x 30 mm
W4 64-0717
CS-22/4015
50
22 x 40 mm
RC-22, RC-22C, RC-24, RC-24E, RC-24N, RC-26,
RC-26G, RC-26GLP
24 x 60 mm
RC-10, RC-11, RC-13, RC-16, RC-27D, RC-27LD
Coverslip Thickness #2: 0.22 mm (0.0086 in.)
W4 64-0710
CS-24/60
40
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
365
Notes
microscopy
notes
Microscopy
366
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
biosensing
Page No.
Nitric Oxide
inNO-T Nitric Oxide Measurement System
368 - 371
Biostat
372
Nitrate Reductor
373
Dissolved Oxgyen Meter and Electrodes
Dissolved Oxgyen Meter and Electrodes
374
Respirometry Systems
HSE Oxystat 1000 System for Oxygen
Consumption Measurements
375 - 377
Dissolved Oxygen Measurement Systems,
Model 929 & 782
378
Dissolved Oxygen Respirometery Software
379
Microcathode Oxygen Electrode, Model 1302
380
Mitocell Miniature Respirometer, MT200 & MT200A 380
6-Electrode Respirometer, Model RC 650
381
Respiration Cells, RC 300 & RC 350
382
MicroCell, Model MC 100
382
Flow Cell, FC 100
383
General Electrode Holder, EH 100
383
Electrodes
pH Preamplifier
384
Combination pH Electrode for Micro Wells
384
Single pH Electrode in 25 Gauge Needle
385
Combination pH Electrode in 20 Gauge Needle
385
Combination pH Electrode in 18 Gauge SS Tube
385
Combination pH Electrode in 11 Gauge SS Tube
386
Combination Gastroesophageal pH Electrode
386
Flexible Combination pH Electrode for Flap Surgery 386
AMANI ‘Leak-Free’ Microcombination
pH Electrodes
387
Protein Resistant pH Electrodes
388
™
DURACAL pH and Redox Buffer Solutions
389
Leak-Free Reference Electrodes
390
Flexible Reference Electrode
390
Auto Chloridizer Model 863
391
Microelectrode Starter Kit
392
Ag-AgCl Electrodes
393
Disc Electrodes, Flat Tip Probes
and Reference Cells
394
Plugs, Jacks and Silver Wire
395
Nitric Oxide Measurement System,
see page 368
Dissolved Oxygen Meter
with Electrodes,
see page 374
Oxystat 1000,
see page 375
6-Channel Oxygen System,
see page 378
Micro-CO2 Electrode,
see page 384
Duracal Buffers,
see page 389
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
Biosensing
Section
367
inNO-T
nitric oxide
Nitric Oxide Measurement System
W4 69-3054 Dual Channel inNO-T System
W4 69-3050
1 Channel inNO-T System
nitric oxide
Biosensing
• Dual Channel System
• Uses ‘amiNO’ sensors which are up to 100 times
more sensitive than other sensors
• First available NO system to have temperature
compensation
• No base line drift due to temperature changes
• Combination NO meter and data acquisition
system
• User friendly recording, playback and analysis
software compatible with Windows 95/98,
2000, and XP
• Continuous recordings (over 1 month)
• Battery-powered benchtop/portable system
• 24 bit A/D converter
• System shipped complete with NO meter,
software, 2 types of NO sensors, and
calibration kit
Nitric Oxide Measurement System
The ‘inNO-T’ system is the most technologically
advanced nitric oxide electrochemical detection
system on the market today. It combines a nitric
oxide configured potentiostat and a sophisticated
software controlled data acquisition system in one
compact battery powered unit. When used with the
‘amiNO’ series of NO sensors, this unit provides an
NO detection sensitivity increase of up to 100 times
that of any other electrochemical detection system.
The battery powered design allows the unit to run
continuously for up to 5 years, making it ideal for any
electrically isolated and/or portable application.
The ‘inNO-T’ system is the first available nitric oxide
system to include temperature compensation which
further enhances the detection limits and data
reliability by eliminating temperature dependent
baseline drift. A temperature probe is supplied with
each system.
The inNO-T system's internal 24 bit analog to digital
converter and built in digital notch filtering allows for
accurate, noise free, detection of nitric oxide levels of
less than 0.01 nM. The 24 bit A/D technology also
gives the unit a dynamic range in excess of
16,000,000 to 1. Its sophisticated control and analysis
software can be linked to any computer system that
utilizes Windows™ 95/98, 2000 or NT via the ‘inNO’s’
internal RS-232 interface.
368
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
nitric oxide
inNO-T
Nitric Oxide Measurement System (continued)
Using state of the art combination NO sensor design, the ‘amiNO’
Series nitric oxide sensors increase the sensitivity of
electrochemical nitric oxide measurement, by up to 100 times that
of any existing electrochemical sensor on the market today.
amiNo sensors are the first NO sensors to break the 100 pA/nM
barrier. This higher sensitivity greatly reduces measurement errors
due to baseline drift associated with temperature changes.
Baseline drift has been a particular concern with older technology
sensors that not having the enhanced sensitivity characteristics of
the ‘amiNO’ sensors.
Additionally the new ‘amiNO’ series adds newly designed sensor
types for in vivo applications and large surfaces (cultured cells).
Customized sensors are available upon request to meet
specialized applications, call for details.
amiNO-7 Sensor
• 7 µm tip diameter
• Ideal for single cell measurements
• Metal alloy fiber
• Tip Volume ~ 500µl
amiNO-30 Sensor
• 30 µm tip diameter
• For space restricted measurements
• Metal alloy fiber
• Tip Volume ~ 10µl
amiNO-100 Sensor
• 100 µm tip diameter
• Extremely stable background
• Resists breakage
• To be used in restricted area and ‘in vivo’
measurements
• Very consistent & reproducible
• Tip Volume ~ 100µl
amiNO-600 Sensor
• 600 µm tip diameter
• Exceptional sensitivity and baseline stability
• Very rugged membrane, flexible body
• Very durable
• Tip Volume ~ 4µl
Biosensing
Warner Instruments offers 4 different Nitric Oxide Measurement
Systems. Each system includes either a 1-channel or 2-channel
inNO-T Temperature compensated meter, an amiNO-2000 sensor,
SensoReady Electrode Polorizer and a temperature probe (for a
complete listing of system components see chart on page 371).
Each system is offered in either 115 or 230 VAC.
W4 69-0008
nitric oxide
• All amiNO sensors are combination sensors,
no external reference electrode is required
• Mechanically rugged membrane
• All sensors covered with proprietary
triplecoat gas permeable membrane to
guarantee selectivity and very fast
response time
• All sensors completely shielded from
environmental/electrical noise
• All sensors work the ‘inNO-T’ meter as well
as many other currently available meters
• One calibration procedure, simple, easy, no
expensive chemicals
W4 69-0012
amiNO-2000 Sensor
• Flat 2 mm tip diameter
• Stainless steel/aluminum body
• Longest life NO electrode (user replaceable membranes)
• Tough enough for training new staff and students
• Used to measure high levels of NO as in drug
solutions and macrophages
• Tip Volume ~ 250µl
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
369
nitric oxide
inNO-T
Nitric Oxide Measurement System (continued)
W4 69-0016
‘SensoReady’
Electrode Polarizer
W4 69-0007
Specifications
amiNO-FLAT Sensor
Current Scale
±2,500,000.0 pA
• 'Chicken foot' design to increase contact area
Concentration Scale
±1,000,000.0 nM
• Designed specially for measuring NO released
from monolayer cultured cells and large flat tissues
Resolution
0.01 nM (0.1 pA)
Screen Meter
7.5 digit meter
• Rugged membrane
Recording Speed
1 to 1000 sec/div
• Highest sensitivity
Power
Replaceable battery
• Low background
Dimensions, H x W x D
76 x 229 x 203 mm (3 x 9 x 8 in)
Temperature Range
0° to 50°C, inNO-T only
Temperature Resolution
0.01°C, inNO-T only
Temperature Sensor
< 0.50 mm tip, 120 mm long, inNO-T only
Please refer to the guide below to help you select the best sensor
for your application. For additional assistance, please call Warner
Instruments Technical Support*
W4 69-0006
amiNO-IV Sensor
*The selection guide below is based on design, sensitivity and economy.
For example, amiNO-FLAT and amiNO-IV are the most sensitive but are also the
most expensive. The amiNO-600 is less sensitive but is more economical.
• 600 µm tip diameter
nitric oxide
Biosensing
370
• Very sharp metallic tip for insertion/penetration of
tissue, no extra needles or catheters are needed,
sensor is the needle
• Higher sensitivity, up to 100 times more sensitive
than other commercially available sensors
• Sub nano-molar detection limit
• Special membrane survives numerous insertions
• Very stable, low background current
• Tip Volume ~ 6µl
amiNO Sensor Selection Guide*
Application
First Choice(s)
Second Choice(s)
Measuring NO released from cells/large flat tissue
amiNO-FLAT
amiNO-600 or amiNO-IV
In vivo measurements and other insertion applications
amiNO-IV
amiNO-600
Measuring NO in small volumes or restricted space
amiNO-100
amiNO-7, amiNO-30 or amiNO-600
Measuring micro-molar levels of NO
amiNO-2000
amiNO-100 or amiNO-30
Following the decomposition of an NO producing compound
amiNO-600 or amiNO-100
amiNO-2000 or amiNO-IV
Measuring very low levels of NO (below 50 nM)
amiNO-600 or amiNO-IV
amiNO-100
Indirect measurement of Nitrate and Nitrite
amiNO-600, depending on expected level
amiNO-100 or amiNO-2000
Training new staff or students
amiNO-2000
amiNO-600
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
nitric oxide
inNO-T
Nitric Oxide Measurement System (continued)
amiNO Sensor Performance Comparison and Ordering Information
Order #
Qty.
Model
Size
Typical Sensitivity
Competitor
Typical Sensitivity
W4 69-0008
2
amiNO-7
7 µm
0.5-3 pA/nM (typical 1.5 pA/nM)
n/a
W4 69-0009
2
amiNO-30
30 µm
2-6 pA/nM (typical 4 pA/nM)
n/a
W4 69-0010
2
amiNO-100
100 µm
25 to 50 pA/nM (typical 35 pA/nM)
No Equivalent
W4 69-0011
2
amiNO-600
600 µm
150 to 250 pA/nM (typical 200 pA/nM)
No Equivalent
W4 69-0012
1
amiNO-2000
2 mm
Typical 1 pA/nM
Typical 1 pA/nM
W4 69-0006
2
amiNO-IV
600 µm
150 to 250 pA/nM (typical 200 pA/nM)
No Equivalent
W4 69-0007
1
amiNO-FLAT
See diagram
250 to 700 pA/nM (typical 400 pA/nM)
No Equivalent
Premium System #2
115 VAC, 230 VAC,
60 Hz
50 Hz
Premium System #3
115 VAC, 230 VAC,
60 Hz
50 Hz
Premium System #4
115 VAC, 230 VAC,
60 Hz
50 Hz
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Order #
System Components
W4 69-0012
amiNO-2000 Nitric
Oxide Sensor, 2 mm Tip
•
•
W4 69-0010
amiNO-100 Nitric Oxide
Sensor, 100 µm Tip,
pkg. of 2
•
•
W4 69-0011
amiNO-600 Nitric Oxide
Sensor, 600 µm Tip,
pkg. of 2
W4 69-0006
amiNO-IV Nitric Oxide
Sensor, InVivo 600 µm
Tip, pkg. of 2
W4 69-0007
amiNo-FLAT Nitric Oxide
Sensor, Flat 25 x 25 mm,
pkg. of 1
W4 69-0013
Electrolyte for W4 69-0012
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W4 69-0014
Replacement Membranes
for W4 69-0012, pkg. of 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W4 69-0037
Nitrite Standard, 50 ml
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W4 69-0038
Calibration Vials, pkg. of 5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W4 69-0016
SensoReady Electrode
Polarizer
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W4 69-0029
Adapter, LIMO Connector •
to amiNO Sensor Connector
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W4 72-0460
Spin Bar Magnetic Stir Bar, •
5 x 2 mm, pkg. of 5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W4 72-1972
Magnetic Stirrer, 115 VAC
W4 72-1973
Magnetic Stirrer, 230 VAC
•
W4 72-1922
Electrode Holder and Stand •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
W4 69-0052
Temperature Probe
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-Ch inNO System with
inNO-T Meter with Temp.
Compensation
W4 69-3050 W4 69-3051 W4 69-3052 W4 69-3053 W4 69-0048 W4 69-0049 W4 69-0050 W4 69-0051
2-Ch inNO System with
inNO-T Meter with Temp.
Compensation
W4 69-3054 W4 69-3055 W4 69-3056 W4 69-3057 W4 69-3058 W4 69-3059 W4 69-3060 W4 69-3061
•
•
•
•
•
•
Biosensing
Premium System #1
115 VAC, 230 VAC,
60 Hz
50 Hz
nitric oxide
inNO-T Nitric Oxide Measurement Systems, Sensors and Accessories
•
Systems
Note: inNO and inNO-T are battery operated. Voltage selection is for Magnetic Stirrer.
Call Harvard Apparatus Customer Service for Nitrate Reduction Products.
Warner Instruments • Phone (203) 776-0664 • Toll Free U.S. (800) 599-4203 • Fax (203) 776-1278 • www.warneronline.com
371
nitric oxide
NEW Biostat Multi-Channel Potentiostat
Data Acquisition Software
The software takes less than 5 minutes to load from the CD onto any
computer with the Windows® 2000 or later operating system. On-screen
menus and pop-ups make it easy to use. The software provides
comprehensive data analysis capability even while data is being collected.
Data is easily exported to allow analysis using other software applications.
Although configured for biosensing measurements, the BioStat system is
extremely versatile and can be used for any multi-channel, isolated data
acquisition, such as multielectrode electrophysiological recordings.
Specifications
Number of Channels
4
Electrode Configuration
2 or 3
Operational Modes
Amperometric, Voltammetric, Temperature
Input Signal Polarity
Bipolar
Input Signal Configuration
Single-ended
Range Settings:
For Amperometric Mode
BioStat Multi-Mode Potentiostat
• Four independent optically isolated channels
• Easy to use software Windows® 2000 or later
operating system
• Precise amperometric or voltammetric
measurements
• Rugged compact design
The BioStat is a software-driven, multi-mode potentiostat that can be used
for measurement of pH, reactive oxygen species, and nitric oxide.
nitric oxide
Biosensing
The BioStat System is designed to be used with a wide range of
electrochemical sensors and electrodes for measurement of reactive oxygen
species and biologically significant molecules. T